VIMY sects a 3 ΚΣ Ries δ ἦν ᾿ yc ihe Theologiad g δες PRINCETON, N. J. A ee of the four gospels in Greek ΝῊ ; ia - Β τ Flos = ΓΞ ᾿ : é ΝΙΝ Jigitized by the Internet Archive in 2009 https ://archive.org/details/narmonyof0Orobi τὰ φῆ A HARMONY OF THE FOUR GOSPELS IN GREEK. NEWLY ARRANGED, WITH EXPLANATORY NOTES, BY EDWARD’ ROBINSON, D.D., LL.D. LATELY PROFESSOR OF BIBLICAL LITERATURE IN THE UNION THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, NEW YORK; AUTHOR OF A GREEK AND ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT, BIBLICAL RESEARCHES IN PALESTINE, ETC., ETC. REVISED EDITION, GIVING THE TEXT OF TISCHENDORF, AND VARIOUS READINGS ACCEPTED BY TREGELLES, WESTCOTT AND HORT, AND IN THE REVISED ENGLISH VERSION OF 1881. WITH ADDITIONAL NOTES is M. B. RIDDLE, D.D. PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS IN HARTFORD THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, BOSTON: HOUGHTON, MIFFLIN AND COMPANY. New York: 11 East Seventeenth Street. The Ribersive Press, Cambridge. 1885. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1851, By EDWARD ROBINSON, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the Southern District of New York. Copyright, 1879, By EDWARD anp MARY A. ROBINSON. Copyright, 1885, By EDWARD anp MARY A. ROBINSON. All rights reserved. The Riverside Press, Cambridge: Electrotyped and Printed by H. 0. Houghton & Co. INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT BY THE EDITOR. % Dr. Epwarp Rosinson’s Harmony of the Four Gospels in Greek is here- with published in a revised form. The nature and extent of the changes made will appear from the following statement. J. The Greek Text of Tiscuenporr’s VIII. edition (Vol. I., Gospels, Lipsiae, 1869) has been substituted for that of Hahn. The edition of Von Gebhardt (Lipsiae, 1881) has, however, been taken as representing the final form of Tischendorf’s text. A few typographical errors in both volumes have been corrected. The arrangement of the Harmony required an occasional change in paragraphing and a freer use of capital letters, but the punctuation and the spelling of Tischendorf have been followed throughout. II. Criricat Notes (below the text). These present: (1) the more important readings in regard to which Tischendorf differs from Tregelles, or Westcott and Hort; (2) the leading authorities for and against such readings ; (3) the reading accepted in the Revised Version of 1881. -1. The two editions selected for comparison were those of TREGELLES* and of Westcott and Hort,” as representing the best results of textual study in England. The German editors who preceded Tischendorf have not been cited, since much of the weightiest evidence was not accessible to them. Nor have the readings of the so-called Received Text (Stephens, 1550), as such, been referred to in the notes, except in a few cases of variation in punc- tuation. It is to be hoped that few of those who will make an intelligent use of this Harmony are not convinced that the readings of Stephens, when they differ from those of Tischendorf and the editors above named, have no critical value whatever. It seemed to me unnecessary to cumber the notes with such readings, since they are quite numerous. Not all the variations of the three editors are given; only those that materially affect the sense, and as a rule those accepted in the Revised Version (as against Tischendorf). In the notes the reading accepted by Tischendorf invariably comes first ; then the reading or readings accepted by the other editors. Those of the 1 The Greek New Testament, etc., by Sam- 2 The New Testament in the Original Greek. UEL PRIDEAUX TREGELLES, §.T.D. Lon- The Text revised by Brooke Foss West- don, 1857-1879. The Gospels of Matthew cort, 1). D., and Fenton JoHN ANTHONY and Mark were published before the discov- Horr, 1). D. Cambridge and London, 1881. ery of the Sinaitic manuscript. Republished in New York, 1882. iv INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT. three (Treg., West., Rev.) not cited against 'Tischendorf may be assumed to agree with him, though this does not always hold good in the case of the Re- vised Version." 2. The Authorities cited are those which have determined the judgment of recent critical editors. The uncials selected are: δ, A, B, C, Ὁ, L, A, and the fragmentary codices: T, Z, =, 3. (For the names and dates of these, see p. xxv. A careful study of the critical notes will be the best help to a proper estimate of the relative value of each.) Some later uncials are cited in con- nection with John 7 : 53-8: 11, since that passage appears only in D, of the earlier uncials. The cursives: 1, 33, 69, and 2”° (or 81) are frequently cited ; so the following versions: Old Latin (as it appears in manuscripts), Vulgate, Memphitic (Coptic), and the two Syriac versions, commonly known as the Peshitto and Philoxenian (Harkleian). Among the Fathers Origen alone is frequently named; Augustine several times; others once or twice only. By selecting these witnesses out of the great mass, it was hoped to promote a greater familiarity with the weighty evidence they present. 8. As the Revised Version is based upon a Greek text which, while not meant to be critically exact, does in fact constitute a well-attested text for practical purposes, it seemed desirable to give the Revisers’ readings. Every thorough student of the Harmony will, of course, have the Revised Version in his hands. As a matter of convenience Latin abbreviations were used in the critical notes. See p. xxv. Ili. ARRANGEMENT OF THE Harmony. Dr. Robinson’s arrangement of the sections has been adhered to, although various adjustments in lines and paragraphs were required, in consequence of the changes of text. The only extensive changes are as follows: (δ 83) John 7: 53-8: 1 transferred to § 84, and the whole of § 84 bracketed; (§ 111) the three accounts of the Anointing at Bethany brought forward from ὃ 1381; (8 112) Matt. 21: 14-17 transferred to § 113; (§ 122) Mark 12:40 and Luke 20: 47 brought forward from § 123; (§§ 136, 137) these are transposed, with section numbers in brackets. — The reasons for these changes will be found in the additional Notes of the Appen- dix, under the respective sections. IV. ΑΡΡΕΝΡΙΧ. Numerous and extensive additions have been made, but only slight omissions. A reference to some superseded work has occasionally been dropped, and some arguments, invalidated or rendered unnecessary by the results of textual criticism, have been omitted. In the added matter there is usually some indication of any omission beyond that of a phrase or sentence. My own additions are invariably bracketed. Minor ones are inserted in the paragraphs to which they naturally belong. The longer ones stand by them- selves, and those deemed of most importance are named in the “ Contents,” etc. (pp. xxili., xxiv.), but there also enclosed in brackets. Nothing has been 1 The readings preferred by the Revisers 1881. Use was also made of memoranda were taken from the volume of Archdeacon made by the editor while engaged upon the Palmer: The Greek Testament, with the read- Revised Version. ings adopted by the Revisers, etc. Oxford, INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT. Vv omitted that seemed essential to a full and fair statement of Dr. Robinson’s view, unless a well-attested change of text overbore his opinion. On the other hand, it has been my effort to add nothing that did not seem to be in accord alike with the design of a Harmony and with the principles of interpretation accepted by Dr. Robinson himself. Where I felt constrained to differ from him, both sides have been presented. The long note on the Relation of the Gospels to each other (pp. 197 sqq.) seemed necessary as a supplement to Dr. Robinson’s Introduction, in order to defend his view under the present condi- tions of the controversy respecting the Gospels. After some hesitation I de- cided to substitute for the “Schedule of Days” given by Dr. Robinson in his edition of 1851, that of his earlier editions (see pp. 235, 238, 239), and this rendered it necessary to omit a paragraph from his preface, referring to the change made in 1851. The longest and, in many respects, most valuable note in the Appendix, that on the Passover and the Last Supper (pp. 2438-256), has been scarcely modified, and not much enlarged. Recent controversies have not, I make bold to say, rendered the author’s positions untenable, or his arguments antiquated. No effort has been made to enlarge the bibliographical lists. Works of ref- erence now abound, as they did not in Dr. Robinson’s day. The temptation to enlarge in this direction was met by considering the true purpose of a Harmony. It is proper to express here my thanks to the Rev. Chas. S. Nash, now of East Hartford, Connecticut, for his valuable and scholarly assistance in the preparation of the Greek text and foot-notes. May this edition of the Harmony not be without its influence in advancing the cause to which Dr. Edward Robinson devoted his laborious life, namely, that of candid and devout Biblical scholarship. M. B. Rippie. Hartrorp THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, April, 1885. PREFACE. -----.-.-.-- THE experience of many years has not failed to impress upon the minds of most Biblical teachers the advisableness of permitting the Harmony of the Gospel History to occupy a prominent place among the earliest studies of a Theological Seminary. The simplicity of the language, the interest and im- portance of the events, and also the very difficulties, real or alleged, with which the subject is environed, all mark this portion of the Word of God as particularly adapted for introducing the youthful student into the principles and practice of Biblical interpretation. If the study of the Harmony be rightly carried out, there is thus laid a broad and solid ground-work, on which afterwards to erect a substantial and enduring structure of Biblical Science, “built upon the foundation of the Apostles and Prophets, Jesus Christ him- self being the chief corner-stone.”’ In furtherance of these general views, no less than two editions of Arch- bishop Newcome’s Harmony were formerly published in this country; one of them under my own superintendence. These had now been long out of print, so that for some years it was very difficult to obtain copies. Under these circumstances, and by the advice and request of leading professors in several of our Theological Seminaries, as well as from a feeling of necessity in the case of my own pupils, I was led to turn my attention to the supply of this acknowledged want. It soon, however, became apparent that, rather than to engraft the changes and additions which seemed necessary upon any former work, it would be easier, and perhaps better, to prepare a new one. The present volume, accordingly, was undertaken with these impressions; and was given to the public as a new and independent work, in the hope and with the prayer that it might be found useful in its place, and thus aid in promoting the cause of Theological Education. In order to obtain a full and consecutive account of all the facts of our Lord’s life and ministry, the four Gospel narratives must be so brought to- gether, as to present as nearly as possible the true chronological order; and, where the same transaction is described by more than one writer, the different accounts must be placed side by side, so as to fill out and supply each other. Such an arrangement affords the only full and perfect survey of all the testi- mony relating to any and every portion of our Lord’s history. In this way alone can be brought out, and distinctly presented, the mutual connection and dependency of the various parts, and the gradual development and completion Vili PREFACE. of the great plan of redemption, so far as it was manifested in the life and ministry, the death and resurrection, of our Lord Jesus Christ. Indeed, with- out such a survey, our knowledge on all these great topics can only be frag- ‘mentary and partial. In a work of this kind, no great amount of novelty can be expected, on subjects which have more or less occupied the ablest minds of the Christian Church for centuries. Yet, even here, knowledge has not been stationary. In the lapse of centuries, and even of years, there is a constant progress in the observation and discovery of new facts and circumstances, bearing upon the social and also the physical history of the Hebrews and other ancient nations. These all serve to enlarge the circle of Biblical knowledge; they add to the apparatus and means of the Interpreter and Biblical Harmonist ; and often shed new light upon topics which before were dark or doubtful. It may also be truly said, that in no former period, perhaps, has there been accumulated a greater amount of such facts and of such progress, than during the half cen- tury which has just closed. All these it is the duty of the Harmonist to ap- ply to the elucidation of the narratives of the four Evangelists. A Harmony rightly constructed should exhibit the results of all these recent investigations into language, manners and customs, history, geography, and the like, so far as they are well-founded; and thus become, to a certain extent, the represen- tative of the present state of Biblical science in this particular department. Such, accordingly, has been my aim in the preparation of this volume. I have also everywhere endeavored faithfully to Judge and write, according to the impressions left on my mind by a personal inspection of most of the scenes of the Gospel History ; a privilege enjoyed, I believe, by no previous Harmonist. If, then, the scholar shall find little or nothing of positively new matter in these pages, he will yet find, I trust, some new views, and also some new illustrations of old views, which are nowadays assailed. This is true, espe- cially, in respect to the transactions during the last six months of our Lord’s life and ministry ; and the remark applies more particularly to the identifica- tion of the city Ephraim and the return of Jesus from that place through Perea; to the important Passover question; and to the mode of harmonizing the several accounts of the Lord’s resurrection and its accompanying incidents. All these and other like topics are discussed in the Notes; to which the reader is respectfully referred. The notation of place in connection with every sec- tion, though not wholly a new feature, is yet much more definitely carried out than ever before. The general uses and advantages of a Harmony, and the particular objects aimed at in the present volume, are specified near the close of the Introduction to the Notes. A list of the most important Harmonies heretofore published is given below. That the labor bestowed upon this work may not be in vain, but may be blessed of God to the furtherance of the study of his Word, is the sincere prayer of the Author. EK. ROBINSON. Unton THEoLocicAL SEMINARY, ) New York, June, 1851. 4 LIST OF HARMONIES. = JUL 18 1836 =) 4 LIST OF HARMONIES. \Jeoioainn SeOe” ----τ---΄ TuHE following List comprises only the most important works of this class. For ἃ more complete account of the literature of this department, the reader is referred to the following works: Fasricrus, Biblioth. Greca, ed. Harles. T. 1V., p. 880 sq. ; Watcu, Biblioth. Theol. 1V., p. 863 sq.; HAasE, Das Leben Jesu, ὃ 27, 2te Ausg. [Some of the less accessible works given by Dr. Robinson have been omitted. For good lists of more recent works, see Smirn’s Bible Dictionary, Am. ed. (Hackett and Abbot), II., pp. 950, 960.] TATIAN the Syrian, about A. D. 170, compiled a work entitled: τὸ διὰ τεσσάρων. This is lost ; and the Latin Version, so called, is regarded as spurious. See Biblioth. Pairr. Max. Lugd., 1677, T. II., pp. 203-12; Fabricius, Cod. Apocr. N. T. I., p. 377; Mill, Prolegom.in N. T. Lips., 1723, p. 38; Neander, Kirchengesch. I., p. 764. Ammontus of Alexandria, about A. 1). 220, is said also to have prepared a work called Apyovia, in like manner lost. [The results of his labors have been preserved by means of the Eusebian canons, which indicate the parallel sections, according to the division of Ammonius. Tischendorf and other recent editors give the numbers of these sections and canons in their editions of the Greek Testament. ] A. OstanvER, Harmoniae Evang. Libri iv., Gr. et Lat. fol. Basil., 1537, 1561. Corn. JANSEN, Concordia Evang. fol. Lovan., 1549, Απίν.; 1554, ete. Mechl., 1825. 8vo. 2 Tom. R. Srepuanus, Harmonia Evang. fol. Par., 1553. J. Carvin, Harmonia ex tribus Evangelistis composita, adjunctos eorsum Joanne. fol. Genev., 1553, and often. Car. Mounexvs (du Moulin), Collatio et Unio quatuor Evangg. eorum serie et ordine absque ulla confusione, etc., etc. 4to, Par., 1560 ; also in Opp. omnia. fol. Par., 1681. M. Cuemniti (Chemnitz), Harmonia quatuor Evangg. quam P. Lyserus et J. GERHARDUS, is continuavit, hic perfecit. fol. Hamb., 1704. 8 Tom. The portion by Chemnitz was first printed at Frankf., 1593, ete. G. Cauixt1, Quatuor Evangg. Scriptorum Concordia. 4to. Halberst., 1624, ete. Published without the author’s consent. T. Cartwricut, Harmonia Evang., etc. 4to. Amst., 1627, 1647. J. Ligurroot, Harmonia, Ordo, et Chronicon N. T., in Opp., ed. Leusden. fol. Tom. II., p.1. Ultraj., 1699. — English : Harmony, Chronicle, and Order of the N. T. fol. Lond., 1655; Works, by Pitman. 8vo. Vol. III. Lond., 1822. J. Ciericus (Le Clerc), Harmonia Evangelica, etc. fol. Amst., 1699. J. A. BenGEL, Richtige Harmonie der vier Evangelisten. 8vo. Tib:, L786, 1747, 1766. J. Macknicut, Harmony of the Four Gospels. 4to. 2 Vols. in 1. Lond., 1756, 1763, and often. J. Prisstiry, Harmony of the Evangelists in English. 4to. Lond., 1777. W. Newcome, Harmony of the Gospels in Greek, etc. fol. Dublin, 1778. — Reprinted. 8vo. Andover, 1814, 1834. J. J. Griespacu, Synopsis Evangelior. Matth., Marc. et Lucae, etc. 8vo. Halae, 1776, 1797, 1809, 1822. . . ν ἈΠ Ὁ LIST OF HARMONIES. De WetTE Et Licks, Synopsis Evangelior. Matth. Marc. et Lucae, etc. 4to. Be- rol., 1818. “Ὁ. C. Marrnaei, Synopse der vier Evangg. nebst Kritik, u.s.w. 8vo. Gotting., 1826. M. RoepiGeErR, Synopsis Evangelior. Matth. Mare. et Lucae, etc. 8vo. Halae, 1829, 1839. R. CHapmMan, Greek Harmony of the Gospels, etc., with Notes. 4to. Lond., 1836. J. GEHRINGER, Synoptische Zusammenstellung des Gr. Textes der vier Evangelien. 4to. Tiib., 1842. a“ [K. WirseLEr, Chronologische Synop. der vier Evangelien. Hamburg, 1843. C. H. A. Krarrr, Chronologie und Harmonie d. vier Evangelien. Erlangen, 1848. W. E. Greswetu, Harmonia Evangelica. Oxon., 1856. The date is that of the 5th ed. — Dissertations on the Harmony by the same. Oxford, 1837. W. Srroup, New Greek Harmony of the Four Gospels, ete. Wondon, 1853. F. W. J. Licnrenstein, Lebensgeschichte d. H. J. Christi in chronologischer Ue- bersicht. Erlangen, 1856. CoNSTANTIN TISCHENDORF, Synopsis Evangelica, etc. Lipsiae, 1851, 1854, 1864, 1871, 1878. The text of the 4th and 5th editions is that of Tischendorf’s VIII. ed. of the Greek Testament. W. Tuomson, Archbp. of York, Table of the Harmony, etc., in Smith’s Bible Dictionary, art. Gospels, Eng. ed. IIL, p. 720; Amer. ed. (Hackett and Abbot). ihe, Ρ: 751: Freperic GARDINER, Harmony of the Four Gospels in Greck, ete. Andover, 1871, 1876. Among the many lives of Christ published during the past thirty years that of S. J. ANDREWS (Life of our Lord on Earth. New York, 1863. 4th ed., 1868) is most helpful for students of the harmony of the Gospels, since it aims “to arrange the events of the Lord’s life, as given us by the Evangelists, so far as possible, in a chronological order, and to state the grounds of this order” (p. vi.). — C. J. Exut- cottT (Bishop of Gloucester and Bristol), in his Life of our Lord Jesus Christ (Hul- sean Lectures, 1859, 6th ed., London, 1876), discusses many topics pertaining to the harmony of the Gospels. So most recent Commentaries, and special works on. chronological questions. ] CONTENTS AND Sar y of Prig Ἂς ἊΣ --------- -- ee JUL 28 18) Gy, ae P*ocina| Set SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. CONTENTS. Sect. Taste for finding any Passage in the Harmony. PART. T. EVENTS CONNECTED WITH THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. TimE: About thirteen and a half years. 1. Preface to Luke’s Gospel. 2. An Angel appears to Zacharias in the Temple. — Jerusalem. 3. An ἼΩΝ appears to Mary. — Naza- reth. 4. Mary visits Elizabeth. — [Place un- certain. | 5. Birth of John the Baptist. — | Place uncertain. | 6. An Angel appears to Joseph. — Naz- areth. 7. The Birth of Jesus. — Bethlehem. 8, An Angel appears to the Shepherds. — Near Bethlehem. 9. The Circumcision of Jesus, and his Presentation in the Temple. — Beth- lehem. Jerusalem. 10. The Wise Men from the East. — Je- rusalem. Bethlehem. 11. The Flight into Egypt. Herod’s cru- elty. The return. — Bethlehem. Nazareth. 12. At twelve years of age Jesus goes up to the Passover. — Jerusalem. 13. The Genealogies. PART II. ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. Time: About one year [or nine months]. 14. The Ministry of John the Baptist. — The Desert. The Jordan. 15. The Baptism of Jesus. — The Jordan. Page. MATT. MARK. LUKE. JOHN. SON 1 1: 1-4 1 1 : 5-25 2 1 : 26-38 3) 1 : 89-56 3 1 : 57-80 4} 1: 18-25 4 2:1-7 5 2: 8-20 5 2 : 21-38 6) 2: 1-12 7; 2: 18-23 2:89, 40 8 2: 41-52 Sip Lisa 8: 28-38 | 10] 3: 1-12 1:1-8 38:1-18 12] 3:138-17| 1: 9-11 8 : 21-23 - 27. . 9]. . 34, ΧΙ SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. CONTENTS. MATT MARK. LUKE. JOHN Sect. Page 16. The Temptation. — Desert of Judea. 13) 4: 1-11 | 1:12,13] 4: 1-13 17. Preface to John’s Gospel. 14 1-18 18, Testimony of John the Baptist to Jesus.— Bethany beyond Jordan. 15 1 : 19-34 19. Jesus gains Disciples. — The Jordan. Galilee 2 15 1 : 35-52 20. The Marriage at Cana of Galilee. 16 2: 1-12 PAR ΠῚ: OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE SECOND. Time: One year. 21. At the Passover Jesus drives the Traders out of the Temple. [Comp. § 113.] — Jerusalem. 17 2: 13-25 22. Our Lord’s discourse with Nicode- mus. — Jerusalem. 18 3: 1-21 23. Jesus remains in Judea and baptizes. Further testimony of John the Bap- tist. 18 22-36 24. Jesus departs into Galilee after John’s 4:12 1:14 4:14 imprisonment. 1914 : 3-5 6: 17-20 | 3:19, 20) 4:1-3 25. Our Lord’s discourse with the Samar- martes itan Woman. Many of the Samar- itans believe on him. — Shechem or Neapolis. 4: 4-42 26. Jesus teaches publicly in Galilee. 21| 4:17 1:14-15 | 4:14, 15 4: 48-45 Jesus again at Cana, where he heals the Son of a Nobleman lying ill at Capernaum. — Cana of Galilee. 22 4: 46-54 28. Jesus at Nazareth; he is there re- jected, and fixes his abode at Ca- : pernaum. 22] 4: 13-16 4: 16-31 29. The Call of Simon Peter and Andrew, and of James and John, with the Miraculous Draught of Fishes. — τ Near Capernaum. 98] 4: 18-22 | 1: 16-20] 5: 1-11 [9 » 30. The Healing of a Demoniac in the Pie Synagogue. — Capernaum. 24 1: 21-28 | 4: 31-37 The Healing of Peter’s wife’s mother, and many others. — Capernaum. 925] 8: 14-17] 1 : 29-34] 4: 38-41 - 82. Jesus with his Disciples goes from Capernaum throughout Galilee. 26| 4: 28-25 | 1: 35-39] 4: 42-44 . 88. The Healing of a Leper. — Galilee. 27) 8: 2-4 1: 40-45 | 5: 12-16 The Healing of a Paralytic. — Caper- = naum. 27| 9: 2-8 2:1-12 | 5:17-26 . 35. The call of Matthew. — Capernaum. 29, 9:9 2:13,14| 5:27, 28 PART IV. OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE THIRD. TimE: One year. - 86. The Pool of Bethesda; the Healing of the Infirm Man; and our Lord’s sub- sequent Discourse. — Jerusalem. 30 5: 1-47 SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. xiil Sect Por. The Disciples pluck ears of grain on CONTENTS. the Sabbath. — On the way to Gal- ilee 2 ἢ . The Healing of the Withered Hand on the Sabbath. —Galilee. Jesus arrives at the Sea of Tiberias, and is followed by multitudes. — Lake of Galilee. . Jesus withdraws to the Mountain and _ chooses the Twelve ; the multitudes follow him. — Near Capernaum. [Horns of Hattin.] . The Sermon on the Mount. — Near Capernaum. [Horns of Hattin.| . The Healing of the Centurion’s Ser- vant. — Capernaum. . The Raising of the Widow’s Son. — Nain. . John the Baptist in prison sends Dis- ciples to Jesus. — Galilee: Caper- naum 2 . Reflections of Jesus on appealing to his mighty Works. —Capernaum ? . While sitting at meat with a Phar- isee, Jesus is anointed by a Woman who had been a Sinner. — Caper- naum ? . Jesus, with the Twelve, makes a sec- ond Circuit in Galilee. ᾿ . The Healing of a Demoniac. The Scribes and Pharisees blaspheme. — Galilee. . The Scribes and Pharisees seek a Sign. Our Lord’s Reflections. — Galilee. . The true Disciples of Christ his near- est Relatives. — Galilee. . At a Pharisee’s Table, Jesus denoun- ces Woes against the Pharisees and others. [Comp. ὃ 123.] —Galilee. . Jesus discourses to his Disciples and the Multitude. —Galilee. . The Slaughter of certain Galilexans. Parable of the Barren Fig Tree. — Galilee. Parable of the Sower. —Lake of Gal- ilee: Near Capernaum ? . Parable of the Tares. Other Para- bles. — Near Capernaum ? . Jesus directs to cross the Lake. Inei- dents. The Tempest stilled. —Lake of Galilee. . The two Demoniacs of Gadara. — S. E. Coast of the Lake of Galilee. . Levi’s Feast. —Capernaum. . The raising of Jairus’ Daughter. The Woman with a Bloody Flux. —Ca- pernaum. . Two Blind Men healed, and a Dumb Spirit cast out. —Capernaum ? . Jesus again at Nazareth, and again rejected. | Page. MATT. MARK. LUKE. JOHN. 32/12 : 1-8 2: 23-28 | 6:1-5 33/12: 9-14 3: 1-6 6: 6-11 34/12: 15-21 | 8: 7-12 8510: 2-4 3: 13-19 | 6: 12-19 85) 5:1-8:1 6: 20-49 42) 8: 5-13 7: 1-10 43 7: 11-17 43/11; 2-19 7: 18-35 45/11: 20-30 45 7: 86-50 46 8: 1-3 Il : 14, 15, 46/12 : 22-37 | 3: 20-30 17-23 11:16, 24- 4812: 38-45 26, 29-36 LS 27228 4912 : 46-50 | 3: 31-35 | 8: 19-21 50 11 : 87-54 51 12: 1-59 54 13: 1-9 54/13 : 1-23 4: 1-25 8: 4-18 5718 : 24-53 | 4: 26-34 8: 22-25 59| 8: 18-27 | 4: 35-41 9: 57-62 8: 28-34 61. 9.0} 5: 1-21 8: 26-40 68] 9: 10-17 | 2: 15-22 | ὅδ: 29-39 65| 9: 18-26 | 5: 22-43 | 8: 41-56 67, 9: 27-34 68113: 54-58 | 6: 1-6 | XIV - CONTENTS. MATT. SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. MARK. Sect. « 62. ν 68. ~ 64. Ν 65. - 66. ~ 67. * 73. * 74. * 75. . 76. madi A Third Circuit in Galilee. The Twelve instructed and sent forth. — Galilee. Herod holds Jesus to be John the Baptist, whom he had just before beheaded. —Galilee 9 Perea. The Twelve return, and Jesus retires with them across the Lake. Five Thousand are fed.—Capernaum. Ν. W. Coast of the Lake of Galilee. N. E. Coast of the Same. Jesus walks upon the Water. — Lake of Galilee. Gennesaret. Our Lord’s Discourse to the Multitude in the Synagogue at Capernaum. Many Disciples turn back. Peter’s Profession of Faith. —Capernaum. ΒΑ ν. FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER UNTIL HIS FINAL DEPARTURE FROM GALILEE AT THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. Time: Sex months. Our Lord justifies his Disciples for eating with Unwashen Hands. Pharisaic Traditions. —Capernaum. . The Daughter of a Syrophcenician Woman is healed. — Region of Tyre and Sidon. . A Deaf and Dumb Man healed; also many others. Four Thousand are fed. — The Decapolis. . The Pharisees and Sadducees again require a Sign. [See § 49.] — Near [ Magadan]. . The Disciples cautioned against the Leayen of the Pharisees, ete. — NV. E. Coast of the Luke of Galilee. . A Blind Man healed. — Bethsaida (Julias). Peter and the Rest again profess their Faith in Christ. |See § 66.] — Re- gion of Cesarea Philippi. Our Lord foretells his own Death and Resurrection, and the Trials of his Followers. — Region of Casarea Philippi. The ‘Transfiguration, Our Lord’s subsequent Discourse with the Three Disciples. — Region of Ca- sarea Philippi. The Healing of a Demoniac, whom the Disciples could not heal. — Re- gion of Caesarea Philippi. Jesus again foretells his own Death and Resurrection. [See ὃ 74.] — Galilee. Page. 68 71 76 79 81 80 87 89 90 9: 35-38 10:1,5--49 11:1 14:1, 2, 6-12 14; 13-21 14: 22-36 15 16: 17: » eee : 1-20 : 21-28 : 29-38 : 39 : 1-4 : 4-12 : 21-28 14-21 22,23 6: 6-13 6: 14-16, 6: 80-44 | 9: 10-17 6: 45-56 7 8 7 as 8 21-29 : 1-23 : 24-30 31-37 : 1-9 : 14-29 | : 80-32 LUKE. 9: 1-6 9: 7-9 9: 18-21 9: 28-36 9 : 37-43 9: 48-45 JOHN. 6: 1-14 6: 15-21 6: 22-71 fps SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. xV CONTENTS. Sect. * 78. The Tribute-money miraculously pro- vided. — Capernaum. +79. The Disciples contend who should be the Greatest. Jesus exhorts to Hu- mility, Forbearance, and Brotherly Love. —Capernaum. , 80. The Seventy instructed and sent out. Ν —Capernaum. | Galilee.] + 81. Jesus goes up to the Festival of Tab- ernacles. His Final Departure from Galilee. Incidents in Samaria. * 82. Ten Lepers cleansed. — Samaria. PAR VI. THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSAC- TIONS UNTIL OUR LORD’S AR- RIVAL AT BETHANY SIX DAYS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. Time: Six months less six days. Jesus at the Festival of Tabernacles. His public teaching. — Jerusalem. [The Woman taken in Adultery.— Jerusalem.| . Further Public Teaching of our Lord. He reproves the Unbelieving Jews, and escapes from their hands. — Jerusalem. . A Lawyer instructed. Love to our Neighbor defined. Parable of the Good Samaritan. —Near Jerusalem. . Jesus in the House of Martha and Mary. — Bethany. . The Disciples again taught how to pray. — Near Jerusalem. The Seventy return. — Jerusalem ? A Man born blind is, healed on the Sabbath. Our Lord’s subsequent Discourses. — Jerusalem. . Jesus in Jerusalem at the Festival of Dedication. He retires beyond Jor- dan. — Jerusalem. Bethany beyond Jordan. . The Raising of Lazarus. — Bethany. The Counsel of Caiaphas against Je- sus. He retires from Jerusalem. — Jerusalem. Ephraim. . Jesus beyond Jordan is followed by Multitudes. The Healing of the In- firm Woman on the Sabbath.— Valley of Jordan. Perea. . Our Lord goes teaching and journey- ing towards Jerusalem. He is warned against Herod. — Perea. . Our Lord dines with a Chief Pharisee on the Sabbath. Incidents — Pe- red. . What is required of true Disciples. — Perea. * 83. . 84. Page. MATT. MARK, LUKE. 9117: 24-27 | 9: 33 91/18: 1-35 9: 33-50 | 9: 46-50 94 10: 1-16 95 SE 96 51-56 : 11-19 97 99 99 101 10: 102 10 : 38-42 102 103 11:: 10: 109 106 107 108 10919 : 1, 2 13 ; 10-21 109 13: 110 14: 111 14: JOHN. 7: 2-10 \10: Tiles οὐ -τ -ὰ :11-52 * 110. The Visit to Zaccheus. Parable of ΧΥΙ SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. CONTENTS. MATT. MARK. LUKE. JCHN. Sect. Page. 98. Parable of the Lost Sheep, ete. Parable of the Prodigal Son. — Perea. 112 15 : 1-82 99. Parable of the Unjust Steward. — Perea. 118 16 : 1-13 100. The Pharisees reproved. Parable of the Rich Man and Lazarus. — Perea. 114 16 : 14-31 * 101. Jesus inculeates Forbearance, Faith, Humility. — Perea. 114 17 : 1-10 5102. Christ’s Coming will be Sudden. — Perea. 115 17 : 20-37 Ὁ 103. Parables: The Importunate Widow. The Pharisee and Publican. — Pe- rea. 116 18 : 1-14 ‘104. Precepts respecting Divorce. — Pe- rea. 110,19 : 83-12 |10: 2-12 «105. Jesus receives and blesses Little Children. — Perea. 117/19 : 13-15 |10 : 18-16 |18 : 15-17 106. The Rich Young Man. Parable of ; the Laborers in the Vineyard. — 19 : 16-30 Perea. 118/20: 1-16 !10: 17-81 [18 : 18-30 107. Jesus a third time foretells his Death and Resurrection. [See § 74, §77.] — Perea. * 121/20; 17-19 |10 : 32-34 [18 : 31-34 . 108. James and John prefer their Ambi- tious Request. — Perea. 121/20 : 20-28 [10 : 35-45 » 109. The Healing of two Blind Men near 18 : 35-43 Jericho. 122/20 : 29-34 [10 : 46-52 [19 :] the Ten Mine. — Jericho. 123 19 : 2-28 111. Jesus arrives at Bethany Six Days before the Passover. ['The Supper at Bethany. The Hostility of the 11 : 55-57 Chief Priests.] — Bethany. 124/26 : 6-13 |14: 3-9 12: 1-11 PA ὙἹΙ, OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM AND THE SUBSE- QUENT TRANSACTIONS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. TIME: Five days. » 112, Our Lord’s Public Entry into Jeru- salem. — Bethany, Jerusalem. 1979] : 1-11 [11] :1-11 [19 : 29-44 [122 12-19 113. The Barren Fig Tree. The Cleans- ing of the Temple. [Comp. § 21.] 19 : 45-48 — Bethany, Jerusalem. 129/21 : 12-19 |11 : 12-19 [3] : 37, 38 114. The Barren Fig Tree withers away. — Between Bethany and Jerusalem. 151. 21 : 20-22 |11 : 20-25 115. Christ’s Authority questioned. Par- able of the Two Sons. — Jerusa- lem. 131/21 : 23-82 [11 : 27-33 |20 : 1-8 * 116. Parable of the Wicked Husband- men. — Jerusalem. 133/21 : 88-46 [19 : 1-12 |20: 9-19 117. Parable of the Marriage of the King’s Son. — Jerusalem. 135/22 : 1-14 . 118. Insidious Question of the Pharisees : Tribute to Cesar.— Jerusalem. 185|22 : 15-22 [12 ; 13-17 [20 : 20-26 119. Insidious question of the Saddu- SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. CONTENTS. Sect. Page. cees: The Resurrection. — Jeru- salem. 1 120. A Lawyer questions Jesus. The Two Great Commandments. — Je- rusalem. . 121. How is Christ the Son of David ? — Jerusalem. ) 122. Warnings against the Evil Example of the Scribes and Pharisees. — Jerusalem. » 123. Woes against the Scribes and Phar- isees. Lamentation over Jerusa- lem. [Comp. § 51.] — Jerusalem. 1124. The Widow’s Mite. — Jerusalem. _ 125. Certain Greeks desire to see Je- sus. — Jerusalem. . 126. Reflections upon the Unbelief of the Jews. — Jerusalem. . 127. Jesus, on taking leave of the Tem- ple, foretells its Destruction and the Persecution of his Disciples. — Jerusalem. Mount of Olives. . 128. The Signs of Christ’s coming to de- stroy Jerusalem, and put an end to the Jewish State and Dispensa- tion. — Mount of Olives. . 129. Transition to Christ’s Final Coming at the Day of Judgment. Exhor- tation to Watchfulness. [Comp. § 52, Luke 12:39.] Parables: The Ten Virgins. The Five Tal- ents. — Mount of Olives. - 180. Scenes of the Judgment Day. — Mount of Olives. +131. The Rulers conspire. Treachery of Judas. — Jerusalem. » 132. Preparation for the Passover. — Bethany. Jerusalem. PART VIII. THE FOURTH PASSOVER ; OUR LORD’S PASSION; AND THE ACCOMPANY- ING EVENTS UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. Time: Two days. - 133. The Passover Meal. Contention among the Twelve. —Jerusalem. . 184. Jesus washes the Feet of his Disci- ples. — Jerusalem. + 135. Jesus points out the Traitor. Judas withdraws. — Jerusalem. . [136.] The Lord’s Supper. —Jerusalem. \ [187.] Jesus foretells the Fall of Peter, and the Dispersion of the Twelve. —Jerusalem. ν 138. Jesus comforts his Disciples. The Sel Spirit promised. — Jerusa- em. 136 138 139 139 143 XVil MATT. MARK. LUKE. JOHN. 22 : 23-33 [12 : 18-27 |20 : 27-40 22 : 34-40 |12 : 28-34 22 : 41-46 [12 : 35-37 120 : 41-44 23:1-12 [12 : 38-40 |20 : 45-47 23 : 138-39 12 : 41-44 [2] : 1-4 12 : 20-36 12 : 37-50 24 :1-4 |13: 1-13 |21: 5-19 24 : 15-42 [18 : 14-37 [2] : 20-36 24 : 43-51 25 : 1-30 25: 31-46 ΟΣ =oy arses 14-16 10, 11 22: 1-6 96: 17-19 |14: 12-16 [22 : 7-13 22: 14-18 26: 20 14:17 24-30 13 : 1-20 26 : 21-25 114: 18-21 |22: 21-23 |13: 21-35 1 Cor. 26 : 26-29 114: 22-25 |22: 19, 20 [11 : 28-25 JOHN 26 : 31-35 114; 27-31 |22: 31-38 |13: 36-38 114: 1-31 xXVi1 SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. Sect. 139. . 140. ‘141. «142. 143. 144. 145. 146. 147. 148. 149. 150. 151. 152, 153, 154, 155. 156. 157. 158. CONTENTS. MATT. MARK. Page. Christ the true Vine. His Disciples hated by the World. —Jerusalem. Persecution foretold. Further Prom- ise of the Holy Spirit. Prayer in the Name of Christ. — Jerusalem. Christ’s last Prayer with his Disci- ples. —Jerusalem. The Agony in Gethsemane. —Mount of Olives. Jesus betrayed, and made Prisoner. —Mount of Olives. Jesus before Caiaphas. Peter thrice denies him. —Jerusalem. Jesus before Caiaphas and the San- hedrin. He declares himself to be the Christ; is condemned and mocked. — Jerusalem. The Sanhedrin lead Jesus away to Pilate. Pilate seeks to release him. —Jerusalem. Jesus before Herod. — Jerusalem. Pilate further seeks to release Jesus. The Jews demand Barabbas. — Jerusalem. Pilate delivers up Jesus to Death. He is scourged and mocked. — Jerusalem. Pilate still again seeks to release Jesus. — Jerusalem. Judas repents and hangs himself.— Jerusalem. Jesus is led away to be crucified.— Jerusalem. The Crucifixion. — Jerusalem. The Jews mock at Jesus on the Cross. He commends his Mother to John. — Jerusalem. Darkness prevails. Christ expires on the Cross. — Jerusalem. The Vail of the Temple rent, and Graves opened. Judgment of the Centurion. The Women at the Cross. — Jerusalem. The taking down from the Cross. The Burial. — Jerusalem. The Watch at the Sepulchre. —Je- rusalem. PART IX. OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION, HIS SUBSEQUENT APPEARANCES, AND HIS ASCENSION. TIME: Forty days. . 159. The Morning of the Resurrection. 160. Visit of the Women to the Sepul- — Jerusalem. chre. Mary Magdalene returns. — Jerusalem. 159 160 162 163 46 164}26 : 47-56 26 : 57, 58, 166| 69-75 168} 26 : 59-68 27:1, 2, 170| 11-14 172)\27 : 15-26 174|27 : 26-30 175|27 : 3-10 176/27 : 31-34 177,27: 35-38 178} 27 : 39-44 179) 27 : 45-50 180/27 : 51-56 181/27 : 57-61 183|27 : 62-66 184|28 ; 2-4 184}28: 1 26 : 30,36-|14 : 26,32- 42 LUKE. 22; 39-46 14: 43-52 [22 ; 47-53 14: 53, 54, 66-72 15: Loe 1 15: Tor ΤΣ ΠΡ: ors 16: 16 38-41 42-47 1 : 2-4 22 : 54-62 23 : 26-33 23 : 33,34, 38 23 : 35-37, 39-43 23 : 44-46 23: 45, 41-- 49 23 : 50-56 24: 1-3 JOHN. 18: 19-24 18: 28-38 18: 39, 40 19: 1-38 19: 4-16 Acts 1: 18,19 JOHN 19 ΠΣ 19: 18-24 19 : 25-27 19 : 28-30 19 : 31-42 20: 1,2 SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. ΧΙΧ CONTENTS. MATT. MARK. LUKE. JOHN. Sect. Pa; - i 161. Vision of Angels in the Sepulchre. — Jerusalem. 185/28: 5-7 |16:5-7 ἰ24: 4-8 * 162. The Women return to the City. Jesus meets them. — Jerusalem. 185/28: 8-10 |16:8 24: 9-11 ‘163. Peter and John run to the Sepul- chre. — Jerusalem. 186 94:12 20: 3-10 ~ 164. Our Lord is seen by Mary Magda- lene at the Sepulchre. — Jerusa- lem. 186 16: 9-11 20: 11-18 165. Report of the Watch. — Jerusalem. 187/28: 11-15 166. Our Lord is seen of Peter. Then by Two Disciples on the way to 1 Cor. Emmaus. — Jerusalem. Emmaus. 187\15:5 16: 12,13 124: 138-35 167. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas being absent.— 1 Cor. Jerusalem. 188/15: 5 16: 14-18 |24 : 86-49 |20: 19-23 168. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas being present. — Jerusalem. 190 20 : 24-29 169. The Apostles go away into Galilee. Jesus shows himself to Seven of them at the Seaof Tiberias.— Gal- Matt. ilee. 190/28: 16 21: 1-24 170. Jesus meets the Apostles and above five hundred Brethren on a Moun- 1 Cor. tain in Galilee. —Galilee. 191/28 : 16-20 15:6 171. Our Lord is seen of James; then of Acts 1 Cor. all the Apostles. — Jerusalem. 192) 1: 3-8 15: 7 Acts 172, The Ascension. — Bethany. 192} 1: 9-12 |16: 19, 20 |24: 50-53 ; OHN 173. Conclusion of John’s Gospel. 193 20: 30, 31 21: 25 TABLE FOR FINDING ANY PASSAGE IN THE HARMONY. MATTHEW. OHAP. VERSE. |SECT. PAGE, CHAP. VERSE. | SECT. PAGE. CHAP VERSE. SECT. PAGE. i.| 1-17} 13 | 8,9 xiii. | 1-28] 54 | 54-57 xxili. | 18-39 | 128 | 140, 141 18-25} 6] 4 24-53] 55 | 57-59 xxiv.| 1-14] 127 | 143-145 ii.| 1-12] 10] 6,7 54-58| 61 | 68 15-42 | 128 | 145-148 13-23] 11 | 7,8 meh | UP | skh 7 43-51] 129 | 148 iii. | 1-12] 14 | 10-12 8Ξ5 134} 9520 xxv.| 1-80129 | 148, 149 13-17] 15 | 12,13 6-12} 63 | 71,72 31-46 | 130 | 150 iv.| 1-11] 16 | 13,14 13-21] 64 | 72-7 xxvi.| 1-5 Τ181 1 1503151 12 24 |19 29-36 | 65 | 75,76 6-13] 111 | 125,126 13-16 | 28 | 23 xy.| 1-20] 67 | 79-81 14-16] 131 | 151 17 26 | 21,22 21-28] 68 | 81,82 17-19 | 132 | 151,152 18-22} 29 | 23, 24 29-38] 69 | 82,83 20 133 | 158 23-25 | 32 | 26 39 70 | 88 21-25] 135 | 154, 155 v.| 1-48} 41 | 35-38 xvi.}| 1-4 | 70 | 88 26-29 | 136 | 156 vi.| 1-34] 41 | 38-40 4-12) 71 | 84 30 142 | 163 vii. | 1-29] 41 | 40-42 13-20] 73 | 85 31-35 | 187 | 157 viii. | 1 41 | 42 21-28] 74 | 86,87 36-46 | 142 | 163, 164 2-4 | 33 | 27 xvii.}| 1-13] 75 | 87-89 47-56 | 143 | 165, 166 5-13 | 42 | 42,43 14-21| 76 | 89,90 57,58 | 144 | 166,167 14-17] 81 | 25, 26 9. 25} 777 90:9] 59-68 | 145 | 169,170 18-27 | 56 | 59-61 24-27| 78 | 91 69-75 | 144 | 167,168 28-34 | 57 | 61,62 || xviii.| 1-35] 79 | 91-94 || xxvii.| 1,2 [146 | 170 ix.| 1 57 | 63 UK 1:9. 594. 7109 ; 3-10} 151 | 175,176 2-8 | 34 | 28, 29 3-12] 104 | 116,117 11-14] 146 | 171 9 35 | 29 13-15 | 105 | 117,118 15-26 | 148 | 172,178 10-17 | 58 | 63-65 16-30 | 106 | 118-120 26-30 | 149 | 174 18-26 | 59 | 65-67 xx.| 1-16] 106 | 120,121 31-34 | 152. | 176,177 27-34 | 60 | 67 17-19 | 107 | 121 35-38] 153 | 177,178 35-38 | 62 | 68 20-28 | 108 | 121, 122 39-44 1154 | 178,179 κι ἢ 62 | 68, 69 29-34 | 109 | 122, 128 45-50 | 155 | 179,180 2-4 | 40 | 33,34 xxi.| 1-11] 112 | 127-129 51-56 | 156 | 180,181 5-42] 62 | 69-71 12-19] 113 | 129-131 57-61 | 157 | 181,182 πΐ.} 62 [71] 20-22 | 114 | 18] 62-66 | 158 | 183 2-19} 44 | 43-45 23-32 | 115 | 131, 132]! xxviii.| 1 160 | 184 20-30] 45 | 45 33-46 | 116 | 133, 134 2-4 |159 | 184 xii.| 1-8 | 37 |32,33]| xxii.| 1-14] 117 | 135 5-7 | 161 | 185 9-14] 38 | 33, 34 15-22 | 118 | 135, 136 8-10 | 162 | 185, 186 15-21] 34 | 34 23-33 | 119 | 136-138 11-15 | 165 | 187 22-37 | 48 | 47,48 34-40 | 120 | 138 16 169 | 190 38-45 | 49 | 48, 49 41-46 | 121 | 189 16-20 | 170 | 191,192 46-50] 50 | 50 xxiii. | 1-12 | 122 | 140 iv. iv. TABLE FOR FINDING ANY PASSAGE IN THE HARMONY. xxi VERSE. . an o> Co to "νυ oy anranrrkwoNn N= MARK. CHAP VERSE. | SECT. PAGE. CHAP. VERSE. vii. | 31-37] 69 | 82 xiv) 1,2 Vitis | τ 9.1 6914, 82, 55 3-9 10-12} 70] 83 10, 11 15. 91 711 BA 12-16 22-96| 72 | 84,85 17 27-30| 73 | 85 18-21 31-38| 74 | 86,87 99. 95 ix: | 1 741 8a 26 2-13| 75 | 87-89 27-31 14-29] 76 | 89,90 32-42 30-32] 77 | 90,91 43-52 33 78 | 91 53, 54 33-50| 79 | 91-93 55-65 ἘΠῚ 94 [109 66-72 2-12] 104 | 116,117 xv. | 1-5 13-16 | 105 | 117,118 6-15 17-31 | 106 | 118-120 15-19 32-34 | 107 | 121 20-23 35-45 | 108 | 121, 122 24-28 46-52 | 109 | 122, 123 29-32 xi.| 1-11 | 112 | 127-129 8: 7 19:19 115 129-131 38-41 20-26 | 114 | 131 42-47 972364 115 [181,139 xvi. | 1 xii. | 1-12] 116 | 133, 134 2-4 13-17 | 118 | 135, 136 5-7 18-27] 119 | 136-138 8 28-34 | 120 | 138 9-11 35-37 | 121 | 139 12, 13 38-40 | 122 | 139, 140 14-18 41-44 | 124 | 141, 142 19,20 ΧΗ 1-13] 127 | 143-145 14-37 | 128 | 145-148 LUKE. y.|17-26| 34 | 27-29 ix. | 10-17 27,28| 35 | 29 18-21 29-39| 58 | 63-65 22-97 Vis pei-oe Sie. 62283 28-36 6-11| 38 | 33,34 37-43 12-19| 40! 35 43-45 20-26] 41 | 35,36 46-50 27-30| 41 | 37,38 51-56 31 41 | 40 57-62 32-36| 41 | 38 xf 1-16 37-49| 41 | 40-42 17-24 vii, | 1-10] 42 | 42,43 25-37 11-17| 43 | 43 38-42 18-35| 44 | 43-45 xi.| 1-13 36-50) 46 | 45, 46 14,15 viii. | 1-3 | 47 | 46 16 4~18; 54 | 54-57 17-23 19-21| 50 | 50 24-26 22-25| 56 | 59-61 27,28 26-40| 57 | 61-63 29-36 41-56| 59 | 65-67 37-54 ix.| 1-6 | 62 | 68-71 xii. | 1-59 ΠΟ 68. 1, 7] xiii. | 1-9 SECT. 131 111 151 132 133 135 136 142 137 142 143 144 145 144 146 148 149 152 153 154 155 156 157 159 160 161 162 164 1166 167 172 PAGE. 150, 151 125, 126 151 151, 152 153 154, 155 156 163 157 163, 164 165, 166 166, 167 169, 170 167, 168 170, 171 172, 173 174 176, 177 177, 178 178, 179 179, 180 180, 181 181, 182 184 184, 185 185 185, 186 186, 187 187, 188 188-190 192, 193 102 47 xxii TABLE FOR FINDING ANY PASSAGE IN THE HARMONY. LUKE CONTINUED. CHAP. XIX. xX. vii. Viii. i. VERSE. SECT. 10-21] 94 22-35} 95 1-24] 96 25-35 | 97 1-32} 98 1-13| 99 14-31 | 100 1-10 | 101 11-19| 89 20-37 | 102 1-14 | 103 15-17 | 105 18-30 | 106 31-34 | 107 35-43 | 109 1 |109 2-28 | 110 29-44 | 112 45-48 | 113 1-8 | 115 1-18| 17 19-34] 18 35-52| 19 1-12} 20 138-25 21 1-21| 929 22-36} 23 [oe a| eae 4-42| 25 43-45 | 26 46-54 27 1-47| 36 1-14| 64 15-21! 65 22-71] 66 1 66 2-10| 81 11-52] 83 53 84 1-11| 34 ACTS. 3-8 171 9-12 | 172 18, 19 | 151 PAGE. 109 109, 110 110, 111 111, 112 112, 113 113, 114 114 114, 115 96 115 116 117, 118 118-120 121 122, 123 123 123, 124 127-129 130 131, 132 192 192, 193 175 CHAP. XX. XXL ΧΧΙΙ. xii. xiii. xiv. XV. XVi. XVii. XViil. VERSE. | SECT. 116 118 119 121 122 124 127 128 113 131 132 133 136 135 133 137 142 143 144 145 JOHN. 85 90 90 91 92 93 111 ill 112 125 126 134 135 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 12-59 1-41 1-21 22-49 1-46 47-54 55-57 1-11 12-19 20-36 37-50 1-20 21-35 | 36-38 | 1-31 | 1-97 | 1-33 1-26 1 9-12 PAGE. CHAP. | VERSE. 133, 1384|| xxiii. | 1-5 135, 136 6-12 136-138 138-25 139 26-33 139, 140 33, 34 141, 142 35-37 143-145 38 145-148 39-43 131 44-46 150, 151 45 151..1502 47--49 153 50-56 156 xxiv. | 1-3 155 4-8 153 9-11 157, 158 12 163, 164 13-35 165, 166 36-49 166-168 50-53 169,170 99, 100|| xviii. | 13-18 1038-105 19-24 105, 106 25-27 106, 107 28-38 107, 108 39, 40 108, 109|| xix. | 1-3 124 4-16 125, 126 16,17 127-129 18-24 142 25-27 143 28-30 154 31-42 154-156 πο oe 157 3-10 158, 159 11-18 159, 160 19-23 160, 161 24-29 162 380, 31 163 xxi. | 1-24 164-166 25 CORINTHIANS. 156 xv. | 6 187 7 188 SECT. PAGE. 146 | 170,171 147 | 172 148 | 172,178 152 | 176,177 153 } 171 154 | 178,179 153 | 178 154 | 179 155 | 179,180 156 | 180 156 | 180,181 157 | 181,182 160 | 184,185 161 | 185 162 | 186 163 | 186note 166 | 187,188 167 | 189 179} 19}. 193 144 | 166,167 145 | 168,169 144 | 167,168 146 | 170,171 148 | 172,173 149 | 174 150 | 174,175 152 | 170} 1... 153 | 177,178 154 | 179 155 | 179,180 157 | 181, 182 160 | 184,185 163 | 186 164 | 186, 187 167 | 188-190 168 ; 190 173 | 198 109 | 190,19] 173 | 193note 170 | 191,192 171 ΙΣ Sect. 15-20. 21. 23-29, 36. 37. 38-40. 41. 42--48, 49. 51-56. 57. 58-66, 67-75. 80. 81, 82. CONTENTS OF THE NOTES. INTRODUCTION [The Relation of the ἘΠ ΠΣ τ each aca PART IL Miscellaneous : Our Lord’s Nativity [The Christian and Roman ἘΠΕ, [Schedule of Dates] The Wise Men from the East . The Genealogies . PART IL [Date of the beginning of John’s Preaching] . Miscellaneous PART III. [The Length of our Lord’s Ministry] The Cleansing of the eee Miscellaneous . - : - PART IV. The Festival in John 5:1. Was it the Passover 2 [The Second Sabbath after the First] Miscellaneous . : The Sermon on the Monn Miscellaneous Three Days and three Nights : Miscellaneous [The Country of the πε, iM The two Demoniaes of Gadara Miscellaneous PART VY: Miscellaneous . : : ; : ; : The Seventy sent out. Whither? [When 1] Miscellaneous : ᾿ A : é PART VI Intropucrory Norte: Order of John and Luke . [Supplementary Note] . XX1V Sect. 84. 86-90. 91. 98. 94-108. 109. 111. 112-126. 127-130. 191. 132. 133-143. 144-146. 144. 145-157. 159. 160. 161, 162. 163. 164. 166-169. 170. 171. 172. 173. CONTENTS OF THE NOTES. Miscellaneous Festival of Medication 4 : 5 5 A The City of Ephraim. Where ? 4 : : 5 : - Ε Miscellaneous The Blind Men at dariche : Our Lord’s Arrival at Bethany. Intropuctory Note [Schedule of Days} Miscellaneous Our Lord’s Discourse on ihe Mount of Olives : . . The Treachery of Judas The first Day of Unleavened Bread Intropuctory Nore. — THE {ς “ “ “ [1 ce [Doubtful Section in ity of ἜΗΙ : Ἶ : : : ὃ : [The Supper there] . PART ὙΠ. PART VIII. PASSOVER : 2 I. Time of killing the eel We 2, ae II. Time of eating the Passover - 2 Ξ III. Festival of unleavened Bread . IV. Other paschal Sacrifices. The fret tenes The Khagigah - : 5 4 V. The paschal Supper VI. Did our Lord, the night in which ie was betrayed, eat the Passover with his Disci- ples? VII. Examination of ἘΣ τ in Tone 8 Gospel’ [7 Miscellaneous [The Examination τ our Lord ἘΠΕ the eran Bales : : deere Peter’s denials of Christ Miscellaneous . Intropuctory Nore: Miscellaneous [ Visit of the Women. Miscellaneous ΟΠ 19... 1" «13 : 27-30 ὁ. 5 ὃ = 5 PSS : Ἢ - Ε A τος ΠΟΥ : Oe) ANS) Boi . . . VIII. Early historical Testimony oN . . . . . . . . PART TX. Sun-rising . ἣ Order of events ; ‘ 3 f ὃ : ‘ Peter and John in the Ἐπ : : ᾿ : ; : Our Lord’s Appearance to Mary Meedalere Use of πρῶτον and ὕστερον Miscellaneous Our Lord’s Interview aie sy τ on ἃ ‘Moatians in Galilee Other Appearances of Jesus . [The Ascension] . [Genuineness of John 21 : 25] Page 231 231 232 232 234 234 235 238 239 239 240 242 242 243 243 244 244 244 245 246 248 249 250 250 251 253 255 256 258 259 260 . 263 266 266 268 268 269 270 271 272 272 273 EXPLANATION OF CRITICAL NOTES. ARRANGEMENT. References to Gospel, chapter, and verse, in heavy type. In each note the reading accepted by Tischendorf corresponding with the Greek text above is given first. A semicolon (;) separates the evidence for this reading from the various readings of the same passage. The( | ) separates two distinct notes on the same verse. Designations of authorities follow the reading which they attest. When another Greek word or phrase is substituted for the reading of Tischendorf, it occurs in the note without any prenx (after the semicolon). ABBREVIATIONS. om (omittit, omittunt) = the Greek word or phrase previously cited is b> MNPNHHD ὦ omitted by the following authorities and editors. add (addit, addunt) — the Greek word or phrase which follows is inserted in the text after the word previously cited. pm (premittit, premittunt) =the Greek word or phrase which follows is inserted before the word previously cited. al (alii) = other authorities of the class preceding (uncials, cursives, versions, or Fathers). rel] (reliqui), mul (multi), omn (omnes), pler (plerique), can be explained by the connec- tion. txt. and mg. These abbreviations added to the designations of editions indicate different readings in text and margin of the editions. When editors agree in text with Tischen- dorf, they are not cited in support of his reading. But the notes always indicate a dif- ference from him in text or in margin, or an agreement with him in margin only. Abbreviations designating authorities are printed without a period; those designating ed- itors with a period. DESIGNATION OF AUTHORITIES AND EDITORS. 1. Uncran Manuscripts. Sinaiticus ; TV. Century. When uncorrected, 8; when corrected, S* = original scribe ; 2 = corrector of IV. Cent.; S°= corr. of VI. Cent. (in Matthew only); S* = corr. of VII. Cent., but designated Seca when a fourth corrector (ΝΡ of the same century) differs from him. MS. deemed of most weight by Tischendorf. Alexandrinus; V. Cent. Defective in Matthew. Vaticanus ; 1V. Cent. When corrected, ΒΡῈ = original scribe ; B® = corr. of IV. Cent. 5 = corr. of VI. or VII. Cent. MS. deemed of extraordinary weight by Westcott and Hort. Ephraemi Syri; V. Cent. Fragmentary ; one third of Gospels lacking. Ο = corr. probably of VI. Cent. ; C? = corr. of IX. Cent. Bezae Cantabr.; Middle of VI. Cent. Greek and Latin. Parisiensis 62; VIII. Cent. Somewhat defective. Borgianus I.; V.Cent.; fragments of John’s Gospel. Dublinensis ; VI. Cent.; fragments of Matthew. Sangullensis ; IX. Cent. Text of Mark of most value. Zacynthus ; VII. Cent. ; fragments of Luke. Rossanensis ; VI. Cent. Recently discovered ; Matthew and Mark. ΧΧΥΪ DESIGNATION OF AUTHORITIES AND EDITORS. 2. Cursive MANUSCRIPTS. 1 (Basiliensis ; X. Cent.) 33 (Colbertinus ; XI. Cent.) 69 (Leicestrensis ; XIV. Cent.) Pe or 81 (Petropolitanus ; 1X. Cent.) 8. VERSIONS. it = old Latin (the numeral occasionally added indicates the number of MSS. attesting the reading). vg = Vulgate (when ¢¢ and ¢d¢ are added, a difference between the printed text and the MSS. text is indicated). cop — Memphitic version. Syrr = the Peshitto and Harkleian Syriac versions ; not cited when they differ. 4. FATHERS. Or = Origen; Aug = Augustine ; Hier = Jerome; others rarely cited. 5. Eprirtors. See pp. iii, iv.,and above. Treg.= Tregelles; West. Westcott and Hort; Rev. = Re- vised Version of 1881 ; Ang. and Am. are used when the English and American compa- nies have expressed a different judgment respecting a reading. PARTY T: -.---- ἡ. EVENTS CONNECTED WITH THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. Time: About thirteen and a half years. § 1. Preface to Luke’s Gospel. Luxe I. 1-4. Ἢ , Ne , a πειδήπερ πολλοὶ ἐπεχείρησαν ἀνατάξασθαι διήγησιν περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορη- fe 2 (A ed lal a ΄ μένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων, ἱκαθὼς παρέδοσαν ἡμῖν οἱ ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς αὐτόπται καὶ ε , / A /, 3 - a ὑπηρέται γενόμενοι τοῦ λόγου, | ἔδοξε κἀμοί παρηκολουθηκότι ἄνωθεν πᾶσιν ἀκρι- me ὧδ BO μὰ Bas καθεξῆς σοι γράψαι, κράτιστε Θεόφιλε, ' ἵνα ἐπιγνῷς περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων τὴν ἀσφάλειαν. § 2. An Angel appears to Zacharias in the Temple. — Jerusalem. ome 1: ὅξΞ 25. οι ᾿Εγένετο ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις “Hpwdov βασιλέως τῆς ᾿Τουδαίας ἱερεύς τις ὀνόματι Ζαχαρίας ἐξ ἐφημερίας ᾿Αβιά, καὶ γυνὴ αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν θυγατέρων ᾿Δαρών, καὶ τὸ 6 ὄνομα αὐτῆς ᾿Ἐλισάβετ. ἦσαν δὲ δίκαιοι ἀμφότεροι ἐναντίον τοῦ θεοῦ, πόρευ- 7 μενοι ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐντολαῖς καὶ δικαιώμασιν τοῦ κυρίου ἄμεμπτοι. καὶ οὐκ ἢν αὐτοῖς τέκνον, καθότι ἣν ἡ ᾿Ελισάβετ στεῖρα, καὶ ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν ταῖς 8 ἡμέραις αὐτῶν ἦσαν. ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ τάξει τῆς ἐφημερίας 9 αὐτοῦ ἔναντι τοῦ θεοῦ, ! κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἱερατείας ἔλαχε τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι εἰσελθὼν 10 εἰς τὸν ναὸν τοῦ κυρίου, ' καὶ πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος ἢν τοῦ λαοῦ προσευχόμενον ἔξω τῇ ὥρᾳ 11 τοῦ θυμιάματος. ὥφθη δὲ αὐτῷ ἄγγελος κυρίου ἑστὼς ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ θυσιαστη- 12 ρίου τοῦ θυμιάματος. καὶ ἐταράχθη Ζαχαρίας ἰδών, καὶ φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν. 18 εἶπεν δὲ Eres αὐτὸν 6 ἄγγελος: μὴ φοβοῦ, Ζαχαρία, διότι εἰσηκούσθη ἡ δέησίς σου, καὶ 1) pee σου Te yoni υἱόν σοι, καὶ καλέσεις TO ὄνομα, αὑτοῦ 14 a καὶ ἔσται xapa σοι καὶ ας καὶ πολλοὶ ἐπὶ τῇ γενέσει αὐτοῦ 15 χα σονται. ἔσται γὰρ μέγας ἐνώπιον κυρίου, καὶ οἶνον καὶ σίκερα οὐ μὴ πίῃ, 16 καὶ πνεύματος ἁγίου πλησθήσεται ¢ ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας μητῥὸς αὐτοῦ, ' καὶ πολλοὺς 17 τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπιστρέψει ἐπὶ κύριον τὸν θεὸν αὐτῶν - καὶ αὐτὸς προελεύσεται ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει λεία, ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατ ἐρων ἐπὶ τέκνα καὶ ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων, ἑτοιμάσαι κυρίῳ λαὸν κατεσκευασμένον. E 217. Comp. Mal.3: 23 sq. [4, 5, 6.] 5 γυνὴ (L pm ἢ) αὐτῷ SBC* DLE1 33; 15 κυρίου τὶ A CL 33; pm τοῦ B Ὦ [Treg.] ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ AC? E yg*4 cop syrr. West.mg. 17 προελεύσεται 8 A B® D; 6 ἐναντίον NB C¥ vg; ἐνώπιον Α Ο8 Ὁ LE. προσελεύσεται B*C L West.mg. Rev.mg. . 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part I. LUKE I. ἣν > ων» Ν Ν » ἂς ν ,ὔ A a / 3 καὶ εἶπεν Ζαχαρίας πρὸς τὸν ἄγγελον - κατὰ τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο ; ἐγὼ γάρ εἰμι πρεσβύτης καὶ ἡ γυνή μου προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῆς. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ 4 53 3 a 3 Ἢ > Ν ε Ν Sh A 6 A beat! ἄγγελος εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἐγώ εἰμι Ταβριὴλ ὃ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ ἀπε- ΄ a εἶ Ν \ > is la a \ 3 Ἄς A a στάλην λαλῆσαι πρὸς σὲ Kai εὐαγγελίσασθαί σοι ταῦτα - καὶ ἰδοὺ ἔσῃ σιωπῶν Ν Ν ΄ a ᾿ ἜΘ ποτ / ca) > bah 3 SASF καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας γένηται ταῦτα, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου, οἵτινες πληρωθήσονται εἰς τὸν καιρὸν αὐτῶν. καὶ ἣν ὃ λαὸς προσ- δοκῶν τὸν Ζαχαρίαν, καὶ ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ ναῷ. ἐξελθὼν χαρ 3 μ τ XP τ Cin > ΄ a a “ a n dé οὐκ ἐδύνατο λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς, Kal ἐπέγνωσαν ὅτι ὀπτασίαν ἑώρακεν ἐν TO ναῷ " ‘\ Tee. > ΄ > tal Ν [4 / Ν 3 / ε > ’ καὶ αὐτὸς ἣν διανεύων αὐτοῖς, καὶ διέμενεν κωφός. καὶ ἐγένετο ὡς ἐπλήσθησαν (- / a“ ’ 9 “a > Le > \ 3 3 cal αἱ ἡμέραι τῆς λειτουργίας αὐτοῦ, ἀπῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ. Μετὰ δὲ ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας συνέλαβεν ᾿Ελισάβετ ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ, καὶ περιέ- κρυβεν ἑαυτὴν μῆνας πέντε, λέγουσα | ὅτι οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν κύριος ἐν ἡμέραις e > aA 5 Ὁ »” Q 7 > 5 / ais ἐπεῖδεν ἀφελεῖν ὄνειδός μου ἐν ἀνθρώποις. § 3. An Angel appears to Mary. — Nazareth. Luxe I. 26-38. Ν “~ Ν a7 > Ξ ,ὔ c ΝΜ ; Ἂν 3 Ν “ ~ Ἢ / Ἐν δὲ τῷ μηνὶ τῷ ἕκτῳ ἀπεστάλη ὃ ἄγγελος Γαβριὴλ ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ εἰς πόλιν τῆς Γαλιλαίας, ἣ ὄνομα Ναζαρέθ, ‘zpos παρθένον ἐμνηστευμένην ἀνδρὶ © ὄνομα ἢ » ἡ ὄνομ ρέθ, ' πρὸς παρ μνηστευμένην ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὄνομ καὶ εἰσελθὼν ἡ δὲ \ και Ἰωσήφ, ἐξ οἴκου Δαυείδ, καὶ τὸ ὄνομα τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ.. πρὸς αὐτὴν ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπεν - χαῖρε κεχαριτωμένη, ὃ κύριος μετὰ σοῦ. > Ἂν tal / 4 ‘\ 4 Ν 5», ε 5 Ν - ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ διεταράχθη, καὶ διελογίζετο ποταπὸς εἴη ὃ ἀσπασμὸς οὗτος. 3 (ye? 3 a Ἂς a , Ὁ Ν , ἊΝ a 6 A Ν εἶπεν ὁ ἄγγελος αὐτῇ " μὴ φοβοῦ, Μαριάμ - εὗρες γὰρ χάριν παρά τῷ θεῷ. καὶ > q ͵7 5» ἈΝ Ν LE ἘΠ. \ Xr / \ > cal τὴν cal ἰδοὺ συλλήμψῃ ἐν γαστρὶ καὶ τέξῃ υἱόν, Kal καλέσεις TO ονομα αὑτοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦν. Ὁ 3, / δὴ en ε 2 θ / Ν ὃ , > “ 4 ε θ \ οὗτος ἔσται μέγας καὶ vids ὑψίστου κληθήσεται, καὶ δώσει αὐτῷ κύριος ὃ θεὸς a a τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, !xat βασιλεύσει ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον ᾿Ιακὼβ εἰς a “ > ‘ τοὺς αἰῶνας, καὶ τὴς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔσται τέλος." εἶπεν δὲ Μαριὰμ πρὸς \ ” Ν᾽ > a ” a > Ὁ Ν᾽. ὃ > , : ! rs 6 ᾿ς ie. "ὦ τὸν ἄγγελον - πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο, ἐπεὶ ἄνδρα οὐ γινώσκω ; ' καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ἄγγε- Nos εἶπεν αὐτῇ - πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἐπελεύσεται ἐπὶ σέ, καὶ δύναμις ὑψίστου ἐπισκι- καὶ ἰδοὺ Ἔλι- / ε ΄ Ν > Ἂς / ex > , 3 A ν᾿ φ ‘ σάβετ ἡ ovyyevis σου καὶ αὐτὴ συνειληφυία υἱὸν ἐν γήρει αὐτῆς, καὶ οὗτος μὴν / Ἂς Ν \ , 7 , ex a ασει σοι" διὸ και τὸ γεννώμενον αγιον κληθήσεται VLOS θεοῦ. A > Ν 3 Cal a la / μὲ 5 3 tn ἣν cal ἕκτος ἐστὶν αὐτῇ TH καλουμένῃ στείρᾳ " OTL οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ του θεου πᾶν en 3 δὲ M 4 io 4 ε ὃ 5X. , Ε / / ἣν Ν en ’ὕ ῥῆμα. εἶπεν δὲ Μαριάμ - ἰδοὺ ἡ δούλη κυρίου - γένοιτό μοι κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου. λῶν EAN >’ 9 2. κα εν» καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ’ αὐτῆς ὃ ἄγγελος. § 4. Mary visits Elizabeth. — [ Place uncertain. ] Luke I. 39-56. ᾿Αναστᾶσα δὲ Μαριὰμ. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις ἐπορεύθη εἰς THY ὀρεινὴν μετὰ σπουδῆς εἰς πόλιν Ἰούδα, ' καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον Ζαχαρίου καὶ ἠσπάσατο 233. Comp. Mic. 4:7. Dan. 7: 14. Is. 9:7. Jer. 23:5. 28 ὁ ἄγγελος post πρὸς αὐτὴν NS; post εἰσελ- σοῦ C* 1 33 vged Rev.mg. | κληθήσεται υἱὸς θὼν AC D vg [Treg.]; om B L = cop West. Rey. | μετὰ σοῦ δὲ Β 1, cop Treg.mg.; add εὐλογημένη σὺ ἐν γυναιξίν A CD vg syrr {Treg.txt.] West.mg. Rev.mg. 35 γεννώμενον δὲ A B C2 DL cop; add éx θεοῦ Rev. (Ang.mg. Am.txt.) ; κληθήσεται, υἱὸς θεοῦ West. Rev. (Ang.txt. Am.mg.) 36 συνειληφυῖα A C D syrr Treg.mg.; συνείληφεν δὲ BL & 2P¢ vg cop Treg.txt. West. Rey. §§ 8, 4, 5.] OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. 3 LUKE I. > na 41 τὴν ᾿Βλισάβετ. καὶ ἐγένετο ὡς ἤκουσεν τὸν ἀσπασμὸν τῆς Μαρίας ἡ ᾿λισάβετ, ἐσκίρτησεν τὸ βρέφος ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ αὐτῆ i ἐπλήσθ 5 ἁγίου ἡ ipty ρέφος ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ αὐτῆς. Kai ἐπλήσθη πνεύματος ἁγίου ἡ > Ν ᾽ὔὕ n 42 “EXuoaBer, ' καὶ ἀνεφώνησεν κραυγῇ μεγάλῃ καὶ εἶπεν" εὐλογημένη σὺ ἐν 43 γυναιξίν, καὶ εὐλογημένος ὃ καρπὸς τῆς κοιλίας σου. καὶ πόθεν μοι τοῦτο ἵνα 44 ἔλθ Cs a a ΄ ὃς ἐμέ: ἰδοὺ ΟΣ, cs eee ε Ν a Ἢ ἢ μήτηρ τοῦ κυρίου μου πρὸς ἐμέ; ἰδοὺ yap ὡς ἐγένετο ἣ φωνὴ τοῦ ἀσπα- ων 5 ν 5 , > ’, 5 3 ͵ Ν / > a“ / σμοῦ σου εἰς TA ὦτά pov, ἐσκίρτησεν ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει τὸ βρέφος ἐν TH κοιλίᾳ pov. Ν ’,ὔ ε ¢ ΄ m” , “ , 3 an \ A5 καὶ μακαρία 4 πιστεύσασα ὅτι ἔσται τελείωσις τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὐτῇ παρὰ κυρίου. > 46 47 Καὶ εἶπεν Μαριάμ." μεγαλύνει ἡ ψυχή μου τὸν κύριον, ' Kal ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ 48 πνεῦμά μου ἐπὶ τῷ θεῷ τῷ σωτῆρί μου, ‘OTL ἐπέβλ ἐπὶ τὴ ( ἢ μά μου ἐπὶ τῷ θεῷ τῷ σωτῆρί μου, πέβλεψεν ἐπὶ τὴν ταπείνωσιν τῆς 5 , eee 25 \ Ψ 9 ON nA A ry A ε “15 > , 49 δούλης αὐτοῦ. ἰδοὺ γάρ ἀπὸ τοῦ viv μακαριοῦσίν με πᾶσαι αἱ yeveai, | ὅτι ἐποί- f tA e ὃ / \ @& bef > lal ! ἣν Ἄν ἊΝ 3 a > 50 ησέν μοι μεγάλα ὃ δυνατός. Kat ἅγιον τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, ' καὶ τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ εἰς LY \ Ν a ,ὔ > / > / ΄ὔ > ’ > 51 γενεὰς Kai γενεὰς τοῖς φοβουμένοις αὐτόν. ἐποίησεν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι αὐτου, / ε ’ἅ ’ὔ id > “ “ 4 5 ‘ 52 διεσκόρπισεν ὑπερηφάνους διανοίᾳ καρδίας αὐτῶν - καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀπὸ θ / \ vA 4 ! tal > 4 > θῶ Ν cal 53 θρόνων καὶ ὕψωσεν ταπεινούς, 'revavtas ἐνέπλησεν ἀγαθῶν καὶ πλουτοῦντας 54 ἐξαπέστειλεν κενούς. ἀντελάβετο Ἰσραὴλ παιδὸς αὐτοῦ, μνησθῆναι ἐλέους, 55 Ἱἱκαθὼς ἐλάλ ὸ ὺ ἡμῶ D ᾿Αβραὰμ καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ ς ἐλάλησεν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν, τῷ ραὰμ. καὶ τῷ pyar: TOD εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα.“ 66 "Epevev δὲ Μαριὰμ σὺν αὐτῇ ὡς μῆνας τρεῖς, καὶ ὑπέστρεψεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτῆς. § 5. Birth of John the Baptist. — [Place uncertain. ] Luxe I. 57-80. > / Lal , 57 Τῇ δὲ “EXtoaBer ἐπλήσθη 6 χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν, καὶ ἐγέννησεν υἱόν. a “~ μὲ 58 καὶ ἤκουσαν οἱ περίοικοι καὶ οἱ συγγενεῖς αὐτῇς ὅτι ἐμεγάλυνεν κύριος το ἔλεος 3 a ? a AN Ν Le Dias ἌΝ Ὁ Be 7 3 (αν ν΄: ΄ a 3 ‘ b 59 αὐτοῦ μετ᾽ αὐτῆς, Kal συνέχαιρον αὐτῇ. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν TH ἡμέρᾳ TH ὀγδόῃ lal , Ἂς Ν / “ Ἂ, a ἦλθον περιτεμεῖν τὸ παιδίον καὶ ἐκάλουν αὐτὸ ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι TOD πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 7 ρ Ὁ ὀνόμ, ρ Lal , > > 60 Ζαχαρίαν. καὶ ἀποκριθεῖσα ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ εἶπεν - οὐχί, ἀλλὰ κληθήσεται “Twdv- τ 4 a a cal 61 νης. καὶ εἶπαν πρὸς αὐτὴν ὅτι οὐδείς ἐστιν ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου ὃς καλεῖται ἴω nw -“ , 62 τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ. ἐνένευον δὲ τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό. - a Ν 63 καὶ αἰτήσας πινακίδιον ἔγραψεν λέγων: ᾿Ιωάννης ἐστὶν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ. καὶ / a A - 64 ἐθαύμασαν πάντες. ἀνεῴχθη δὲ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ παραχρῆμα καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα “ ϑ Ν 65 αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐλάλει εὐλογῶν τὸν θεόν. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος τοὺς περιοι- a > , Nii 3) “ cal ΚΕ} lal na? , al / Stall ee κοῦντας αὐτούς, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ὀρεινῇ τῆς Ιουδαίας διελαλεῖτο πάντα τὰ ῥήματα lal ld om” 66 ταῦτα, ! καὶ ἔθεντο πάντες οἱ ἀκούσαντες ἐν TH καρδιᾳ αὐτῶν, λέγοντες - τί apa τὸ παιδίον τοῦτο ἔσται; καὶ γὰρ χεὶρ κυρίου ἣν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. a ’ ‘ > , 67 Καὶ Ζαχαρίας 6 πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ἐπλήσθη πνεύματος ἁγίου καὶ ἐπροφήτευσεν ἴω μὴ , Ν > , 68 λέγων > εὐλογητὸς κύριος ὃ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, ὅτι ἐπεσκέψατο καὶ ἐποίησεν “ A / ’ e A > ae Ἢ νῷ 69 λύτρωσιν τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ, ᾿ καὶ ἤγειρεν κέρας σωτηρίας ἡμῖν ἐν οἴκῳ Δαυειὸ a §4, 55. Comp. Is. 41: 8.9. Gen. 22: 16 sq. b 59. Gen. 17: 12. Lev. 12:3. 42 κραυγῇ BL = 2P¢ Or; φωνῇ S AC D 50 εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γενεὰς Β C* LE cop; εἰς vg Treg.mg- γενεὰν καὶ γενεὰν δὲ 1 ; eis γενεὰς γενεῶν A 12 δ 23 . * 45 πιστεύσασα ὅτι Tisch. Rey.mg.; πιστεύ. (5 1). 63 τὸ δὲ ABCD; om B*L σασα, ὅτι Rey.txt. are Or Treg. West. 4 ͵ EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part I. LUKE I. γιὸ a lal cal 70 παιδὸς αὐτοῦ, ' Kaas ἐλάλησεν διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος προφητῶν 71 αὐτοῦ, ' σωτηρίαν ἐξ ἐχθρῶν ἡμῶν καὶ ἐκ χειρὸς πάντων τῶν μισούντων ἡμᾶς, 72, ] a ἔλ Ν lal td « an Ν θη ὃ 6 ΄, ε UA > ca ποιῆσαι ἔλεος μετὰ TOV πατέρων ἡμῶν Kal μνησθῆναι διαθήκης ἁγίας αὐτοῦ, by, a > an A cal 73 74' ὅρκον ὃν ὥμοσεν πρὸς ᾿Αβραὰμ τὸν πατέρα ἡμῶν," τοῦ δοῦναι ἡμῖν | ἀφόβως Ὡ \ > a ε ΄ , ree ε ’ \ 75 ἐκ χειρὸς ἐχθρῶν ῥυσθέντας λατρεύειν αὐτῷ ‘ev ὁσιότητι Kal δικαιοσύνῃ ἐνώπιον cal ἴω lal Ν ΄ὔ 76 αὐτοῦ πᾶσας τὰς ἡμέρας ἡμῶν. καὶ σύ δὲ παιδίον προφήτης ὑψίστου κληθήσῃ " ΄ὔ Ν \ , / / ε εὖ “ lal a rr 77 προπορεύσῃ γὰρ πρὸ προσώπου κυρίου ἑτοιμάσαι ὁδοὺς αὐτοῦ, ' τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν ἊΣ , - ty eo AY Θ᾽ OAs ε a aya ! el , 2) 2 a 78 σωτηρίας τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ ἐν ἀφέσει ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν ' διὰ σπλάγχνα ἐλέους θεοῦ (Eee 3 ie > ΄ Ἐπ τωι 3 Ἀγ }5 “ 12 a (ole 4 Ἂς, 79 ἡμῶν, ἐν οἷς ἐπεσκέψατο ἡμᾶς ἀνατολὴ ἐξ ὕψους | ἐπιφᾶναι τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις, τοῦ κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης. Ά δὲ ὃ , SY & Ny Ἐν» La) 4 x > > Lad > / μή 80 Τὸ δὲ παιδίον ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι, καὶ ἢν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις ἕως ε / 3 ὃ ’, 3 Lal Ἂν Ἂν > , ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ πρὸς Tov ᾿Ισραήλ. § 6. An Angel appears to Joseph. — Nazareth. MatrnH. [. 18=25. aA > a A ΄ 9 > 18 Τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἡ γένεσις οὕτως ἦν. μνηστευθείσης τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ , οι. ΄ Ν BY lal > , ce > ἊΣ 2 4 Μαρίας τῷ ᾿Ιωσήφ, πρὶν ἢ συνελθεῖν αὐτούς εὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχουσα ἐκ πνεύ- ΄, > \ ε ΟΝ Ν 19 ματος ἁγίου. ᾿Ιωσὴφ δὲ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς, δίκαιος ὧν καὶ μὴ θέλων αὐτὴν δειγμα- 20 τίσαι, ἐβουλήθη λάθρα ἀπολῦσαι αὑτήν. ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐνθυμηθέντος, ἰδοὺ " a > \ - ἄγγελος κυρίου κατ᾽ ὄναρ ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων - ᾿Ιωσὴφ υἱὸς Δαυείδ, μὴ φοβηθῃς παραλαβεῖν Μαριὰμ. τὴν γυναῖκά σου" τὸ γὰρ ἐν αὐτῇ γεννηθὲν ἐκ πνεύματός 5 ε ,ὔ Ἷ LE δὲ ne, Ν , ee > an? a 5) aK x 21 ἐστιν ἁγίου. | τέξεται δὲ υἱόν, καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν - αὐτὸς yap , Ν \ > σιν aN a” ε lat aA lal Nh / o 22 σώσει τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν. τοῦτο δὲ ὅλον γέγονεν ἵνα a »)} 28 πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος "" ἰδού ἣ παρθέ- Ν Ἁ νος ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει καὶ τέξεται υἱόν, καὶ καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄνομα > a , Ὁ" > (A) ΄ θ᾽ ε lal ε θ ’ "EB 6 ἊΝ 24 αὐτοῦ Ἑμμανουήλ, ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον pel ἡμῶν ὃ θεός. ᾿Ε γερθεὶς Δ ..9 Ν 3 Ν a 7 > ἊΨ: ε / c > a ¢m N ͵ὕ A δὲ Ἰωσὴφ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὃ ἄγγελος κυρίου, καὶ , AY al > lal ! \ 3 9. οἷν. ΕΝ μή ν΄. es Ν 25 παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ - 'καὶ οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτήν ἕως οὗ ἔτεκεν υἱόν, καὶ ἐκάλεσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦν. § 7. The Birth of Jesus. — Bethlehem. 1 γένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐξῆλθεν δόγμα παρὰ Καίσαρος Αὐγούστου a Ly, / , 2 ἀπογράφεσθαι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην. αὕτη ἀπογραφὴ ἐγένετο πρώτη ἥγεμο- 8. 78, Gen. 22: 10 sq. b 28. Is. 7: 14. Le. 1:74. ἐχθρῶν δὰ ΒΤ, 88; pmraéy AC; ἐπισκέψεται 8 Β L cop Treg.mg. West. Rev. add ἡμῶν AC D vg cop syrr|Treg.mg.] Rev. ὑχῦ. 75 πᾶσας τὰς ἡμέρας δ A Ο D West.mg. ; Mt.1:18. Ἰησοῦ ante χριστοῦ SB ΟἹ, Ζ πάσαις ταῖς ἡμέραις BL 2P¢ Treg.mg. West. cop syrr [West.]; post xd B West.mg.; om txt. 76 πρὸ προσώπου AC DLvyg; it vg Treg. Rev.mg. ἐνώπιον τὰ B West. Le. 2:2. ἐγένετο πρώτη S* D; πρώτη ἐγέ- 78 ἐπεσκέψατο N° AC Ὁ & vg Rev.mg.; vero N°’ A BC L vg cop syrr Treg. West. 88. 6, 7, 8,91 OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. 5 LUKE II, ow ΄ A Σ ΄ Κ ΄ Wee) ΄ , > , ΦΨ νεύοντος τῆς “Συρίας Kupyviov. καὶ ἐπορεύοντο πάντες ἀπογράφεσθαι, ἕκαστος ἀν ὄπ A > / NG 3: a 4 εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ πόλιν. ἀνέβη δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιωσὴφ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἐκ πόλεως > τὴ 3 , / ty “ > Ναζαρὲθ εἰς τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν εἰς πόλιν Δαυεὶδ ἥτις καλεῖται Βηθλεέμ, διὰ τὸ εἶναι Oe " \ a ANE YES ΄ \ \ a 5 αὑτὸν ἐξ οἴκου καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυείδ, ' ἀπογράψασθαι σὺν Μαριὰμ τῇ ἐμνηστευμένῃ αὐτῷ, οὔσῃ ἐγκύῳ. ᾿Βγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ ἐπλήσθ ἱ ἡμέρ D, οὔσῃ ἐγκύῳ. Ύ Ὁ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι a A ΄ \ oo Ν Ν “-“ 7 τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν, | καὶ ἔτεκεν τὸν υἱὸν αὐτῆς τὸν πρωτότοκον, καὶ ἐσπαργάνωσεν i>) aX > 5; ΄ seek 3 , eee 3 > 3 4 ,ὕ > a va αὐτὸν καὶ ἀνέκλινεν αὐτὸν ἐν φάτνῃ, διότι οὐκ ἢν αὐτοῖς τόπος ἐν τῷ καταλύματι. « § 8. An Angel appears to the Shepherds. — Near Bethlehem. Luxe 11. 8-20. Ν yd io a , a SAN a 8 Kat ποιμένες ἦσαν ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ τῇ αὐτῇ ἀγραυλοῦντες Kal φυλάσσοντες φυ- a ἊΝ “ - 9 λακὰς τῆς νυκτὸς ἐπὶ τὴν ποίμνην αὐτῶν. καὶ ἄγγελος κυρίου ἐπέστη αὐτοῖς Ν ‘i , > ΄ > 10 καὶ δόξα κυρίου περιέλαμψεν αὐτούς, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν φόβον μέγαν. καὶ εἶπεν > a a! Ἂν a 299 ON Ἂς 3 σῷ CN Ν 7 αὐτοῖς ὃ ἄγγελος - μὴ φοβεῖσθε ἰδοὺ γὰρ εὐαγγελίζομαι ὑμῖν χαρὰν μεγάλην, “ ” ‘ a a “ arte ὍΝ ταν ΄ ΄ Ψ ΄ 11 ἥτις ἔσται παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ' ὅτι ἐτέχθη ὑμῖν σήμερον σωτήρ, ὅς ἐστιν Χριστὸς 12 , > 5X A (ὃ Ν a ε - Ἁ ἴ 7 ¢ ΄ / > κύριος, ἐν πόλει Δαυείδ. καὶ τοῦτο ὑμῖν τὸ σημεῖον, εὑρήσετε βρέφος ἐσπαργα- 18 νωμένον ἐν φάτνῃ. καὶ ἐξαίφνης ἐγένετο σὺν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ πλῆθος στρατιᾶς οὐ 1 1). ξ ys ey υ AYYEAG ηθος στρατιᾶς oupa- Fe > ΄ ἊΝ θ Ν Ν δὶ , é δόέ > «ε , fA) led NU ge A a ter eS 14 viov αἰνούντων τὸν θεὸν καὶ λεγόντων - δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις θεῷ καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς εἰρήνη ἐν ἀὐθρώποις εὐδοκίας. Ἃς 4 A »“" 15 ΚΚαὶ ἐγένετο ὡς ἀπῆλθον ἀπ’ αὐτῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν οἱ ἄγγελοι, of ποιμένες ΩΝ , ¢ a“ “ ἐλάλουν πρὸς ἀλλήλους - διέλθωμεν δὴ ἕως Βηθλεὲμ καὶ ἴδωμεν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο Ν Ν A ε ΄ ΄ ral > ἘΞ 16 τὸ γεγονὸς ὃ ὃ κύριος ἐγνώρισεν ἡμῖν. καὶ ἦλθαν σπεύσαντες, καὶ ἀνεῦραν τήν Ν Ν Ν 3 Ν \ \ / , 2 “ / 9 7 Ν 17 τε Μαριὰμ, καὶ τὸν Ἰωσὴφ καὶ τὸ βρέφος κείμενον ἐν τῇ φάτνῃ - ἰδόντες δὲ , κ᾿ a ΄ n ͵ a a ἐγνώρισαν περὶ TOV ῥήματος τοῦ λαληθέντος αὐτοῖς περὶ τοῦ παιδίου τούτου. Ν ΄ ἜΣ Φ ΄ 5 ΄ ‘ “- , cen lad , 18 καὶ πάντες οἱ ἀκούσαντες ἐθαύμασαν περὶ τῶν λαληθέντων ὑπὸ τῶν ποιμένων Ν > tA ¢ ἊΝ 4 , a Γι {Ὁ a , ΕἸ 19 πρὸς αὐτούς - 7 δὲ Μαρία πάντα συνετήρει τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα συνβάλλουσα ἐν 0 a ὃ “Ὁ 2A Ae / ε ΄, ὃ ξάζ Ν a a Ν 6 Ν 20 τῇ καρδιᾷ αὑτῆς. καὶ ὑπέστρεψαν οἱ ποιμένες, δοξάζοντες καὶ αἰνοῦντες τὸν θεὸν 2 8 a Φ 3, Ἄν Ν > ΄ Ν > ΄ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἤκουσαν καὶ εἶδον καθὼς ἐλαλήθη πρὸς αὐτούς. § 9. The Circumcision of Jesus, and his Presentation in the Temple. — Beth- lehem, Jerusalem. Luke II. 21-38. 21 Kat ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν," καὶ ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα ἘΣ ται, a N ᾧ, eT EN nA 93 , \ A A ον = a αὐτοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦς, τὸ κληθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀγγέλου πρὸ TOD συλλημφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν TH κοιλίᾳ. 22 ΚΚαὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ αὐτῶν," κατὰ τὸν νόμον Μωῦ- woteeGen. 17: 12. Ley. 12: 3. b 99. Lev. 12: 2-5. 12 τὸ NADL West.mg.; om BE[Treg. Treg.mg.; οὐρανοῦ BY D* Treg.txt. West. mg.| West.txt. | ἐν S&* D; pm καὶ κείμενον meg. Se A (om καὶ) BL & 2P¢ ve cop syrr Treg. 14 εὐδοκίας N* A B* D it vg; εὐδοκία West. Rey. . Se B? LB cop syrr Treg.mg. West.mg. Rev. 13 οὐρανίου δὲ A B? et? D? LEvgcopsyrr mg. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 99 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH _ [Parr 1. LUKE 11. 4 ee td ae 5 τ} a ig] a ! θὰ , σέως, ἀνήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα παραστῆσαι τῷ κυριῳ, | καθὼς γέγραπται 5 4 v2 a 7 a »” “ "ὦ 7 “-“ , ἐν νόμῳ κυρίου" ὅτι πᾶν ἄρσεν διανοῖγον μήτραν ἅγιον τῷ κυρίῳ ΄ ! \ a a 7 Ν Ν > / 5 a , fA b κληθήσεται, ! καὶ τοῦ δοῦναι θυσίαν κατὰ τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ κυρίου, , \ 4 a “- ζεῦγος τρυγόνων ἢ δύο νοσσοῦς περισσερῶν. \ > ε ΄ 4 39, , Καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνθρωπος ἣν ἐν Ἱερουσαλήμ, ᾧ ὄνομα Svpedv, καὶ 6 ἄνθρωπος οὗτος Ψ; Ν > [4 ΄΄ ’ a 3? tA ‘ cal Ss δίκαιος καὶ εὐλαβής, προσδεχόμενος παράκλησιν τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, καὶ πνεῦμα ἣν 3 /, > ~ / ων -“ ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὑτόν - καὶ ἣν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον ὑπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου, μὴ 5 a 4 Ν A oN ” Ν Ν ’ὔ Ν Ss > “~ , > ἰδεῖν θάνατον πρὶν ἢ ἂν ἴδῃ τὸν Χριστὸν κυρίους καὶ ἦλθεν ἐν τῷ πνεύματι εἰς “~ a Ν lal Ν > Lal τὸ ἱερόν - καὶ ἐν τῷ εἰσαγαγεῖν τοὺς γονεῖς TO παιδίον ᾿Τησοῦν τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς Ν Ν ἰθ 2 a“ 7. \ > a ! ‘ ἄν τοις ἐὃ / EX > Ν 3 if κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ αὐτοῦ, ' καὶ αὐτὸς ἐδέξατο αὐτὸ εἰς τὰς ἀγκά- A Ss a λας καὶ εὐλογησεν τὸν θεὸν καὶ εἶπεν " viv ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου, δέσποτα, Ν me AGS > ee ! Ψ ϊὸ e3 θ xX ΄ Ν , /, ta 31 κατὰ TO ῥῆμα σου ἐν εἰρήνῃ, | ὅτι εἶδον οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου TO σωτήριόν σου, ' ὃ ε ΄ N ΄ ΄ a A tyr > 3 ΄, "2. α » ἡτοίμασας κατὰ πρόσωπον πάντων τῶν λαῶν, ᾿ φῶς εἰς ἀποκάλυψιν ἐθνῶν καὶ » cal > ἧς c , 9 ε Ν 3 “A Ni Se: / > = / δόξαν λαοῦ σου Ἰσραήλ. καὶ ἣν ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ Kal ἡ μήτηρ αὑτοῦ θαυμάζον- SK “-“ , ἂν > A Ν > / > Ν ͵ὔ Ν > τες ἐπὶ τοῖς λαλουμένοις περὶ αὐτοῦ. Kal εὐλόγησεν αὐτοὺς Συμεών Kal εἶπεν πρὸς Μαριὰμ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ ἰδοὺ οὗτος κεῖται εἰς πτῶσιν καὶ ἀνάστασιν a λλῶν ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ Kat εἰς σημεῖον ἀντιλεγόμενον. καὶ σοῦ δὲ αὐτῆς τὴ πολλῶν ἐν τῷ Ισραὴλ καὶ εἰς σημεῖον γόμενον. Ὁ δὲ αὐτῆς τὴν ψυχὴν διελεύσεται ῥομφαία, ὅπως ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν ἐκ πολλῶν καρδιῶν διαλο- γισμοί. Καὶ jv ΓΑννα προφῆτις, θυγάτηρ Φανουήλ, ἐκ φυλῆς ᾿Ασήρ" αὕτη προβεβη- κυῖα ἐν ἡμέραις πολλαῖς, ζήσασα μετὰ ἀνδρὸς ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς, ' καὶ αὐτὴ χήρα ἕως ἐτῶν ὀγδοήκοντα τεσσάρων, ἣ οὐκ ἀφίστατο τοῦ ἱεροῦ νηστείαις καὶ δεήσεσι λατρεύουσα νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν. καὶ αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐπιστᾶσα ἀνθωμολογεῖτο τῷ θεῷ καὶ ἐλάλει περὶ αὐτοῦ πᾶσιν τοῖς προσδεχομέ- νοις λύτρωσιν Ἱερουσαλήμ. 8 10. The Wise Men from the East. — Jerusalem, Bethlehem. Mart. 11. 1-12. Tod δὲ Ἰησοῦ γεννηθέντος ἐν Βηθλεὲμ τὴς ᾿Ιουδαίας ἐν ἡμέραις Ἡρώδου τοῦ βασιλέως, ἰδοὺ μάγοι ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν παρεγένοντο εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ' λέγοντες: ποῦ ἐστὶν ὃ τεχθεὶς βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ; εἴδομεν γὰρ αὐτοῦ τὸν ἀστέρα ἐν τῇ > “ QA o@. lol > ~ > 4 \ Oe Ν τ , > ἀνατολῇ, καὶ ἤλθομεν προσκυνῆσαι αὐτῷ. ἀκούσας δὲ ὃ βασιλεὺς Ἡρώδης éra- ράχθη, καὶ πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα per’ αὐτοῦ, ' καὶ συναγαγὼν πάντας τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ γραμματεῖς τοῦ λαοῦ ἐπυνθάνετο παρ᾽ αὐτῶν ποῦ ὃ Χριστὸς γεννᾶται. οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ - ἐν Βηθλεὲμ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας - οὕτως γὰρ γέγραπται διὰ τοῦ προ- φήτου"“ καὶ σὺ Βηθλεέμ, γῆ ᾿Ιούδα, οὐδαμῶς ἐλαχίστη εἶ ἐν 8.93, Ἐχ. 18: 2. Comp. Num. 8: 16, 17. b 24. Lev. 12: 6, 8. © 32. Is.42: 6. 4 34. Comp. Is. 8: 14. e 6. Mic. 621: Le. 2:26. πρὶν ἢ ἂν Ne (S* ἕως ἂν) L 33 36, 87 ᾿Ασήρ (αὕτη mpoBeB. — ὀγδοηκ. τοσ- Treg.mg.; om ἢ B Treg.txt. [West.]; om ἂν σάρων), West. Rev. ; ASD: 33 ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ NBD Lye; 37 ἕως S* A BLE vg; ὡς Ne syrr; om D. ὃ Ἰωσὴφ A | αὐτοῦ se S* Leop.; omS*BD Mt.2:18. φαίνεται NC DL; ἐφάνη B vg Treg. West. 85 58NAD syrr [Treg.] it vg West.mg. West.mg.; om Β L & vg cop West.txt. §§ 10, 11.] OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. 7 MATT. II. Lal ἂν ’ὔ 3 I , ὃ > lal Ν > 4 e 4 Tots ἡγεμόσιν ᾿Ιούδα: ἐκ σοῦ yap ἐξελεύσεται ἡγούμενος, ὅστις ποιμανεῖ τὸν λαόν μου τὸν ᾿Ισραήλ. τότε Ἡρώδης λάθρα Ν » lal a καλέσας τοὺς μάγους ἠκρίβωσεν παρ᾽ αὐτῶν τὸν χρόνον τοῦ φαινομένου ἀστέρος, ! ἣν m 3 Ν > Ν 3 ς ,ὔ 2£ / > “ Ων 8 ‘Kal πέμψας αὐτοὺς εἰς Βηθλεὲμ εἶπεν - πορευθέντες ἐξετάσατε ἀκριβῶς περὶ a / ΕΑ Ν A > ΄ / big Jia ἐν Ν ΄ τοῦ παιδίου - ἐπὰν δὲ εὕρητε, ἀπαγγείλατέ μοι, ὅπως κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν προσκυνήσω Sees ε Ἂς 9 4 a , 3 4 NY 5S. A lial Sa) ΄ ἃ “5 9 αὐτῷ. οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες τοῦ βασιλέως ἐπορεύθησαν - καὶ ἰδοὺ ὁ ἀστήρ, ὃν εἶδον 10 ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ, προῆγεν αὐτούς ἕως ἐλθὼν ἐστάθη ἐπάνω οὗ ἣν τὸ παιδίον. ἰδό ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ, προῆγ άθη ἐπάνω οὗ ἣν τὸ παιδίον. ἰδόν- Ἂν, Ν > , > 4 \ 4 4d - "5 / 3 Ν Le 11 τες δὲ τὸν ἀστέρα ἐχάρησαν χαρὰν μεγάλην σφόδρα. Kai ἐλθόντες εἰς THY οἰκίαν “ Ν “ εἶδον τὸ παιδίον μετὰ Μαρίας τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ, καὶ πεσόντες προσεκύνησαν aA τ or ay \ \ sn ͵, rst Re κ᾿ αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνοίξαντες τοὺς θησαυροὺς αὐτῶν προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ δῶρα, χρυσὸν Ν Ψ Ν ᾽ὔ Ν , ᾽ 3 Ν 3 / Ν 12 καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν. καὶ χρηματισθέντες κατ᾽ ὄναρ μὴ ἀνακάμψαι πρὸς Ἡρώδην, δι’ ἄλλης ὁδοῦ ἀνεχώρησαν εἰς τὴν χώραν αὐτῶν. § 11. The Flight into Egypt. Herod’s cruelty. The return. — Bethlehem, Nazareth. Mart. II. 13-23. , Ἂς 3 »" «ον Ἦν rs / ar / a? ‘ 18 -Αναχωρησάντων δὲ αὐτῶν, ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος κυρίου φαίνεται, Kar’ ὄναρ τῷ Ἰωσὴφ Ν ΄ aA a λέγων : ἐγερθεὶς παράλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ, Kal φεῦγε εἰς Αἴ- έγων + ἐγερ ρ ὴ ρ , 3 a ¢ ἍἋ ” / Ν © “SN a x , γυπτον, καὶ ἴσθι ἐκεῖ ἕως ἂν εἴπω σοι: μέλλει yap Ἡρώδης ζητεῖν τὸ παιδίον 14 τοῦ ἀπολέσαι αὐτό. ὃ δὲ ἐγερθεὶς παρέλαβεν τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ 16 νυκτός, καὶ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ἣν ἐκεῖ ἕως τῆς τελευτῆς Ἡρώδου : ἵνα Pee ec Ν Ἐν , Ἂν a ΄, ΄ a> Sie ie πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος "" ἐξ Αἰγύπτου ἐκάλεσα τὸν υἱόν μου. 16 Τότε Ἡρώδης ἰδών ὅτι ἐνεπαίχθη ὑπὸ τῶν μάγων, ἐθυμώθη λίαν, καὶ ἀποστείλας 3 A fe Ν a Ν 3 Ν Ν.5 a a εἰ τ 2 A BEN ἀνεῖλεν πάντας τοὺς παῖδας τοὺς ἐν Βηθλεὲμ, καὶ ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς ὁρίοις αὐτῆς ἀπὸ 17 διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω, κατὰ τὸν χρόνον ὃν AKpiBwoev παρὰ τῶν μάγων. τότε 18 ἐπληρώθη τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἱερεμίου τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος “Ὁ φωνὴ ἐν ῬΡαμὰ ἐπ τ τὸ θῇ it pop ii Y ἠκούσθη, κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὀδυρμὸς πολύς, Ῥαχὴλ κλαίουσα τὰ / 2 lel Ν 3 » ial Ψ > > / τέκνα αὑτῆς, Kal οὐκ ἤθελεν παρακληθῆναι, ὅτι οὐκ εἰσίν. 19 Τελευτήσαντος δὲ τοῦ Ἡρώδου, ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος κυρίου φαίνεται κατ᾽ ὄναρ τῷ 20 Ἰωσὴφ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ ᾿' λέγων - ἐγερθεὶς παράλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ πορεύου εἰς γῆν ᾿Ισραήλ- τεθνήκασιν γὰρ οἱ ζητοῦντες τὴν ψυχὴν τοῦ 21 παιδίου. 6 δὲ ἐγερθηὶς παρέλαβεν τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν 22 εἰς γῆν Ἰσραήλ. ἀκούσας δέ ὅτι ᾽Αρ- χέλαος βασιλεύει τῆς ᾿Ιουδαὶας ἀντὶ Luke II. 39, 40. tal / ld A 4 ἐκεῖ ἀπελθεῖν: χρηματισθεὶς δὲ κατ᾽ 89 Kai ὡς ἐτέλεσαν πάντα κατὰ τὸν τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρώδου, ἐφοβήθη ὄναρ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὰ μέρη τῆς Ta- νόμον κυρίου, ἐπέστρεψαν εἰς τὴν T'a- 23 λιλαίας. καὶ ἐλθὼν κατῴκησεν εἰς λιλαίαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἑαυτῶν Να- #15. Hos. 11 : 1. "18, Jer. 81:15. Comp. Jer. 40: 1. Mt. 2:18. κλαυθμὸς NB Zit vg cop; pm Bz Treg. West. Rev. | ἐπέστρεψαν (S* -per) θρῆνος καὶ Ο D Lz N* B = Treg.mg.; ὑπέστρεψαν (quod sxpe Le. 2:39. κατὰ δὴ" D L are; pm. τὰ 8° A ap Luc) 8° A D L Treg. txt. 8 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part 1. LUKE 11. πόλιν λεγομένην Ναζαρέθ' ὅπως 40 ζαρέθ. τὸ δὲ παιδίον ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐ- tal Ἂς ἘΡ Ν x a oo a ΄ re Ν πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν κραταιοῦτο πληρούμενον σοφίας, καὶ “ “ ΄ a 2 a > ae } yee ὅτι Ναζωραῖος κληθήσεται. χάρις θεοῦ ἣν ἐπ’ αὐτό. 8 12. At twelve years of age Jesus goes up to the Passover. — Jerusalem. Luxe 1]. 41-52. 41 Katie 5 ἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ Kat’ ἔτος εἰς Ἵ λὴμ τῇ ἑορτῇ τοῦ πά ἐπορεύοντο οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ κατ᾽ ἔτος εἰς Ιερουσαλὴμ τῇ ἑορτῇ τοῦ πάσχα. 42 Ἂ; 20 "» 7 5. 5 Ban 5 αβαινό Cer. ν᾿ Ἃ ἔθ a ε “ καὶ ὅτε ἐγένετο ἐτῶν δώδεκα, ἂν ντων αὐτῶν κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑορτῆς, 43 Ἂν λ la Ν ε tA > “ ε / > Ἂν ΜΕ. / Ἴ lal (4 καὶ τελειωσάντων τὰς ἡμέρας, ἐν TH ὑποστρέφειν αὐτοὺς ὑπέμεινεν Ἰησοῦς ὃ lal 5 ε Ἃ Ἂς 3 3, 13 Lad > a , Ν WER =| 44 παῖς ἐν Ἱερουσαλήμ, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ. νομίσαντες δὲ αὐτὸν πὰ > “ δί a 6 « / eQa \ > / 9. Ν > tal / εἶναι ἐν TH συνοδίᾳ ἦλθον ἡμέρας ὁδὸν καὶ ἀνεζήτουν αὐτὸν ἐν τοῖς συγγενέσιν » ἫΝ ral “ \ Ν (4 4 ε , > c Ν > le) 45 καὶ τοῖς γνωστοῖς, καὶ μὴ εὑρόντες ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἱερουσαλὴμ ἀναζητοῦν- ceed ΡΟ 7.2 Ν ε , a [δι 34 2 ae a / 46 τες αὐτόν. καὶ ἐγένετο μετὰ ἡμέρας τρεῖς εὗρον αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καθεζόμενον ΕἸ ’ “ ΄ὔ ἌΡ᾿" ΄ ΕΣ A> 3 “ 3 4 9... ἢ 47 ἐν μέσῳ τῶν διδασκάλων καὶ ἀκούοντα αὐτῶν καὶ ἐπερωτῶντα αὐτούς " ἐξίσταντο ων ἴω 5 fal 48 δὲ πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ TH συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ. καὶ 297 ἊΝ - Ἢ 2 , \ > x pope cs , > a , i ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐξεπλάγησαν, καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτὸν ἣ μήτηρ GUTOD* τέκνον, TL > ’ ε La 7 > Ν ε z: 3 Ν 5 / > a / Ν 49 ἐποίησας ἡμῖν οὕτως ; ἰδοὺ ὃ πατήρ σου κἀγὼ ὀδυνώμενοι ἐζητοῦμέν σε... καὶ > 7 ya 5, Ψ A a , εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς - τί ὅτι ἐζητεῖτέ με; οὐκ ἤἥδειτε OTL ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου a 3 , \ > \ > a NS Cc ἈΝ 5 ie > a Ν / 50 51 δεῖ εἶναί με; καὶ αὐτοὶ ov συνῆκαν TO ῥῆμα ὃ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς. Kal κατέβη > 9 “ὦ Ns: 3 / Ao ε / 3 o N, Δα , 52 per αὐτῶν καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς Ναζαρέθ, καὶ ἣν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖς. καὶ ἣ μήτηρ cal / tal na Lee] lal αὐτοῦ διετήρει πάντα TA ῥήματα ἐν TH καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς. καὶ ᾿Ιησοῦς προέκοπτεν 9 A ΄ Name ΄ \ ΄ \ a es. , ἐν τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ ἡλικίᾳ Kal χάριτι παρὰ θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις. § 18. The Genealogies. Mart. I. 1-17. Luxe III. 25-38, inverted. 1 Βίβλος γενέσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 38 Tod θεοῦ, τοῦ “Addy, τοῦ Σήθ, τοῦ υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ υἱοῦ ᾿Αβραάμ. 37 “Evds, | τοῦ Καϊνάμ, τοῦ Μελελεήλ, nan? a lal τοῦ ᾿Ιαρέτ, τοῦ ᾿νώχ, τοῦ Μαθουσα- 36. Ad, Ἰ τοῦ Λάμεχ, τοῦ Νῶε, τοῦ Σήμ, τοῦ ᾿Αρφαξάδ, τοῦ Kai- 35 νάμ, ‘Tod Sada, τοῦ Ἔβερ, τοῦ Φαλέκ, τοῦ Ῥαγαῦ, τοῦ e- 84 ρούχ, ἱτοῦ Ναχώρ, τοῦ Θάρα, τοῦ 3 > / 2 ᾿Αβραὰμ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰσαάκ, Ἴσα- ᾿Αβραάμ, τοῦ ᾿Ισαάκ, τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβ, Ν δὲ > ee ἣν 3 , > Ν ὰκ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰακώβ, Ἰακὼβ Ἂν > / ‘\ 3 4 Ν Ν δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Ιούδαν καὶ τοὺς ἴω Lol / Lal > 4, 3 ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, “Iovdas δὲ ἐγέννησεν 33 τοῦ Ἰούδα, τοῦ Φάρες, τοῦ Eopop, ~ = a , κι} ΄ τὸν Φαρὲς καὶ τὸν Ζαρὰ ἐκ τῆς Θάμαρ, τοῦ ᾿Αρνεί, Tod Αδμείν, τοῦ ᾿Α μιναδάβ, 8. 28, Heb. 15.11.1. Comp. Is. 53: 2. Zech.6: 12: Rey. δ: ὃ. Le. 2:40. σοφίας S* A D Treg.mg.; σο- 51 παντα τὰ ῥήματα δὲ" BD; add ταῦτα gia S° BL 33 Treg.txt. West. Sc A C L vg Treg.txt. et [mg.]. 42 ἄναβ. αὐτῶν XS B DL cop Treg.mg.; 52 ἐν τῇ XN Leop; om AC Ὁ Treg.; om add eis Ἱεροσόλυμα A C it ve [Treg.txt.]. ev B West. 48 ἐζητοῦμεν δ A C D Lit vg syrr Or.; Le. 3:33. τοῦ ᾿Αμιναδάβ om B. West. (ζητοῦμεν δὰ B West. Rey.mg. ; τοῦ ᾿Αδάμ δ", §§ 12, 13.1 10 11 12 19 14 15 16 17 MATT. 1. Φαρὲς δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν “Eopop, Ἔσ- Ν ρὼμ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Αράμ, ᾿Αρὰμ δὲ ‘ 3 ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Αμιναδάβ, ᾿Αμιναδὰβ ἈΝ 5.2 ‘ ΄ \ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ναασσών, Ναασσὼν δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Σαλμών, Ξαλμὼν δὲ 5 (Ae Ν Ν 3 “a ε δι ἐγέννησεν τὸν Βοὲς ἐκ τῆς Ῥαχάβ, Βοὲς δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Ιωβὴδ ἐκ τῆς Ῥούθ, Ἰωβὴδ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἴεσ- cai, Ἰεσσαὶ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ τὸν βασιλέα. Δαυεὶδ δὲ ἐγέννησεν Ν al > fol fal Lee τὸν Σολομῶνα ἐκ τῆς τοῦ Οὐρώου, Ὁ" Σολομὼν δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν “PoBoap, Ῥοβοάμ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Αβιά, "A Bia δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Ασάφ,᾿ Ασὰφ ΟῚ , \ 3 4, 3 ‘\ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Ιωσαφάτ, Ιωσαφὰτ Ave RS a2: Ν 3 ΄, 3 Ν ΣΝ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Ιωράμ, ᾿Ιωρὰμ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾽᾿Οζείαν, ᾿Οζείας δὲ ἐγὲν- ‘ 3 re 3 ΄ ἈΝ a? νησεν τὸν ᾿Ιωάθαμ, ᾿Ιωάθαμ, δὲ ἐγέν- νήῆσεν τὸν "Αχαζ, Αχαζ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν “Héexiav, ᾿Πζεκίας δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Μανασσῆ, Μανασσῆς δὲ ἐγέν- ‘ τὶ Τὰ > Ν Ag 5 tA νησεν τὸν ᾿Αμώς, ᾿Αμὼς δὲ ἐγέννησεν \ ᾽ ΄ > ΄ tart τὸν ᾿Ιωσείαν, ᾿Ιωσείας δὲ ἐγέννησεν ἀν “, \ \ > \ 3 A tov ᾿Ιεχονίαν καὶ τοὺς ἀδηλφοὺς αὐτοῦ X Ui; ἐπὶ τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος. μετὰ ἣν Ν / a 3 δὲ τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος Ἴεχο- vias ἐγέννησεν τὸν Σαλαθιήλ, Ξαλα- θιὴλ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ζοροβάβελ Hk rev eee ἢ Ζοροβάβελ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Αβιουδ, ᾿Αβιοὺδ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Βλιακείμ, ᾿ἘἘλιακεὶμ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Αζώρ, ᾿Αζὼρ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν Σαδώκ, Σαδὼκ x > , \ 2 4 3 Ν Ν δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Αχείμ, ᾿Αχεὶμ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿λιούδ, ᾿Ελιοὺδ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν ᾿Πλεάζαρ, ᾿Βλεάζαρ δὲ ἐγέννησεν τὸν αθθάν, Μαθθὰν δὲ ἐ- γῶνησεν τὸν ᾿Ιακώβ, ᾿Ιακὼβ δὲ ἐγέν- νησεν τὸν Ἰωσὴφ τὸν ἄνδρα Μαρίας, 3 e 3 ΄ 3 a ε fe ἐξ ἧς ἐγεννήθη ᾿Ιησοῦς ὃ λεγόμενος Χριστός. Πᾶσαι οὖν αἱ γενεαὶ ἀπὸ ᾿Α βραὰμ 92 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. 2 LUKE IiIl. tov Ναασσών, τοῦ add, τοῦ Boos, τοῦ ᾿Ιωβήδ, τοῦ Ἴεσσαί, τοῦ Δαυείδ, τοῦ Ναθάμ, τοὺ Ματταθά, τοῦ Μεννά, τοῦ Μελεά, τοῦ ᾿ΒΕλιακείμ, τοῦ ᾿Ιωνάμ, τοῦ Ἴω- and, τοῦ ᾿Ιούδα, τοῦ Συμεών, τοῦ Λευεί, τοῦ Μαθθάθ, τοῦ ἸἸωρείμ, τοῦ ᾿Ελιέζερ, τοῦ "Inco, τοῦ "Hp, τοῦ ᾿Ελμαδάμ, τοῦ Κωσάμ, τοῦ ᾿Αδδεί, τοῦ Μελχεί, τοῦ Νηρεί, τοῦ Σαλαθιήλ, τοῦ Ζορο- βάβελ, τοῦ Ῥησά, τοῦ Ἰωανάν, ma») ὃ / “ 3 / aA - 4 τοῦ ᾿Ιωδά, τοῦ ᾿Ιωσήχ, τοῦ Σεμεείν, τοῦ Ματταθίου, τοῦ Μαάθ, τοῦ Nayyat, τοῦ ᾿Βσλεί, τοῦ Ναούμ, τοῦ ᾿Αμώς, τοῦ Ματταθίου, τοῦ ᾿Ιωσήφ, τοῦ ᾿Ιανναΐ, τοῦ Μελχεί, τοῦ Λευεί, τοῦ Μαθθάθ, Ν cn 3 ΜΆ ΠῚ es « 5 Καὶ avtos ᾿Ιησοῖῦς --- ὧν vios, ws ἐνο- ae μίζετο, ᾿Ιωσήφ, τοῦ Ἣλεί, Lal ’ὔ lal ἕως Δαυεὶδ γενεαὶ δεκατέσσαρες, καὶ ἀπὸ Δαυεὶδ ἕως τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος an « “ ὅν τον a \ γενεαὶ δεκατέσσαρες, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος ἕως τοῦ Χριστοῦ γενεαι δεκατέσσαρες. ) ee PART all: ----.Ὄ.ὃς.ς. ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. Time: About one year [or nine months]. " Ἵ Ι 8 14. The Ministry of John the Baptist. — The Desert. The Jordan. * Luxe III. 1-18. 25 4 Ἂν ΄ “- ε ,ὔ / ‘4 Ι΄ » 1 ν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ τῆς ἡγεμονίας Τιβερίου Καίσαρος, ἡγεμονεύοντος Ποντίου Πειλάτου τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας, καὶ τετρααρχοῦντος τῆς Γαλιλαίας Ἣρώδου, Φι- λίππου δὲ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ τετρααρχοῦντος τῆς ᾿Ιτουραίας καὶ Τραχωνίτιδος χώ- 2 pas, καὶ Λυσανίου τῆς ᾿Αβιληνῆς τετρααρχοῦντος, | ἐπὶ ἀρχιερέως [Αννα καὶ Kai- ada, ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ Mart. III. 1-12. Marx I. 1-8. ἐπὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν Ζαχα- 1 Ἔν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέρας 1 ᾿Αρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 8 piov υἱὸν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ," >. on / ? 2 a an 5 ΄, Ἂν = > “-“ ‘ ἐκείναις παραγίνεται lw- 4 "Incov Χριστοῦ---ἐγένε- καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν. ΄ ε ΄ 3 ΄ ε ΄, ΄ὔ a? ΄ MA ἄννης ὃ βαπτιστής κη- το ᾿Ιωάννης ὃ βαπτίζων περίχωρον τοῦ Ιορδάνου ἧς ρύσσων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ τῆς ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ καὶ κηρύσ- κηρύσσων βάπτισμα με- 2 ᾿Ιουδαίας, ' λέγων " pe σων βάπτισμα μετανοίας τανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἅμαρ- τανοεῖτε" ἤγγικεν γὰρ εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν ---- 4 τιῶν, ' ὡς γέγραπται ἐν — , ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρα- 2 καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ βίβλῳ λόγων Ἡσαΐου » » 41% 8 νῶν. οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ‘Hoaia τῷ προφήτῃ" τοῦ προφήτου" ε ε Ν Ν ε A > ἌΣ EY bali κν / ὃ ῥηθεὶς διὰ Ἡσαΐου ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἀποστέλ- τοῦ προφήτου λέγον. «λω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου τος" Δ πρὸ προσώπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει Y, φωνὴ Bodv- 8 τὴν ὁδόν σου" φω- φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ" νὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ τῇ ἐρήμῳ" ἕτοι- ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ἐρήμῳ" " ἑτοιμά- μάσατε τὴν ὃδὸν egy , 9 ν ega ΄ > AG ὁδὸν κυρίου, εὐ- cate τὴν δδὸν κυ- κυρίου, εὐθείας θείας ποιεῖτε τὰς ρίου, εὐθείας ποι- ποιεῖτε τὰς τρί- 4 > “ Cal Ἂν ’ > nw “ τρίβους αὐτοῦ. etre τὰς τρίβους 5 βους αὐτοῦ’ πᾶσα αὐτοῦ. φάραγξ πληρωθή- 8.9, Mal.3: 1. 15.40: 3. 3 etc. Is. 40: 3 sq. Le. 3: 4. προφήτου NS B D Lygcop; add 2 τῷ (om D [Treg.]) Ἡσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ λέγοντος A C syrr. NBDLA 38 it vg cop; τοῖς προφήταις A Me.1: 1. ιὖ χῦ δὰ" Or. Revy.mg.; add υἱοῦ Rev.mg. ἐγὼ δὲ AL; om BD PregaWest. (rod A) θεοῦ S*° A BDL vg copsyrr Treg. 4 ὁ βαπτίζων 8 BL 33 cop; om ὁ ἃ D. West.mg. Rev.txt. § 14.] 4 ANNOUNCEMENT OF OUR LORD’S MINISTRY. 11 LUKE III. \ A ΝΜ \ Ν σεται καὶ πᾶν ὄρος καὶ βουνὸς ταπεινωθήσεται, καὶ »” Ν “-“ ἐσται τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας καὶ ai τραχεῖαι εἰς ὁδοὺς , ΄, ry A N x ΄ a a 6 λείας, καὶ ὄψεται πᾶσα σὰρξ TO σωτήριον τοῦ θεοῦ. MATT. III. Αὐτὸς δὲ 6 ᾿Ιωάννης εἶχεν τὸ &- δυμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τριχῶν καμήλου καὶ , lA Ν Ν 3 Ν 3 ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐ- A A ε Ν Ni 3 Ay 9 19 Ν τοῦ ἡ δὲ τροφὴ ἣν αὐτοῦ ἀκρίδες καὶ ὅ μέλι ἄγριον. τότε ἐξεπορεύετο πρὸς A ey 4 αὐτὸν Ἱεροσόλυμα καὶ πᾶσα ἡ ‘lov- a? dala Kal πᾶσα ἡ περίχωρος τοῦ ‘lop- δάνου, ' καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο ἐν τῷ Iop- ΄ ἐν δ΄ 9 3 nA > x ΄ δάνῃ ποταμῷ ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐξομολογού- μενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν. 7 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ πολλοὺς τῶν Φαρισαίων , , 3 f pia δὰ καί Σαδδουκαίων ἐρχομένους ἐπὶ τὸ βάπτισμα εἶπεν αὐτοῖς . γεννήματα > ὃ a 4 ε ὃ € (es a 92K ἐχιδνῶν, τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν ἀπὸ 6 MARK I. ν 3 ee Καὶ ἦν ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρί- ,ὔ >." χας καμήλου καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην Ν \ 5 Ν 3 cal \ om” 5 , περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἔσθων ἀκρί- 5 ‘ \ zy " \ 2¢ ΄ as καὶ μέλι ἄγριον. ---- καὶ ἐξεπορεύ- ἈΝ 3 A a ε > ,ὔ , «TO πρὸς αὐτὸν πᾶσα ἡ ᾿Ιουδαία χώ- Ν ε a pa καὶ ot ᾿Ιεροσολυμῖται πάντες, καὶ / lal fal ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ ᾿Ιορδάνῃ “ c ποταμῷ ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς apap- τίας αὐτῶν. --- LUKE III. ” > “ 7 ‘EXeyev οὖν τοῖς ἐκπορευομένοις »» a e 9 > a ΄ ὄχλοις βαπτισθῆναι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ" γεννή- 3 -"᾽ ’ ε ," (9 tay ματα ἐχιδνῶν, τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυ- 8 γεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς ; ποιή- a , 3 a , bd > Ν 9.7 ol , 8 τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς ; ποιήσατε οὖν σατε οὖν καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας, 9 καρπὸν ἄξιον τῆς μετανοίας, Ἷ καὶ μὴ καὶ μὴ ἄρξησθε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ’ ΄ ΄ 3 ε ᾿ς δ , , ” κ ᾽ ΄ὕ ΄ δόξητε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς" πατέρα πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν ᾿Αβραάμ" λέγω »” Ν ᾽ 7 - “ Ν (We ed A lea) 9 , ε Ν ΕἸ “-“ ἔχομεν τὸν ᾿Αβραάμ." λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν γὰρ ὑμῖν ὅτι δύναται ὃ θεὸς ἐκ τῶν ὅτι δύναται ὃ θεὸς ἐκ τῶν λίθων τού- λίθων τούτων ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ ’ABpa- 10 των ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ ᾿Αβραάμ. ἤδη ἄμ. ἤδη δὲ καὶ ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν 11 ἐγὼ μὲν ὑμᾶς βαπτίζω Ν Ν ε 9 id x Ν es lal δὲ καὶ ἢ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν , A A > , N δένδρων κεῖται: πᾶν οὖν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται. v1 12 9 τῶν δένδρων κεῖται" πᾶν οὖν δένδρον 10 Ν “ A Ν > , μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται. Καὶ ἐπηρώτων SEEN eo \ , Ξ a) αὐτὸν οἱ ὀχλὸι λέγοντες " τί οὖν ποι- ΄ 5 Ν Lo” 3 -“ ε Ν ΄ ~ ΄ ήσωμεν ; | ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς " ὁ ἔχων δύο χιτῶνας μεταδότω a ἈΝ Ν Ν ε μι B ’ ε ’, “ ἦλθ δὲ ἣν τῷ μὴ EXOVTL, καὶ ὁ ἔχων βρώματα ομοίως ποιειτω. ἦλθον δὲ καὶ τελῶναι βαπτισθῆναι καὶ εἶπαν πρὸς αὐτόν - διδάσκαλε, τί ποϊήσω- 19 14 ε δὲ > ‘\ > 2 > δὲ λέ Ν Ν ὃ , μεν; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς" μηδὲν πλέον παρὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον a , he Χ \ ΄ ὑμῖν πράσσετε. ἐπηρώτων δὲ αὐτὸν καὶ στρατευόμενοι λέγοντες " τί Ν ε Lal Ss Ν 3 , ο, ποιήσωμεν καὶ ἡμεῖς; καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς" μηδένα διασείσητε, 1ὅ , / Ν 3 a > , ε lal μηδένα συκοφαντήσητε, καὶ ἀρκεῖσθε τοις ὀψωνίοις ὑμῶν. Προσδο- “ Ν “a a Ν / > oJ , 39 A κῶντος δὲ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ διαλογιζομένων πάντων ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν MATT. III. AVR ey 4 x / 7 καὶ ἐκήρυσσεν λέγων " Le. 8: ὅ. εὐθείας B Ds" Κὶ vg Or. ; εὐθεῖαν 8 MARK I. ~ ee 8 --- ἐγὼ ἐβάπτισα ὑμᾶς ‘\ a? / , περὶ τοῦ Ἰωάννου, μή- > A ” ε r ποτε GUTOS εἴη ὃ Xpt- 4 16 στός, | ἀπεκρίνατο λέ- γων πᾶσιν 6 ᾿Ιωάννης " Le. 8: 14. πρὸς αὐτούς δὰ A Ο5; αὐτοῖς BC* 1.538 it vg Treg. West. | μηδένα sec. S* cop; μηδὲ NCA BCD LEit vg Treg. West. Rey. AC Lop. Mt.3: 7. βάπτισμα S* B Rev. (Am.mg.) add αὐτοῦ NPC D L [Treg.] Rev.txt. 12 MATT. III. eae! > “4 > 4 ἐγὼ ἐν ὕδατι εἰς μετά- ε Neos) / νοιαν" ὃ δὲ ὀπίσω μου , / ᾿ ἐρχόμενος ἰσχυρότερός - \ μου ἐστίν, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ε Ἂν Ν c , ἱκανὸς τὰ ὑποδήματα os a βαστάσαι: αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν πνεύματι ε id \ / e Ν 12 αγίῳ καὶ πυρί. οὗ TO , 5 a οὗ 3 “ Ν TWTVOV €V ΤΊ χέιρι αὐυτου και διακαθα- Lal \ iA > aA Ν ΄, Ν ρίει Τὴν ἅλωνα αυτου, και συνάξει TOV a er vain Las ἧς > θ , \ δὲ OLTOV αὐτου εἰς τὴν ATOVUYKYV, TO ε ΄ Αὐτῷ t ἄχυρον κατακαύσει TUPL ἀσβέστῳ. 7 ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF MARK I. ὑδ Ν c ὕδατι, — ἔρχεται ὃ > , , ἰσχυρότερός μου ὀπίσω τ εν μου, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς , A \ “02 κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἰμάντα col «ες lal ἴω τῶν ὑποδημάτῶν αὐτοῦ" Ν - αὐτὸὲ δὲ βαπτίσει ce “ > , ε / ὑμᾶς ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ. [Part IL LUKE 11. [2 -“ μεν ὕδατι βαπτίζω ὑμᾶς" a” δὲ ee) / ἔρχεται δὲ ὁ ἰσχυρότε- ΄ = pos μου, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ε Ν cal \ ε 4, ἱκανὸς λῦσαι τὸν twav- τα τῶν ὑποδημάτων aim aA eyes. ε “ ld TOU, αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτί- σει ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ \ 2 17 καὶ πυρί" ov τὸ πτύον > “~ Ν 5 wn nw οὟ ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ διακαθᾶραι τὴν A“ \ “ ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ καὶ συναγαγεῖν τὸν σῖ- > - 3 / > ἴω Ἂς: Ν τον εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην αὐτοῦ, τὸ δὲ , , » ἄχυρον κατακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ. 13 Πολλὰ μὲν οὖν καὶ ἕτερα παρακα- ρ λῶν εὐηγγελίζετο τὸν λαόν. § 15. The Baptism of Jesus. — Zhe Jordan. Marr. II]. 13-17, 18 Τότε παραγίνεται ὃ Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλι- λαίας ἐπὶ τὸν Ιορδάνην πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην τοῦ βαπτισθῆναι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 14 ὃ δὲ διεκώλυεν αὐτὸν λέγων > ἐγὼ χρείαν ἔχω 9 Mark I. 9-11. Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν éxet- vais ταῖς ἡμέραις ἣλ- θεν "Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ Ναζα- ρὲτ τῆς Γαλιλαίας καὶ ἐβαπτίσθη εἰς τὸν ’lop- δάνην ὑπὸ ᾿Ιωάννου. Luxe III. 21-28. Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ βαπτισθῆναι ἅπαντα \ \ Xp a τὸν λαὸν Kat Ἰησοῦ βαπτισθέντος A / > 15 ὑπὸ σοῦ βαπτισθῆναι, καὶ σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; ἀποκρι- A > ΄ θεὶς δὲ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν - ἄφες ἄρτι: οὕτως ,ὔ a n a 7 γὰρ πρέπον ἐστὶν ἡμῖν πληρῶσαι πᾶσαν δικαιοσύνην. im 5 Υ. 5 ᾽ὔ τότε ἀφίησιν avTov. 16 βαπτισθεὶς δὲ ὃ ᾽ἼἼη- Lal > Ν > / > Ἂς σοῦς εὐθὺς ἀνέβη ἀπὸ MARK I. 10 καὶ εὐθὺς ἀναβαίνων. > nw DANY ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος καὶ προσευχομένου ἄνε- a Ν 2 , ῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν, (22 ' καὶ εἶδεν καταβῆναι τὸ a 7 ye) Ν τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἰδοὺ 5 , 4) c > ἀνεῴχθησαν ot ovpa- , \ 5 A vol, Kal εἶδεν πνεῦμα a -“ Ν θεοῦ καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ Ν περιστεράν, καὶ ἐρχό- Je) > , Ν 17 μενον ἐπ αὐὑτον. καὶ 3 Ν Ν 5 a > ἰδοὺ φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρα- 11 te Ἂς > σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρα- Ν Ν ἴω «ε νοὺς καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον > > ΄ Ν ΝΒ εἰς αὑτόν. καὶ φωνὴ ἐκ A a ἃ “aie τῶν οὐρανῶν - σὺ εἶ ὃ / ε / vids μου ὁ ἀγαπητός, > ἣν > / ἐν σοὶ εὐδόκησα. πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον σω- ματικῷ εἴδει ὡς περι- ’, 53. τὴν 3 / Ν στεράν ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, καὶ ἣν > > a φωνὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ye- ,ὕ ο ε es νέσθαι- σὺ εἶ ὃ vids 4 μου ὁ ἀγαπητός, ἐν σοὶ ’, εὐδόκησα. Mec. 1: 8. ὕδατι δὲ B 33 vg Treg.mg.; pm ἐν AD L cop [Treg.txt.] Rev. | ἐν ante πνεύματι δὲ A D cop [Treg.]; om B L vg West. Mt. 8: 12. ἀποθήκην δὰ C vg cop; add αὐτοῦ B Lsyrr Treg. West.mg. Le. 3:17. διακαθᾶραι δὰ B cop Treg.mg. ; καὶ διακαθαριεῖ (:: ut Mt) ἃ AC DL vg Treg.txt. | συναγαγεῖν S* B; συνάξει (:: ut Mt) Sc A C DL vg Treg. Mt. 3:14. 6 5¢N* B; add Ἰωάννης S>C L vg cop syrr [Treg.] Rey. 16 ἀνεῴχθησαν S* B Rey.mg.; add αὐτῷ > C L vg cop syrr Treg. West.mg. Rey.txt. Νο. 1: 11. φωνὴ Ν᾽ D; add ἐγένετο SPA B Τὶ γρ cop syrr Treg. [ West.]. Rey. ἐξ 15, 16.] MATT. III. lal »ὦἍ e ’ > c td νῶν λέγουσα: οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ vids 23 (300) / > fe 3 ΄ μου ὃ ἀγαπητός, ἐν ᾧ ηὐδόκησα. OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. 13 LUKE Ill. Kai αὐτὸς ἦν Ἰησοῦς ἀρχόμενος ὡσεὶ ἐτῶν τριάκοντα ---- § 16. The Temptation. — Desert of Judea. Mart. IV. 1-11. Tore 6 Ἰησοῦς ἀνή- χθὴ εἰς τὴν ἔρημον ὑπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος, πειρα- σθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβό- λου. ἡμέρας τεσσεράκοντα καὶ νηστεύσας Ν καὶ τεσσεράκοντα νύκ- vA τας, ὕστερον ἐπείνασεν. 12 19 Marx I. 12, 13. Kai εὐθὺς τὸ πνεῦ- μα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴν ἔρημον. καὶ Hv ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ τεσσεράκον- τα ἡμέρας πειραζόμε- νος ὑπὸ τοὶ σατανᾶ, καὶ ἢν μετὰ τῶν θηρί- wv, καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι διη- Luxe IV. 1-13. Ἰησοῦς δὲ πλήρης πνεύματος ἁγίου ὑπέ- > A a? στρεψεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Lop- / \»” > lal ddvov, καὶ ἤγετο ἐν TO πνεύματι ἐν τῇ ἐρήμω | ἡμέρας τεσσαράκοντα πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου. καὶ οὐκ ἔφα- κόνουν αὐτῴ. 3QN > tal ε ΄ γεν οὐδὲν ἐν ταῖς ἡμέ- MATT. IV. pars ἐκείναις, καὶ συν- es > A a “-“ 3 καὶ προσελθὼν ὃ πειράζων εἶπεν αὐτῷ: 8. τελεσθεισῶν αὐτῶν ἐπείνασεν. εἶπεν Ν > ~ lal a εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ, εἰπὲ ἵνα ot λίθοι δὲ αὐτῷ ὃ διάβολος - εἰ vids εἶ τοῦ Ὁ a 9 4 οὗτοι ἄρτοι γένωνται. 6 δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς θεοῦ, εἰπὲ τῷ λίθῳ τούτῳ ἵνα γένηται = ΄ a > 2 > » 4 ee ῃ Ν SN Ὡνἦ. εἶπεν " γέγραπται "" οὐκ ἐπ’ ἄρτῳ 4 ἄρτος. καὶ ἀπεκρίθη πρὸς αὐτὸν 6 Ἴη- le ͵ὔ a μόνῳ ζήσεται ὃ ἄνθρωπος, σοῦς - γέγραπται" ὅτι οὐκ ἐπ᾽ ἄρ- ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ παντὶ ῥήματι ἐκ- τῳ μόνῳ ζήσεται ὃ ἄνθρωπος ῥήμ p μόνῳ ζή ρ - ἊΝ πορευομένῳ διὰ στόματος col Ν Ν 3 ‘A 5 «ε A θεοῦ. 9 —nyayey δὲ αὐτὸν εἰς Ἱερουσαλὴμ / > Ν ε 7 cal 5 τότε παραλαμβάνει αὐτὸν ὃ καὶ ἔστησεν ἐπὶ τὸ πτερύγιον τοῦ / 5 δ c ’, / \ Ὁ a A > 3 a ΕἸ ev > “ διάβολος εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν πόλιν, καὶ ἱεροῦ, καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ ΕΣ ΤΑ, - Σίν ‘\ 4 a Le / Ἂς > fa) 4 ἔστησεν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ TO πτερύγιον τοῦ θεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν ἐντεῦθεν κάτω" 6 αὶ an ! \ x ᾽ὔὕ 3 oes 5" εν > lol 10 ! / 2D yh “- > , ἱεροῦ, ' καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ - εἰ vids εἶ TOD γέγραπται γάρ" ὅτι τοῖς ἀγγέ- ca ΄ Ν Fi > la) > a Ν θεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν κάτω - γεγραπται λοις αὐτοῦ ἐντελεῖται περὶ a , ial A” -“ γὰρ" ὅτι τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ 1 σοῦ τοῦ διαφυλάξαι oe, } καὶ oa a \ y a a ἐντελεῖται περὶ σοῦ καὶ ἐπὶ ὅτι ἐπὶ χειρῶν ἀροῦσίν σε; a a ’ὔ , χειρῶν ἀροῦσίν σε, μήποτε μήποτε προσκόψης πρὸς Xl- ’ὔ Ἂς / ‘\ Ν 49d Ἂν > mpocKkowys πρὸς λίθον τὸν 12 Pov τὸν πόδα Gov. καὶ ἄπο- ‘5 " Ὁ ΝΣ ἘΠ ΤΣ ἧς bat ΕῚ ἜΣΕΙ “ΕΝ " 7 πόδα σου. ἔφη αὐτῷ 6 Ἰησοῦς κριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ 6 ᾿Τησοῦς ὅτι εἴρη- πάλιν γέγραπται“ οὐκ ἐκπειρά- ται οὐκ ἐκπειράσεις κύριον / / σεις κύριον τὸν θεόν σου. 5 τὸν. θεόν σου. ----καὶ ἀναγαγὼν 8 πάλιν παραλαμβάνει αὐτὸν ὁ διάβο- αὐτὸν ἔδειξεν αὐτῷ πᾶσας τὰς βασι- λος εἰς 6 ὑψηλὸν "λίαν καὶ δείκνυ- λείας τῆς οἰκουμένης ἐν στιγμῇ χρό- os εἰς opos ὑψηλον"λί U € 7) μένη YEN ΧΙ =4 , a ν. 5 “ε \ σιν αὐτῷ πάσας τὰς βασιλείας τοῦ 6 νου. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὃ διάβολος. σοὶ 24. Deut. 8: 8, b@ ete.” ΒΗ͂.9] : 11. © 7 etc. Deut. 6: 16. Mt.4:2. τεσσεράκοντα νύκτας S Dit vg ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ (évD) παντὶ ῥήματι θεοῦ A D vg syrr cop; νύκτας τέσσερ. BC L Treg. West. Ie. 4: 4. 6 ἄνθρωπος δὰ B L cop; add [Treg.]. 14 ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF [Parr IL MATT. IV. LUKE Iv. 9 κόσμου Kal τὴν δόξαν αὐτῶν, ‘Kat δώσω τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην ἅπασαν εἶπεν αὐτῷ: ταῦτά σοι πάντα δώσω, καὶ τῆν δόξαν αὐτῶν, ὅτι ἐμοὶ παρα- 10 ἐὰν πεσὼν προσκυνήσῃς μοι. τότε δέδοται καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν θέλω δίδωμι αὐτήν - ia CEI ae 9 a 7 \ oes ΄ wey / > a λέγει αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς: ὕπαγε σατα- 7 σὺ οὖν ἐὰν προσκυνήσῃς ἐνώπιόν ἐμοῦ, a a ΄ ΄ ΄ \ ” Ἢ a As Aun να" γέγραπται yp ° KUPLOV TOV 8 eoTaL σου πάσα. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς oO θ , s Ν Ἢ σ La > 9 NG 4 .a εόν σου προσκυνήσεις Kal ἡσοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ γέγραπται lol ’ [4 4 11 αὐτῷ μόνῳ λατρεύσεις. τότε προσκυνήσεις κύριον τὸν / Ἂν a“ ἀφίησιν αὐτὸν ὃ διάβολος, καὶ ἰδοὺ θεόν σου καὶ αὐτῷ μόνῳ λα- fol , ἄγγελοι προσῆλθον καὶ διηκόνουν 18 τρεύσεις. --- καὶ συντελέσας πάν- δε ΣΕΥ, ἘΠῚ , ey 99 αὐτῷ. τα πειρασμὸν ὃ διάβολος ἀπέστη am αὐτοῦ ἄχρι καιροῦ. § 17. Preface to John’s Gospel. JouHn I. 1-18.. Ἔν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὃ λόγος, καὶ ὃ λόγος ἢν πρὸς τὸν θεόν, καὶ θεὸς ἦν ὃ λόγος. ΄ > e > 3 > A Ν Ν rd , > > δὺς 185. ΄, Ν “ 3 οὗτος ἣν ἐν ἀρχῇ πρὸς τὸν θεόν. πάντα dv αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο, καὶ χωρὶς αὑτοῦ > , 8 ἃ aA / ΕΣ A Pare Aine yu @ Ν a 4 , ἐγένετο οὐδὲ ἕν ὃ γέγονεν - ἐν αὐτῷ ζωή ἐστιν, καὶ ἡ ζωὴ ἣν τὸ φῶς τῶν ανθρώ- πων. καὶ τὸ φῶς ἐν τῇ f (vel, καὶ ἣ σκοτία αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβ - καὶ τὸ φῶς ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ φαίνει, καὶ ἢ i ἐλαβεν. aa kr Δ = 3 , ~ » Sey ae - Ἐγένετο ἄνθρωπος, ἀπεσταλμένος παρὰ θεοῦ, ὄνομα αὐτῷ ᾿Ιωάννης " otros 3 “- ΄ σ / 3 ἦλθεν εἰς μαρτυρίαν, ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ περὶ τοῦ φωτός, ἵνα πάντες πιστεύσωσιν δι > lol ? Ss > a A “ 3 ~ NA ͵ὔ Ν cal s > Ἀ 8 9 αὐτοῦ. οὐκ HY ἐκεῖνος τὸ φῶς, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ περὶ τοῦ φωτός. Ἢν τὸ 10 φῶς τὸ ἀληθινόν, ὃ φωτίζει πάντα ἄνθρωπον, ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον. ἐν τῷ ηθινόν, ρωπον, ἐρχόμ μον. ; , > Vi 1e 4 lal / XE , > Ν 3 11 κόσμῳ ἦν, καὶ ὃ κόσμος δι᾿’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο, καὶ ὃ κόσμος αὐτὸν οὐκ ἔγνω. εἰς 3 ὡς 3} 4 12 τὰ ἴδια ἦλθεν, καὶ οἱ ἴδιοι αὐτὸν od παρέλαβον. ὅσοι δὲ ἔλαβον αὐτόν, ἔδωκεν 3 a > , ΄ a , Cal , > x of. > a ! ἃ 18 αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τέκνα θεοῦ γενέσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, ' ot ΝΥ la Ν οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς GAN’ ἐκ na > ΄ Ἄν. δ / Ν 9 / Ν > , > ε a NP al 14 θεοῦ ἐγεννήθησαν. καὶ ὃ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο καὶ ἐσκήνωσεν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἐθεα- Ἃ σι , ΄ , \ σάμεθα τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ δόξαν ὡς μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός, πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας. > ΄ὔ a \ > - Ν » ΄ ἣν x ἃ Ὁ Ἐπ ΣῊ 2 16 Ἰωάννης μαρτυρεῖ περὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ κέκραγεν λέγων " οὗτος ἦν, ὃν εἶπον " ὁ ὀπίσω a / 3S μι 16 μου ἐρχόμενος ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου HV. ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ πληρώ- 3 Ane a , > ΄ Ν , 3 Ν ΄ μὲ ε , Ν 17 ματος αὐτοῦ ἡμεῖς πάντες ἐλάβομεν, καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος " ὅτι ὃ νόμος διὰ “. 3 18 Μωύσέως ἐδόθη, ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐγένετο. θεὸν od- \ , e ox \ ΄ a , ¥ dels ἑώρακεν πώποτε: ὃ μονογενὴς υἱὸς ὁ ὧν εἰς TOV κόλπον τοῦ πατρός, ἐκεῖνος ἐξηγήσατο. 210 etc. Deut. 6: 18. Mt. 4:10. ὕπαγε δὲ" BC vg cop; add 9 ἄνθρωπον ἐρχόμενον West. Rey.mg. ὀπίσω μου C2 Ὁ 1, Z. 15 ὃν εἶπον δῦ A Β8 D L West.mg.; 6 Joh.1:3. οὐδὲ ἑν ὃ γέγονεν C3 West.mg.; εἰπών δία B* C* West.txt. Rev.mg.; om S*. οὐδὲ ἕν. ὃ γέγονεν AC* Ὁ L Treg. West.txt. 18 6 μονογενὴς vids A Οϑ vg West.mg.; Rev.mg.; ancipites N B. 4 ἐστιν SN Τ μονογενὴς θεὸς δὰ" (N° pm 6) B C* L 33 cop Treg.mg. Westmg.; ἣν A BC L vg cop Treg. West. Rev.mg. syrr Treg.txt. West.txt. OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. §§ 17, 18, 19.] 15 § 18. Testimony of John the Baptist to Jesus. — Bethany beyond Jordan. | Joun 1. 19-34. \ σ Ν a? ¢ ~ 19 Kai αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία τοῦ ᾿Ιωάννου, ὅτε ἀπέστειλαν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἐξ Ἵερο- 4 ε lal Ν A / 7 3 , > 4 Ν ὔ > ! A, 6 / 20 σολύμων ἱερεῖς καὶ Λευείτας ἵνα ἐρωτήσωσιν αὐτόν - σὺ τίς εἶ; ' Kal ὡμολόγησεν \ > 3 ΄΄ Nn fe ἐν μη SEN > S24 NF £ ‘ XPS ΄ 21 καὶ οὐκ ἠρνήσατο, καὶ ὡμολόγησεν ὅτι ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ὁ Χριστός. καὶ ἠρώτησαν 3 ΄ vA > « [2 > / > > / ε / > ΄ὔ vee , αὐτόν - τί οὖν; Ἡλείας εἶ; λέγει" οὐκ εἰμί. ὃ προφήτης εἶ σύ; καὶ ἀπεκρίθη - 22 οὔ. εἶπαν οὖν αὐτῷ - τίς εἶ; ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς - τί λέ : ΐ : ρ μ μψασιν ἡμᾶς - τί λέγεις 23 περὶ σεαυτοῦ ; |! ἔφη: ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ: εὐθύ ὴ ρ ; in AY Ἶ ΕΡ PA eS Te πε 24 25 26 lal \ cal 27 λέγων > ἐγὼ βαπτίζω ἐν ὕδατι: μέσος ὑμῶν στήκει, ὃν ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε, 16 ε Ν᾿ , 3 ε ah ε /, δδὸν κυρίου, καθὼς εἶπεν “Hoatas ὃ προφήτης." καὶ ἀπεσταλμένοι ἦσαν ἐκ lat ΄ q Sid Sl anf SN Ν Ὁ Len ΄ > ΄ 3 Ν τῶν Φαρισαίων, ᾿ καὶ ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ - τί οὖν βαπτίζεις, εἰ σὺ a ε , a οὐκ εἶ ὃ Χριστὸς οὐδὲ Ἡλείας οὐδὲ 6 προφήτης ; ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς 6 ᾿Ιωάννης Saad > / ον 3 Io aN Tait + 7 / 3 a Ν ε / A ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ἄξιος ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ 28 ε ὃ / a z B 0 / > / / “ aT ὃ / A > ἾἼ ΄, ὑποδήματος. ταῦτα ἐν Βηθανίᾳ ἐγένετο πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου, ὅπου ἣν ᾿Ιωάννης βαπτίζων. an > A Ν 29 Τῇ ἐπαύριον βλέπει τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν ἐρχόμενον πρὸς αὐτὸν, καὶ λέγει: ἴδε ὃ 3 Ν a nae ” \ ε , a ΄ δας. Ὁ 2 eS a Ve 30 ἀμνὸς Tod θεοῦ ὁ αἴρων τὴν ἁμαρτίαν τοῦ κόσμου. οὗτός ἐστιν ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ Ν “ ΓΝ > εἶπον - ὀπίσω μου ἔρχεται ἀνὴρ Os ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, OTL πρῶτός μου HV. ἍΝ > μὰ ΕΥ̓ > xo a a? ΄ Ν a Φ ΕΑΝ Ὁ ΔΙῚ 81 κἀγὼ οὐκ ἤδειν αὐτόν, GAN ἵνα φανερωθῇ τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ, διὰ τοῦτο ἦλθον ἐγὼ ἐν 4 ΄ Se ’ > / 4 μὲ / Ν lal 32 ὕδατι βαπτίζων. καὶ ἐμαρτύρησεν ᾿Ιωάννης λέγων ὅτι τεθέαμαι TO πνεῦμα κατα- a ¢ \ 2¢ 3 a Ἂν oF - cat |} Se 3) IX 3 70 are TR 33 βαῖνον ὡς περιστερὰν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ ἔμεινεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν. κἀγὼ οὐκ ἤδειν αὐτόν, a 5" ἃ a GAN’ 6 πέμψας με βαπτίζειν ἐν ὕδατι, ἐκεῖνός μοι εἶπεν - ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἂν ἴδῃς τὸ πνεῦμα 84 αβαῖνον καὶ μένον ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν πνεύματι. ἁγίῳ. κἀγὼ καταβαῖ μ : ίζων ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ. κἀγ ng 7 Ὄ / ε ον Β ἑώρακα, καὶ μεμαρτύρηκα ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. § 19. Jesus gains Disciples. — The Jordan. Galilee? Joun I. 35-52. , 3 lal cal ἴω [2 Ν 35 86 Τῇ ἐπαύριον πάλιν εἱστήκει 6 ᾿Ιωάννης καὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ δύο, |! καὶ 37 cal \ n lal 88 μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, καὶ ἠκολούθησαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ. ἐμβλέψας τῷ ᾿Ἰησοῦ περιπατοῦντι λέγει - ἴδε ὁ ἀμνὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. ἤκουσαν οἱ δύο στραφεὶς ὃ Ἰησοῦς καὶ 89 θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς ἀκολουθοῦντας λέγει αὐτοῖς - ' τί ζητεῖτε; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ " a an a 40 ῥαββεί, ὃ λέγεται ἐρμηνευόμενον, διδάσκαλε, ποῦ μένεις ; ' λέγει αὐτοῖς - ἔρχεσθε καὶ ὄψεσθε. ἦλθαν οὖν καὶ εἶδαν ποῦ μένει, καὶ παρ᾽ αὐτῷ ἔμειναν τὴν ἡμέραν og JHSVES, iv os Gee MATER - ΄ > 3 : “- 41 ἐκείνην - ὥρα ἣν ὡς δεκάτη. ἦν ᾿Ανδρέας ὃ ἀδελφὸς Sipwvos Πέτρου εἷς ἐκ τῶν 42 δύο τῶν ἀκουσάντων παρὰ ᾿Ιωάννου καὶ ἀκολουθησάντων αὐτῷ " | εὑρίσκει οὗτος Seo 15.9.0. ὅς Joh.1:19. ἀπέστειλαν δὲ Ο51,; add πρὸς Βηθαβαρᾶ C21 33 Rev.mg.; Βηθαραβᾶ se> αὐτὸν (A vg. post Aeveltas) A Β C* 88 vg cop Treg. West. Rev. 21 λέγει 8; pm καὶ A B C L Treg. West. Rev. 27 6 (om S* B [Treg.] West.) ὁπίσω 8 BC*L cop; pm αὐτός ἐστιν A C3 vg syrr. 28 Βηθανίᾳ S* A B C* L A it vg cop; Rev.mg. 87 ἤκουσαν S* 1; pm καὶ SCA BCL vg Treg. West. 88 στραφεὶς S* ; add δὲ δία A BC Lvg cop Treg. West. Rev. 39 ép- μηνευόμενον S*; μεθερμ. SOA BC L 33 Treg. West. Rey. 16 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Ὁ. ὦ δ᾽, ὐἱ δ wh μὲ 10 11 12 ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION. [Part IL JOHN I. 4 / A πρῶτος TOV ἀδελφὸν τὸν ἴδιον Σίμωνα καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ - εὑρήκαμεν τὸν Μεσσίαν, P39. id , ! 4 AN Ν Ν 3 “ > 4 6 ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον Χριστός. | ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν πρὸς τὸν Ἰησοῦν. ἐμβλέψας ΚΑ τ εν cal > \ > ΄ ε εν 3 ΄, \ ΄ “ a αὐτῷ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν - σὺ εἶ Σίμων ὃ υἱὸς ‘Iwdvvov, σὺ κληθήσῃ Κηφᾶς, ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται Iérpos. Τῇ ἐπαύριον ἠθέλησεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ εὑρίσκει Φίλιππον. al 3 cat 3 - καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἀκολούθει μοι. ἣν δὲ ὃ Φίλιππος ἀπὸ Βηθσαϊδά, ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ᾿Ανδρέου καὶ ἹΤέτρου. εὑρίσκει Φίλιππος τὸν ΝΝθαναὴλ καὶ λέγει EAL ἃ 5, M -,“« > a fe δ ε a ε » 2 a ev αὐτῷ - ov ἔγραψεν Mwions ἐν TO νόμῳ καὶ οἱ προφῆται, εὑρήκαμεν, Ἰησοῦν υἱὸν τοῦ Ιωσὴφ τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέτ. εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ: ἐκ Ναζαρὲτ δύναταί τι ἀγαθὸν εἶναι ; λέγει αὐτῷ Φίλιππος - ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε. εἶδεν Ἰησοῦς τὸν Ναθα- \ > ΄ \ 3. εν \ ΄ὔ \ 3 - ” > eo ων: ae ναὴλ ἐρχόμενον πρὸς αὐτόν καὶ λέγει περὶ αὐτοῦ - ἴδε ἀληθῶς ᾿Ισραηλείτης, ev ᾧ , > 3, ,ὔ 3 “ 7, , , 3 4 > lal δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν. λέγει αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ : πόθεν με γινώσκεις ; ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ: πρὸ τοῦ σε Φίλιππον φωνῆσαι ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν εἶδόν σε. ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ Ναθαναὴλ - ῥαββεί, σὺ εἶ 6 υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, συ βασιλεὺς εἶ τοῦ > 4 3 ͵, 3 ἴω Ν Ss 3 cal 7 ΩΣ / 7 “0. 7 ec ’ Ἰσραήλ. ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Τησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ὅτι εἶπόν σοι ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω fo a ΄ / ΄ + A ig ee tn) as δὲ > Lay 4 τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις; μείζω τούτων ὄψῃ. Kal λέγει αὐτῷ: ἁμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω eda 4 N > Ν 3 ΄ \ \ > ΄ La) a 3 7 ὑμῖν, ὄψεσθε τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγότα καὶ τοὺς ἀγγέλους τοῦ θεοῦ ἀναβαίνοντας Ν ΄ ΘΝ Ν εν a 3 , a καὶ καταβαίνοντας ἐπὶ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. § 20. The Marriage at Cana of Galilee. JoHN IT. 112: Kat τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρί ἵμος ἐγέ ἐν Κανᾷ τῆς Γαλιλαί ὶ ἦν ἡ μή αἱ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ γάμος ἐγένετο ἐν Kava τῆς ίας, καὶ ἦν ἡ μήτηρ πὰ Ὁ nm > lal 5 ΄ Ν Nie: 3: al Ν ε “A 3 aA 5 Ν 4 τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐκεῖ - ἐκλήθη δὲ καὶ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον. \ > > > Ὁ“ , ε 5 fal ΄ 9 “ἢ « 7 Kal οἶνον οὐκ εἶχον, OTL συνετελέσθη ὃ οἶνος τοῦ γάμου. εἶτα λέγει ἡ μήτηρ a? a \ 1D ae > > 35 , tia eer a Zhe) x ἣν id τοῦ Ἰησοῦ πρὸς αὐτόν" οἶνος οὐκ ἔστιν. λέγει αὐτῇ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί, , 5» . ε LA xr , ε / 5) cal “ ὃ , iS id a γύναι; οὔπω ἥκει ἣ ὥρα pov. λέγει ἣ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ τοῖς διακόνοις - ὅ,τι ἂν a yo a NJ Ν λέγῃ ὑμῖν, ποιήσατε. ἦσαν δὲ ἐκεῖ λίθιναι ὑδρίαι EE κατὰ τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν 3 Nye: , a 3. N Ν ὃ , Ἃ a ἮΝ , 3 a ε ἢ cal Ιουδαίων κείμεναι, χωροῦσαι ἀνὰ μετρητὰς δύο ἢ τρεῖς. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " , Ν ε 4 WA Ν > / 3 Ν Ὁ A ! ἊΝ λ 4 3 lal 5 γεμίσατε τὰς ὑδρίας ὕδατος. καὶ ἐγέμισαν αὐτὰς ἕως ἄνω. ‘Kai λέγει αὐτοῖς > Noy a \ , n 3 λέ ε δὲ + ! «ε δὲ 3 ’ὔ ε ἀντλήσατε νῦν καὶ φέρετε τῷ ἀρχιτρικλίνῳ. οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν. | ὡς δὲ ἐγεύσατο ὃ 3 , νι Ὁ > ! Ν > κῶν 46 > lA ε δὲ ὃ ἐς ἀρχιτρίκλινος τὸ ὕδωρ οἶνον γεγενημένον, καὶ οὐκ ῃδει πόθεν ἐστίν, οἱ δὲ διάκονοι 5) a / Li ΄ Ν 4 ἤδεισαν οἱ ἠντληκότες τὸ ὕδωρ φωνεῖ, τὸν νυμφίον O ἀρχιτρίκλινος Ἷ καὶ λέγει “ a 4 > ! δ ΚΕΝ, r αὐτῷ: πᾶς ἄνθρωπος πρῶτον τὸν καλὸν οἶνον τίθησιν, Kat ὅταν μεθυσθῶσιν, Ν 9 / ΕῚ ’ὔ > Ἂν τὸν ἐλάσσω: σὺ τετήρηκας τὸν καλὸν οἶνον ἕως ἄρτι. ταύτην ἐποίησεν ἀρχὴν lal = a lal , Ν / > τῶν σημείων ὃ Ἰησοῦς ἐν Kava τῆς Γαλιλαίας καὶ ἐφανέρωσεν τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἷς αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. an Ἂ ε \ Mera τοῦτο κατέβη εἰς Καφαρναούμ, αὐτὸς καὶ ἣ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οὗ ἀδελφοὶ an a a ‘4 αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, Kal ἐκεῖ ἔμειναν ov πολλὰς ἡμέρας. 2 §2. Comp. Gen. 28: 19. wot Joh.1:42. πρῶτος S* L; πρῶτον δὰ AB δα A B Lyvg cop Treg. West.txt. | oivos ob« Treg. West. Rev. ἔστιν S* ; olvoy οὐκ ἔχουσιν SA BL vg 47 εἶπεν NS; pm καὶ A BL vg cop Treg. cop Treg. West. 4 λέγει S* et’? pm West. / καὶ Sc? A B L cop Treg. West. Rev. Joh. 2:3. καὶ οἶνον οὐκ εἶχον ὅτι --- εἶτα 12 οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ S A vg cop syrr; om N* West.mg.; καὶ ὑστερήσαντος οἴνου λέγει αὐτοῦ Β 1, Treg. West. Rev. ῳ PART ΠΙ. «--.-.’.νιὺ ς.ς.΄᾽΄)΄). OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE SECOND. TimE: One year. § 21. At the Passover Jesus drives the Traders out of the Temple. [Comp. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 8. 113.] Jerusalem. VOHNG UE 19Ξ95: Ἂν ‘ 3 a 3 ,ὔ Ν ε / e > Ka ἐγγὺς ἣν τὸ πάσχα τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, Kai ἀνέβη cis Ἱεροσόλυμα 6 "Ἰησοῦς. a a A A ΄ \ ΄ \ N \ \ καὶ εὗρεν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τοὺς πωλοῦντας βόας Kal πρόβατα Kal περιστερὰς καὶ TOUS Ν , ! Ν la / 3 / / - /, κερματιστὰς καθημένους, ' καὶ ποιήσας φραγέλλιον ἐκ σχοινίων πάντας ἐξέβαλεν Ν / Ν a a ’ὔ A ἐκ TOD ἱεροῦ, τά τε πρόβατα καὶ τοὺς βόας, καὶ τῶν κολλυβιστῶν ἐξέχεεν τὸ ΄ δ Ν ΄ τ \ a Ν Ν A ΓῚ κέρμα καὶ τὰς τραπέζας ἀνέστρεψεν, ' καὶ τοῖς τὰς περιστερὰς πωλοῦσιν εἶπεν ", a a A 5 A , 5 , ἄρατε ταῦτα ἐντεῦθεν, μὴ ποιεῖτε TOV οἶκον TOD πατρός μου οἶκον ἐμπορίου. ᾿] va 6 ε 6 \ 5 La] 7 Ἃ > Lee | ε nr a ἐμνήσθησαν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι γεγραμμένον ἐστίν." ὁ ζῆλος τοῦ ” οἴκου gov καταφάγεταί pe. my ‘0 5 «>? “- a > 3 a , lal ὃ , e198 og πεκρίθησαν οὖν οἱ lovdator καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ - τί σημεῖον δεικνύεις ἡμῖν, OTL a > A > a A ταῦτα ποιεῖς ; | ἀπεκρίθη Ἰησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ \ a , > > a δ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν. εἶπαν οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι - τεσσεράκοντα καὶ ἕξ ἔτε- σιν οἰκοδομήθη ὃ ναὸς οὗτος, καὶ σὺ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτόν ; | ἐκεῖνος, ή ' ρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερ δὲ ἔλ Ἦν a lal ἴω , > na Ψ > > / > a 5» , ὲ ἔλεγεν περὶ τοῦ ναοῦ τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ. ὅτε οὖν ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν, ἐμνή- σθησαν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ὅ Dro ἔλ L ἐπί 7 καὶ τῷ ἢ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ὅτι τοῦτο ἔλεγεν, καὶ ἐπίστευσαν τῇ γραφῇ καὶ τῷ , le ΟῚ <>? a λόγῳ ὃν εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς. ε a Se > o « , 2 aA , 2 me A ‘ 2-8 Os δὲ ἦν ἐν τοῖς Ἱεροσολύμοις ἐν τῷ πάσχα ἐν TH ἑορτῇ, πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν 3 Sn uv 3 A al a al a εἰς TO ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, θεωροῦντες αὐτοῦ τὰ σημεῖα ἃ ἐποίει: αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς > ye καὶ SN fal οὖκ ἐπίστευσεν αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν γινώσκειν πάντας, ' Kal ὅτι οὐ χρείαν - ψ 2 Ν a , a εἶχεν ἵνα τις μαρτυρήσῃ περὶ TOD ἀνθρώπου: αὐτὸς yap ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἣν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ. ζῶ 17, Ps. 69: 10. Joh. 2:15. τὸ κέρμα δὲ Avg; τὰ κέρματα L West.mg.; ἀνέτρεψεν B West.txt.; κατέ- BL 33 cop Treg. West. Rev. | ἀνέστρεψεν ἃ στρεψεν δὰ. 2 18 FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Part UL. § 22. Our Lord’s discourse with Nicodemus. — Jerusalem. Joun III. 1-21. 5 lal Hy δὲ ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων, Νικόδημος ὄνομα αὐτῷ, ἄρχων τῶν “lov. ὃ , 1,8 20 \ 3 7EN \ \ 9 ». κα ε γον ἢ “ 3°28 αίων - | οὗτος ἦλθεν πρὸς αὐτὸν νυκτὸς Kai εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ῥαββεί, οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἐλήλυθας διδάσκαλος - οὐδεὶς γὰρ δύναται ταῦτα τὰ σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἃ σὺ A 2\ ἊΣ ae: θ Ν 2 > a 3 (0 3 la) Ν > ns Die SN 3 ποιεῖς, ἐὰν μὴ ἢ ὃ θεὸς per αὐτοῦ. ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἀμὴν > Ν Xr / AY , a Le, 6 > ὃ ’, > Lal Ν ’ a ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, ἐὰν μή τις γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν, od δύναται ἰδεῖν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ 0 lal a Ν > Ν «ε 4S cal , 3 a / 4 θεοῦ. λέγει πρὸς αὐτὸν ὃ Νικόδημος - πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος γεννηθῆναι γέρων ὦν; μὴ δύναται εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ δεύτερον εἰσελθεῖν καὶ γεν- θῆ > 6 ἢ] aA ἕ 5 ἐν 3 Ν AN / (ὮΝ / 6 a> vO 5 νηθῆναι; ' ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, ἐὰν μή τις γεννηθῇ ἐξ ὕδατος 6 καὶ πνεύματος, οὐ δύναται εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. τὸ γεγεν- με lal Ν 4 Ν , a fal νημένον ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς σάρξ ἐστιν, καὶ TO γεγεννημένον Ex τοῦ πνεύματος πνεῦμά / ψ > / na a fal 7 8 ἐστιν. μὴ θαυμάσῃς ὅτι εἶπόν cour δεῖ ὑμᾶς γεννηθῆναι ἄνωθεν. τὸ πνεῦμα ἃ 7, a a πεν \ ΤΕ ας ἂν ΄ 3 2 3 50 ΄ » v ὅπου θέλει πνεῖ, καὶ THY φωνὴν αὐτοῦ ἀκούεις, GAN οὐκ οἶδας πόθεν ἔρχεται Kal 7 a lal 9 ποῦ ὑπάγει: οὕτως ἐστὶν πᾶς ὃ γεγεννημένὸς ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος. ἀπεκρίθη , Ν > Neg) a / a“ ͵ (a) ! 3 ͵ 3 a 10 Νικόδημος καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ: πῶς δύναται ταῦτα γενέσθαι ; ' ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Τησοῦς Γ > Petal Ν 9 ¢ ὃ , a? A Ν a > , 3 X 11 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ ᾿Ισραὴλ καὶ ταῦτα οὗ γινώσκεις ; | ἀμὴν oY a 5, aA \ cal ἀμὴν λέγω σοι ὅτι ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν καὶ ὃ ἑωράκαμεν μαρτυροῦμεν, καὶ τὴν a > > a Ks Bes 12 μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν ov λαμβάνετε. εἶ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν καὶ οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς oN δ} ea ἌΡ / ΄ Ν 3 Ἂς 3 / 39 \ > 4 13 ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια πιστεύσετε; καὶ οὐδεὶς ἀναβέβηκεν εἰς TOV οὐρανὸν > Ae os ~ > “a / ε e\ Led > ’ eon ΕῚ “ ϑ Cal A 14 εἰ μὴ ὃ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς, ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὃ ὧν €veTW OUPAVG. καὶ θὰ M ” n 4 Ν 5, 3 ae) ua a 4 «ες On ὃ Ὁ ὃν εν a καθὼς Mwions ὕψωσεν τὸν ὄφιν ἐν TH ἐρήμῳ," οὕτως ὑψωθῆναι δεῖ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ 15 ἀνθρώπου, | ἵνα πᾶς 6 πιστεύων ἐν αὐτῷ ἔχῃ ζωὴν αἰώνιον. WA A 3 4 ε Ν ἈΝ Ψ Ψ \ εν \ a ἢ 160 Οὕτως yap ἠγάπησεν ὃ θεὸς τὸν κόσμον, ὥστε τὸν υἱὸν τὸν μονογενῆ ἔδωκεν, 7 an ε ’ὔ > > Ν 3 / > 3. ΜΝ ἣν ἌΡ 3 % 17 ἵνα πᾶς ὃ πιστεύων εἰς αὖτον μὴ ἀπόληται GAN ἔχῃ ζωὴν αἰώνιον. od yap 3 la ε Ν Ν εν > Ν / 7 7 - / 3 oe. a ἀπέστειλεν ὃ θεὸς τὸν υἱὸν εἰς TOV κόσμον ἵνα κρίνῃ τὸν κόσμον, GAN ἵνα σωθῇ 3 ‘ 3 , ε , »” 18 ὃ κόσμος δι᾽ αὐτοῦ. 6 πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν οὐ κρίνεται. ὃ μὴ πιστεύων ἤδη " a a a Ψ 19 κέκριται, ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ μονογενοῦς υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ. αὕτη 23 ec i! 7 Ν “ 5 ON θ > Ν 4 Ν 5 ΄ ἘΠ A 6 δέ ἐστιν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς TOV κόσμον καὶ ἠγάπησαν οἱ avOpw- a Ν ’ὔ BY) Ν a > ‘ as \ Ν + rn Ν ε 20 ποι μᾶλλον τὸ σκότος ἢ τὸ POS* ἣν γὰρ αὕτων πονηρὰ τὰ ἐργα. πᾶς yap O a , A N A \ > ” Ν \ lal i Ἂς ἐλ. θῃ Ν φαῦλα πράσσων μισεῖ τὸ φῶς καὶ οὐκ ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς, ἵνα μὴ ἐλεγχθῇ τὰ Ἢ , ” \ \ A Ψ na 21 ἔργα αὐτοῦ: ὃ δὲ ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς, iva φανερωθῇ 3 a Vy Lg 3 aes, Ν 5 7 αὐτοῦ τὰ ἔργα, ὅτι ἐν θεῷ ἐστὶν εἰργασμένα. § 23. Jesus remains in Judea and baptizes. Further testimony of John the Baptist. Joun III. 22-36. Ν a ἧς 3 ’ὔ lel A" 22 Μετὰ ταῦτα ἦλθεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς καὶ of μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν Ιουδαίαν γῆν, καὶ a “ Φ Ν 9 ΄ ΄ 3 Wot 23 ἐκεῖ διέτριβεν per’ αὐτῶν καὶ ἐβάπτιζεν. ἣν δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννης βαπτίζων ev Αἰνὼν 214. Comp. Num. 21: 8 sq. Joh. 3:5. τῶν οὐρανῶν N* ; τοῦ θεοῦ NC Α 15 ἐν αὐτῷ B; εἰς αὐτὸν δὴ, | Exn ζωὴν δὰ B L vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. B L 88 cop; pm ph ἀπόληται ἄλλ᾽ A vg 18 6 dv (om A*) ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ A it vg syrr_ syrr. West.mg.; om δὴ BL 33 West.txt. Rev.mg. §$ 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 22, 28, 24.] UNTIL THE SECOND. 19 JOHN III. > Ν : σὰ ἔς 9 wa 5 “ ἐγγὺς τοῦ Σαλείμ, ὅτι ὕδατα πολλὰ ἢν ἐκεῖ, καὶ παρεγίνοντο καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο - + x a , Ἂν 3 οὕπω γὰρ ἢν βεβλημένος εἰς τὴν φυλακὴν ᾿Ιωάννης. 3 / = ΄ fa a 5 Ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν ᾿Ιωάννου μετὰ Ἰουδαίου περὶ καθαρι- “ ἈΦ, Ν Ν > Δ Ἂν Φ > a ε 7a > “ σμοῦ. καὶ ἦλθον πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ - ῥαββεί, ὃς ἣν μετὰ σοῦ / a? / fe ‘ ΄ γ᾽ a πέραν τοῦ Lopddvov, ᾧ ov μεμαρτύρηκας, ἴδε οὗτος βαπτίζει καὶ πάντες ἔρχονται \ 3 ’ > Θ ἘΠ ΄, \ > > , »” , πρὸς αὑτὸν. ἀπεκρίθη Ἰωάννης καὶ εἶπεν ov δύναται ἄνθρωπος λαμβάνειν > / 38 be la > Cea pe) a“ > lal > x AS lal “- οὐδέν, ἐὰν μὴ ἢ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς μοι μαρτυρεῖτε ὅτι > > BON. Si OX ε / 3 > > A eX) Sry > , εἶπον " οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὃ Χριστός, GAN’ ὅτι ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου. εἶἜνΝ Ν ΄ / > ,ὔ ᾿ ε δὲ ON, an ,ὔ 4} Ὁ Ν 5 tA ὁ ἔχων THY νύμφην νυμφίος ἐστίν " ὃ δὲ φίλος τοῦ νυμφίου, ὃ ἑστηκὼς καὶ ἀκούων > lal lal / ὃ εἶ \ Ν A ‘4 Wd > «ε Ὁ Ε΄. δ Ν ,ὔ αὑτοῦ, χαρᾷ χαίρει διὰ τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου. αὕτη οὖν ἣ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ πεπλή- 3 tal tal 3 ty > Ν Ν > Lal < ΕΣ > 7 31 ρωται. ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν, ἐμὲ δὲ ἐλαττοῦσθαι. ὃ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος / ΄ Εν a a oO en a “ “ ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν - ὃ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ, ε aA ~ Ν Ν “ ὃ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος ' ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν μαρτυρεῖ, καὶ τὴν μαρ- ’, 3 n > a / ε \ > a Ἀ / 3 , Ld τυρίαν αὐτοῦ οὐδεῖς λαμβάνει. ὃ λαβὼν αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἐσφράγισεν ὅτι \ \ ΄ al a “ 6 θεὸς ἀληθής ἐστιν. ὃν γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν ὃ θεός, τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ θεοῦ λαλεῖ- 3 x 3 / LN \ a ε Ν 5 a Ν er Ν ΄ , ov yap ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ πνεῦμα. ὃ πατὴρ ἀγαπᾷ τὸν υἱόν, Kal πάντα δέδω- al ‘\ a ε 4 x Ν X a Kev ἐν TH χειρὶ αὐτοῦ. ὃ πιστεύων εἰς τὸν υἱὸν ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον - ὃ ἀπειθῶν a ena > y+ 7 > Se.) 2 Ν lal a , TF, > / τῷ υἱῷ οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν, ἀλλ᾽ ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ θεοῦ μένει ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν. § 24. Jesus departs into Galilee after John’s imprisonment. Mart. IV. 12. Mark I. 14. Luxe IV. 14. 12 ᾿Ακούσας δὲ ὅτι “Iw- 14 Μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδο-ς 14 Kal ὑπέστρεψεν ὃ dvvns παρεδόθη, ἀνε- θῆναι τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην ἢλ- Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῇ δυνάμει χώρησεν εἰς τὴν Γαλι- θεν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς τὴν τοῦ πνεύματος εἰς τὴν λαίαν. Ταλιλαίαν, ----- Γαλιλαίαν - - — Mart. XIV. 3-5. Marx VI. 17-20. Luxe III. 19, 20. 3 Ὁ yap Ἡρώδης κρα- 17 Αὐτὸς yap ὃ Ἡρώδης 19 Ὁ δὲ Ἡρώδης ὃ τε- τήσας τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τραάρχης, ἐλεγχόμενος. ἔδησεν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην καὶ ἔδη- ὑπ᾽ αὑτοῦ περὶ “Hpwot- ἀπέθετο διὰ Ἡρωδιάδα σεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ άδος τῆς γυναικὸς τοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα [Φιλίτ- διὰ Ἡρωδιάδα τὴν γυ- ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ καὶ πε- που] τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐ- ναῖκα Φιλίππου τοῦ ρὶ πάντων ὧν ἐποίησεν τοῦ. ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι av- πονηρῶν ὃ Ἡρώδης, 4 ἔλεγεν yap ᾿Ιωάν- 18 τὴν ἐγάμησεν - ἔλεγεν 20 Ἱπροσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο VNS αὐτῷ " οὐκ ἔξεστιν γὰρ ὃ Ἰωάννης τῷ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν, κατέκλεισεν 5 σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν - καὶ Ἡρώδῃ ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην ἐν φυ- θέλων αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα λακῇ. A a Lal “ ‘ ἐφοβήθη τὸν ὄχλον, 19 τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου. ἡ δὲ Ἡρωδιὰς ἐνεῖχεν αὐτῷ Kat Joh. 8:31. ἐρχόμενος S* D West.mg. Rev. 86 ἀπειθῶν S*; pm δὲ NCA BC DL vg mg.; add ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν SN’ ABLvyg cop Treg West. Rev. cop syrr Treg. West.txt. Rev.txt. Μι.14: 8. Φιλίππου S BC al; om Ὁ 32 μαρτυρεῖ δὰ D cop West.mg. Revy.mg.; it vg Aug [Tisch.] Cf. Le. 3: 19. pm τοῦτο AB L vg Treg. West.txt. Rey.txt. 20 1 2 3 FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Part III. MATT. XIV. MARK VI. ὃ yap tal Ν > Ἡρώδης ἐφοβεῖτο τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην, εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα \ δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον, Kal συνετήρει αὐτόν, καὶ ἀκούσας μη ε / - SS ᾿Ξ Spe Ns 3 Lal Ν 3 3 ’ ὅτι ὃς προφήτην αὐτὸν 20 ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο " Ss €Lxov. 3 a ‘ > / Ἄ ae / > ~ αὐτοῦ πολλὰ ἡπόρει, καὶ ἡδέως αὐτοῦ ἤκουεν. Joun IV. 1-3. ‘Os οὖν ἔγνω ὃ Ἰησοῦς ὅτι ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ὅτι ᾿Τησοῦς πλείονας μαθη- τὰς ποιεῖ καὶ βαπτίζει ἢ ᾿Ιωάννης, ' καίτοιγε Ἰησοῦς αὐτὸς οὐκ ἐβάπτιζεν ἀλλ᾽ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, | ἀφῆκεν τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν καὶ ἀπῆλθεν πάλιν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. § 25. Our Lord’s discourse with the Samaritan Woman. Many of the Samar- Φ mst ὁ) 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 itans believe on him. — Shechem or Neapolis. Joun IV. 4-42. 5 "Kde δὲ αὐτὸν διέρχεσθαι διά τῆς Sapapias. ἔρχεται οὖν εἰς πόλιν τῆς Δ Α / 4 cal ἌΡ a 3) 3 a > 3 - ΣΞαμαρίας λεγομένην Συχάρ, πλησίον τοῦ χωρίου ὃ ἔδωκεν Ἰακὼβ Ἰωσὴφ τῷ υἱῷ αὐτοῦ. ' ἣν δὲ ἐκεῖ πηγὴ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβ. 6 οὖν ᾿Ἰησοῦς κεκοπιακώς ἐκ τῆς ε ΄, > / 7 a “ a 7 το « μι 3! δ; 8 ὁδοιπορίας ἐκαθέζετο OUTWS €7L ΤΊ) ΠπΉῊΉ “ρα Ἣν ὡς €EKT?. ερχεταιν γυνή εκ “ tA 3 a vO , > fay i cl a 80 lal ! ε Ν τῆς Ξαμαρίας ἀντλῆσαι ὕδωρ. λέγει αὐτῇ ὃ Ἰησοῦς - δός μοι πεῖν. | of γὰρ Ν 3 im (9 4 3 Ν / . Ἂν 3 ΄ / μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἀπεληλύθεισαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἵνα τροφὰς ἀγοράσωσιν. λέγει sn τῷ Weg ta) a ie) a ἍἋ cde a} A a 39. "κα Ν αὐτῷ ἡ γυνὴ 7) Σαμαρῖτις- πῶς σὺ ᾿Ιουδαῖος dy παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ πεῖν αἰτεῖς γυναικὸς > i ὃ ᾿, ! > 6 Ἴ a \ 3 ἘῸΝ > 70 Ν ὃ Ν a αμαρίτιδος οὔσης ; | ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Τησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν airy: εἰ ἤδεις THY δωρεὰν TOD fA) a Ν / 5 ε , δό A \ ox 3 8 ΣΕ Ν ἐδ εοῦ, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὃ λέγων σοι" δός μοι πεῖν, σὺ ἂν ἤτησας αὐτόν καὶ ἔδωκεν 5᾿ 4 “ , > ae / / 3, 4 wy \ Ν / ἄν σοι ὕδωρ ζῶν. λέγει αὐτῷ 7 γυνή κύριε, οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις, Kal TO φρέαρ > Ν Μ , 3 Ν vO Ν aN Ὑ Ν Ν / εν Les ἊΝ, ε re ἐστὶν βαθύ- πόθεν ἔχεις τὸ ὕδωρ τὸ ζῶν ; | μὴ od μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν lal a Ν Ἰακώβ, ὃς ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν τὸ φρέαρ, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιεν καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτοῦ lol > cal \ i na a ε / an καὶ τὰ θρέμματα αὐτοῦ ; ' ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῇ" πᾶς 6 πίνων ἐκ τοῦ col σῷ - / 3 > ὕδατος τούτου διψήσει πάλιν - ' ὃς δ᾽ ἂν πίῃ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος οὗ ἐγὼ δώσω αὐτῷ, οὐ “ Ἂν ΚΑ Ἄν Ἐς , aA / > tel μὴ διψήσει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἀλλὰ τὸ ὕδωρ ὃ ἐγὼ δώσω αὐτῷ γενήσεται ἐν αὐτῷ ΄ ‘ ὃς. ἃς c / ΄ , πηγὴ ὕδατος ἁλλομένου εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον. λέγει πρὸς αὐτὸν ἣ γυνή " κύριε, δός λέγει αὐτῇ " ͵ Ν Ν “Ὁ ὕπαγε φώνησον τὸν ἄνδρα σου καὶ ἐλθὲ ἐνθάδε. ἀπεκρίθη ἡ γυνὴ καὶ εἶπεν " μοι τοῦτο τὸ ὕδωρ, ἵνα μὴ διψῶ μηδὲ διέρχωμαι ἐνθάδε ἀντλεῖν. ἄνδρα οὐκ ἔχω. λέγει αὐτῇ ὃ Ἰησοῦς" καλῶς εἶπες ὅτι ἄνδρα οὐκ ἔχω " ἱ πέντε γὰρ ἄνδρας ἔσχες, καὶ νῦν ὃν ἔχεις οὐκ ἔστιν σου ἀνήρ. τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἴρηκας. 20 λέγει αὐτῷ ἡ γυνή - κύριε, θεωρῶ ὅτι προφήτης εἶ ov. | ot πατέρες ἡμῶν ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ προσεκύνησαν - καὶ ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις ἐστὶν ὃ τόπος ὅπου προσκυνεῖν δεῖ. λέγει αὐτῇ ὃ Ἰησοῦς: πίστευέ μοι, γύναι, ὅτι ἔρχεται ὥρα ὅτε οὔτε ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ οὔτε ἐν “Ἱεροσολύμοις προσκυνήσετε τῷ πατρί. Me. 6: 20. ἠπόρει δ BL cop Treg.mg. ; ve Treg. [West.] Rev.txt. 11 ἡ γυνή SOA ἐποίει AC Ὁ A it vg syrr Treg txt. Rev.mg. Joh.4:1. Ἰησοῦς δὰ D ve cop Tree. meg. ; κύριος ABC L Treg.txt. West. 9 λέγει S* cop; add οὖν ὁ A BCD L vg Treg. West. | οὔσης S* D Rev.mg.; add οὐ γὰρ συγ- χρῶνται Ἰουδαῖοι Σαμαρείταις S*A BC L C D Lvg West.mg.; ἐκείνη S*; om B West.txt. 14 ἐγὼ sc. δὲ D 33 vg Or Rey.; om ABC L Treg. West. 17 εἶπεν 8° A D L vg cop Or; add αὐτῷ B C [ West.] Rev. δ 25, 26. ] UNTIL THE SECOND. 21 JOHN IY. ε a a a > Μ" lal A a 22 ὑμεῖς προσκυνεῖτε ὃ οὐκ οἴδατε, ἡμεῖς προσκυνοῦμεν ὃ οἴδαμεν, ὅτι ἡ σωτηρία > rs 3 ΄, » ͵΄ ΓΝ ε a 3 28 ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἐστίν - ἀλλὰ ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστίν, ὅτε οἱ ἀληθινοὶ προσ- Ν fA “ Ν κυνηταὶ προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ: καὶ γὰρ ὃ πατὴρ , A \ A Cy a ε ΄, \ \ 24 τοιούτους ζητεῖ τοὺς προσκυνοῦντας αὐτόν. πνεῦμα ὃ θεός, καὶ τοὺς προσκυ- A 3 ΄ Χ 59 ΄ a a , a x 25 νοῦντας ἐν πνεύματι Kai ἀληθείᾳ προσκυνεῖν δεῖ. λέγει αὐτῷ ἡ γυνή οἶδα oY ’, 9 a “-“ a ὅτι Μεσσίας ἔρχεται, ὃ λεγόμενος Χριστός - ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐκεῖνος, ἀναγγελεῖ ἡμῖν 26 ἅπαντα. λέγει αὐτῇ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἐγώ εἰμι, ὃ λαλῶν σοι. 27 Kai ἐπὶ τούτῳ ἦλθαν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι μετὰ γυναικὸς ΄ , > a v “ a A 28 ἐλάλει - οὐδεὶς μέντοι εἶπεν - τί ζητεῖς ἢ τί λαλεῖς μετ᾽ αὐτῆς ; 1 ἀφῆκεν οὖν 16 lal 16 » θ aA > / / a 2 / / Le Ψ > 29 OevTe WoeTe ἀνθρωπον ὃς εἰπέν MOL πάντα ἃ ἐποίησα" μήτι OUTOS ἐστιν ὃ \ vo ‘4 ΜΒ. «αὶ ε Ν os. ηλθ 3 \ av \ λέ - 3 ΄ τὴν ὑδρίαν αὐτῆς ἡ γυνὴ καὶ ἀπῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, καὶ λέγει τοῖς ἀνθρώποις - < / “ A Ἶ a - 81 Χριστός; ἐξῆλθον ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, καὶ ἤρχοντο πρὸς αὐτόν. "Ev τῷ μεταξὺ > Ἄ ἜΡΟΝ ε ἈΝ ,, ε / , ε Ν > 3 “- eens ἠρώτων αὐτὸν ot μαθητοὶ λέγοντες - ῥαββεί, φάγε. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἐγὼ a + bod ἃ ες Lal > ΝΜ 3, ε- ε Ν ‘ 3 La βρῶσιν ἔχω φαγεῖν ἣν ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε. ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ μαθηταὶ πρὸς ἀλλήλους - μή τις ἤνεγκεν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν ; ' λέγει αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν ἵνα “ ΑΝ Lal ἧς = Ν 3ι lal 35 ποιῶ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με Kal τελειώσω αὐτοῦ TO ἔργον. οὐχ ὑμεῖς 4 Ψ + /, if > Ἄλον τ ‘\ Ν ΕΘ / c “ > ΄ λέγετε ὅτι ἔτι τετράμηνός ἐστιν καὶ 6 θερισμὸς ἔρχεται ; ἰδοὺ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐπάρατε Ν 3 Ν Θ lal Ν / Ν rd Ψ ’ > Ν ΄ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν καὶ θεάσασθε τὰς χώρας, ὅτι λευκαί εἰσιν πρὸς θερισμόν. 86 ἤδη ὃ θερίζων μισθὸν λαμβάνει καὶ συνάγει καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, ἵνα καὶ ὃ 37 / ε Le) 4 \ Je θ (ζ > Ν ’, ε δὲ “4 > \ ε ar θ ΄ μὲ σπείρων ὁμοῦ χαίρῃ καὶ ὃ θερίζων. ἐν γὰρ τούτῳ ὁ λόγος ἐστὶν ὁ ἀληθινός, ὅτι 40 41 Mh c \ Τῷ “- ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὃ σπείρων καὶ ἄλλος ὃ θερίζων. ἐγὼ ἀπέσταλκα ὑμᾶς θερίζειν ὃ οὐχ ὑμεῖς κεκοπιάκατε - ἄλλοι κεκοπιάκασιν, καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν κόπον αὐτῶν εἶσε- ληλύθατε. 3 Ν an ’ / Ν cal a Ex δὲ τῆς πόλεως ἐκείνης πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτὸν TOV Ξαμαριτῶν διὰ τὸν , a \ , 7 ae, a 5 > λόγον τῆς γυναικὸς μαρτυρούσης ὅτι εἶπέν μοι πάντα ἃ ἐποίησα. ὡς οὖν ἦλθον % “ ie fal A “-“ πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Ξαμαρῖται, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν μεῖναι παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς - καὶ ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ δύο ε / Ν a , uch ὃ Ν Ν ’ 3 A ! “ Ν 42 ἡμέρας. καὶ πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν διὰ τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ, ' τῇ τε γυναικὶ 3. 4 bl τ ἢ ὃ Ν ἈΝ Ν ‘ ΄ > Ν Ν 3 , ΜᾺ ἔλεγον, ὅτι οὐκέτι διὰ τὴν σὴν λαλιὰν πιστεύομεν: αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκηκόαμεν, καὶ " “ PA Rae 9 A Ὁ \ a , οἴδαμεν OTL οὗτός ἐστιν ἀληθῶς ὃ σωτὴρ τοῦ κόσμου. § 26. Jesus teaches publicly in Galilee. Joun IV. 45-45. 4844 Mera δὲ τὰς δύο ἡμέρας ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν εἰς τὴν TadtAaiav. αὐτὸς γὰρ “Ty- 45 17 cal 2 ΄ μὴ ΄ > aA 297 ’ Ν 3 " ε Ἂν σοῦς ἐμαρτύρησεν ὅτι προφήτης ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι τιμὴν οὐκ ἔχει. ὡς οὖν ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, ἐδέξαντο αὐτὸν οἱ Γαλιλαῖοι, πάντα ἑωρακότες ἃ > lA Ν ΕΣ © f 3 (ar a Ν 3 Ν Ν > 3 Ν ε Ἢ ἐποίησὲν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ - καὶ αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἦλθον εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν. Marr. IV. 17. Mark I, 14, 15. Luke IV. 14, 15. ᾿Απὸ τότε ἤρξατο ὃ Ἴη- 14 --- κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγ- 14 --- καὶ φήμη ἐξῆλθεν 24 τοῦς προσκυνοῦντας S* D*; add αὐτὸν 86 ἵνα καὶ S A Dvg; om καὶ BCL 33 5? Se A BC D? L ve Treg. West. cop Treg. West. Rey. 88 ἀπέσταλκα L 35 36 θερισμόν. ἤδη ὃ θεριζων SC AC*D NSD; ἀπέστειλα A BCL Treg. West. Treg.mg. Rev.mg.; θερισμὸν ἤδη. 6 θε- 45 ὡς S* D; ὅτε δε ABC L Treg. West. | ρίζων C2 vg cop add Treg.txt. Rev.txt. ἃ S* D vg; ὅσα N° A BCL Treg. West. Rev. 22 FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Part IIL MATT. IV. MARK I. LUKE IV. A a ΄ Αἱ, GER, a gots κηρύσσειν Kal 15 γέλιον τοῦ θεοῦ, ' ὅτι καθ᾽ ὅλης τῆς περιχώ- -“ c Ν Ἂς λέγειν: μετανοεῖτε" πεπλήρωται ὃ καιρὸς 15 ρου περὶ αὐτοῦ. καὶ Ε Ν ε , 7 ε ΄ t yee... 2907 > al ἤγγικεν yap ἡ βασι- καὶ ἤγγικεν ἡ βασιλεία αὐτὸς ἐδίδασκεν ἐν ταῖς λεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. τοῦ θεοῦ: μετανοεῖτε συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν, δο- καὶ πιστεύετε ἐν τῷ ξαζόμενος ὑπὸ πάντων. εὐαγγελίῳ. § 27. Jesus again at Cana, where he heals the Son of ἃ Nobleman lying ill at Capernaum. — Cana of Galilee. JoHn IV. 46-54. 46 Ἦλθεν οὖν πάλιν eis τὴν Kava τῆς Γαλιλαίας, ὅπου ἐποίησεν τὸ ὕδωρ οἶνον. Se Θ .“ 47 ἦν δέ τις βασιλικός, οὗ ὃ υἱὸς ἠσθένει, ἐν Καφαρναούμ- οὗτος ἀκούσας ὅτι 3 lal 7 Ἂ “ 3 ‘é > Ν 4 3 a ἂν > ἈΝ A , Ἰησοῦς ἥκει ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, ἀπῆλθεν πρὸς αὑτὸν, καὶ ἠρώτα 48 [2 lal ‘ au, > a Ν οὖ 4 4 Ν 3 θ , i ἵνα καταβῇ καὶ ἰάσηται αὐτοῦ τὸν υἱόν: ἤμελλεν yap ἀποθνήσκειν. εἶπεν os 5 a . NS ΕΟ 5 οὖν ὃ Ἰησοῦς πρὸς αὐτόν" ἐὰν μὴ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἴδητε, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε. 4 ἂν > \ ε , , , Ν 3 Lad Δ, , 49 λέγει πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ βασιλικός - κύριε, κατάβηθι πρὶν ἀποθανεῖν τὸ παιδίον pov. NS Se ἣν ἃ aT cats , Nace es A aay, oF sy θ 2 a 50 λέγει αὐτῷ 6 Ἰησοῦς" πορεύου" ὃ vids cov ζῇ. ἐπίστευσεν ὃ ἄνθρωπος τῷ 4 x ᾿ ΤΣ, τούς. a ἈΓῚ ’ 3, Ν 3 a ’, ε a 51 λόγῳ ὃν εἶπεν αὐτῷ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἐπορεύετο. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ καταβαίνοντος ot δοῦ- 52 λ ε ΄ 9. A Ped iN . ε a > A ζῇ 5 “0 τὰ x . οἱ ὑπήντησαν αὐτῷ καὶ ἤγγειλαν ὅτι 6 παῖς αὐτοῦ ζῇ. ἐπύθετο οὖν τὴν ὥραν 3 2A > > ΄, 3, 5 τς a 2; ἃ eey 5 x -“ ε , παρ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐν 7 κομψότερον ἔσχεν ᾿ εἶπον οὖν αὑτῷ OTL ἐχθὲς ὥραν ἑβδόμην 3 9 A ETN ε Ψ 35 5 3 , a > , a ¢ 3 δ ας San Se. . 68 ἀφῆκεν αὐτὸν ὃ πυρετός. ἔγνω οὖν ὁ πατήρ ὅτι ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐν 7) εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὃ ᾽ fal ε ers a NA Pes, eres Ne. id > “Ὁ ΑΥ̓͂, A 54 Ἰησοῦς - ὁ vids cov ζῇ Kal ἐπίστευσεν αὐτὸς καὶ ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ ὅλῃ. Τοῦτο a ᾽ὔ e.g a 3 Ν 3 n > / > Ν πάλιν δεύτερον σημεῖον ἐποίησεν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐλθὼν ἐκ τῆς Ἰουδαίας εἰς τὴν Γαλι- iJ Aaiay. § 28. Jesus at Nazareth; He is there rejected; and fixes his abode at Capernaum. Luke TV. 16-31, 16 Καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς Nalapd, οὗ ἦν ἀνατεθραμμένος, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν κατὰ τὸ εἰωθὸς 17 αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν σαββάτων εἰς τὴν συναγωγήν, καὶ ἀνέστη ἀναγνῶναι. καὶ ἐπεδόθη αὐτῷ βιβλίον τοῦ προφήτοῦ Ἡσαΐου, καὶ ἀναπτύξας τὸ βιβλίον εὗρεν 18 τόπον οὗ ἢν γεγραμμένον" " πνεῦμα κυρίου ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ, οὗ εἵνεκεν ἔχρι- σέν με εὐαγγελίσασθαι πτωχωῖς, ἀπέσταλκέν με κηρύξαι αἰχμαλώτοις ἄφεσιν καὶ τυφλοῖς ἀνάβλεψιν, ἀποστεῖλαι 19 τεθραυσμένους ἐν ἀφέσει, ἱ κηρύξαι ἐνιαυτὸν κυρίου δε- 20 κτόν. καὶ πτύξας τὸ βιβλίον ἀποδοὺς τῷ ὑπηρέτη ἐκάθισεν, καὶ πάντων οἱ 217,18. 15.61:1. Comp. Is. 58: 6. Me. 1:15. ὅτι S*; pm λέγων δὰ AD; West. Rev. | ὅτι δὲ D; pm λέγοντες A BC pm καὶ λέγων B Lg copsyrr Treg. [West.]. L Treg. West. Rev. Joh.4:51. οἱ δοῦλοι δ᾽ DET Lvg;addaitod «Le. 4: 17. ἀναπτύξας S Τὸ vg; ἀνοίξας A BC cop Treg. West. | καί ἤγγειλαν SD; Α Β 1 Κὶ 88 cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν A C [Treg.]; om Β L cop §§ 27, 28, 29.] UNTIL THE SECOND. 23 LUKE Iv. > Ay 3 “A a? a 21 ὀφθαλμοὶ ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ ἦσαν ἀτενίζοντες αὐτῷ. ἤρξατο δὲ λέγειν πρὸς αὐτούς “ , > ° a , 22 ὅτι σήμερον πεπλήρωται ἣ γραφὴ αὕτη ἐν τοῖς ὠσὶν ὑμῶν. Kal πάντες ἐμαρτύ- a \ δα. A a ἢ = pow αὐτῷ καὶ ἐθαύμαζον ἐπὶ τοῖς λόγοις τῆς χάριτος τοῖς ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ τοῦ , 3 a ν᾿) SN Se RLS > Ν > ! waa ‘. > οἷ 23 στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔλεγον " οὐχὶ υἱός ἐστιν ᾿Ιωσὴφ οὗτος ; ' καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτοῦς " πάντως ἐρεῖτέ μοι τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην " ἰατρέ, θεράπευσον σεαυτόν: ὅσα σαμεν pene εἰς τὴν Καφαρναούμ, ποίησον καὶ ὧδε ἐν τῇ πατρίδι σου. 24 εἶπεν δέ: ἀμὴν λέγω ὑ ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐδεὶς τρο η Τῇ δεκτός ἐστιν ἐν τῇ πατρίδι ἑαυτοῦ. 25 ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας δὲ λέγω τ ὅτι πολλαὶ χῆραι ἦσαν ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Ἡλεώου ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ, ὅτε εἰ είσ ῃ ὃ οὐρανὸς ἐπὶ ἔτη τρία καὶ μῆνας ἕξ, ὡς ἐγένετο λιμὸς 26 μέγας ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ' καὶ πρὸς an δε τα: αὐτῶν ἐπέμφθη Ἡλείας εἰ μὴ εἰς Ν 27 Σάρεπτα τῆς ΣΞιδωνίας πρὸς γυναῖκα χήραν." καὶ πολλοὶ λεπροὶ ἦσαν ἐν τῷ 3 x al Ἰσραὴλ ἐπὶ Ἑλισαίου τοῦ προφήτου, καὶ οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν ἐκαθαρίσθη εἰ μὴ Ναιμὰν 2 ε > he b \ 3 x , θ ΄ 6 sd a Ans ΄ a 8 ὃ Σύρος." καὶ ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες θυμοῦ ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ ἀκούοντες ταῦτα, x. 5 4 2¢/ SX 3, a , \ > 3. «ἃ gv > ΄ “ 29 καὶ ἀναστάντες ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, καὶ ἤγαγον αὐτὸν Ews ὀφρύος TOU ὄρους ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἡ πόλις φκοδόμητο av- Marr. IV. 13-16. 30 τῶν, ὥστε κατακρημνίσαι αὐτόν * αὐτὸς 183 Kat καταλιπὼν τὴν Ναζαρὰ ἐλθὼν δὲ διελθὼν διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν ἐπορεύετο. κατῴκησεν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ τὴν πα- 81 Καὶ κατῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναούμ. πό- ραθαλασσίαν ἐν ὁρίοις Ζαβουλὼν καὶ λιν τῆς Γαλιλαίας. --- 14 Νεφθαλείμ, ἵνα πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν 15 διὰ Ἡσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος το ! γῇ Ζαβουλὼν καὶ γῆ Νεφθα- Leip, 600v θαλάσσης, πέραν tov ᾿Ιορδάνου, Ταλιλαία τῶν 16 ἐθνῶν, ὁ λαὸς ὃ καθ μενος ἐν σκότει φῶς εἶδεν μέγα, καὶ τοῖς καθημένοις ἐν χώρᾳ καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου φῶς ἀνέτειλεν αὐτοῖς. § 29. The Call of Simon Peter and Andrew, and of James and John, with the Miraculous Draught of Fishes. — Near Capernaum. Luxe V. 1-11. 1. Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ τὸν ὄχλον ἐπίκεισθαι αὐτῷ καὶ ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον Tod θεοῦ, 2 καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν ἑστὼς παρὰ τὴν λίμνην Γεννησαρέτ, ' καὶ ἴδεν δύο πλοιάρια ἑστῶτα 8 παρὰ τὴν λίμνην " οἱ δὲ ἁλεεῖς ἀπ’ αὐτῷν ἀποβάντες ἔπλυναν τὰ δίκτυα. ἐμβάς δὲ εἰς ἕν τῶν πλοίων, ὃ ἦν Σίμωνος, ἠρώτησεν αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἐπαναγα- 4 γεῖν ὀλίγον " καθίσας δὲ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ ἐδίδασκεν τοὺς ὄχλους. ὡς δὲ ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν, εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν Σίμωνα : ἐπανάγαγε εἰς τὸ βάθος, καὶ χαλάσατε τὰ 5 δίκτυα ὑμῶν εἰς ἄγραν. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς Σίμων εἶπεν - ἐπιστάτα, δι’ ὅλης νυκ- τὸς κοπιάσαντες οὐδὲν ἐλάβομεν - ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ ῥήματί σου χαλάσω τὰ δίκτυα. ἀν ΖΕ 6 καὶ τοῦτο ποιήσαντες Mart. IV. 18-22. Mark I. 16-20. συνέκλεισαν πλῆθος 18 Περιπατῶν δὲ παρὰ 16 Καὶ παράγων παρὰ τὴν ἰχθύων πολύ διερή- 825, 26. 1 K.17:1. 9. boy. 2K. 5: 14. O14) sq. PIs. 8:28); 91: 1. Le. 4:24. ἑαυτοῦ NS D; αὐτοῦ A Β 1, West.mg.: πλοῖα δὰ Β C? D Treg.txt. West. Treg. West. ° txt. 8 ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ SD; ex τοῦ πλοίον Le. 5:2. πλοιάρια A C* 1, 33 Tregmg. ABC UL vg Treg. West. Rev. 24 19 20 21 22 21 , Ἃς > 22 δασκεν εἰς THY συναγωγήν, |! Kal ἐξε- , αὐ τίου ass ὃ ὃ a Cee Par 5 πλήσσοντο ἐπὶ TH διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ" ἣν MATT. IV. τὴν θάλασσαν τῆς Ta- λιλαίας εἶδεν δύο ἀ- δελῴφούς, Σίμωνα τὸν λεγόμενον Ἱ]Πέτρον καὶ ᾿Ανδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, βάλλοντας ἀμ- / > Ν φίβληστρον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν: ἦσαν γὰρ ὙΌΣ ἁλεεῖς. FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER. MARK I. θάλασσαν τῆς Tadt- λαίας εἶδεν Σίμωνα καὶ ᾿Ανδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν Σίμωνος ἀμφιβάλλον- τας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ" ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλεεῖς. 7 τῶν. 8 σθαι αὐτά. [Part IL LUKE V. σετο δὲ τὰ δίκτυα av- καὶ κατένευσαν τοῖς μετόχοις ἐν τῷ ἑτέρῳ πλοίῳ τοῦ ἐλ- θόντας συλλαβέσθαι 5 lal ν 5 Ν αὑτοῖς - καὶ ἦλθαν, καὶ ἔπλησαν ἀμφότερα τὰ πλοῖα, ὥστε βυθίζε- sO Ἂς ἰδὼν δὲ / 4 a ἴω Σίμων Πέτρος προσέπεσεν τοῖς γόνασιν Ἰησοῦ λέγων - ἔξελθε ἀπ’ > “a 7 Θ᾿ EN c / 3 / 9 ἐμοῦ, OTL ἀνὴρ ἁμαρτωλός εἶμι, κύριε. θάμβος γὰρ περιέσχεν 3_ , ‘ ΄ \ Ἂ ΚΡ SN a 4 “- 3 , e ΄ αὑτὸν καὶ πάντας τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ ἐπὶ τῇ ἄγρᾳ τῶν ἰχθύων ἣ συνέ- ε / ‘\ \ 3 / 10 AaBov, 'époiws δὲ καὶ Ἴακωβον καὶ Ἰωάννην υἱοὺς Ζεβεδαίου, \ / 35 lal lol καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς . δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου, καὶ ποιή- ε ἴων ε tal > P. ow ὑμᾶς ἁλεεῖς ἀνθρώ- e XN > / πων. οἱ δὲ εὐθέως 5 "4 aN 7, 5 ἀφέντες τὰ δίκτυα ἦκο- λούθησαν αὐτῷ: Καὶ προβὰς ἐκεῖθεν εἶδεν ἄλλους δύο ἀδελφούς, τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελ- Ν > nw ΕἸ nw / Ν φὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ μετὰ Ζεβε- t c / “ Ν ἴω δαίου τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτῶν / Ν » καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκ- ΘΕ Ἀ 5. ἢ τυα αὐτῶν: καὶ ἐκάλε- > , ε X 3 σεν αὐτούς. οἱ δὲ εὐ- /, la A lal θέως ἀφέντες τὸ πλοῖον Ν ἈΝ a καὶ τὸν πατέρα αὐτῶν 3 4 3 Lal ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ. 18 πων. Ἰάκωβον τὸν Ny 5 rn > 17 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 6 “Iy- “ “ 5 , σοῦς", δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου, καὶ ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλεεῖς ἀνθρώ- καὶ εὐθὺς ἀφέν- Ἂν / > ,ὔ τες τὰ δίκτυα ἠκολού- 19 θησαν αὐτῷ. 20 τὰ δίκτυα. ᾽’ὔ Ἂν 5 / τούς" καὶ ἀφέντες ‘A / 2 ἴω τὸν πατέρα αὑτῶν Ζε- a ΕῚ tal Τὰ βεδαῖον ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ μετὰ τῶν μισθωτῶν a 3 lal ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ. CMP fu ‘\ a οἵ ἦσαν κοινωνοὶ τῷ Ss Ν Σίμωνι. καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς Se Sy Ὁ 79 a τὸν Σίμωνα ὃ Ἰησοῦς " μὴ φοβοῦ: ἀπὸ τοῦ a , νῦν ἀνθρώπους ἔσῃ ζωγρῶν. Καὶ προβὰς ὀλίγον εἶδεν ᾿Ιάκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου \ 3 , Ν 3 Ν > a Ν καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ καταρτίζοντας Ν 32 Χ 3 / 3 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐκάλεσεν αὖ- Ν / > 11 και καταγαγόντες τὰ A 9. AN ἊΝ; ΒΝ πλοῖα ἐπὶ τὴν γὴν, 3 ΄ ’ὔ > ἀφέντες πάντα WKO- λούθησαν αὐτῷ. § 30. The healing of a Demoniac in the Synagogue. — Capernaum. Marx I. 21-28. Luke IV. 31-37. Καὶ εἰσπορεύονται εἰς Kadapva- ovp: καὶ εὐθὺς τοῖς σάββασιν ἐδί- 31 dp διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν yop ἕ ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς. 32 αὐτοὺς ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν" — καὶ ἣν διδάσκων "kal ἐξε- ’ > NX a tal > Ay 9, πλήσσοντο ἐπὶ TH διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι 3 3 ΄, . ε / > A ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ ἣν ὃ λόγος αὐτοῦ. « Ie. 5:9. ἡ δ᾽) AC L West.mg.; ὧν ΒΤ L West.mg.; εἰσελθὼν εἰς τ. 0. ἐδίδασκεν A Treg. West.txt. Rev. Me. 1: 21. Β Ὁ [Treg.] West.txt. Rev. ἐδίδασκεν εἰς Thy συναγ. BS CO §§ 80, 31.] MARK I. . \ 34s > > lal “- 3 28 ΚΚαὶ εὐθὺς ἣν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐὖ- an ΕΣ > , 9 7 τῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ, 24 καὶ ἀνέκραξεν ' λέγων - τί ἡμῖν καὶ > col, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ; ἦλθες ἀπολέ- Gace " ΄ ΑΚ ΧΈΦΙ, εἰν σαι ἡμᾶς " οἴδαμέν σε τίς εἶ, ὃ ἄγιος cal “a Ν 3 ’ 9 “" ε 25 τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὃ > Τησοῦς - φιμώθητι καὶ ἔξελθε ἐξ av- cal Ν Lé& ee. Ν ἴω 26 Tov. καὶ σπαράξαν αὕτον τὸ πνεῦμα Ν 3 4 \ “ tal τὸ ἀκάθαρτον καὶ φωνῆσαν φωνῇ 27 μεγάλῃ ἐξῆλθεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἐθαμ- δ - βήθησαν ἅπαντες, ὥστε συνζητεῖν 3 AY , Ἂμ 5 fal αὐτοὺς λέγοντας - τί ἐστιν τοῦτο; δι- δαχὴ καινὴ κατ᾽ ἐξουσίαν - καὶ τοῖς πνεύμασι τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις ἐπιτάσσει, καὶ ἐξῆλθεν aes N rye 2s aA > ) QakO7y αυτοὺ εὐθὺς παντάχου εις \ ΄ - 28 καὶ ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ. ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας. UNTIL THE SECOND. 25 LUKE Iv. Ν Ἂ 5 “ a > 88 Kat ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ ἣν ἄνθρωπος ΕἸΣ “Ὁ / ἔχων πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου, Ν OL a ΄ 12 , καὶ ἀνέκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ -ἱ ἔα, τί eon \ Sus “ἀντ , 3 ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ; ἢλ- θες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς ; 84 old σε τίς εἶ, ete. a A Ν 3 / 35 ὃ ἅγιος τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ ἐπετίμησεν > A ὦ δ a λέ ~ 00 Ν αὐτῷ ὁ Inoous λέγων " φιμώθητι καὶ ἔξελθε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ. καὶ ῥῖψαν αὐτὸν τὸ ὃ / > Ν / 55. 7 HEN a.pLoviov εἰς TO μέσον ἐξήλθεν ἀπ 86 αὐτοῦ, μηδὲν βλάψαν αὐτόν. καὶ 3 Α , 52%. ’ Ν ἐγένετο θάμβος ἐπὶ πάντας, καὶ συν- ἐλάλουν πρὸς ἀλλήλους λέγοντες" / ε , e 7 > 2¢ ΓΦ δὶ τίς ὃ λόγος οὗτος, OTL ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ. καὶ δυνάμει ἐπιτάσσει τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις 4 NS 34 \ 55 37 πνεύμασιν καὶ ἐξέρχονται; καὶ ἐξε- πορεύετο ἦχος περὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς πάντα τόπον τῆς περιχώρου. § 31. The healing of Peter’s wife’s mother, and many others. — Capernaum. Marr. VIII. 14-17. Marx I. 29-34. Luxe IV. 38-41. 14 Kal ἐλθὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοὺς 29 ΚΚαὶ εὐθὺς ἐκ τῆς συὺν- 38 ᾿Αναστὰς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Iérpov αγωγῆς ἐξελθόντες ἣλ- συναγωγῆς εἰσῆλθεν Coins Ν θ Ν 3 > Ν 2 Δ , 5 Ν a FV, SZ εἶδεν THY πενθερὰν av- Gov εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Σί- εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Σίμωνος. a 2 \ 9 “ , τοῦ βεβλημένην καὶ μωνος καὶ ᾿Ανδρέου με- πενθερὰ δὲ τοῦ Σίμωνος > πυρέσσουσαν. τὰ Ιακώβου καὶ Ἰωάν- ἣν συνεχομένη πυρε- 80 νου. ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σέ τῷ in i ἡρώ νου. ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σέ: D μεγάλῳ, καὶ ἡρώτη- μωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσ- σαν αὐτὸν περὶ αὐτῆς. 15 Kal ἥψατο σουσα, καὶ εὐθὺς λές 39 Kal ἐπιστὰς ἐπάνω τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς, καὶ γουσιν αὐτῷ περὶ ad- αὐτῆς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὃ πυρε- 31 τῆς. καὶ προσελθὼν πυρετῷ, καὶ ἀφῆκεν i) Uy) Pp 118: p RUPETOs a Ν ” ta an TOs: Kal ἠγέρθη, καὶ ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν κρατή- αὐτήν - παραχρῆμα δὲ διηκόνει αὐτῷ. σας τῆς χειρός - καὶ ἀναστᾶσα διηκόνει av- n 3 a ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὃ πυρε- τοῖς. TOs, καὶ διηκόνει αὖτ 40 Δύνοντος δὲ τοῦ ἡλίου , lal > ’ὔ μὲ > 16 ὀψίας 82 τοῖς. Ὀψίας δὲ ye- πάντες ὅσοι εἶχον ἀ- δὲ γενομένης προσήνεγ- fA . μ᾿ ε νομένης, ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ a / σθενοῦντας VOOOLS ποι- Μο. 1:94. ἡμᾶς: Tisch.; ἡμᾶς; Treg. West. Rev. | οἴδαμέν S 1, A cop Treg.mg, West.mg.; οἶδά A B Ο D it vg syrr Treg. txt. West.txt. Rev. 25 6 Ἰησοῦς S* A*; add λέγων S* A2 BC D L it vg cop syrr Treg. [ West.] Rev. 27 αὐτοὺς δὲ Β ; πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς AC DA Treg. West.mg. Rev. | διδαχὴ καινὴ κατ᾽ ἐξ- ουσίαν - Tisch.; διδαχὴ καινή - (καινή, Treg.) κατ᾽ ἐξουσίαν καὶ Treg. West. Rey. Le. 4: 86. οὗτος, ὅτι --- ἐξέρχονται ; Rev. mg.; οὗτος ; ὅτι --- ἐξέρχονται. Rev.txt. Mc. 1:29. ἐξελθόντες ἦλθον SB A CL vg cop Treg.mg.; ἐξελθὼν ἦλθεν Β D Treg.txt. West.mg. Rev.mg. 82 ἔδυ NACLA; ἔδυσεν Β D Treg. West. »».Ἐ- 20 11 35 36 37 38 39 23 24 25 ράπευσεν SACL Ξὶ Treg.mg. West.mg. ἐξήρχετο AB DL Treg.txt. West.txt. | κραυ- γάζντα A Ὁ Treg.mg.; κράζοντα SB CLE Treg.txt. West. MATT. VIII. av αὐτῷ δαιμονιζομέ- καν αὐτῷ δαιμονιζομ U vous 70AXOvUS* Kal ἐξέ- βαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ, καὶ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας ἐθερά- 33 MARK 1. ἥλιος, ἔφερον πρὸς αὖ- τὸν πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας καὶ τοὺς δαιμο- ἣν / 1% νιζομένους" καὶ 7 ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυν- FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER 41 [Parr III. LUKE IV. ’, 2 3 Ν κίλαις ἤγαγον αὐτοὺς Ἂν 3 ’, ε Ν PAX πρὸς αὐτόν: ὃ δὲ ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ αὐτῶν τὰς χεῖ- 3 Ν > 4 pas ἐπιτιθεὶς ἐθεράπευ- εν αὐτούς. ἐξήρχοντο 7 a , \ Ν ΄ Ν Ν / 5 Ν πευσεν, ὅπως πληρωθῇ ηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύ- δὲ καὶ δαιμόνια ἀπὸ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἡσαΐου 34 ραν. καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν πολλῶν, κραυγάζοντα τοῦ προφήτου λέγον- πολλοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας CN a o Ν Φ καὶ λέγοντα ὅτι σὺ εἶ a > XQ \ , / \ ε εν a an \ τος" αὐτὸς Tas ποικίλαις νόσοις, καὶ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ 9 , ε n , XS) > lal 3 3, re”. ἀσθενείας ἡμῶν δαιμόνια πολλὰ ἐξεβα- ἐπιτιμῶν οὐκ εἴα αὐτὰ a a 4 3 Ἂς ἔλαβεν καὶ τὰς λεν, καὶ οὐκ ἤφιεν λαλεῖν, ὅτι ἡδεισαν τὸν / 3 / δὲ x Lod Ἂν ὃ / Ν wa ἊΣ a νόσους ἐβάστα- αλεῖν τὰ δαιμόνια, Χριστὸν αὑτὸν εἶναι. 7 3 / σεν. ὅτι ἤδεισαν αὐτόν. § 82. Jesus with his Disciples goes from Capernaum throughout Galilee. Marx I. 35-39. Luke IV. 42-44. Γενομένης δὲ ἡμέρας ἐξελθὼν ἐπο- ΄ > 3, ΄ Ν e» ρεύθη εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, καὶ οἱ ὄχλοι 2 4 Sey x Gay 3 3 ἐπεζήτουν αὐτόν - καὶ ἦλθον ἔως αὖ- Καὶ πρωὶ ἔννυχα λίαν ἀναστὰς ἐξ- 42 a“ θ Ν 3 “ Ἵ > 3, tA nAGev καὶ ἀπῆλθεν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, 3 ἴω 4 ἣν τ KQKEL TPOONVXETO. κοι κατεδίωξεν Εν, τ, Ν ε > 3 “- \ a \ a SN a AN , QUTOV “ιμὼν καὶ OL PET GBUTOV, και TOV, και κατειχον αυτον του μη πορεὺυ- ὑ τ SEEN Ὰ / > Lod ῳ > > bt ε Ἂ > Ν _€UPOV GUTOV, Και λέγουσιν QuTw ott 48 εσθαι aT αὐτων. ο δὲ εἰπεν προς , a , Ν ,, 3 3 ΄ ωὲ Ν a (Je cA TAVTES ζητοῦσίν σε. και λέγει αυ- αὐυτους OTL και ταις ετεραις πόλεσιν tal 4 3 “A > Ἂν 3 > / 4 Lal Ν᾽: / τοῖς" ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ εἰς TAS EXO- εὐαγγελίσασθαί με δεὶ τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅτι εἰς τοῦτο ἀπεστάλην. 3 \ καὶ ἣν κηρύσσων εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς τῆς Ταλιλαίας. , / 7 3 μα ͵ὔ μένας κωμοπόλεις, ἵνα κἀκεῖ κηρύξω" εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐξῆλθον. καὶ ἦλθεν 44 κηρύσσων εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν καὶ τὰ δαιμό- νια ἐκβάλλων. Marr. IV. 23-25. Kai περιῆγεν ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ, διδάσκων ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν καὶ κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλείας καὶ θεραπεύων πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ πᾶσαν ΄ > “ lal \ \ ete) ε 9 Ν 3 a > με Ἂν , Ἅ μαλακίαν εν τῳ λαῷ. και ἀπῆλθεν 7] aKOY) αὐτου εις oAnv ΤῊΝ Συρίαν ’ και ὩΣ Ν A / Ἂς , προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακὼς ἔχοντας ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις ΄ Ν /, Ν Ψ \ 4 ‘ συνεχομένους καὶ δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς, καὶ καὶ ἠκολούθησαν αὑτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας Ν / xc , Yo) , Ν ͵ a? ,ὔὕ καὶ Δεκαπόλεως καὶ Ἱεροσολύμων καὶ Ιουδαίας καὶ πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου. v7. Is. 538i: 4. > / > 4 ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς. Le. 4: 40. ἐθεράπευεν B Dit vg syrr; ἐθε- Χριστὸν εἶναι S* Β C L 33 cop [West.] Rev.mg. Le. 4:44. Γαλιλαίας A D A it vg West. mg.; Ἰουδαίας 8 Β C L cop Treg.mg. West. txt. Rev.mg. δ Mt. 4: 98. Γαλιλαίᾳ B Rey.mg.; add 6 Ἰησοῦς SC* D vg cop syrr [Treg.] Rev.txt. 41 ἐξήρχοντο δὰ Ο 33 Treg.mg. West.mg. ; Mc. 1: 34. ἤδεισαν αὐτόν S* A D vg; add §§ 32, 33, 34.] 2 Ka § 98. The Healing of a Leper. — Galilee. Matt. VIII. 2-4. ἰδοὺ λεπρὸς Ν ΄ προσελθὼν προσεκύνε: Aad αὐτῷ λέγων" τῷ λέγων κύριε, ἐὰν θέλῃς, δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι. eS, la Ἂν “Ὁ 3 καὶ ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα ἥψατο αὐτοῦ λέγων - θέλω, καθαρίσθητι. UNTIL THE SECOND. 40 41 42 Marx I. 40-45. Kai ἔρχεται πρὸς αὖ- τὸν λεπρὸς, παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν καὶ γονυπετῶν λέγων αὐτῷ ὅτι ἐὰν / 4 / θέλῃς δύνασαί pe κα- A θαρίσαι. καὶ σπλαγ- χνισθεὶς ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἥψατο καὶ λέγει - θέλω, καθαρί- Ν > \ = a σθητι. Kal εὐθὺς ἀπῆλ- 12 13 Luke. V.. 12-16. Καὶ πὰ > a a εἶναι αὑτὸν ἐν μιᾷ τῶν > / - ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ : πόλεων, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἀνὴρ ,’ ΄ὔ NJ πλήρης λέπρας: ἰδὼν 3 lal δὲ τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, πεσὼν SEN , 29 73 ἐπὶ πρόσωπον ἐδεήθη αὐτοῦ λέγων: κύριε, ἐὰν θέλῃς, δύνασαί με 4 pe ΄ καθαρίσαι. καὶ ἐκτεί- vas τὴν χεῖρα ἥψατο καὶ εὐθέως ἐκαθερίσθη θεν ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα, αὐτοῦ εἰπών: θέλω, αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα. 48 καὶ ἐκαθερίσθη. καὶ καθαρίσθητι. καὶ εὐ- ἐμβριμησάμενος αὐτῷ θέως ἣ λέπρα ἀπῆλθεν 4 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐξέβαλεν αὐτόν, ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. λέγει αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς: 44 ! καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ: ὅρα 14 καὶ αὐτὸς μὴ Ν ” 3 Ν Ν Ν ef ΄ δ΄. «ἢ ὅρα μηδενὶ εἴπῃς, ἀλ- μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς, παρήγγειλεν αὐτῷ μη- λὰ ὕπαγε σεαυτὸν δεῖ- ἀλλὰ ὕπαγε σεαυτὸν devi εἰπεῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀπελ- fov τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ προσ- δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ καὶ θὼν δεῖξον σεαυτὸν τῷ ένεγκον τὸ δῶρον ὃ προσένεγκε. περὶ τοῦ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προσένεγκε προσέταξεν Muwions, καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς." προσέταξεν Μωῦσῆς σου καθὼς προσέταξεν 45 1 Ν « λὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον, ὥστε , Φ.-(Ἂ ΄ ἐγ ψ ἄν". μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασθαι εἰς πόλιν φα- νερῶς εἰσελθεῖν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔξω ἐπ’ ἐρήμοις τόποις ἦν, καὶ ἤρχοντο πρὸς αὐτὸν πάντοθεν. \ § 34. The Healing of a Mark II. 1-12. Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Kadap- \ ane “- 3 7 ν 2 vaovp δι’ ἡμερῶν, ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν Sees, ~ εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς." ὃ δὲ ἐξελθὼν ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολ- 15 αὐτοῖς.“ Mwoiojs, εἰς μαρτύριον διήρχετο δὲ ial ε , Ν 3 aA \ μᾶλλον ὃ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ συν- ’ » ἊΝ 9 ’ Ν ἤρχοντο ὄχλοι πολλοὶ ἀκούειν καὶ θεραπεύεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ἀσθενειῶν αὐὖ- a 3 lal > tal 16 τῶν. αὐτὸς δὲ ἦν ὑποχωρῶν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις καὶ προσευχόμενος. Paralytic. — Capernaum. Luke V. 17-26. 17 X52 2 > ay a ε a ‘ Kat ἐγένετο ἐν μιᾷ TOV ἡμερῶν καὶ 5 as λ αὐτὸς ἣν διδάσκων, καὶ ἦσαν καθή- 2 οἴκῳ ἐστίν. καὶ συνήχθησαν πολ- μενοι Φαρισαῖοι καὶ νομοδιδάσκαλοι, ln a > pare Aol, ὥστε μηκέτι χωρεῖν μηδὲ τὰ πρὸς οἱ ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες ἐκ πάσης κώμης 8. 4 etc. Comp. Ley. 14 : 2 sq. Me. 1: 40. καὶ γονυπετῶν δὲ L [West.] Le. 5:18. εἰπών A; λέγων SBC DI 33 (add αὐτόν A C A cop [Treg.] Rev.txt.); om Treg. West. Rev. B D Treg.mg. Rev.mg. 41 λέγει δὰ; Μο. 9:1. ἐν οἴκῳ δὰ Β D L vg cop; εἰς add αὐτῷ ABCD 1, Δ νρ cop Treg. West. οἶκον A C West.mg. 28 MARK II. Ν a Ν τὴν θύραν, καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον. Marr. ΙΧ. 2-8. Ν 2 Καὶ ἰδοὺ προσέφερον αὐτῷ παραλυτικὸν ἐπὶ κλίνης βεβλημένον. MATT. IX. MARK 11. ΔΝ ΄ 3 καὶ ἐρχονται φέροντες Ν Ν πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτι- ἢ / κὸν αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσ- 4 σάρων. μενοι προσενέγκαι αὖ- a Ν Ν ΜΝ 5 τῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἀπε- στέγασαν τὴν στέγην μὲ ee a) ΄ ὅπου ἣν, καὶ ἐξορύξαν- a ‘ , τες χαλῶσι τὸν κρά- 4 Barrov ὅπου ὃ παραλυ- Ν 5 τικὸς κατέκειτο. \ \ ΄ και μῇῃ δυνά- FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Part IIL LUKE Υ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας καὶ ᾿Ιουδαίας καὶ ‘Te- ρουσαλήμ, " καὶ δύναμις κυρίον ἦν εἰς 18 19 ἐνώπιον Ν lal τὸ ἰᾶσθαι αὐτόν. καὶ ‘ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες φέροντες : a, tA ΕΣ ἐπὶ κλίνης ἄνθρωπον a > ὃς ἦν παραλελυμέ- Ἀ 397 ΞΔ νος, καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν εἰσενεγκεῖν καὶ θεῖναι 9 a ‘\ αυτου. και Ν ε / / 4 μὴ εὑρόντες ποίας εἰσενέγκω- ent ‘ Ν Ξ᾿ 3 σιν αὐτὸν διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἀνα- / 3, | \ a Ν a βάντες ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα διὰ τῶν κε- ; Ἄ ράμων καθῆκαν αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ \ και Ν SQN δν.9 ἴω ἊΝ καὶ ἰδὼν ὃ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν εἶπεν τῷ a 4 παραλυτικῷ: θάρσει ’ 3 ΄ ’ ε τέκνον, ἀφίενται σου αἱ ε ’, .5 Ν Ν 8 ἁμαρτίαι. καὶ ἰδοὺ τινὲς τῶν γραμματέων εἶπον ἐν ἑαυτοῖς - οὗτος βλασ- φημεῖ. \ ΞΟΝΣΝ 79 a καὶ ἰδὼν 6 ᾿Τησοῦς Ν 3 , 4.0 τι τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν Φ εἶπεν * σ > Lal ἵνατί ἐνθυμεῖσθε a ΄, πονηρὰ ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ε “ ’ὔ / > 5 upov; τί yap ἐστιν "ὦ a εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν * 37 , ee ἀφίενταί σου αἱ apap- a“ a“ ye Tiat, ἢ εἰπεῖν - ἔγειρε Ἂν ’ καὶ περιπάτει ; PIN ε 3 a a ἰδὼν 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς τὴν ΄,΄ Fae SN Ψ a πίστιν αὑτῶν λέγει TO παραλυτικῷ * τέκνον, 9 / / [: ε ἀφίενταί σου at ἅμαρ- τίαι. ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραμματέων ἐκεῖ ‘3 καθήμενοι καὶ διαλογι- ’ὔ tal ζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδί- an »“, δι αις αὐτῶν: τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ; βλασ- lal 4 φημεῖ" τίς δύναται > Lg ε Ψ > Ν ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας εἰ μὴ 12) ε , Ν 3 Ν εἷς ὃ θεός; καὶ εὐθὺς 5) Ν 2 9 fal an ἐπιγνοὺς ὃ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, λέγει αὐτοῖς " τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε > tal / ε a ἐν Tals καρδίαις ὑμῶν ; {A τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ * 5 4 ’ὔ ΘΕ ἀφίενταίΐ σου αἱ apap- ’ Xv > a 3 τιαι, 1) €L7TELV " eyelpe Le. 5:17. mg. Treg.mg. Rev.mg. ; Treg.txt. Rey.txt. Mt. 9: 4. Mc. 2:4. προσενέγκαι S BL 33 vg cop mg. Rev.mg; προσεγγίσαι AC Ὁ Δ Rey.txt. Me. 2: 9. αὐτόν δὰ BLE Treg.mg.; αὖ- τούς AC DA it vg cop syrr Treg.txt. Rev. 20 21 22 23 B L Treg. West. , > Ν , κλινιδίῳ εἰς TO μέσον » a? an ἔμπροσθεν Tov Ἰησοῦ. καὶ ἰδὼν τὴν πίστιν 9 A Ls + αὐτῶν εἶπεν - ἄνθρωπε, 5 / 3 ε ε ἀφέωνταί σοι al ἅμαρ- τίαι σου. καὶ ἤρξαντο διαλογίζεσθαι οἱ γραμ- ματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι τίς ἐστιν Φ a ral οὗτος ὃς λαλεῖ βλασ- / φημίας ; ε ’ὔ’ > Lal > ἣς ἁμαρτίας ἀφεῖναι εἰ μὴ 4, 3 ’ὔὕ μόνος ὃ θεός; λέγοντες’ , 4 τίς δύναται ἐπι- Ν ee a ‘ γνοὺς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς αὐτῶν 3 Ν > \ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς * τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν ; τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, > tal > 4 / εἰπεῖν - ἀφέωνται σοι ΠῚ αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου, ἢ εἶ- πεῖν - ἔγειρε καὶ περι- πάτει; ἢ λαλεῖ; βλασφημεῖ" δὰ ΒΤ, vg; λαλεῖ βλασφημίας ἃ Ο Δ. ἰδὼν S Ο Ὁ Lit vg cop West. εἰδὼς Β syrr Treg. West.txt. ἔγειρε S A C Ὁ 33; eyelpov 88 84, 35.] MATT. IX. σ a ? 6 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξου- σίαν ἔχει ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ 3 ’, ὍΡΩΝ, “ a ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 9 ’ὔ ε , / ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, τότε 4 a “ λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ > \ a »" Ν ἐγερθεὶς dpdov σου τὴν iA \ 9 3 Ν κλίνην καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν i. St ὦ OE \ οἶκόν σου. Kal ἐγερθεὶς 3 Ll cd Ν > ἀπῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ. ἰδόντες δὲ of ὄχλοι ἐφοβήθησαν καὶ ἐδόξασαν τὸν θεὸν τὸν δόντα ἐξουσίαν τοιαύ- τὴν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. UNTIL THE SECOND. 10 11 12 MARK II. A καὶ dpov τὸν κράβατ- τόν σου καὶ ὕπαγε; ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξου- 8 3, ε ev Lal giav ἔχει ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 3 ,ὔ ε ’ , ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, λέ- yee τῷ παραλυτικῷ- ! , m” > σοι λέγω, ἔγειρε ἄρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου ν ¢ > A = καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς TOV οἷ- ἌΡ... Ψ καὶ ἠγέρθη, Ν 352 Χ ΕΣ \ και εὐθὺς apas τον κόν σου. κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἐμ- προσθεν πάντων, σ 3 , ’ὔ ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάν- τας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτι οὕ- 3 / δ τως οὐδέποτε εἴδομεν. 24 25 26 29 LUKE V. ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆπε σ ε εν URS) , ὅτι ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώ- 3 ’, + IN που ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀφιέναι ἅμαρ- τίας, εἶπεν τῷ παραλε- λέγω, ΄, Ν λυμένῳ-: σοὶ Ν Ν »” \ eyelpe καὶ ἄρας τὸ 4Q 7 , κλινίδιόν σου πορεύου > εἶ ted Ν εἰς TOV OLKOV σου. και παραχρῆμα ἀναστὰς 3 a7 A Ν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν, ἄρας ἐφ᾽ ὃ κατέκειτο, ἀπῆλ- θεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον av- τοῦ δοξάζων τὸν θεόν. καὶ ἔκστασις ἔλαβεν buf we ν᾿ 9. “Ξξ ἅπαντας, καὶ ἐδόξαζον τὸν θεόν, καὶ ἐπλήσθη- σαν φόβου λέγοντες Ψ ΜΜ / ὅτι εἴδομεν παράδοξα σήμερον. § 35. The call of Matthew. — Capernaum. Matt. IX. 9. Kai παράγων ὃ lal > a > σοῦς ἐκεῖθεν εἶδεν θρωπον καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον, Μαθθαῖον λεγόμενον, καὶ λέγει > a > , αὐτῷ" ἀκολούθει μοι. καὶ ἀναστὰς ἠκολούθει 3 a αὐυτῳ . Mc. 2:9. ὕπαγε S DL A 33; περιπάτει 13 A B Cvg syrr Treg. West. Rey. Mt. 9:6. Le. 5: 24. τικῷ δὰ Ο DLE West.mg. ἐγερθεὶς δ Ο L West.mg.; ἔγειρε Β D vg cop syrr Treg. West.txt. παραλελυμένῳ A B; mapadv- Marx II. 18, 14. Kat ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν 3. \ , \ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν - καὶ “ ε Ν 35, πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο Ν > ΄ Ν 9530. “ ͵κ8 πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ἐδίδα- Ν σκεν αὐτούς. καὶ πα- Ν δ ράγων εἶδεν Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ ᾿Αλφαίου καθήμε- Pm. Ν ’ A νον ἐπὶ TO τελώνιον, καὶ a / λέγει αὐτῷ. ἀκολού- καὶ ἀναστὰς θει μοι. 3 ,, 3 an ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ. 27 28 Luke V. 27, 28. Kai μετὰ ταῦτα ἐξ- ἤλθεν, καὶ ἐθεάσατο Te / λώνην ὀνόματι Aevelv / Cs. Ν 4 καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώ- \ Φ νιον, καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ. μοι. Ν ’ὕ 3 καταλιπὼν πάντα ἄνα- ἀκολούθει καὶ Ν 3 4, 3 - στὰς ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ. Me. 2:12. ἔμπροσθεν S Β L Treg.mg. ; ἐναντίον A CD A Treg.txt. West. 13 cis δὲ ; παρὰ SW A BCDLA Treg. TD δι ὦ Ὁ μὰ PART IV. : --ὄ.ὄὄ..:.;.-.-.-.-ς. OUR LORD'S SECOND PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE THIRD. Time: One year. § 36. The Pool of Bethesda; the Healing of the Infirm Man; and our Lord’s subsequent Discourse. — Jerusalem. JoHn V. 1-47. Με ταῦτα ἣν ἣ ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, καὶ ἀνέβη ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα. Ἔστιν δὲ ἐν τοῖς Ἱεροσολύμοις ἐπὶ τῇ προβατικῇ κολυμβήθρα, τὸ λεγόμενον Ἑβραϊστὶ Βηθζαθά, πέντε στοὰς ἔχουσα. ἐν ταύταις κατέκειτο πλῆθος τῶν ἀσθενούντων, τυφλῶν, χωλῶν, ξηρῶν. |‘ ἣν δέ τις ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖ τριάκοντα καὶ ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ - τοῦτον ἰδὼν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς κατακείμενον, καὶ γνούς ὅτι πολὺν ἤδη χρόνον ἔχει, λέγει αὐτῷ - θέλεις ὑγιὴς γενέσθαι ; | ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ ὃ ἀσθενῶν - κύριε, ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔχω, ἵνα ὅταν ταραχθῇ τὸ ὕδωρ βάλῃ με εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν - ἐν ᾧ δὲ ἔρχομαι ἐγώ, ἄλλος πρὸ ἐμοῦ καταβαίνει. ' λέγει ! Sia) se Ἴ ΝΟ ον > \ ΄ὔ ΄ ‘ , Vc a gk αυτῷ oO ησους eyelpe αρον TOV κράβαττόν σου και περιπάτει. και ἐγένετο ε ν (a \ 5 Ν ΄ 3 lal Ν ΄ > ‘ , ὑγιὴς ὁ ἄνθρωπος, καὶ ἦρεν τὸν κράβαττον αὐτοῦ καὶ περιεπάτει: ἣν δὲ σάβ- βατον ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ. 10. Ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι τῷ τεθεραπευμένῳ: σάββατόν ἐστιν, καὶ οὐκ ἔξεστίν t t 11 σοι ἄραι τὸν κράβαττον. Φ - ‘ ia , Ν ΄ὔ 12 εἶπεν - Gpov τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει. ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς - ὃ ποιήσας με ὑγιῆ, ἐκεῖνός μοι Ona ei eat) ε ρωτήησαν αὐτον" τις ἐστιν O 3, “ » 18 ἄνθρωπος ὃ εἰπών σοι: ἄρον καὶ περιπάτει; '6 δὲ ἀσθενῶν οὐκ ἥδει τίς ἐστιν " 14 ε \ Ἴ a ἐξέ " Ν + > ra , oO γάρ σους ECEVEVO EV Ox: OV OVTOS €V τῳ τόπῳ. col , Ἂν τῶν μετὰ ταῦτα εὑρίσκει αὐτὸν ὃ Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ εἶ ὑτῷ - ἴδε ὑγιὴς γέγονας " έτι ἁμάρτανε, ἵνα ησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἴδε ὑγιὴς γέγονας " μὴκ μάρτανε, ἵ 15 μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι γένηται. Joh. 5: 1 ἡ ἑορτὴ δὰ C 1, cop Rev.mg.; om ἡ A BD Treg. West. Rev.txt. 2 τὸ λεγόμενον S* ; ἡ ἐπιλεγομένη Se A B C L Treg. West. | Βηθζαθά S L 33 Rev. mg.; Βηθσαϊδά B vg cop West.mg. Rev.mg., ; Βηθεσδά A CA Treg. Revy.txt. 3 ξηρῶν Ss A* B C* L; add ἐκδεχομένων τὴν τοῦ (om A?) ὕδατος κίνησιν ΑΞ C8 D syrr Rey. ἀπῆλθεν ὃ ἄνθρωπος καὶ εἶπεν Tots Ἰουδαίοις ὅτι mg. 4 totum versum om ἐδ B C* Ὁ 33; add ἄγγελος --- νοσήματι A C3 L Rey.mg. 9 ἐγένετο δὰ" D; pm εὐθέως N° A B C L vg cop syrr Treg. West. 11 ἀπεκρίθη Οὐ D vg; pm ὃ δὲ δὲ C* L cop syrr; pm ὃς δὲ A B Treg. West. Rev. 13 ἀσθενῶν D ; iadels S A BC L vg cop syrr Treg. West. § 36.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 31 JOHN V. > a 3 ἈΝ ε ’ Ν a a “-“ 10 Ἰησοῦς ἐστὶν ὃ ποιήσας αὐτὸν ὑγιῆ. καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐδίωκον οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸν 3 a Lg lal r} / 7 “- 17 Ἰησοῦν ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν σαββάτῳ. ὃ δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο αὐτοῖς" ὃ πατήρ μου σ + 3 / ΘΟ ΟΝ 5 ee a “ 18 ἕως ἄρτι ἐργάζεται, κἀγὼ ἐργάζομαι. διὰ τοῦτο μᾶλλον ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν οἱ Ἴου- fal 9 ia) “ 3 / μὲ Ν 3 δαῖοι ἀποκτεῖναι, ὅτι οὐ μόνον ἔλυεν τὸ σάββατον, ἀλλὰ καὶ πατέρα ἴδιον ἔλεγεν Ν ’ rf Ν a a A τὸν θεόν, ἴσον ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν τῷ θεῷ. 3 if 3 ee a x “-“ a 19 Απεκρίνατο οὖν ὃ Ἰησοῦς καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς - ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ov δύνα- ται ὃ υἱὸς ποιεῖν ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ οὐδέν, ἐὸ 7 τι βλέ ov : ee ee υἱὸς ποιεῖν ἁ έν, ἐὰν μή τι βλέπῃ τὸν πατέρα ποιοῦντα - ἃ γὰρ ΕῚ ΕἸ “Ἢ ἴω lal Ane εν ae , ε Ν Ν »“ ἊΣ ἘΝ εν 20 ἂν ἐκεῖνος ποιγ), ταῦτα καὶ ὁ υἱὸς ποιεῖ ὁμοίως. O γὰρ πατὴρ φιλεῖ τὸν υἱὸν καὶ 4 , > a aA RY RY “-“ \ iA , sh 3 ao» ΄σ πάντα δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ ἃ αὐτὸς ποιεῖ, καὶ μείζονα τούτων δείξει αὐτῷ ἔργα, ἵνα 91 econ θ tC, “ κ ε N > ΄ κ᾿ A \ \ ζ = 9 ὑμεῖς θαυμάζετε. ὥσπερ yap ὃ πατὴρ ἐγείρει τοὺς νεκροὺς καὶ ζωοποιεῖ, οὕτως AP 'e εν a 6 / al ὑδὲ Ν ε Ν / 5, 3 Ν Ν ΄, 22 καὶ ὃ υἱὸς οὺς θέλει ζωοποιεῖ. οὐδὲ γὰρ 0 πατὴρ κρίνει οὐδένα, ἀλλὰ τὴν κρίσιν lal ὃ ἐδ “ cA ! 7 , “ Ἂν ee θὰ cal ‘\ la 23 πᾶσαν δέδωκεν τῷ υἱῷ, | ἵνα πάντες τιμῶσι TOV υἱόν καθὼς τιμῶσι τὸν πατέρα. 24 ὃ Ν cal \ εν 3 a Ν , ὸν πέ α 3 Kp | ee Ὰ > ny λέ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν υἱὸν οὐ τιμᾷ TOV πατέρα τὸν πέμψαντα αὐτόν. ' ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ee ἃ ε x Ἢ 3 , \ 4 fad / / 5» φ Ν af ὑμῖν OTL ὃ τὸν λόγον μου ἀκούων καὶ πιστεύων τῷ πέμψαντί με ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώ- Ν᾿ 3 ’ 3 μὴ 3 x / > σε θ ΄ > ‘ / νιον, καὶ εἰς κρίσιν οὐκ ἔρχεται ἀλλὰ μεταβέβηκεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν. Ἄγ κα aN ΄ aS Ὁ + o \ a > “ ε a2 , 25 ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν EOTLY, OTE οἱ νεκροὶ ἀκούσουσιν tal a a ca A A Ν Γ. 3 , , 7 Ν ε Ν 26 τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀκούσαντες ζήσουσιν. ὥσπερ γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ ΝΜ Ν > > -“ wa Ν “ en 9 ‘ Ν 5 ΓΞ es \ 2¢ ,ὔ 27 ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν ἐαυτῷ, οὕτως καὶ τῷ υἱῷ ἔδωκεν ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ. καὶ ἐξουσίαν c c c L 5 3 cel , lal μὲ ΕΝ 5 ΄, > ν΄ Ν / A Ld 28 ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κρίσιν ποιεῖν, ὅτι vids ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν. μὴ θαυμάζετε τοῦτο, ὅτι ca - A a a a \ 29 ἔρχεται ὥρα ἐν 7 πάντες οἱ ἐν τοῖς μνημείοις ἀκούσουσιν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ, ' καὶ 3 / ε Ἀν 5 θὰ ΄ 3 2S a e Ν a 4é ἐκπορεύσονται οἱ τὰ ἀγαθὰ ποιήσαντες εἰς ἀνάστασιν ζωῆς, ot τὰ φαῦλα πράξαν- 5" > , ‘4 a > ὃ 4 aN a i} oh a > / Ν 80 τες εἰς ἀνάστασιν κρίσεως." οὐ δύναμαι ἐγὼ ποιεῖν ἀπ᾽’ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐδέν - καθὼς 3 td Ν ε ’ ἘΜ 3 ἊΝ ’ > ἐμ 7 3 lal Ν ΄ ἣν, αν / ἀκούω κρίνω, Kal ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ δικαία ἐστίν, ὅτι οὐ ζητῶ τὸ θέλημα τὸ ἐμόν > Ἂν \ ΄ ΄- ΄ ΄ ἀλλὰ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με. 3 ἂν Ν lal Ν a ε , 81 82 ‘Hay ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ, 7 μαρτυρία μου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής - ἄλλος ε n Ἂν A \ ΕΣ CA ἃ ἐστὶν ὃ μαρτυρῶν περὶ ἐμοῦ, καὶ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀληθής ἐστιν ἣ μαρτυρία ἣν μαρτυ- 33 a AN eae Lad ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλ ὃς Ἶ ee pa Ν ΄ » τῇ aAnbeta: pel περὶ ἐμοῦ. ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς ᾿Ιωάννην, καὶ μεμαρτύρηκεν TH ἀληθείᾳ Ν , x 4 a -“ 84 ἐγὼ δὲ οὐ παρὰ ἀνθρώπου τὴν μαρτυρίαν λαμβάνω, ἀλλὰ ταῦτα λέγω ἵνα ὑμεῖς a lal > ε ’ ε ’ “-“ 35 σωθῆτε. ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὃ καιόμενος καὶ φαίνων, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἠθελήσατε ἀγαλ- a Ν LA > a Ν > a oS ἌΣ X , 19 “ 86 λιαθῆναι πρὸς ὥραν ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ. ἐγὼ δὲ ἔχω THY μαρτυρίαν μείζω τοῦ 3 ΄ ᾿ Ν \ +t - ἃ δέδ , ε , ν λ fe SF yas. Ἀπ 9 ἢ Ἰωάννου - τὰ γὰρ ἔργα ἃ δέδωκέν μοι ὃ πατήρ ἵνα τελειώσω αὐτά, αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα a ~ A Nes na 4 ε , a. ve ΄ 37 ἃ ποιῶ μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ OTL ὃ πατήρ με ἀπέσταλκεν. καὶ ὃ πέμψας με πα- a ua Ν Ν / SA THP, ἐκεῖνος μεμαρτύρηκεν περὶ ἐμοῦ οὔτε φωνὴν αὑτοῦ πώποτε ἀκηκόατε, οὔτε ! SN Ν , 3 a > ” > ea , ΄ ἃ και TOV λόγον αὐτου οὐκ EXETE εν υμιν μενοντας OTL OV 88 εἶδος αὐτοῦ ἑωράκατε, 5 ᾿ς Xs 3 A 4 ε a > ΄ > a 4 7, “ ε al 89 ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος, τούτῳ ὑμεῖς OV πιστεύετε. ἐραυνᾶτε τὰς γραφάς, OTL ὑμεῖς r cal , tal lal “ δοκεῖτε ἐν αὐταῖς ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν, καὶ ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν ai μαρτυροῦσαι περὶ ἐμοῦ ° A 3 40 41 καὶ οὐ θέλετε ἐλθεῖν πρός με ἵνα ζωὴν ἔχητε. δόξαν παρὰ ἀνθρώπων οὐ 42 λαμβάνω, ᾿ἀλλὰ ἔγνωκα ὑμᾶς ὅτι οὐκ ἔχετε τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς. να ON 4 3 Ἐν ς Θ᾽ 14 a 4 \ 3 , , ’ 38 ΝΜ 43 ἐγὼ ἐλήλυθα ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ πατρός μου, καὶ οὐ λαμβάνετέ με: ἐὰν ἄλλος 8. 29, Comp. Dan. 12 : 2. 17 ὃ δὲ δὲ Ὁ ; add Ἰησοῦς AC DL Treg. West. 80 θεοῦ SA Ὁ Τὶ al; omB Rey. 18 διὰ τοῦτο ND; add οὖν AB cop [Treg.mg.] [West.] Rev.mg. CL vg Treg. West Rev. $2 οἴδατε S* D; οἷδα N° A BL vg cop 20 θαυμάζετε SL; θαυμάζητε ABD Treg. syrr Treg. West. Rey. FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER 4 3 i. Wee A 297 5 a Ψ ἔλθῃ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ, ἐκεῖνον λήμψεσθε. [Part IV. JOHN V. lal 4 ε a a πῶς δύνασθε ὑμεῖς πιστεῦσαι, δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες, καὶ τὴν δόξαν τὴν παρὰ τοῦ μόνου θεοῦ οὐ ζητεῖτε; > ΄ Ἃ 3 a ETLOTEVETE ἂν EfLOL * yn δοκεῖτε ὅτι ἐγὼ κατηγορήσω ὑμῶν πρὸς τὸν πατέρα ἔστιν ὃ a a oA vy - κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μωὺῦσῆς, εἰς ὃν ὑμεῖς ἠλπίκατε. 3 Ν > Ψ, ” Lad εἰ yap ἐπιστεύετε Μωῦσεῖ, Ν Ν 3 a 3 a 3, 3 δὲ a > 7 4, περι y2p εμου EKELVOS ἐγραψεν. €l O€ τοις EKELVYOU γραμ- 3 , a ἴω -“ μασιν οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε ; § 37. The Disciples pluck ears of grain on the Sabbath. —On the way to Matt. XII. 1-8. 9' ἢ 4, Lal nw Ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ L c L > 4 ε > a ἐπορεύθη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοῖς σάββασιν διὰ τῶν σπορίμων: οἱ δὲ pa- θηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπείνασαν, καὶ ἤρξαντο τίλλειν ’, Ἀ 5 ’ὔ a στάχυας Kal ἐσθίειν. 2 οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἰδόντες i \ e εἶπαν ait@: ἰδοὺ οἱ μαθηταί σου ποιοῦσιν Δ > WE fal 3 ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν ’ὔ 8 σαββάτῳ. αὐτοῖς - οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε Δαυείδ, Ψ 5 iA Ν ε OTE E7ELVOACEV και OL ε SS τ κ ὁ δὲ εἶπεν 9 > - τί ἐποίησεν ? > “a bd lat 5 4 μετ᾽ αὑτου; πως εἰσ- a > \ =) a ἤλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ na Ν ‘\ θεοῦ καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους an ,ὔ 3! τῆς προθέσεως ἔφαγον, a > 2% 53 3A ὃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἣν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν οὐδὲ τοῖς per’ 3 “a 3 Ἂς “ΟΝ ε αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱε- lal / Ἃ 5 ρεῦσιν μόνοις; ἢ οὐκ , - ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ © “ a ὅτι τοῖς σάββασιν οἱ 81 etc. Deut. 23 : 25. Galilee 3 Marx II. 23-28. LuKEr VEL Τὰ 285 Kat ἐγένετο αὐτὸν 1 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν σαβ- 3 cal s ΄ , ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν πα- βάτῳ δευτεροπρώτῳ 4 - ραπορεύεσθαι διὰ τῶν διαπορεύεσθαι αὐτὸν 24 τοὺς στάχυας." σπορίμων, καὶ οἱ μα- Ν > A ΜΝ θηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἤρξαντο Ἂς a ὁδὸν ποιεῖν τίλλοντες καὶ Ob Φαρισαῖοι ἔλεγον αὐὖ- A 5» , a τῷ ἴδε τί ποιοῦσιν a ay τοῖς σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ 3, ἔξεστιν ; διὰ σπορίμων, καὶ ἔτιλ- λον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ Ν / > τοὺς στάχυας Kal ἤσθι- 7 cal ov ψώχοντες ταῖς χερ- σίν τινὲς δὲ τῶν Φαρι- > σαίων εἶπον " τί ποιεῖτε ἃ 3 WE “- Ὁ οὐκ ἐξἕεστιν ποιεῖν τοῖς σάββασιν; Ν και ε 9 25 καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς * ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς > vd > / Ψ Ν 3 Ἂν > οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἶπεν " > id (ὃ ΄ ὑδὲ a pee a ἃ ἐποίησεν Δαυείδ, ὃτε οὐδὲ τοῦτο ἀνέγνωτε O ἊΨ 3, Ν > , > 7 / ε , χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπεί- ἐποίησεν Δαυείδ, ὁπότε νασεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ ἐπείνασεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἵ “ “ 9 »” 26 abrov;” πῶς εἰσῆλθεν er’ αὐτοῦ ὄντες; I > 5 Ν > a a εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ > ἐπὶ ᾿Αβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέ- ws καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους a / 3 τῆς προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, “Ὁ > 5 lal ous οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν A X εἰ μὴ TOUS ἱερεῖς, καὶ μὴ Ν a Ν 3 ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὖ- Anas τῳ ουσιν ; b 8 etc. 1 Sam. 21 : 1-7. ε 53. ἦν 3 Ν ὡς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς προθέσεως Ἁ ἔλαβεν καὶ ἔφαγεν καὶ ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς μετ᾽ > fal a > μὲ αὐτοῦ, οὺς οὐκ ἔξεστιν fal ΄ φαγεῖν εἰ μὴ μόνους Ὕ - τοὺς ἱερεῖς ; 5.5, Num. 28: 9, 10, 18, 19, Joh. 5:44, θεοῦ SA D L A vg [West.]; 8 ὁπότε A; ὅτε S B Ο D L Treg. West. om B [Treg.mg.| Rev.mg. Mc.2: 28. παραπορεύεσθαι SA LA West. mg.; διαπορεύεσθαι B Ο D Treg. West.txt. Rev. Le. 6:1. δευτεροπρώτῳ A CD ve Greg πᾶξ Epiph Chrys Thphyl Amb [Treg.mg.] West. mg. Rev.mg.; om S B L 33 cop Treg.txt. West.txt. Rey.txt. cop; om B (D) vg Treg. West. Rev. | ὄντες A C [Treg.mg.]; om S BDL cop Treg.txt. West. 4 ἔλαβεν καὶ A C3 it vg; λαβὼν Β C* 1, 33 cop’ Treg. West. Rev.; om S Ὁ. Mt. 12:4. ἔφαγον δὰ B Rey.mg. ; C Dit vg Treg. Rev.txt. Me. 2: 26. mas NS AC LA itvg; omBD [Treg.] [West.] | ἀρχιερέως δὴ BL; pm τοῦ ACA [Treg.mg.] Rev.mg. ἔφαγεν 2 ποιεῖν SACL δὲ 37, 38.] MATT. XII. ε a > ha) ε A Ν ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 9 10 11 12 Ἂν ’ f' > , Kal ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν; λέ- γω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτι τοῦ ε cal “ῳ > eo ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν ἐστιν ὧδε. > Ν > ΄ ΣΝ εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐσ- θέλω ἈΠ τὰ , Pee Kal οὐ θυσίαν,“ οὐκ tv: ἔλεος a / Ν ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς 2 ἀναιτίους. κύριος γάρ > A / ἐστιν τοῦ σαββάτου ε ek mF , ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. § 38. The Healing of the Withered Hand on the Sabbath. — Galilee. Mart. XII. 9-14. Kai μεταβὰς ἐκεῖθεν ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν συναγω- γὴν αὐτῶν. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν - καὶ ἐπηρώτη- σαν αὐτὸν λέγοντες " εἰ ἔξεστιν τοῖς σάββα- σιν θεραπεῦσαι; ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ. Sian, Ὁ ae aa. ὦ , ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τίς ΝΜ > «ε a + ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρω- a o Ζ πος ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον μιὰ A. aN > / a ἕν, καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ του- To τοῖς σάββασιν εἰς ’ βόϑυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ ἐγερεῖ; πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος , 7 ied προβάτου: ὥστε €&- ἐστιν τοῖς σάββασιν καλῶς ποιεῖν. 13 τότε λέ- as , 3 γει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ - ἔκτει- UNTIL THE THIRD. MARK 11. Ν Ν' Lal Ν 27 καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς - τὸ σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄν- θρωπον ἐγένετο, καὶ ρ oy, 5 > εν Ν Ἀ οὐχ ὃ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ 28 σάββατον - ὥστε κύ- 1 4 > ε εν A pos ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ 5 , Ν n ἀνθρώπου καὶ τοῦ σαβ- βάτου. Marg ΠῚ. 1--. Καὶ εἰσῆλθεν πάλιν εἰς συναγωγήν, καὶ ἣν 5 ἑν > ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος ἐξηραμ- / a μένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα" καὶ παρετήρουν αὐτὸν εἰ ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν θεραπεύει αὐτόν, ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ. Ν ’ a 3 , καὶ λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ .͵- « ~~ Ν X a TO τὴν ξηρὰν χεῖρα ἔχοντι " ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ ,ὔ Ν / > μέσον. καὶ λέγει av- “ 3, “a / τοῖς " ἔξεστιν τοῖς σάβ- βασιν ἀγαθὸν ποιῆσαι Ἅ A ‘ ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν “ Ἃ lal σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι; ε δὲ > , ! ἣν ot δὲ ἐσιώπων. | καὶ περιβλεψάμενος τοὺς μετ᾽ ὀργῆς, συν- 3 αυ- λυπούμενος ἐπὶ τῇ πω- Η] ρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὖ- τῶν, λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ: ὧν, λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ® 7, Hos. 6 : 6. 5 10 33 LUKE VI. νιν 5 fal καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ὅτι κύριός ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ > / Ν nw ἀνθρώπου καὶ Tod σαβ- βάτου. wa Luxe VI. 6-11. '᾿Ἔ γένετο δὲ ἐν ἑτέ- po σαββάτῳ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν συναγω- Ἂν Ν / ‘ γὴν καὶ διδάσκειν. καὶ ἣν ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖ καὶ ε \ Bier. igie és ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ ἡ δεξιὰ ἣν ξηρά. παρετηροῦν- To δὲ οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ [- a > > a“ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι εἰ ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ ἵνα εὕρωσιν κατηγορεῖν θεραπεύει, A "» αὐτοῦ. αὐτὸς δὲ ῃδεὶι % Ν > τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς ai- “ > Ν “ > Tov: εἶπεν δὲ TO ἀν- A . Ν μ᾿ δρὶ τῷ Enpav ἔχοντι “ μ᾿ Ν τὴν χεῖρα" ἔγειρε καὶ al Ν , στῆθι εἰς τὸ μέσον. Ses Ν μὴ ! > καὶ ἀναστὰς Extn: εἷ- K ties “5 A \ πεν δὲ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς πρὸς αὐτούς - ἐπερωτῶ ὑμᾶς εἰ ἔξεστιν τῷ σαββάτῳ ~ a ἀγαθοποιῆσαι. ἢ κακο- ψυχὴν σῶ- ν και. ποιῆσαι, “Ὁ > , σαι ἢ ἀπολέσαι. περιβλεψάμενος πάν- σ Μο. 8 : 2. «θεραπεύει δὰ A; θεραπεύσει AB DL Treg. West. Ie.6:7. δὲ Ait vg; add airy NS BDL cop syrr West. Rey. 34 14 MATT. XII. Ν a vov σου τὴν χεῖρα. Ν ΞΡ, Ν 3 καὶ ἐξέτεινεν, καὶ ἀπε- Ψ ε Ν ε ε κατεστάθη υγιὴς ὡς ἢ ἄλλη. ἐξελθόντες δὲ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι συμβού- λιον ἔλαβον κατ᾽ αὖ- cal ΄ τοῦ, ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀπο- λέσωσιν. FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER MARK III. ‘ -“ ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρα. καὶ ef Ν 3 ἐξέτεινεν, καὶ ἄπεκα- 4 c Ν > cal τεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἐξελθόντες of Φαρι- a Ἂν “A σαῖοι εὐθὺς μετὰ τῶν συμβού- λιον ἐποίησαν κατ᾽ av- Ἡρωδιανῶν cal o 2 Ν -} ’ τοῦ, ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀπολέ- σωσιν. 11 τοῦ. [Part IV. LUKE VI. 5 Ν > 3 A τας αὐτοὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρά σου. < δὲ > ’ Ἅ Φ ὃ δὲ ἐποίησεν. καὶ ἀπο- / ε Ν 3 κατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὖ- αὐτοὶ δὲ ἐπλήσ- 5 4 vA θησαν ἀνοίας, καί διε- ᾿ λάλουν πρὸς ἀλλήλους \ , a τί ἂν ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ. § 89. Jesus arrives at the Sea of Tiberias, and is followed by multitudes. — 15 Lake of Galilee. Marr. XII. 15-21. ‘O δὲ Ἰησοῦς γνοὺς ἀνεχώρησεν 7 Mark III. 7-12. Kat 6 Ἰησοῦς μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν > fal a ἐν, , > “ > a 3 LA > Ν 4 ἐκεῖθεν. καὶ ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πολ- αὐτοῦ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, Z \ ‘ a a Aol, καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς πάντας, καὶ πολὺ πλῆθος ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας ἠκολούθησαν, 1 Σ ἀπὸ Ἢ λύ ἌΓ ἊΝ ns Ἰὸὃ ,ὔ Ν ,ὕ a? δά Ν Ν 8 ' καὶ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Ιδουμαίας καὶ πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου καὶ περὶ ἢ ἰδ rn , > Ν 9 Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνα, πλῆθος πολύ, ἀκούοντες ὅσα ἐποίει, ἦλθον πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ 10 ll ΄ σ ΗΝ Ν 16 καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μὴ φανερὸν Ψ Ξ \ 17 αὐτὸν ποιήσωσιν" ἵνα πληρωθῇ τὸ 18 19 τοῖς ἐθνεσιν ἀπαγγελεῖ. 20 21 > “ 6 “- > οὔ φ- δ᾿ ψ “ τ ὃ Ν Ν μὲ Ἂν σ εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα \ ΄, EES Ys Non ν 26 ΄ “ : , 2 A Ἢ 2A μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτὸν " πολλοὺς yap ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ Φ / Ν Ψ tet. | ἅψωνται, ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας. Kal τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα, ὅταν αὑτὸν a \ ἐθεώρουν, προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ €- > Ν aA MATT. XII. κραζον λέγοντες ὅτι σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς TOD 12 θεοῦ. Ν 2% ἊΝ cal μὴ αὗτον φανερὸν ποιῶσιν. Ν x 5 , 3 a καὶ πολλὰ ἐπετίμα αὐτοῖς Wa A a ’ ’ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἡσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου λέ- δι 39 Ν ε τς a ες , ε 3 / a ᾿ ὑδό yovros** ἰδοὺ 6 παῖς μου ὃν ἡρέτισα, ὃ ἀγαπητὸς MOV OV ηὐδό- a 3 3 , Ν ’ κησεν ἣ ψυχή μου θήσω τὸ πνεῦμά μου ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν, καὶ κρίσιν οὐκ ἐρίσει οὐδὲ -κραυγάσει, οὐδὲ 3 / 3 a , ‘ Ν > Les λα ἀκούσει τις ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις τὴν φωνὴν αὑτοῦ. καλαμον Ἴ ὐ ne δ ΝΗ 5 i σβέσει συντετριμμένον ov κατεάξει kal λίνον τυφόμενον ὁ : rat] , > a καὶ τῳ ονοματιαῦυτου = ‘ , ἕως ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρισιν. ἥ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν. 218. Is.42:1sq. Comp. Is. 11 : 10. Me. 8 : 5. χεῖρα B West.mg.; χεῖρά σου Νο. 8: 7. εἰς D Treg mg.; πρὸς δ A B SACD 1, Δ ἃ] vg cop syrr [Treg.] West. C L A Treg.txt. West. | ἠκολούθησαν δὰ σ txt. A; -θησεν ABL Treg. West. ; post Ἰουδαίας 6 ἐποίησαν τὶ Ο A West.mg.; ἐποίουν SC A vg; post Γαλιλαίας A BL cop syrr A Treg.mg.; ἐδίδουν B 1, Treg.txt. West. Treg. West. Rev. txt. 8 ἐποίει NA CD A it vg cop syrr Treg. Mt.12:15. πολλοί δὲ Byg; pm ὄχλοι Ο πιρ. West.mg.; ποιεῖ Β 1, Treg.txt. West. D 1, cop [Treg.] txt. §§ , 13 14 17 39, 40, 41.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 35 § 40. Jesus withdraws to the Mountain, and chooses the Twelve; the mul- titudes follow him. — Near Capernaum. Marx III. 13-19. 3. ’ 3 Nyy: Ν Καὶ ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος, καὶ προσ- a“ a 3 > ’ Ἀ > Lol καλεῖται ovs ἤθελεν αὐτός, καὶ ἀπῆλ- \ > / θον πρὸς αὐτόν. Ν 3 ’ὔ / Kal ἐποίησεν δώ- [Horns of Hattin.] Luke VI. 12-19. 12 9 Φ 3 > a δὰ ὦ, 3 δεκα «νὰ WOLV μετ GUTOU, και νὰ ἀπο- ΠΑ X. 2—4. Τῶν δὲ δώδεκα ἀποστό- λων τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα" πρῶτος Σίμων < / , ἈΝ ὃ λεγόμενος Πέτρος καὶ ᾿Ανδρέας ὃ ἀδελφὸς ai- ἴον \ ϑΎΣΑ ε τοῦ, καὶ Ἰάκωβος ὃ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου καὶ Ἴω- ἄννης ὃ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ, ΤΦίλιππος καὶ Βαρ- θολομαῖος, Θωμᾶς καὶ Μαθθαῖος 6 τελώνης, Ἰάκωβος ὃ τοῦ ᾿Αλ- φαίου καὶ Λεββαῖος, Τ᾿ Σίμων ὃ Καναναῖος Sine U4 €; > 4 καὶ Ἰούδας 6 Ἰσκαριώ- τῆς ὃ καὶ παραδοὺς αὐτόν. 15 16 17 18 19 / 2 Μ᾿ , στέλλῃ αὐτοὺς κηρύσ- σειν ‘Kal ἔχειν ἐξου- σίαν ἐκβάλλειν τὰ δαι- μόνια. καὶ ἐποίησεν ‘ / ‘ > ΄ τοὺς δώδεκα, καὶ ἐπέ- θηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι Πέτρον " καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου καὶ > Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν a? ,ὔ AS , τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβου, Kal ἐπέ- θηκεν αὐτοῖς ὀνόματα Βοανηργές, ὅ ἐστιν υἱοὶ -“ 9 / βροντῆς - καὶ ᾿Ανδρέαν καὶ Φίλιππον καὶ Βαρ- θολομαῖον καὶ Μαθ- cal Ν lal Ν θαῖον καὶ Θωμᾶν καὶ Ἰάκωβον τὸν τοῦ ᾿Δλ- φαίου καὶ Θαδδαῖον καὶ & A A Σίμωνα τὸν Kavavatov kal ᾿Ιούδαν Ἰσκαριώθ, ἃ Ν / Ss, OS και παρέδωκεν αυτον- 13 14 15 16 > , “ Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύ- 2é λθ fa Ea 5 \ »” ταις ἐξελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ ὄρος προσ- ὕ A) ‘ > ὃ , ΕἸ -“ εύξασθαι, καὶ ἢν διανυκτερεύων ἐν τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ. προσευχῇ A ν > / ε / καὶ OTE ἐγένετο ἡμέ- , pa, προσεφώνησεν τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκ- λεξάμενος ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν 4d aA Ν a δώδεκα, οὺς Kal ἀπο- στόλους ὠνόμασεν, | Si- ay μωνα, ὃν Kal ὠνόμασεν Πέτρον, καὶ ᾿Ανδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην καὶ Φίλιππον καὶ Βαρ- θολομαῖον ἣ καὶ Μαθ- al Ν a Ν θαῖον καὶ Θωμᾶν, καὶ > > Ιάκωβον ᾿Αλφαίου, καὶ 34 Ν , Σίμωνα τὸν καλούμενον > ζηλωτήν, ‘kat Ἰούδαν > Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰούδαν Ἶ 40 ἃ ΓΟ ΦΥ͂. σκαριώθ, ὃς ἐγένετο ’ὔ προδότης, καὶ καταβὰς 3 3 κ᾿ Μ FON , ὃ [ον ee 2 λ λὺ θ an 3 aA ‘ An μετ αὐτῶν εστὴ ETL τόπου TEOLVOV, και OX: OS πολὺυς μασήτων αὐτου, και πλη- ‘ “- ὧν Α΄ ἃ / a 3 , vc Ν Ν lol , θος πολὺ τοῦ λαοῦ ἀπὸ πάσης τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας καὶ Ἱερουσαλὴμ καὶ τῆς παραλίου 4 Ν δῶ δ.Φ θ 3 aA > a ale 5. OF Lan, ἃ lal , 3a Τύρου και xu WVOS, OL ἦλ ον ακουσαι αὐτου και LA ναι ἀπὸ των VOOWV GUTWY, A / > , Ν “ 18.19 ! καὶ of ἐνοχλούμενοι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων ἐθεραπεύοντο " | καὶ πᾶς ὃ 8 41. The Sermon on the Mount. — Near Capernaum. Matt. V. 1— VIII. 1. 1 a X73 / 2 θαι αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. καὶ avot- Me. 3: 14. ΕΣ s¢7 ω > A ὃ , ᾽ > Ao tf ν γα , ὄχλος ἐζήτουν ἅπτεσθαι αυτου, OTL ουναμις Tap G@UTOU ἐξήρχετο και LATO παντας. ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνέβη εἰς τὸ Ε2 Ν 4 3 A a ὄρος - καὶ καθίσαντος αὐτοῦ προσῆλ- West. Rey.me. δώδεκα A C2? D Lit vg; add ods καὶ ἀποστόλους ὠνόμασεν δὰ B Οὐ] A cop 16 καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα δὰ BC* A Rev. [ Horns of Hattin.] LuKe VI. 20-49. 20 Kat αὐτὸς ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς meg.; om A Ο DL it vg cop syrr Treg. Rev. txt. Mt. 10:3. Λεββαῖος D West. mg.; @ad- δαῖος δὰ Β ve cop Treg. West. Rey. ; Λεββαῖος ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Θαδδαῖος C? L syrr. 36 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. MATT. V. LUKE VI. Ἂς ’ 3 LV) (ὃ 3 Ν > A > Ν Ν 5 a + _ fas τὸ στύμα αὐτοῦ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ ἔλεγεν * ἈΝ a 8 λέγων - μακάριοι οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύ- μακάριοι οἱ πτωχοί, ὅτι ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν a \ ΄, a a ματι, ὅτι αὐτῶν ἐστὶν ἣ βασιλεία τῶν 21 ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ. μακάριοι ot lot fal ay 4 a 4 οὐρανῶν. μακάριοι οἱ πραεῖς, OTL αὖ- πεινῶντες νῦν, ὅτι χορτασθήσεσθε. ΄’΄ ‘ n~ 4 5 Tol κληρονομήσουσιν τὴν γῆν." μα- μακάριοι οἱ κλαίοντες νῦν, ὅτι γελά- an ud κάριοι οἱ πενθοῦντες, OTL αὐτοὶ παρα- σετε. 6 κληθήσονται... μακάριοι οἱ πεινῶντες ἈΝ “ Ν ΄ Ὁ > Ν ΄ὔ / e 7 Kat διψῶντες THY δικαιοσύνην, OTL αὐτοὶ χορτασθήσονται. μακάριοι ot 8 ἐλεή ὅτι αὐτοὶ ἐλεηθή αι ακάριοι ot καθαροὶ τῇ δί ἐλεήμονες, ὅτι αὐτοὶ ἐλεηθήσονται. μακάρ i καθαροὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ, ¢ \ Ν NX ” 4, ε a 9 ὅτι αὐτοὶ τὸν θεὸν ὄψονται, μακάριοι οἱ εἰρηνοποιοί, ὅτι viol θεοῦ κλη- , 7 ε , ῳ ΄ φ ΕΞ τ νῷ 10 θήσονται. μακάριοι οἱ δεδιωγμένοι ἕνεκεν δικαιοσύνης, ὅτι αὐτῶν ἐστὶν “ “- la 11 ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. μακάριοί » 7 3 ΄, ( eee \ 4 ν e193 g / ἐστε ὅταν ὀνειδίσωσιν ὑμᾶς καὶ διώ- 22 μακάριοί ἐστε ὅταν μισήσωσιν ν᾿ A > A ἕουσιν καὶ εἴπωσιν πᾶν πονηρὸν καθ ὑμᾶς οἱ ἄνθρωποι, καὶ ὅταν ἀφορίσωσιν Paar , ΦΨ > A , cen Niece ΄ Ἢ ΄ 12 ὑμῶν ψευδόμενοι ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ. χαίρετε ὑμᾶς καὶ ὀνειδίσωσιν καὶ ἐκβάλωσιν \ > “ a μὲ ε Ν «ες “ \ ” S ε a ε Ἂς . lal καὶ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε, ὅτι ὃ μισθὸς ὑμῶν τὸ ὄνομα ὑμῶν ὡς πονηρὸν ἕνεκα τοῦ ‘ > “A > a 4 Ἂν ea A. ’ὔ / > > 7 πολὺς ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. οὕτως yap 28 υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. χάρητε ἐν ἐκείνῃ σα, \ , \ κ᾿ Ae ene, ‘ ΄ 2004 ν᾿ ἐδίωξαν τοὺς προφήτας τοὺς πρὸ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ καὶ σκιρτήσατε: ἰδοὺ yap ε “ ε Ν ε Ν Ν 3 Lal > cal ὑμῶν. ὃ μισθὸς ὑμὼν πολὺς ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ " κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ γὰρ ἐποίουν τοῖς προ- , e 3 A Ν oe Vet Sia) ta) “4 “ 9 / Ν ἤ 24 φήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν. ΤἸΠλὴν οὐαὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς πλουσίοις, ὅτι ἀπέχετε τὴν παρά- gt Jee Ne τοὶ ers / a Li ΄ ΕἾΡΕ ε - 25 κλησιν ὑμῶν. ‘ovat ὑμῖν οἱ ἐμπεπλησμένοι νῦν, ὅτι πεινάσετε. οὐαὶ οἱ γελῶν- Lal ῳ 7ὔ Ν 3 A ν Lal + e n if 26 τες νῦν, ὅτι πενθήσετε Kal κλαύσετε. οὐαὶ ὅταν καλῶς εἴπωσιν ὑμᾶς πάντες Ἐν ὌΝ \ μον Ἂ > , a ὃ , ε , 2A ot ἄνθρωποι κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ yap ἐποίουν Tots ψευδοπροφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν. MATT. V. a a a ’ 13 Ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ τὸ ἅλα τῆς γῆς - ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἅλα μωρανθῇ, ἐν τίνι ἁλισθήσεται ; εἰς οὐδὲν ἰσχύει ἔτι εἰ μὴ βληθὲν ἔξω καταπατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. 14 Ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου. οὐ δύναται πόλις κρυβῆναι ἐπάνω ὄρους κει- - ld ΟΝ ‘4 , Ν / 3 ΩΝ ε \ \ / 3 9 (a 728 Ἂς 15 μένη οὐδὲ καίουσιν λύχνον καὶ τιθέασιν αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τὴν 16 λυχνί ὶ λά ᾶ is ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ: οὕτως λαμψάτω τὸ φῶς ὑμῶν ἔμ- υχνίαν, καὶ λάμπει πᾶσιν τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ws Aap POs ὑμῶν EM 6 a > , Lg to ea Ν Xa 3: Ν ὃ 3 Ν προσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ὅπως ἴδωσιν ὑμῶν τὰ καλὰ ἔργα καὶ δοξάσωσιν τὸν πατέρα, ὑμῶν τὸν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. Φ A , A Ν , + me 17 My νομίσητε ὅτι ἦλθον καταλῦσαι τὸν νόμον ἢ τοὺς προφήτας - οὐκ ἦλθον a a id \ / «Ἡ 3 x 18 καταλῦσαι, ἀλλὰ πληρῶσαι. ἀμὴν yap λέγω ὑμῖν, ἕως ἂν παρέλθῃ ὃ οὐρανὸς ἌΡ aA 3A ΘΗΝ , , > Ν , Cees a , ῳ Ἃ , , καὶ ἡ γῆ; ἰῶτα ἕν ἢ μία κεραία οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου, ἕως ἂν πάντα γένη- aA oN > , “2 lal > “ , cal 3 Z, Ν ὃ ὃ ’ὔ A 19 ται. ὃς ἐὰν οὖν λύσῃ μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων καὶ διδάξῃ οὕτως Ν ἀνθρώ Net ληθή > a Nel ae ὑρανῶν- ὃ δ᾽ ἃ τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ἐλάχιστος κληθήσεται ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν - ὃς δ΄ ἂν ’ Ν ’ὔ; ἕ. e , ’ὔ > a 4, lal 5 na , 20 ποιήσῃ καὶ διδάξῃ, οὗτος μέγας κληθήσεται ἐν TH βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν. λέγω a 7 , “-“ fal lal op. Ων γὰρ ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ περισσεύσῃ ὑμῶν ἡ δικαιοσύνη πλεῖον τῶν γραμματέων καὶ ,ὔ > Ν > »" > Ν , ~ > nr Φαρισαίων, od μὴ εἰσέλθητε cis τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. a4, Comp. Ps. 37:11, 22, 29. Mt.5:4. ante v. 5, ἢ 33 vg West.mg. Rev.mg.; post v. 5, δὲ Β C cop A. V. West.txt. Rey.txt. § 41.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 37 MATT. V. 3 4 cA Ψ “ 21 ἪἩκούσατε ὅτι ἐῤῥέθη τοῖς ἀρχαίοις -" οὐ φονεύσεις: ὃς δ᾽ ἂν φονεύσῃ, 22 ἔνοχος ἔσται τῇ κρίσει. ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πᾶς ὃ ὁ j a δελι ῃ χ Ἢ κρίσει. ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πᾶς ὃ ὀργιζόμενος τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ ἔνοχος ἔσται τῇ κρίσει" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴ AES hae Ce ᾿ χος ἔς ἢ κρίσει" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ ῥαχά, ἔνοχος ἔσται 23 an ὃ vA ‘ “Δ δ᾽ ΕΝ poe ἮΝ 4 > ‘ Τὸ an , ! ΖΝ τῷ συνεδρίῳ " ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπῃ μωρέ, ἔνοχος ἔσται εἰς τὴν γέενναν τοῦ πυρός. | ἐὰν > oO. é τὸ δῶ ta co > ~ Ν 6 4 > “a On “ ε 10 fe ᾿ς οὖν προσφέρῃς TO δῶρόν σου ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον, κἀκεῖ μνησθῇς ὅτι ὃ ἀδελφός 5, Ν a tal \ ΜᾺ ~ 24 cov ἔχει τι κατὰ σοῦ, | ἄφες ἐκεῖ τὸ δῶρόν σου ἔμπροσθεν Tod θυσιαστηρίου καὶ Ψ a ΄, n° \ , 2 N , \ A ὕπαγε πρῶτον διαλλάγηθι τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, καὶ τότε ἐλθὼν πρόσφερε τὸ δῶρόν 3, a) 3 “ “ > bb \ μὴ μὲ > 3 3 A > an CQoAn 25 gov. ἴσθι εὐνοῶν τῷ ἀντιδίκῳ σου ταχὺ ἕως ὅτου εἶ per’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ - [4 , a €) 4 ‘> a “ Ni Ae Ν a ¢ / \ > ‘i ; μήποτέ σε παραδῷ ὁ ἀντίδικος TO κριτῇ Kal ὃ κριτὴς TO ὑπηρέτῃ, Kal εἰς φυλα- Ἂς fo EN , > Ν 5, ὦ» 3 -ὉἬ μὴ Δ > a Ν ” 26 κὴν βληθήσῃ. ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, οὐ μὴ ἐξέλθῃς ἐκεῖθεν ἕως ἂν ἀποδῷς τὸν ἔσχατον κοδράντην. 3 / 7 4 lal val 27 28 Ἢκούσατε ὅτι ἐῤῥέθη "" οὐ μοιχεύσεις. ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πᾶς ὃ 2 cal Ν NL a + 3 te SS 3 a , > a“ βλέπων γυναικα προς TO ἐπιθυμῆσαι ἤδη εμοιχευσεν αὐτὴν εν ΤΊ) καρδίᾳ αυτου. > Xe / ε ‘4 35, a 29 εἰ δὲ ὁ ὀφθαλμός cov ὃ δεξιὸς σκανδαλίζει σε, ἔξελε αὐτὸν καὶ βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ" / / μά 3 , ἃ “Ὁ. an Ν δ εἰ, ὦ Ν lat , συμφέρει yap σοι iva ἀπόληται ev τῶν μελῶν σου καὶ μὴ ὅλον TO σῶμά σου A ro 80 βληθῇ εἰς γέενναν. καὶ εἰ ἡ δεξιά σου χεὶρ σκανδαλίζει σε, ἔκκοψον αὐτὴν Kat ΄ CY a , / 7. 3 ‘ ἃ a lal Ν δι 9) βάλε ἀπὸ cod: συμφέρει γάρ σοι ἵνα ἀπόληται ἕν τῶν μελῶν σου καὶ μὴ ὅλον κ aA TO σῶμά σου εἰς γέενναν ἀπέλθῃ. 3 Sele, pa! mC a vA > , ‘ a > A , 3 A 31 Eppen δέ: ὃς av ἀπολύσῃ τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, δότω αὐτῇ 3 ta > ἈΝ Ν δ (LPP, μὲ a ε > , ‘ “- > “a 32 ἀποστάσιον. ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πᾶς ὃ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ , “ “-“ Via παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας, ποιεῖ αὐτὴν μοιχευθῆναι, καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ἀπολελυμένην / a γαμήσῃ, μοιχᾶται. cal 4 88 Πάλιν ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἐῤῥέθη τοῖς ἀρχαίοις - ἃ οὐκ ἐπιορκήσεις, ἀποδώ- 84 δὲ τῷ ( VS ὅρκους σου. ἐγὼ δὲ λέ ὑμῖν μὴ ὁμό σεις ε Tw κυριῳ TOUS OpkK US - Y2 € eyo UpLLV μὴ ομοσαι 35 dAws: μήτε ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, ὅτι θρόνος ἐστὶν τοῦ θεοῦ - ' μήτε ἐν τῇ γῆ, ὅτι ὑ ὅλως " μήτε ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, ὅτι θρόνος ε μήτε ἐν τῇ γῇ: ὅτι ὗπο- ΄ὔ / > a an > A / Sa / Lg / > Ν cal , πόδιόν ἐστιν TOV ποδῶν αὐτοῦ - μήτε εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, ὅτι πόλις ἐστὶν TOD μεγά- ὔ “-“ a > , a 36 Aov βασιλέως - μήτε ἐν TH κεφαλῇ σου ὀμόσῃς, ὅτι οὐ δύνασαι μίαν τρίχα a A ε / τὶ fo x ‘\ 87 λευκὴν ποιῆσαι ἢ μέλαιναν. ἔστω δὲ ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν ναὶ vai, οὗ ov: τὸ δὲ περισ- σὸν τούτων ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ ἐστίν. 9 Ν 3 Ν 5» “a δ 88 Ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἐῤῥέθη- ὀφθαλμὸν ἀντὶ ὀφθαλμοῦ καὶ ὀδόντα 89 ἀντὶ ὀδόντος. ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν μὴ ἀντιστῆναι τῷ πονηρῷ ἀλλ᾽ ὅστις LUKE VI. ε / ΓῚ Ν Ν / a V4 ’ > A , , σε parila εἰς τὴν δεξιὰν σιαγόνα, 29 τῷ τύπτοντί σε εἰς τὴν σιαγόνα πάρ- a Ν a a 40 στρέψον αὐτῷ καὶ τὴν ἄλλην - Kal τῷ exe καὶ τὴν ἄλλην, καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ αἴ- θέλοντί σοι κριθῆναι καὶ τὸν χιτῶνά ροντός σου τὸ ἱμάτιον καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα σου λαβεῖν, ἄφες αὐτῷ καὶ τὸ ἱμά- μὴ κωλύσῃς. λυ > / , 41 τιον " καὶ OOTIS σε ἀγγαρεύσει μίλιον μὰ Ψ 3 > a ΄ - > ca) ΄ ΑἹ 3 a / , 42 εν, ὑπαγε μετ΄ αὑτου δύο. τῷ αἰτουντὶ 30 παντὶ αἰτοῦντί σε δίδου. 821. Ex. 20:13. Lev. 24: 21. b 27. Ex. 20: 14. ¢ 31. Deut. 24:1. a 33. Ex. 20:7. Lev. 19:12. Deut. 23 : 21. 9.88. Ex. 21:24. Lev. 24: 20. 22 αὐτοῦ pr S* B ve; add εἰκῆ SCP DL δὲν ; add αὐτὴν B D L Treg. [West.]; add cop syrr [Treg.] Rev.mg. 25 ὃ κριτὴς αὐτῆς SP. 87 ἔστω SD L; ἔσται B NB Rev.mg.; add σε παραδῷ D L ve cop West.mg. Rev.mg. syrr [Treg.] Rev.txt. 28 ἐπιθυμῆσαι 38 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. 43 44 45 46 47 48 MATT. V. LUKE VI. 4 \ Ν 7 35. ON ca) A. π γγαν a ψυνὸν DS x S23 id σε δός, καὶ τὸν θέλοντα ἀπὸ σοῦ καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ αἴροντος τὰ σὰ μὴ ἀπαί- δανίσασθαι μὴ ἀποστραφῇς. TEL. — > ΄ “ 55»ε 7 Ἢ 75 , Ηκούσατε ὅτι ἐῤῥέθη " ἀγαπή- Ν σεις τὸν πλησίον σου καὶ ’ὔ ‘ tf Ἂν, > cal cal μισήσεις TOV ἐχθρόν σου. ἐγὼ 27 ᾿Αλλὰ ὑμῖν λέγω τοῖς ἀκούουσιν " \ ΄ δ᾽ > a a > \ > a \ > \ Nur a δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀγαπᾶτε τοῦς ἐχθροὺς ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑμῶν, καλῶς ὑμῶν, καὶ προσεύχεσθε ὑπὲρ τῶν διω- 28 ποιεῖτε τοῖς μισοῦσιν ὑμᾶς, | εὐλογεῖ- “ 7 / eas lal “ ’΄ κόντων ὑμᾶς - ὅπως γένησθε υἱοὶ τοῦ τε τοὺς καταρωμένους ὑμᾶς, προσεύ- “ lal lal 7 “ ΄-“ πατρὸς ὑμῶν τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς, ὅτι χεσθε περὶ τῶν ἐπηρεαζόντων ὑμᾶς.-- 9 aA ' τὸν ἥλιον αὐτοῦ ἀνατέλλει ἐπὶ πο- \ Ν 5 4 Ν ia 5 Ν νηροὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς καὶ βρέχει ἐπὶ , ‘\ LOU aN Ν 3 © Ν 9.9 A Ν 3 a ΒΝ δικαίους καὶ ἀδίκους. ἐὰν γὰρ ἀγα- 82 καὶ εἰ ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας ὑμᾶς, al ε a / a THONTE τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας ὑμᾶς, τίνα ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστίν; καὶ γὰρ ot ΜΘ a \ } rn Ν μισθὸν ἔχετε; οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ τελῶναι τὸ ἁμαρτωλοὶ τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας αὐτοὺς cal ‘\ iA a Lal αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν; καὶ ἐὰν ἀσπάσησθε 33 ἀγαπῶσιν. καὶ yap ἐὰν ἀγαθοποιῆτε \ 3 Ν e cal ΄ / Ν 3 a ε a ty ε iA τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς ὑμῶν μόνον, τί περισ- τοὺς. ἀγαθοποιοῦντας ὑμᾶς, ποία ὑμιίν Ν tal rye \ ἘΠῚ 5 Ν Ν id 3 ’ \ ε ε ‘ Ν σὸν ποιεῖτε; οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ ἐθνικοὶ τὸ χάρις ἐστίν; καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ τὸ na Lal XN αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν ; 84 αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν. καὶ ἐὰν δανίσητε παρ᾽ δ. ἐλ. il λαβ Tay 7 het) 4, : ov ἐλπίζετε εἶν, ποία ὑμῖν χάρις 3 is Np Ν ε a ὃ / 7 3 ΄ὔ ΩΝ ἐστίν; καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἁμαρτωλοῖς δανίζουσιν ἵνα ἀπολάβωσιν τὰ ἴσα. a a a \ / 35 Πλὴν ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχθρούς ὑμῶν καὶ ἀγαθοποιεῖτε καὶ davilere μηδένα 5 e ΩΝ c Ν e a , Ν »” | ee. Sy , ἀπελπίζοντες - καὶ ἔσται ὃ μισθὸς ὑμῶν πολύς, Kal ἔσεσθε viol ὑψίστου, 9 > / Ν ὅτι αὐτὸς χρηστός ἐστιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀχαρίστους καὶ πονηρούς. 3, 9 ε “ / / 5 ,ὔ Ἂς, ε Ν ἔσεσθε οὖν ὑμεῖς τές 86 γίνεσθε οἰκτίρμονες, καθὼς 6 πατὴρ lat a ’ὔ Aeon ὧς ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν 6 οὐράνιος ὑμῶν οἰκτίρμων ἐστίν. , , 9. τέλειός ἐστιν. VI. 1 Προσέχετε δὲ τὴν δικαιοσύνην ὑμῶν μὴ ποιεῖν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 3 4 πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς: εἰ δὲ μήγε, μισθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ ὑμῶν τῷ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. Ὅταν οὖν ποιῇς ἐλεημοσύνην, μὴ σαλπίσῃς ἔμπροσθέν σου, ὥσπερ οἱ ὑποκρι- ταὶ ποιοῦσιν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ ἐν ταῖς ῥύμαις, ὅπως δοξασθῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀν- θρώπων ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπέχουσιν τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν. ! σοῦ δὲ ποιοῦντος ἐλεη- μοσύνην μὴ γνώτω ἡ ἀριστερά σου τί ποιεῖ ἡ δεξιά σου, ' ὅπως ἡ σοῦ ἐλεημοσύνη ἢ ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ, καὶ ὃ πατήρ σου ὃ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ ἀποδώσει σοι. Kal ὅταν προσεύχησθε, οὐκ ἔσεσθε ὡς οἱ ὑποκριταί" ὅτι φιλοῦσιν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν ἑστῶτες προσεύχεσθαι, ὅπως φα- νῶσιν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπέχουσιν τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν. lod δὲ ὅταν προσεύχῃ, εἴσελθε εἰς τὸ ταμεῖόν σου καὶ κλείσας τὴν θύραν σου πρόσευξαι τῷ πατρί σον τῷ ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ, καὶ ὃ πατήρ σου ὃ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ ἀπο- 2 48, Comp. Lev. 19: 18. 44 ὕμῶν δὰ Bvg cop; add εὐλογεῖτε τοὺς Le. 6:33. γὰρ S*B; om SCA DL Git καταρωμένους ὑμᾶς, καλῶς ποιεῖτε τοὺς μισοῦν- vg Tree. [West.] Rev. 35 μηδένα δὰ τας ὑμᾶς Ὁ L. 46 τὸ αὐτὸ NBL syrr; Ξὶ West.mg. Rev.mg.; μηδὲν A Β D 1, cop οὕτως Ὁ Z 88 cop Treg. West.mg. Treg. West.txt. Rey.txt. § 41.) UNTIL THE THIRD. 39 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 MATT. VI. , 2B X 7 ων δώσει σοι. ἹΠροσευχόμενοι δὲ μὴ βατταλογήσητε ὥσπερ οἱ ἐθνικοί - δοκοῦσιν \ “ 3 a fe “ > a A yap ὅτι ἐν TH πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν εἰσακουσθήσονται. μὴ οὖν ὁμοιωθῆτε αὐτοῖς - > Ν ε \ ε nr e aA a a 9 oidev γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὧν χρείαν ἔχετε TPO TOD ὑμᾶς αἰτῆσαι αὐτόν. οὕτως > , ε a ΄, - nA A οὖν προσεύχεσθε ὑμεῖς - πάτερ ἡμῶν ὃ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά ἃ i] > / «ε a ; 4 \ ,ὔ Α / « > > A Ay Soy σου" |! ἐλθάτω ἡ βασιλεία σου" γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου ws ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ fol Ν Ν «ς Ν > 4 ον a /, 3, -“ 12 γῆς" ᾿ τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον δὸς ἡμῖν σήμερον - καὶ ἄφες ἡμῖν τὰ 3 ΄ ε “- ε Vee A 3 ΄ al > 4 ε a Ν Ν > ὀφειλήματα ἡμῶν, WS καὶ ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν τοῖς ὀφειλέταις ἡμῶν - Kal μὴ εἰσε- rs a , lal A fal a νέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν, ἀλλὰ ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ. “Hav γὰρ a cal / lal “ lal ἀφῆτε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, ἀφήσει καὶ ὑμῖν ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὃ Lee 2N Ν ΝΕ PS) a a 3 ᾿ς 2QX ςε Ν Ceo > / Ν οὐράνιος - ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, οὐδὲ O πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἀφήσει τὰ παραπ- τώματα ὑμῶν. “Ὁ δὲ , Ν , ε 8. Ν a) / 3 i“ Ν ταν δὲ νηστεύητε, μὴ γίνεσθε ws οἱ ὑποκριταὶ σκυθρωποί ἀφανίζουσιν γὰρ Τὰ πρόσωπα αὐτῶν ὅπως φανῶσιν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις νηστεύοντες. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 3 “ Ν Ν ἐογὰ Ν Ν Δ + 4: Ν Ν Ν ἀπέχουσιν τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν. σὺ δὲ νηστεύων ἀλειψαί σου τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ TO ΄ ΄ , 12 . A Aas 6 , ΄ =) SxS a , πρόσωπόν cov νίψαι, !orws μὴ φανῇς Tots ἀνθρώποις νηστεύων ἀλλὰ τῷ πατρί nm 3 a 4 ἌΓΕ 4 ε rv / > “~ ’ im ὃ ’ὔ σου τῷ ἐν τῷ κρυφαίῳ, καὶ ὃ πατήρ σου ὃ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυφαίῳ ἀποδώσει σοι. a “-“ a Ν lal Μὴ θησαυρίζετε ὑμῖν θησαυροὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ὅπου σὴς καὶ βρῶσις ἀφανίζει, Ἄν» Ἐξ / , Ν / , Ne a Ν καὶ ὅπου κλέπται διορύσσουσιν καὶ κλέπτουσιν - θησαυρίζετε δὲ ὑμῖν θησαυροὺς > > a“ μὲ ᾿ Ν ΕΣ “ > , Ν “ Μ > , ἐν οὐρανῷ, ὅπου οὔτε σὴς οὔτε βρῶσις ἀφανίζει, καὶ ὅπου κλέπται οὐ διορύσ- 7 a σουσιν οὐδὲ κλέπτουσιν. ὅπου γάρ ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρός σου, ἐκεῖ ἔσται καὶ ἣ καρ- ε a > δία gov. ὋὉ λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν ὁ ὀφθαλμός. ἐὰν ἢ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ἁπλοῦς, ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου φωτεινὸν ἔ - ἐὰν δὲ ὃ ὀφθαλμό ὃς ἢ ; a νὸν ἔσται - ἐὰν δὲ 6 ὀφθαλμός σου πονηρὸς ἢ), μι “ > n ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου σκοτεινὸν ἔσται. εἰ οὖν TO φῶς TO ἐν σοὶ σκότος ἐστίν, TO / / σκότος πόσον. Ν , \ , \ Οὐδεὶς δύναται δυσὶ κυρίοις δουλεύειν - ἢ yap τὸν ἕνα μισήσει καὶ τὸν ἕτερον > td A eo NX > béé Ν ne , , > , a ἀγαπήσει, ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται Kal τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει. οὐ δύνασθε θεῷ dov- a - a a a “-“ lal , λεύειν καὶ μαμωνᾷ. Διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ μεριμνᾶτε τῇ ψυχῇ ὑμῶν τί ΄ Ν a , Lh Wn By [8 ΄ AS \ oT, 2 a φάγητε, μηδὲ TH σώματι ὑμῶν τί ἐνδύσησθε. οὐχὶ ἡ ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστιν τῆς a \ Ν lal a 3 , > » 5 ‘ Ν A > a YF τροφῆς Kal TO σῶμα Tov ἐνδύματος; ἐμβλέψατε cis TA πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ὅτι 9 4 > Ν 4 25 ΧΝ 4 > > / Vie Ἂν c cal ov σπείρουσιν οὐδὲ θερίζουσιν οὐδὲ συνάγουσιν εἰς ἀποθήκας, Kal ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ε ae oe Ls P. > 7 > ε a a / Th ! fe ταν ἜΘ ΗΝ. ὃ οὐράνιος τρέφει αὐτά οὐχ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλον διαφέρετε αὐτῶν ; ' τίς δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν μεριμνῶν δύναται προσθεῖναι ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ πῆχυν ἕνα; καὶ περὶ ἐνδύμα- TOS τί μεριμνᾶτε; καταμάθετε τὰ κρίνα τοῦ ἀγροῦ πῶς αὐξάνουσιν - οὐ κοπιῶ- rf -“ / ~ aw οὐδὲ νήθουσιν. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐδὲ Σολομὼν ev πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ AN a a , Ν ΕἾ περιεβάλετο ὡς ἕν τούτων. εἰ δὲ τὸν χόρτον τοῦ ἀγροῦ σήμερον ὄντα καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον ὃ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν, οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς, ὀλι- ων \ \ , γόπιστοι; ' μὴ οὖν μεριμνήσητε λέγοντες - τί φάγωμεν ἢ τί πίωμεν ἢ τί περι- ’ὔ ! ᾿ς: Ν A Ἂν > cal 30 ‘ ε Ν ec lal c βαλώμεθα; ' πάντα yap ταῦτα τὰ ἔθνη ἐπιζητοῦσιν - οἶδεν yap ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ὑρά ὅ ζ 5 Ld ζητεῖτε δὲ ὦτον τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ οὐράνιος ὅτι χρήζετε τούτων ἁπάντων. ζητεῖτε δὲ πρῶ Ὶ Mt. 6:8. 6 πατὴρ Ὁ 1, Z 33; pm 6 θεὸς S* cop. Treg. [West.] Rev. 22 ἐὰν δὲ Β [West.] Rev.mg. 13 πονηροῦ SBD vg; add οὖν BLA syrr Treg. West. Rev. Zvg cop; add ὅτι σοῦ ἐστιν ἣ βασιλεία καὶ 25 φάγητε S vg; add ἢ τί πίητε B Treg. ἡ δύναμις καὶ ἣ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας - ἀμήν. [West.] Rev. L 88 syrr Rev.mg. 15 ἀνθρώποις δὰ 83 βασιλείαν S B; add τοῦ θεοῦ L 33 vg D vg; add τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν BL 33 syrr Treg. 40 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. MATT. VI. Nv 5 , 3 A Ν a / , (fire Ned Ἂς > ͵ὕ 34 τὴν ὀικαιοσύνην αὐτοῦ, καὶ ταυτα πάντα προστεθήσεται υμιν. μὴ οὗν μεριμνὴ- - S BS ante εἰς τὴν αὔριον - ἡ yap αὔριον μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς. ἀρκετὸν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἣ κακία αὐτῆς. LUKE VI. 4 , 9 Ν A \ \ ΄ Cas N a VII. 1 Μὴ xpivere, ἵνα μὴ κριθῆτε. 87 Kat μὴ κρίνετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ κριθῆτε" > Ξε Ν / ΄ Ν Ν 2 ἐν ᾧ γὰρ κρίματι κρίνετε κριθήσεσθε, καὶ μὴ καταδικάζετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ κατα- καὶ ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε μετρηθήσε- δικασθῆτε. ἀπολύετε, καὶ ἀπολυθή- ται ὑμῖν. 88 σεσθε- δίδοτε, καὶ δοθήσεται ὑμῖν " μέτρον καλόν πεπιεσμένον σεσαλευ- μένον ὑπερεκχυννόμενον δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν - ᾧ γὰρ μέτρῳ 89 μετρεῖτε ἀντιμετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν. Τὴἶπεν δὲ καὶ παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς. μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν ; οὐχὶ ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον ἐμπεσοῦν- 40 ται; ' οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον - κατηρτισμένος δὲ πᾶς 41 ἔσται ὡς ὃ διδάσκαλος αὐτοῦ. ‘Ti δὲ 8 τί δὲ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλ- ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ ἐν μῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ δοκὸν A aes A EN > A \ > A207 9 Ce a τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς ; τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ οὐ κατανοεῖς ; 4 ἢ πῶς ἐρεῖς τῷ ἀδελφῷ Gov: ἄφες 42 ἢ πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου: ἀδελφέ, ἄφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρ- σου καὶ ἰδοὺ ἡ δοκὸς ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλ- gos τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σου, αὐτὸς 5 μῷ σου. ὑποκριτά, ἔκβαλε πρῶτον τὴν ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σου δοκὸν οὐ βλέ- > a 3 ἴω Ν \ Ν c ΄ 3 “ aN ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου τὴν δοκὸν, καὶ πων ; ὑποκριτά, ἔκβαλε πρῶτον τὴν τότε διαβλέψεις ἐκβαλεῖν τὸ κάρ- δοκὸν ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σοῦ, καὶ τότε gos ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ διαβλέψεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλ- oe μῷ TOU ἀδελφοῦ σου ἐκβαλεῖν. ---- i>) Μὴ δῶτε τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσίν, μηδὲ βάλητε τοὺς μαργαρίτας ὑμῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν χοίρων, μήποτε κατα- πατήσουσιν αὐτοὺς ἐν τοῖς ποσὶν αὐτῶν καὶ στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς. * . re “- Ν ε ,ὔ , A Αἰτεῖτε, καὶ δοθήσεται ὑμῖν - ζητεῖτε, καὶ εὑρήσετε" κρούετε, καὶ ο > Ἢ ε “ a Ν ε + τε νος 7 Ἄν 6, ἴω {- tA ανοιγήσεται υμιν- Tas γὰρ O ALTWV λαμβάνει, και O ζητῶν €uplo Kel, © \ cg , A 3 ΄ XN , > R Ξε ΩΝ » 6 Ὁ ὰ ΕΞ καὶ τῷ κρούοντι ἀνοιγήσεται. ἢ τίς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, ὃν αἰτή- A , lol \ Xi 33: Ἂν Yale? 10 cei ὃ vids αὐτοῦ ἄρτον, μὴ λίθον ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ ; ' ἢ Kat ἰχθὺν αἰτήσει, 11 μὴ ὄφιν ἐπιδώ ὑτῷ; εἰ οὖν ὑμεῖ i ὄντες οἴδατε δόματα ἀγα- μὴ ὄφιν ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ; εἰ οὖν ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὃν μ Ύ Ν NBS “ ,ὔ ε lal / “- ε Ν ea e > a θὰ διδόναι τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς : cal , “-“ cal /, οὐρανοῖς δώσει ἀγαθὰ τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν. > 7 , σ wn ε 12 πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἐὰν θέλητε ἵνα ποι- 81 καὶ καθὼς θέλετε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν dow ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, οὕτως καὶ ot ἄνθρωποι, καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε αὐτοῖς τὶς Ε ἐν ΤῊ ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε αὐτοῖς - οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ὁμοίως. ---- ε » A “ ὃ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται. w. fol A σ lal Ἂν , eggs 18 εἰσέλθατε διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης - ὅτι πλατεῖα [ἡ πύλη] Kal εὐρύχωρος ἡ ὁδὸς ε > , > Ν > / Ν ’, > ε > ’ 39 5 2 & 9 14 ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς THY ἀπώλειαν, καὶ πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ εἰσερχόμενοι OV αὐτῆς " ὅτι Mt.7: 18. ἡ πύλη S*°BC Lygcopsyrr mg. 14 ὅτι N* B* ; τί NPvid ete B? [Tisch.] Westmg.; om N* West.txt. Rev. C L vg syrr Treg. Rev.mg, § 41.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 41 MATT. Vil. στενὴ [ἡ πύλη] καὶ τεθλιμμένη ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἁπάγουσα εἰς τὴν ζωήν, καὶ ὀλίγοι SN, Bee theca. 5 εἰσιν OL EVPLOKOVTES αὐτήν. " προβάτων, ἔσωθεν δέ εἰσιν λύκοι ἅρ- 16 παγες. ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπι- ve 3 ’΄ / 4 γνώσεσθε αὐτούς. μήτι συλλέγουσιν lal \ ἣν / ἀπὸ ἀκανθῶν σταφυλὰς ἢ ἀπὸ τριβό- 17 λων σῦκα; οὕτως πᾶν δένδρον ἀγαθὸν καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖ, τὸ δὲ σαπρὸν 18 δένδρον καρποὺς πονηροὺς ποιεῖ. οὐ fe ΄ 3 \ x δύναται δένδρον ἀγαθὸν καρποὺς πο- \ > a 9 Ν , Ν νηροὺς ἐνεγκεῖν, οὐδὲ δένδρον σαπρὸν Ἂς al a 19 καρποὺς καλοὺς ἐνεγκεῖν. πᾶν δέν- a Δ Spov μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκό- Ν ΩΝ ,ὕ ” 20 πτεται καὶ cis πῦρ βάλλεται. ἄραγε ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς. 21 Οὐ πᾶς ὁ λέγων μοι κύριε κύριε, 3 hi > Ν v4 r εἰσελεύσεται εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν, ἀλλ᾽ 6 ποιῶν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ ΄΄ 5 Ν ἴω cal a 10 Προσέχετε ἀπὸ τῶν ψευδοπροφητῶν, οἵτινες ἔρχονται πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν ἐνδύμασιν LUKE VI. ΟΣ a 44 Kxaorov yap δένδρον ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται" οὐ γὰρ ἐξ ἀκαν- θῶν συλλέγουσιν σῦκα, οὐδὲ ἐκ βάτου 48 σταφυλὴν τρυγῶσιν. ---- Οὐ γάρ ἐστιν δένδρον καλὸν ποιοῦν καρπὸν σαπρόν, οὐδὲ πάλιν δένδρον σαπρὸν ποιοῦν 45 καρπὸν καλόν. ---- ὃ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος > a 3 lal aA a 7 ἐκ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ THs καρδίας , x 3 ,ὔ Ν ε Ν προφέρει τὸ ἀγαθόν, καὶ ὃ πονηρὸς ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ προφέρει τὸ πονηρόν " > Ἂ / , -“ ἐκ γὰρ περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ. 40 Τίδέ με καλεῖτε κύριε κύριε, καὶ > Lad aA / ov ποιεῖτε ἃ λέγω; / A Ν al Ν “ 22 πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν τοὶς οὐρανοῖς. πολλοὶ ἐροῦσίν μοι ἐν ἐκείνῃ a“ ε / YA 4 > a tal > / > 4 τῇ ἡμέρᾳ" κύριε κύριε, OV TO σῴ ὀνόματι ἐπροφητεύσαμεν, Ν a C= 1 bo ee ὃ / ἐξεβάλο Ν a “ τιν και τῳ σῳ OVOPATL OGLILOVLA ἐξεβάλομεν, Και τῳ σῳ ονομᾶτι ’ δ 3 ,΄ὔ Ν / [2 7 3 lal 23 δυνάμεις πολλὰς ἐποιήσαμεν; καὶ τότε ὁμολογήσω αὐτοῖς μὲ 3 / 3 ε an 3 lal > 3 > a ε οτι οὐδέποτε eyvov UPGS, GATOKWPELTE aT εμου οι 3 , Ν 3 ’ὔ ἐργαζόμενοι τὴν ἀνομίαν. an > τ Ν 24 Πᾶς οὖν ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λό- \ tal \ ε yous τούτους καὶ ποιεῖ αὐτοὺς ὅὁμοιω- θήσεται ἀνδρὶ φρονίμῳ, ὅστις φκοδό- ioe pi φρονίμῳ, a / μῆσεν αὐτοῦ τὴν οἰκίαν ἐπὶ τὴν πέ- 25 τραν. καὶ κατέβη ἡ βροχὴ καὶ ἦλθον Ν οἱ ποταμοὶ καὶ ἔπνευσαν οἱ ἄνεμοι a / Ν καὶ προσέπεσαν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ, καὶ > 3, 9 ‘ ON Ν οὐκ ἔπεσεν - τεθεμελίωτο γὰρ ἐπὶ τὴν “ ε ’ 26 πέτραν. καὶ πᾶς ὁ ἀκούων μου τοὺς / Ν νι Last ‘ λόγους τούτους καὶ μὴ ποιῶν αὐτοὺς 6 θήσεται ἀνδρὶ μωρῷ, 6 ὑκο- ὁμοιωθήσεται ἀνδρὶ μωρῷ, ὅστις wK a Ν δόμησεν αὐτοῦ τὴν οἰκίαν ἐπὶ τὴν \ , Nn . 9 27 ἄμμον. καὶ κατέβη ἡ βροχὴ καὶ ἢλ- ἣν Gov οἱ ποταμοὶ καὶ ἔπνευσαν ot ἄνεμοι a / 47 πᾶς ὃ ἐρχόμενος ΄ Ν a πρός με καὶ ἀκούων μου τῶν λόγων ἣν “ ,ὔ c a καὶ ποιῶν αὐτούς, ὑποδείξω ὑμῖν τίνι > wae? Ψ ΄, > > , 48 ἐστὶν ὅμοιος. ὅμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ 3 a aes a ” \ οἰκοδομοῦντι οἰκίαν, ὃς ἔσκαψεν Kal ἐβάθυνεν καὶ ἔθηκεν θεμέλιον ἐπὶ τὴν , ΄ πέτραν: πλημμύρης δὲ γενομένης - “a προσέρηξεν ὃ ποταμὸς TH οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ, καὶ οὐκ ἴσχυσεν σαλεῦσαι αὐτήν διὰ 49 τὸ καλῶς οἰκοδομῆσθαι αὐτήν. ὃ δὲ φ /, ἀκούσας καὶ μὴ ποιήσας ὅμοιός ἐστιν > , 3 ’ aa ΕἾΕΝ ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδομήσαντι οἰκίαν ἐπὶ Ν A Ν ΄ ἣν / - τὴν γῆν χωρὶς θεμελίου, 7) προσέρηξεν ε ΄ \ 2s , \ O TOTGLOS, και εὐθὺς συνέπεσεν, και Mt. 7:14. ἢ πύλη δ' BC et omn. ve {[Tisch.] Treg. West. Rev. 18 ἐνεγκεῖν pr N*vid B; ποιεῖν N** C Z Treg. | ἐνεγκεῖν sc S* ; ποιεῖν NS? ct°? BC Z Treg. West. Le. 6: 45. πονηρὸς δὰ" B D L cop; add ἄνθρωπος Se A C Ξὶ vg syrr | πονηροῦ δὰ Β Ὁ Lz; add θησαυροῦ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ A C cop syrr. 48 διὰ τὸ καλῶς οἰκοδομῆσθαι δὰ ΒῚ, Ξ 33 cop; τεθεμελίωτο γὰρ ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν ACD vg Rev.mg. 42 MATT. VII. Ά / el > 2. > ἣν. Ν καὶ προσέκοψαν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ, καὶ Ν > lal A ἔπεσεν, Kal ἣν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς pe γάλη. FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. LUKE VI. ἐγένετο τὸ ῥῆγμα τῆς οἰκίας ἐκείνης μέγα. 3 lal 28 Kai ἐγένετο ore ἐτέλεσεν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοὺς λόγους τούτους, ἐξεπλήσσοντο ot 5, 5 \ a “Ὁ 3 “~ hey Ν 4 3 a 29 ὄχλοι ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ: ἦν yap διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς αὐτῶν. VIL. 1 Καταβάντι δὲ αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί. § 42. The Healing of the Centurion’s Servant. — Capernaum. Marr. VIII. 5-13. 5 Εἰσελθόντος δὲ αὐτοῦ cis Kadap- ναούμ, προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ἑκατοντάρχης 6 παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν | καὶ λέγων - κύριε, ε a / 3 “ ΠΣ ὁ παῖς μου βέβληται ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ παραλυτικός, δεινῶς βασανιζόμενος. Luxe VIL ἸΞΣ > 1 Ἐπειδὴ ἐπλήρωσεν πάντα τὰ ῥή- ματα αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς τοῦ λαοῦ, 2 εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναούμ. ἝἭκατον- τάρχου δέ τινος δοῦλος κακῶς ἔχων 5» ) lol a 53 3 a ν- ὁ ἤμελλεν τελευτᾷν, ὃς ἦν αὐτῷ ἔντιμος. 3 ἀκούσας δὲ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἀπέστειλεν Ν be AN ΄ a > a πρὸς αὑτὸν πρεσβυτέρους τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, ἐρωτῶν αὐτὸν ὅπως ἐλ- 4 θὼν διασώσῃ τὸν δοῦλον αὐτοῦ. 3 lal Inootv ἠρώτων αὐτὸν , a 9 τ 5 παρέξει τοῦτο: ἄγαπᾷ 7 λέγει αὐτῷ: ἐγὼ ἐλθὼν θεραπεύσω ΘῈ ἣν αυτον. 8 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ ἑκατοντάρ- oy / > SN ε \ χης by: κύριε, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς σ ε Ν Ν ,’ 3 / ἵνα μου ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην εἰσέλθῃς - / Ν / ἀλλὰ μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ, καὶ ἰαθήσεται ε - Ν Ν 8... BN Ξ, , 9 ὃ παῖς μου. καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπός > CANT ΟΣ , + oye 5 \ εἰμι ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν, ἔχων ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν la στρατιώτας, καὶ λέγω TOUTW* πορεύ- Ἂν , ἊΨ ἢ 3) θητι, καὶ πορεύεται, καὶ ἄλλῳ - ἔρχου, ον »” \ Lal , , καὶ ἔρχεται, καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου - ποίη- a a ε 10 σον τοῦτο, καὶ ποιεῖ. ἀκούσας δὲ ὃ 3 a 5 “-“ Τησοῦς ἐθαύμασεν καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς ἀκο- λουθοῦσιν - ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ ἐν οἱ δὲ παραγενόμενοι πρὸς τὸν = σπουδαίως, λέγοντες ὅτι ἄξιός ἐστιν ᾧ γὰρ τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν, καὶ τὴν συναγωγὴν 3 Ν 39 / ε “ 4 Ν 3 6 αὐτὸς ὠκοδόμησεν ἡμῖν. ὃ δὲ Ἴη- fal > ΄ aN 3 lal ” Ν σοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος τῆς οἷ- , 3, lA Ee , κίας, ἔπεμψεν φίλους ὃ ἑκατοντάρχης , λέγων - κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου" οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου 7 εἰσέλθῃς - διὸ οὐδὲ ἐμαυτὸν ἠξίωσα ’ὔ “- ’΄ πρός σε ἐλθεῖν - ἀλλὰ εἰπὲ λόγῳ, καὶ > ΄ ε a \ Ν ϑι ΝΑ 8 ἰαθήτω ὃ παῖς μου. καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ + fa) ' 3 eX 2¢ , , αν ρωπὸος ειμι πὕὍὉπὸ εξουσιᾶαν Τασσο- μενος, ἔχων ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας, καὶ λέγω τούτῳ - πορεύθητι, καὶ πο- , ἈΝ 3, Nom peveTat, καὶ ἄλλῳ - ἔρχου, καὶ ἔρχεται, καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου: ποίησον τοῦτο, ἈΝ “A 3 4 Ἂν ἴω ἘΞ 2 9 καὶ ποιεῖ. ἀκούσας δὲ ταῦτα ὁ Ἴη- ~ > , > / A QA σοῦς ἐθαύμασεν αὐτόν, καὶ στραφεὶς = 3 a 3. oe > τῷ ἀκολουθοῦντι αὐτῷ ὄχλῳ εἶπεν " Mt. 8: 1. καταβάντι δὲ αὐτῷ S*; κατα- βάντος δὲ (καὶ καταβ. Z) αὐτοῦ N> BC Z Treg. West. Le. 7: 1. ἐπειδὴ A Β ΟἿ; ἐπεὶ δὲ δ΄ C2 L Ξ vg cop Tree.mg. West.mg. 4 ἠρώτων 8 DL Ξ; παρεκάλουν (-λεσαν A) ABC Treg. West. Rey. 6 ἔπεμψεν S* B; add πρὸς (em A) αὐτὸν Se A C DL Treg. Rev. | λέγων S* vg; add αὐτῷ SC A BCD L Treg. West. Rev. Mt.8:9. ἐξουσίαν C L; add τασσόμενος SN B [West.] Rev.mg. 10 οὐδὲ --- εὗρον SC; παρ᾽ οὐδενὶ τοσαύτην πίστιν ἐν τῷ Ἴσ- ραὴλ εὗρον B cop Ττορ. West. Rev.mg. §§ 42, 43, 44.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 43 1 12 13 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 _ MATT. viii. LUKE VII. a? \ ΄ ΄ : A \ ἘΞ τῷ Ἰσραὴλ τοσαύτην πίστιν εὗρον. λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ τοσαύ- λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτι πολλοὶ ἀπὸ ἀνατο- τὴν πίστιν εὗρον. λῶν καὶ δυσμῶν ἥξουσιν καὶ ἀνακλι- Δ Ny δ 4 Ν 1.5 Ν > “ ’, ~ > cal θήσονται μετὰ ABpadp καὶ Ἰσαὰκ καὶ Ἰακὼβ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν" | ε δὲ τ ς a ἊΝ td 9 ΄ > Ν᾿ ,ὔ Ν > , ΕἸ fal ot δὲ υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας ἐξελεύσονται εἰς TO σκότος TO ἐξώτερον - ἐκεῖ wy ε Ν ΝΕ Ν a ἔσται ὃ κλαυθμὸς Kal 6 βρυγμὸς τῶν ᾿ > , XN 3 Ἐπ .5 A ~ ὀδόντων. καὶ εἶπεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς τῷ ἊΝ 4, ν ε > 7 i - , εκατονταρχὴ " ὕὉπᾶγε, ὡς ἐπίστευσας 10 και ὑποστρέψαν- ’, WRT fe ε ca] > > \ > e f Bod γενηθήτω σοι. καὶι ἰάθη O παις ἐν τες εἰς τὸν οἶκον OL πεμφθέντες εὑρον 7 a τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐκείνῃ. τὸν δοῦλον ὑγιαίνοντα. § 43. The Raising of the Widow’s Son. — Nain. ibjoren! WAL 11Ξ-17 ‘ , a A ΄ ΄ὔ oh Kat ἐγένετο ἐν τῇ ἑξῆς ἐπορεύθη εἰς πόλιν καλουμένην Naty, καὶ συνεπορεύ- > tal ε Ν 3 a ¢ \ ‘ ΝΥ » c YA tal ΄ OVTO αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἱκανοὶ καὶ ὄχλος πολύς. ὡς δὲ ἤγγισεν τῇ πύλῃ fal / Se SI. N > [δ᾽ ‘ X ex ~ Ν 3 cal Ἁ τῆς πόλεως, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐξεκομίζετο τεθνηκὼς μονογενὴς υἱὸς τῇ μητρὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ au - , Ἂ ΟὟ λ a Δ ε V3 > Ν ιν δα; Ν ἰδὰ ae < ὕτη ἦν χήρα, καὶ ὄχλος τῆς πόλεως ἱκανὸς ἦν σὺν αὐτῇ. Kal ἰδὼν αὐτὴν ὃ , > , 3. τῷ ἀντ ἐν τας » 5 ν A \ ν κύριος ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ’ αὐτὴν καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῇ - μὴ κλαῖε. καὶ προσελθὼν o a A ε \ , " ὦν τῷ ΄ \ , ἥψατο τῆς σοροῦ, οἱ δὲ βαστάζοντες ἔστησαν, καὶ εἶπεν - νεανίσκε, σοὶ λέγω, 5 Α͂ a) ὯΝ 5 άθ ε Ἂν Ἂ, my € “ Ν aN > XN “~ ἐγέρθητι. Kat ἀνεκάθισεν ὃ νεκρὸς καὶ ἤρξατο λαλεῖν, Kal ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν TH ων ,ὔ μητρὶ αὐτοῦ. ἔλαβεν δὲ φόβος ἅπαντας, καὶ ἐδόξαζον τὸν θεὸν λέγοντες ὅτι 4 4 > / > [: lal \ 7 > / ε Ν Ν Ν 3 aA XN προφήτης μέγας ἠγέρθη ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ὅτι ἐπεσκέψατο ὃ θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ. Kat ἐξῆλθεν ὃ λόγος οὗτος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ περὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν πάσῃ τῇ περιχώρῳ ἢ γ ῃ τῇ ᾧ περ ν πάσῃ τῇ περιχώρῳ. § 44. John the Baptist in prison sends Disciples to «1658. ---- Galilee: Caper- 2 3 naum ? Marr. XI. 2-19. Luxe VII. 18-35. ¢ Ν > , 3 ’ὔ Ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιωάννης ἀκούσας ἐν τῷ δε. 15 Καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν ᾿Ιωάννει ot μαθη- σμωτηρίῳ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, πεμ- 19 ταὶ αὐτοῦ περὶ πάντων τούτων. καὶ ὃ Ν a θ ~ > a ! > , ὃ , Ἂς lal 6 Yas διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ' εἶπεν προσκαλεσάμενος δύο τινὰς τῶν μαθη- See ΑΝ ἃ Ν a ¢€ 3 , v’ ¢ a 3 a) ε Ἶ , 3 Ν αὐτῷ- σὺ εἶ ὃ ἐρχόμενος, ἢ ἕτερον τῶν αὐτοῦ 6 ᾿Ιωάννης ἔπεμψεν πρὸς a > προσδοκῶμεν ; τὸν κύριον λέγων: σὺ εἶ ὃ ἐρχύμενος, \ cal ΄ 20 ἢ ἄλλον προσδοκῶμεν ; παραγενόμε- 'Φ ε Ν bee νοι δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ot ἄνδρες εἶπαν - ᾿Ιωάννης ὃ βαπτιστὴς ἀπέ- a / Ν φε / vA σταλκεν ἡμᾶς πρός σε λέγων" σὺ εἶ ὃ ἐρχύμενος, ἢ ἄλλον προσ- an > > , “ ν > , Ν 3 Ν re 21 δοκῶμεν ; ἐν ἐκείνῃ TH ὥρᾳ ἐθεράπευσεν πολλοὺς ἀπὸ νόσων Lal δ cal cal καὶ μαστίγων καὶ πνευμάτων πονηρῶν, Kal τυφλοῖς πολλοῖς Mt. 8:12. ἐξελεύσονται N*¥i West.mg.; ἐκ. νοὶ A C [Treg.mg.]; om 8 Β DL E vg cop βληθήσονται S* BC vg cop Treg. West.txt. Treg.txt. West. Rev. Le. 7:11. ἐν τῇ ἑξῆς S* C D cop syrr 19 ἄλλον A D Treg.mg.; ἕτερον δὰ Β Τὶ Treg.mg. West.mg. Rev.mg.; ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς δὰ Ξ 33 Treg.txt. West. 20 ἄλλον A B; AB Lyg Treg.txt. West.txt. Rev.txt. | ika- ἕτερον SD L = Treg.mg. West.mg. 10 11 12 19 14 15 16 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER MATT. XI. Ν > Ν ε καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ Inoovs εἶπεν αὐτοῖς: πορευθέντες > / 3 / aA > 4 \ ἀπαγγείλατε Iwavvy ἃ ἀκούετε καὶ βλέπετε: τυφλοὶ ἀναβλέπουσιν καὶ χωλοὶ περιπατοῦσιν, λεπροὶ καθαρί- ζονται καὶ κωφοὶ ἀκούουσιν, καὶ νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται καὶ πτωχοὶ εὐαγγελίζον- ται -᾿ καὶ μακάριός ἐστιν ὃς ἐὰν μὴ σκανδαλισθῇ ἐν ἐμοί. c Τούτων δὲ πορευομένων ἤρξατο ὃ 3 A / cal + \ ΟῚ / Ἰησοῦς λέγειν τοῖς ὄχλοις περὶ ᾿Ιωάν- τ PS be ‘NG. 5 Ν 3, θ / νου - τί ἐξήλθατε εἰς THY ἔρημον θεά- Ψ e Ν 3 4 σασθαι; κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευ- ἀλλὰ τί ἐξήλθατε ; > Lal 2 a > / Opwrov ἰδεῖν ἐν μαλακοῖς ἠμφιεσμέ- ὄμενον ; av- ἰδοὺ of τὰ μαλακὰ φοροῦντες ἀλλὰ προφήτην ἰδεῖν ; ναὶ λέγω ὑμῖν, καὶ περισσότερον προφή- νον; 5 a " Ε , ἐν τοῖς οἴκοις τῶν βασιλέων. τί ἐξήλθατε; δ a ΄ του. οὗτός ἐστιν περὶ ου γεέγρα- πται"" ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω Ἂν + / Ν τὸν ἄγγελόν μου πρὸ προσ- , \ ὦπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει ἈΝ ε / 3, / τὴν ὁδόν σου ἔμπροσθέν σου. ἸῸΝ ΄ ἘΝ 3 3 ΄ 3 ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ ἐγήγερται ἐν lol lal 3 γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν μείζων ᾿Ιωάννου a ἴω , “~ τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ ὃ δὲ μικρότερος ἐν TH βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν μείζων αὐτοῦ > ’ > Ν Ν “ ς lal 3 ’ ἐστίν. ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ ἕως ἄρτι ἡ βασιλεία a > “- ,ἷ \ \ τῶν οὐρανῶν βιάζεται, Kat βιασταὶ ἁρπάζουσιν αὐτήν. πάντες γὰρ ot iol ΟΥ̓ ε 4, Ὁ 3 /, προφῆται Kal ὃ νόμος ews ᾿Ιωάννου / ἐπροφήτευσαν, καὶ εἰ θέλετε δέξα- / σθαι, αὐτός ἐστιν Ἡλείας 6 μέλλων + c com 4, 3 ᾿ ἔρχεσθαι. ὃ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκουέτω. Τίνι δὲ ὁμοιώσω τὴν γενεὰν ταῦ- ε 4 > Ν ig 4 τὴν ; ὁμοία ἐστὶν παιδίοις καθημένοις 8. 5 etc. Comp. Is. 85 : 5 sq.; 61 : 1 sq. © 14. Mal. 3 : 23 [4, 5). \ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 91 [Parr IV. LUKE VII. > ’ὔ id Ν 3 ‘ ἐχαρίσατο βλέπειν. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - πορευθέντες ἀπαγγεί- λατε Ἰωάννει ἃ εἴδετε καὶ ἠκούσατε, ὅτι τυφλοὶ ἀναβλέπουσιν, χωλοὶ περι- πατοῦσιν, λεπροὶ καθαρίζονται, κω- Ν φοὶ \ 3 ΄ a \ ΄ὔ πτωχόοι εὐαγγελίζονται Ἶ και μακα- ἀκούουσιν, νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται, ριός ἐστιν ὃς ἐὰν μὴ σκανδαλισθῇ ἐν ἐμοί. 3 fal ᾿Απελθόντων δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων Ἰωάν- 5, = , "ἢ εἶ ΝΜ νου ἤρξατο λέγειν πρὸς τοὺς ὄχλους περὶ Iwavvov: τί ἐξεληλύθατε εἰς τὴν 5» , , = Ν ἔρημον θεάσασθαι; κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον ; ἀλλὰ τί ἐξελη- λύθατε ἰδεῖν; ἄνθρωπον ἐν μαλακοῖς ε , 3 ta 2, Ἂς c > ἱματίοις ἠμφιεσμένον ; ἰδοὺ ot ἐν ε CP ὃ tS & Ν ast / ἱματισμῷ ἐνδόξῳ καὶ τρυφῇ ὑπάρχον- ἀλλὰ , * προφήτην ; ναὶ λέγω ὑμῖν, καὶ περισσότερον προ- φήτου. ται "Ὁ 5 aA ΄ ee 2 τες ἐν τοῖς βασιλείοις εἰσίν. τί ἐξεληλύθατε ἰδεῖν ; Rieti e ts Ὁ , οὗτός ἐστιν περὶ οὗ γέγραπ- Ἂν ἰδοὺ ἀποστέλλω τὸν 4 ἀγγελόν pov πρὸ προσώπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ε 4 3, , , 606v σου ἔμπροσθέν cov. λέ yo ὑμῖν, μείζων ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν ,ὕ 3 , 2 , > ς προφήτης Iwavvov οὐδείς ἐστιν: ὃ Ν i > tas », a“ δὲ μικρότερος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ μείζων αὐτοῦ ἐστίν. καὶ πᾶς ὃ λαὸς ἀκούσας καὶ οἱ τελῶναι ἐδικαίω- Ν t/ Ν σαν τὸν θεὸν, βαπτισθέντες τὸ βάπ- 3 / ε Ν “- Ν τισμα Ἰωάννου: οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ na , of νομικοὶ τὴν βουλὴν Tod θεοῦ ἠθέ- / Ν / τησαν εἰς ἑαυτούς, μὴ βαπτισθέντες ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. Τίνι οὖν ὁμοιώσω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, καὶ τίνι εἰσὶν ὅμοι- b 10 etc. Mal. 3:1. Le. 7: 24, 25, 26. ἐξεληλύθατε A (v. 26. A); ἐξήλθατε S A Β Ὁ 1, & Treg. West. Rev. Mt. 11:9. ἐξήλθατε; προφήτην ἰδεῖν ; S* BZ Treg.mg.; ἐξήλθατε ἰδεῖν; προφή- τὴν; SC D Treg.txt. Rev.mg. Le. 7 : 28. LE προφήτης A (D) vg; om SB cop [Treg.| West. Rev. Mt. 11:15. ὦτα BD Rev.mg.; add ἀκού- ew NC L [Treg.] Rev.txt. ᾿ § 44, 45, 46.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 45 MATT. XI. LUKE VII. 5» a 3 tal «Δ “ a Lid , 5 “4 Lal > > ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς, ἃ προσφωνοῦντα τοῖς 32 οἱ; ὅμοιοί εἰσιν παιδίοις τοῖς ἐν ayo- ε ve i] ΄' co 3 / Pa) sind a ΄ Ν [ἢ > 17 ἐπείροις εγουσέν ηὐλήσαμεν ὑμῖν, ρᾷ καθημένοις καὶ προσφωνοῦσιν ἀλ- 3 3 3 ἐδ ΄ / ΄ a kal οὐκ ὠρχήσασθε- ἐθρηνήσαμεν, λήλοις λέγοντες: ηὐλήσαμεν ὑμῖν Ν 3 / > > , 18 καὶ οὐκ ἐκόψασθε. ἦλθεν γὰρ Ἴω- καὶ οὐκ ὠρχήσασθε, ἐθρηνήσαμεν καὶ re ’ > ‘4 , la \ > > , > ΄ Ν 3 / dvvns μήτε ἐσθίων μήτε πίνων, καὶ 33 οὐκ ἐκλαύσατε. ἐλήλυθεν γὰρ Ἰωάν- , , 4 > AWA 19 λέγουσιν: δαιμόνιον ἔχει. ἦλθεν ὁ νης ὃ βαπτιστὴς μὴ ἐσθίων ἄρτον oN “Ὁ 3 ,ὔ 5 δὰ Ἂν 4 Ἂν 4 > XN / ΄ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐσθίων καὶ πίνων, μηδὲ πίνων οἶνον, καὶ λέγετε > δαιμό- Ν Ἷ ε lal Kat λέγουσιν - ἰδοὺ ἄνθρωπος φάγος 34 νιον ἔχει. ἐλήλυθεν ὃ vids τοῦ ἀν- Ν > / cal / Ν 7. > ’, ‘\ Ἂ Ν » καὶ οἰνοπότης, τελωνῶν φίλος καὶ θρώπου ἐσθίων καὶ πίνων, καὶ λέγετε" ε a Ni" 13 is ¢ , 3 \ »* ΄ Ν > ΄ ἁμαρτωλῶν. καὶ ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἰδοὺ ἄνθρωπος φάγος καὶ οἰνοπότης, 3 KY fol 4 ee , lal \ ε lad Ν ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων αὐτῆς. 85 φίλος τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν. καὶ > / ε - 3 Ν lal / 3 Ν / ἐδικαιώθη y σοφία απὸ των τεκνὼν AUTYS πάντων. § 45. Reflections of Jesus on appealing to his mighty Works. —Capernaum ? Matt. XI. 20-30. , »” ΄ - a ’ 20 Tore ἤρξατο ὀνειδίζειν τὰς πόλεις ἐν αἷς ἐγένοντο ai πλεῖσται δυνάμεις αὐτοῦ, μὲ , “ a ‘\ 21 ὅτι ov μετενόησαν - oval σοι Xopaletv, οὐαί σοι Βηθσαϊδάν, ὃτι εἰ ἐν 'Γύρῳ καὶ δῶ Ἂν Ὁ Ὁ, ε ὃ ΄ὔ ε ΄ 2 Cyn / a > ΄ Ν δῶ Σιδῶνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν ἐν σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ 22 / λὴ We Θὰ δὶ Ty, t Σιδῶ 3 ΄ yj 2 ἡμέρα. κρί- μετενόησαν. πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρί 23 σεως ἢ ὑμῖν. καὶ σὺ Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ ; ἕως ἄδου κατα- 9 “Μη p 151)": ¢ ’ Lf 1 155, / 2 ΄ ε / ε ΄ > , βιβασθήσῃ, ὅτι εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις at γενόμεναι ἐν cot, 24 ἔμεινεν ἂν μέχρι τῆς σήμερον. πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι γῇ Σοδόμων ἀνεκτότερον μ μέχρι τῆς σήμερον. πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι γῇ Yoddpwv ἀνεκτότερ 4 > ε / 4 Ἂ ,ὔ ἔσται ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως ἢ σοί. 25 “Ev ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἀποκριθεὶς 6 ᾿Τησοῦς εἶπεν - ἐξομολογοῦμαί σοι πάτε υ τῷ ρῷ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν - ἐξομολογοῦμαί Py 4 cal a“ an 7 3, “-“ r “~ κύριε τοῦ οὐρανοῦ Kal τῆς γῆς, OTL ἔκρυψας ταῦτα ἀπὸ σοφῶν Kal συνετῶν, καὶ 3 4 aS / Sy (Ὁ ΄ μι 7 > , » 4 ” 26 ἀπεκάλυψας αὐτὰ νηπίοις. vat ὃ πατήρ, ὅτι οὕτως εὐδοκία ἐγένετο ἔμπρο- ΄ ΄ 4 CREAN a / \ > \ > , Ν 27 σθέν σου. ἸΙάντα μοι παρεδόθη ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός μου, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐπιγινώσκει τὸν εν 3 ἈΝ ε / 3QX \ , > / > ‘ ε εν Ss x υἱὸν εἰ μὴ ὃ πατήρ, οὐδὲ τὸν πατέρα τις ἐπιγινώσκει εἰ μὴ ὃ υἱὸς καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν 4 ε ‘\ , A nr 28 βούληται ὃ vids ἀποκαλύψαι. Δεῦτε πρός με πάντες οἱ κοπιῶντες καὶ πεφορτι- ,ὔ > Ν 9 , τ ε “-“ ΕΣ Ν , > ay cal Ν , > > 29 σμένοι, κἀγὼ ἀναπαύσω ὑμᾶς. ἄρατε τὸν ζυγόν μου ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς καὶ μάθετε ἀπ' Bd BA \ a - a ἐμοῦ, OTL πραὔς εἶμι καὶ ταπεινὸς TH καρδίᾳ, καὶ εὑρήσετε ἀνάπαυσιν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ε a ε Ν ΄ Ν Ν Ν , > / > 30 ὑμῶν. ὁ yap ζυγός μου χρηστὸς καὶ τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν. § 46. While sitting at meat with a Pharisee, Jesus is anointed by a Woman who had been a Sinner. — Capernaum ? Luxe VII. 36-50. 3 lal / a Ν Ν 3 86 ἨἨρόώτα δέτις αὐτὸν τῶν Φαρισαίων ἵνα φάγῃ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς lal > a / 37 τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Φαρισαίου κατεκλίθη. καὶ ἰδοὺ γυνὴ ἥτις ἣν ἐν τῇ πόλει ἅμαρτω- Le. 7: 89. λέγοντες DL; λέγοντα SE; Mt.11:19. ἔργων δὴ B* cop; τέκνων B? καὶ λέγουσιν A; ἃ λέγει S* B West. Rey. C Ὁ vg Treg.mg. Rev.mg. 23 κατα- 88 μὴ SBE; μήτε A D L Treg. | μηδὲ βιβασθήσῃ δὰ C al cop syrr Rey.mg. ; κατᾶ- δὰ; μήτε AB DLE Treg. West. Bhon B Dit vg Treg. West. Rev.txt. 46 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. LUKE VII. , Ἄν a 9 / > a ee a , {3 9 ΄ λός, καὶ ἐπιγνοῦσα ὅτι κατάκειται ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Φαρισαίου, κομίσασα ἀλάβα- cal / A “ 88 στρον μύρου ' καὶ στᾶσα ὀπίσω παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ κλαίουσα τοῖς δάκρυσιν /, lal Ν lal Ν nA a ἤρξατο βρέχειν τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ Kal ταῖς θριξὶν τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς ἐξέμαξεν, ~ Ny, Lod 4 39 καὶ κατεφίλει τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ καὶ ἤλειφεν TO μύρῳ. ἰδὼν δὲ ὃ Φαρισαῖος ὃ ré Cle, i. 5» ε An re τ Ὁ Ν ty oy Swe. Ν ’ὔ καλέσας αὐτὸν εἶπεν ἐν ἑαυτῷ λέγων - οὗτος εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν av τίς - 7 / 40 καὶ ποταπὴ ἡ γυνὴ ἥτις ἅπτεται αὐτοῦ, OTL ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς Rae: lal 3 ἂν > , Nw 4 ” ’, 3 “ c ὃ / ὃ ὃ PA > ’ ὃ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν - Σίμων, ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν. ὃ δέ: διδάσκαλε, εἰπέ, > a e 41 φησίν. δύο χρεοφειλέται ἦσαν δανιστῇ τινί: ὁ εἷς ὦφειλεν δηνάρια πεντα- . / n -“ 42 κόσια, ὃ δὲ ἕτερος πεντήκοντα. μὴ ἐχόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἀποδοῦναι, ἀμφοτέροις 3 / is > ΕΟ a > » ἀπ ον [ 3 \ / - 43 ἐχαρίσατο. τίς οὖν αὐτῶν πλεῖον ἀγαπήσει αὐτόν ; | ἀποκριθεὶς Σίμων εἶπεν" ε ἐ 7 a ‘\ “ 5 , ε ἊΝ > > “Ὁ > a“ ” ! Ν 44 ὑπολαμβάνω ὅτι ᾧ τὸ πλεῖον ἐχαρίσατο. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ὀρθῶς ἔκρινας. | καὶ Ν Ἂ Ν A Lol / Bs 4 ’ Ν a στραφεὶς πρὸς THY γυναῖκα τῷ Σίμωνι ἔφη - βλέπεις ταύτην τὴν γυναῖκα ; εἰσῆλ- ra > Ἂν Ba 4 WA eS ‘\ ‘> > ΕΣ 7 Ων “ , θόν cov εἰς THY οἰκίαν, ὕδωρ μου ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας οὐκ ἔδωκας - αὕτη δὲ τοῖς δάκρυ- ny , ‘\ “-“ Ν cal 45 ow ἔβρεξέν μου τοὺς πόδας καὶ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς ἐξέμαξεν. φίλημά μοι οὐκ ἔδωκας - αὕτη δὲ ἀφ᾽ ἧς εἰσῆλθον οὐ διέλειπεν καταφιλοῦσά μου τοὺς πόδας. ’, Ἂς ΄ > 3 4 x 4 ” (A Ν / 46 ἐλαίῳ τὴν κεφαλήν μου οὐκ ἤλειψας - αὕτη δὲ μύρῳ ἡλειψέν μου τοὺς πόδας. e / ¢ > / iS 2 PR iss ὩΣ ε ν» Ὁ > Ἃ ’ 47 οὗ χάριν, λέγω σοι, ἀφέωνται αὐτῆς αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί, ὅτι ἠγάπησεν πολύ" ᾧ δὲ ὀλίγον ἀφίεται, ὀλί i ἃ, εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῇ - ade ( ἱ ἃ ( 48 ᾧ δὲ ὀλίγ ίεται, ὀλίγον ἀγαπᾷ. εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῇ - ἀφέωνταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι. + , e / ay 49 καὶ ἤρξαντο οἱ συνανακείμενοι λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς - τίς οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃς καὶ Gpap- Ν a ’ὔ / 12 4 50 tias ἀφίησιν ; ‘eirev δὲ πρὸς THY γυναῖκα" 7 πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε, πορεύου 3 > , εἰς εἰρήνην. § 47. Jesus, with the Twelve, makes a second Circuit in Galilee. Luxe VIII. 1-3. 1 Kai ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς καὶ αὐτὸς διώδευεν κατὰ πόλιν καὶ κώμην κηρύσ- σων καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενος τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ οἱ δώδεκα σὺν αὐτῷ, ' καὶ γυναῖκές τινες αἱ ἦσαν τεθεραπευμέναι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων πονηρῶν καὶ ἀσθενειῶν, 8 Μαρία ἡ καλουμένη Μαγδαληνή, ἀφ᾽ ἧς δαιμόνια ἑπτὰ ἐξεληλύθει, ' καὶ “Iwavva Ν hie. Lif ες 60 Ν / Ἂς Ψ DD, i / ν ὃ , γυνὴ Xovla ἐπιτρόπου “Hpwdov καὶ Σουσάννα καὶ ἕτεραι πολλαΐ, αἵτινες διηκο- a ace he , akan VOUV αὐτοῖς ἐκ Των πυπαρχόντων αυταις. § 48. The Healing of a Demoniac. The Scribes and Pharisees blaspheme. — Galilee. Marx III. 20-30. OA 4 3 > \ / ΄ 3, σ x δύ θ 3 Ν 20 Kai ἔρχεται εἰς οἶκον - καὶ συνέρχεται πάλιν ὄχλος, στε μὴ δύνασθαι αὑτοὺς “-“ a lol lol / 21 μήτε ἄρτον φαγεῖν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες of παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐξῆλθον κρατῆσαι αὐτόν " ἔλεγον γὰρ ὅτι ἐξέστη. Le. 7:89. προφήτης NADL; Ρῃ ὁ ΒΞ Mc. 3: 20. ὄχλος S* C L*; pm SCAB Treg.mg. [West.] Revy.mg. D Leorr. A Treg. {| West.] Rev. | μήτε SCD; 45 διέλειπεν S A West.mg.; διέλιπεν Β μηδὲ A BLA Treg. West. Rev. D Treg. West.txt. §§ 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 47, 48,] UNTIL THE THIRD. Marr. XII. 22-37. Tore προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζό- μενος τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός: καὶ ἐθερά-᾽ > / . Ἂν ‘\ “ πευσεν αὑτὸν, ὥστε τὸν κωφὸν λαλεῖν καὶ βλέπειν. οἱ ὄχλοι καὶ ἐλεγον " μήτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ ἊΝ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες υἱὸς Δαυείδ; οἱ ΜῈ Ὁ > > εἶπον - οὗτος οὐκ ἐκ- βάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ apxorrt τῶν δαιμονίων. 9. Ν Ν ‘ > ΄ὔ εἰδὼς δὲ τὰς ἐνθυμή- σεις αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐὖ- τοῖς " πᾶσα βασιλεία tes | ? ε μερισθεῖσα καθ᾽ éav- τῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶ- / Xv Ruse σα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερι- Lal Get isl > σθεῖσα καθ᾽ ἑαυτῆς οὐ 4 εν ΓΟ σταθήσεται. καὶ εἰ ὃ σατανᾶς τὸν σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλει, ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν > ’ ἐμερίσθη - , c σταθήσεται ἣ βασι- 4 > “a λεία αὐτοῦ ; a > πως ουν MATT. XII. \ sf/ 4 καὶ ἐξίσταντο πάντες 22 28 24 25 26 14 MARK III. \ a καὶ Ol γραμματεῖς ot > ΜΕ ΄’ὔ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων κα- ταβάντες ἔλεγον ὅτι δ Βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει, καὶ ὅτι ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια. καὶ προσ- / > ἣν > καλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς ἔλεγεν av- τοῖς - πῶς δύναται σα- τανᾶς σατανᾶν ἐκβάλ- ew; καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, > , a“ ε οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ ¢ > tA \ βασιλεία ἐκείνη. καὶ ἌΝ ὌΝ 3.15 ε Ν ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ΄ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ε > / > A nn ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆς- ναι. καὶ εἰ ὃ σατανᾶς 5 ᾽ὔ > Φ 8 he > ἀνέστη ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν, ἐμε- 1ὅ 17 18 41 ume, ἈΠ 14515. 17-93. a > 4 Καὶ ἣν ἐκβάλλων δαιμόνιον, καὶ 3 \ > / > / Xx A“ αὐτὸ ἣν κωφὸν - ἐγένετο δὲ τοῦ δαιμο- νίου ἐξελθόντος ἐλάλη- σεν ὃ κωφός. καὶ > , ε μὲ ἐθαύμασαν οἱ ὄχλοι - τινὲς δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν εἷ- ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ A ” - τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαι- ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια * — αὐτὸς δὲ πον" ΄, μόνιων 95. Ν > lal Ν , εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὰ διανοή- 5 - ματα εἶπεν αὐτοῖς * πᾶσα βασιλεία διαμε- ρισθεῖσα ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὴν ἐρημοῦται, καὶ οἶκος ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει. εἰ Ν Ἂν ε cal > | δὲ καὶ ὃ σατανᾶς ἐφ e Ἂν 4 Lal ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη, πῶς σταθήσεται ἣ βασιλεία > n Ψ , > αὐτοῦ; ὅτι λέγετε ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλειν με τὰ δαιμόνια. ρίσθη, καὶ οὐ δύναται στῆναι ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει. LUKE XI. καὶ εἰ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ 19 εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ , ε αὐδὰν τ σι τὰ > ’ὔ 3 , δαιμόνια, οἱ viol ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλ- λουσιν ; διὰ τοῦτο αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσον- ε nw > yee 4 σαὶ Ss Ἂς ε “Ὁ ται ὕμων. εἰ δὲ ἐν πνεύματι. θεοῦ eyo 20 ται ὕὑμων. ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἡ βασιλεία -“ cal a n , τοῦ θεοῦ. ἢ πῶς δύ- ’ ΕἸ a“ > vaTat τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ \ Ν 2: > noe καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ap- MARK III. 27 ἀλλ᾽ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυ- “a > Ν Ἄν. ΄ ροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη 21 / ε ay ε lal 3 ’ > ΄ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλ- Ἂς lal 3 ‘ Nt Aovow ; διὰ τοῦτο αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσον- εἰ δὲ ἐν δακτύλῳ θεοῦ ἐκβαλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ. Ὅταν ὃ ἰσχυρὸς καθ- ὡπλισμένος φυλάσσῃ ἣν ε a > 4 > τὴν ἑαυτοῦ αὐλήν, ἐν Mt. 12:22. προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμε- vos τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός ὃ C D it vg West.mg. ; προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενον τυφλὸν καὶ κωφόν B cop syrr Treg.mg. West.txt. καὶ αὐτὸ ἣν AC7™ C vg; om Le. 11:14. Le. 11: 20. δ A* B L cop Treg.|txt.] et mg. West. Rev. Me. 8 : 26. ἐμερίσθη καὶ S* C* Vid A veg; καὶ μεμέρισται A C2 cop syrr Treg.txt.; καὶ ἐμερίσθη Se BL Treg.mg. West. Rey. ἐκβάλλω S* A; pm (ante ἐν D) ἐγὼ δὰ B C DL [Treg.] [West.] Rev. 48 MATT. XII. πάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον iA / δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν, καὶ ’ Ν 5 4 > “a τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ , ε “Ὁ. διαρπάσῃ; ὃ μὴ ov FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER MARK III. ΕἸ a / 38 αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν “-“ Ν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν ἊΝ ‘\ / x δήσῃ, Kal τότε τὴν οἱ- [Parr ΙΓ. LUKE XI. 3). ἢ 3 to Ν « 4 εἰρηνῃ ἐστίν τὰ ὑπάρ- 22 χοντα αὐτοῦ: ἐπὰν δὲ ε 3 ΄ 3 a oO ἰσχυρότερος αυτου ΄ > a ΄ 3 \ , - κιαν αὐτου διαρπάσει. ἐπελθὼν ΝνιΚΉσὮ QuTOY, 2 > a DD a 3 ‘ , > a 30 μετ΄ ἐμοῦ KAT ἐμοῦ ἐ- τὴν πανοπλίαν αὐτοῦ , Ne Ν ΄ y+ SFI Re! £5 , ‘ Ν a > a OTL καὶ ὁ μὴ συνάγων αἴρει ἐφ᾽ ἡ ἐπεποίθει, καὶ τὰ σκῦλα αὐτοῦ δια- 3.4.5 a , x \ a a ’ μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει. 28 διδωσιν. ὁ μὴ dv μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἐστίν, ae ἧς ΄ Pa Le) ’ὔ καὶ ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ ἐμοῦυ σκορπίζει. MARK III. A “Ὁ , δ᾽ nw ε “ 81 Διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν, πᾶσα ἅμαρ- 28 ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πάντα ἀφεθή- "Δ Ν / > / “ τία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς > 4 ε Ἂς A , ἀνθρώποις, ἡ δὲ τοῦ πνεύματος βλασ- ἁμαρτήματα καὶ at βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ’ὔ 9 3 , Ν a . 32 φημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται. καὶ ὃς ἐὰν 29 ἂν βλασφημήσωσιν - ὃς δ᾽ ἂν βλασ- εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώ- Tad ns rn 4 ΟΥ̓ σεται τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὰ a Ν φημήσῃ εἰς τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, οὐκ 3 ΄ SN a) 2 oN ” a που, ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπῃ ἔχει ἄφεσιν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἀλλὰ ἔνοχος Ν an -“ cal ΓΙΑ) κατὰ TOV πνεῦματος τοῦ ἁγίου, οὐκ 80 ἔσται αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος. ὅτι ἔλε- 5 / > fal + > 4 lel a ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ οὔτε ἐν τούτῳ τῷ γον - πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει. αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι. \ , \ , a ΄ ΠῚ , x 88 Ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλόν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν, ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ / iA Ν a cal / δένδρον σαπρόν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν: ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ τὸ δένδρον ’ ͵ὔ > ~ a , > Ν a \ » > 34 γινώσκεται. γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν, πῶς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ λαλεῖν πονηροὶ ὄντες; ἐκ ἊΝ ον , a / Ν , lal Cee) x + 3 a 35 yap τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας TO στόμα λαλεῖ. ὃ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ TOD 9 x ἴω > / ‘ > ’ Ve Ν » 3 “A a ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει τὰ ἀγαθά, καὶ ὃ πονηρὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ lal a an ay 7 ε 86 θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει πονηρά. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτι πᾶν ῥῆμα ἀργὸν ὃ λαλήσουσιν οἵ , a / 87 ἄνθρωποι, ἀποδώσουσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ λόγον ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως. ἐκ yap τῶν λόγων , Ne GE) la , ΄ σου δικαιωθήσῃ;, καὶ ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου καταδικασθήσῃ. § 49. The Scribes and Pharisees seek a Sign. Our Lord’s Reflections.— Galilee. Matt. XII. 38—45. , / “ “ 88 Τότε ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ τινὲς τῶν 16 Luke ΧΙ. 16, 24-26, 29-36. "Erepo. δὲ πειράζοντες σημεῖον ἐξ / Ν ΄, ΄ 3 mA 2497 > > a γραμματέων καὶ Φαρισαίων λέγοντες " οὐρανοῦ ἐζήτουν παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ. --- / , > Ν lal a διδάσκαλε, θέλομεν ἀπὸ σοῦ σημεῖον > 5 a , » 89 ἰδεῖν. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς: 29 Τῶν δὲ ὄχλων ἐπαθροιζομένων ἤρξα- ’ το λέγειν - ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη γενεὰ πονηρά lal δι Ν a 3 ἐστιν" σημεῖον ζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὗ γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται 9 Lal 5 Ἂς Ν bad > n cal , 3 “a > \ Ἂς a Ἢ] αὐτῇ εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον ᾿Ιωνᾶ τοῦ προ- δοθήσεται αὐτῇ εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἴω- Α id \ - 3 aA 3 a a \ Ν 59 'Ὦ 3 a a οἵ 40 φήτου. ὅσπερ γὰρ ἣν ᾿Ιωνᾶς ἐν τῇ 80 νᾶ. καθὼς γὰρ ings es dss ΄ a ΄ A , A κοιλίᾳ τοῦ κήτους τρεῖς ἡμέρας Kal Νινενείταις σημεῖον," οὕτως ἔσται καὶ O - a “ , a cal , τρεῖς νύκτας," οὕτως ἔσται ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ. ---- ἃ 40 ete. Jon. 2:1 [1:17.] Mt. 12:29. διαρπάσῃ SD; διαρπάσει Β ἁμαρτήματος S BL A 33; ἁμαρτίας C*vid Ὁ CL Treg. West. (ἰσχυρόν ; — διαρπάσει.) vg cop Treg.mg.; κρίσεως A C? syrr. Mc. 3:29. ἔσται δὰ DLA33 Treg. mg.; Mt. 12:35. τὰ ἀγαθά S C West.mg. ; om ἐστιν A BC cop syrr Treg.txt. West. Rev. | τὰ Β D Treg. West.txt. Rev. §§ 41 42 43 45 27 49, 50.] MATT. XII. 3 θ fi > aA δί an a a ἀνθρώπου ἐν TH καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς τρεῖς ε [4 Ἂς ta] ΄ » ᾧ Τ ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας. ἄνδρες Νι- Ὁ re tal νευεῖται ἀναστήσονται ἐν TH κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης καὶ κατακρι- c¢ \ νοῦσιν αὐτήν, OTL μετενόησαν εἰς TO WA 3 aa ἊΣ 90 Ν, a 3 A κήρυγμα Iwva,” καὶ ἰδοὺ πλεῖον Llwva 33 ade. ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης / /, > , βασίλισσα νότου ἐγερθήσεται καὶ κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν, ὅτι ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν Σολομῶνος," καὶ ἰδοὺ πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε. UNTIL THE THIRD. 32 31 99 49 LUKE ΧΙ. Ε al > ba > ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται ἀναστήσονται ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης καὶ nm / ov κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν " ὅτι μετενόησαν 3 \ ΄ > Aa L904 a eis TO κήρυγμα ᾿Ιωνᾶ," καὶ ἰδοὺ πλεῖον 3 a ΤᾺ ΄ , > Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε. --- βασίλισσα νότου éyep- “ / Cal θήσεται ἐν TH κρίσει μετὰ τῶν ἀν- “ lal lal , Ν δρῶν τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης καὶ κατακρι- Lal 7 3 “ νεῖ αὐτούς - ὅτι ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων TyS μῶνος," καὶ ἰδοὺ πλεῖον Ξολομῶνος Led 9 γῆς ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν Soo- ὧδε. --- Οὐδεὶς λύχνον ἅψας εἰς κρυπτὴν / SQN € Ν Ἂ / > 3.1.4. Ν tA 2 ε 5 ΄ τίθησιν οὐδὲ ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν, ἵνα οἱ εἰσπορευόμενοι 94 τὸ φέγγος βλέπωσιν. '6 λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν 6 ὀφθαλμός. ὅταν ε > 4 ε a > Ν Ld Ν a ΄ 4 > ὃ ὀφθαλμός cov ἁπλοῦς ἢ, Kal ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου φωτεινόν ἐστιν " 35 36 Ws \ ΄ > ΄ TO €V σοι OKOTOS ἐστιν. 3 Ν Ν Ν > ἊΝ Ν ἴω ΄ 4 eT av δὲ TOVYHPOS Ἢ; Καὶ τὸ σωμα TOV σκοτείνον. ! ΄ > Ν Ν a σκόπει οὖν μὴ TO φῶς 3 > ‘ a a με , Nu εἰ οὖν TO σῶμά σου ὅλον φωτεινόν, μὴ ἔχον , ΄ " a vy ε Ο ε > κὰν ὦ a τι μέρος σκοτεινόν, ἐσται φωτεινὸν ὅλον ὡς ὁταν ὃ λύχνος τῇ ἀστραπῇ A “- Ὅταν δὲ τὸ ἀκάθαρτον πνεῦμα ἐξέλθῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, διέρχεται δι’ ἀνύδρων τόπων ζητοῦν ἀνάπαυσιν, x > ε / / / > καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκει. τότε Eye εἰς 4 “ τὸν οἶκόν μου ἐπιστρέψω ὅθεν ἐξῆλ- θον. \ καὶ σεσαρωμένον Kal κεκοσμημένον. καὶ ἐλθὸν εὑρίσκει σχολάζοντα τότε πορεύεται καὶ παραλαμβάνει μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ ἑπτὰ ἕτερα πνεύματα πονηρό- Tepa ἑαυτοῦ, καὶ εἰσελθόντα κατοικεῖ ἐκεῖ, καὶ γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα τοῦ ἀν- θρώπου ἐκείνου χείρονα τῶν πρώτων. οὕτως ἔσται καὶ τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ τῇ πονηρᾷ. 24 25 26 φωτίζῃ oe. — i] Ἶ 7 ovo) , Lal 54 Οταν τὸ ἀκάθαρτον πνεῦμα ἐξέλθῃ 5 Ὁ Lal > , , 9 > , ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, διέρχεται dv ἀνύ- ὅρων τόπων ζητοῦν ἀνάπαυσιν, καὶ A (4 vd Δ ¢ / > μὴ εὑρίσκον λέγει: ὑποστρέψω εἰς > 7 “- Ν τὸν οἶκόν μου ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον. καὶ ἐλ- θὸν εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κε- κοσμημένον. τότε πορεύεται καὶ παραλαμβάνει ἕτερα πνεύματα πονη- , ε Ae / \ > λθό ρότερα ἑαυτοῦ ἑπτά, καὶ εἰσελθόντα κατοικεῖ ἐκεῖ, καὶ γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου χείρονα τῶν πρώτων. § 50. The true Disciples of Christ his nearest Relatives. — Galilee. Luke XI. 27, 28. ϑ' NYS al , > Xv a > ΄ , Ν Ν 3 am *Eyévero δὲ εν To λέγειν QUTOV ταυτὰ ἐπάαρᾶσα τις φωνὴν γυνή εκ του ὄχλου ι, J 3 a , ε 4 ε ie 4, Ν Ν « 3 , εἶπεν αὐτῷ: μακαρία ἡ κοιλία ἣ βαστάσασά σε καὶ μαστοὶ οὺς ἐθήλασας. ἃ 41 οἰο. Jon. 3: 4, 5. Mt. 12:44. καὶ sc 8 C* Zvid syrr ; om Β ΟΞ Ὁ L cop Treg. [West.| Rev. Le. 11: 38. φέγγος A 1, Treg.mg.; φῶς 4 b 42 etc. 1K. 10:1 sq. SBC Ὁ Treg.txt. West. Rev. 25 εὑρίσ- κει S* A D; add σχολάζοντα S BC Lop [Treg.mg.] [West.] 50 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. LUKE XI. 28 αὐτὸς δὲ εἶπεν - μενοῦν μακάριοι οἱ ἀκούοντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Kal φυλάσ- σοντες. Mart. XII. 46-50. Marx III. 31-35. Luxe VIII. 19-21. 46 “Ere αὐτοῦ λαλοῦν- 31 Καὶ ἔρχεται ἣ μήτηρ 19 Ilapeyévero δὲ πρὸς a »” so Ὁ > Aa \ ε 5 Ν 3 \ c UA > a“ TOS τοῖς ὄχλοις, ἰδοὺ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὑτὸν 4 μήτηρ αὐτοῦ i ἐξ Ν ε 39 3 cal MA oe , ‘ ε iO / > lal ἡ μήτηρ καὶ ol ἀδελ- αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔξω στήκον- καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί αὐτοῦ, φοὶ αὐτοῦ εἱστήκεισαν τες ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς καὶ οὐκ ἠδύναντο συν- ἔξω ζητοῦντες αὐτῷ αὐτὸν καλοῦντες αὐτόν. τυχεῖν αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν 47 λαλῆσαι. [εἶπεν δέ 82 καὶ ἐκάθητο περὶ αὐ- ὄχλον. : lal / 4 τις αὐτῷ ἰδοὺ ἡ μή- τόν ὄχλος, καὶ λέγου- 20 ἀπηγγέλη δὲ Ἂν {But} bers 3 “ 4 io Ἂς ε , 3 no ε ΤᾺ THP TOV καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σιν αὑτῳ " ἰδοὺ ἢ μη- αὐτῷ OTL ἢ PYTHP σου We ‘\ » σου ἔξω ἑστήκασιν ζη- THP TOV καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἑσ- A an ‘\ > r τοῦντές σοι λαλῆσαι. | σου καὶ αἱ ἀδελφαί σου τήκασιν ἔξω ἰδεῖν σε 48 6 δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν 33 ἔξω ζητοῦσίν ce. καὶ 21 θέλοντες. ὃ δὲ ἀπο- a ΄ὔ + Yen ΄,ὕ 5 6 \ 3 a x / 0 Ν > Ν 3 τῷ λέγοντι αὐτῷ τίς ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέ- κριθεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὖ- ἐστιν 1) μήτηρ μου, καὶ yeu τίς ἐστιν ἣ μήτηρ τούς " τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ ἀδελφοί μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί 49 μου; καὶ ἐκτείνας τὴν 84 μου; καὶ ππεριβλεψάμε- χεῖρα ἐπὶ τοὺς μαθητὰς νος τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν κύ- αὐτοῦ εἶπεν - ἰδοὺ ἡ κλῳ καθημένους λέγει * 1) ὃ oi NEY , Ν a) ΕΣ ε , Ν e μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελ- ἴδε ἣ μήτηρ μου καὶ Ob 60 doi pov: ὅστις γὰρ ἂν ἀδελφοί μου. yd \ ᾽ὔ a a Ἃ la Ν ποιησῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ 8 ος ἂν PyTNP μου καὶ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν Ov- ποιήσῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ ἀδελφοί μου οὗτοί εἰ- a aA Ὁ / a pavots, αὐτός μου ἀδελ- θεοῦ, οὗτος ἀδελφός σιν οἱ τὸν λόγον τοῦ φὸς καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μου καὶ ἀδελφή μου θεοῦ ἀκούοντες καὶ ποι- μήτηρ ἐστίν. καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν. ovvTes. § 51. Ata Pharisee’s Table, Jesus denounces Woes against the Pharisees and others. [Comp. ὃ 123.]— Galilee. Luxe XI. 37-54. > aA ἃς κ᾿ Ψ = 8] Ἔν δὲ τῷ λαλῆσαι ἐρωτᾷ αὐτὸν Φαρισαῖος ὅπως ἀριστήσῃ παρ᾽ αὐτῷ εἰσελ- 88 θὼν δὲ ἀνέπεσεν. ὃ δὲ Φαρισαῖος ἰδὼν ἐθαύμασεν ὅτι οὐ πρῶτον ἐβαπτίσθη Ν ey, 53 oe ΄, Ν Si” ee, lal ε tal ε “ ν Μὰ 89 πρὸ τοῦ ἀρίστου. εἶπεν δὲ 6 κύριος πρὸς αὐτόν - νῦν ὑμεῖς οἱ Φαρισαῖοι τὸ ἔξω- θεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τοῦ πίνακος καθαρίζετε, τὸ δὲ ἔσωθεν ὑμῶν γέμει ἁρπαγῆς Ν , ες 3 ε ΄ Ν 3, Ν a 3} > ,ὔ 40 καὶ πονηρίας. ἄφρονες, οὐχ ὃ ποιήσας τὸ ἔξωθεν καὶ τὸ ἔσωθεν ἐποίησεν ; Μο. 8:81. ἔρχεται δὴ 1) ; ἔρχονται ABC Mc. 8: 82. καὶ αἱ ἀδελφαί σου A D [Treg. L A vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. mg.] West.mg.; om S BC L A vg cop Treg. Le. 8:19. αὐτοῦ ppS Dcop; om A BL txt. West.txt. Rev. = vg Tree. West. Rey. 33 μου sc S A C LA vg cop syrr; om B Mt. 12: 47. εἶπεν --- λαλῆσαι S*C DZ Ds [Treg.] West. 35 ds B cop; vg cop syrr [Tisch.] West.mg.; om δὰ" BL add yap δὰ AC DLAal omn vg syrr [Treg.] West.txt. Rev.mg. West.mg. Rev. §§ 51, 52.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 51 / LUKE XI. \ Me see , "πὶ 41 42 Ἱπλὴν τὰ ἐνόντα δότε ἐλεημοσύνην, καὶ ἰδοὺ πάντα καθαρὰ ὑμῖν ἐστίν. ἀλλὰ Κλ ἐσ a) a μὲ a ovat ὑμῖν τοῖς Φαρισαίοις, ὅτι ἀποδεκατοῦτε τὸ ἡδύοσμον Kal τὸ πήγανον καὶ ΄ \ ΄, \ \ A A τὸ Υ πᾶν λάχανον, καὶ παρέρχεσθε τὴν κρίσιν καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ θεοῦ - ταῦτα ἔδει a ἐν Ν A \ A a Ξ 48 ποιῆσαι κἀκεῖνα μὴ παρεῖναι. οὐαὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς Φαρισαίοις, ὅτι ἀγαπᾶτε τὴν πρω- , a a Ν - lal 44 τοκαθεδρίαν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς Kal τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς. οὐαὶ eon 7 > We x a ἊΨ. ν᾿ Nig es of ε A ey ὑμῖν, OTL ἐστὲ WS TA μνημεῖα TA ἄδηλα, Kal οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ περιπατοῦντες ἐπάνω > οὐκ οἴδασιν. > Ν na lal , > - an a 45 Ἀποκριθεὶς δέ τις τῶν νομικῶν λέγει αὐτῷ - διδάσκαλε, ταῦτα λέγων Kal ἡμᾶς 6 / > Vick iv lal r o 46 ὑβρίζεις. 6 δὲ εἶπεν - καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς νομικοῖς οὐαί, ὅτι φορτίζετε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ’,ὔ 7 NG 3 δον lad ὃ ΄ eon 3 ΄ “ φορτία δυσβάστακτα, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἑνὶ τῶν δακτύλων ὑμῶν οὐ προσψαύετε τοῖς φορ- ΄ὕ \ a 9 a \ a ΓΞ κ \ a 47 τίοις. oval ὑμῖν, ὅτι οἰκοδομεῖτε τὰ μνημεῖα τῶν προφητῶν, Kal οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν ’, 3, , \ a a a 48 ἀπέκτειναν αὐτούς. dpa μάρτυρές ἐστε Kal συνευδοκεῖτε τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν πατέ- Sead Lf 3 Ν Ν 3 , > ΄ ε a Ν > a Ν γεν \ 49 ρων ὑμῶν, OTL αὐτοὶ μὲν ἀπέκτειναν αὐτούς, ὑμεῖς δὲ οἰκοδομεῖτε. διὰ τοῦτο καὶ Ἔ ’ Le. “A > > nw > > Ν , Ν > ’ ἣν > & ἢ σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ εἶπεν - ἀποστελῶ εἰς αὐτοὺς προφήτας καὶ ἀποστόλους, Kal ἐξ Δ᾽ “δὰ, 3 an 9 ὃ 4 Siege > “ Ν e , a 50 αὐτῶν ἀποκτενοῦσιν καὶ ἐκδιώξουσιν, | ἵνα ἐκζητηθῇ τὸ αἷμα πάντων τῶν προφη- a ἊΝ ΄ 3 Ν a , a - a 51 τῶν TO ἐκχυννόμενον ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταῦτης, | ἀπὸ αἵμα- 7 λ μ᾿ 7 Vf, ΄, a 5 ΄, ἐλ A = , \ τος Αβελ ἕως αἵματος Ζαχαρίου τοῦ ἀπολομένου μεταξὺ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου καὶ fal 4 <2 \ ΝΥ Lea 3 θή aN a “- ΄ SN δ των 52 τοῦ οἴκου" ναὶ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐκζητηθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς YEVEGS ταύτης. OVAL ὑμιν Lal Lal ῳ » ἴων Lal τοῖς νομικοῖς, OTL ἤρατε τὴν κλεῖδα τῆς γνώσεως - αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσήλθατε Kai τρὺς / εἰσερχομένους ἐκωλύσατε. ται > ΄ > na» ε a \ A a ὅ8 Κἀκεῖθεν ἐξελθόντος αὐτοῦ ἤρξαντο οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι δεινῶς > / Ὁ 5 ΄, 3 XN Ν Xi /, ! > ὃ Ἅ θ aA 4 > 54 ἐνέχειν καὶ ἀποστοματίζειν αὐτὸν περὶ πλειόνων, | ἐνεδρεύοντες θηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ / fal τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ. § 52. Jesus discourses to his Disciples and the Multitude. — Galilee. Luke XII. 1-59. Φ lal - 9 a g “ 1 Ἔν οἷς ἐπισυναχθεισῶν τῶν μυριάδων τοῦ ὄχλου, ὥστε καταπατεῖν ἀλλήλους, ἤρξατο λέγειν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ πρῶτον - προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἀπὸ τῆς rn / a 2 ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων, ἥτις ἐστὶν ὑπόκρισις. οὐδὲν δὲ συγκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν ὃ \ δ. a 8 οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται. ἀνθ᾽ dv ὅσα ἐν TH σκο- Yi} ? Pp pf ] Ἷ / m4 > a Ν 3 / Va Ν Ν Φ 3 [4 > Ὁ 4 Tia εἴπατε, ἐν TO φωτὶ ἀκουσθήσεται, καὶ ὃ πρὸς TO οὖς ἐλαλήσατε ἐν τοῖς ταμεί- t 2 τ i} 2 ρ 1) a ΄ A A x 4 ows, κηρυχθήσεται ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων. Λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν τοῖς φίλοις pov, μὴ φοβη- A a a a , θῆτε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα μὴ ἐχόντων περισσότερόν “ - Ν Ν “ 5 τι ποιῆσαι. ὑποδείξω δὲ ὑμῖν τίνα φοβηθῆτε - φοβήθητε τὸν μετὰ τὸ ἀποκτεῖναι a 5 4 > a > Ν / Ν x , Φ᾽ δὰ a 46 ἔχοντα ἐξουσίαν ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τὴν γέενναν. vat λέγω ὑμῖν, τοῦτον φοβήθητε. ἅς ἂς , ΄ A 3 / δύ ν ἃ 36 JA 3 ” 3 Xr 6 οὐχὶ πέντε στρουθία πωλοῦνται ἀσσαρίων δύο; καὶ ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔστιν ἐπιλε- lal ἴων “ fal 6 ων a > η 7 λησμένον ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ. ' ἀλλὰ καὶ αἱ τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν πᾶσαι ἠρίθ- 8 μηνται. μὴ φοβεῖσθε: πολλῶν στρουθίων διαφέρετέ. ᾿ λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, πᾶς ὃς a ε 3 > 5 Ἄ Ὁ ΨΨ 0 lat > 0 , Wats ΕΝ a 3 0 / ε αν ὁμολογήσῃ €V €fLOL εμπροσ €V TWV ἂν ρώπων, καὶ ὁ VLOS TOV αἱ ρωπου ομο- 8.81. Gen. 4: 8; 2 Chr. 234 : 20 sq. Le. 11:42. ταῦτα S* AD; add δὲ δα BC δὲ αὐτοῦ ταῦτα πρὸς αὐτοὺς A D vg Treg.mg. L vg Treg. West. Rev. 53 κἀκεῖθεν West.me. 54 ἐνεδρεύοντες (om D) 8; ἐξελθόντος αὐτοῦ NS BC L383 cop; λέγοντος add αὐτὸν ABC Lyg syrr Treg. West. Rey. 52 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. LUKE XII. 9 Aoynoe ἐν αὐτῷ ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀγγέλων TOD θεοῦ" ὃ δὲ ἀρνησάμενό ἐνώ- γήσει ἐν αὐτῷ ἔμπρ 1 ρνησάμενός με ev ΡΥ Ὡς Ἂν A 7 χῶ 10 mov τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπαρνηθήσεται ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ πᾶς Os ieee , > \ εν ΤΥ , > , Sete: A κ᾿ 3 \ o¢ ᾿ ἐρεῖ λόγον εἰς τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ τῷ δὲ εἰς τὸ ἅγιον na , 7 a 11 πνεῦμα βλασηφμήσαντι οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται. ὅταν δὲ εἰσφέρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἐπὶ τὰς 4 lal συναγωγὰς Kal τὰς ἀρχὰς Kal τὰς ἐξουσίας, μὴ μεριμνήσητε πῶς ἢ τί ἀπολο- 12 γήσησθε ἢ τί εἴπητε: τὸ γὰρ ἅγιον πνεῦμα διδάξει ὑμᾶς ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἃ δεῖ γήσησθε ἢ τί εἴπητε" τὸ γὰρ ay εῦμ μᾶς ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἃ δεῖ εἰπεῖν. a 13: Hizey δέ τις ἐκ Tod ὄχλου αὐτῷ : διδάσκαλε, εἰπὲ TO ἀδελφῷ prov μερίσασθαι 14 μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ τὴν κληρονομίαν. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἄνθρωπε, τίς με κατέστησεν κρι- Ν vn \ Pm ey a 4 a 3 ! > δὲ Ni > , . δ ται ἈΝ λ , 6 > ἐν 15 τὴν ἢ μεριστὴν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς; | εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς - ὁρᾶτε καὶ φυλάσσεσθε ἀπὸ πάσης πλεονεξίας, ὅτι οὐκ ἐν τῷ περισσεύειν τινὶ ἣ Con αὐτοῦ ἐστὶν ἐκ τῶν ὗὑπαρ- a 3 > 16 χόντων aito. Εἶπεν δὲ παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγων - ἀνθρώπου τινὸς πλου- 17 σίου εὐφό ἡ χώ αἱ διελογίζετο ἐν ἑαυτῷ λέ ‘ τί ποιήσω, ὅτι οὐκ σίου εὐφόρησεν ἣ χώρα. καὶ διελογίζετο ἐν ἑαυτῷ λέγων " τί ποιήσω, ὅτι οὐ lal \ Φ aA , a 18 ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω τοὺς καρπούς μου ; ' καὶ εἶπεν - τοῦτο ποιήσω - καθελῶ μου τὰς - a ,ὔ Ἄ, ἀποθήκας καὶ μείζονας οἰκοδομήσω, καὶ συνάξω ἐκεῖ πάντα τὰ γενήματά μου καὶ ν᾿ 9 , NGS ταν, ki “ ᾿ 7 Tea SES \ , >» 19 τὰ ἀγαθά pov, 'Kal ἐρὼ τῇ ψυχῇ μου - ψυχή, ἔχεις πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα εἰς ἔτη > Ὁ 55 ΄ >” 20 πολλά - ἀναπαύου, φάγε, πίε, εὐφραίνου. εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὃ θεός - ἄφρων, ταὐτῇ “- Ν Ν ’, 5 an > ἈΝ en ς «Ὁ Ἂ Ge ᾽,ὔ ’,’ 3, ἊΨ Ι͂ 2 21 τῇ νυκτὶ τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν ἅπὸ σοῦ" ἃ δὲ ἡτοίμασας, τίνι ἔσται; | οὔ- τως ὃ θησαυρίζων αὐτῷ καὶ μὴ εἰς θεὸν πλουτῶν. feat © ὃ μὴ > \ \ κ᾿ θ \ > a, 8 N a ea NE N A A a 22 Hirer δὲ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ - διὰ τοῦτο ὑμῖν λέγω, μὴ μεριμνᾶτε τῇ ψυχῇ “ ΄ « Ν as > a a Ν 28 τί φάγητε, μηδὲ τῷ σώματι τί ἐνδύσησθε. ἡἣ ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστιν τῆς τροφῆς καὶ a - \ ΄ “ + ” 24 τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἐνδύματος. κατανοήσατε TOUS κόρακας, OTL οὔτε σπείρουσιν οὔτε , eo > 35, - 3QX 3 0 ’ Ἂς θ Ν 4 3 ΄ὔ ’ θερίζουσιν, οἷς οὐκ ἔστιν ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποθήκη, καὶ ὃ θεὸς τρέφει αὐτούς " πόσῳ a ε a / ἴω a / be 2¢ ε Fe ~ ὃ ΄ 25 μᾶλλον ὑμεῖς διαφέρετε τῶν πετεινῶν. τίς δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν μεριμνῶν δύναται προσ- la) aie Ν ε ’ > a a A 3 Φ poe ὅλ ΄ ὃ , 6 , Q 26 θεῖναι ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ πῆχυν ; εἰ οὖν οὐδὲ ἐλάχιστον δύνασθε, τί περὶ a a A (3 aA " ΄, + ε ΄ 27 τῶν λοιπῶν μεριμνᾶτε; κατανοήσατε τὰ κρίνα, πῶς οὔτε νήθει οὔτε ὑφαίνει" la Ἂς > ΄ “ δ > A , c a 4 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ περιεβάλετο ws ἕν τούτων. 5 a: > a Ν ” ΄ Ν + > , ΄, ε 28 εἰ δὲ ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον ὃ ἂν “ > ΄ , a ec an ὃλ Ν ε “ Ἀ ζ a ζ 29 θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει, πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς, ὀλιγόπιστοι. καὶ ὑμεῖς μὴ ζητεῖτε T “ Ἂν ¢ Ἂν 5 A ld 80 φάγητε καὶ τί πίητε, καὶ μὴ μετεωρίζεσθε. ταῦτα yap πάντα τὰ ἐθνη τοῦ κό- a a > σ ΄ ’ Ν lal Ν 31 cov ἐπιζητοῦσιν - ὑμῶν δὲ ὁ πατὴρ οἶδεν ὅτι χρήζετε τούτων. πλὴν ζητεῖτε τὴν cal cal i. cal βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ταῦτα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν. lal 7 ΄ c cal 82 Μὴ φοβοῦ, τὸ μικρὸν ποίμνιον " ὅτι εὐδόκησεν ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν δοῦναι ὑμῖν τὴν ᾿ ἢ » Ν ε ’ ε a ἣν ΄’ 5 ’ ’ 88 βασιλείαν. ἸΠωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην " ποιήσατε ε Lal / ἣν , ἧς, > , > Lal > a σ ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ὅπου a β : 84 κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει. οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει. ὅπου γάρ ἐστιν ὃ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν, ἐκεῖ Ae , ε lal ΕἸ} 4 ε “ « 3 , / Ν ε ’ 35 καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται. "Kotwcav ὑμῶν αἱ ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι καὶ οἱ λύ- , “-“ cal 36 χνοι καιόμενοι - Kal ὑμεῖς ὅμοιοι ἀνθρώποις προσδεχομένοις TOV κύριον ἑαυτῶν, Ld > Xr , > lad ’ὔ ν > / Ν , > ΓΑ > / πότε ἀναλύσῃ ἐκ τῶν γάμων, ἵνα ἐλθόντος καὶ κρούσαντος εὐθέως ἀνοίξωσιν Le. 12:18. τὰ γενήματά μου S* AD Treg. 24 οὔτε --- οὔτε S D L West.mg.; od — mg. West.mg. ; τὸν σίτον (add μου Met®) S* οὐδὲ A B Treg. (mg. οὔτε sc.) West.txt. et° BL cop Treg txt. West.txt. Rev. | καὶ τὰ 27 πῶς --- ὑφαίνει D West.mg.; πῶς αὐξά. ἀγαθά μου Set? A BL vg cop syrr; om δὴ γεὶ" οὐ κοπιᾷ οὐδὲ νήθει δὲ A BL vg cop syIT D West.mg. 23 ψυχὴ A alvg; pm γὰρ Treg. West.txt. Rev. 31 αὐτοῦ NB SBD L cop Treg. West. Rev. Ds L cop; τοῦ θεοῦ A D? vg syrr Rey.mg. § 52.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 53 37 38 39 40 11 12 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 LUKE XII. ὑτῷ ἴριοι ot δοῦλοι ἐκεῖνοι, οὺς ἐλθὼν 6 Kv, ὑρή ῦ - αὐτῷ. μακάρ i δοῦ €LVOL, OUS ν ὃ κύριος εὑρήσει γρηγοροῦντας eS / e An Ψ , \ 3 a 3 Ν Ν Ν , ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι περιζώσεται Kal ἀνακλινεῖ αὐτοὺς καὶ παρελθὼν διακονήσει 3 cal Ἃ ΕΣ a / A > tal 7) ΙΝ Ν 7 Ca , αὐτοῖς. Kav ἐν TH δευτέρᾳ, κἂν ἐν TH τρίτῃ φυλακῇ ἔλθῃ καὶ εὕρῃ οὕτως, μακά- a , Ψ 4 , plot εἶσιν. τοῦτο δὲ γινώσκετε, ὅτι εἰ ἤδει ὃ οἰκοδεσπότης, ποίᾳ ὥρᾳ ὃ κλέπτης ἔρχεται, οὐκ ἂν ἀφῆκεν διορυχθῆναι τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ. καὶ ὑμεῖς γίνεσθε ἕτοι- μοι, ὅτι ἣ ὥρᾳ οὐ δοκεῖτε ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεται. > \ ΕΟ. ΄, Ὰ , \ con \ \ ΄ ΄ nx Εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὃ lérpos: κύριε, πρὸς ἡμᾶς τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην λέγεις ἢ > ε ΄ὔ ὁ » > x ε ‘\ / καὶ πρὸς πάντας ; ' καὶ εἶπεν ὃ κύριος - τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν ὃ πιστὸς οἰκονόμος 6 φρό- n a “ / cal νιμος, OV καταστήσει ὃ κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς θεραπείας αὐτοῦ τοῦ διδόναι ἐν καιρῷ τὸ / / ¢ A 2 a a 2 Ν ε ΄ > fa ε ͵ σιτομέτριον ; μακάριος ὃ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος, ὃν ἐλθὼν ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὑρήσει ποι- n A a a a = οὔντα οὕτως. ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐπὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν αὐτοῦ καταστή- Lay ὁ Ξ3Ν δὲ ” ὃ δοῦλ ἐκεῖνο > a apou ΕἸ ἌΝ fa ε , , ge αὐτόν. ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃ 6 δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν TH καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ: χρονίζει ὁ κύριός 4 Ἂν a μου ἔρχεσθαι, καὶ ἄρξηται τύπτειν τοὺς παῖδας Kal τὰς παιδίσκας, ἐσθίειν τε καὶ ΄ Ν 6 ΄ θ “ε ε ΄ a 8 , 2 ΄, 2 ε / Ἕν 3 πίνειν καὶ μεθύσκεσθαι - ἥξει ὁ κύριος τοῦ δούλου ἐκείνου ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἡ οὐ προσ- a Ν Ψ Ἐν > , Ν ΄ / Ν Ἂ ᾽, a δοκᾷ καὶ ἐν ὥρᾳ ἡἣ οὐ γινώσκει, Kal διχοτομήσει αὐτόν, καὶ τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ a Sax ἢ» / 5) a ἌΡ Ε a ε Ν Ν , a , 3 a τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει. ἐκεῖνος δὲ 6 δοῦλος ὃ γνοὺς τὸ θέλημα τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ Ν By... Ἢ Xv / Ν Ἂς / > LAN 4 ’ὔ ε Ν A καὶ μὴ ἑτοιμάσας ἢ ποιήσας πρὸς TO θέλημα αὐτοῦ δαρήσεται πολλάς ὃ δὲ μὴ γνούς, ποιήσας δὲ ἄξια πληγῶν, δαρήσεται ὀλίγας. παντὶ δὲ ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, \ ΄ > 3 a ee ͵ὔ , , Cie 2 πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσεν αὐτόν. ia και A \ A \ ΄ 50 Πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη; βάπτισμα δὲ ot \ lal Ψ an tal ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι, καὶ πῶς συνέχομαι ἕως ὅτου τελεσθῇ. δοκεῖτε ὅτι εἰρήνην ΄ ὃ a > fal o aN / {ea ἀλ. x nN ὃ ’ {2 παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἐν TH γῇ ; οὐχὶ λέγω ὑμῖν GAN ἢ διαμερισμόν. | ἔσονται γὰρ ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν πέντε ἐν ἑνὶ οἴκῳ διαμεμερισμένοι, τρεῖς ἐπὶ δυσὶν καὶ δύο ἐπὶ na ἈΝ τρισὶν | διαμερισθήσονται, πατὴρ ἐπὶ υἱῷ καὶ vids ἐπὶ πατρὶ, μήτηρ ἐπὶ θυγατέρα Ἂν ΄ Sew 4 ΝΣ SX: Ν , \ 4 seh Ν , καὶ θυγάτηρ ἐπὶ μητέρα, πενθερὰ ἐπὶ τὴν νύμφην Kal νύμφη ἐπὶ τὴν πενθεράν. Ἔλεγεν δὲ καὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις - ὅταν ἴδητε νεφέλην ἀνατέλλουσαν ἐπὶ δυσμῶν, 3 fe / Ὁ 4 4 ᾽ν 2: “ \ Ον / , εὐθέως λέγετε ὅτι ὄμβρος ἔρχεται, καὶ γίνεται OUTwWS* Kal ὅταν νότον πνέοντα, , a a λέγετε ὅτι καύσων ἔσται, Kal γίνεται. ὑποκριταί, TO πρόσωπον τῆς γῆς καὶ “- > oa) 4 ΄ Ν x Ν a a 3 ΄ὔ SQN τοῦ οὐρανοῦ οἴδατε δοκιμάζειν, τὸν δὲ καιρὸν τοῦτον πῶς οὐ δοκιμάζετε; Τί δὲ ‘\ 3 See nw“ 2 ’ Ἂν ,ὔ ε Ν ε / Ν n 5 ’ καὶ ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον ; ὡς γὰρ ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου Pe ἂν > ἢ GOW δὸς € ’ὔ 3 λλάνθ Sie GP UP LS σαι ΄΄ , ἐπ᾽ ἄρχοντα, ἐν TH ὁδῷ δὸς ἐργασίαν ἀπηλλάχθαι ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, μήποτε κατασύρῃ Ἂ νε / / Len} > σε πρὸς TOV κριτήν, Kal ὃ κριτής σε παραδώσει τῷ πράκτορι, Kal ὃ πράκτωρ σε x a“ > N / r , > N 5.- λΘ > τ 7 e \ Ν 5 βαλεῖ εἰς φυλακήν. λέγω σοι, οὐ μὴ ἐξέλθῃς ἐκεῖθεν ἕως οὗ καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον λεπτὸν ἀποδῴς. Le. 12:38. μακάριοί εἰσιν S*; add οἱ δοῦλοι 52, 53 τρισὶν διαμερισθήσονται, πατὴρ DL A vg syrr[Treg.] ; add ἐκεῖνοι S* Α BDL ΤΙ; τρισίν, diay. πατὴρ Treg. West. (τρισίν. ve syrr Treg. West. Rev. 39 οὐκ S* D_ Steph. Rey.) West.mg. ; pm ἐγρηγόρησεν ἂν καὶ S* ete AB 53 διαμερισθήσονται δὰ B Ὁ L U ve cop; L cop Treg.txt. et [mg.] West.txt. Rev. διαμερισθήσεται A X Asyrr. * 56 οὐ do- 41 αὐτῷ S A vg cop; om BDL 33 Treg. κιμάζετε A Ὁ vg Treg.mg. ; οὐκ οἴδατε δοκι- West. Rev. μάζειν δὴ BL 33 cop Treg.txt. West. Rey. 54 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Parr Dye § 53. The Slaughter of certain Galileans. Parable of the Barren Figo " Galilee. Luke XII 1-9. -“ ͵ ΕῚ 3 ΄-“ Lal “Ἢ an Παρῆσαν δέ τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ ἀπαγγέλλοντες αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν TadtAalwv - \ e a ᾿ a a a ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν. Kal ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν A a “ rx e αὐτοῖς - δοκεῖτε ὅτι οἱ Ταλιλαῖοι οὗτοι ἁμαρτωλοὶ παρὰ πάντας τοὺς Γαλιλαίους > / μὲ ἴω / 0 4 δ ae. δέ (wn) ἀλλ᾽ oN Ν a , ἐγένοντο, ὅτι τοιαῦτα πεπόνθασιν ; οὐχὶ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν μὴ μετανοῆτε, πάν- 1 i? 5 ἊΝ tal a) aX > aA ε ὃ ’ > 93 a 5 ε ’ὔὕ 5 -“ τες ὁμοίως ἀπολεῖσθε. ἢ ἐκεῖνοι οἱ δεκαοκτώ, ἐφ᾽ ods ἔπεσεν ὃ πύργος ἐν τῷ « SN Ν Ans , 3 , ὃ fo LA 5 ἈΠ ἐν 7 > / Ν , ἐλωὰμ, καὶ ἀπέκτεινεν αὑτούς, δοκεῖτε OTL αὐτοὶ ὀφειλέται ἐγένοντο παρὰ πάντας Ἂν ἌἍ ἂν Lal ε Lal τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Ἱἱερουσαλήμ; οὐχὶ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν / tal μὴ μετανοήσητε, πάντες ὡσαύτως ἀπολεῖσθε. ΕΣ ὮΝ ΄ \ , A > - Ἔλεγεν δὲ ταύτην τὴν παραβολήν. Suny εἶχέν τις πεφυτευμένην ἐν τῷ tat ἴω \, 93 “ an - ἀμπελῶνι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἦλθεν ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν αὐτῇ καὶ οὐχ εὗρεν. εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς Ν 5 r / io \ / m” > ᾽ e μὴ cr Ν » “ a Tov ἀμπελουργόν: ἰδοὺ τρία ἔτη ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἔρχομαι ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν TH συκῇ a a Ν “ a ταὐτῇ Kal οὐχ εὑρίσκω ἔκκοψον αὐτήν ἱνατί Kal τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ; |'6 δὲ > \ / > a 7, ΕΣ ον \ a Ν 5 σ ΄ , ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτῷ - κύριε, ἄφες αὐτὴν καὶ τοῦτο TO ἔτος, ἕως ὅτου σκάψω Ν tee % Bar kK ΄ ια NK Ν 7 Ν > \ XX < > be 4 περὶ αὐτὴν καὶ w κόπρια, ' κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον " εἰ δὲ μήγε, τὶ / > ἊΨ, ἐκκόψεις αὑτὴν. § 54. Parable of the Sower.— Lake of Galilee: Near Capernaum ? Marx IY. 1-25. Kai πάλιν ἤρξατο διδάσκειν παρὰ Mart. XIII. 1-23. "Ev τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ ἐξελθὼν ὃ Ἰη- 1 σοῦς ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν. αὐτὸν ὄχλοι πολλοί, Ἂν 4, ἌΝ / Ν τὴν θάλασσαν. καὶ ᾿᾽συνάγεται πρὸς \ ΄, τ Ny »” “- “ a καὶ συνήχθησαν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὄχλος πλεῖστος, ὥστε αὐτὸν 3 “ > , a 3 “- εἰς πλοῖον ἐμβάντα καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς πλοῖον θαλάσσῃ, καὶ πᾶς ὃ a ἈΝ ἐμβάντα καθῆσθαι, καὶ wn ἃς x πᾶς ὃ ὄχλος ἐπὶ TOV Luxe VIII. 4-18. Συνιόντος δὲ ὄχλου Lal ΠῚ ras A πολλοῦ Kal τῶν κατὰ ὄχλος πρὸς τὴν θάλασ- σαν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἧσαν. 4 2979 > Ν ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς / Ν ἈΝ αἰγιαλὸν εἱστήκει. καὶ 2 καὶ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολ- λὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς, λέ- yov" ἰδοὺ ἐξῆλθεν ὃ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν. καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν av- τὸν ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν πα- ρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, καὶ ἦλθεν τὰ πετεινὰ καὶ κατέ- φαγεν αὗτά. ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ: Ἱ ἀκούετε. ἰδοὺ ἐξῆλ- θεν ὃ σπείρων σπεῖραι. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ σπεί- ρειν ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, καὶ ἦλθεν τὰ πετεινὰ καὶ κατέφαγεν Ἂν ΣΌΝ αυτο. ’ὔ πόλιν ἐπιπορευομένων \ 3 NX > Ν πρὸς αὐτὸν εἶπεν διὰ παραβολῆς: ἐξῆλθεν ’ na “- ὃ σπείρων τοῦ σπεῖραι , cal TOV σπόρον αὐτοῦ. Kal ἐν TO σπείρειν αὐτὸν ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ε / Ν 4 δδόν, Kal κατεπατήθη, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐ- ρανοῦ κατέφαγεν αὐτό" syrr; om ἐν B 1) 1, Treg. West. Rev. Le. 18 : 4. ἐν Ἱερουσαλήμ NS A vg cop West.mg.) τὰ πετεινὰ καὶ SC DL Z West. Mt. 13:4. ἦλθεν (ἦλθον Ὁ L Z Treg. mg.; ἐλθόντα τὰ πετεινὰ B West.txt. 85 53, 54.] MATT. XIII. 5 ἄλλα δὲ μ᾿ SN Ν ΄ “ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώ- “- A dn ὅπου οὐκ εἶχεν γῆν πολλήν, καὶ εὐθέως ἐξ- / Ν XN Ἂς ανέτειλεν διὰ τὸ μὴ 6 ἔχειν βάθος γῆς ἡ- 7 ράνθη. λίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος > ’ Ν \ ἐκαυματίσθη, καὶ διὰ ‘\ SS 8, «͵ 3 τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν ἐξη- ἄλλα δὲ ἔπε- Sn Ν 9 / σεν ἐπὶ τὰς ἀκάνθας, Ὁ TERRY A εἰ Κ καὶ ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκαν- Ne. 3 4 θαι καὶ ἔπνιξαν αὐτά. 8 ἄλλα δὲ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλήν καὶ ἐδί- δου καρπόν, ὃ μὲν ἑκα- ’, a Ν ε ’, a τόν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα. 9 ὁ ἔχων 10 11 12 13 > 3 , ὦτα ἀκουέτω. Καὶ προσελθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ - διατί ἐν παραβολαῖς ε ΝῊ ὃ δὲ 3 \ 3 μη ἀποκριθεὶς εἰπεὲεν " OTL λαλεῖς αὐτοῖς ; (ee , A Ἢ ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς βασι- λείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται. μὲ Ἂς 4 / ὅστις yap ἔχει, δοθή- σεται αὐτῷ καὶ περισ- ΄ “ Χ σευθήσεται “ Οστις δὲ UNTIL THE THIRD. 10 11 MARK Iv. καὶ ἄλλο ἔπε- σεν ἐπὶ τὸ πετρῶδες, ὅπου οὐκ εἶχεν γῆν πολλήν, καὶ εὐθὺς ἐξ- 4 Ν Ν , ανέτειλεν διὰ TO μή ἔχειν βάθος γῆς - “ ΄ εν ὅτε ἀνέτειλεν ὃ ἥλιος, \ και > 4 \ ἣν ἐκαυματίσθη, καὶ διὰ Ν Ν ΝΥ cs > TO μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν ἐξη- Ἀ u ράνθη. καὶ ἄλλο ἔπε- > Ν > / σεν εἰς Tas ἀκάνθας, OS ΄’ ε > καὶ ἀνάβησαν at ἄκαν- θαι καὶ συνέπνιξαν αὐ- Ἕ Ν τό, καὶ καρπὸν οὐκ ἔδωκεν. καὶ ἄλλα ἔπε- “ ὡς σεν εἰς τὴν γῆν τὴν καλήν, καὶ ἐδίδου καρ- A 3 ,ὕ \ mov ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ ae u Ν ΜΝ αὐξανόμενον, καὶ ἔφε- \ pev εἰς τριάκοντα καὶ 5 ε , ἣν > eis ἑξήκοντα καὶ εἰς ε ΄ NOY ASF ἑκατόν. Kal ἔλεγεν " a ΕἸ} > > ΄ ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω. ΔΨ 3 / καὶ OTE ἐγέ- 3 / VETO κατὰ μόνας, ἡρώ- τουν αὐτὸν οἱ περὶ av- Ν Ν “ , TOV σὺν τοῖς δώδεκα ‘ Ν τὰς παραβολάς. καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς - ὑμῖν Ν ΄ vA τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς al > ’ Ἂς “ θεοῦ ἐκείνοις δὲ τοῖς yf ἔξω πάντα γίνεται, βασιλείας τοῦ παραβολαῖς > εν 3 » Ay. > ΄ὔ οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται 9 Ἂν τ το δὶ απ αυτου. ἣν “ διὰ τοῦτο ἐν πα- ραβολαῖς αὐτοῖς λαλῶ, ὅτι Mt.13:9. ὦτα δὲ ΒΊ,; add ἀκούειν C Ὦ [Treg.] Rev.mg. Me. 4: 8. αὐξανόμενον ACD LA; αὐξα- νόμενα δὰ B West. Rev. | εἰς pp δὲ B C* LA; ἐν (ἐν Ὁ) A C? Ὁ Treg.mg. | εἰς sc et tr 8 C* 6 10 58 LUKE VIII. Ν g 4 καὶ ἕτερον κατέπεσεν ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν, καὶ φυὲν ἐξηράνθη διὰ τὸ ΝΕ Ψ > 7d μὴ ἐχειν ἰκμάδα" . καὶ 7 μ᾿ > / ἕτερον ἔπεσεν EV μέσῳ rat a Ν τῶν ἀκανθῶν, καὶ συν- Lal ε + φυεῖσαι αἱ ἄκανθαι 5 , > 7. ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτό. Se καὶ ἕτε- 4 9 ‘\ a pov ἔπεσεν εἰς τὴν γῆν δὰ 5 / Ἂν; ‘\ τὴν ἀγαθήν, καὶ φυὲν / Ν ‘ ἐποίησεν καρπὸν ἑἕκα- 4 τονταπλασίονα. “ ταῦτα λεγων 4.7 e » > ἐφώνει " ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω. > Exnpotwv δὲ αὐτὸν ε \ > Lal 4 ot μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ τίς 9 4 ε la αὕτη εἴη ἡ παραβολή. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν - ὑμῖν δίδο- ται γνῶναι τὰ μυστή- ρια τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ lal A Ἂς a > θεοῦ, Tots δὲ λοιποῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς, A West.mg.; ἐν (ἐν D West.mg.) A BC? Ὁ L Treg.mg. West.txt. et mg. Mt. 13: 11. 10 ἠρώτουν SC; ἠρώτων (ἐπηρ--- Ὁ) AB DL Δ 33 Treg. West. Rey. εἶπεν SC Z cop; add αὐτοῖς BDL Treg. West.mg. Rev. 56 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 σκανδαλίζεται. sy MATT. XIII. βλέποντες οὐ βλέπου- σιν καὶ ἀκοῦοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν οὐδὲ συνιοῦ- σιν. καὶ ἀναπληροῦται ( Ψ ἢ προφητεία Ἡσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα " * αὐτοῖς MARK IY. 12 ἵνα βλέποντες βλέπω- Ν ἣν » ἈΝ σιν καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν, καὶ 2, ᾿ς ἀκούοντες ἀκούωσιν καὶ ἡ συνιῶσιν, μήποτε > FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. LUKE VIII. iva βλέποντες μὴ βλέ- πωσιν καὶ ἀκούοντες μὴ συνιῶσιν." 3 / A 43 ° > a ἐπιστρέψωσιν καὶ ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς. 5 a 3 ΄ \ > Ν a Ν ΄ Le ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ OV μὴ συνῆτε, Kal βλέποντες βλέ- > 4 Ἂν c , ia) Lal ἐπαχύνθη yap ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ , Ν a > A, ΄ + Ἀ Ν 3 τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλ- Ἂν ἘΣ “ 5 4 , {ὃ cal 3 θ μοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν, μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλ- “ ἊΝ “ Ν 7 Ν -“ cal pots καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν καὶ TH καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν Cin «“ \ ὑμῖν ὃτι πολλοὶ προ- φῆται καὶ δίκαιοι ἐπε- , lal \ 4 θύμησαν ἰδεῖν ἃ βλέ- Ν 3 ” Ν πετε, καὶ οὐκ ἴδαν, καὶ 3 ἴον ἀν ΕΣ "ἃ Ν ἀκοῦσαι ἃ ἀκούετε, καὶ οὐκ ἤκουσαν. « Lal > > , Ὑμεῖς οὖν ἀκούσατε τοῦ τὴν παραβολὴν σπείραντος. παντὸς 3 4 Ἂν ’ ἀκούοντος τὸν λόγον “ rd \ Ν τῆς βασιλείας καὶ μὴ ε συνιέντος, ἔρχεται ὃ Ν Ace ’ὔ x πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει TO ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρ- dia αὐτοῦ - οὗτός ἐσ- c Ν ἣν ε Ν τιν ὃ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν if c Ν 3 ἈΝ Ν σπαρείς. ὃ δὲ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπαρείς, οὖ- / 5 ε ON / TOs ἐστιν ὃ τὸν λόγον 5 , \ > \ Ἂν ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων av- id 3 + N ete τόν " ovK ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν -“ , ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἀλλὰ πρόσ- καιρός ἐστιν, γενομένης \ A δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ Ἂς Ν , > Ν διὰ τὸν λόγον εὐθὺς ε Ν ὃ δὲ Mt. 13:17. rr Treg. West. Rey. Mc. 4:15. ἐν αὐτοῖς NCL A; εἰς αὐτούς B Treg. West. Rev.; ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις aie Ν > Ν δ ψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε. 19 14 15 16 17 18 ἀμὴν δὰ; add yap BC Ὁ cop Ν 5» ΄ Ν aed 5 ΄΄ και ἐπιστρέψωσιν, και ἰάσομαι AVTOVS. Ν ᾽ὔ 3 cal 5 καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας ἧς Ν , τὰς παραβολὰς γνώ- σεσθε; c , ὃ σπείρων Ν ’ ΄,΄ τὸν λόγον σπείρει. (ον ΄ὔ > c Ν οὗτοι δέ εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ ‘\ c vy; 7 / τὴν δδόν ὅπου σπείρε- ε / Ἂς - ται ὃ λόγος, καὶ ὅταν 3 4 52 ΝΧ 3, ἀκούσωσιν, εὐθὺς ἐρ- χεται ὃ σατανᾶς καὶ ΕΣ Ν / Ἂς αἴρει τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐσπαρμένον ἐν αὐτοῖς. καὶ οὗτοι ὁμοίως εἰσὶν en EEN X / οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπει- é. ἃ “ > , ρόμενοι, Ol ὅταν ἀκού- Ν σωσιν τὸν λόγον εὑ- θὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμ- / Ν βάνουσιν αὐτόν, καὶ 5 Ε ἢ ev > οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ε lad 3 ‘\ / ἑαυτοῖς ἀλλὰ πρόσκαι- a / pol εἰσιν, εἶτα γενομέ- \ a νης θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ Ν \ Lg 34). dua τὸν λόγον εὐθὺς καὶ 15.6.:9, 10. σκανδαλίζονται. ἃ 14 ete. τῶν Δ. 11 12 13 14 «ες lal μὴ / ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι ε 5 ἈΝ, ‘4 Ν x S ε an μὲ 3 ΄ ot ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅτι βλέπουσιν, καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν. ἀμὴν λέγω ἔστιν δὲ αὕτη ἡ παραβολή. c / 5 Ν ε ΄ ὃ σπόρος ἐστὶν ὃ λό- ε Ν οἱ δὲ Ν Ν ε , >. « παρὰ τὴν δδόν εἰσιν ob γος τοῦ θεοῦ. , > ἀκούσαντες, εἶτα ἔρχε- ται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴ- Ν ΄ ΔΕΙ͂Ν, = ρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν, ἵνα ’, μὴ πιστεύσαντες σω- θῶσιν. ε S felts. Ν / ot δὲ ἐπὶ THY πέ- Tpav οἱ ὅταν ἀκούσω- na / ow μετὰ χαρᾶς δέχον- \ / \ - ται τὸν λόγον, καὶ οὗ- ἘΠ᾿ 9. μ᾿ τοι ῥίζαν οὐκ ἔχουσιν, 4 Ol πρὸς καιρὸν πιστεύ- ουσιν καὶ ἐν καιρῷ πει- ρασμοῦ ἀφίστανται. τὸ δὲ τῶν D vg Treg.mg.; ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὖ- 1.8 : 18. τῆν πέτραν S* 1) West.mg.; THs πέτρας SC A BL Treg. West.txt. §§ 54, 55.] 23 21 22 23 24 25 24 25 26 27 28 29 Me. 4: 21. ὅτι BL; om.8 AC Dal | ἐπὶ A B2 Ο 1); ὑπὸ δὴ B* 33 West.mg. UNTIL THE THIRD. 57 MATT. XIII. MARK IV. LUKE VIII. / YA , eis τὰς ἀκάνθας σπα- ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ ἐπὶ τὰς εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας πεσόν, ’ἅ @ + > ε Ν 5 , θ , Φ Pi, 145 ε΄“ ΄ pets, OUTOS €OTLY O TOV ακανῦας σπειρόμενοι" OUTOL εἰσίν οἱ ἀακουσαν- , 9 ΄ ἌΣ δ Ὁ , > ε \ ‘ NER Cre IN n λόγον ἀκούων, καὶ ἢ οὗτοί εἰσιν ot τὸν λό- τες, καὶ VITO μεριμνὼν 4 ζω n Ν Ν 4 \ εριμνα TOV αἰῶνος και 19 OV ἀκούσαντες J καὶ και πλούτου και 00- ριμ γ ᾿ < > a fa) fe ε ΄, a 35 lal a , ΄, αἀπατὴ του πλούτου αι μεριμναι του ALWVOS νων TOU PLOU TOPEVOLLE~ 7 ριμ ᾽, Ν , ἌΣ εν 5 ΄ a ΄ , \ συνπνιίγει τον λόγον, και ἢ αἀπατῆ του πλού- vot συνπνίγονται και καὶ ἄκαρπος γίνεται. του καὶ αἵ περὶ τὰ λοι- οὐ τελεσφοροῦσιν.- πὰ ἐπιθυμίαι εἰσπορευόμεναι συνπνί- γουσιν τὸν λόγον, καὶ ἄκαρπος γίνε- ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν καλὴν γῆν 20 ται. καὶ ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν 1ὅ τὸ δὲ fe e / > ε δ΄ νος Ν a ‘ > a an na Ὁ , σπαρείς, οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ ol ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν κα- ἐν τῇ καλῇ γῇ, οὗτοί Ν ΑΙ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ A συνιείς, ὃς δὴ καρποφο- a Ν ad Ν ε pel καὶ ποιεῖ ὃ μὲν ἑκα- , ay τόν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ Ἂς δὲ τριάκοντα. Ν / 7 5 ν > ’ λὴν σπάρεντες, OLTLVES €LOLV OLTLVES EV καρδίᾳ 3 , Ν ’ὔ nw A > “Ὁ 5 ’ὕ ἀκούουσιν τὸν λόγον καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ ἀκού- ε ι Ν la / Kal παραδέχονται, καὶ σαντες τὸν λόγον κατέ- an Ν καρποφοροῦσιν ἐν τρι- χουσιν καὶ καρποφο- \ , “ n ἄκοντα Kal ἐν ἑξήκοντα ροῦσιν ἐν ὑπομονῇ. ie καὶ ἐν ἑκατόν. MARK IV. LUKE VIII. Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ὅτι μήτι ἔρχεται 16 Οὐδεὶς δὲ λύχνον ἅψας καλύπτει ε , μά ε Ν N 4d an ὃ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ ἢ ε ἊΝ Ὗ ΄, 3 2 Sa \ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην ; οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν λυ- , cal xviav τεθῇ ; οὐ yap ἔστιν TL κρυπ- ΤΣ aN Wee ° BANG USE Ue TOV, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ - οὐδὲ ἐγέ- veto ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ᾽ ret. / Ae / , J αὐτὸν σκεύει ἢ ὑποκάτω κλίνης τίθη- “ σιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ λυχνίας τίθησιν, ἵνα ot 3 , ,ὔ X\ a εἰσπορευόμενοι βλέπωσιν τὸ φῶς. 3 , 3 Ν ἃ 3 Ν 17 οὐ yap ἐστιν κρυπτὸν O οὐ φανερὸν μά + > δ Qs 3 , a 3 Ν ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς γενήσεται, οὐδὲ ἀπόκρυφον ὃ οὗ μὴ , 4 a φανερόν. εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, 18 γνωσθῇ καὶ εἰς φανερὸν ἔλθῃ. βλέ- 3 / \ om” 3 lal , Ss la 3 , ἃ A Ν ἀκουέτω. Kai ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς. βλέ- πετε οὖν, πῶς ἀκούετε: ὃς ἂν γὰρ Ld 7 > ἣν , a πετε TL GKOVETE. EV ® μέτρῳ μετρειτε ν΄ o μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσε- + ὃ θ ΄, 2. κα WX! A a εχ)» ο σεται ανυτῳ;, και OS GV μῇ EX Nek a 3 ΄ Ἐπ) > a Kat O δοκεῖ eX ELV ἀρθήσεται απ αὐτου. δ᾽ ἂν ἃ Ν μ᾿ ΄, 3 ται ὑμῖν. ὃς γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐὖ- σις Va ) Va 3 θή 32:9) > on τῷ καὶ OS οὐκ EXEL, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται, ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 8 55. Parable of the Tares. Other Parables. — Near Capernaum ? Marr, XIII. 24-53. Αλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων - ὡμοιώθη ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ σπείραντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ. ἐν δὲ τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ὁ ἐχθρὸς καὶ ἐπέσπειρεν ζιζάνια ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ σίτου καὶ ἀπῆλθεν. ὅτε δὲ ἐβλάστησεν ὃ χόρτος καὶ καρπὸν ἐποίησεν, τότε ἐφάνη καὶ τὰ ζιζάνια. προσελθόντες δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι τοῦ οἰκοδεσπότου εἶπον αὐτῷ - κύριε, οὐχὶ καλὸν σπέρμα ἔσπειρας ἐν τῷ σῷ ἀγρῷ; πόθεν οὖν ἔχει ζιζάνια ; 16 δὲ ἔφη av- τοῖς - ἐχθρὸς ἄνθρωπος τοῦτο ἐποίησεν. οἱ δὲ δοῦλοι λέγουσιν αὐτῷ - θέλεις οὖν ἀπελθόντες συλλέξωμεν αὐτά ; 16 δὲ φησίν - οὔ, μήποτε συλλέγοντες τὰ ζιζάνια 22 τι 8S AC L A [Treg.mg.] West.mg. ; om B D Treg.txt. West.txt. 58 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. MATT. XIII. 30 ἐκριζώσητε ἅμα αὐτοῖς τὸν σῖτον. ἄφετε συναυξάνεσθαι ἀμφότερα μέχρι τοῦ θερισμοῦ, καὶ ἐν καιρῷ τοῦ θερισμοῦ ἐρῶ τοῖς θερισταῖς - συλλέξατε' πρῶτον τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ δήσατε αὐτὰ εἰς δεσμὰς πρὸς τὸ κατακαῦσαι αὐτά, τὸν δὲ σῖτον συνα- γάγετε εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην μου. Mark IV. 26-34. : 26 ΚΚαὶ ἔλεγεν: οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, ws ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπό- \ a a ἈΝ , Ν 'Δ 27 ρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ' καὶ καθεύδῃ καὶ ἐγείρηται νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, καὶ ὃ σπόρος 28 βλαστᾷ καὶ μηκύν ὃς οὐκ οἷὸ ὑτό ὺ ITN ἡ γῆ ἴ, πρῶ 6 μηκύνηται, WS οὐκ οἷδεν αὐτός. αὐτομάτη ἣ yn καρποφορεῖ, πρῶ- 29 τον χόρτον, εἶτεν στάχυν, εἶτεν πλήρης σῖτος ἐν τῷ στάχυϊ. ὅταν δὲ παραδοῖ ὃ καρπός, εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέ- 4 MATT, XIII. Tavov, ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός. ΕΣ \ a 81 Αλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὖ 30 Kai ἔλεγεν: πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν a 7 ε ’, 3 Ν ε ’ ΄ a la) a (4 iA REIN τοῖς λέγων - ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν na > “ ΄ ΄ a An θῶ ε / / τῶν οὐρανῶν κόκκῳ σινάπεως, ὃν λα- 31 παραβολῇ θῶμεν ; ὡς κόκκῳ σινάπεως, \ > ΕΣ Ε n> an ΕἸ ἃ CAS ΤΟΝ a a , βὼν avOpwros ἔσπειρεν ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ ai- ὃς ὅταν σταρῇ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, μικρότε- A \ x a re 32 τοῦ ὃ μικρότερον μέν ἐστιν πάντων pov ὃν πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων τῶν a , 7 δὲ 5ὲ a “- ay ΑΝ a aA ! ᾿ NF! ‘ol £) / των σπερμάτων, OTAV OE αὐξηθῇ, μεῖι- 32 ἐπὶ τὴς γῆς; ' καὶ ὁταν σπαρῇῃ, ἀναβαΐί- an Ν v2 fy iA lov τῶν λαχάνων ἐστὶν καὶ γίνεται νει καὶ γίνεται μείζον πάντων τῶν ὃ ΄ ὃ 7 ἐλθ a“ Ν \ a Xr ΄ Ν la) λ' (ὃ aN ένδρον, ὥστε ἐλθεῖν τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ αχάνων, καὶ ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους, cal ~ “-“ 7 Ἂν ἣν, οὐρανοῦ καὶ κατασκηνοῖν ἐν τοῖς κλά- ὥστε δύνασθαι ὑπὸ τὴν σκιὰν αὐτοῦ δοις αὐτοῦ. τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατασκὴη- 8858 ἴἤλλλην παραβολὴν ἐλάλησεν ai- νοῦν. tas ε / > \ ε / wn > τοῖς - ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐ- a , ἃ an Ν δι 2, 3 3 , , / ρανῶν ζύμῃ. ἣν λαβοῦσα γυνὴ ἐνέκρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ ἐζυμώθη ὅλον. 84 Ταῦτα πάντα ἐλάλησεβ ὃ Ἰησοῦς 88 Kal τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς τοῖς ὄχλοις, καὶ χωρὶς ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύ- 35 παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς, ὅπως 84 ναντο ἀκούειν - χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ “Hoatov τοῦ οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς, κατ᾽ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς ΄ NZ 2 a > ΄ > 297 rove tee / προφήτου Aéyovtos:* ἀνοίξω ἐν ἰδίοις μαθηταῖς ἐπέλυεν πάντα. a Ν /, παραβολαῖς TO στόμα μου, > , € 4 9 Ν fol ἐρεύξομαι κεκρυμμένα ἀπὸ καταβολῆς. 7 3 Ν Ν 4 9 > Ν “ὦ Ἂς a Sey ε 86 Τότε ἀφεὶς τοὺς ὄχλους ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν. καὶ προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθη- Ν > A , , ern \ \ a Bi, Pay a na Tat αὐτοῦ λέγοντες: φράσον ἡμῖν τὴν παραβολὴν τῶν ζιζανίων τοῦ ἀγροῦ. ε δὲ 5 6 Ν ΜΝ ε "Δ Ν Ν ΄ 3 Ν ε ex AD: 6 » 37 ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν: ὃ σπείρων τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα ἐστὶν ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, 1s δὲ > 4 > ε Ie \ Ν ΩΝ , e ,ὔ > ε ret a“ 38 '0 δὲ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὃ κόσμος - τὸ δὲ καλὸν σπέρμα, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ υἱοὶ τῆς Bact- 5.95, (Ps. 781 Ὡ: Mt. 13:30. μέχρι SP C West.mg.; ἄχρι Mt. 18: 85. ‘Hoalov S* West.mg. ; om > S* ete 1, West.mg.; ἕως B D Treg. West. B C Ὁ vg cop syrr Treg. West.txt. Rev. | txt. καταβολῆς S B Rey.mg. ; add κόσμου S* ete Me. 4:28. πλήρης (-pes B) σῖτος (pm 6 CD Lyg cop syrr Rey.txt. 86 φράσον D) Β D; πλήρης σῖτον C* V4; πλήρη σῖτον ὃ Ο D Treg.mg.; διασάφησον S* B Treg. SA ΟῚ, Δ West. txt. West. Rev. 88 55, 56.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 59 MATT. XIII. A nw ε Ν ε 89 λείας - τὰ δὲ ζιζάνιά εἰσιν οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ, 16 δὲ ἐχθρὸς ὃ σπείρας αὐτά > ε , e Ν Ν ΄ an 395 ΄ > ε δὲ θ Ἄν ἂν ἐστιν ὁ διάβολος: ὁ δὲ θερισμὸς συντέλεια τοῦ αἰῶνός ἐστιν, οἱ δὲ θερισταὶ ay- 40 γελοί εἰσιν. ὥσπερ οὖν συλλέγεται τὰ ζιζάνια Kal πυρὶ κατακαίεται, οὕτως ἔσται > n~ / wn 9.5 3 “ {3 ΘΝ “ 5 ’ x > γι 41 ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος. ἀποστελεῖ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τοὺς ἀγγέλους na a Ν αὐτοῦ, καὶ συλλέξουσιν ἐκ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ πάντα τὰ σκάνδαλα καὶ τοὺς 42 ποιοῦντας τὴν ἀνομίαν, ' καὶ βαλοῦσιν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός " ἐκεῖ a / 43 ἔσται 6 κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὃ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. τότε οἱ δίκαιοι ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς εν > an la a Ν δι τὴν et": Ss > ἋἍ ὃ ἥλιος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτῶν. 6 ἔχων ὦτα ἀκουέτω. 44 ‘Opoia ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν θ D KEK ἔνῳ ἐν TO ἀγρῷ, ὃ μοία ἐστὶν 4 βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν θησαυρῷ κεκρυμμένῳ ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ, ὃν \ a a A \ a “ εὑρὼν ἄνθρωπος ἔκρυψεν, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ ὑπάγει καὶ πωλεῖ πάντα ὅσα Ἂς “ ἔχει καὶ ἀγοράζει τὸν ἀγρὸν ἐκεῖνον. ,ὔ r a / ἴω 45 Πάλιν ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ ζητοῦντι καλοὺς 46 μαργαρίτας - εὑρὼν δὲ ἕνα πολύτιμον μαργαρίτην ἀπελθὼν πέπρακεν πάντα ὅσα 4 εἶχεν Kal ἠγόρασεν αὐτόν. , e ’ὔ 9 Ν ε , lal > lal , 7 3 ‘ , ΑἹ [Πάλιν ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν σαγήνῃ βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασ- 48 ὶ ἐ ὃς γέν α jon ἣν ὅτε ἐπληρώθη ἀναβιβάσαντες ἐπὶ σαν καὶ ἐκ παντὸς γένους συναγαγούσῃ" ἣν ηρώθη ἄσαντες ἐπὶ Ν 3 λὸ Ν (i aN Ἂς: Ν λὰ > 4 Ν δὲ ae) 3, τὸν αἰγιαλὸν καὶ καθίσαντες συνέλεξαν τὰ καλὰ εἰς ἄγγη, τὰ δὲ σαπρὰ ἔξω ἔβα- 9 ” 5 n ΄ a si > ΄ εν \ 49 λον. οὕτως ἔσται ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος - ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι Kal 9 a \ \ > ΄ τὰ 5 , 1 \ A > \ > \ 60 ἀφοριοῦσιν τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μέσου τῶν δικαίων, ' Kal βαλοῦσιν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός " ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὃ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. le A 4 ’ > tal ’ ε Ων > > a Ν A 6152 uvyjKxare ταῦτα πάντα; λέγουσιν aire: ναί. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - διὰ τοῦτο ἡ Ὑ N A a Lal 9 πᾶς γραμματεὺς μαθητευθεὶς τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν ὅμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ ᾽ / Ψ 2 / > A a > a) Ν Ν ΄ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅστις ἐκβάλλει ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ καινὰ καὶ παλαιά. 7 / a tal “- 68 ΚΚαὶ ἐγενέτο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς τὰς παραβολὰς ταύτας, μετῆρεν ἐκεῖθεν. § 56. Jesus directs to cross the Lake. Incidents. The Tempest stilled. — Lake of Galilee. Mart. VIII. 18-27. Mark IV. 35-41. Luxe VIII. 22-25. IX.57-62. 18 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ ὃ Ἰησοὺς 35 Kal λέγει αὐτοῖς vy 22 ᾿Π γένετο δὲ ἐν μιᾷ DUN, \ 3" λ υ ὄπ ΝᾺ ἐκ if Ae / 247 a, Ὁ a \ EY πολλοὺς ὄχλους περ ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὀψίας τῶν ἡμερῶν καὶ αὐτὸς \ f / “ αὐτὸν ἐκέλευσεν ἀπελ- γενομένης - διέλθωμεν ἐνέβη εἰς πλοῖον καὶ οἱ lal ἈΝ / > AS / > θεῖν εἰς τὸ πέραν. εἰς τὸ πέραν. μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἷ- Ν 3 , / > Ἂς πεν πρὸς αὐτούς: διέλθωμεν εἰς τὸ MATT. VIII. πέραν τῆς λίμνης oper \ Ν [ Ν > “a ὧν ΄ὔ Ce > a 19 καὶ προσελθὼν εἷς γραμματεὺς εἶπεν IX.57 Καὶ πορευομένων αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ > a ’ 3 7 eqa > , δ 3 ΄ 5 αὐτῷ - διδάσκαλε, ἀκολουθήσω σοι 00W εἶπέν τις πρὸς αὐτόν" ἀκολου- 20 Lig 3\ ἀπέ, Ν λέ, > ἴω 58 a) / φ a ΕΣ / \ > ὅπου ἐὰν ἀπέρχῃ. καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ NOW σοι ὅπου ἂν ἀπέρχη. καὶ εἶπεν ε > Lal ε , δὴν 6.5; cal ὃ Inoots: at ἀλώπεκες φωλεοὺς αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - αἱ ἀλώπεκες φωλεοὺς μι Ν ἧς a a a a ἔχουσιν καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ TOD οὐρανοῦ ἔχουσιν καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ΄ὔ ε \ εν a 3 ΄, ΄ ε Ν εν CoS) ΄ κατασκηνώσεις, ὃ δὲ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώ- κατασκηνώσεις, ὃ δὲ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώ- Mt. 13:43. ὦτα S* B; add ἀκούειν δὰ Ο West.mg.; om πολλοὺς S* cop [West.mg.]; DL vg cop syrr [Treg.] Rev.mg. ὄχλον B Treg.mg. West.txt. Mt.8:18. πολλοὺς ὄχλους NC Ο L vg 60 21 22 23 24 25 τὸς δὲ ἐκάθευδεν. 26 MATT. VIII. a ‘ Ν ’ που οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ. ἕτερος δὲ τῶν μαθητῶν εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ΄ ey ΄ A > θ A κύριε, ἐπίτρεψόν μοι πρῶτον ἀπελθεῖν ε / καὶ θάψαι τὸν πατέρα μου. ὃ δὲ λέγει A“ . Ν \ αὐτῷ - ἀκολούθει μοι, καὶ ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς θάψαι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς. FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. LUKE ΙΧ. που οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ. > 4 ‘le 3 ΄ 59 εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς ἕτερον - ἀκολούθει μοι. ε Ν Ἂν Seay. 4 “ ὁ δὲ εἶπεν: ἐπίτρεψόν μοι πρῶτον ἀπελθόντι θάψαι τὸν πατέρα μου. “5 Ν sa »” Ν Ν 60 εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ: ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς ,, Ἂν ε “Ὁ Ἷ A Ν θάψαι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς, σὺ δὲ ἀπελθὼν διάγγελλε τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ A , , lal 61 θεοῦ. εἶπεν δὲ Kal ἕτερος - ἀκολουθήσω σοι, κύριε" πρῶτον δὲ ἘΣ , 3 es “ 3 X LS ld 5 δὲ x 62 ἐπίτρεψόν μοι ἀποτάξασθαι τοῖς εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου. εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς S2LN 2: 13 a 29.\ > \ \ a 9 Le ov αὐτὸν ὃ ‘Ingots: οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον ων (4 Lal καὶ βλέπων εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω εὔθετός ἐστιν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ. MATT. VIII. Ἄν 2 / 3 A Kat ἐμβάντι αὐτῷ “ ΄’΄ εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, ἠκολού- θησαν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἰδοὺ σει- σμὸς μέγας ἐγένετο ἐν a / σ Ν τῇ θαλάσσῃ, ὥστε τὸ πλοῖον καλύπτεσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων - a= καὶ , 4 προσελθόντες ἤγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες " κύριε σῶσον, ἀπολλύμεθα. Ν tA > a ’ καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - τί 4 5» J , δειλοί ἐστε, ὀλιγόπι- στοι; τότε ἐγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τοῖς ἀνέ- Ἂς al , pots καὶ TH θαλάσσῃ. καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη με- γάλη. MARK IV. Καὶ ἀφέντες τὸν ὅ- χλον παραλαμβάνου- σιν αὐτὸν ὡς ἣν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, καὶ ἄλλα δὲ nw > +] 5 Ὁ“ πλοῖα ἦσαν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 37 καὶ γίνεται λαῖλαψ με- γάλη ἀνέμου, καὶ τὰ κύματα ἐπέβαλλεν εἰς x. a A 3, τὸ πλοῖον, ὥστε ἤδη γεμίζεσθαι τὸ πλοῖον. 88 καὶ ἣν αὐτὸς ἐν τῇ ) Η) πρύμνῃ ἐπὶ τὸ προσκε- φάλαιον καθεύδων - καὶ ἐγείρουσιν αὐτὸν καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ: διδάσ- ΄σ καλε, οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι 89 ἀπολλύμεθα ; καὶ διε- θ \ = / “-“ γερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ 5 y [4 K Ν S - θ ἀνέμῳ καὶ εἶπεν τῇ θα- ΄, 4 tA λάσσῃ σιώπα, πεφί- Ν / ε μωσο. καὶ ἐκόπασεν ὃ \ / ἄνεμος, καὶ ἐγένετο γα- 40 λήνη μεγάλη. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τί δειλοί ΄ lal ἊΝ 41 ἐστε οὕτως ; πῶς οὐκ ἔχετε πίστιν; ' καὶ 27 οἱδὲ ἄνθρωποι ἐθαύ- ἐφοβήθησαν φόβον μέγαν, καὶ ἔλεγον πρὸς Le. 9: 59. West.mg. Rey. Mt. 8:22. ὃ δὲ δὲ 33; add Ἰησοῦς BC L Treg. West. Rey. ἐπίτρεψον BY D; pm κύριε δὴ A B*C LE vg cop syrr Treg.txt. et [mg.] 23 τὸ S* ete L; om δῦ B C 88 Treg. West. Rev. 22 23 24 25 LUKE VIII. ἈΝ 9 ΄ὔ - καὶ ἀνήχθησαν. πλεόντων δὲ αὐτῶν > 4 Ν , ἀφύπνωσεν " καὶ κατέ- By λαῖλαψ ἀνέμου εἰς τὴν λίμνην, καὶ συνε- πληροῦντο καὶ ἐκινδύ- νευον. προσελθόντες δὲ , > XA , διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγον- τες " ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστά- τα, ἀπολλύμεθα. ὃ δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμη- σεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος " ἌΧ ’ 3 2: / καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, Kal ἐγέ- veto γαλήνη. ΑΝ Ν 3 in εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς " ποῦ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν; φοβηθέντες δὲ ἐθαύ- μασαν, λέγοντες πρὸς Νο.4:806. δὲ Α ΟΞ Ὁ; om NBC*LA vg cop Treg. West. Rev. 40 οὕτως AC syrr; om SBD LA 2P¢ it vg cop Treg. West. Rey. | πῶς οὐκ AC 35 syrr; οὕπω NB D LA vg cop Treg. West. Rev. § 56, 57.] MATT. VIII. μασαν λέγοντες " ποτα- πός ἐστιν οὗτος, ὅτι καὶ οἱ ἄνεμοι καὶ ἡ θάλασ- σα αὐτῷ ὑπακούουσιν ; UNTIL THE THIRD. MARK IV. e ἀλλήλους - τίς ἄρα ov- ΄ 2 buf \ ε τός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὃ " \e , ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα αὐτῷ ὑπακούει ; 61 LUKE VIII. 5 δ , ἀλλήλους - τίς ἄρα οὗ- 4 > ¢ ἴω τός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ τοῖς 3 ΄ , ἀνέμοις ἐπιτάσσει καὶ an vA \ ε ’΄ τῷ ὕδατι, καὶ ὑπακού- ουσιν αὐτῷ; 8 57. The two Demoniacs of Gadara. — S. 17. Coast of the Lake of Galilee. Mart. VIII. 28-34. IX. 1. 28 29 ᾿ 3 , > / f 9 4 9 καὶ ἐπήῆρωτα αὑτὸν" TL ονομὰ σοι; Γερασηνῶν it ve; Kai ἐλθόντος αὐτοῦ Ν εἰς τὸ πέραν εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Τ'αδαρηνῶν, ε 4 > a ἧς ὑπήντησαν αὐτῷ δύο / a δαιμονιζόμενοι ἐκ τῶν μνημείων ἐξερχόμενοι, Ν 7 LA Ν χαλεποὶ λίαν, ὥστε μὴ > ’ Ν “- ἰσχύειν τινὰ παρελθεῖν AN Lal τ a“ 5 / διὰ τῆς ὁδοῦ ἐκείνης. 1 2 3 Mark V. 1-21. Καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Τὲ- καὶ ἐξελ- / nw cal θόντος αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ ρασηνῶν. , 3 Ν ¢ 4 πλοίου, εὐθὺς ὑπήντη- 3 a 3 nw σεν αὐτῷ EK TOV μνη- ἐν μείων ἄνθρωπος ΄ > ΄ πνευματι ἀκαθάρτῳ, a 5 ‘Os τὴν κατοίκησιν εἷ- 9 » ΄ \ SINS eZ ΓΕ €V €V τοις V ασιν, και οὐδὲ ἁλύσει OUK€TL 1) > 4 οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι, ' διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολ- λάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσιν δεδέσθαι, καὶ διε- Luxe VIII. 26 27 26-40. Kal κατέπλευσαν eis τὴν χώραν τῶν Τεργε- σηνῶν, ἥτις ἐστὶν ἀν- τίπερα τῆς Γαλιλαίας. ἐξελθόντι δὲ αὐτῷ ἐπὶ γῆν > , > ἴω 4 ἀνήρ τις ἐκ τῆς πόλεως Ν / τὴν ὑπήντησεν 4 7 Ν , ἔχων δαιμόνια καὶ χρό- νῳ ἱκανῷ οὐκ ἐνεδύσα- ε Ἂ ἌΣ 3 ’, TO ἱμάτιον καὶ ἐν οἰκίᾳ οὐκ ἔμενεν ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τοῖς [4 μνήμασιν. ΄, ε ᾽ > a Ν ε ΄ Ν Ν > ral ‘ σπάσθαι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ 3 Ν 4 EN ὃ / 1 Ν \ Ν ΝΞ: / 5 οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι, | καὶ διαπαντὸς νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἴω ’ X cal Ε2 > 4 Ν ’ ἐν τοῖς μνήμασιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσιν ἢν κράζων καὶ κατακόπτων λέ- καὶ i “a καιρου Ν 3 Ae καὶ ἰδοὺ ἔκραξαν , a yovres* τί ἡμῖν » ey a lat σοί, vie τοῦ θεοῦ ; Ges ὧδε πρὸ βασανίσαι ἡμᾶς ; Ξ 6 Ν ς ἑαυτὸν λίθοις. καὶ ἰδὼν Ν > a > \ ΄ τὸν [ησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρό- θεν ἔδραμεν καὶ προσε- κύνησεν αὐτῴ, ' καὶ κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ λέγει τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί, 3 a en Lal ~ Iyoov υἱὲ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψίστου ; ὁρκίζω σε τὸν θεόν, μή pe βα- 8 σανίσης. ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ - ἔξελθε τὸ πνεῦμα Ν > / > a> Ss / TO ἀκάθαρτον εκ του ἀνθρώπου. 28 29 ἰδὼν δὲ τὸν ησοῦν, ἀνακράξας προσέπεσεν αὐτῷ καὶ A , 4 φωνῇ μεγάλῃ εἶπεν " yO ἐδ Ν Ν 4 3 nan τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ εν ial ἴω a“ «ε ἢ υἱὲ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψί- an 4 στοῦ; δέομαί σου, μή με Bacavicys. πα- ρήγγελλεν γὰρ VA; an , πνεύματι τῷ ἀκαθάρτῳ a τω τ ἐξελθεῖ ON ἢ ἀνθρώ A Naa Ἀ re , ΘΓ Ν Ν εςε. εἰν ἀπὸ TOV AVUPWTOV* πὸ OLS yap χρόνοις συνήηρπακει AVTOV, Και , ec 4 Ν / ἐδεσμεύετο ἁλύσεσιν καὶ πέδαις φυλασσόμενος, Kal διαρήσσων τὰ δεσμὰ MARK VY. > 4 ε Ν A ’ 5 Ν ἠλαύνετο υποὸ TOU δαιμονίου εις τας ἐρήμους. 30 > , ‘\ > Ἂ ens ἐπηρώτησεν δὲ αὐτὸν 6 Ἴη- Mt. 8: 238. Γαδαρηνῶν (Ta¢- S*) S* BC*; Tepyeonvay S° C3 L cop. Τερασηνῶν δ BD it vg; Γαδα- ρηνῶν AC; Γεργεσηνῶν SX L A 33 cop Treg. Me. 5:1. mg. West. Rev. Le. 8:26. Γεργεσηνῶν δὴ 1, Ξ 33 cop Rey. mg.; Γαδαρηνῶν A Rev.mg. ; Γερασηνῶν BD it ve Treg.West. Rey txt. 80 λέγων A C Ὁ L Ξ vg cop; om NB 62 10 30 31 32 33 34 MARK V. Ν / > ~ Ν + / καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ - λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. > ἂν X 7 ἣν > ‘ 3 3 αὐτὸν πολλὰ ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας. MATT. VIII. Ss Ν Ἂν. > > 3 ἣν δὲ μακρὰν ἀπ’ av- a 9 , , τῶν ἀγέλη χοίρων πολ- λῶν βοσκομένη. οἱ δὲ δαίμονες παρεκάλουν > Ν , 3) 3 αὐτὸν λέγοντες " εἰ ἐκ- βάλλεις ἡμᾶς, τ Lal 3 ‘ στειλον ἡμᾶς εἰς τὴν ΓΑΕ ὁ απο- oP UY, a ΄ ἀγέλην τῶν χοίρων. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ὑπά- γετε. οἱ δὲ ἐξελθόντες EY) > \ ΄, ἀπῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοί- ies, \ ῳ ρους - καὶ ἰδοὺ ὥρμη- σεν πᾶσα ἡ ἀγελὴ κα- τὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν , Ν > / θάλασσαν, καὶ ἀπέθα- νον ἐν τοῖς ὕδασιν. ot δὲ βόσκοντες ἔφυ- A 5 , 5 γον, καὶ ἀπελθόντες εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τῶν δαι- AS, ὌΝ, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐξῆλθεν 3 ε ΄ an? eis ὑπάντησιν τοῦ [Ιη- μονιζομένων. Lal if ’ πᾶσα ἡ πόλις a \ 207 πος σου, και ἰδόντες QUTOV Ν καὶ παρεκάλει 11 12 βοσκομένη : καὶ παρε- 19 14 91 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. LUKE VIII. πολλὰ εἰς αὐτόν. a / / 4 iJ) 5 ε Ν σοῦς λέγων " τί σοι ὄνομά ἐστιν ; ὃ δὲ Ss εἶπεν - λεγιών, ὅτι ἐισῆλθεν δαιμόνια καὶ παρεκάλουν > ἊΝ 7 ‘\ 5 4 3 ἴω 5 Ν αὐτὸν ἵνα μὴ ἐπιτάξῃ αὐτοῖς εἰς τὴν ἄβυσσον ἀπελθεῖν. MARK τσ. > SAS lal Ἂν a mM Ὧν δὲ €KEL πρὸς Tw opel ἀγέλη χοίρων μεγάλη 9 5 Ἂς / κάλεσαν αὐτὸν λέγον- τες " πέμψον ἡμᾶς εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, ἵνα εἰς αὖ- Ν > / Ἂν τοὺς εἰσέλθωμεν. καὶ > , > a Ἂς ἐπέτρεψεν αὑτοῖς. καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ oy eee , Ν ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θά- λασσαν, ὡς δισχίλιοι, Ν 3 i 3 a καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν TH θαλάσσ ῃ- / καὶ ot βόσ- 5 nt ” KOVTES αὑτοὺς epuyov Ἀ 39 4 > Ν καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν εἰς τὴν / Ἂν > Ν 5 πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγ- ρούς- καὶ ἦλθον ἰδεῖν τί ἐστιν τὸ γεγονός. καὶ ἔρχονται πρὸς τὸν 3 a \ 6 A Ἰησοῦν, Kat θεωροῦ- ᾿Ν ’ σιν τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον ’ὔ Ν καθήμενον ἱματισμένον καὶ σω- φρονοῦντα, τὸν ἐσχηκότα τὸν λε- 16 γιῶνα, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν. διηγήσαντο αὐτοῖς οἱ ἰδόντες πῶς ἐγένετο τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ καὶ περὶ τῶν χοίρων. MATT, VIII. ’ με παρεκάλεσαν ὅπως με- a 3 Ν an Lay: ταβῇ ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν. 17 ἐξῆλθεν, \ και 92 99 94 35 Ἂς 3 ἴων 4 δὲ αὐτοῖς οἱ 87 δαιμονισθείς. MARK V. ἤρξαντο Tapaka- λεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθεῖν —_— \ KQL ὧν τὴς a ει 9. κα QTO TWV οριων QUTWV. LUKE VIII. a ὯΝ 3 a > / / nv δὲ ἐκεῖ ἀγέλη χοί- ρων ἱκανῶν βοσκομέ- > a ” Ν νων ἐν τῷ ὄρει, καὶ / ea” ν παρεκάλεσαν αὐτὸν ἵνα > P: > Las 3 » ἐπιτρέψῃ αὐτοῖς εἰς ἐ- κείνους εἰσελθεῖν. καὶ » ’ 3 A ἐπέτρεψεν αὑτοῖς. ἐξελ- θόντα δὲ τὰ δαιμόνια > a a > , 5» ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου εἰσ- lol > Ν / ἤλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, Ν WA c 5 / καὶ ὥρμησεν ἣ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς Ν ,’ Ἀ > τὴν λίμνην καὶ ἄπε- πνίγη. ἰδόντες δὲ ot βόσκοντες τὸ γεγονὸς ” As , ἔφυγον Kal ἀπήγγειλαν > Ν , Ν > eis τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς. ἐξῆλθον δὲ ἰδεῖν τὸ γεγονός, καὶ ἦλθον πρὸς τὸν “Iy- \ τ a , covv, Kal εὗρον καθή- μενον τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ad οὗ τὰ δαιμόνια , Ν ἱματισμένον καὶ σωῴφρο- an / ~ 8: νοῦντα παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τοῦ Iy- 86 σου, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν. ἀπήγγειλαν 207 a 2 , ε ἰδόντες πῶς ἐσώθη 6 καὶ ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῆς περιχώρου τῶν ΤῈρ- a 3 - ΞΕ: γεσηνῶν ἀπελθεῖν ἀπ' Ses if , αὐτῶν, ὅτι φόβῳ pe- γάλῳ συνείχοντο - αὖ- Le. 8:32. βοσκομένων A C L West.mg.; βοσκομένη δὰ B De Treg.mg. West.txt. Rev. " Ξ vg cop D L vg cop; ἠρώτησεν S A B C Treg. West. Rev. | Γεργεσηνῶν S* etc? ΟΣ L 33 87 ἠρώτησαν cop Rev.mg.; Γαδαρηνῶν Se A syrr Rev. § 57, 58.] 18 19 20 d MARK V. oe ’ 3 la) 5 ἃς “ καὶ ἐμβαίνοντος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, ΄ ἄγ τος ε \ 7 παρεκάλει αὐτὸν ὃ δαιμονισθεὶς ἵνα ’ 3 bevy tee Ν > 3 a Lem μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἢ. Kal οὐκ ἀφῆκεν αὐτόν, 3 A / 3 a WA > x > ἀλλὰ λέγει αὐτῷ - ὕπαγε εἰς TOV οἱ- Ἃ 4 Ν / KOV σου πρὸς τοὺς σούς, καὶ ἀπάγγει- λον αὐτοῖς ὅσα ὃ κύριός σοι πεποίη- x > / vA \ > a κεν καὶ ἠλέησέν oe. καὶ ἀπῆλθεν, ν.ν»ν , > a , καὶ ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν ἐν τῇ Δεκαπό- UNTIL THE THIRD. 38 39 63 LUKE VIII. τὸς δὲ ἐμβὰς εἰς πλοῖον ὑπέστρεψεν. ἐδέετο δὲ αὐτοῦ ὃ ἀνὴρ ad’ οὗ ἐξε- / 53 a ληλύθει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἶναι σὺν αὐτῷ - 5 / Ν 5 ‘\ / ε , ἀπέλυσεν δὲ αὐτὸν λέγων - [ ὑπό- 3 \ be Ne WEN a στρεφε εἰς TOV οἶκόν σου, Kal διηγοῦ με > ee ε 4 Sia a ὅσα σοι ἐποίησεν ὃ θεός. καὶ ἀπῆλ- 9. ᾧ ἮΝ ΄, ΄ θεν, καθ᾽ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν κηρύσσων Ψ > 7 3 Lad 6 > A ὅσα ἐποίησεν αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς. “ a 3 a Ν , 3 ΄ " λει ὅσα ἐποίησεν αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ πάντες ἐθαύμαζον. MATT. IX. 1 Kat ἐμβὰς εἰς πλοῖ- 10 11 mg.; Γερασηνῶν Β C* D it vg Treg. West. 88 ἐδέετο S* ete C* ; ἐδεεῖτο A; ἠρώτα D; ἐδεῖτο S* ΒΒ Ο L 33 Rey. txt. / VS ov διεπέρασεν, Kal ἢλ- 3 ἐς 207 / θεν εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πό- λιν. sed: EY / ἐπ΄ αὑτὸν, § 58. Levi’s Feast. — Capernaum. Mart. IX. 10-17. Καὶ ἐγένετο αὐτοῦ ἀνακειμένου ἐν τῇ οἷ- κίᾳ, ἰδοὺ πολλοὶ τελῶ- \ ε AP 1S ναι Kal ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἐλ- θόντες συνανέκειντο τῷ 3 a \ an Τησοῦ καὶ τοῖς μαθη- ταῖς αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἰδόν- τες ot Φαρισαῖοι ἔλε- γον τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐὖ- Tov: διατί μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτω- λῶν ἐσθίει ὃ διδάσκα- λος ὑμῶν ; Treg. West. D Le. 8: 40. vg Treg.mg. ; Treg.txt. West. Rev. Mt. 9:10. Treg. West. C Mc. 2:15. γίνεται δὰ BL 33; ἐγένετο A 16 γραμματεῖς DA Treg.mg. Rey. 21 MARK V. Καὶ διαπεράσαντος nan? Lal 5» nw A τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ 5 Ν / / eis TO πέραν πάλιν, συνήχθη ὄχλος πολὺς Ne Ν Ν , καὶ ἣν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν. 15 16 Marx II. 15-22. Kai γίνεται κατα- κεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ 3 / 3 Lo. Ν οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ, καὶ πολ- Ἂν la) Ἂς ε Aol τελῶναι καὶ ἅμαρ- τωλοὶ συνανέκειντο τῷ > “ tal Τησοῦ καὶ τοῖς μαθη- ταῖς αὐτοῦ: ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοί, καὶ ἠκολού- ϑ' aA | Ν ε θουν αὐτῷ ! καὶ οἵ γραμ- ματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων. καὶ ἰδόντες ὅτι ἤσθιεν μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν, ἔλεγον τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ - ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ε lal > i“ Ν ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει καὶ 40 29 90 LUKE VIII. ᾿Βγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ ὑπο- / Ν > Qn στρέφειν tov Ἰησοῦν ἀπεδέξατο αὐτὸν ὃ ὅ- χλος - ἦσαν γὰρ πάντες Lal / προσδοκῶντες αὐτόν. Luxe V. 29-389. Καὶ ἐποίησεν δοχὴν Ἄ, Ν 3 ~ μεγάλην Aevets αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ - καὶ ἣν ὄχλος πολὺς τελω- νῶν καὶ ἄλλων ot ἦσαν μετ᾽ αὐτῶν κατακείμε- νοι. bY Bt 4 e καὶ ἐγόγγυζον ot Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμ- ματεῖς αὐτῶν πρὸς τοὺς Ν 5 “ / μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ λέγον- τες" διατί μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁἅμαρτω- “ > / Ν / λῶν ἐσθίετε καὶ πίνετε; Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ N* ete? AC Ἔν δὲ τῷ S* B L cop ἰδοὺ δὴ D vg cop; pm καὶ B C τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ ἰδόντες δὰ L (hine Tisch. αὐτῷ καὶ yp. τ. Φαρισαίων) ; of γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἰδόντες (καὶ εἶδαν D) A C D Treg.mg. Rev.mg. ; of γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρι- σαίων ἰδόντες B West. Rev txt. | ὅτι ἤσθιεν δὰ DL; ὅτι ἐσθίει B33 2P¢ West. Rev. ; αὐτὸν ἐσθίοντα AC Δ΄ καὶ πίνει A CLA vg cop syrr West.mg.; om δὲ B 1) [Treg.mg.] West. txt. Rev.mg. | τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν pr S ACA; ἁμαρτωλῶν καὶ τελωνῶν B 1) 1, 88 2Ρ6 Treg. West. Rev. 64 MATT. IX. 12 ὃ δὲ ἀκού- a s σας εἶπεν - ov χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς te 13 ἔχοντες. πορευθέντες Ν ’ὕ ’ 3 δὲ μάθετε τί ἐστιν - Ν ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ ΄ By 420 SN >) θυσίαν. ov γαρὴ - , ig ov καλέσαι δικαίους ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς. , 14. Tote προσέρχονται 5 ~ ε Xe 4 αὐτῷ ot μαθηταὶ ᾿Ιωάν- t , νου λέγοντες ° δ᾽ αν FS \ πὶ an ἡμεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύομεν, οἱ δὲ μα- θηταί σου ob νηστεύ- Ν > 5 καὶ εἶπεν av- δ μη ἘΠῊΝ A VLOL TOU 15 ovovw ; “-“ ε > a τοῖς ὃ Iyaovs: δύνανται οἱ νυμφῶνος πενθεῖν ἐφ᾽ ἴον A ὅσον μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐστὶν c , ὃ νυμφίος ; διατί 17 18 19 MARK II. 4 a 3 , ε πίνει; καὶ ἀκούσας ὃ 3 n ’ 3 al Ἰησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς - οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν ot > , 5 A 3 > ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ ἀλλ᾽ lal 3, οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες " οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δικαί- ous ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς. \ Loy Καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθη- \?> / ΝᾺ ε ταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φα- ρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες. Ν + Ν , Kal ἔρχονται καὶ λέ- γουσιν αὐτῷ - διατί οἱ ἈΝ > ,ὔ . Ν μαθηταὶ ᾿Ιωάννου᾽ καὶ ε Ν »-“ οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρι- σαΐων νηστεύουσιν, οἵ Ν \ ΑΝ > δὲ σοὶ μαθηταὶ οὐ νη- στεύουσιν ; καὶ εἶπεν A e >? a τ αὐτοῖς ὃ Ἰησοῦς - μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ “-“ > 57 3 νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὃ νυμ- cal Ν ΄ὔ Ὁ φίος μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐστὶν νηστεύειν ; ὅσον χρόνον ἔχουσιν τὸν νυμφίον μεθ᾽ αὐτῶν, > , ἐλεύσονται ee 4 Ὁ 5 θῃ δὲ ἡμέραι ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ Chest ΤΩΣ ε / ar αὐτῶν ὃ νυμφίος, καὶ τότενηστεύσουσιν. 160. Οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐπιβάλλει ΕἸ 4 eer d 9 ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγ- ΄ ΠΥ Ὁ. ’ νάφου ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ πα- ~ + Ν Ν λαιῷ : αἴρει γὰρ τὸ ον 9 “A 3 Ἂν πλὴῆρωμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱματίου, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται. 20 21 οὐ δύνανται νηστεύειν. » , Ν « ’, ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι o ΕΣ aD 3 Sen ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ am’ αὐτῶν ε , Ν ,ὔ ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ τότε νη- στεύσουσιν ἐν ἐκείνῃ an ΙΝ / τῇ ἡμέρᾳ. Οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥά- 5 4 > 4 κους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπ- τει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον πα- / 5 Ν / ” λαιόν - εἰ δὲ μή, αἴρει A , 5 ΕῚ 3 A τὸ πλήρωμα az’ αὑτοῦ τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, ra ’ὕ ’ὔὕ καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γέ νεται. FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER 31 32 33 34 35 36 [Part IV. LUKE V. Ν 3 Ν e 3 καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ Ἴη- a > σοῦς εἶπεν πρὸς αὖ- 4 τούς * οὐ χρείαν ἔχου- σιν οἱ ὑγιαίνοντες ἰα- Tpov ἀλλὰ οἱ κακῶς " ἔχοντες " οὐκ ἐλήλυθα / καλέσαι δικαίους ἀλλὰ ε \ > /, ἁμαρτωλοὺς εἰς μετά- νοιαν. Lf Oi δὲ εἶπαν πρὸς 3 ld ε Ν αὐτόν: οἱ μαθηταὶ > Iwdvvov νηστεύουσιν πυκνὰ Kal δεήσεις ποι- ovvTat, ὁμοίως καὶ οἵ τῶν Φαρισαίων, οἱ δὲ Ν > , Ν , σοὶ ἐσθίουσιν καὶ πί- ε ν 3 cal vovow. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς > εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς: μὴ ΄ \ δ᾿ πᾶς aA δύνασθε τοὺς υἱοὺς TOD “ > ee νυμφῶνος, ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμ- dios per’ αὐτῶν ἐστίν, ποιῆσαι νηστεῦσαι ; 3 ΄ a) per ee ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Nee 3 wey ἐκ δὲ Ὁ καὶ ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ 7 A ε , / αὐτῶν ὃ νυμφίος, τότε νηστεύσουσιν ἐν ἐκεί- ναις ταῖς ἡμέραις. ΕΝ Ἔλεγεν δὲ καὶ παρα- Ν Ν > \ μ᾿ βολὴν πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὅτι οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ἀπὸ a , ἱματίου καινοῦ σχίσας Ν ἐπιβάλλει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον , > Ν ’ παλαιόν - εἰ δὲ μήγε, καὶ τὸ καινὸν σχίσει καὶ τῷ παλαιῷ οὐ συμ- / ἢ Jee 2 τς A “- φωνήσει τὸ ἐπίβλημα ἀπὸ τοῦ καινοῦ. 818. Ηοβ. 6:6. Comp. 1 Sam. 15 : 22. Mt. 9:14. νηστεύομεν S* B Rev.mg.; add ΟὟ, 38; om μαθηταὶ C? D A [Treg. mg.]; πολλά S¢ C Τ L it vg cop syrr Treg. West. meg. Rev.txt. om plane A. Le. 5: 83. of μαθηταὶ S* 4 BL Ξ 88 cop; Me. 2:18. καὶ of μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων SB pm διατί N*ete C D it vg syrr [Treg.] $$ 17 § 59. The raising of Jairus’ Daughter. 18 58, 59.] MATT. IX. οὐδὲ βάλ- oy ΄ λουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς 3 * A 5 ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς εἰ 4 δὲ μήγε, ῥήγνυνται ot > , ἈΝ δὸς τΦ > ἀσκοί, καὶ ὃ οἶνος ἐκ- “-“ δὴ χεῖται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀλλὰ ἀπόλλυνται - fy i / > > Ν βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς και- ᾽ὔ an vous, καὶ ἀμφότεροι συντηροῦνται. Marr. IX. 18-26. Tatra αὐτοῦ λαλοῦν- > ἴω 950 Ν Ν τος αὕτοις, LOOV ἀρχὼν τὸ Ν ΄ εἰσελθὼν προσεκύνει ὑτῴ, λέ - ἢ θυ- αὐτῷ, γων" ἣ 4 A > , γάτηρ μου ἄρτι ἐτελεύ- τησεν, ἀλλὰ ἐλθὼν ἐπί: θες τὴν χεῖρά σου ἐπ’ > / Ν 2 αὐτήν, καὶ ζήσεται. 19 καὶ 20 cop; ἐκχεῖται καὶ of ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται δ A C Avg Treg.mg. | ἀσκοί sine add D; add ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς S* et? A BCL A vg cop syrr [Treg.] [West.] Rev.; add preterea βλητέον S* A CLA vg cop syrr J ΝᾺ 69; -“ > ἐγερθεὶς 6 ᾿Τησοῦς ἠκο- ΄’΄ > fal Ν ε λούθει αὐτῷ καὶ οἱ μα- θηταὶ αὐτοῦ. UNTIL THE THIRD. 22 22 24 MARK II. καὶ οὐδεὶς βάλλει oe if, > 3 Ν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς , 5» Ν ’ παλαιούς- εἰ δὲ μή, ε 4 & ε > Ν 5 ῥήξει ὃ οἶνος τοὺς ἀ- , Ne 4 9 , σκούς, καὶ ὃ οἶνος ἀπόλ- Ν ε 5 , λυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί. 37 38 65 LUKE V. \ Oo 8 καὶ οὐδεὶς βάλλει οἶνον A 5» 5 ἈΝ νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαι- ΄ὕ > δὲ “ ΓΝ οὖς - εἰ δὲ μήγε, ῥήξει ὃ οἶνος ὁ νέος τοὺς 9 ΄ Ne τς > ἀσκούς, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐκχυ- , \ θήσεται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται: ἀλλὰ οἷ- ’ > 3 \ Ἁ / νον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς βλητέον. ἈΝ ΔΝ Ν δ ᾽ὔ ’ὔ 89 καὶ οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον - λέγει γάρ: ὃ παλαιὸς χρηστός ἐστιν. Capernaum. Mark V. 22-43. Καὶ ἔρχεται eis τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων, ὀνό- > , \ 5 NS pate depos, καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν πίπτει πρὸς TOUS ,ὔ a πόδας αὐτοῦ, 'Kal πα- ρακαλεῖ αὐτὸν πολλά, λέγων ὅτι τὸ θυγάτριόν μου ἐσχάτως ἔχει, ἵνα > Ἂν 5 nn . a ἐλθὼν ἐπιθῆς τὰς χεῖ- pas αὐτῇ, ἵνα σωθῇ \ , A 5 al καὶ ζήσῃ. καὶ ἀπῆλ- θεν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἠκο- λούθει αὐτῷ ὄχλος πο- λύς, καὶ συνέθλιβον Ew: αὐυτον. 41 42 The Woman with a Bloody Flux. — Luxe VIII. 41-56. Kai ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν ἀνὴρ ᾧ ὄνομα Ἴάειρος, καὶ αὐτὸς ἄρχων τῆς συνα- γωγῆς ὑπῆρχεν" πεσὼν παρὰ τοὺς πό- \ και 5» ἴω ’ὔ’ δας ᾿Ιησοῦ παρεκάλει > \ 5 lal > Ν αὐτὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὸν > > ~ 19% ΄ οἶκον αὐτοῦ, | ὅτι θυγά- THP μονογενὴς ἣν av- nA ¢€ 5. κ 7a Ἂν τῷ ὡς ἐτῶν δώδεκα καὶ wd 3 / > αὕτη ἀπέθνησκεν. ἐν Ν na ¢ ’ὔἅ τς Ν ε δὲ τῴ ὑπάγειν αὐτὸν ot 4 , > ὄχλοι συνέπνιγον av= ΄ τον. NS ταῦ = \ wea) > \ Chey > καὶ idov 25 καὶ γυνὴ οὖσα ἐν 48 καὶ γυνὴ οὐσα ἐν XN ε a¢ a , ΓΝ 7 , 4, 7 5 Ny ιν σὺ γυνὴ αἱμοῤῥοοῦσα δώ- ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ῥύσει αἵματος ἀπὸ ἐτῶν. ὃ + 3 ! Ν Ν ὃ AY) 2 5 ~ €Ka ETH] 26 ern, ‘kat πολλὰ πα- ὦδεκα, ἥτις ἰατροῖς aA e Ἀ ἴω > a Ν ᾽ὔ , σ θοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν καὶ δαπανή- προσαναλώσασα ὅλον σασα τὰ παρ᾽ ἑαυτῆς πάντα, καὶ μηδὲν τὸν βίον οὐκ ἴσχυσεν ὠφεληθεῖσα ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον εἰς τὸ χεῖρον am’ οὐδενὸς θεραπευθῆ- 27 ἐλθοῦσα, | ἀκούσασα ναι, προσελθοῦσα τὰ περὶ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, €A- 44 προσελθοῦσα ὄπι- Me. 2:22. ἀπόλλυται καὶ of ἀσκοί BL Le. 5:89. χρηστός SB Leop; χρηστότε- [Treg.] 5 Mt. 9:18. Le. 8 : 43. ἱατροῖς pés A Cit vg Treg.mg. Rev.mg. εἰσελθὼν Se C* Ὁ West.mg. ; εἷς ἐλθὼν A 33 syrr Treg. Rev. ; εἷς προσελ- θὼν > B ve West.txt. [eis]; τις προσελθὼν C3 Li; προσελθὼν S*. ... BlyN ACL; om Β Ὁ [Treg.mg.] West. Rev.mg- 66 21 22 30 31 32 33 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER MATT. IX. » : n ὄπισθεν ἥψατο τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου > “ 3, Ν > αὐτοῦ- ἔλεγεν yap ἐν ec “~ ἮΝ / Ὁ“ εαὐυτῃ " ἐὰν μόνον ἀψω- μαι τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι.----καὶ ἐσώ- θη ἡ γυνὴ ἀπὸ τῆς “ > ΄, ὥρας ἐκείνης. ---- 29 MARK Υ. “- > ας. ΟὟ, 5» θοῦσα ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ὄπι- 9 ΣΈΟ Ξ σθεν ἥψατο τοῦ ipa- τίου avTov* ἔλεγεν Ν μὲ 38 Ψ γὰρ ὁτι ἐὰν ἀψωμαυ \ an Kav TOV ἱματίων av- τοῦ, σωθήσομαι. καὶ εὐθὺς ἐξηράνθη ἡ πη- nw ἢ n γὴ τοῦ αἵματος αὐτῆς, Ν + a , και εγνω τῳ σωματι [Part IV. LUKE VIII. σθεν ἥψατο τοῦ Kpa- σπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὖ- τοῦ, καὶ παραχρῆμα ἔστη ἡ ῥύσις τοῦ αἵμα- τος αὐτῆς. “ ” SN cA , Vr at) OTL LATAL ATO TIS μαστιγος. και ευ- LUKE VIII. Np nese A 9 \ ES Quan aA ε , Gus ὃ Ἰησοῦς ἐπιγνοὺς ἐν ἑαυτῷ τὴν 45 Kal εἶπεν ὁ “Incods: τίς ὃ ἁψάμενός ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν, ἐπι- στ αφ Ν > ἊΝ rv ἔλ ὰ [4 ραφεὶς ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ἔλεγεν - τίς μου 7 “ ε Ψ,. \ 3 > ἥψατο τῶν ἱματίων ; καὶ ἔλεγον ai- τῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ- βλέπεις τὸ t μαθη έπεις τὸν > ὄχλον συνθλίβοντά σε, Kal λέγεις " ’ 4 ! ΟΥ̓ "2 τίς μου ἥψατο; καὶ περιεβλέπετο Ὁ Ν ἡ δὲ καὶ τρέμουσα, εἰ- 35 ὦ Ν a ἰδεῖν τὴν τοῦτο γυνὴ φοβηθεῖσα a a / νι ἊΝ Ν , dvia ὃ γέγονεν αὐτῇ, ἦλθεν καὶ προσέ- ΄ ποιησασαν. fal 9S TETEV αὐτῷ καὶ εἶπεν MATT. IX. 46 47 5 / ἈΝ / Ss c μου; ἀρνουμένων δὲ πάντων εἶπεν 6 ἹΠέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἐπιστάτα, ery , ’, A 43 , οἱ ὄχλοι συνέχουσίν σε Kal ἀποθλί- Bovow. ὃ δὲ “Incots εἶπεν - ἥψατό ὃ cA ᾽ν ἂν Ἂς 3, δύ 5» μου Tiss ἐγὼ γὰρ ἔγνων δύναμιν ἐξε- ληλυθυῖαν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ. ἰδοῦσα δὲ ἡ ea ig 3 5 , > γυνὴ ὅτι οὐκ ἔλαθεν, τρέμουσα ἦλθεν καὶ προσπεσοῦσα αὐτῷ Ov ἣν αἰτίαν ε > lal > ᾿ς ἥψατο αὐτοῦ ἀπήγγει- λεν ἐνώπιον παντὸς > a Lal Ν > , αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλή- 48 τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ ὡς ἰάθη παραχρῆμα. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῇ. θύγατερ, ἣ πί στις σου σέσωκέν σε πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην. LUKE VIII. λαλοῦντος ἔρχεταί τις a 7 Tapa τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου λέγων ὅτι τέθνηκεν ἡ θυγάτηρ σου, μηκέτι ε Sa ὃ δὲ “In- a > , 5 4, 3 a Ν σους ακουσαᾶς ἀπεκρίθη αυτῳ * PY σκύλλε τὸν διδάσκαλον. a / / Ν 6 , poBodv: μόνον πίστευσον, καὶ σωθή- LUKE VIII. 51 ἐλθὼν δὲ εἰς τὴν Ol \ \ 22 ὃ δὲ στραφεὶς καὶ ἰδὼν 34 θειαν. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐ- Ν 4 -“ αὐτὴν εἶπεν- θάρσει TH: θύγατερ, ἡ πίστις , / θύγατερ, ἡ πίστις σου σου σέσωκέν σε: ὕ- ΄ / σέσωκέν TE. — maye εἰς εἰρήνην, καὶ + ε Ν 5 ‘ Ἂν 2 ἴσθι υγιὴς απο TYS μα- MARK V. στιγός σου. >” a a 35 “Er αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος ἔρχονται ἀπ 49 = "Ete αὐτοῦ Ψ. μὲ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώ γουλέγοντες ὅτι ἡ , Jaa ror , θυγάτηρ σου ἀπέθανεν, τί ἔτι σκύλλεις Ν > lal 36 τὸν διδάσκαλον ; ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς παρα- 50 / Kovoas τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον λέγει “a 3 ’ Ν lal / TO ἀρχισυναγώγῳ " μὴ φοβοῦ, μόνον πίστευε. σεται. MATT. IX. MARK V. Ν Ν ΘΝ a 28 καὶ ἐλθὼν ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς εἰς 88 Kal ἔρχονται εἰς τὸν ; Ξ δ τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἄρχοντος οἶκον τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώ- 37 γου, ---- καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκεν Ie. 8:45. καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ NACDLE; om B [Treg.mg.] West. Revy.mg. Mt. 9:22. ὁ δὲ ΝΡ D; add Ἰησοῦς ΒΟ vg Treg. West. Rey. κίαν οὐκ ἀφῆκεν εἰσελ- a Ν > θεῖν τινὰ σὺν αὐτῷ, Mc. 5:36. παρακούσας S* εἰν ΒΤ, Δ; ἀκούσας Sc A C D vg cop syrr Treg.mg. 88 59, 60.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 67 . MARK V. LUKE VIII. οὐδένα per’ αὐτοῦ συνακολουθῆσαι εἰ μὴ Πέ- εἰ μὴ Πέτρον καὶ Ἴω- τρον καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἄννην καὶ ᾿Ἰάκωβον 38 Ἰακώβου. ---- καὶ θεω- καὶ τὸν πατέρα τῆς MATT. IX. pet θόρυβον Kai κλαί- παιδὸς Kal τὴν μητέρα. καὶ ἰδὼν τοὺς av- οντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας 52 ἔκλαιον δὲ πάντες καὶ λητὰς καὶ τὸν ὄχλον 89 πολλά, ! καὶ εἰσελθὼν ἐκόπτοντο αὐτήν. ὃ 24 θορυβούμενον | ἔλεγεν" λέγει αὐτοῖς - τί θορυ- δὲ εἶπεν - μὴ κλαίετε" ἀναχωρεῖτε. οὐ γὰρ βεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε ; οὐκ ἀπέθανεν ἀλλὰ ἀπέθανεν τὸ κοράσιον τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέ. 53 καθεύδει. καὶ κατεγέ- ἀλλὰ καθεύδει. καὶ θανεν ἀλλὰ καθεύδει. λων αὐτοῦ, εἰδότες ὅτι 25 κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ. ὅτε 40 καὶ κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ. ἀπέθανεν. δὲ ἐξεβλήθη ὁ ὄχλος, αὐτὸς δὲ ἐκβαλὼν πάν- / \ / aA “Δ τας παραλαμβάνει τὸν πατέρα τοῦ παιδίου Ν Ν / Ν Ν ᾽ =~ και τὴν μητερα καὶ TOUS MET αὐτοῦ, “ > Ν / Kal εἰσπορεύεται ὅπου ἣν TO παιδίον. > Ν 3 / ἣν Γὰ a εἰσελθὼν ἐκράτησεν 41 Kal κρατήσας τῆς χει- a ‘ ete) Ν Ν a Ἁ ΄ aN δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς, καὶ pos τοῦ παιδίου λέγει 54 αὐτὸς δὲ κρα- ἠγέρθη τὸ κοράσιον. αὐτῇ " ταλιθὰ κούμ, ὅ τήσας τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς fol 4 26 καὶ ἐξῆλθεν 7 φήμη ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμε- ἐφώνησεν λέγων - ἡἣ a a “- Ν / αὕτη eis ὅλην τῆν γῆν νον " τὸ κοράσιον, σοὺ 55 παῖς, ἐγείρου. καὶ ἐπέ- 3 , , + Δ "5. Ν a 3 ἐκείνην. 42 λέγω, ἔγειρε. καὶ εὐθὺς στρεψεν τὸ πνεῦμα αὖ- ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ τῆς, καὶ ἀνέστη παρα- πε ι 4 A > ‘ 7 A ὃ 50 . Ν a Ν ὃ , € be 2 ὃ θῆ ριεπάτει - ἣν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα - καὶ χρῆμα, καὶ διέταξεν αὐτῇ δοθῆναι ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς ἐκστά ἵλῃ. 56 ἢ ὶ ἐξέ t ts αὖ- σαν εὐθὺς ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ. φαγεῖν. καὶ ἐξέστησαν οἱ γονεῖς αὖ Ν a an 4 Ν 48 καὶ διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἵνα τῆς - ὃ δὲ παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς μηδενὶ \ a a > A A μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο, καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι εἰπεῖν τὸ γεγονός. > - Ca αὐτῇ φαγεῖν. § 60. Two Blind Men healed, and a Dumb Spirit cast out. — Capernaum ? ~ Mart. IX. 27-34. 27 Kai παράγοντι ἐκεῖθεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ δύο τυφλοὶ κράζοντες 28 καὶ λέγοντες - ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ. ἐλθόντι δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ τυφλοί, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Τησοῦς - πιστεύετε ὅτι δύναμαι τοῦτο ποιῆ- 29 σαι; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ ναὶ, κύριε. τότε ἥψατο τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν λέγων" 80 κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν. καὶ ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί. ee! 54 3 lal CAE) an Ν / = ©ia ὃ Ν , ! 14 δὲ > Xr 31 καὶ ἐνεβριμήθη αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς A€ywv: ὁρᾶτε, μηδεὶς γινωσκέτω. | οἱ δὲ ἐξελ- θόντες διεφήμισαν αὐτὸν ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ γῇ ἐκείνῃ. » δ 9 ΄ 3 \ ΄ Pie en IC! ν᾿ , 82 Αὐτῶν δὲ ἐξερχομένων, ἰδοὺ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ ἄνθρωπον κωφὸν δαιμονιζόμε- a ε 33 νον. ' καὶ ἐκβληθέντος τοῦ δαιμονίου ἐλάλησεν ὃ κωφός. καὶ ἐθαύμασαν οἱ 84 ὄχλοι λέγοντες - οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ. οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἔλεγον " ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόν Ὁ ἄρχ ὧν δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια. Le. 8:52. οὐκ Avg; οὐ γὰρ SBCDL Mt. 9:32. ἄνθρωπον C DLA it vg; om cop Treg. West. Rev. 54 ἐγείρου A; SB cop [Treg.] West. Rev. 34 om ἔγειρε δὰ B Ο Ὁ 33 Treg. West. versum D [West.] 68 1 54 55 56 57 58 § 62. A Third Circuit in Galilee. 35 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. § 61. Jesus again at Nazareth, and again rejected. ῇ Marx VI. 1-6. a Lal Ἂν Ui ‘ Kai ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθοῦσιν Marr. XIII. 54-58. καὶ ἐλθὼν εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ ἐδί- δασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ at- τῶν, ὥστε ἐκπλήσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς καὶ λέγειν: πόθεν τοὐύτῷ ἡ σοφία αὕτη καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις ; οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ οὐχ ἣ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Μαριὰμ καὶ οἱ ἀδελ- φοὶ αὐτοῦ Ἰάκωβος καὶ ᾿Ιωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας ; καὶ αἱ ἀδελφαὶ > aA SEN a Ν ε lal > ’ αὐτου ουχι πασαι πρὸς ἡμὰς ELOLV 5 a / er. TOV τέκτονος υἱὸς ; ΄ > 4 lal πόθεν οὖν τούτῳ ταῦτα πάντα ; καὶ ’ a ε cal ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ. ὃ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς > > “ > 5, ΄, εἶπεν GUTOLS* οὐκ ἐστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι καὶ μος εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρ ἴω Lal Ν ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ. καὶ οὐκ ἐποίησεν lal Ν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς διὰ τὴν ἀπι- ’ a στίαν αὐτῶν. > “a «ε \ > a x , 2 αυτῳ OL μαθηταὶ αὐτου" και γενομε- ΄ ee / > νου σαββάτου ἤρξατο διδάσκειν ἐν tal “ Ν τῇ συναγωγῇ " καὶ ot πολλοὶ ακούον- > Ἂ / / tes ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέγοντες - πόθεν ᾽’ a \ / ε ’ὔ ε τούτῳ ταῦτα, καὶ τίς ἢ σοφία H δοθεῖσα τούτῳ ; καὶ δυνάμεις τοιαῦ- ἊΝ ΨΆ, lal ται διὰ TOV χειρῶν αὐτοῦ γίνονται; os a οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ τέκτων, ὃ υἱὸς τῆς Ὁ Μαρίας καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου καὶ ε a X93 ΄ Ν Ψ Ν Τωσῆτος καὶ ᾿Ιούδα καὶ Σίμωνος ; καὶ 2 ny ε 5 Ν 3 na ® \ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ΓΕ cA As! 1 3 ΓΕ ἡμᾶς; καὶ ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ. So, > a [20.0.0 A μὴ > καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ὃ Ingots ὅτι οὐκ 3, , > 39 XN >. Lal ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος εἰ μὴ ἐν TH =) a πατρίδι ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦ- a a an \ σιν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν TH οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ. καὶ 3 297 > a a > , οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἐκεῖ ποιῆσαι οὐδεμίαν ἊΝ > Ν 9᾽ 4 9 Sere. BJ δύναμιν, εἰ μὴ ὀλίγοις ἀῤῥώστοις ἐπι- Ν fal Ν θεὶς τὰς χεῖρας ἐθεράπευσεν. καὶ 5 ’ ‘\ ‘ a , > nn ἐθαύμασεν διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν. The Twelve instructed and sent forth. — Galilee. Mart. IX. 35-88. X. 1, 5-42. XJ.-1. Καὶ περιῆγεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς tas Todas πάσας καὶ 6 τὰς κώμας, διδάσκων ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν Marx VI. 6-13. Kat περιῆγεν τὰς κώ- μας κύκλῳ διδάσκων. an Ν καὶ κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλείας καὶ θε- 86 ραπεύων πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ πᾶσαν μαλακίαν. ἰδὼν δὲ τοὺς ὄχλους ἐσπλαγχνίσθη 97 X. 1 Ν 5 ἜΝ, a > > λ ἐδ Ἂν ῥόδι VOL ε tN όβατα Ν é ovTa περὶ αὑτῶν, OTL σαν ETKVAMEVOL καὶ EPP JLEVOL WOEL TP μὴ €xov / ποιμενα. Ὁ Ν Ν > εἰς τὸν θερισμὸν αὐὖ- τοῦ. Ν Καὶ προσκαλεσά- μενος τοὺς δώδεκα. μα- δώδεκα, ΄ , A A 9 a τότε λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ’ 88 ἐργάται ὀλίγοι. MARK VI. a \ 7 Kal προσκαλεῖται τοὺς 1 p \ και ὃ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ δὲ , Φ Le , a a 9 > ΄ > , δεήθητε οὖν τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ θηρισμοῦ ὅπως ἐκβάλῃ ἐργάτας Luce IX. 1-6: Συνκαλεσάμενος δὲ ἤρξατο τοὺς δώδεκα ἔδωκεν R Mc. 6:2. καὶ (pm ἵνα (ΟἿ δυνάμεις (pm af B A 33 [Treg.mg.]) τοιαῦται διὰ τῶν χει- ρῶν αὐτοῦ γίνονται A C* et? Treg.mg.; καὶ ai (om A C2 L Treg.txt.) δυν. τοιαῦται (add αἱ Se L A ve) διὰ τ. χειρ. αὐτοῦ γινόμεναι S* et° BL Δ83 Treg.txt. West. Rey. Mt.13: 57. ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι δὰ Z West.mg.; om ἰδίᾳ BD 38 Treg. West.txt.; add αὐτοῦ C; πατρίδι αὐτοῦ L A vg cop syrr. §§ 61, 62.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 69 MATT. X. MARK VI. LUKE ΙΧ. θητὰς αὐτοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐ- αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν αὐτοῖς δύναμιν καὶ τοῖς ἐξουσίαν πνευμά- δύο δύο, καὶ ἐδίδου av= ἐξουσίαν ἐπὶ πάντα τὰ των ἀκαθάρτων, ὥστε. τοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευ- δαιμόνια καὶ νόσους ἐκβάλλειν αὐτά, καὶ μάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρ. 2 θεραπεύειν. καὶ ἀπέ- θεραπεύειν πᾶσαν ὅ- των, στειλεν αὐτοὺς κηρύσ- σον καὶ πᾶσαν μαλα- σειν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ 5 κώαν. ---- Τούτους τοὺς “δώδεκα ἀπέστειλεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς θεοῦ καὶ ἰᾶσθαι, ΄ qa in , > ean > a . παραγγείλας αὐτοῖς A€ywv: εἰς ὁδὸν ἐθνῶν μὴ 6 ἀπέλθητε, καὶ εἰς πόλιν Sapapitdv μὴ εἰσέλθητε > πορεύεσθε δὲ μᾶλ- “ἃ , λον πρὸς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ. πορευόμενοι I Δ , μή ΝΜ «ε , a > ~ > 6 8 δὲ κηρύσσετε λέγοντες OTL ἤγγικεν 7) βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. ἀσθε- ἴω x / 7 νοῦντας θεραπεύετε, νεκροὺς ἐγείρετε, λεπροὺς καθαρίζετε, δαιμό- via ἐκβάλλετε - δωρεὰν ν 9 ἐλάβετε, δωρεὰν δότε. MARK VI. 3 καὶ εἶπεν A > , Ν 9 μὴ κτήσησθε χρυσν 8 καὶ παρήγγειλεν πρὸς αὐτούς - μηδὲν ἊΝ + δὲ > lal -΄ Ν ΕΣ μὲ 5 Ν δὸό μηδὲ ἄργυρον μηδὲ αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρω- αἴρετε εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ΄ ε΄ , , χαλκὸν εἰς τὰς ζώνας σιν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰ μὴ ῥάβ- μήτε ῥάβδον μήτε πή- fo , ἊΝ. ᾿᾿ ΄ 10 ὑμῶν, ' μὴ πήραν εἰς δον μόνον, μὴ ἄρτον, ραν μήτε ἄρτον μήτε egy Ν , a Ἀ , Ν ΕἸ A > ΄ ἊΝ Sir iN. δύ ὁδὸν μηδὲ δύο χιτῶνας μὴ πήραν, μὴ εἰς τὴν ἀργύριον, μήτε ἀνὰ δύο μηδὲ ὑποδήματα μηδὲ 9 ζώνην χαλκόν, ἷ ἀλλὰ χιτῶνας ἔχειν. cv Ye Ν ε ε / / : ῥάβδον > ἄξιος yap ὃ ὑποδεδεμένους σανδά- 3 4 a A \ A > 4 ἐργάτης τῆς τροφῆς λια, καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε A a 2 a ΄ fal 11 αὐτοῦ. εἰς ἣν δ᾽ ἂν 10 δύο χιτῶνας. καὶ ἔλε- ὅλ. “Ὁ , > ὅλ. 3 τοις 7 2 \ 3 a πόλιν ἢ κώμην εἰσέλ- γεν αὐτοῖς: ὅπου ἐὰν 4 καὶ εἰς ἣν 6 5» ΄, ’, 3 > / a 3 Ὁ, Bi Se 3 , ητε, ἐξετάσατε TLS ἐν εἰσέλθητε εἰς οἰκίαν, ἂν οἰκίαν εἰσέλθητε, > Ἦν / > ‘ > > A / Ὁ a 5. ΕἸ al , A ae) a αὐτῇ ἀξιός ἐστιν " κἀ- ἐκεῖ μένετε ἕως ἂν ἐξ- ἐκεῖ μένετε καὶ ἐκεῖθεν aA \ .- fol κεῖ μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξ- έλθητε ἐκεῖθεν. ἐξέρχεσθε. / 12 Ayre. εἰσερχόμενοι 13 δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ἀσπάσασθε αὐτήν. καὶ ἐὰν μὲν ἢ ἡ ι ’,ὔ , “ οἰκία ἀξία, ἐλθάτω ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν ἐπ’ αὐτήν ἐὰν δὲ μὴ me Ward ε 5... Ἐπ τὺ ἢ ἀξία, ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπιστρα- MARK VI. LUKE ΙΧ. 14 φήτω.. καὶ ὃς ἂν μὴ 11 καὶ ὃς ὅ καὶ ὅσοι δέξηται. ὑμᾶς μηδὲ ἂν τόπος μὴ δέξηται ἂν μὴ δέχωνται ὑμᾶς, ἀκούσῃ τοὺς λόγους ὑμᾶς μηδὲ ἀκούσωσιν ἐξερχόμενοι ἀπὸ τῆς ὑμῶν, ἐξερχόμενοι ἔξω ὑμῶν, ἐκπορευόμενοι πόλεως ἐκείνης καὶ τὸν τῆς οἰκίας ἢ τῆς πό- ἐκεῖθεν ἐκτινάξατε τὸν κονιορτὸν ἀπὸ τῶν πο- λεως ἐκείνης ἐκτινά- χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω τῶν δῶν ὑμῶν ἀποτινάσ- ξατε τὸν κονιορτὸν ἐκ ποδῶν ὑμῶν εἰς μαρ- σετε εἰς μαρτύριον ἐπ᾽ 15 τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν. ἀμὴν τύριον αὐτοῖς. αὐτούς. Ie. 9: 2. ἰᾶσθαι B Rey.mg.; add τοὺς Mt.10:14. ἐκ δ Ο 33 it vg West.mg. ; ἀσθενεῖς (-νοῦντας C Rey.txt.) SA C DLE omB D cop Treg. West.txt. vg cop syrr [Treg.] Rev.txt. 3 ava A Le. 9:5. καὶ 56 A C3 vg syrr; om δὲ B C* C?D; om SBC* LE vg cop [Treg.] West. DL Ξὶ 38 cop Treg. West. Rev. Rev. Mc.6:11. αὐτοῖς SBCDLA vg; add 70 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39, 40 41 42 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part lV. MATT. X. ΄ (eer 3 ΄ ” a , Ν soe > ε , / a - λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται γῇ Yodopwv καὶ Τομόῤῥων ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ. an / / », Ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω ὑμᾶς ὡς πρόβατα ἐν μέσῳ λύκων - γίνεσθε οὖν φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις καὶ ἀκέραιοι ὡς αἱ περιστεραί. προσέχετε δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων " a ΄ \ A a “- παραδώσουσιν γὰρ ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια, καὶ ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν μαστιγώ- ε a XE aseA Te ἣν δὲ Ν Dx; a > θή 6 o 3 “-“ 9 σουσιν ὑμᾶς - καὶ ἐπὶ ἡγεμόνας δὲ καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, εἰς μαρ- “ lal Ψ lol £ a τύριον αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν. ὅταν δὲ παραδῶσιν ὑμᾶς, μὴ μεριμνήσητε πῶς ΕῚ ΄ ΄ ὃ θή \ eon > > , ~ & , , {3 κ᾿ ἢ τί λαλήσητε: δοθήσεται γὰρ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τί λαλήσητε" ' οὐ γὰρ ε fal 5 Ν ε co) 3 Ν \ a =~ ἂν Clin ἘΝ a > Walaa ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ of λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ TO πνεῦμα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν TO λαλοῦν ἐν ὑμῖν. a XS) Ν 3 Ἂς 5 / Ν Ν ΄, Ὁ." la παραδῶσει δὲ ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον, Kal ἐπαναστήσον- lal 7 3 ται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς. καὶ ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάν- Ν Ἄν» + 4 ε δε δ / > ΄, e ΄΄ ov Ν ’ των διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου" ὃ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται. ὅταν δὲ διώ- ca ~ / , -" κωσιν ὑμᾶς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, φεύγετε εἰς τὴν ἑτέραν - ἀμὴν γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν, 3 κ᾿ , \ ͵ a? \ ? ” ε εν nA 93 , ov μὴ τελέσητε τὰς πόλεις TOD ᾿Ισραὴλ ἕως ἔλθῃ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. Οὐ 3, θ Ἂς ΣΝ ‘ ὃ ὃ , x ὑδὲ ὃ a C2 τας Ν ΄ 3 A ὑκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον, οὐδὲ δοῦλος ὑπὲρ TOV κύριον αὐτοῦ. i ov TO μαθητῇ iva γένηται ὡς ὁ διδάσκαλος αὐτοῦ, Kal 6 δοῦλος ὡς ὃ KY ἀρκετὸν τῷ μαθητῇ ἵνα γένη ς aoKados αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὃ δοῦλος ὡς ὃ κύριος αὐτοῦ. εἰ τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐπεκάλεσαν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον τοῦς οἰκια- Ν 3 a δ a 67 > ΄ 2QX , 3 ΄ a > Kovs αὐτοῦ. μὴ οὖν φοβηθῆτε airods+ οὐδὲν γάρ ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἡποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ KpuTTov ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται. ὃ λέγω ὑμῖν ἐν τῇ σκοτί { > iw γ i : γ UE Η) red ΜΝ ΕΣ “ ΓΞ ν ἃ > \ > 3 ΄ 7E SEN - ὃ ’ Ν εἴπατε ἐν τῷ φωτί: καὶ ὃ εἰς τὸ οὖς ἀκούετε, κηρύξατε ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων. καὶ Ἀ a 6 S5N 5 3 , si ~ Ν δὲ Ν ‘ ΄ 3 μὴ φοβεῖσθε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν μὴ δυναμένων ἀπο- κτεῖναι - φοβεῖσθε δὲ μᾶλλον τὸν δυνάμενον καὶ ψυχὴν καὶ σῶμα ἀπολέσαι ἐν γεέννῃ. οὐχὶ δύο στρουθία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται; καὶ ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται an lal Ν. lal “ fol a ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἄνευ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν. ὑμῶν δὲ καὶ ai τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς πᾶσαι Lo a 7 r ἠριθμημέναι εἰσίν. μὴ οὖν φοβεῖσθε: πολλῶν στρουθίων διαφέρετε ὑμεῖς. A a ¢ e ΄ 3: a ee a 9 , ε ΄ “τ ἧς Πᾶς οὖν ὅστις ὁμολογήσει ἐν ἐμοὶ ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ὁμολογήσω κἀγὼ > > no» “ / mn °° 3 lal 7 ᾽ on > ͵, , "τ 7] ἐν αὐτῷ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν τον LOS δ᾽ ai ἀρνήσηταί με “ ’ > Ν 3 3, a ca) ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἀρνήσομαι κἀγὼ αὐτὸν ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ πατρὸς μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. “ , Ν aA > S Lal 5 ’ Μὴ νομίσητε ὅτι ἦλθον βαλεῖν εἰρήνην ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν " οὐκ ἦλθον βαλεῖν εἰρή- 9 Ν 4 > Ἂν Ψ " μὰ n Ν 9 νην ἀλλὰ μάχαιραν. ἦλθον γὰρ διχάσαι ἄνθρωπον κατὰ τοῦ πατρὸς αὖ- a τὴ 5 a Ν , Ν τοὺ καὶ θυγατέρα κατὰ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς καὶ νύμφην κατὰ a A 3 fal \ > a a 39 ΄ ε 3 “ τῆς πενθερᾶς αὐτῆς, καὶ ἐχθροῖ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οἱ οἰκιακοὶ nr ἌΓνΕ αὐτοῦ. ὋὉ φιλῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα ὑπὲρ ἐμὲ οὐκ ἔστιν μου ἄξιος, καὶ ὃ a ν ἃ / ᾿ς φιλῶν υἱὸν ἢ θυγατέρα ὑπὲρ ἐμὲ οὐκ ἔστιν μου ἄξιος, ' καὶ ὃς οὐ λαμβάνει τὸν ~ = >) ε CaN N σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ Kal ἀκολουθεῖ ὀπίσω pov, οὐκ ἔστιν μου ἄξιος. ὃ εὑρὼν τὴν ὩΝ 3 ἴω > / 9 / Ν ε 3 LA Ἂν Ν 3 a σ > “~ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, καὶ ὃ ἀπολέσας τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ εὑρήσει αὐτήν. a Ν 3 , , ‘O δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς ἐμὲ δέχεται, καὶ ὃ ἐμὲ δεχόμενος δέχεται TOV ἀποστείλαντά ld 7 Ν με. ὃ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου μισθὸν προφήτου λήμψεται, καὶ (2 , be > ” , Ν , , Noa 2\ ὃ δεχόμενος δίκαιον eis ὄνομα δικαίου μισθὸν δικαίου λήμψεται. καὶ ὃς ἐὰν 2 36 Comp. Mic. 7 : 6. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται Σοδόμοις ἢ Μύ. 10 : 82. οὐρανοῖς SDL; pm τοῖς B Γομόρροις ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ C [Treg.] West. A syrr. §§ 62, 63.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 71 ι MATT. Χ. , “ a a , ΄ A ΄ > » A Saw ποτίσῃ ἕνα TOV μικρῶν τούτων ποτήριον ψυχροῦ μόνον εἰς ὄνομα μαθητοῦ, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ μὴ ἀπωλέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ. a A, Ld 5» ΄ὔ (<7 A ’ ζω, Ἃ “ > ΄-“ XI. 1 Καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν 6 Ἰησοῦς διατάσσων τοῖς δώδεκα μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, μετέβη ἐκεῖθεν τοῦ διδάσκειν καὶ κηρύσσειν ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν αὐτῶν. MARK VI. LUKE IX. / 12 καὶ ἐξελθόντες ἐκήρυξαν ἵνα pe- 6 ἐξερχόμενοι δὲ διήρχοντο κατὰ τὰς an \ / ΑΝ 36 ’ὔ > / Ν ’ 18 τανοῶσιν, καὶ δαιμόνια πολλὰ ἐξέ- κώμας εὐαγγελιζόμενοι καὶ θεραπεύ- βαλλον, καὶ ἤλειφον ἐλαίῳ πολλοὺς οντες πανταχοῦ. ἀῤῥώστους καὶ ἐθεράπευον. § 63. Herod holds Jesus to be John the Baptist, whom he had just before beheaded. — Galilee 2 Perea. Mart. XIV. 1, 2, 6-12. Marx VI. 14-16, 21-29. Luxe IX. 7-9. 1. Ἂν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 14 Kal ἤκουσεν 6 Baot- 1 Ἤκουσεν δὲ Ἡρώδης ” ε ἤκουσεν Ἡρώδης ὃ τε- λεὺς Ἡρώδης, φανερὸν ὁ τετραάρχης τὰ γινό- τραάρχης τὴν ἀκοὴν γὰρ ἐγένετο τὸ ὄνομα μενα πάντα, καὶ διηπό- 3 at \ 5 a 5.5 in , oo» o SON Eves ε 2 Ἰησοῦ, ' καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔλεγεν ὅτι ρει διὰ τὸ λέγεσθαι tro A - > , ¢ παισὶν αὐτοῦ - οὗτός Ιωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων τινων ὅτι ᾿Ιωάννης ἧ- > lal > a ΄ ἐστιν Ἰωάννης 6 βαπ- ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν, 8 γέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν, ‘bad , co > ΄ Ν Ν A > la) Ov μη ε ΄ τιστής " αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐνεργοῦ- τινων δὲ ὅτι Ἡλεί- ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ σιν at δυνάμεις ἐν ai- ας ἐφάνη, ἄλλων δὲ x a ε / a + NM: μι ΄ lal διὰ τοῦτο ai δυνάμεις 15 τῷ. ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον ὅτι προφήτης τις τῶν ἴω Lod . ε 3, ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ. ---- ὅτι Ἡλείας ἐστίν. ἄλ. 9. ἀρχαίων ἀνέστη. εἷ- λοι δὲ ἔλεγον ὅτι προ- πεν δὲ Ἡρώδης - Ἰω- ΄, e na φήτης ws εἷς τῶν προ- ἄννην ἐγώ ἀπεκεφά- a 39 ΄ xe , 16 φητῶν. ἀκούσας δὲ ὃ λισα - τίς δέ ἐστιν οὗ- ε ΄ μὴ a a Ἡρώδης ἔλεγεν - ὃν TOS περὶ οὗ ἀκούω 3 “ ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα Ἴω- τοιαῦτα; καὶ ἐζήτει ἄννην, οὗτος ἠγέρθη.---- ἰδεῖν αὐτόν. 6 Τενεσίοις δὲ γενομέ- MARK VI. a \ - A νοις τοῦ “Hpwdov dp- 21 Kat γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου, ὅτε Ἡρώδης τοῖς “ , “ tal “ nr χήσατο ἡ θυγάτηρ τῆς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν “Hpwoiados ἐν τῷ μέ- αὐτοῦ καὶ τοῖς χιλιάρχοις καὶ τοῖς πρώτοις τῆς Γα- ρ pes Pp iY] L ἢ D 22 λιλαίας, ' καὶ εἰσελθούσης τῆς 6 ὃς αὐτῆς TH σῳ καὶ ἤρεσεν τῷ ιλαίας, ἱ καὶ εἰ ns τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς τῆς by, ως ε “- 7 Ἡρώδῃ, ὅθεν μεθ᾽ ὅρ- Ηρωδιάδος καὶ ὀρχησαμένης, ἤρεσεν τῷ Ἡρώδῃ καὶ κου ὡμολόγησεν αὐτῇ τοῖς συνανακειμένοις. ὃ δὲ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν τῷ δοῦναι ὃ ἐὰν αἰτήσηται. κορασίῳ - αἴτησόν με ὃ ἐὰν θέλῃς, καὶ δώσω cor: ε Ν an ny Σὰ 3 A Als ἡ Seat , g 8 ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα 23 Kal ὦμοσεν αὐτῇ ὅτι ὃ ἐάν με αἰτήσῃης δώσω σοι ἕως Μο. 6:14. ἔλεγεν S AC L Avg cop syrr 22 αὐτῆς ([Treg. mg.]) τῆς A C vg; αὐ- West.mg.; ἔλεγον (-γοσαν D) BD Treg.mg. τοῦ 8 BDL A 2Ρ8 West. Rev.mg. West.txt. Rev.mg. 12 10 11 12 8 64. The Twelve return, and Jesus retires with them across the Lake. 30 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER MATT. XIV. ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς" δός μοι, φησίν, ὧδε ἐπὶ κεφαλὴν 3 a Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτι- πίνακι τὴν στοῦ. βασιλεὺς διὰ τοὺς ὅρ- Ν Ν κους και TOUS συνανα- / κειμένους καὶ λυπηθεὶς ὃ > ‘4 ἐκέλευσεν 25 26 δοθῆναι, καὶ πέμψας ἀπεκεφάλισεν ᾿Ιωάννην ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ. Ne eld. / ε Ν 3 Gy oS ’ καὶ ἠνέχθη ἡ κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πίνακι Ν ἐδ 0 - K / \ om» K a“ kal ἐδόθη τῷ κορασίῳ, καὶ ἡνεγκεν Τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς. Ἀ ,ὔ καὶ προσελθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἦραν τὸ πτῶμα καὶ ἔθαψαν αὐτόν, καὶ ἐλθόντες ἀπήγγει- an? “A λαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ. MARK VI. 24 ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου. a \ SAN 7 a, ‘ ε Ν > . x TH μητρὶ αὐτῆς - τί αἰτήσωμαι; ἡ δὲ εἶπεν > τὴν > cal κεφαλὴν ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος. a 2s Ν a Ἂς Ν ΄, "Ὁ θοῦσα εὐθὺς μετὰ σπουδῆς πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα ἠτή- / / 7 > a nan Ὁ, τὰς ’ὔ σατο λέγουσα" θέλω ἵνα ἐξαυτῆς δῷς μοι ἐπὶ πί- Ν \ 3 / a an vakt τὴν κεφαλὴν ᾿Ιωάννου tod βαπτιστοῦ. / , ec Ν ἊΝ Ν 7 Ν περίλυπος γενόμενος ὃ βασιλεὺς διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ Ἂν 5 uM 5 3 , > a 5 ’ τοὺς ἀνακειμένους οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἀθετῆσαι αὐτήν. [Part IV. καὶ ἐξελθοῦσα εἶπεν εἰσελ- \ και ν και 27 καὶ εὐθὺς ἀποστείλας ὃ βασιλεὺς σπε- 28 ΄ ΞῚ es Sie ἣν κουλάτορα ἐπέταξεν ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφ- Ν > -“ Ν > Ν 5 La αλὴν αὐτοῦ. Kat ἀπελθὼν ἀπεκεφά- λισεν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ, καὶ ἤνεγ- Ν ς > Lo Wag. ele’ / L KEV, T1)V κεφαλὴν αυτου ἐπι TLVAKL και Ε SN a , x \ ἔδωκεν αὐτὴν τῳ κοράσιῳ, και TO KO=- ράσιον ἔδωκεν αὐτὴν TH μητρὶ αὐτῆς. we) , ε 6 \ > cal Dr 29 καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ HA- Ss a a Gay καὶ ἦραν τὸ πτῶμα αὐτοῦ, Kal ἔθηκαν αὐτὸν ev μνημείῳ. Five Thousand are fed. — VV. W. Coast of the Lake of Galilee. N. E. Coast of the Same. Marx VI. 30-44. K Ν / δ Κ᾽ / δι Ων αι συναγονται οι GTOOTOAOL προς \ > las ἣν 9 4 > a tov ᾿Ιησοῦν καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν αὐτῷ Ἀ , Ν 81 πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησαν καὶ ἐδίδαξαν. καὶ 10 Luke EX, 10-17 / Kai ὑποστρέψαντες οἱ ἀπόστολοι ΄“ ΄ διηγήσαντο αὐτῷ ὅσα ἐποίησαν. ---- , τς a ε a 8. ΦΌΙΝ 2297 > oF ΄ ἌΣ ΄ 3\7 λέγει αυτοις " δεῦτε ῃυμεις αυτοι Κατ ἰδίαν εις €py [Lov τόπον και, ἀναπαύσασθε ὀλί- Ss Ν Ἐ 9 / ον εε / 4 Ἃς 2ῸΝ σι > ’ γον. ησαν γὰρ οι EPXOMEVOL και OL UTAaYOVTES πολλοί, και οὐδὲ φαγεῖν ευὐυκαιρουν. Matt. XIV. 13-21. 13 ἀκοῦσας δὲ ὁ Ἴη- σοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν / ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ > 5" ,ὔ εἰς ἔρημον τό- 3 307 πον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν " \ , καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολού- θησαν αὐτῷ πε- ἣν 5 Ν a , Cot ἀπὸ τῶν πό- 92 99 MARK VI. καὶ ἀπῆλθον eis td tal ἔρημον τόπον τῷ πλοίῳ κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. Ν 5S > 3 καὶ εἶδον αὐτοὺς Ν ὑπάγοντας καὶ , 3 ἐπέγνωσαν αὖ- ἣν lA \ τοὺς πολλοί, καὶ n Ν lal πεζῇ ἀπὸ πασῶν ἴω / τῶν πόλεων συν- λεων. έδραμον ἐκεῖ καὶ προῆλθον ααὖν- τούς. Mt. 14:18. πεζοὶ S 1, Z vg West.mg.; πεζῇ BC Ὁ Treg. West. txt. Me. 6 : 29. αὐτὸν δὰ; αὐτὸ ABCDLA 10 11 LUKE IX. - καὶ παραλα- Ν > Ν ec βὼν αὐτοὺς ὑπε- ’ χώρησεν ἰδίαν εἰς πόλιν ᾽ κατ καλουμένην Βηθ- \ mo σαϊδά. οἱ δὲ o- ἃ 3 χλοι γνόντες ἢ- κολούθησαν αὐὖ- a TW, 8 ἀσθενούντων. Joun VI. 1-14. 1 Mera ταῦτα ἀπ- ἤλθεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς πέραν τῆς θα- λάσσης τῆς Τα- λιλαίας τῆς Τιβε- 4 > , ἢ ριάδος - ἠκολού- \ 3 a ᾿, θει δὲ αὐτῷ ὅ- χλος πολύς, ὅτι ἑώρων τὰ σημεῖα ἃ ἐποίει ἐπὶ τῶν ἀνῆλθεν δὲ εἰς τὸ ὄρος Ἰησοῦς, Treg. West. Rev. itvg; pm ὅσα δ A B C? D LA cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 80 ἐδίδαξαν S* C* ape 8 64.] UNTIL THE THIRD. JOHN VI. 13 Ny 92.9 , \ a a > a > BS > \ \ , coe \ a 4 καὶ ἐκεῖ ἐκαθέζετο μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ. ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς TO πάσχα ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων. MATT, XIV. MARK VI. LUKE ΙΧ. 14 Καὶ ἐξελθὼν εἷ- 84 Καὶ ἐξελθὼν εἷ- 11 — καὶ ἀποδεξά- 15 16 δὲν πολὺν ὄχλον, Ν > , καὶ ἐσπλαγχνί- ἐ Ῥω. > a σθη ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς > , ἐθεράπευ- 9.5 αρ- ΘΑ, LA ῥώστους αὐτῶν. Ν και σεν τοὺς ὀψίας δὲ γενομέ- νης πε τῶν ε (A) Ν αυτῷ οι μα TAL + ἔρη- ’ 5 ε / μος εστιν O TO- προσῆλθον λέγοντες * πος καὶ 7) ὥρα ΡΞ ΠΝ παρῆλθεν ἠδη ἀπόλυσον οὖν OE ee? 9 Tous ὄχλους, ἵνα ἀπελθόντες εἰς τὰς κώμας ἀγο- ράσωσιν ἑαυτοῖς βρώματα. ὃ δὲ πὸ 3 a) > €L7TEV αὐτοῖς " OV χρείαν ἀπελθεῖν - ἔχουσιν δότε αὐτοῖς ὑμεῖς φα- γεῖν. 90 97 dev πολὺν ὄχλον, \ 3 ’ καὶ ἐσπλαγχνί- a x fal σθὴη ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς, ὡς / A 3 πρόβατα μὴ ἔ- XOVTa ποιμένα, bf > οτι ἧσαν καὶ ἤρξατο δι- δάσκειν αὐτοὺς πολλά. καὶ ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γι- νομένης προσελ- θόντες οἱ μαθη- Ν 3 a m4 ταὶ αὑτοῦ ἐλεγον ὅτι ἔρημός ἐστιν ε / \ no ὁ τόπος, καὶ ἤδη ὥρα πολλή" ἀ- , Ψ᾽ ’΄ πόλυσον αὐτούς, ἵνα ἀπελθόντες > Ν , εἰς τοὺς κύκλῳ ἀγροῦς καὶ κώ- μας ἀγοράσωσιν ε col , , ἑαυτοῖς TL Payw- σιν. ὃ δὲ ἀπο- Ν μὰ 3 κριθεὶς εἶπεν av- =" 4 > τοῖς" δότε αὐὖ- Cal c Lal τοῖς ὑμεῖς φα- lo Ni / γεῖν. Kat λέγου- 12 19 σιν αὐτῷ: ἀπελθόν- τες ἀγοράσωμεν δη- I ’ », ναριὼν διακοσίων αρ- τους, καὶ δώσωμεν 5 Me. 6:35. γινομένης (yew. D) SD West. mg.; γενομένης A BLA Treg. West.txt. | προσελθόντες S* A D (sed add αὐτῷ ante Acy. A, post. Aey. D) vg; add αὐτῷ NCBA cop syrr Treg. West. Rey. Mt. 14:15. παρῆλθεν ἤδη δὰ 2 West.mg. ; ἤδη παρῆλθεν B C D Treg. West.txt. Rev. | οὖν δὰ C Z cop West.mg.; om B Ὁ L it vg μενος αὐτοὺς ἐ- λάλει αὐτοῖς περὶ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ Ν fe: ΕΣ τοὺς χρείαν ἔ- χοντας θεραπείας 25 ἰατο. ε Swe /, ἡ δὲ ἡμέρα ἤρξατο κλίνειν " , προσελθόντες δὲ ε ΄ 53 ot δώδεκα εἶπον > “ 5 / αὐτῷ - ἀπόλυσον Ἁ Ε2 [2 τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα πορευθέντες εἰς Ν , z: τὰς κύκλῳ κώ- μας καὶ ἀγροὺς καταλύσωσιν καὶ εὕρωσιν ἐπισι- ΄, “ a τισμόν, OTL ὧδε , / ἐν ἐρήμῳ τόπῳ > / ἐσμέν. 5 εἶπεν δὲ Ν 5 ,ὔὕ πρὸς αὐτούς ° δότε αὐτοῖς φα- γεῖν ὑμεῖς. Treg. West.txt. Rev. D cop; add Ἰησοῦς δὸ B CL Treg. West. Rey. Joh. 6: 7. JOHN VI. 5 ἐπάρας οὖν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὃ Ἴη- σοῦς καὶ θεασά- μενος ὅτι πολὺς ὄχλος ἔρχεται Ν 3 / πρὸς αὑτὸν, λέ. γει πρὸς Φίλιπ- πον " πόθεν ἀγο- ράσωμεν ἄρτους ἜΗΝ ΄ e ἵνα φάγωσιν οὗ- Ν δὲ πειρά- τοι; τοῦτο ἔλεγεν ζων αὐτόν - αὖ- τὸς γὰρ yoe τί ἔμελλεν ποιεῖν. ἀποκρίνεται αὐτῷ ὃ Φίλιππος - δια- κοσίων δηναρίων ἄρτοι οὐκ ἀρκοῦ- σιν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα ἕκαστος αὐτῶν βραχύ τι λάβῃ. λέγει αὐτῷ εἷς ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, ᾿Ανδρέας 16 ὁ δὲ δ" ἀποκρίνεται S* De"; ἀπεκρίθη Sec A BL it vg Treg. West. Rev. Me. 6: 37. δώσωμεν S D 33 Treg.mg.; δώσομεν AB L A 2P¢ it vg Treg.txt. West. Rey. 14 17 18 19 20 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER MATT. XIV. οἵ δὲ λέ-: γουσιν αὐτῷ. > 3, eo οὐκ ἔχομεν ὧδε εἰ μὴ πέντε ἀρ- A , 5 τους καὶ δύο ἰ- χθύας. 6 δὲ εἷ- / "4 πεν " φέρετέ μοι - 3 ΄ \ ὧδε αὐτούς. Kal ᾽ὔ Ν κελεύσας τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνακλι- ΣΌΝ a επι TOV θῆναι χόρτου, 98 99 40 Ν ’, καὶ ἀνέπεσαν ἣν ε Ν κατα €EKATOV λαβὼν τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους καὶ Ν / > , τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἀναβλέψας Ν 5 Ν 3 τὸν οὐρανὸν εὑ- 3 εις λόγησεν, καὶ κλάσας ἔδωκεν, τοῖς μαθηταῖς τοὺς ἄρτους, οἵ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς 3, ὄχλοις. \ u καὶ ἔφα- ἣν Ν γον πάντες καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν, ν᾿ καὶ ἦραν τὸ πε- ρισσεῦον τῶν κλασμάτων δώ- ’ δεκα κοφίνους πλήρεις. 41 42 48 MARK VI. 3 a“ ἴω αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν ; ὁ δὲ λέγει αὖ- Lal , τοῖς * πόσους ἀρ- τους ἔχετε; ὕ- / 3." Ν πάγετε ἴδετε. καὶ ΄ / γνόντες λέγου- ,ὔ \ σιν: πέντε, καὶ , 5 , AN δύο ἰχθύας. καὶ 2 ἑ > a ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς 5 “ ,ὔ ἀνακλῖναι πάν- τας συμπόσια συμπόσια ἐπὶ τῷ χόρτῳ. Ν πρασιαὶ πρασιαΐί, χλωρῷ καὶ κατὰ πεντή- Ν κοντα. καὶ λα- βὼν τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς , > , > δύο ἰχθύας ava- βλέψας εἰς τὸν 3 x > 4, οὐρανὸν εὐλόγη- σεν, καὶ κατέκλα- Ἂς σεν τοὺς ἄρτους καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς ἵνα πα- ρατιθῶσιν αὐτοῖς, ἊΝ Ν , 5 , καὶ τοὺς δύο ἰχθύ- ας ἐμέρισεν πᾶ- ΝΟΝ σιν. καὶ epayov πάντες καὶ ἐχορ- τάσθησαν" 14 1ὅ 16 17 LUKE IX. οἱ δὲ oa 3 51: Νν εἶπαν - οὐκ εἰσὶν δι ΠΝ A a ἡμῖν πλεῖον ἢ , ἄρτοι πέντε Kal > , , ἰχθύες δύο, εἰ ΄ , μήτι πορευθέντες a ἡμεῖς ἀγοράσω- μεν A Ἂς Lal τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον , βρώματα. --- εἷ- ‘ Ἂν MY πεν δὲ πρὸς TOUS εἰς πάντα SK > nw μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ: if > κατακλίνατε av- ‘ ’ὔ 3 Ἂς τους κλισίας ἀνὰ “2 πεντήκοντα. καὶ ἐποίησαν οὕτως ‘A / καὶ κατέκλιναν ἅπαντας. λαβὼν δὲ τοὺς πέντε ἄρ- ἊΝ Ν / τους Kal τοὺς δύο / ἰχθύας, ἀναβλέ- Ἂν Was εἰς τὸν οὐ- \ SNe pavov εὐλόγησεν αὐτοὺς καὶ κατέ- Ν , κλασεν, καὶ ἐδί- δου τοῖς μαθη- ταῖς παραθεῖναι ιν τῷ ὄχλῳ. καὶ ἔφα- γον καὶ ἐχορτά- σθησαν πάντες, 10 11 12 [Parr IV. JOHN VI. ὁ ἀδελφὸς Sipw- νος Πέτρου" ἔ- στιν παιδάριον ὧδε ὃς ἔχει πέντε ἄρτους κριθίνους καὶ δύο ὀψάρια - ἀλλὰ ταῦτα τί ἐστιν εἰς τοσού- τους; εἶπεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς: ποιή- σατε τοὺς ἀἂν- θρώπους ἀἄναπε- σεῖν. ἣν δὲ χόρ- τος πολὺς ἐν τῷ / τόπῳ. — ἔλαβεν S Ν ΕΝ οὖν τοὺς ἄρτους (25) a \ > ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ €v- ΄, ἣν χαρίστησεν καὶ ἔδωκεν τοῖς ἀνα- κειμένοις, ὁμοίως Ν > an > καὶ ἐκ τῶν oa- Le Ὁ ΕΣ ρίων ὅσον ἤθε- λον. ὡς δὲ ἐνε- πλήσθησαν, λέ- ye τοῖς μαθη- ταῖς αὐτοῦ" συν- Ἵ ὰ ΄ λά ἵν ἡ τι ἀπόληται ἀγάγετε τὰ περισσεύσαντα κλάσματα. ἵνα μή τι ἀπόληται. Ν καὶ s , ἦραν κλασμάτων δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα, καὶ STONE Fin > ΄ απὸ TWV ἰχθύων. ἌΓΑΝ Ν καὶ ἤρθη τὸ πε- ρισσεῦσαν αὐὖ- a , τοῖς κλασμάτων, κόφινοι δώδεκα. 19 > συνήγαγον οὖν, | / , και εγεμισαν δώ- δεκα κοφίνους , 3 κλασμάτων ἐκ τῶν πέντε ἄρτων lo 1A a τῶν κριθίνων, ἃ > 4 tal / ἐπερίσσευσαν τοῖς βεβρωκόσιν. ---- 1...9:14. δὲ S* ete? L ve cop; yap δδδα ABCD & syrr Treg. West. Rev. | ava A vg cop syrr; pn ὡσεὶ δὲ BC DLE33 [Treg.] West. Rey. 4.0.1]. εὐχαρίστησεν (nix. D) καὶ δ D; εὐχαριστήσας A BL vg cop Treg. West. Rev. | ἔδωκεν SD; διέδωκεν A B L yg Treg. West. Rev. 8 65.] MATT. XIV. MARK VI. 21 ot δὲ 44 καὶ ἦσαν οἱ φα- ἐσθίοντες ἦσαν γόντες τοὺς ἀρ- ΄ ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ πεν- τους πεντακισχι- τακισχίλιοι χω- λιοι ἄνδρες. ρὶς γυναικῶν καὶ παιδίων. § 65. Jesus walks upon the Water. — Lake of Galilee. Marr. XIV. 22-36. 22 Kal ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθητὰς ἐμ- βῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖον καὶ προάγειν av- \ > N ΄, ῳ a 53 ΄ TOV εἰς TO περᾶν, εως OU ἀπολύσῃ UNTIL THE THIRD. 15 LUKE IX. δὲ ἄνδρες πεντακισ- JOHN VI. = ! Ξ 14 ἦσαν ὡσεὶ 10 ἀνέπεσαν οὖν οἱ Ε) Ν 5 ἄνδρες τὸν ἀριθ- Ν χίλιοι. -- μὸν ὡς πεντακισ- 14 χίλιοι. ---- Οἱ οὖν 3 > ‘ a > ἣν fal ἄνθρωποι ἰδόντες ὃ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον o - A ε ΄ ἔλεγον ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ἀληθῶς ὃ προφή- της ὃ εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐρχόμενος. Gennesaret. Mark VI. 45-56. 45 Καὶ εὐθὺς ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθη- ‘ > ca) > a 3 Ἂν o Ν τὰς αὐτοῦ ἐμβῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖον καὶ προάγειν εἰς τὸ πέραν πρὸς Βηθσαϊ- / ῳ 3 A > τς Ἂν 3 dav, ἕως αὐτὸς ἀπολύει τὸν ὄχλον. 46 καὶ ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς ἀπῆλθεν εἰς τὸ ὄρος προσεύξασθαι. Joun VI. 15-21. 3 A > \ “ , 3, Ἰησοῦς οὖν γνοὺς ὅτι μέλλουσιν ἔρχεσθαι Nee: 44 JN μ᾿ , > N καὶ ἁρπάζειν αὐτὸν ἵνα ποιήσωσιν αὐτὸν βασι- 28 τοὺς ὄχλους. καὶ ἀπολύσας τοὺς + 3 ,ὔ ΓῚ \ » 9 307 ὄχλους ἀνέβη εἰς TO ὄρος κατ᾽ ἰδίαν προσεύξασθαι. 15 MATT. XIV. ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης 47 24 μόνος nv ἐκεῖ. τὸ δὲ MARK VI. Ny 3 , / καὶ ὀψίας γενομένης λέα, φεύγει πάλιν εἰς Ν ” SPOON 4 TO ὅρος αὐτὸς μόνος. ε 16 Os δὲ ὀψία ἐγένετο, 26 a + ΄, Ν πλοῖον ἤδη μέσον τὴς 4 Ἂν θαλάσσης nv βασανι- ζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμά- των " ἣν γὰρ ἐναντίος εν , \ ὃ ἄνεμος. τετάρτῃ δὲ an An ν \~ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς ἦλ- θεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς περι- “Ὁ > Ν “Ἁ) 4, πατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς θάλασ- 9 7 Ν SPN σαν. ἰδόντες δὲ αὐτὸν ΒΡ ἊΝ, “ / ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περι- πατοῦντα ἐταράχθη- σαν, λέγοντες ὅτι φάν- 48 49 > \ a > ΄, ἣν τὸ πλοῖον ἐν μέσῳ wn / \ 5 τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ av- Ν oi an Lal TOS μόνος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. \ 5 ‘\ 3 Ν καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτοὺς βασα- νιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύ- μ ς D ἐλαύ Ss \ c νειν, ἣν yap ὃ ἄνεμος 4 ΄ ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς, περὶ ’ὔὕ Ν nw τετάρτην φυλακὴν τῆς Ν la A νυκτὸς ἔρχεται πρὸς αὖ- ‘ rn A nr TOUS περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς , θαλάσσης. καὶ ἤθελεν “ 3 γ᾽ ε παρελθεῖν αὐτούς - οἱ δὲ ἬΝ SEEN 5. Ὁ € lOOVTES QAUTOV ETL 17 18 19 / ε Ν κατέβησαν οἱ μαθηταὶ 3 Gove PLN Ν 4 αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασ- NaS) / > σαν, Ἷ καὶ ἐμβάντες εἰς πλοῖον ἤρχοντο περαν τῆς θαλάσσης εἰς Κα- φαρναούμ. Ν 3 ἊΝ, ε βεν δὲ αὐτοὺς ἡ σκο- κατέλα- ’, τία καὶ οὔπω ἐληλύθει 3 “ \ 3 , τ. Τησοῦς πρὸς αὐτούς, ' 7 τε θάλασσα 9 , ἀνέμου. μεγάλου πνέοντος διη- , > , yelpero. ἐληλακότες > ε ΄ ” OVV WS στάδια €LKOOL + Joh. 6:14. ὃ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον δὰ AD Lye syrr Westmg.; ἃ ἐπ. σημεῖα B cop Treg. mg. West.txt. Rev.mg. Mt. 14:22. καὶ pr S* ΟἿ ; add εὐθέως NP B C3 vg Treg. [West.] Rev. Joh. 6:15. φεύγει S* ve; ἀνεχώρησεν S ABD Loop syrr Treg. West. Rey. Mt. 14: 24. 'μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης jv SC Lit vg Treg.mg. West.mg. ; ἣν εἰς μέσον τῆς θαλ. D; σταδίους πολλοὺς ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἀπεῖχεν B cop Treg.txt. West.txt. Rev.mg. Joh. 6:17. κατέλαβεν δὲ αὐτοὺς ἣ σκο- tla SD; καὶ σκοτία ἤδη ἐγεγόνει A B L vg Treg. West. Rev. 19 στάδια δ" D; σταδίους S* velo A B L Treg. West. Mt. 14:26. ἰδόντες δὲ (καὶ ἰδ. ve) αὐτὸν N* ve; καὶ ἰδ, αὖτ. οἱ μαθηταὶ C L cop syrr Treg. ; of δὲ wad. ἰδ. adr. S* B D West. 76 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Parr IV. MATT. XIV. MARK VI. JOHN VI. gD) ‘ be nn ΄ / BI / ᾿ τασμά ἐστιν, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπα- πέντε ἣ τριάκοντα θεω- 27 τοῦ φόβου ἔκραξαν. τοῦντα ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάν- ροῦσιν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν πε- 5 Ἂν Ν > / > , > Ν > νι. “Ὁ > Ν “ εὐθὺς δὲ ἐλάλησεν av- τασμά ἐστιν, καὶ ἀνέ- ριπατοῦντα ἐπὶ τῆς θα- rn , a - ΄ Ν > , ays \ a τοῖς λέγων" θαρσεῖτε, 50 κραξαν. πάντες yap ad- λάσσης καὶ ἐγγὺς τοῦ > Lanse] Ν lal Ν ot δ 99 ΄ ’ ΄ Ν ἐγώ εἰμι - μὴ φοβεῖσθε. τὸν εἶδαν καὶ ἐταράχθη- πλοίου γινόμενον, καὶ 28 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ αὐτῷ ὃ . σαν. ὃ δὲ εὐθὺς ἐλάλη- 20 ἐφοβήθησαν. ὃ δὲ λέ- Ilérpos εἶπεν - κύριε, σεν μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέ- γει αὐτοῖς - ἐγώ εἰμι, 5 ae αι Ss , / > a cod \ cr εἰ ov εἶ, κέλευσόν pe yer αὐτοῖς - θαρσεῖτε, μὴ φοβεῖσθε. 3 “ f aS. Ν > , 3 Ν ira! ἐλθεῖν πρός σε ἐπὶ τὰ ἐγώ εἰμι, μὴ φοβεῖσθε. ¢ > ι 29 ὕδατα. 6 δὲ εἶπεν ἐλ- θέ. καὶ καταβὰς ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου ἸΠΤέτρος περιεπάτησεν ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα καὶ ἦλθεν 3 a 30 πρὸς τὸν Ἰησοῦν. βλέπων δὲ τὸν ἄνεμον ἐφοβήθη, καὶ ἀρξάμενος καταποντίζε- 81 σθαι ἔκραξεν λέγων -: κύ ὥσόν ὑθέως δὲ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐκτεί ὴν χεῖρα ἐ ραξεν λέγων " κύριε, σῶσον με. εὐθέως δὲ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα ἐπε- λάβετο αὐτοῦ, καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ: ὀλιγόπιστε, εἰς MARK VI. JOHN VI. Ν / ᾿ 82 τίἐδίστασας ; καὶ ἀνα- 51 καὶ ἀνέβη πρὸς ai- 51 ἤθελον οὖν ἡ , REN > \ Ν 5 Ν “ Ἂ lal See 3 x βάντων αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ τοὺς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, καὶ λαβεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ a res. Δ 0? Wowie d ε + 5 cal Ν 3 , > , πλοῖον ἐκόπασεν ὃ ἄνε- ἐκόπασεν ὃ ἄνεμος πλοῖον, καὶ εὐθέως ἐγέ- ε Ἂς tet “ 4 Ἂν, δ > n Ν a Le, Ἂς 33 μος. οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ καὶ λίαν ἐκ περισσοῦ veto τὸ πλοῖον ἐπὶ τὴν ΞΞ κ cs n ‘ n προσεκύνησαν αὐτῷ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο. γῆν εἰς ἣν ὑπῆγον. / > ἴω na 3 x A > Ν λέγοντες: ἀληθῶς θεοῦ 52 οὐ γὰρ συνῆκαν ἐπὶ εν > 5 " 5 > > 3. τς ε δέ υἱὸς El. τοῖς ἄρτοις, ἀλλ’ ἣν αὑτῶν ἡ καρδία - MATT. XIV. πεπωρωμένη. 5 Ν , Sas) Ν Led 84 Kat διαπεράσοντες ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὴν 53 Καὶ διαπεράσαντες ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν “ 3 ΄ ἌΧ 9 ΄ DAG 3 Τ' Ν Ν ΄ 35 γῆν εἰς Τεννησαρέτ. καὶ ἐπιγνόντες ἦλθον εἰς Γεννησαρὲτ καὶ προσωρμέ- > Ν ε + lal i 5 lA A 0S ’ὔ bp > cal αὐτὸν οἱ ἄνδρες τοῦ τόπου ἐκείνου 54 σθησαν. Kai ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ 5 { 3 με Ν / λ , ὑθὺ > , Ψ᾽ ΣᾺΝ ! / ἀπέστειλαν εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον 55 πλοίου εὐθὺς ἐπιγνόντες αὐτὸν ἱ περιέ- an 7 Ν ΄ 3 ἽΝ ἈΝ ἐκείνην, καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάν- Spapov ὅλην τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην καὶ Ν “ ,ὔ 3 Ν a / ἐς 86 τας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, καὶ παρεκά- ἤρξαντο ἐπὶ τοῖς κραβάττοις τοὺς κα- a “ / ov 3) Aovy αὐτὸν ἵνα μόνον ἅψωνται τοῦ κῶς ἔχοντας περιφέρειν, ὅπου ἤκουον ‘> = ΤΣ / 3 a Ν 7 > / \ @ 2X > ΄ κρασπέδου του ιματιου αὐτου" και 56 OTL ἐστίν. καὶ ὁπου ἐὰν €LO ET OPEVETO Lg 4 ΄, > ΄ Ἃ > , BI > 3 , ὅσοι ἥψαντο διεσώθησαν. εἰς κώμας ἢ εἰς πόλεις ἢ εἰς ἀγρούς, a “ ‘ > ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς ἐτίθεσαν τοὺς ἀσθε- ce] Ν / SN ν Ἃ a £8 -2Σ΄7οἦἽλ᾽ε VOUVTGS, και παρεκάλουν QUTOV ινα κἂαν του κρασπεόοῦυ TOV ιμα- ’ὔ > A 7 \ - a 7 > cal > tf TLOV αὐτου aywvTat ἕ και οσοι ἂν ἡψαντο αὐυτου ἐσώζοντο. § 66. Our Lord’s Discourse to the Multitude in the Synagogue at Capernaum. Many Disciples turn back. Peter’s Profession of Faith. — Capernaum. Joun VI. 22-74, Wl tt 22 Τῇ ἐπαύριον ὃ ὄχλος ὃ ἑστηκὼς πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης εἶδον ὅτι πλοιάριον ἄλλο οὐκ ἢν ἐκεῖ εἰ μὴ ἕν, καὶ ὅτι οὐ συνεισῆλθεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ὃ Ἰησοῦς εἰς Mt. 16:27. αὐτοῖς S* D cop; add 6 Ἰη- ἐλθεῖν Ne ΟΣ D L Treg.txt. West.mg. Rev. σοῦς ΟἹ, Treg.txt. et [mg.] Rev.; pm ὃ Ἰησ. txt.; ἐλθεῖν ἦλθεν οὖν S*. SB vg [West.] Mc.6:51. ἐκ περισσοῦ (περισσῶς Ὁ) A 29 καὶ ἦλθεν B Cid Treg.mg. ον ρ.; (D); om δὲ BLA [Treg.] West. Rev. § 66.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 17 JOHN VI. ; , a a boa 23 τὸ πλοῖον ἀλλὰ μόνοι ot μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθον - ἄλλα ἦλθον πλοιάρια ἐκ Tr lal , 7 4 a βεριάδος ἐγγὺς Tod τόπου ὅπου ἔφαγον τὸν ἄρτον εὐχαριστήσαντος τοῦ κυρίου. [2 ἊΣ io) em μή > a 3 3, 5 a 3Qr ε Ν 3 ay 81 3 24 ὅτε οὖν εἶδεν ὃ ὄχλος ὅτι ᾿Τησοῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκεῖ οὐδὲ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, ἐνέβησαν 25 αὐτοὶ εἰς τὰ πλοιάρια καὶ ἦλθον εἰς ΚΚαφαρναοὺμ, ζητοῦντες τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν. καὶ tJ / ay , an ,ὔ > > aA ε , , a , εὑρόντες αὐτὸν πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης εἶπον αὐτῷ - ῥαββεί, πότε ὧδε γέγονας ; > 4, 3 a ε»" a \ SS > Ν 3 \ , ‘cone foe tp 3 μὲ 26 ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Τησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν - ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ζητεῖτέ με οὐχ ὅτι 5} Lal 3 ast 3 ΄ 3 a 4 NES s 2 ΄ Ν 27 εἴδετε σημεῖα, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἐφάγετε ἐκ τῶν ἄρτων καὶ ἐχορτάσθητε. ἐργάζεσθε μὴ Ν lal Ν 3 AX / > λλὰ ἊΝ “ Ν ’ὔ > Ν a7 τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν ἀπολλυμένην, ἀλλὰ τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, ἃ ε εν τ > 6 ΄ δὼ ε - Lal Ὁ ε Ν > / ε /, ἣν ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου δίδωσιν ὑμῖν - τοῦτον yap ὁ πατὴρ ἐσφράγισεν, ὃ θεός. 3 > \ ον Ἃ , a + > ΄, θ ν ἡ A A 12 28 29 εἶπον οὖν πρὸς αὐτόν" τί ποιῶμεν ἵνα ἐργαζώμεθα τὰ ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ; | dze- κρίθη Ἰησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ, ἵνα πιστεύητε εἰς a > a > la 3 3 3 a 7 > “- Ν fal 7 ΜῸ ὧν 80 ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος. εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ - τί οὖν ποιεῖς σὺ σημεῖον, ἵνα ἴδωμεν καὶ 31 7 ΄ y (sor) (ζ δ᾿ «ε / (~ a Ν 4 3, 3 y a 3 ’ὔ΄ πιστεύσωμέν σοι, τί ἐργάζῃ; οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν τὸ μάννα ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, a ᾿ 3 “ 3 A μὸν 3 “ αρτον εκ TOV ουρανου ἔδωκεν αυτοις , καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον - a 5 > 2 An ie? a 3... ἃ ΓΑ ΡΟΝ , Cater) 3 oA 82 φαγεῖν. εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς- ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ Μωῦσῆς δέδ car Ν ΕΣ > ζω 3 lal tA? c [4 διὸ (40) Ν + ἐδωκεν ὑμῖν TOV ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ὃ πατὴρ μου δίδωσιν ὑμῖν TOV ἄρτον 2 a > “- Ν 3 / ε Ν᾿ 4 c Las ~ > \ ε ’, 3 88 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸν ἀληθινόν. ὃ γὰρ ἄρτος ὁ του θεοῦ ἐστὶν ὃ καταβαίνων ἐκ ΤΑ τς ἢ a \ \ \ ~ ΄ “ is \ sae ΄ , 34 τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ζωὴν διδοὺς τῷ κόσμῳ. εἶπον οὖν πρὸς aiTov: κύριε, πάντοτε Ἂς δ δὰ A A a 3S Ss > Alter a > , > eC», a n 35 δὸς ἡμῖν τὸν ἄρτον τοῦτον. εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς " ©.) / Ν ae 3 Ν Ay \Ne¢ , δον ἃ 3 Ν / , ὃ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ, καὶ ὃ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε. 3 3 3 6 ves μὲ Ν ε ΄ Ν > , n ἃ Ὁ fe [: 36 37 ἀλλ᾽ εἶπον ὑμῖν ὅτι καὶ ἑωράκατε καὶ οὐ πιστεύετε. πᾶν ὃ δίδωσίν μοι ὃ ‘ \ Cs Ns \ Ν > ig Ν > Xs 3 ἘΝ aes ΄ WE i] Ψ 38 πατὴρ πρὸς ἐμὲ ἥξει, καὶ τὸν ἐρχόμενον πρὸς ἐμὲ οὐ μὴ ἐκβάλω ἔξω, | ὅτι κατα- ’ 9 AY a > Lal 3 μά / Ν / Ay 47 Ν 3 sy ον / lal βέβηκα ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ οὐχ iva ποιήσω τὸ θέλημα τὸ ἐμὸν ἀλλὰ TO θέλημα τοῦ / / “ “5 \ / A / 4 7 a a O79 la 39 πέμψαντός με. τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός pe, ἵνα πᾶν ὃ δέδωκέν 40 Σ 3 Ne ἐξ 3 a ANG 3 ΄΄ oN > ΤΕ ΄ ε , a μοι μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ ἐν TH ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. τοῦτο ‘ \ / cal / “ lal \ \ γὰρ ἐστιν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πατρός μου, ἵνα πᾶς ὁ θεωρῶν τὸν υἱὸν καὶ πιστεύων εἰς Ν / \ ~ 7 αὑτὸν ἔχη ζωὴν αἰώνιον καὶ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν ἐγὼ ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. > Δ =a εἰ a \ > an ἐΟ᾽ 3 Ἐς 3 c + ε 41 Ὀγόγγυζον οὖν οἱ ᾿Τουδαῖοι περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι εἶπεν - ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἄρτος 6 κατα- 2 Ν 3 “- 3 fa) ἴ Ν ἔλ 3 > ef, 3 Ἢ ce ε εν Tl ΄, ial 42 Bas ἐκ Tov οὐρανοῦ, ἧἷ καὶ EXeyov: οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ᾿Ιησοῦς ὁ vids ᾿Ιωσήφ, οὗ lal Μ \ ΄ Ν los “ 4 Ὁ Ψ a ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν τὸν πατέρα Kal τὴν μητέρα ; πῶς νῦν λέγει οὗτος ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ οὐρα- / > a a Ν / 43 νοῦ καταβέβηκα ; ἣ ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - μὴ γογγύζετε μετ᾽ ἀλλή- 44 Xr ὐὑδεὶ δύ θλθεῖ ΄ ΕΣ Ane Ν ε / EX ΄ 53.515 wv. οὐδεὶς ὀύναται ἐλθεῖν πρὸς με ἐὰν μὴ ὁ πατὴρ ὁ πέμψας με ἑλκύσῃ αὑτὸν, 5 Be ND. td EN > ma 2 , «ε / 3, ie " 2 ἴω , 45 Kay@ ἀναστήσω αὑτὸν ἐν TH ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. ἐστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τοῖς προφη- ἊΝ A A > ταις“ καὶ ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ θεοῦ" πᾶς οὖν ὃ ἀκούσας παρὰ ἴω Ἂν \ Ν 2 Ν ee 3 μι Χ / [7.2 / 3 Nee, 46 τοῦ πατρὸς Kal μαθὼν ἔρχεται πρὸς ἐμέ. οὐχ OTL τὸν πατέρα ἑώρακέν τις, εἰ μὴ ὃ xX BS a a im es Ν ΄ ΕΝ ΕΝ , εκ ε ΄ 47 ὧν παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, οὗτος ἑώρακεν τὸν θεόν. ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃ πιστεύων 3, ἣν 27 Rw > εὖν “a a ε , (ng ta) 5 3 48 49 ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον. ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς. οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν ἔφαγον ἐν δὃἝ:. ν ε {: an a © οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ ἄρτος ὃ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατα- 50 τῇ ἐρήμῳ τὸ μάννα καὶ ἀπέθανον " 5. 91. Ps. 78:24. Comp. Ex. 16: 13, sq. b 45. Is. 54:13. Comp. Jer. 31 : 33, sq. © 49. Comp. Ex. 16:15. Joh. 6:28. πλοιάρια A (D) 1,; πλοῖα (δ᾽) 38 ποιήσω SD L*; ποιῷ AB 1,2 T Treg. B vg Treg.mg. West. 27 δίδωσιν ὑμῖν West. 42 οὗτος sc S A vg syrr; om SD; ὑμῖν δώσει AB L Treg. West. BCDLT cop Treg. West. Rev. 35 οὖν SD 33; δὲ Avg; om BLT cop 46 θεόν S* D; πατέρα SCA BC LT vg Treg. West. Rey. cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 78 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER. [Part IV. va σ 3 > a / Ν ἊΝ 3 ff) / ae 2 εν ε la es βαίνων, ἵνα τις ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ καὶ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ. ἐγὼ εἶμι ὃ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν ὃ ἐκ x a n A a a τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς - ἐάν τις φάγῃ ἐκ τοῦ ἐμοῦ ἄρτου, ζήσει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα " N SE ee Ν ἃ ea , ε Ἂς ip) A , a ε ΄ὔ > ’ὔ καὶ ὃ ἄρτος δὲ ὃν ἐγὼ δώσω ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς, ἡ σάρξ μου ἐστίν. 3" ’΄ 3 “Ὁ ᾿ς ἴω ᾿Ἔμάχοντο οὖν πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι λέγοντες: πῶς δύναται ἡμῖν οὗτος a 5 > ἈΠ 85 a δοῦναι τὴν σάρκα φαγεῖν ; | εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, “ a ἴω ’, Ν a ἐὰν μὴ φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα, οὐκ a , \ , \ , ® ἔχετε ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς. ὃ τρώγων pov τὴν σάρκα Kal πίνων μου TO αἷμα ἔχει ’ὔ ἃς ~ 4 / ζωὴν αἰώνιον, κἀγὼ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν TH ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. ἡἣ yap σάρξ pov ady- cat e ΄ ’,ὔ θής ἐστιν βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστιν πόσις. 6 τρώγων pov τὴν Ξ \ ἢ - σάρκα καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα ἐν ἐμοι μένει κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ: καθὼς ἀπέστειλέν ε a Ν Rey a ὃ Sy Ἂ ΄ AS , > a , 8 ᾽ με ὃ ζῶν πατὴρ κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν πατέρα, καὶ ὃ τρώγων με κἀκεῖνος ζήσει δι Se. ey Se εν ε» a > a , 2 δὲ ν᾽ ε ΄ ἐμέ. οὗτός ἐστιν 6 ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς, οὐ καθὼς ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες a ΄, x a a 5 καὶ ἀπέθανον - ὃ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον ζήσει εἰς TOV αἰῶνα. ταῦτα εἶπεν ἐν συναγωγῇ διδάσκων ἐν Καφαρναούμ. > an lal cal > Πολλοὶ οὖν ἀκούσαντες ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ εἶπον - σκληρός ἐστιν ὃ λόγος οὗτος " τίς δύναται αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν ; ! εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐν ἑαυτῷ ὅτι γογγύζουσιν ae he A a Ξ > περὶ τούτου οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τοῦτο ὑμᾶς σκανδαλίζει ; | ἐὰν οὖν a a 4 4 , Ν ἴω θεωρῆτε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἣν τὸ πρότερον ; τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν τὸ ζωοποιοῦν, ἣ σὰρξ οὐκ ὠφελεῖ οὐδέν - τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἐγὼ λελάληκα ὑμῖν an Yao) τὶ Ψ 45 Τ ἀλλ᾽ 2X sf en Ν a 9 , τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν καὶ ζωή ἐστιν. ' ἀλλ᾽ εἰσὶν ἐξ ὑμῶν τινὲς οἱ οὐ πιστεύουσιν. ἡδει γὰρ ἐξ ἀρχῆς 6 Ἰησοῦς τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὃ παραδώσων a a o , κ᾿ κ᾿ αὐτόν. καὶ ἔλεγεν : διὰ τοῦτο εἴρηκα ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ἐμὲ ~ “ / ἐὰν μὴ ἢ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ πατρός. an n a a \ ΄ Ἔκ τούτου οὖν πολλοὶ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθον εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω καὶ οὐκέτι 9 > lal , > 7 3 51 lal a δώδε a: x at ε “ θέλε μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ περιεπάτουν. εἶπεν οὖν ὃ ᾿Τησοῦς τοῖς δώδεκ μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε ε , Ἷ 3 Ὁ ᾿ΕΝ ΠΣ Tle Ξ ΄ Ν ’ 5 r , a) 5 ὑπάγειν ; Ἷ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ Σίμων ἹΠέτρος - κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεθα ; a “a 9 > ῥήματα ζωῆς αἰωνίου ἔχεις * Kal ἡμεῖς πεπιστεύκαμεν καὶ ἐγνώκαμεν OTL σὺ εἶ ὃ Ca A a > Ὅ 3 a ε Ἴ AX 3 SL. NY AC) es Ν ὃ 50 ἐξ λ' ΄ ἅγιος τοῦ θεοῦ. ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξά- “ > ’, 3 μην; καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν. ἔλεγεν δὲ τὸν ᾿Ιούδαν Σίμωνος Ἴσκα- , a SA POU 3, AN ὃ ὃ ΄ Δ > a ὃ Ἢ ριώτου * οὗτος γὰρ ἔμελλεν αὐτὸν παραδιδόναι, εἷς ὧν ἐκ τῶν δώδεκα. ὙΠ. 1 Μετὰ ταῦτα περιεπάτει ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ: οὐ γὰρ ἤθελεν ἐν τῇ 3 ’ a Wg el ’ LEN ε Ἢ ὃ lal 3 tal Ἰουδαίᾳ TEPLTATELV, OTL εξητουν αὐτὸν OL LOVOGLOL ATOKTELVAL. Joh.6:51. τοῦ ἐμοῦ δὰ ; τούτου τοῦ BC West. | τῶν μαθητῶν SC DL vg; Ρῃ ἐκ B L T vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. | ὑπὲρτῆς Τ' Treg. West. τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς h. 1. δὲ ; post ἢ σάρξ μου ἐσ- Joh.7:1. Μετὰ ταῦτα S* et?> (3 D; pm τίν ΒΟΙΙ, Τ 33 vg Treg. West. Rev. καὶ Sc2 B C* L cop Treg. West. Rey. 66 οὖν SN D; om BC LT vg syrr Treg. PAR ESV. ---. ,.Ἐ Ἐ. FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER UNTIL HIS FINAL DEPARTURE FROM GALILEE AT THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. Time: Six months. § 67. Our Lord justifies his Disciples for eating with Unwashen Hands. Pharisaic Traditions. — Capernaum. Marr. XV. 1-20. ὅτε προσέρχονται τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων Φαρισαῖοι καὶ γραμ- ματεῖς λέγοντες " 2 θόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων. Marx VII. 1-23. \ , Ων 3 ‘\ ε Καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς avTov οἱ Φα- ρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων ἐλ- Ν , καὶ ἰδόν- Ν a a a Ὁ τες τινὰς TOV μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ὅτι κοι- a ΄ A> + ΄ \ 5, 3 vais χερσίν, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις, ἐσθίουσιν τοὺς ἄρτους, ---- ἴ οἱ γὰρ - Ν lal an Φαρισαῖοι καὶ πάντες οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἐὰν μὴ πυκνὰ νίψωνται τὰς χεῖρας 3 > ΄ a an 4 οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν, κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, | Kat ἀπὸ 3 a Ν Ν / ὰ ἀγορᾶς ἐὰν μὴ βαπτίσωνται οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν, καὶ ἄλλά πολλά ἐστιν ἃ Ἃ a a παρέλαβον κρατεῖν, βαπτισμοὺς ποτηρίων Kal ἕεστῶν καὶ yaAKiov — 2 διατί οἱ μαθηταί ’, \ 4d gov παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ; οὐ γὰρ νίπτονται 8 τὰς χεῖρας ὅταν ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν. ὃ Ν 3 ‘ 3 3 [ον ε 7 δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ---- ὑπο- ’ an > , Nea ex κριταί, καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν περὶ ὑμῶν ε a4 , ε ΩΝ Ὁ 8 Ἡσαΐας λέγων ὃ λαὸς οὗτος ϊ εἰλεσίν pe τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ τοῖς χείλεσίν μ pa, ἢ καρδία αὐτῶν πόῤῥω ἀπέχει NS LED κ 3. ε a 5 καὶ ETEPWTWOLVY αὐτὸν OL Φαρισαῖοι Ν lal , καὶ ot γραμματεῖς - διατί οὐ περιπα- τοῦσιν ot μαθηταί κατὰ τὴν παράδο- Lal / > Ν a ow τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ κοιναῖς \ > ’, N ” ε Ν 6 χερσὶν ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον; ὃ δὲ .- 3 a “- > , εἶπεν αὐτοῖς: καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν ε A a a “ Ἡσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ε , -2 τ“ e ε κ ὡς γέγραπται" ὅτι οὗτος ὃ λαὸς val / , a ε ὃ Ν τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἢ O€ ΄, 3 “Ὁ γος Ἐπ Ὁ 3 l4 καρδία αὐτῶν πόῤῥω ἀπέχει 8. ἡ etc. Is, 29:13. Me. 7:1. ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων καὶ ἰδόντες West. Rey. 4 βαπτίσωνται A 1) al pler ve West.mg. ; ῥαντίσωνται δ B West.txt. Rev.mg. | χαλκίων 8 πυκνὰ Sve cop; πυγμῇ (πυκμῇ Ὁ) AB SBLA cop; add καὶ κλινῶν A D vg syrr DL Treg. West. Rey. Treg. West.mg. Rey.mg. 80 MATT. XV. 9 ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ: μάτην δὲ σέβον- με διδα- σκαλίας ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώ- ταί διδάσκοντες mov. — ’ Ae a le Ἂν 8 --- διατί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ς Ν nw nn iN Ἂς , ἐντολὴν Tod θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν 4 ὑμῶν ; 6 γὰρ θεὸς ἐνετείλατο λέ- γων"" τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ A τὴν μητέρα, καὶ ὃ κακολο- “ δ γῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανά- 5 τῳ τελευτάτω. ὑὕμεῖς δὲ λέγετε" ἃ A 4 a Ν a a lary Os ἂν εἴπῃ TO πατρὶ ἢ TH μητρί lal a ON > ° a 9 a“ > ‘ δῶρον ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς, οὐ μὴ av τιμήσει TOV πατέρα αὐτοῦ ἢ τὴν μητέ- ρα αὐτοῦ. \ 3 ’ Ν / 6 καὶ YKUPWTATE TOV νόμον n ἴω Ν ἣν / ε lal TOU θεοῦ διὰ ΤῊΝ παράδοσιν ᾽ῃυημων. — 10 Καὶ προσκαλεσάμενος τὸν ὄχλον > a ΄ \ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς: ἀκούετε καὶ συνίετε. 5 Ν > / > Ν ’ 11 οὐ τὸ εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα κοι- al Ν Ε) 3 Ν Ν > vot τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ TO ἐκπορευ- Lal , wn Lal ομενον EK τοῦ στόματος, τοῦτο κοινοῖ Ν 4 TOV ἄνθρωπον. FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Part V. MARK VII, ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ: μάτην δὲ σέβον- ταί με διδάσκοντες διδα- / σκαλίας ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώ- 8 πων. ἀφέντες τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ θεοῦ κρατεῖτε τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνθρώ- 9 πων. καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς - καλῶς ἀθε- a Ν > \ a a ΄ Ν τεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν Moi- Len Ν 53 a la Ν ons γὰρ εἶπεν" τίμα τὸν πα- τέρα τὴν μητέρα σου, καί: ὃ κακολογῶν πα- 10 παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε. σου καὶ \ ΄ ld τέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ Te- ; a , F x 11 λευτάτω. μεῖς δὲ λέγετε: ἐὰν » a a εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος TH πατρὶ ἢ TH μητρί: “ ᾽ς γ5 δῶ A ὃΝ ae a κορβᾶν, 0 ἐστιν δῶρον, ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ - , 12 ὠφεληθῇς, | οὐκέτι ἀφίετε αὐτὸν οὐδὲν nr a Ne ON a / ! > 13 ποίησαι τῳ πατρὶ ἢ TH μήτρι, ' ἀκυ- lal ὩΣ - ζω ΄ ροῦντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ τῇ παρα- δόσει ὑμῶν 7 παρεδώκατε. καὶ παρό- μοια τοιαῦτα πολλὰ ποιεῖτε. 14 καὶ προσ- 3 καλεσάμενος πάλιν τὸν ὄχλον ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς - ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ 15 σύνετε. οὐδέν ἐστιν ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἂν- ΄ a θρώπου εἰσπορευόμενον. εἰς αὐτὸν ὃ ΄ r i 2 EN > Ν wes δύναται κοινῶσαι αὐτὸν - ἀλλὰ τὰ ἐκ a 9 / /, a ‘ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά ἐστιν τὰ κοινοῦντα τὸν ἄνθρωπον. MATT. XV. , Ἁ a 4 12 Τότε προσελθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ - οἷδας ὅτι οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκού- 18 σαντες τὸν λόγον ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν ; > > , ε / ε > / 5 / 14 οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ πατὴρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται. εἰσιν τυφλοὶ τυφλῶν - τυφλὸς δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βό- 15 θυνον πεσοῦνται. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ Πέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ : φράσον ἡμῖν τὴν ρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ - φράσον ἡμῖν τὴ 16 δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν - πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν " 3 τ ε rd ἄφετε αὐτούς - ὁδηγοί MARK VII. n > a 17 Καὶ ὅτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον ἀπὸ ΛΝ > , 9. 2A. ε τοῦ ὄχλου, ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαθη- 8 4 etc. Ex. 20:12. Comp. Ex. 21:17; Deut. 5:16. Mt. 15:4. ἐνετείλατο λέγων S* etc C L; εἶπεν NS? B D it vg cop Treg. West. Rey. 5 ἢ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ ΟἽ, it vg cop syrr Rev.mg.; om 8 B D [Treg.mg.] West. Rev.txt. 6 τὸν νόμον S* etc? C West.mg. Rev.mg.; τὴν ἐντολὴν L ve; τὸν λόγον S* B D cop Treg. West.txt. Rey. txt. Mc. 7:16. εἴ ris ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω AD Aco * it vg syrr [Treg.] Rev.mg. ; om SB IL A* cop Tisch. West. Rey. txt. Mt. 15:14. τυφλῶν S@ ΟἽ, Z it vg syrr [West.mg.]; om S* etch B Ὁ |Treg.mg.] West.txt. Rev. Mc. 7:17. τὸν οἶκον NA; om τὸν ἃ ΒΤ, Treg. West. ; τὴν οἰκίαν 1). σι Ce. σι. δ 16 παραβολήν. 67, 68.] MATT. XV. rt ΄ , 4 a “ 17 ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε; οὔ νοεῖτε ὅτι 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 / πᾶν TO εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς TO στόμα 3 XS 4 “ Ν 3 3 εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ καὶ εἰς ἀφε- δρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται ; ἊΝ Sd) , τὰ δὲ ἐκπορευόμενα > ων , > “ ’ > ἐκ τοῦ στόματος ἐκ τῆς καρδίας ἐξ- έρχεται, κἀκεῖνα κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον. ἐκ γὰρ τῆς καρδίας ἐξέρχονται δια- λογισμοὶ πονηροί, φόνοι, μοιχεῖαι, πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, ψευδομαρτυρίαι, βλασφημίαι. n Ν cA εν Si > , νοῦντα τὸν ἄνθρωπον - τὸ δὲ ἀνίττοις ταῦτα ἐστιν τὰ κοι- Ν “Ἁ 3 fal Ν ᾿ χεέερσιν φαγεῖν Ov KOLVOL TOV ἄνθρω- TOV. UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. ε x 9 3 Ν \ Ν 3 a Ν ΄ ὁ δὲ εἶπεν - ἀκμὴν καὶ 18 ταὶ αὐτοῦ τὴν παραβολήν. 19 20 21 22 25 81 MARK VII. \ la καὶ λέ- > a 7 Nie “- > , ΄ γει αὐτοῖς - οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί cal ΄ col ἐστε; οὐ νοεῖτε OTL πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν / > Ν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον οὐ Ὁ ὅτι οὐκ εἰσ- Q7 8 καρδίαν ἀλλ᾽ 5 ‘ / Ν 3 δὲ 3 a eis τὴν κοιλίαν, καὶ εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα Ν cr δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι, Δ cal πορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ΕῚ 4 / fi Ἂν 4 ἐκπορεύεται, καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώ- ΕΙΣ XN 7 Ν > Lal > pata; ἔλεγεν δὲ ὅτι TO ἐκ TOU ἀν- θρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον, ἐκεῖνο κοινοῖ ‘ 2 »” Ἂν 5 “Ὁ τὸν ἄνθρωπον. ἔσωθεν γὰρ ἐκ τῆς ΄ “ 3 , ery Ν καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται, πορνεῖαι, κλο- Δ / ! lal cs mat, φόνοι, ' μοιχεῖαι, πλεονεξίαι, πο- / νηρίαι, δόλος, ἀσέλγεια, ὀφθαλμὸς , c 4 βλασφημία, ὑπερηφανία, 9 ΄ ΄ὔ al Ν Ν ἀφροσύνη" TOVTA TAVTA TA TOVHpPa πονηρός, ΄’ὔ Ν a Ν ἔσωθεν ἐκπορεύεται καὶ KOLVOL TOV ἄνθρωπον. 8 68. The Daughter of a Syrophcenician Woman is healed. — Region of Tyre and Sidon. Mart. XV. 21-28. Καὶ ἐξελθὼν ἐκεῖθεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς ave- ’ > ὯΝ / / Ν χώρησεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Τύρου καὶ Σι- “ Ἄν Ν ἣν Α 3 ἊΝ δῶνος. καὶ ἰδοὺ γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπὸ fal (AY 2 Hd 2¢€ A + ἑ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελθοῦσα ἔκραξεν λέγουσα: ἐλέησόν με, κύριε υἱὸς Δαυείδ - ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαι- ονίζεται. ὃ δὲ οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ B ς pea) H] 4 Ν / λόγον. καὶ προσελθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἠρώτουν αὐτὸν λέγοντες - ἀπό- Avoov αὐτήν, ὅτι κράζει ὄπισθεν ἡμῶν. 3 ΄ 3 Ν > Ν ΄ X ἀπεστάλην εἰ μὴ cis TA πρόβατα τὰ ε Nea Ys) \ 5 > oO δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς €LTEV* OUK ἀπολωλότα οἴκου ᾿Ισραήλ. ἡ δὲ ἐλ- θοῦσα προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λέγουσα" , ΄ὔ ἢ κύριε, βοήθει μοι. Ψ > a \ Geis εἶπεν - οὐκ ἔξεστιν λαβεῖν τὸν ε Ν 3 ὃ δὲ ἀποκρι- ΕΣ “ Λ Ἂν “ lal ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς Me. 7:19. εἰς Thy ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται ; καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα. West. Rev. 24 Τύρου 1) LA Rey.mg.; add καὶ Σιδῶ- 6 24 25 26 27 Marx VII. 24-30. "Exeibev δὲ ἀναστὰς ἀπῆλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅρια Τύρου. καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν οὐδένα ἠθέλησεν γνῶναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυ- νάσθη λαθεῖν - ἀλλὰ εὐθὺς ἀκούσασα γυνὴ περὶ αὑτοῦ, ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγά- τριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον, εἰσελ- θοῦσα προσέπεσεν πρὸς τοὺς πόδας ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἣν Ἑλληνίς, Sv- ’ “a Δ ροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει. αὐτοῦ * Ἂς 9 , καὶ ἠρώτα fee σ Ν / > fA > “ αὐτὸν ἵνα τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐκβάλῃ ἐκ τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς. καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτῇ - ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα" οὐ / > Ν a“ Ἂς Ν γάρ ἐστιν καλὸν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν. vos & A Bvg cop syrr Treg.txt. et [π|ρ.] [West.] Rev.txt. Mt. 15: 26. ἔξεστιν 1D; ἔστιν καλὸν SB ΟἿ vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 82 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER (Part V. 28 MATT. XY. MARK VII. ’ ε Ν > 4 εἰ 5 ε Ν 3 δ \ / > a Ρ ᾿ς 27 κυναρίοις. ἡ δὲ εἶπεν: ναί, κύριε: 28 ἡ δὲ ἀπεκρίθη καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ ’ vat, κ᾿ a ΄ Ν “- καὶ γὰρ τὰ κυνάρια ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν κύριε: καὶ τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκάτω τῆς a fol 2 a ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων ἀπὸ τῆς Tpa- τραπέζης ἐσθίουσιν ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων ΄ a ΄ SoA ΄ > a ΄ \ > > Ἢ ‘ πέζης τῶν κυρίων αὐτῶν. τότε ἀπο- 29 τῶν παιδίων. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῇ - διὰ A > a 5 a \ ΄ κριθεὶς 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῇ " ὦ γύ- τοῦτον τὸν λόγον ὕπαγε, ἐξελήλυθεν ; 5 ναι, μεγάλη σου ἡ πίστις" γενη- ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου τὸ δαιμόνιον. [4 ε ΄ ἊΝ 35.) ἘΝ ‘\ 9 ἴω > Ν 3 3 A θήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις. καὶ ἰάθη ἣ 30 καὶ ἀπελθοῦσα εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτῆς 6 ΄ ΠΥ ΟῚ ἡ ἐς a ν > , = \ ἐμ / Ce Δι, Ν υγάτηρ αὐτῆς ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκεί- εὗρεν τὸ παιδίον βεβλημένον ἐπὶ τὴν , νης. κλίνην καὶ τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐξεληλυθός. § 69. A Deaf and Dumb Man healed; also many others. Four Thousand 29 33 34 35 36 37 30 31 32 B are fed. — The Decapolis. Mart. XV. 29-38. Mark VII. 31-37. VIII. 1-9. Kai μεταβὰς ἐκεῖθεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς 7A- 31 Kai πάλιν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῶν ὁρίων θεν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν τῆς Ταλι- Τύρου ἦλθεν διὰ Σιδῶνος εἰς τὴν θά- λαίας, καὶ ἀναβὰς εἰς τὸ ὄρος ἐκάθητο λασσαν τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἀνὰ μέσον Gv ἐκεῖ. 82 ὁρίων Δεκαπόλεως. - καὶ φέρουσιν 3 ἴω Ν ΟΥ̓ ΄, Ἂν , αὐτῷ κωφὸν καὶ μογιλάλον, καὶ παρα- aA tee 7 5 a >. A Ν al Ν 5 / ce. 5» Ν cal καλοῦσιν αὐτὸν iva ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα. καὶ ἀπολαβόμενος αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ 3, 9 3907 ” Ν , 3) , @& > “ \ , A lol ὄχλου κατ᾽ ἰδίαν ἔβαλεν τοὺς δακτύλους εἰς TA ὦτα αὐτοῦ Kal πτύσας ἥψατο τῆς , 3 a | \ > / 3 Ν 3 \ 3 ΄ € Ν ΄ a. A γλώσσης αὐτοῦ, ' καὶ ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν ἐστέναξεν καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ " > / (4s) 7 Ayes. , 3 a ε > , Ν 34 5 / c ἐφφαθά, ὅ ἐστιν διανοίχθητι. καὶ ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ ai ἀκοαί, καὶ εὐθὺς ἐλύθη ὃ ὃ Ν a ΄ 3 a Ν 2h. ON > θῶ Ν ὃ ir 3 a ef. ὃ Ἀ εσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐλάλει ὀρθῶς. καὶ διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὲ / a Ν 3 ἱρὴν / > Ν ἴω / > Ὁ λέγωσιν: ὅσον δὲ αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, avTot μᾶλλον περισσότερον ἐκήρυσσον. a a Ν καὶ ὑπερπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες - καλῶς πάντα πεποίηκεν, καὶ τοὺς κωφοὺς ποιεῖ ἀκούειν καὶ ἀλάλους λαλεῖν. MATT. XV. καὶ προσῆλθον αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοὶ ἔχοντες μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν χωλοὺς τυφλοὺς κω- Ν Ν Ν ΓΕ ’ \ ὧν > ἈΝ Ν \ / 3 a“ φοὺς κυλλοὺς καὶ ἑτέρους πολλούς, καὶ ἔριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ" καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς, ' ὥστε τὸν ὄχλον θαυμάσαι βλέποντας κωφοὺς λαλοῦν- \ ε cal Ἂς ἣν, a Ὧν Ν / Ν᾽" ’ τας, κυλλοὺς ὑγιεῖς καὶ χωλοὺς περιπατοῦντας καὶ τυφλοὺς βλέποντας - καὶ ἐδό- ξαζον τὸν θεὸν Ἰσραήλ. MARK VIII. MATT. XV. 1 Ἔν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις πάλιν πολ- -“ ΝΜ m” » Ν 5 Ὁ ,ὔ λοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος καὶ μὴ ἐχόντων τί ε \>? a , \ , Ψ ἐν O δὲ Ἰησοῦς προσκαλεσάμενος τοὺς φάγωσιν, προσκαλεσάμενος τοὺς μα- Ἂ > A Ee Ν / 3 a , μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ εἶπεν - σπλαγχνιζομας 2 θητὰς λέγει αὐτοῖς - σπλαγχνίζομαι 9 th Ν ” λ 7 Ν ε ,΄ a aN Ἂς. ΕΣ iA ἤδ ε , a ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, OTL ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς ’ προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν προσμένουσίν μοι καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τί ’ὔ’ , Ν > lal > Ν ’ὔ ἃ ἮΝ 9 , > x τί paywow* Kat ἀπολῦσαι αὐτοὺς 3 φάγωσιν. καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς ΄, 3 , ’ > to) s 3 x) aA 3 , νήστις οὐ θέλω, μήποτε ἐκλυθῶσιν νήστις εἷς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται Mc. 7: 88. δακτύλους δὰ L; add αὐτοῦ A 35 εὐθὺς SL A; om AB D it vg Treg. DA vg Treg. West. West. 88. 69, 70.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 83 MATT. XV. 33 ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ pa- θηταί: πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ ἄρτοι το- 84 σοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον; r > a / καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - πόσους » ᾿ ε Ν ) ε / \ ἄρτους ἔχετε; οἱ δὲ εἶπον " ἑπτά, καὶ Ν ’ ~ 35 ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια. καὶ παραγγείλας τῷ cal a 3) 86 ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, ἔλα- βεν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς ἰχθύας NOP 53, , + , ν 297 καὶ εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου Lal Lal e Ν Ἀ ἴω Ν τοῖς μαθηταῖς, οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὁ- χλοις. 87 καὶ ἔφαγον πάντες καὶ ἐχορτά- σθησαν,καὶ τὸ περισσεῦον τῶν κλα- / = ε Ν 4D , 88 σμάτων ἦραν ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας πλήρεις. ε S'S , a ot δὲ ἐσθίοντες ἦσαν τετρακισχιλιοι ἄνδρες χωρὶς παιδίων καὶ γυναικῶν. MARK VIII. > - ε “ / ον σας 9 \ ἐν τῇ 600° καί τινες αὐτῶν ἀπὸ μα- ,ὔ 7 NS / > 4 κρόθεν ἥκασιν. καὶ ἀπεκρίθησαν ai- τῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ὅτι πόθεν τού- , i tous δυνήσεταί tis ὧδε χορτάσαι ΕΣ “ΟΝ > Ve Ν > , 2 5 ἀρτων ἐπ΄ ἐρημίας ; καὶ ἤρωτα av- / " τούς- πόσους ἔχετε ἄρτους; οἱ δὲ τὰ ε ΄ XN / ΄- 6 εἶπαν: ἑπτά. καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ « »” 3 - ea Lan a Ν ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς “ καὶ λα- βὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους εὐχαριστήσας Ν lal a ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν : καὶ παρέ- a 9 Ν > 3 ΄ Ἴ θηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ. καὶ εἶχαν ἰχθύδια 3 ’ὔ \ 3 / ON / ὀλίγα - καὶ εὐλογήσας αὐτὰ παρέθηκεν. \ 39, δὰ > , QA 8 καὶ ἔφαγον καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν, Kat ἣραν περισσεύματα κλασμάτων ἑπτὰ , ΜῈ X ε ΄ 9 σπυρίδας. ἦσαν δὲ ὡς τετρακισχί- Ν > Ἁ 3 4 λιοι καὶ ἀπέλυσεν αὐτούς. § 70. The Pharisees and Sadducees again require a Sign. [See § 49.]— Near [ Magadan. Mart. XV. 39. XVI. 1-4. 89 Kai ἀπολύσας τοὺς ὄχλους ἐνέβη 3 Ν Lal Ko Φ > Ny: εἰς TO πλοῖον, καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅρια Ὕ Μαγαδάν. XVI. 1 Καὶ προσελθόντες οἱ Φαρι- cal Ν ἴω, 7. gato. καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι πειράζοντες ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν σημεῖον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρα- 2 νοῦ ἐπιδεῖξαι αὐτοῖς... ὁ δὲ ἀποκρι- 6 ‘ Φ > CS 3 ΄, , els εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - [ὀψίας γενομένης Marx VIII. 10-12. 10 Kat εὐθὺς ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον τ γι A 3 a 43 9 μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά. Y 11 = Kai ἐξῆλθον οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ ἤρ- Eavto συνζητεῖν αὐτῷ, ζητοῦντες παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, πει- / ράζοντες αὐτόν. 8 λέγετε: εὐδία, πυῤῥάζει γὰρ ὃ οὐρανός - ' καὶ πρωΐ: σήμερον χει- s νεῖ ἢ \ ΄ ε > / \ \ ΄ μων, πυῤῥάζει γὰρ στυγνάζων O ovpavos. TO μὲν προσωτον τοῦ οὐρανοῦ γινώσκετε διακρίνειν, τὰ δὲ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν οὐ δύνασθε ;] 4 γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ. ---- Mc. 8:8. ἥκασιν δὰ AD 33; ἡκούσιν ἘΚ; εἰσίν B L.A cop Treg.mg. West. 7. παρέθηκεν S* ; εἶπεν (ἐκέλευσεν D8 it vg) καὶ ταῦτα (καὶ αὐτά post mapar. A; καὶ αὐτοὺς ante ἐκέλ. D) παρατιθέναι (παρατεθῆ- vat A; παράθετε C 33) δὲδ BLA Treg. West. Rev. A -“ 12 καὶ ἀναστενάξας τῷ ΄ὕ > a , fe i. Ν 9 πνεύματι αὐτοῦ λέγει - τί ἡ γενεὰ av- τὴ ζητεῖ σημεῖον; ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν 3 / Lal Ὁ“ , rt εἰ δοθήσεται TH γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον. Μί. 15: 88. παιδίων καὶ γυναικῶν δὰ D vg cop West.mg. ; γυν. καὶ maid. Β Ο syrr Treg. West.txt. Rey. Mt. 16:2, 3. ὀψίας... οὐ δύνασθε C D L 33 vg cop; om δὲ B [Tisch.] [West.] Rev. mg. 10 11 12 22 29 24 84 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Part V. § 71. The Disciples cautioned against the Leaven of the Pharisees, etc. — N. E. Coast of the Lake of Galilee. Marr. XVI. 4-12. 4 --- καὶ καταλιπὼν αὐτοὺς ἀπῆλθεν. 6 Kat ἐλθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ εἰς τὸ πέραν ἐπελάθοντο ἄρτους λαβεῖν. ε ν 3 a > 3 n eh Ya κ᾿ 6 ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ὁρᾶτε καὶ προσέχετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρι- ε Ν ot δὲ διε- Lal 9 AoyiLovro ἐν ἑαυτοῖς λέγοντες ὅτι σαίων καὶ Ξαδδουκαίων. 8 ἄρτους οὐκ ἐλάβομεν. γνοὺς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν - τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ὀλιγόπιστοι, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ " “ ἐλάβετε; οὕπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ μνημονεύ- ετε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους τῶν πεντακισ- χιλίων καὶ πόσους κοφίνους ἐλάβετε; οὐδὲ τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους τῶν τετρακισ- χιλίων καὶ πόσας σπυρίδας ἐλάβετε; πῶς οὐ νοεῖτε ὅτι οὐ περὶ ἄρτων εἶπον ὑμῖν; προσέχετε δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ “Σαδδουκαίων. τότε συνῆκαν ὅτι οὐκ εἶπεν προσέχειν > ‘\ a 4 “ iA A ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων Kat 19 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Σαδδουκαίων, ἀλλὰ ἀπὸ τῆς διδαχῆς τῶν Mark VIII. 1559} καὶ ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς πάλιν ἐμβὰς ἀπῆλ- θεν εἰς τὸ πέραν. Καὶ ἐπελάθοντο λαβεῖν ἄρτους, καὶ ΕἸ Ν 7 + 3 <> > e¢ εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶχον μεθ᾽ ἕαυ- τῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ. καὶ διεστέλλετο 3 a / 2 A / 3 Ἂν αὐτοῖς λέγων: ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρώδου. καὶ διελογίζοντο Ν > €: 7 » 5 3, πρὸς ἀλλήλους ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχομεν. \ A / > lal , καὶ γνοὺς λέγει αὐτοῖς - τί διαλο- ΄ Ca » > ” Ε γίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε; οὔπω νοεῖτε οὐδὲ συνίετε; πεπωρωμένην 5 Ν ᾽,ὔ ε cal > ἊΝ ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν; ὀφθαλμοὺς oy] > ,ὔ , 8 3, ἔχοντες οὐ βλέπετε, καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες οὐκ ἀκούετε, καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε, ὅτε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους ἔκλασα εἰς τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους, καὶ πόσους κοφίνους , ΄ » , κλασμάτων πλήρεις ἤρατε ; λέγουσιν > ~ / 7 A A ε Ν > αὐτῷ δώδεκα. OTE Kal τοὺς ἑπτὰ εἰς τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους, πόσων σπυρί- dwv πληρώματα κλασμάτων ἤρατε; ΝΥ , = , ! Var. > καὶ λέγουσιν - ἑπτά. | καὶ ἔλεγεν αὖ- τοῖς * οὔπω συνίετε; Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων. § 72. A Blind Man healed. — Bethsaida (Julias). Marx VIII. 22-26. Kai ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν. Lye 7 3 ἀρ ΛΟ αὑτὸν ἵνα avTOV ἀψηται. Ν / > “ , Ν A καὶ φέρουσιν αὐτῷ τυφλόν, καὶ παρακαλοῦσιν Καὶ ἐπιλαβόμενος τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ τυφλοῦ ἐξήνεγκεν ry ESN Pe lel , Ν 4 5 \ »* > Le > 6 \ Ν “ SS QUTOV €€W) τὴς κωμῆής, και TTVOAS εἰς TA ομματα QUTOV, ETLUELS TAS XELPas αυτῳ, » , “yes ” s ETYNPWTA QUTOV €l TL βλέπει. Me. 8 : 16. Treg.mg. ; ἔχουσιν B 2P¢ cop Treg.txt. West. Rev.mg.; εἶχαν 1). Mt.16:8. ἐλάβετε C L Asyrr; ἔχετε 8 Β D vg-cop’'4 West. Rey. Mc. 8:18. βλέπετε; Rey. | ἀκούετε ; Treg. West. Rev. | μνημονεύετε; Treg. Rev. 19 καὶ SC DA1 33; omA BL vgt4 cop syrr Treg. West. Rey. 20 λέγουσιν NA καὶ ἀναβλέψας ἔλεγεν - βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ἔχομεν δ A C LA vg syrr D; add αὐτῷ Β ΟῚ, Δ vg cop Treg.mg. West. Rey. Mt.16:12. τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων pr S* 33 (om καὶ Σαδδ.); τῶν ἄρτων 8° BL vg cop Treg. [West.] Rev.; τοῦ ἄρτου CA al. Mc. 8:28. βλέπει NS A ΤῊ L it vg syrr > om PD. West.mg. ; βλέπεις (;) BC D* ἔτ A 2P¢ cop Treg.mg. West.txt. Rev. 88 71, 72, 73.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF THE TABERNACLES. 85 MARK VIII. 25 ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας. εἶτα πάλιν ἐπέθηκεν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ὀ- φθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ, καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη, καὶ ἐνέβλεπεν δηλαυγῶς ἅπαντα. ie) , aN. 3 a > a , Ν 3 Ν ΄ ΓΟ 26 καὶ ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν εἰς οἶκον αὐτοῦ λέγων - μὴ εἰς τὴν κώμην εἰσέλθῃς. § 73. Peter and the Rest again profess their Faith in Christ. [See § 66.]— Region of Cesarea Philippi. Marr. XVI. 13-20. Mark VIII. 27-80. Luxe IX. 18-21. 13. “EAOov δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς 27 Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 18 Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ εἰς τὰ μέρη Καισαρίας καὶ ot μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἶναι αὐτὸν προσευχό- τῆς Φιλίππου ἠρώτα εἰς τὰς κώμας Καισα- μενον κατὰ μόνας συν- τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ ρίας τῆς Φιλίππου: ἢσαν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταί, λέγων - τίνα λέγουσιν καὶ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἐπηρώτα καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτοὺς ot ἄνθρωποι εἶναι τὸν τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ λέγων: τίνα με οἱ ὅ- υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ; λέγων αὐτοῖς - τίνα pe 19 χλοι λέγουσιν εἶναι ; οἱ 14 οἱ δὲ εἶπαν - οἱ μὲν λέγουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι δὲ ἀποκριθέντες εἶπαν " ᾿ἸΙωάννην τὸν βαπτι- 28 εἶναι; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐ- Ἰωάννην τὸν βαπτι- στήν, ἄλλοι δὲ “HAciar, τῷ λέγοντες ὅτι lwav- στήν, ἄλλοι δὲ Ηλείαν, ἕτεροι δὲ Ἱερεμίαν ἢ νην τὸν βαπτιστήν, καὶ ἄλλοι δὲ ὅτι προφήτης ἕνα τῶν προφητῶν. ἄλλοι Ἡλείαν, ἄλλοι τις τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀνέ- 15 λέγει αὐτοῖς - ὑμεῖς δὲ δὲ ὅτι εἷς τῶν προφη- 20 στη. εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς " τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; 29 τῶν. καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπηρώτα ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνα με λέ- 16 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ Σίμων αὐτοῦς - ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνα γετε εἶναι ; Πέτρος δὲ Πέτρος εἶπεν - σὺ εἶ με λέγετε εἶναι ; ἀπο- ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν - τὸν ὃ Χριστὸς 6 υἱὸς τοῦ κριθεὶς ὃ ἸΤέτρος λέγει Χριστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ. 17 θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος. ἀπο- αὐτῷ - σὺ εἶ ὃ Χριστός. Ν ε 3 A κριθεὶς δὲ 6 Ἰησοῦς > ee ἡ , > > B re Syne \ 2 9 9 εἰπεν αὐτῷ Pakaplos εἰ ιμὼν APLWVA, OTL σαρὲ και ALLA OUK Q7TE- , ε a lal 18 κάλυψέν σοι GAN ὃ πατήρ μου 6 ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. κἀγὼ δέ σοι λέγω ῳ \ = Uj bie BEA “4 al 4 > ΄ Ν 3 OTL συ EL Ilezpos, και €7TL TQAUTY) ΤΊ πετρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν exkAy- ΄ Ν , IN 3 4 Cakes , X a 19 σίαν, καὶ πύλαι ἄδου od κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς. δώσω σοι τὰς κλεῖδας a ΄ lal > “- NN SiS. ’ ea a lol + τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται δεδε- 4 > aA > to) νὰ EBS , ΦΈΡΟΝ io “ ” / μένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται λελυμέ- νον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. 20 τότε διεστείλατο τοῖς 80 καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς 21 6 δὲ a o \ ° a μαθηταῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν ἐπιτιμήσας αὐτοῖς παρ- εἴπωσιν ὅτι αὐτός ἐ- περὶ αὐτοῦ ήγγειλ devi λέ- : ; ρ A. . NYYE τῇ μὴ ι στιν ὃ Χριστός. γειν τοῦτο, Me. 8:26. μὴ S*; μηδὲ SCA ΒΟΊΤ, ΔΟῸΡ μηδὲ εἴπῃς τινὶ ἐν τῇ κώμῃ A C A Treg. et Treg. West. Rev. | εἰσέλθῃς δὰ B Leop; add [Treg.mg.]; D vg similiter. 86 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Part V. § 74. Our Lord foretells his own Death and Resurrection, and the Trials of his Followers. — Region of Cesarea Philippi. Matt, XVI. 21-28. 21 Ν , \ ae , Ἂν, » 3 ΄ 22 ναι. καὶ προσλαβόμε- 32 ναι. ἵ καὶ παῤῥησίᾳ τὸν λόγον ἐλάλει. Ν c / vos αὑτὸν ὃ LIlerpos ΕἾ A a 9 , ἤρξατο ἐπιτιμᾷν αὐτῷ λέγων - ἵλεώς 33 23 σοι, κύριε" οὐ μὴ ἔσται σοι τοῦτο. ὃ δὲ στραφεὶς εἶπεν τῷ Πέτρῳ: ὕπαγε ρ ε 5 ε t ρ c 4 ny) n~ / > ὀπίσω pov, σατανᾶ" σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ, ὅτι οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ ἀλλὰ al ’ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. MATT. XVI. MARK VIII. ζω > \ 24 Tore 6 Ἰησοῦς ci- 34 Καὶ προσκαλεσάμε- 23 πεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς av- νος τὸν ὄχλον σὺν τοῖς A " ΄ aay, a s An > τοῦ - εἴ τις θέλει ὀπί- μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ εἶπεν > ~ > > aA 7 / ow pov ἐλθεῖν, ἀπαρ- αὐτοῖς - ὅστις θέλει ΄ ε \ Ἢ » 7 9 ~ νησάσθω ἑαυτὸν Kat ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν, ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὖ- ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν a Ἂς / Ν τοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυ- μοι. ρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολου- ἃ Ν ΕΣ , , ἃ Ν 2\ 25 ds yap ἐὰν θέλῃ 35 θείτω μοι. ὃς yap ἐὰν 24 n lol 4 ‘ Ν 3 a τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶ- θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν" σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐὖ- \ ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ἀπολέσῃ τὴν τήν" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ἀπολέ- ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν σει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐμοῦ, εὑρήσει αὐτήν. ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ / ’, 26 τί γὰρ ὠφεληθήσε- εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὖ- 25 ται ἄνθρωπος, ἐὰν τὸν 86 τήν. τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄν- Mt. 16:21. 6 Ἰησοῦς S*> C L A; om 6 B? Ὁ [Treg.]; Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς S* B* cop ᾿Απὸ τότε ἤρξατο ὃ Ἰησοῦς δεικνύειν τοῖς “ 3 ad lal μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ὅτι δεῖ αὐτὸν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσ- ἀπελθεῖν καὶ ’ὔ Ν / βυτέρων καὶ ἀρχιερέων Ν καὶ γραμματέων καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆ- Marx VIII. 31-38, IX. 1. 91 Καὶ ἤρξατο διδά- > Ν Gg Lal ἣν σκειν αὐτοὺς ὅτι δεῖ τὸν ex ay) v2 VLOV TOU ἀνθρώπου πολ- λὰ παθεῖν, καὶ ἀποδο- κιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν τῶν γραμματέων καὶ ἀπο- κτανθῆναι ἀρχιερέων καὶ ἣν x και μετα τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆ- 22 Luxe IX. 22-37, > X 7 Lal A ev εἰπὼν ὅτι δεῖ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν καὶ ἀποδοκι- μασθῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν / Ν 5 πρεσβυτέρων καὶ ἀρ- χιερέων καὶ γραμμα-. τέων καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι \ a ΄ ε / καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι. καὶ προσ- λαβόμενος ὃ Πέτρος αὐτὸν ἤρξατο West. Rev.mg.; om plane N°. Mc. 8:34. ὅστις A C? cop syrr; εἴ τις δὴ > a > A ε δὲ > \ Ν ἐπιτιμᾷν αὐτῷ. ὃ δὲ ἐπιστραφεὶς καὶ Ν la ἰδὼν τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ ἐπετίμησεν 4 Ἂν; / Πέτρῳ καὶ λέγει - ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, ἴον τς 3 a Ν a Led σατανᾶ, ὅτι ov φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ 3 Ν Ν al > , ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. LUKE Ix. ΕΣ Ἔλεγεν δὲ πρὸς πάν- " ΄, se τας" εἴ tis θέλει ὀπί- σω μου ἔρχεσθαι ἅπαρ- νησάσθω ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὖ- τοῦ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, καὶ 3 ’ὔ ἀκολουθείτω μοι. Δ Ν ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει teers 7 > ox 3 αὐτήν - ὅς δ᾽ ἂν ἀπο- ls Ν ἣν 3 a λέσῃ THY ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ . A ’ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, οὗτος σώ- oe αὐτήν. τί ‘yap ὠφελεῖται ἄνθρωπος Β C*D LA it vg Treg. West. Rev. | ἀκο- λουθεῖν C* Ὁ ve Tree.txt.; ἐλθεῖν S A BC? L (ἐλθεῖν καὶ ἀκολουθῖν A) cop syrr Treg.mg. West. Rev. §§ 74, 75.] 27 28 § 75. The Transfiguration. + MATT. XVI. / μὲ , κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ, Ἂν XN Ων 3 an τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ aA a , , ζημιωθῇ ; ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα lol lal > “ / τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ; μέλ- λει γὰρ 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- θρώπου ἔρχεσθαι ἐν nw , lal Ν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀγ- , > a Ν , γέλων αὐτοῦ, καὶ τότε 3 Ἕ ε / Ἃς ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν πρᾶξιν αὐτοῦ. 97 98 MARK VIII. Opwrov κερδῆσαι τὸν / Ld Ν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημι- a Ἂν X\ 3 ὠθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐ- A PAS κι τοῦ; τί γὰρ dot ἄνθρω- > 4 ra πος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ; ὃς γὰρ ΕΣ 3 τ. \ ἐὰν ἐπαισχυνθῇ με καὶ \ / τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους > a a , A ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ TH / Ν ε μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἅμαρ- lal Ν ε εν a τωλῴῷ, καὶ ὃ υἱὸς TOU > 4 > , ἀνθρώπου ἐπαισχυνθή- > , Lg ΕΣ σεται αὐτόν, ὅταν ἔλθῃ UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 81 LUKE IX. 7. Ν ’ κερδήσας τὸν κόσμον “ ε \ \ > ὅλον, ἑαυτὸν δὲ ἀπο- ἢ ζημιωθείς ; λέσας 26 ὃς γὰρ ἂν ἐπαισχυνθῇ Ν Ν > ‘\ δ με καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς λό- na < Ν “-“ yous, τοῦτον O υἱὸς τοῦ 5 / 5 , ἀνθρώπου ἐπαισχυνθή- “ σεται, ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐν A ὃ LE > a +. ἴω τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ καὶ τοῦ Ν Ν na c , πατρὸς καὶ TOV ἁγίων ἀγγέλων. 3 a ὃ ΄“ἐ a \ > a \ a > Ay a εν ΤΉ ΟΣ TOU TAT POS αὐυτου μετα TWV ayy. ων TWV AN ἀμὴν λέ- eo ἢ Ld CL ae) yo ὑμῖν ὅτι εἰσίν τινες a - ¢ UA ν τῶν ὧδε ἑστώτων οἵς- τινες οὗ μὴ γεύσωνται ΄ ῳ Ἃ 3, θανάτου ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν x εν AD 23: , τὸν υἱὸν TOD ἀνθρώπου 3 / 3 -~ ἐρχόμενον ἐν TH βασι- λείᾳ αὐτοῦ. Π τ ἈΠ). 15:18. 1 Καὶ μεθ᾽ ἡμέρας ἐξ > παραλαμβάνει ὃ Ἰη- aA Ν , σοῦς τὸν Πέτρον καὶ > > Ἰάκωβον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ 9 / > Ν > ἀναφέρει αὑτοὺς εἰς ὄρος ὑψηλὸν κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. Ἂν ’ὔ m” καὶ μετεμορφώθη ἔμ- προσθεν αὐτῶν, καὶ μ᾿ Ν ,ὔ ἔλαμψεν τὸ πρόσωπον > ἴω ε ε 4 Ν αὐτοῦ ὡς ὃ ἥλιος, τὰ x's Δ 5 fog! / δὲ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς. καὶ ἰδοὺ ὥφθη αὐτοῖς Μωῦ- σῆς καὶ Ἡλείας συν- λαλοῦντες μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. IX. 1 ἁγίων. . καὶ ἔλεγεν 2 3 Lad 3 Ν / αὐτοῖς: ἀμὴν λέγω a Ψ ’ ὑμῖν ὅτι εἰσίν τινες @Q cal ε / τς ὧδε τῶν ἑστηκότων οἵ- Ν / τινες OV μὴ γεύσωνται ΄ ῳ Ἃ 4 θανάτου ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει. 27 ’ λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν 3 -“ > , ἀληθῶς, εἰσίν τινες τῶν αὐτοῦ ἑστηκότων οἱ οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται ΄ μέ A oy θανάτου ἕως ἂν ἴδω- ,ὔ σιν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ. Our Lord’s subsequent Discourse with the Three Disciples. — Region of Cesarea Philippi. Marx IX. 2-138. ‘\ Ν c , a Kat μετὰ ἡμέρας ἐξ παραλαμβάνει ὃ ᾽;Ἴη- na Ν 4 Ἁ gous τὸν [Πέτρον καὶ οἶ > , \ Ν τὸν Ἰάκωβον καὶ τὸν Ἶ ud S53) ἜΣ ὠάννην, καὶ ἀναφέρει > A ᾿ς, SD ε \ αὑτοῦς εἰς ὄρος ὑψηλὸν κατ᾽ ἰδίαν μόνους, καὶ “ Ε μετεμορφῶθη ἔμπροσ- θεν αὐτῶν, 'kat τὰ ε ’ 3 ων ΕἸ , ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο στίλβοντα λευκὰ λίαν, τς \ 2 N\ A οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι. καὶ ὥφθη Ἡλείας "“ ας Moicet, καὶ ἦσαν συν- αὐτοῖς σὺν λαλοῦντες τῷ Ἰησοῦ. 28 29 90 91 Luxe ΙΧ. 28-36. > Ἐγένετο δὲ pera τοὺς λόγους τούτους, € Ν ε ΄ 9 , Ν ὡσεὶ ἡμέραι ὀκτώ, καὶ παραλαβὼν Πέτρον ne! 4 et} (4 kat ᾿Ιωάννην καὶ ‘la- kwBov ἀνέβη εἰς τὸ » ΄ ὄρος προσεύξασθαι. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ προσ- ΄ aN < Ya εὔχεσθαι αὐτὸν τὸ εἷ- δὸς τοῦ προσώπου αὐ- a ¢ Nee Ge TOU ἕτερον καὶ ὃ ἵἱμα- τισμὸς αὐτοῦ λευκὸς We 4, 2 ἧς > ἐξαστράπτων. καὶ ἰ- δοὺ ἄνδρες δύο συνελά- λουν αὐτῷ, οἵτινες "" a LP Ν ἦσαν Mwions καὶ H- λείας, ! οἱ ὀφθέντες ἐν 88 82 δόξῃ ἔλεγον τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ, ἣν ἤμελλεν πληροῦν ἐν Ἱερουσαλήμ. ὃ LUKE ΙΧ. FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Part V. ὁ δὲ Πέτρος 5) ‘ ε Ν = YOR A) , σ ν᾿ ὃ ΄ δὲ τὸ Ἂν δό καὶ οἱ σὺν AUTH σαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ laypyyopyoavTes ὃε εἰδαν τὴν OO- MATT. XVII. 4 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ 6 ἀκούετε Πέτρος εἶπεν τῷ “In- σοῦ: κύριε, καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι - εἰ θέλεις, ποιήσω ὧδε τρεῖς σκηνάς, σοὶ μίαν καὶ Mwiioet μίαν καὶ ἔτι av- ἰδοὺ νεφέλη φωτεινὴ ἐπε- Ἡλείᾳ μίαν. L τοῦ λαλοῦντος, , 3 ΄ Ν σκίασεν αὐτούς, καὶ Ἀ Ἂς “Ὁ /, ἰδοὺ φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέ- / a ον , Ays λέγουσα "" οὗτός ε ὌΝ «ε ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς μου ὃ ἀγα- , 3 e > , πητός, ἐν ᾧ εὐδόκησα: αὐτοῦ. καὶ > 4 ε Ν ἀκούσαντες οἱ μαθηταὶ ” \ , ἔπεσαν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτῶν καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν 5 MARK IX. Ν 5 Ν ε καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς 6 / 72 ~ 3 Ilerpos λέγει τῷ Ἰη- a , / σοῦ: ῥαββεί, καλόν > Cee e 2 ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι, καὶ ποιήσωμεν τρεῖς σκηνάς, σοὶ μίαν καὶ Moioe μίαν καὶ “H- Ν , , 5 Ν ἫΝ λείᾳ μίαν. οὐ γὰρ nde , ~ τί ἀποκριθῇ - ἔκφοβοι 4 γὰρ ἐγένοντο. Kal ἐγέ- veto νεφέλη ἐπισκι- ᾽ 3 “ | / alovoa αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐγέ- veto φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέ- Ans** οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ υἱός μου ὃ ἀγαπητός, ἀκούετε αὑτοῦ. καὶ ἐξάπινα περιβλεψάμε- νοι οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἷ- dov ἀλλὰ τὸν Ἰησοῦν 99 84 35 ἕαν αὐτοῦ καὶ τοὺς δύο » \ ἄνδρας τοὺς συνεστῶ- τας αὐτῷ. καὶ ἐγένε- > nw ’ τὸ ἐν τῷ διαχωρίζεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ εἶπεν ε / > ὁ Πέτρος πρὸς τὸν Ἴη- a 3 / /, σοῦν" ἐπιστάτα, καλόν 3 6 τ ἦν 6 cs ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι, καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνὰς τρεῖς, μίαν σοὶ καὶ μίαν Moice καὶ μίαν “H- 7 a) λείᾳ, μὴ εἰδὼς ὃ λέγει. an \ 3 an ra ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ λέγον- , νεφέλη Ns ‘A =) 4 καὶ ἐπεσκίαζεν αὐτούς * ἐφοβήθησαν δὲ ἐν τῷ 3 fa) > \ > εἰσελθεῖν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν νεφέλην. καὶ φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης a τὸς ἐγένετο Cae λέγουσα -" οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ υἱός μου ὃ ἐκλελεγμέ- “ n a ‘ 7 σφόδρα. καὶ προσῆλ- μόνον μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν. 86 νος, αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε. καὶ θεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ awa ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φω- εν 0 Ἰησοῦς καὶ awa- Dy. lt a > ae \ ey > Ps , \ 4. SN ν ΜΩν μενος αὐτῶν εἶπεν: ἐγέρθητε νὴν εὑρέθη ᾿Ιησοῦς μόνος. καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐσίγησαν Ν Ν lal > ‘ Ν Ν 3 Ns) ΄ > > ’, a « [4 8 καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσθε. ἐπάραντες δὲ καὶ οὐδενὶ ἀπήγγειλαν ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις \ 3 x 5." τῶἋ 50 7 poe a es Ἶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν οὐδένα οὐδὲν ὧν ἑώρακαν. EN 3 a εἶδον εἰ μὴ τὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον. MARK IX. an “A ‘\ 9 Kai καταβαινόντων αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ 9 Kat καταβαινόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ »” > ΄ 3 Pd 10'S: a a + ὃ λ 3 ~ ν ὃ ἣν ὄρους ἐνετείλατο αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέ- Opous, διεστείλατο αὕτοις να μηδενὲ Ν + Ag, “ os A 39 ὃ ΄ 3 Me Δ} ε ev γων - μηδενὶ εἴπητε TO ὅραμα ἕως ov ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται, εἰ μὴ ὅταν ὃ υἱὸς a nr al Lal > ‘A > ΄“ 3 -“ 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθῇ. τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ. iN , , BY ε 10 καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐ- 10 καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἕαυ- a > a \ Le) , A ae τοῦ λέγοντες - τί οὖν οἱ γραμματεῖς τοὺς συνζητοῦντες τί ἐστιν τὸ ἐκ νε- A A A a a \ os a Pt λέγουσιν ὅτι Ἡλείαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν πρῶ- 11 κρῶν ἀναστῆναι. καὶ ἐπηρῶτων αὖ- > μὴ / ε 11 tov; ὃ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν - Ἡλείας τὸν λέγοντες - ὅτι λέγουσιν οἱ Φαρι- a Ν ε ca) “ « ,ὔ μὲν ἔρχεται καὶ ἀποκαταστήσει πάν- σαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ᾿Ηλείαν a “-“ “ lal c \ om > cal 12 τα. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτι Ἡλείας ἤδη 12 det ἐλθεῖν πρῶτον ; ὃ δὲ ἔφη αὐτοῖς " “ 3 , ἦλθεν, Kal οὐκ ἐπέγνωσαν αὐτόν, ἀλλ᾽ Ἡλείας ἐλθὼν πρῶτον ἀποκαθιστάνει ® 5 etc. Comp. 2 Pet. 1:17. Mc.9:8. ἀλλὰ A CLA West.mg.; εἰ μὴ Mt. 17:8. τὸν Ἰησοῦν West.mg.; αὐτὸν SB D 33 it ve cop West. txt. Rev. Ἰησοῦν B* West.txt.; Ἰησοῦν αὐτὸν &. Le. 9:34. αὐτοὺς 5. SBC L vg cop; Mc. 9:11. of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ δὰ 1, vg; om A ἐκείνους A 1) A al pler Treg.mg. BCD Acopsyrr ‘Treg. West. Rev. §$ 18 πάσχειν ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν. οι 7 Ν 3 / an μαθηταὶ ὅτι περὶ ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βα- 75, 76.] MATT. XVII. > , > > a“ 4 3 ᾽ ἐποίησαν ἐν αὐτῷ ὅσα ἠθέλησαν. Ψ Se, οὖ ἃ ΄ , οὕτως Kal 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μέλλει > »“" πτιστοῦ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς. ’ lel τότε συνῆκαν οἵ πάντα. 19 UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 89 MARK IX. καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ; ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουθενωθῇ. ἀλλὰ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι καὶ Ἡλείας ἐλήλυθεν, καὶ ἐποίησαν αὐτῷ ὅσα ἤθελ καθὰ Φ Ἢ ἤθελον, καθὼς γέγραπται ΒΡ ere €7 αυτον. § 76. The Healing of a Demoniac, whom the Disciples could not heal. — Region of Cesarea Philippi. Marr. XVII. 14-21. 14 15 16 17 Mc.9:12. ἑξουθενωθῇ δὰ A Ο Δ; ἐξουδε- vn@n BD ὅν. Treg. West. | ἀνθρώπου ; Lachm, txt. West.txt. Tisch. ; ἀνθρώπου. . . ἐξουδενηθῇ ; Steph. Le. 9 : 38. West. Rev. Καὶ ἐλθόντων πρὸς x 4 τὸν ὄχλον, 14 Marx ΙΧ. 14-29. Καὶ ἐλθόντες πρὸς \ Ν 39 ΝΜ τοὺς μαθητὰς εἶδον ὁ- & Ν > Ν χλον πολὺν περὶ αὐτοὺς A -“ nn Kal γραμματεῖς συνζητοῦντας πρὸς αὐτούς. Ν 9 v a ey. 9 ἡ DN 2¢ 15 καὶ εὐθὺς πᾶς ὃ ὄχλος ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐξε- θαμβήθησαν, καὶ προστρέχοντες ἦσπά- > 7 δον , » ΄ , 16 ζοντο αὐτόν. καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς - τί προσῆλθεν ee AES « Ἂν, θ αὐτῷ ἀνθρωπος γονυ- bad ἍΝ ΔΝ | ἊΝ , πετῶν αὐτὸν 'Kat λέ- ἊΨ» > / ἊΝ yev: κύριε, ἐλέησόν x 4 “ μου τὸν υἱόν, ὅτι σε- Ν “ ληνιάζεται καὶ κακῶς / ΄ Ν πάσχει" πολλάκις γὰρ Ν A Ν πίπτει εἰς τὸ πῦρ καὶ Ν LAN) πολλάκις εἰς TO ὕδωρ. Ν Oy καὶ προσήνεγκα αὐτὸν “ “ Ν τοῖς μαθηταῖς σου, καὶ > 29 ΄ > \- οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν αὐτὸν θεραπεῦσαι. ἀποκρι- Ν See: 3 A > θεὶς δὲ 6 Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν " > \ ” Ν ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος καὶ ως δ διεστραμμένη, ἕως πότε μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ἔσομαι ; ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν ; / / IN Ὁ φέρετέ μοι αὐτὸν ὧδε. 17 18 19 20 συνζητεῖτε πρὸς αὐὖὐ- ΄ AOE 4 3 TOUS; καὶ ἀπεκρίθη av- a 4. > a ὁ δῇ, τῷ εἷς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου: 4 ες Ν διδάσκαλε, ἤνεγκα τὸν αν / υἱόν μου πρός σε, ἔχον- τα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον, καὶ “ ὅπου ἐὰν αὐτὸν κατα- δὲ ΄ cre: \ > άβῃ ῥήσσει, καὶ ἀ- 7g \ 4% A φρίζει καὶ τρίζει τοὺς 500 Ν Be ’ ὀδόντας καὶ ξηραίνεται - \ . “-“ καὶ εἶπα τοῖς μαθη- ταῖς σου ἵνα αὐτὸ ἐκ- ΄ \ 3 4 βάλωσιν, καὶ οὐκ ἰσχυ- ε Ν 3 σαν. ὃ δὲ ἀποκρι- θ \ 3. τα , > εἰς αὐτοῖς λέγει- ὦ A γενεὰ ἄπιστος, ἕως ’ Ν n πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσο- a ΔΛ > se peat; ews πότε ἄνεξο- ε an / > μαι ὑμῶν ; φέρετε av- Ἂν / TOV πρός με. Kal ἤνεγ- ΕΝ \ 4“ καν QUTOV πρὸς αυτον. Ν ἰδὰ 9 2 Ν a ὑθὺ ΄ € 3 και LOWV QUTOV, TO TV EVLA ευσυς συνεσπαραξεν αυ- Μύ. 17:15. πάσχει Ο DA al it vg Treg. βλεψον δ 1). mg. West.mg. ; 37 38 39 40 41 Luxe IX. 37-48. ᾿Βγένετο δὲ τῇ ἑξῆς ε ΄ , > ἡμέρᾳ κατελθόντων ad- τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους συν- ἤντησεν αὐτῷ ὄχλος πολύς. δ Ae S558 καὶ ἰδοὺ ἀνὴρ > Ν fal y+ > , ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου ἐβόη- σεν λέγων * διδάσκαλε, δέομαί σου, ἐπίβλε- ψαι ἐπὶ τὸν υἱόν μου, “ ὅτι μονογενής μοι ἐ- A Ν > Ν cal στίν, καὶ ἰδοὺ πνεῦμα λαμβάνει αὐτὸν καὶ ἐξαίφνης σπαράσσει αὐτὸν μετὰ / ἈΝ κράζει καὶ > lal Ν / 39 ἀφροῦ, καὶ μόγις ἅπο- χωρεῖ ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ συν- lal δ Ν τρῖβον αὐτόν. καὶ ἐδε- ’ὔ ἴω ΄“ ήἤθην τῶν μαθητῶν σου ν , wa ἐκβάλωσιν αὐτό, Ν » 29 / καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν. ε ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ ᾿]η- lay τ bn! x mous εἶπεν - ὦ γενεὰ Ν ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμ- ε ΄ a μένη, ἕως πότε ἔσομαι Ν ε a ‘ > eZ προς υμαᾶς και avego- ἔχει S B L Zvid Or Treg. ἐπίβλεψαι A Β 1, A al (ἐπι- βλέψαι G Ἡ Καὶ Π Treg. West. Rev.) ; ἐπί- 90 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Part V. MARK IX. LUKE ΙΧ. 21 τό K \ \ fh Ngee a) a 3 NA 3 1a ᾿ Ν at s V, καὶ πεσὼν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἐκυλίετο ἀφρίζων. καὶ μαι ὑμῶν ; προσάγαγε / a / ae ἐπηρώτησεν TOV πατέρα αὐτοῦ" πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν 42 ὧδε τὸν υἱὸν σου. ἔτι a a ες a ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ ; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν > ἐκ παιδιόθεν - δὲ προσερχομένου αὖ- 22 καὶ πολλάκις καὶ εἰς πῦρ αὐτὸν ἔβαλεν καὶ εἰς ὕδατα, τοῦ ἐῤῥηξεν αὐτὸν τὸ ν 5 , 5 / > Ν 3, Ν / Ἂχ ΄ Ν ἵνα ἀπολέσῃ αὐτόν - ἀλλὰ εἴ τι δύνῃ, βοήθησον ἡμῖν δαιμόνιον καὶ συνε- Ν > 9 eae: a c x 3 lal > rf ,΄ 28 σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ σπάραξεν" Ν > / / Ἂν ΄ 4 > Ν /, 24 τὸ ef δύνῃ ; πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι. εὐθὺς Kpa- ε ν a ΄, »” 3 , Ξ , a 3 , SS ae 25 Eas ὃ πατὴρ τοῦ παιδίου ἔλεγεν - πιστεύω: βοήθει pov TH ἀπιστίᾳ. ἰδὼν δὲ ὃ 3 a oy Inoots ὅτι ἐπισυντρέ- MATT. XVII. χει ὁ ὄχλος, ἐπετίμη- LUKE IX. ἌΝ , > Ae fed , Lad / 18 καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῶ ὃ σεν τῷ πνεύματι τῷ ἐπιτίμησεν δὲ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἀκαθάρτῳ λέ UTO * ΔΙῚ vs τῷ ; ησοῦς, ἢ ρτῳ λέγων αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι > 9 3 lal Ν ὃ / Ν + Xi Ἂν Ν as 4 A SF ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὸ δαιμόνιον, τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν τῷ ἀκαθάρτῳ, καὶ ἰάσα- < “ an ° καὶ ἐθεραπεύθη ὃ παῖς πνεῦμα, ἐγώ ἐπιτάσσω τὸ τὸν παῖδα καὶ ἀπέ- 3) ἘΝ, a 4 3 / re λθ τὶ > a ὃ 9.-" a Ν 19 ἅπο τῆς wpas ἐεκεινῆς. σοι, ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ WKEV αὑτὸν τῷ πατρὶ , . Tore προσελθόντες οἱ καὶ μηκέτι εἰσέλθης εἰς 48 αὐτοῦ. ἐξεπλήσσοντο 6 Ν “ “ik ἴον 3 3 , Ν 4€é Ν δὲ ΄ aye. “ μαθηταὶ τῷ Ἰησοῦ κατ᾿ 26 αὐτόν. καὶ κράξας καὶ € πάντες ἐπὶ τῇ μεγα- > , al a ,ὔ ἰδίαν εἶπον - διατί ἡμεῖς πολλὰ σπαράξας ἐξῆλ- λειότητι τοῦ θεοῦ. ---- > > 7 > ASD. / e οὗ οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκβα- θεν - καὶ ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ > ΄ “ Ν Ν / bg 20 λεῖν αὐτό ; ' ὁ de λέγει νεκρός, ὥστε τοὺς πολλοὺς λέγειν ὅτι 3 “ ὃ Ν Ν 3 / CLA > £4 ε δὲ *T cal ’ a αὐτοῖς - διὰ τὴν ὀλιγοπιστίαν ὑμῶν: 27 ἀπέθανεν. ὃ δὲ ᾿Τησοῦς κρατήσας τῆς A Ν »ν "Δ. , x / ἀμὴν yap λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν χειρὸς αὐτοῦ ἤγειρεν αὐτόν, καὶ ἀνέ- “ la Ν ‘ lal ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, ἐρεῖτε τῷ ὄρει 28 στη. καὶ εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον 4 ΄ ΕΣ > lal Ν ε θ \ 3 A 3 ἰδί 5 iA τούτῳ" μετάβα ἔνθεν ἐκεῖ, καὶ μετα- οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ κατ᾽ ἰδίαν ἐπηρώτων , Ἂς Doe 3 / ean Φῆ ἊΣ ς ἊΝ > nO 46 3 βήσεται, καὶ οὐδὲν ἀδυνατήσει ὑμῖν. αὐτόν - ὅτι ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκ- tal ’ὔ Ἂς ον cal an 29 βαλεῖν αὐτό ; καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τοῦτο τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ. § 77. Jesus again foretells his own Death and Resurrection. — [See ὃ 74.] — Galilee. Matt. XVII. 22, 28. Mark ΙΧ. 30-82. Luxe IX. 43-46, 22 Συστρεφομένων δὲ 80 Κἀκεῖθεν ἐξελθόντες 48 --- ἸΪάντων δὲ θαυμα- αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ παρεπορεύοντο διὰ τῆς ζόντων ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ οὐκ ἐποίει, εἶπεν πρὸς τοὺς 0. ν ΚΝ 6 Ν > - ς 1 θέ ἤθελεν ἵνα τις γνοῖ 44 μαῦητας αὕτου €- 31 ἐδίδασκεν yap τοὺς pa- σθε ὑμεῖς εἰς τὰ ὦτα -ὰ Son. je Ὁ a \ > a \ oo» enn Ν ΄ ΄ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὃ Ἰησοῦς " θητὰς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔλε- ὑμῶν τοὺς λόγους τού- Mc. 9:23. τὸ δ Α ΒΟΊΤ, Δ (West. τό-:) ; Μ|ι. 17:91. deest in S* B 33 Treg.mg.; om TD 2P¢ | δύνῃ S* BD A (Treg. West. add τοῦτο δὲ τὸ γένος ὀυκ ἐκ πορεύεται, εἰ μὴ δύνῃ,); δύνασαι δὰ ACL Rev.; sine add. ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ S? CD LA vg Or SBC*L A cop; add πιστεῦσαι AC? Dit Ang [Treg.txt.] Rev.me. vg syrr |Treg.mg.] 24 ἔλεγεν NS A* B Mc. 9:29. προσευχῇ S* et? B; add καὶ C*L Acop; pm. μετὰ δακρύων ΑΞ C2 Dvg (τῇ A) νηστείᾳ N°? AC D L A it vg copsyrr West.mg. Rev.mg. Treg.txt. et [mg.] West.mg. Rey.mg. §§ 77, 78, 79.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 91 MATT. XVII. MARK ΙΧ. LUKE IX. / < εν a) 3 3 a oo < εν ε Ν εν a μέλλει 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- γεν αὐτοῖς ὅτι ὃ υἱὸς τους" ὃ γὰρ υἱὸς τοῦ Ὧ TAN Lal 3 , 4 > , / θρώπου παραδίδοσθαι τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδί- ἀνθρώπου μέλλει παρα- ρ μ ρ > o > θ Ul ὃ > a > 6 ΄ δῶ 6 3 “ 3 εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, οται εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώ- ίδοσθαι εἰς χεῖρας ἀν- a ἣν Lal ‘ , 23 ' καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐὖ- πων, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν 45 θρώπων. οἱ δὲ ἠγνόουν + / lol nw i τόν, καὶ TH τρίτῃ ἡμέ- αὑτόν, καὶ ἀποκτανθεὶς τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο, καὶ ἢν Ν “ L pa ἐγερθήσεται. Kat μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ava- παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπ᾽ 3 ’, / , ε Ν 2 / 3 Με Ν ” ἐλυπήθησαν σφόδραᾳ. 82 στήσεται. οἱ δὲ ἠγνό- αὐτῶν ἵνα μὴ αἴσθωνται ‘\ en Ν > 3 4 \ > cal ουν TO ῥῆμα, καὶ ἐφο- αὐτό, καὶ ἐφοβοῦντο a Ν ΄ βοῦντο αὐτὸν ἐπερω- ἐρωτῆσαι αὐτὸν περὶ Lal Lal , τῆσαι. τοῦ ῥήματος τούτου. § 78. The Tribute-money miraculously provided. —Capernaum. , Marr. XVIi. 24-27. Mark IX. 33. 24 “EdOdvrwy δὲ αὐτῶν cis Kadap- 33 Καὶ ἦλθον εἰς Kadapvaovp. — ναοὺμ προσῆλθον οἱ τὰ δίδραχμα λαμβάνοντες τῷ Πέτρῳ καὶ εἶπαν: 6 διδάσκαλος ὑμῶν οὐ τελεῖ δίδραχμα ; 25 λέγει - ναί. καὶ εἰσελθόντα εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν προέφθασεν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς λέγων" fe “A ’, ε fal an a 322 ’, / / BI oa τί σοι δοκεῖ, Sipwv ; οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς ἀπὸ τίνων λαμβάνουσιν τέλη ἢ κῆν- Oe lad en tt To ap Seen a 3 ΄ V2 / / SON lat > 26 cov; ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν αὐτῶν ἢ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ; ' εἰπόντος δέ" ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλο- 27 τρίων, ἔφη αὐτῷ 6 Ἰησοῦς - dpaye ἐλεύθεροί εἶσιν οἱ υἱοί. ἵνα δὲ μὴ σκανδαλί- 9 ΄ \ > ΄ , " \ N > ΄ a ζωμεν αὐτούς, πορευθεὶς εἰς θάλασσαν βάλε ἄγκιστρον Kat τὸν ἀναβάντα πρῶ- τον ἰχθὺν ἄρον, καὶ ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ εὑρήσεις στατῆρα" ἐκεῖνον λαβὼν δὸς αὐτοῖς ἀντὶ ἐμοῦ καὶ σοῦ. § 79. The Disciples contend who should be the Greatest. Jesus exhorts to Humility, Forbearance, and Brotherly Love. — Capernaum. Marr. XVIII. 1-35. Mark IX. 33-50. Luxe IX. 46-50. 1 Ἔν ἐκείνῃ TH ὥρᾳ 88 --- Καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ye 46 Εἰσῆλθεν δὲ διαλογι- προσῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ νόμενος ἐπηρώτα av- σμὸς ἐν αὐτοῖς, τὸ τίς τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ λέγοντες - τούς - τί ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν. τίς ἄρα μείζων ἐστὶν ἐν 84 διελογίζεσθε; οἱ δὲ 47 ὃ δὲ ᾿Ἰησοῦς εἰδὼς τὸν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρα- ἐσιώπων - πρὸς ἀλ- διαλογισμὸν τῆς καρ- / λήλους yap διελέχθη- > ~ ¢€ ~ ’ 4 Ἂς 35 σαν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ τίς μείζων. καὶ καθίσας ἐφώνησεν τοὺς ΄ Ν 4 “ r δώδεκα, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος Ν fal 2 νῶν; καὶ προσκαλε- καὶ πάντων διάκονος. δίας αὐτῶν, ἐπιλαβό- ΄, «» a x σάμενος ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς παι- 36 καὶ λαβὼν παιδίον ἔ- μενος παιδίου ἔστησεν Mt. 17: 94. δίδραχμα sc. S* D; pm τὰ N° δαλίζωμεν SL Z West.mg.; σκαδαλίσωμεν B B et omn Treg. West. Rev. 25 εἰσελ- ΤῸ et omnvid Treg. West.txt. Rev. θόντα S*ete? D (-ντι)ὴ West.mg.; ἐλθόντα Le. 9:47. εἰδὼς δὲ B syrr Treg.mg. ; ἰδὼν ea B Treg. West.txt.; ὅτε: εἰσῆλθεν EKL ACD L AG it vg cop Treg.txt. West.mg. A et pler vg cop; alii aliter. 27 oxave Rey. 92 MATT. XVIII. 5» / 3, = iD δίον ΕσΤΉσεν αὐτὸ εν ΄ a wer 3 μέσῳ αὐτῶν ‘Kal εἷ- 4 νῶν. » “ 3 nw 5 βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν. 98 99 40 41 5 Ν / c aA mev* ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 2Ν N a Ἢ ἐὰν μὴ στραφῆτε καὶ / θ ε Ἂ δέ γένησθε ὡς τὰ παιδία, > Ν 5 ΄, > Ν οὗ μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρα- iA 5 OOTLS οὖν τα- , ε Ν ε Ν TELVWOEL EQAUTOV ὡς TO 37 MARK IX, > ἣν 5 / στησεν αὐτὸ ἐν μέσῳ “ ἣν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐναγκαλι- Ye Ν > σάμενος αὐτὸ εἶπεν αὐὖ- a a a a la τοῖς * ὃς ἂν ἕν TOV παι- / τὰ ff δίων τούτων δέξηται yee. n 5 / , ἐπὶ TO ὀνόματί pov, 5 eh y, ν ἃ av ἐμὲ δέχεται Kal Os ἂν > Ἂν “Ὁ > > Ἂς ἐμὲ δέξηται, οὐκ ἐμὲ ΄ὔ 5 Ν Ἂν 3 δέχεται ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀπο- ’ Lal & / ΄ ΄ παιδίον TOUTO, OUTOS στείλαντά με. > ε ’ > a εστιν O μείζων εν ΤΊ) Ni ee 28 δέξ a και OS ἐεαν O€CHTAL EV SY a 3 ON AS ted ΄ > \ Sz TQALOLOV TOLOUTO ἐπι τῳ ονομᾶτι μου, ἐμε εχέται. MARK IX. "Edy αὐτῷ ὃ τ 5 Ἰωάννης - διδάσκαλε, εἴδομέν τινα a / \ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου ἐκβάλλοντα δαιμόνια, ὃς οὐκ 5 lad c “ Ν > , > “4 “ 3 3 ἀκολουθεῖ ἡμῖν, καὶ ἐκωλύομεν αὐτόν, ὅτι οὐκ ἀκο- “ al > nan 5S / λουθεῖ ἡμῖν. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν - μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν - bo \ / > a / ὃ , > \ nn” 5 / , οὐδεὶς yap ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί Ν , ἴω \ μου καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί pe’ ὃς γὰρ 3 3, x ¢ a eX ε “ > lA a Ν Ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν καθ᾽ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστίν. ὃς γὰρ ἂν cal WA > "ἃ , Ψ ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος ἐν ὀνόματί μου, ὅτι XxX ῦ ἐστέ, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐ μή ἀπολέσ ριστοῦ ἐστέ, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐ μὴ n FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER 48 49 50 [PARToy. LUKE IX. 3) ON 9) te ae | ‘ αὐτὸ παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, ἵἿ καὶ ἂν 3 a ἃ 2\ / εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ὃς ἐὰν δέ- EnTaL τοῦτο τὸ παιδίον Lee, a 3 / ’ ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, 5: / Sse ἐμὲ O€xerar* Kal ὃς ἂν / ἐμὲ δέξηται, δέχεται τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με: ὃ γὰρ μικρότερος ἐν πᾶσιν ὑμῖν ὑπάρχων, Φ / οὗτός ἐστιν μέγας. > Ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ 6 Ἴω- , Ss avvys εἶπεν - ἐπιστάτα, ἴὸ / ΒΞ ΤᾺΝ = 2 ΄ εἰδομέν τινα ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνό- ματί σου ἐκβάλλοντα 14 δαιμόνια, καὶ ἐκωλύσα- μεν αὐτόν, ὅτι οὐκ ἀκο- lal > λουθεῖ μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν. εἷ- Ἂν" Ν BLA 3 πεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν In- a in / a σοῦς- μὴ κωλύετε: ὃς Ν Ν > a TOV μισθὸν αυτου. MATT. XVIII. 6 ὃς δ᾽ ἂν σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν 7 σης. lal / τούτων TOV πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμέ, συμ- / > ~ 7 “ ΄ > φέρει αὐτῷ ἵνα κρεμασθῇ μύλος ὀνι- cal ἊΝ κὸς περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ καὶ κα- ταποντισθῇ ἐν τῷ πελάγει τῆς θαλάσ- Οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀπὸ τῶν σκαν- δάλων + ἀνάγκη γάρ ἐστιν ἐλθεῖν τὰ ~ > σκάνδαλα, πλὴν oval τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ δι ἱ \ / 3, 3 Nie οὗ TO σκάνδαλον ἔρχεται. εἰ δὲ ἡ εἰρ σου ἢ ὃ πούς σου σκανδαλίζει χεὶρ 1 42 43 45 vay, εἰς TO πῦρ TO ἄσβεστον. Ν > 3, ? γὰρ OUK €OTLV καθ εἰ ἐν ς κα'ὶ ene , ὕὍὉμων, ὕπερ ὕτυμων ἐστιν. MARK ΙΧ. ᾿ Kai ὃς ἂν σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μι- κρῶν τούτων τῶν πιστευόντων, καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ περίκειται μύ- λος ὀνικὸς περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ καὶ βέβληται εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν. καὶ ἐὰν σκανδαλίζῃ σε 7) χείρ σου, ἀπό- κοψον αὐτήν - καλόν ἐστίν σε κυλλὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωήν, ἢ τὰς δύο χεῖρας ἔχοντα ἀπελθεῖν εἰς τὴν γέεν- καὶ Mc. 9:37. παιδίων τούτων SC A; τοιού- των παιδίων AB D Lit ve Treg. West. Rey. 38 ὃς... ἡμῖν A D it vg syrP [Treg.] West.mg.; om 8 Β C L A (cf. Le.) Treg. me. West.txt. Rev. (om ὅτι... ἡμῖν D it ve.) 41 μου S* C3 DA it vg cop; om N° A B C* L Treg. West. Rev. Le. 9:49. ἐκωλύσαμεν AC DAve; ἐκω- λύομεν δὰ B LE Treg.mg. West. Rev. Me. 9 : 42. πιστευόντων (πίστιν ἐχόντων C* Ὁ Treg.mg.) S C* Ὁ A Rev.mg.; add eis ἐμέ A B C? Lvg syrr Treg.txt. et [mg.] West. Rev.txt. 44 (46) totum versum om NBCLA dis: : D8 191 MATT. XVIII. σε, ἔκκοψον αὐτὸν καὶ βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ" “Μ᾿ ἊΨ 5 > a > ἣν καλόν σοί ἐστιν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν X \ a Ν ΠῚ ΄ an " ζωὴν κυλλὸν ἢ χωλὸν, ἢ δύο χεῖρας ἢ δύο πόδας ἔχοντα βληθῆναι εἰς τὸ 9 πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον. καὶ εἰ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζει σε, ἔξελε αὐτὸν καὶ - 3 Ν a / Cy | βάλε ἀπὸ cod: καλόν σοί ἐστιν μο- νόφθαλμον εἰς τὴν ζωὴν εἰσελθεῖν, ἢ δύο ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντα βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν γέενναν τοῦ πυρός. 49 νυται." πᾶς γὰρ πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται. UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 93 MARK IX. ἐὰν ὃ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἀπό- 3 , > , > κοψον αὐτόν - καλόν ἐστίν σε εἰσελ- cr > Ν \ / A \ , θεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλόν, ἢ τοὺς δύο 49> 4 fal > ‘ , πόδας ἔχοντα βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν γέεν- 47 ναν. καὶ ἐὰν ὃ ὀφθαλμός σου σκαν- δαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν: καλόν σε ἐστὶν μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, ἢ δύο ὀφθαλ- \ " a > \ , μοὺς ἔχοντα βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν γέεν- 9 «ες / > lal > 48 vav, ὅπου ὃ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ “ Ν \ la) 3 / τελευτᾷ Kal TO πῦρ οὐ σβέν- c καλὸν τὸ ἅλα ᾿ Ν Ν ἂν - + / > Ἂ 2 \ > 4, 50 ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἅλα avadov γένηται, ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε; ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα καὶ εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις. MATT. XVIII. ε an ‘ ΄ εν a a , We Ν eng ε 10 Opare μὴ καταφρονήσητε ἑνὸς τῶν μικρῶν τούτων " λέγω γὰρ υμιν OTL οἱ ΝΜ 3 “ > > cal Ν \ / ἣν 4 a ’ὔ ἄγγελοι αὐτῶν ἐν οὐρανοῖς διὰ παντὸς βλέπουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ πατρὸς μου 12 τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. a a , ἣΝ ,ὔ Τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ ἑκατὸν πρόβατα Ν Aaa > aor > ‘ > A ‘ 9 ’΄ > 4 3 N\ Ἂν 4 6 Ni καὶ πλανηθῇ ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν, οὐχὶ ἀφεὶς τὰ ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη πορευθεὶς 18 ζητεῖ τὸ πλανώμενον ; 14 1: | 3 a αλλ Ἃ > \ a 5 7, > Me a ἊΝ Χ ἔνοι €7T αυτῷ pas OV 1) ἐπι τοις ενενΉ κοντα, €VVEA τοις PY πετ. ανΏμενο ς, wera, / ε a SB τ 39 ‘ , Cee: ov la καὶ €OV γένηται ευρειν αυτο. αμην λέγω υμιν οτι χάιρει Ψ OUTWS 3 ” vA 5) a \ ε “ mn > 3 a ν 3 , Δ OUK εστιν θέλημα ἔμπροσθεν του TATPOS VULWV TOV ἐν ουρᾶνοις La ἀπόληται εν τῶν μικρῶν τούτων. 15 Ἐὰν δὲ ἁμαρτήσῃ 6 ἀδελφός σου, ὕπαγε ἔλεγξον αὐτὸν μεταξὺ σοῦ καὶ αὐτοῦ 16 μόνου δι 3759 > , > / ὃ A i) N / 38 δὲ Ν 5 ΄’ὔ = , €av σου aKOUVOY), εκερ σας τον QOE/ ov σου. εαν O€ μη aKOUTN, Tapa- 17 18 19 λ x a» ¢ BY ὃ “τ ὺν ὍΝ ΄ ὃ ΄ ΄ ΕἸ A A αβε μετὰ σεαυτοῦ ἔτι ἕνα ἢ δύο, ἵνα ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων ἢ τριῶν σταθῇ a en @ 2 δὲ ἧς 9 “(ὦ ΦΕῸ Ν AS) , 2N Ν Ν lod > 4 πᾶν ῥῆμα." ἐὰν δὲ παρακούσῃ αὐτῶν, εἰπὸν TH ἐκκλησίᾳ: ἐὰν δὲ καὶ τῆς ἐκκλη- ΄ ΄ μ᾿ ῳ ex \ ὦ ((- , 3 Ν , emer σίας παρακούσῃ, ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ ὃ ἐθνικὸς καὶ ὃ τελώνης. ᾿Αμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅσα ἐὰν δήσητε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται δεδεμένα ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ὅσα ἐὰν λύ ἡσητ τῆς γῆ μ ᾧ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ὅσα ἐὰν λύσητε aN “ ὩΣ ΛΝ, f ir , 3 A > a na Ν᾽ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται λελυμένα ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ. Πάλιν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐὰν δύο συμ- , 2:ε κα > Ν a n \ - φωνήσωσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς περὶ παντὸς πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται, γενή- 3 a Ἂν A ἊΝ ral 20 σεται αὑτοῖς Tapa τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. a ,ὔ > , a “Ὁ οὗ γάρ εἰσιν δύο ἢ τρεῖς / > Nie. ον τ ΝΥ 2 a Ν lal συνηγμένοι εἰς TO ἐμὸν ὄνομα, ἐκεῖ εἰμὶ ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν. fe a 21 ‘Tore προσελθὼν ὃ Πέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ΄ ΄ ε , Sue Ne KUPL€, ποσάκις αμαρτήσει ELS εμε O 9 / Ἁ > , 3 ¢ , a 3 nA 22 ἀδελῴός μου καὶ ἀφήσω αὐτῷ; ἕως ἑπτάκις; | λέγει αὐτῷ ὃ “Incoids: οὐ λέγω 8 48. Comp. Isa. 66 : 24. b 15. Comp. Lev. 19 :17, 18. P 6 10. Deut. 19:15. 2Pe cop ; add (= ver. 48.) A D itPler vg syrr [Treg:] Mc. 9:45. yéervayvy SBCL A 1 cop; add eis τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον (= ver. 43) A Ὁ. 46 vide 44. 47 γέενναν SB DLA; add τοῦ πυρός A C syrr [Treg.mg.]. 49 πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται δὰ BL A 1 2Pe Treg. mg.; add kal πᾶσα θυσία ἁλὶ ἁλισθήσεται A Ο Ὁ it vg syrr | Treg.txt.] West.mg. Rev.mg, Mt.18:11. totum versum om SB L* 1 33 cop; add ἦλθε yap ὃ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου σῶσαι τὸ ἀπολωλός 1) A et multi vg syrr Rev. meg. 14 ὑμῶν δ D? (ἡμῶν D*) L A it ve Aug West.mg.; μοῦ B = cop Or Treg. West. txt. Rev.mg. 15 ἁμαρτήσῃ SB 1 Or Rev.mg.; add eis σὲ D et multi it vg cop syrr Treg.txt. et [mg.] Rey.txt. 94 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 10 11 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Part V. MATT. XVIII. of e , 3 393. Φ ε , 4 σοι ἕως ἑπτάκις, ἀλλ’ ἕως ἑβδομηκοντάκις ἑπτά. διὰ τοῦτο ὡμοιώθη ἡ βασι- Χ ’ lal 3 ~ > 6 , a aA > / a ie Ν an , ela τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ βασιλεῖ, ὃς ἠθέλησεν συνᾶραι λόγον μετὰ τῶν δού- λων αὐτοῦ. ἀρξαμένου δὲ αὐτοῦ συναίρειν, προσηνέχθη εἷς αὐτῷ ὀφειλέτης , ΄ \ of δὲ 3 aS ὃ ἴω a7 CN ε , μυρίων ταλάντων. μὴ ἔχοντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι, ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ὃ κύριος aA “- Ν ¢ “ πραθῆναι καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα καὶ τὰ τέκνα καὶ πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν, καὶ ἀποδοθῆναι. > a “-“ Ὁ / πεσὼν οὖν 6 δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λέγων + μακροθύμησον ἐπ᾽ ἐμοί, καὶ , 3 , Ν ἈΝ , La) aA 2: 4 5 , πάντα ἀποδώσω σοι. σπλαγχνισθεὶς δὲ ὃ κύριος τοῦ δοῦλου ἐκείνου ἀπέλυσεν ΄ \ A A a a - an αὐτόν, καὶ TO δάνειον ἀφῆκεν αὐτῷς ἐξελθὼν δὲ ὃ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος εὗρεν ἕνα τῶν ὃ “λ. 3 a aA 3} 3) HN Ce \ ὃ / Ν 2 Lae 3 συνδούλων αὐτοῦ, ὃς ὥφειλεν αὐτῷ ἑκατὸν δηνάρια, καὶ κρατήσας αὐτὸν ἔπνιγεν / ΄ , > “ λέγων - ἀπόδος εἴ τι ὀφείλεις. πεσὼν οὖν ὃ σύνδουλος αὐτοῦ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν / SA λέγων - μακροθύμησον ἐπ᾽ ἐμοί, καὶ ἀποδώσω σοι. ὃ δὲ οὐκ ἤθελεν, ἀλλὰ ἀπελ- Ν A θὼν ἔβαλεν αὐτὸν εἰς φυλακὴν ἕως ἀποδῷ τὸ ὀφειλόμενον. ἰδόντες οὖν οἱ σύν- 3 ““ Ν / ‘6 / / “ δουλοι αὐτοῦ τὰ γινόμενα ἐλυπήθησαν σφόδρα, καὶ ἐλθόντες διεσάφησαν τῷ κυρίῳ ἑαυτῶν πάντα τὰ γενόμενα. τότε προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτὸν ὃ κύριος αὐτοῦ λέγει αὐτῷ - δοῦλε πονηρέ, πᾶσαν τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἐκεί ἰφῆκά ἐπεὶ L έγει αὑτῷ Ae Tovnpe, πᾶσαν τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἐκείνην ἀφῆκά σοι, ἐπεὶ παρεκά- λεσάς με: οὐκ ἔδει καὶ σὲ ἐλεῆσαι τὸν σύνδουλόν σου, ὡς κἀγώ σε ἠλέησα; \ ε 4 nw -“ Lal -“ καὶ ὀργισθεὶς ὃ κύριος αὐτοῦ παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν τοῖς βασανισταῖς ἕως οὗ ἀποδῷ a / a n πᾶν TO ὀφειλόμενον αὐτῷ. οὕτως Kal ὁ πατήρ μου ὃ οὐράνιος ποιὴσει ὑμῖν, ἐὰν \ 3 » ¢ “ LO Xr “ > an 3 Ν lal ὃ a ε an μὴ ἀφῆτε ἕκαστος τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν ὑμῶν. § 80. The Seventy instructed and sent out.—Capernaum. [ Galilee.] Lukm X. 1-1/6: lal Ν , Ἁ Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἀνέδειξεν 6 κύριος καὶ ἑτέρους ἑβδομήκοντα, καὶ ἀπέστειλεν > AY aN ΄ Ν / > Lal > a aN Ν / ao mw αὐτοὺς ἀνὰ δύο πρὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ εἰς πᾶσαν πόλιν καὶ τόπον οὗ ἤμελλεν + eae ” αὐτὸς ἔρχεσθαι. Ν ’ὔ’ Ν / > / 7 Ἔλεγεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς - ὃ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ δὲ ἐργάται ὀλίγοι: δεήθητε Ss an , a lal “ 5 / > IX > Ἂς 6 Ν 9 a οὖν τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ θερισμοῦ ὅπως ἐργάτας ἐκβάλῃ εἰς τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτοῦ. ε , 3 Ν > / ε lal c » ᾿ 5 , , ἣν , 4 ὑπάγετε: ἰδοὺ ἀποστέλλω ὑμᾶς os ἄρνας ἐν μέσῳ λύκων. μὴ βαστάζετε 4 ‘ , ΟΝ ε ὃ / ὃ ’ ἊΝ Ἂς, δδὸ 3 / 6 a βαλλάντιον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ ὑποδήματα" μηδένα κατὰ τὴν δὸὸν ἀσπάσησθε. oe τὰ ὃ᾽ Ἂ 3 ONG) Sa, “ ν λέ 5 3 Lee a ik ov Ag ON 6 cis ἣν δ᾽ ἂν εἰσέλθητε οἰκίαν, πρῶτον A€yeTE* εἰρήνη TO οἴκῳ τούτῳ. καὶ ἐὰν try .9 a εν Wn ta > , > 9 9) DEN ε 3 Ἄ ᾿ ε Lol 3 > δὲ la a9 Δ a ἢ ἐκεῖ υἱὸς εἰρήνης, ἐταναπαήσεται ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν - εἰ δὲ μήγε, ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς an “ ἐν / Ν ’ ean ἀνακάμψει. ἐν αὐτῇ δὲ TH οἰκίᾳ μένετε, ἔσθοντες καὶ πίνοντες τὰ Tap’ αὐτῶν " ε ι ε UE Ν δι" ΄ a a > a Ἂ , ἐξ 3 > hates: ἄξιος γὰρ ὃ ἐργάτης τοῦ μισθοῦ αὐτοῦ. μὴ μεταβαίνετε ἐξ οἰκίας εἰς οἰκίαν. lal ’ὔ Ν ye eo. ΡΝ καὶ eis ἣν ἂν πόλιν εἰσέρχησθε καὶ δέχωνται ὑμᾶς, ἐσθίετε τὰ παρατιθέμενα ὑμῖν, -“ la Ν / > -“ ᾿" el ae “- Τ᾿ καὶ θεραπεύετε τοὺς ἐν αὐτῇ ἀσθενεῖς, καὶ λέγετε αὐτοῖς - ἤγγικεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς a “ \ Ν , ε -“ > ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ. εἰς ἣν δ᾽ ἂν πόλιν εἰσέλθητε καὶ μὴ δέχωνται ὑμᾶς, ἐξελ- a » Ν ,} / c “" θόντες εἰς τὰς πλατείας αὐτῆς εἴπατε: καὶ τὸν κονιορτὸν τὸν κολληθέντα ἡμῖν 24, Comp. 2 K. 4:29. Mt. 18:26. ἐκεῖνος δὲς DLA 33 it vg cop ve; om B L £33 cop [Treg.] West. Rev. | syrr; om S* B et multi Treg. West. Rev. ἑβδομήκοντα δὰ A CLA & cop syrr Iren Tert 84 αὐτῷ Stet? C et multi cop syrr; Treg.; add δύο B D vg Aug [| West.] Rev. om Sa B D it vg (cf. ver..30) Treg. West. me. 4 μηδένα S* 33; pm καὶ Se AB Rey. C D et omn it vg al Treg. West. Rev. Ie. 10:1. καὶ pr. δ AC Ὁ fere omn it 5 οἰκίαν πρῶτον, (it syr) Rev.mg. §§ 12 13 14 15 16 § 81. Jesus goes up to the Festival of Tabernacles. 4 5 7 10 51 52 53 54 δῦ 80, 81.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 95 LUKE X. ΕἸ a / ε las > AN / 3 Α͂ ea Ν A , ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ὑμῶν εἰς τοὺς πόδας ἀπομασσόμεθα ὑμῖν - πλὴν τοῦτο γινώσκετε, Ca » ε , a a 72 ne a “ “ ’ > Ae ,ὔ ΕἸ , ὅτι ἤγγικεν ἣ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτι Σοδόμοις ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 3 ΄ 5, Ἃ a ΄ 2 , ΤῊΝ γιὸ ΄ Se: Os ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνη. Οὐαί σοι Χοραζείν, οὐαί σοι Βηθσαϊδά - μι 3.9 Ty, \ Sida 3 AG} ἱ ὃ Wee ε ᾿ς αι ἐ ὑμῖν πάλ ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις at γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι a > 4 Ν ὃ A (A) Δ vA AF T , Ν 3 δῶ 3 / αν εν σάκκῳ και σπο ῳ κα μενοι μετενοησαν. TAYV up® και tOWVL ἀνεέεκτο- ἊΣ Ἂ ve ἣν ov > a“ ες καὶ σὺ Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὕψω- Noe a τερον ἔσται ἐν TH κρίσει ἢ ὑμῖν. « > / ἮΝ n 5 ἴω 5 ’ Ν ε 3 ΄“ O ἀκούων ὑμῶν ἐμοῦ ἀκούει, καὶ ὁ ἀθετῶν θήσῃ ; ἕως ἄδου καταβιβασθήσῃ. ὑμᾶς ἐμὲ ἀθετεῖ" ὃ δὲ ἐμὲ ἀθετῶν ἀθετεῖ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με. His Final Departure from Galilee. Incidents in Samaria. Joun VII. 2-10. 5 , 3 ἪΝ δὲ ἐγγὺς ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἡ σκηνοπηγία. ““ lal ω > ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ - μετάβηθι ἐντεῦθεν καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν, ἵνα καὶ ot μαθη- ταί σου θεωρήσωσιν τὰ ἔργα σου ἃ ποιεῖς - οὐδεὶς γάρ τι ἐν κρυπτῷ ποιεῖ καὶ εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς, φανέρωσον σεαυτὸν τῷ κόσμῳ. ε c > > \ yeh ε €LTOV οὖν προς AVTOV οἱ “ ΠΝ 3 a¢ 4 LY ζητεῖ αὐτὸς ἐν παῤῥησίᾳ εἶναι. 6 ὑδὲ ἊΣ é ἀδελ \ EAT als gs evs 3 af λέ ὑτοῖς 6 Ἶ Ξ ε οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐτόν. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὃ Ἰησους" ὃ " A ΄, «“ καιρὸς ὃ ἐμὸς οὔπω πάρεστιν, ὃ δὲ καιρὸς 6 ὑμέτερος πάντοτέ ἐστιν ἕτοιμος. οὐ , , - a “-ὦὋ΄ὟχἋΤ lal Ν 3 es {iy x δύναται ὃ κόσμος μισεῖν ὑμᾶς, ἐμὲ δὲ μισεῖ, OTL ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ αὐτοῦ OTL TA μ 3 a“ 43 ε Pe Sef > Ν ε ,΄ ΒΘ, ΟΝ 3 9 ’ ΕἸ ἔργα αὐτοῦ πονηρά ἐστιν. ὑμεῖς ἀνάβητε εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν: ἐγὼ οὐκ ἀναβαίνω εἷς ἣν ε δ ΄ Ψ ε ‘\ ε Ἂν + ἴω τὴν ἑορτὴν ταύτην, ὅτι ὃ καιρὸς ὃ ἐμὸς οὔπω πεπλήρωται. ταῦτα εἰπὼν αὐτὸς + a ,ὔ ε Ss BO \ κ᾿ ἔμεινεν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ. ὡς δὲ ἀνέβησαν οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν, 3 id ὯΝ Ν / fr τότε καὶ αὐτὸς ἀνέβη, οὐ φανερῶς GAN’ ἐν κρυπτῷ. Τὺςὺὕκε IX. 51-56. 3 ,ὔ ae tal a Ν ,ὕ a im γένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ συμπληροῦσθαι τὰς ἡμέρας τῆς ἀναλήμψεως αὐτοῦ, καὶ αὐτὸς Ν 4 a a a τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ἐστήρισεν τοῦ πορεύεσθαι cis Ἱερουσαλήμ, ' Kat ἀπέστειλεν > by. \ , ree. \ Ae mA 9 ΄ τ an ἀγγέλους πρὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ. καὶ πορευθέντες εἰσῆλθον εἰς πόλιν Sapapitav, or , an “ τὴ εἰ a> ὥστε ἑτοιμάσαι αὐτῷ: καὶ οὐκ ἐδέξαντο αὐτόν, ὅτι τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ἣν πορευό- ΟὟ ὁ ΄ Ὁ 7 \ ε > μενον εἰς Ἱερουσαλήμ. ἰδόντες δὲ of μαθηταὶ Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωάννης εἶπαν" Δ) / * “a ἴον lal aA κύριε, θέλεις εἴπωμεν πῦρ καταβῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἀναλῶσαι αὐτούς; Ν Ν / > al 56 στραφεὶς δὲ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς. καὶ ἐπορεύθησαν εἰς ἑτέραν κώμην. Ie. 10:12. δὲ δ Ὁ Ξ cop; ὁ Α ΒΟ], A vg syrr Tree. West. Rev. 15 καταβιβασθήσῃ S A CLA ἃ] it cop syrr Westmg.; καταβήσῃ B D Treg.mg. West.txt. (cf. Mt. 11: 23). Joh. 7:4. αὐτὸς NS De" L et vg syrr al; αὐτὸ B D* cop Treg.mg. West.mg. Rey.mg. 6 λεγει S* De"; add ody N° BL A vg cop Treg. West. Rev. 8 οὐκ δὰ D vg cop Treg. West.mg. Rev.mg. (Am.txt.); οὔπω B LTA syrr West.txt. Rev.txt (Am.mg.) 9 ταῦτα SD 1 33 2P¢ ve Tree.; add δὲ B LA cop West. Rev. | αὐτὸς δὴ D* L 1 vg cop Treg.mg. West.mg.; αὐτοῖς B D? A Treg. txt. West.txt. Rey. 10 ἐν κρυπτῷ δὰ 1); pm ὡς BL T yg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. Le. 9:52. πόλιν S* 69 ve; κώμην Se A BC DLA EZ cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 54 αὐτούς δὰ Β LE vg; add ὡς καὶ ‘HAlas (Ἠλείας) ἐποίησεν A C D A it?! syrr Aug [Treg.mg.] West.mg. Rev.mg. 55 αὐτοῖς SA BCL ἘΔ; add καὶ εἶπεν" οὐκ οἴδατε οἵου (ποίου 1) West.mg.) πνεύμα- τός ἐστε ὑμεῖς" (:) D min vg syrr West.mg. Rev.mg. 56 om ὁ yap... σῶσαι SAB 96 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER. [Part V. § 82. Ten Lepers cleansed. — Samaria. Luke ΧΕ 11—19. κ᾿ , A ΄ 3. 1 , \ En , , 11. ΚΚαὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ πορεύεσθαι εἰς ἹΙερουσαλήμ, καὶ αὐτὸς διήρχετο διὰ μέσον / “ 12 Sapapias καὶ Γαλιλαίας. καὶ εἰσερχομένου αὐτοῦ εἴς τινα κώμην ὑπήντησαν 18 αὐτῷ δέκα λεπροὶ ἄνδρες, οἱ ἔστησαν πόρρωθεν, | καὶ αὐτοὶ ἦραν φωνὴν λέγοντες " ; ροὶ ἄνδρες, ρρωθεν, ἦρ ἣν λέγ 3 a 3 4 ΘΛ ε a ΔΘ, S 3 ta} / > , 14. Ἰησοῦ ἐπιστάτα, ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς. Kai ἰδὼν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - πορευθέντες ἐπιδείξατε 15 ἑαυτοὺς τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὑπάγειν αὐτοὺς ἐκαθαρίσθησαν. ᾿ εἷς δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἰδὼν ὅτι ἰάθη, ὑπέστρεψεν μετὰ φωνῆς μεγάλης δοξάζων τὸν θεόν, / LAN lal “-“ 16 | καὶ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ εὐχαριστῶν αὐτῷ: καὶ αὐτὸς > ig > \ a a lal ap ON ς ΄ > , ε 17 ἦν Sapapirys. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ ᾿Τησοῦς εἶπεν - οὐχὶ οἱ δέκα ἐκαθαρίσθησαν ; ot 5 , A > ec 7 ε ΄, a , a as Ἐν: 18 ἐννέα ποῦ; οὐχ εὑρέθησαν ὑποστρέψαντες δοῦναι δόξαν τῷ θεῷ εἰ μὴ ὃ ἀλλογε- a \ 5 a ν᾿ , 19 νὴς οὗτος ; ' καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ἀναστὰς πορεύου" ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε. CDLAE 33 al; add 6 γὰρ (om West. Le. 17:17. ἐννέα A ΤῸ itele’ cop Or; pm mg.) υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἦλθε ψυχὰς ave 5E NBL Δ ἃ] [Treg.] | West.] Rev. θρώπων ἀπολέσαι, ἀλλὰ σῶσαι FW K al vg 18 οὗτος. Rev.mg. syrr | West.mg.] Rev.mg. PART VL. ---.--- THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY SIX DAYS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. Time: Six months less six days. 8 83. Jesus at the Festival of Tabernacles. His public teaching. —Jerusalem. Joun VII. 11-52. a a a 297 See NPL a ¢ a CPE) An [Sn She 51. καὶ 11 O: οὖν ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ καὶ ἔλεγον" ποῦ ἐστὶν ἐκεῖνος ; ‘ = a a / “ , 12 καὶ γογγυσμὸς ἣν περὶ αὐτοῦ πολὺς ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ - οἱ μὲν ἔλεγον ὅτι ἀγαθός ἐστιν" ἃ Α' 13 ἄλλοι ἔλεγον οὔ, ἀλλὰ πλανᾷ τὸν ὄχλον. | οὐδεὶς μέντοι παῤῥησίᾳ ἐλάλει Naor s = N NUN ΄ ees) ΄ περὶ αὐτοῦ διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων. » a a A ΄ \ \ ΄ 1416 Ἤδη δὲ τῆς ἑορτῆς μεσούσης ἀνέβη Ἰησοῦς εἰς τό ἱερὸν καὶ ἐδίδασκεν. ἐθαύ- > > a im - BO , μαζον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι λέγοντες: πῶς οὗτος γράμματα οἶδεν μὴ μεμαθηκώς ; 3 , ΑΝ 3 a 3 a Ν ἊΝ Ἔκ αι Ἂς ἘῸΝ Ν 3 + TRAN Ν a 16 ἀπεκρίθη οὖν αὐτοῖς Ἰησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν: ἡ ἐμὴ διδαχὴ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὴ αλλὰ τοῦ is a fal A“ a 17 πέμψαντός με: ἐάν τις θέλῃ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ ποιεῖν, γνώσεται περὶ τῆς διδαχῆς, ΄ a lal rn 18 πότερον ἐκ θεοῦ ἐστὶν ἢ ἐγὼ ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ λαλῶ. ὁ ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ λαλῶν THY δόξαν Ν 2Q7 “ ε NES “ Ν ΄ a / LG en > ΄ > τὴν ἰδίαν Cyret: ὃ δὲ ζητῶν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν, οὗτος ἀληθής ἐστιν ἊΣ 3 ,ὔ 2 3A > ” > oA , δ τῶν Ν , Ν 29 \ 3 19 καὶ ἀδικία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν. οὐ Μωῦσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὸν νόμον ; καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ 20 ὑμῶν ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον: τί με ζητεῖτε ἃ ἴναι ; | ἀπεκρίθη ὃ ὄχλος - δαιμόνιο μῶ νόμον: τί με ζητεῖτε ἀποκτεῖναι ; | ἀπεκρίθη ὃ ὄχλος μόνιον "» ὃ , vat) a - { 9 (0 ἢ a Ν 3 > ae. a + 21 ἔχεις " τίς σε ζητεῖ ἀποκτεῖναι; ἷ ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Τησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἕν ἔργον , \ ΄ , ε ΕΣ A 7 22 ἐποίησα καὶ πάντες θαυμάζετε. ὃ Moions δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὴν περιτομήν, οὐχ ὅτι ΕἸ “ “ / > 4 > Smee} cal , δὴ > , > 4 ἐκ τοῦ Μωύσέως ἐστίν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκ τῶν πατέρων, καὶ ἐν σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄν- 8, > Ν ΄ 4 3 , 7 Ν me , ε 28 θρωπον." εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν σαββάτῳ ἵνα μὴ λυθῇ ὃ νόμος ὃ ” / ἊΝ lal Ψ ov 3, an 24 Μωύσέως, ἐμοὶ χολᾶτε ὅτι ὅλον ἄνθρωπον ὑγιῆ ἐποίησα ἐν σαββάτῳ ; | μὴ κρί- νετε κατ᾽ ὄψιν, ἀλλὰ τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνατε. 4 > na ε lal 25 ᾽Ἔλεγον οὖν τινὲς ἐκ τῶν ἹἹεροσολυμειτῶν - οὐχ οὗτὸς ἐστιν ὃν ζητοῦσιν azo- 8 29. Lev. 12:3. Joh.7:12. τῷ ὄχλω δὰ 1) 33 it vg cop; τοῖς σῆς) δὰ B DL T A et omn it vg al | διὰ ὄχλοις Β L A al Treg. West. Rev. | ἄλλοι τοῦτο Mw. Ὁ K LA al cop syrr Treg.mg. SDLA; add δὲ B T ve cop Treg. [West.] West. Rev. (Ang.txt.) ; θαυμάζετε διὰ τοῦτο. Rev. 19 δέδωκεν δὴ LT A West.mg.; Mow. X Treg.txt. Rey.mg. (Am.txt.); Se B ἔδωκεν BD Treg. West.txt. Rev. al non distingu. 24 κρίνατε δὴ A al; 22 6 Μωῦσῆς S*; διὰ τοῦτο Μωῦσῆς (Mw- κρίνετε BD 1, Τ' Treg. West. a 98 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. JOHN VII. a \ αὐ ε , “~ Ἂν A 4 κτεῖναι ; ' καὶ ide παῤῥησίᾳ λαλεῖ, καὶ οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν. μήποτε ἀληθὼς + εν “ ar > ε Χ ΄ 7 - ν a ” ΄ ἔγνωσαν οἱ ἄρχοντες ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός ; ' ἀλλὰ τοῦτον οἴδαμεν πόθεν 5» id ε Ν r Ν “ oy > \ us / > , 3, 53" ἐστίν: ὁ δὲ Χριστὸς ὅταν ἔρχηται, οὐδεὶς γινώσκει πόθεν ἐστίν. ἔκραξεν οὖν > nae tol ΄, φῦ ν5 “ Ἂς / 5 Ἂς 3, ὯΝ + ’, αὶ 4 ἐν TO ἱερῷ διδάσκων 6 Ἰησοῦς καὶ λέγων: κἀμὲ οἴδατε καὶ οἴδατε πόθεν εἰμί: καὶ ax’ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα, ἀλλ᾽ ἔστιν ἀληθινὸς ὃ πέμψας με, ὃν ὑμεῖς οὐκ " > \ 5 ΔΎΟ “ 5... 75. NS EN BRS Ly τ δι τ ἌΣ ΤΣ 7 30 οἴδατε: ἐγὼ οἶδα αὐτόν, ὅτι παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ εἰμὶ κἀκεῖνός με ἀπέσταλκεν. ἐζήτουν > ΤΊΣΙΝ , ‘ 3 Ἂν > , ee 32 ἊΝ ΝΥ fal μὲ ΕΝ > 7, ε οὖν αὐτὸν πιάσαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν τὴν χεῖρα, ὅτι οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ dpa αὐτοῦ. Πολλοὶ δὲ ἐπίστευσαν ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου εἰς αὐτόν, καὶ ἔλεγον - ὃ Χρι- 7 , = a 5 ἐν στὸς ὅταν ἔλθῃ, μὴ πλείονα σημεῖα ποιήσει ὧν οὗτος ποιεῖ; ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρι- σαῖοι τοῦ ὄχλου γογγύζοντος περὶ αὐτοῦ ταῦτα, καὶ ἀπέστειλαν ὑπηρέτας ot ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἵνα πιάσωσιν αὐτόν. εἶπεν οὖν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἔτι χρόνον rn A μικρὸν μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἰμὶ Kal ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν πέμψαντά pe. ζητήσετέ με Kal οὐχ ers \o9 νον the u SAUEITS a > , > a > > e >? a εὑρήσετε, καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὑμεῖς ov δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν. εἶπον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι a oe a πρὸς ἑαυτούς - ποῦ μέλλει οὗτος πορεύεσθαι, OTL οὐχ εὑρήσομεν αὐτόν; μὴ εἰς τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν λλήνων μέλλει πορεύεσθαι καὶ διδάσκειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας ; ΄ γε \ 53 ᾿ τίς ἐστιν ὃ λόγος οὗτος ὃν εἶπεν - ζητήσετέ με καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετε, καὶ ὅπου εἰμὲ > ἀπ ἸΕ a 3 ΄ 5 a ἐγὼ ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν ; 9) δὲ a 5 ΄ὔ ε 7ὔ tal 1X. lol ε lal ε , ε ak a ἌΝ, ζ ν δὲ τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ μεγάλῃ τῆς ἑορτῆς εἱστήκει ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ ἔκραζεν “ Ν λέγων : ἐάν τις διψᾷ, ἐρχέσθω καὶ πινέτω. 6 πιστεὺων εἰς ἐμέ, καθὼς εἶπεν ἣ γραφή, ποταμοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶν- a a δὲ > Ν a , e τοῦ AX Ni Ψ ε ΄ 89 τος." τοῦτο δὲ εἶπεν περὶ τοῦ πνεύματος οὗ ἤμελλον λαμβάνειν οἱ πιστεύοντες 40 εἰς αὐτόν - οὔπω γὰρ HY πνεῦμα, ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς οὐδέπω ἐδοξάσθη. Ἔκ τοῦ ὄχλου 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 > > , “ , , ΕΙΣ οὖν ἀκούσαντες τῶν λόγων τούτων ἔλεγον " ' ἄλλοι ἔλεγον " Ζ, ε Ν 5 ΓΛ 1. \ > μ᾿ > ἴω ΄ $3 Ν Aatas ὁ Χριστὸς ἔρχεται; οὐχὶ ἡ γραφὴ εἶπεν OTL ἐκ τοῦ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ καὶ ὅδ᾽ (4 5 > “ ε Ἂ οὗτός ἐστιν ἀληθῶς ὃ προφήτης" οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ Χριστός: ἄλλοι ἔλεγον: μὴ γὰρ ἐκ τῆς Γαλι- “ μὲ Φ AD ν Ν ” ἀπὸ Βηθλεὲμ τῆς κώμης, ὅπου ἣν Δαυείδ, ὃ Χριστὸς epxerar;” 1 σχίσμα οὖν lal ” - lan , ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ OV αὐτόν - τινὲς δὲ ἤθελον ἐξ αὐτῶν πιάσαι αὐτόν, GAN οὐδεὶς 3 / pel) ig Ν lal ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας. - a) 24 / Ν \ > “ Ν , οὐ 5" 3 -“ Ἦλθον οὖν οἱ ὑπηρέται πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ Φαρισαίους, καὶ εἶπον αὐτοῖς > “ 5 ὃ ,ὔ Θ᾽ 5 , 3 , ᾿ 5 6 ee f τ ὑδέ ἐλ 1X. ἐκεῖνοι - διατί οὐκ ἠγάγετε αὐτόν ; ' ἀπεκρίθησαν ot ὑπηρέται οὐδέποτε ἐλάλη- wa 3, ε @ mae + a > (6 > a Ἐ σεν οὕτως ἄνθρωπος, ὡς οὗτος λαλεῖ 6 ἀνθρωπος. ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτοῖς οἱ Φαρι- tal Ν lal / “ 3 / 4 Ν σαῖοι" μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησθε; | μή τις ἐκ τῶν ἀρχόντων ἐπίστευσεν εἰς αὐτὸν eg a / 3 Ne ν e ε Ν / Ν , > , iz ἢ ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων ; ἀλλὰ ὁ ὄχλος οὗτος ὃ μὴ γινώσκων τὸν νόμον ἐπάρατοίι ® 38. 15. 55:1; 58:11. Comp. Is. 44:3; Zech. 18:1; 14:8, b 42, Comp. Ps. 89:4; 182:11; Mic. 5:1 [2]. Joh. 7:29. ἀπέσταλκεν SD; ἀπέστειλεν BLT al Treg. West. Rev. 81 πολλοὶ δὲ ἐπίστευσαν ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου δὰ D cop; ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου δὲ πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν BLT vg Treg. West. Rev. | ποιεῖ S* D 69 vg; ἐποίησεν S BLT cop Treg. West. Rev. 84 εὑρήσετε δὰ D L Ait vg; add we B T 2Pe cop syrr [Treg.mg.] West. Rev. 85 ὅτι NSD ve cop; add ἡμεῖς BL TA Tree. West. Rev. 36 εὑρήσετε SD L A it vg; add we Β T 1 cop syrr [Treg.mg.]| West. Rev. 87 ἐρχέσθω S* D; add πρός με SC B (cue) LT al vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 89 πνεῦμα δὰ T cop.; add ἅγιον L A [Treg.]; add ἅγιον δεδομένον B Rey.meg. ; add ἅγιον ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς D. 41 ἄλλοι se (ἄλλοι δὲ cop) δὲ D Δ (ΟΡ syrr; οἱ δὲ BL T 1 38 ve Treg. West. Rev. 46 ὡς οὗτος λαλεῖ ὃ ἄνθρωπος δὰ (sine λαλεῖ X A VE [| Treg.]; sine 6 ἄνθρ. 1)) ; om N° BL T cop West. Rev. 50 αὐτούς S*; add 6 ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὺν πρότερον 8° B 1, T (add νυκτὸς §§ 83, 84, 85.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 99 JOHN VII. 50 51 εἰσιν. 52 Ν ΕΣ A) πο ἐὰ Ν > re a 9 3 ἴον Ν “ ’, “ μι 3 (0 vel TOV ἀνῦρω V εαν μη ακουση πρωτον TAP αὕτου και γνῳ τι ποιει; απέεκρι Y- λέγει Νικόδημος πρὸς αὐτούς, εἷς ὧν ἐξ αὐτῶν - μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρί- AS > 3 a Ν Ν Ν > fal / 3 > 4 ἌΝ, ὦ ΄ σαν καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ - μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἶ; ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε ὅτι προ- / > a / > > ἧς ρ φήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται. § 84. The Woman taken in Adultery. — Jerusalem. JonN VII. ὃ. VIL 11:1: VIII. 1 [Καὶ ἐπορεύθησαν ἕκαστος εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ " 53 Ἂς Ud an -“ 2 εἰς τὸ ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν. Ἰησοῦς δὲ ἐπορεύθη Μ Ν ΄ / > ay c , \ an « ὄρθρου δὲ πάλιν παραγένετο εἰς TO ἱερόν, Kal πᾶς ὁ \ 3, Ν Fit Ν , 5 χῷ 3 ΄ + Ν ς 8 λαὸς ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν" καὶ καθίσας ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς. ἄγουσιν δὲ οἱ γραμμα- al an ral Id Tels καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι γυναῖκα ἐπὶ μοιχείᾳ κατειλημμένην, καὶ στήσαντες αὐτὴν 4 ἐν μέσῳ ' λέγουσιν αὐτῷ: διδάσκαλε, αὕτη ἡ γυνὴ κατείληπται ἐπαυτοφώρῳ μ 7 Y 7 2 Ὧ ἢ Ὗ 1) 1 pe 5 μοιχευομένη. \ 3 , Ms Ν Chote: a et) / ΡΨ μ᾿ ” 6 σὺ οὖν τί λέγεις περὶ αὐτῆς ; τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγον πειράζοντες αὐτόν, ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατη- ἐν δὲ τῷ νόμῳ Maiions ἡμῖν ἐνετείλατο τὰς τοιαύτας λιθάζειν - " γορεῖν αὐτοῦ. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς κάτω κύψας τῷ δακτύλῳ κατέγραφεν εἰς τὴν γῆν. ε δὲ > ΄ > las δέω δ 3 Yj > \ 3 sig Wo > ΄ 7 ὡς ὃὲ ἐπέμενον ἐρωτῶντες αὐτόν, ἀνακύψας εἰπεν πρὸς αὑτοὺς" ὁ ἀναμάρτητος oo ε “ rn 4, me) > a , ἣν ΄’ὔ / , ~ 4 3, ὑμῶν πρῶτος λίθον ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ βαλέτω. καὶ πάλιν κάτω κύψας τῷ δακτύλῳ ἔγρα- 9 5 Ν na é ε δὲ > , ἐξ , e θ᾽ im 3 ἕ la 3 Ν a φεν εἰς τὴν γῆν " οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες ἐξήρχοντο εἷς καθ᾽ εἷς, ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῶν tA Ψ “ > , ἣν 4 / 6.5 lal ee ἣν > 10 πρεσβυτέρων ἕως τῶν ἐσχάτων : Kal κατελείφθη μόνος ὃ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἐν / = > ΄ δὲ ¢ >? a 3 aa) ε , ca) Ce vO é μέσῳ ovoa. ἀνακύψας de ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῇ - ἡ γυνή, ποῦ εἰσίν; οὐδείς σε ΄ 2 i} ε δὲ > ς ὐδ , , a) δὲ ε T AL ὑδὲ Εν 11 κατέκρινεν ; | ἡ δὲ εἶπεν - οὐδείς, κύριε. εἶπεν δὲ ὃ Ἰησοῦς - οὐδὲ ἐγώ σε κατα- ὕὔ 4 3 Ν ἴω A“ V4 ες ᾿ς Κρινω * πορεύου, ἀπὸ του νυν μῆκετι ἁμάρτανε. | 8 85. Further Public Teaching of our Lord. He reproves the Unbelieving Jews, and escapes from their hands. — Jerusalem. Joun VIII. 12-59. 12 Πάλιν οὖν αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγων - ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου" 6 ἀκολουθῶν ἐμοὶ οὐ μὴ περιπατήσῃ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ, ἀλλ᾽ ἕξει τὸ φῶς τῆς ζωῆς. > x a το ca A a 18 εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι: ob περὶ σεαυτοῦ papTupeis* ἣ μαρτυρία σου οὐκ + ἀλ θή 3 6 Ἴ a Xm 3 Oe A aie a Wee) 14 ἔστιν ἀληθής. ἀπεκρίθη Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - κἂν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ ἐμαυ- 8. δ. Lev. 20:10. Comp. Deut. 22 : 21. alii) Treg. West. Rey. Rev.mg, Joh. 7:53—8:11. 52. ἴδε: ὅτι om NABCLTA 33 2P¢ al et patres Treg. West. Habent D F ἃ et min pler vg [Rev.]. [Textum ex- hibemus, quem versio Anglicana (1881) ut acceptum indicat, sed in notis dabimus lec- tiones varias e Treg. et West.] 2 [kal was... αὐτούς] West. 5 [ἡμῖν] West.; om D; ἡμῖν Μωῦσῆς Treg. West. | περὶ αὐτῆς Μ S V al Aug West.mg.; om. D al Treg. 6 [τοῦτο. .. αὐτοῦ] West.; om Ὁ. 7 [αὐτόν] West.; om D | καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς D vg Treg.; [αὐτοίς] West. ; om M. 8 τῷ δακτύλῳ D al West.mg. ; om. Treg. 9 ἕως τῶν ἐσχάτων Ὁ V al [Treg]; om E ve West. 10 ὁ Ἰησοῦς D 1 vg West.; add καὶ μηδένα θεασάμενος πλὴν τῆς γυναικὸς BK al [Treg.] | ἡ γυνή min; γύναι Μ al Treg. West.txt. (mg. aliter); om D unc} al | εἰσιν D West ; add ἐκεῖνοι of κατήγοροί σου [Treg.]. 11 πορεύου Det West; add καὶ pler Treg. | ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν Ὁ Μ S al vg cop West; om EF G al Treg. 14 ὑμείς NS; add δὲ B DLT vg al Treg. West. Rev. 100 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. JOHN VIII. a 5 , ’ὔ o 30 / > lal τοῦ, ἀληθής ἐστιν ἡ μαρτυρία μου, ὅτι οἶδα πόθεν ἦλθον καὶ ποῦ ὑπάγω. ὑμεῖς \ a -» οὐκ οἴδατε πόθεν ἔρχομαι ἢ ποῦ ὑπάγω. ὑμεῖς κατὰ τὴν σάρκα κρίνετε, ἐγὼ 3 lA vO / Ν XN 7 δὲ > / ε / el, Ν 3 hd > 7 4 οὐ κρίνω οὐδένα. Kal ἐὰν κρίνω δὲ ἐγώ, ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ ἀληθινή ἐστιν, ὅτι μό- DK > 7 ἀλλ᾽ ΩΝ αἱ ὃ / a. ee) A , δὲ ae / νος οὐκ εἰμί, GAN’ ἐγὼ καὶ ὃ πέμψας με. καὶ ἐν TO νόμῳ δὲ TO ὑμετέρῳ yeypap- ΄ > Ag oe, δύ 3 6 , « , AA. 07 > > / 24 ς μένον ἐστὶν " ὅτι δύο ἀνθρώπων ἣ μαρτυρία ἀληθής ἐστιν. ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ μαρτυ- las Ν ἴω Ἃ; lal Ν ρῶν περὶ ἐμαυτοῖ, καὶ μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ ὃ πέμψας με πατήρ. ἔλεγον οὖν αὐτῷ " Ν ε ’, / 3 fal ΞΙ ποῦ ἐστὶν ὃ πατήρ σου; ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς: οὔτε ἐμὲ οἴδατε οὔτε τὸν πατέρα 5΄ SIN "ὃ Ν Ν ΄ Ἃ μὸν a Ἂς ec 7 SIN ez, μου" εἰ ἐμὲ ἤδειτε, Kal τὸν πατέρα pov ἂν ἤδειτε. ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα ἐλάλησεν 3 lal 4 ὃ ὃ 7 > a e¢ o Ν 3 Ν > , > te μὴ + ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακίῳ διδάσκων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐπίασεν αὐτόν, OTL οὔπω 5 / {τ A > ἴω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ. Ee on aN 5 las . > Vie: id ees ζ a / A ae , ε tol imev οὖν πάλιν αὐτοῖς - ἐγώ ὑπάγω καὶ ζητήσετέ με, Kal ἐν TH ἁμαρτίᾳ ὑμῶν 5 6 Lal 6 μὲ 5 Ape / ε A 3 ὃ , θ > i) ΄“ 3, ΑΝ ec) a ἀποθανεῖσθε. ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν. ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι " ΄ὔ ES ae / Ψ x / 7 Saks ΄ ε Ν 3 ΄ 3 “- 1 \ μήτι ἀποκτενεῖ ἑαυτόν, ὅτι λέγει - ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω ὑμεὶς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν ; | καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς " ὑμεῖς ἐκ τῶν κάτω ἐστέ, ἐγὼ ἐκ τῶν ἄνω εἰμί: ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐστέ, ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου. εἶπον οὖν ὑμῖν ὅτι ἀποθα- a ~ “4 lal . “ νεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν - ἐὰν γὰρ μὴ πιστεύσητε ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι, ἀποθανεῖσθε a lo > a > > - > a ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν. ἔλεγον οὖν αὐτῷ - σὺ τίς εἶ; εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὃ Ἰησοῦς " ΄ lal a lal ~ τὴν ἀρχὴν ὅ τι καὶ λαλῶ ὑμῖν. πολλὰ ἔχω περὶ ὑμῶν λαλεῖν καὶ κρίνειν - ἀλλ᾽ ε 4 3 0 , 3 BEN A 3 3 aA a ox 3 Ν ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν, κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κό- 7 = > > > ¢ 27 28 σμον. οὐκ ἔγνωσαν ὅτι τὼν πατέρα αὐτοῖς ἔλεγεν. εἶπεν οὖν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ὅταν 29 90 92 83 94 35 36 38 39 40 41 ε 4, \ εν nie θ ,ὔ / dd 6 7 > / > Ν 3 9 > an ὑψώσητε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, τότε γνώσεσθε ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι, καὶ ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ ποιῶ οὐδέν, ἀλλὰ καθὼς ἐδίδαξέν με ὃ πατήρ, ταῦτα λαλῶ. καὶ ὃ πέμψας με μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἐστίν: οὐκ ἀφῆκέν με μόνον, ὅτι ἐγὼ τὰ ἀρεστὰ αὐτῷ ποιῶ πάντοτε. A A A 35 > = 81 Ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν. ἔλεγεν οὖν 6 Ἰησοῦς A \ / 3 ἄν (Ἄν ’ oN e aA ‘é > ~ , ~ > “ πρὸς τοὺς πεπιστευκότας αὐτῷ ᾿Ιουδαίους - ἐὰν ὑμεῖς μείνητε ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τῷ ἐμῷ, an if la / ἀληθῶς μαθηταί pov ἐστέ, ' kat γνώσεσθε τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Kal 7 ἀλήθεια ἐλευθε- 7, e lal > (0 μὴ > ‘2 / 3 / > Ν ὐδ Ἂν ὃ ὃ ρώσει ὑμᾶς. ἀπεκρίθησαν πρὸς αὑτόν - σπέρμα ᾿Αβραάμ ἐσμεν, καὶ οὐδενὶ δεδου- ΄, , lal \ re bi ἐλ 50 ΄ 6 | 3 Ό > lal ε λεύκαμεν πώποτε" πῶς σὺ λέγεις ὅτι ἐλεύθεροι γενήσεσθε; | ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὃ 3 a 3 XN > Ν ts Lie Ψ “ « a Ν ε ,ὔ ὃ ial / > a Τησοῦς- ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πᾶς ὃ ποιῶν τὴν ἁμαρτίαν δοῦλος ἐστιν τῆς ε 4 ε Ν a 3 / 3 a Bs SY; > Ν 35 ε ex / > \ ἁμαρτίας. ὃ δὲ δοῦλως οὐ μένει ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ εἰς TOV αἰῶνα - ὃ υἱὸς μένει εἰς TOV a > a ἊΝ δ 37 αἰῶνα. ἐὰν οὖν ὃ υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε. οἶδα ὅτι mn a 7 «ε , ε Ἂς 3 aA σπέρμα ABpadp ἐστε: ἀλλὰ ζητεῖτέ με ἀποκτεῖναι, ὅτι ὃ λόγος ὃ ἐμὸς Ov χωρεῖ a a “ lal Ν a > set) la QA ἐν ὑμῖν. ἃ ἐγὼ ἑώρακα παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ λαλῶ καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν ἃ ἠκούσατε παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς ποιεῖτε. 3 , \ 5 SAA ε δ συν > , > , > a Απεκρίθησαν καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ: ὃ πατὴρ ἡμῶν ᾿Αβραάμ ἐστιν. λέγει αὐτοῖς “ “Ἂ 5 an? A “ ἴων Ν ὃ Ἰησοῦς - εἰ τέκνα τοῦ ᾿Αβραάμ ἐστε, τὰ ἔργα τοῦ ᾿Αβραὰμ ποιεῖτε. νῦν δὲ a a ΄ sy ” Ἂν ζητεῖτέ με ἀποκτεῖναι, ἄνθρωπον ὃς τὴν ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν λελάληκα, ἣν ἤκουσα παρὰ a a a > a “ \ oo lal Ἂς ς lal τοῦ θεοῦ - τοῦτο ᾿Αβραὰμ οὐκ ἐποίησεν. ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε TA ἔργα TOV πατρὸς ὑμῶν. > SPR ε a > , 3 , φ / Ν Ν la εἶπαν αὐτῷ - ἡμεῖς ἐκ πορνείας od γεγεννήμεθα, ἕνα πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν θεόν. 5.17. Deut. 17 0: Comp. Deut.'19:15. Joh. 8:16. πέμψας we S* Ὁ; add πατήρ txt. Rev.mg. (Am. aliter). 39 ἐποιεῖτε Se BL T al it vg al Treg. [West.] Rev. SB2 DL T West.mg; ποιεῖτε B® Or West. 17 γεγραμμένον ἐστὶν δὴ ; γέγραπται Ὁ Ὦ txt. Rev.mg. 41 οὐ γεγεννήμεθα Se C L T al Treg. West. Rev. 25 ὑμῖν. D? A West.mg.; οὐκ ἐγεννήθημεν B D* Treg. Steph. Treg. West.mg.; ὑμῖν ; Lach. West. West.txt. Rev — §§ 85, 861 UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 101 JOHN VIII. > > ro ε» a sy é Ν \ ε lal 3 » a nv 3 ,ὔ Γ ΚῸ Q 9 42 εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - εἰ ὁ θεὸς πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἣν, ἠγαπᾶτε ἂν ἐμέ: ἐγὼ γὰρ ἐκ “ lol \ ¢& ἊΝ lat lal τοῦ θεοῦ ἐξῆλθον καὶ ἥκω - οὐδὲ yap ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐλήλυθα, GAN’ ἐκεῖνός με ἀπέ- , Ν Ἂς Ν ἌΡ ἫΝ 3 , Ψ 3 ΄ 3 , Ν 48 στειλεν. διατί τὴν λαλιὰν τὴν ἐμὴν οὐ γινώσκετε; ὅτι οὐ δύνασθε ἀκούειν τὸν / Ν > / ε ΄-ὦ 3 ἴω ἊΝ ἴω Yo’ > Ν X Ν > 7 ἴω 44 λόγον τὸν ἐμόν. ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς τοῦ διαβόλου ἐστὲ καὶ τὰς ἐπιθυμίας τοῦ a , a a > a \ A πατρὸς ὑμῶν θέλετε ποιεῖν. ἐκεῖνος ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἣν am’ ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀλη- , 3 ως Ψ > 2 > ΄ > > “ ω - Ν a > r θείᾳ οὐχ ἕστηκεν, ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν αὐτῷς ὅταν λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος, ἐκ τῶν οι \ \ \ a “ 45 ἰδίων λαλεῖ, ὅτι φεύστης ἐστὶν καὶ ὃ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ. ἐγὼ δὲ ὅτι τὴν ἀλήθειαν / 3 , / , 9.0. δ΄ αἱ She Ν ε ’ ar 15 ΄ 46 λέγω, οὐ πιστεύετέ μοι. τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας ; εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέ Pie fal > ΄ὔ / ! 5. ἃ ΕἸ A 6 a Nn ΕἾ, a 6 nos , 47 λέγω, διατί ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετέ μοι; ' ὁ ὧν ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούει: cal 7 ἴω an διὰ τοῦτο ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀκούετε, OTL ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ. > 3 Qa A 3 tol “ / fal ω 48 ᾿Απεκρίθησαν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ οὐ καλῶς λέγομεν ἡμεῖς ὅτι Ξαμα- 4 PY ΚΩ͂Ν ὶ ὃ , m4 aA lah «οίθ a . ἐγὼ ὃ / > te tAAG 49 ρίτης εἶ σὺ καὶ δαιμόνιον ἔχεις ; | ἀπεκρίθη ᾿ἴησους - ἐγὼ δαιμόνιον οὐκ ἔχω, ἀλλὰ lal \ 7 Nie “-“ =} 9 / Sew δὲ 3 lal \ Le 50 τιμῶ τὸν πατέρα μου, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀτιμάζετέ με. ἐγὼ δὲ οὐ ζητῶ τὴν δόξαν μου: ” ε la \ / 3 Ν > πὴ / ε a 77 \ 5 \ / ΜᾺ 51 ἔστιν ὃ ζητῶν καὶ κρίνων. ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐάν τις τὸν ἐμὸν λόγον τηρήσῃ, “ ΩΣ 3 tal 5 aA Las 52 θάνατον οὐ μὴ θεωρήσῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. εἶπαν αὐτῷ ot ᾿Ιουδαῖοι - viv ἐγνώκαμεν A / 3 3 ἊΝ 5 / Ν ε aA Ν \ / 27 ὅτι δαιμόνιον ἔχεις. ᾿Αβραὰμ ἀπέθανεν καὶ οἱ προφῆται, καὶ σὺ λέγεις: ἐάν 53 τις τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσῃ, οὐ μὴ γεύσηται θανάτου εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. μὴ σὺ μεί- 3 a δ ε las > » 9 > / N ε Lod > , Cov εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν “ABpaap, ὅστις ἀπέθανεν ; καὶ οἱ προφῆται ἀπέθανον - , Ν Cae ! 5 Ό 3 A oN Sh N ὃ / ε δός 54 τίνα σεαυτὸν ποιεῖς; | ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἐὰν ἐγὼ δοξάζω ἐμαυτόν, 7 δόξα μου Doe > Μ ε ,ὔ ε ὃ € , aA ε a N / “ θ Ν ε a οὐδέν ἐστιν - ἐστιν ὃ πατήρ μου ὃ δοξάζων pe, ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε OTL θεὸς ἡμῶν 3 , ! Ν > > , εν, 55 Ν, δὲ Τὸ ἐ ΣΦΕ 4 Ἃ ᾿ με 3 tO 3 55 ἐστίν, | καὶ οὐκ ἐγνώκατε αὐτόν, ἐγὼ δὲ οἶδα αὐτόν. κἂν εἴπω ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα αὐὖ- ΄, 3) “ eon ze! 3 \ > aN ἈΝ , a a TOV, ἔσομαι ὅμοιος ὑμῶν ψεύστης - ἀλλὰ οἶδα αὐτὸν καὶ τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ τηρῶ. > Ν ε XN ε “ 5 4 7 4 XN « la Ν > ‘4 \ Ss Ν 56 ᾿Αβραὰμ ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἠγαλλιάσατο iva εἴδῃ τὴν ἡμέραν τὴν ἐμήν, καὶ εἶδεν καὶ pagal, ἊΝ ἈΝ ε5 = \ 3) 2 ΄ ” + + Ν 3 57 ἐχάρη. εἶπαν οὖν οἱ ᾿Τουδαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν - πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις καὶ ᾽Αβρα- ἐν ev Ss 3 “a 32 A 3 Ν > Ν ΄ ca \ > Ν 58 ἂμ ἑώρακας; εἶπεν αὐτοῖς Ἰησοῦς: ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, πρὶν ᾿Αβραὰμ ye- / νέσθαι ἐγὼ εἰμί. 5 y 3 A lol 59 ἮΗραν οὖν λίθους ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν ᾿Ιησοῦς δὲ ἐκρύβη καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ. § 86. A Lawyer instructed. Love to our Neighbor defined. Parable of the Good Samaritan. — Near Jerusalem. Luxe X. 25-37. Ἁ / / 25 Καὶ ἰδοὺ νομικός τις ἀνέστη ἐκπειράζων αὐτόν, λέγων: διδάσκαλε, τί ποι- 26 yoas ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω; | ὃ δὲ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν" ἐν τῷ νόμῳ τί γέ ή ὴ ληρονομήσω; ὲ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐ ν τῷ νόμῳ τί γέ- cal > / 5 / 27 γραπται; πῶς ἀναγινώσκεις ; '6 δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν - ἀγαπήσεις κύ- \ θ / > a lol ,ὔ Ἂν 3 Ψ a ριον τὸν θεόν σου ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ an Ἄν [4 Ψ Cay 5 7. Ν > μὲ lal lA ψυχῇ σου καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ TH ἰσχύϊ σου καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ TH διανοίᾳ cov, \ Ν WN / ε / i δὲ > ers 3 θῶ 39 (Q 28 καὶ τὸν πλησίον σου ws σεαυτόν. εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ: ὀρθῶς ἀπεκρίθης- τοῦτο ποίει, καὶ ζήσῃ. 5. 27. Deut.6:5; Lev. 19:18, Comp. Lev. 18:5. Joh. 8: 54. ἡμῶν A B? et? CLA vgedtd vo; add καὶ (om A Aal) διελθων διὰ μέσου cop syrr West.mg. ; ὑμῶν δὲ B* Dvgel Treg. αὐτῶν ἐπορεύετο (om A A al)* καὶ παρῆγεν mg. West.txt. Rev. 59 ἱεροῦ. SBD it οὕτως Se A C L A 33 cop syrr Rev.mg. 102 36 Ὁ 98 39 40 41 42 5 Le. 10:32. γενόμενος A © A syrr; om FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. LUKE X. € lol 9. a O δὲ θέλων δικαιῶσαι ἑαυτὸν εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν ᾿Τησοῦν - καὶ τίς ἐστίν μου πλη- Ld φ λ Ἂν ε 3 ἴω > ΓΙ + 0 4 La > Ν «ες Ν σίον; ὑπολαβὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν " ἀνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ Ἱερουσαλὴμ, ε - / ay εἰς Ἱερειχώ, καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν, οἱ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν Kal πληγὰς ἐπι- Ἂν; / κατὰ συγκυρίαν δὲ ἱερεύς τις κατέβαινεν ἐν we tee] Ψ. Ν 9QN oN 5 Ν τῇ ὁδῷ ἐκείνῃ, καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν ἀντιπαρὴῆλθεν. θέντες ἀπῆλθον, ἀφέντες ἡμιθανῆ. ε ὑφ Ν \ ΄ὔ ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ Λευείτης γενόμενος Σαμαρίτης δέ τις δδεύων ἦλθεν > ΕῚ Ν NV 9QN > , \ Ν / Ν , > cal ΚΑΤ QUTOV και ἰδὼν ἐσπλαγχνίσθη, και προσελθὼν κατέδησεν τα TPAVLATA αὐτου κατὰ τὸν τόπον, ἐλθὼν καὶ ἰδὼν ἀντιπαρῆλθεν. > , 35, Ν > > / Ν Sy oN CNN ANY an ΕἸ 9% ἐπιχέων ἔλαιον καὶ οἶνον, ἐπιβιβάσας δὲ αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον κτῆνος ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν \ an \ εἰς πανδοκίον καὶ ἐπεμελήθη αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν αὔριον ἐκβαλὼν δύο δηνάρια - ΤᾺ Nr osm A ἔδωκεν τῷ πανδοκεῖ καὶ εἶπεν - ἐπιμελήθητι. αὐτοῦ, Kal ὅτι dv προσδαπανήσῃς ι of ““ > , 4 / Lal Lal a ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ ἐπανέρχεσθαί με ἀποδώσω σοι. τίς τούτων τῶν τριῶν πλησίον δοκεῖ re eS / > \ λ / ! ε δὲ Ny c ΄ ἈΝ, σοι γεγονέναι τοῦ ἐμπεσόντος εἰς τοὺς λῃστάς ; | ὃ δὲ εἶπεν - 6 ποιήσας τὸ ἔλεος a > taal et! “ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - πορεύου καὶ σὺ ποίει ὁμοίως. § 87. Jesus in the House of Martha and Mary. — Bethany. Luke X. 38-42. Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ πορεύεσθαι αὐτοὺς καὶ αὐτὸς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς κώμην τινά" Ν ὃ /, > ΄ , 6 e 4& > Ν 5 Ἂς 5 , \ tal > γυνὴ δέ τις ὀνόματι Μάρθα ὑπεδέξατο αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν. καὶ τῇδε ἣν > Ν Le / A Ν lal x Ν / cal ’ ἀδελφὴ καλουμένη Μαριάμ, ἣ καὶ παρακαθεσθεῖσα πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τοῦ κυρίου » Ν / > a ! ε Ν , a Ν Ν / > ἤκουεν Tov λόγον αὐτοῦ: |» δὲ Μάρθα περιεσπᾶτο περὶ πολλὴν διακονίαν. ἐπι- “A XN 5 4 5 ’ὔ 7 ε 3 7 , / στᾶσα δὲ εἶπεν - κύριε, οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἣ ἀδελφή μου μόνην με κατέλιπεν δια- - yo. >) Cerne A ΄ 3 Ν Ν Cy ΘῈ Wa Ge κονεῖν ; εἰπὸν οὖν αὐτῇ ἵνα μοι συναντιλάβηται. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῇ ὃ κύριος- Μάρθα Μάρθα, μεριμνᾷς καὶ θορυβάζῃ περὶ πολλά, | ἑνὸς δέ ἐστιν χρεία" ’, \ Ν 3 Ν (ὃ 2 λ LE 4 3 3 a) / 2 on Μαρία yap τὴν ἀγαθὴν μερίδα ἐξελέξατο, ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεθήσεται αὐτῆς. § 88. The Disciples again taught how to pray. — Mear Jerusalem. Luxe XI. 1-18. A \ , ΄ A > Kai ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐν τόπῳ τινὶ προσευχόμενον, WS ἐπαῦσατο, εἶπέν fas Ν 5 A x 3 / / διὸ ε “ ᾽’ὔ 6 θὰ τις τῶν μαθητὼν αὐτοῦ πρὸς αὐτόν κύριε, δίδαξον ἡμᾶς προσεύχεσθαι, καθὼς Ν 3 / 2516 \ θ Ν 3 A > δὲ > a Ψ ΄ θ καὶ Ἰωάννης ἐδίδαξεν τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ. εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς - ὅταν προσεύχησθε, δ λέγετε: πάτερ, ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά σου" ἐλθάτω ἣ βασιλεία σου" ' τὸν ἀρ- ε an A 5 /, 4 ε a Ἂν ate , Ν + ε a Ν c 7 TOV ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον δίδου ἡμῖν τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν: καὶ ἄφες ἡμῖν Tas ἁμαρτίας ἜΛΑ τας Ν Ν 3 Ν > ,ὔ Ae ΄, νων Ν ἐν 3 ΄ ἘΠῊΝ ἡμῶν, καὶ γὰρ αὐτοὶ ἀφίομεν παντὶ ὀφείλοντι ἡμῖν- καὶ μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν. > Lal τ ’ Ν > A Καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς - τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἕξει φίλον, καὶ πορεύσεται πρὸς αὐτὸν 41,42. μεριμνᾷς .. . χρεία A C* et? A vg Se (S* om versum) BD L Ξ 1 33 vg cop Treg. West. Rev. 38 *Eyéeveto αὐτοὺς καὶ A C D (sed var) it vg syrr; Ἐν δὲ τῷ πορεύεσθαι αὐτοὺς (om καὶ) NS BLE cop Treg.txt. [καὶ] West. Rev. οἰκίαν S* ete C3 L Ἐ 33; add αὐτῆς S* A ΟΣ A it ve [Treg.] [West.mg.] Rev. ; om eis... αὐτῆς B. ee syrr; om μεριμνᾷς καὶ et περὶ . . . χρεία D itm West.mg. Rev.mg.; μεριμνᾷς - .« - πολλά, ὅλί- γων δέ ἐστιν χρεία ἢ ἑνός S BC? L 1 33 cop West.txt. Rev.mg. sc. | γὰρ SB L1 69 Treg.mg.; δὲ AC D cop syrr Treg.txt.; om D it™ vg West.mg. Rey.mg. §§ 87-90.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 103 LUKE XI. / \ ” > A ‘Nr, an ,ὔ “ + ! > ὃ ‘ ὯΝ 6 μεσονυκτίου καὶ εἴπῃ αὐτῷ" φίλε, χρῆσόν μοι τρεῖς ἄρτους, | ἐπειδὴ φίλος μου ΄ > ε a , Ν 3 μὴ aA ΄ ota oS > a > 7 παρεγένετο ἐξ ὁδοῦ πρός pe Kal οὐκ ἔχω ὃ παραθήσω αὐτῷ. κἀκεῖνος ἔσωθεν 9 Ν ” es Ψ' , Ε ε la / Ν ‘A ΄ ἀποκριθεὶς εἴπῃ" μή μοι κόπους πάρεχε: ἤδη ἡ θύρα κέκλεισται, καὶ τὰ παιδία κ᾿ ἘΣ a > Ν 7 5 , “ Qe > Ν a ,ὔ / ε n 8 pov per’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὴν κοίτην εἰσίν - οὐ δύναμαι ἀναστὰς δοῦναί σοι. λέγω ὑμῖν, > Ν Ψ , 5 - Σ᾿ Ν XN ἣν Ss / 3 cal , Ν 5 / εἰ Kal οὐ δώσει αὐτῷ ἀναστὰς διὰ τὸ εἶναι φίλον αὐτοῦ, dud ye τὴν ἀναιδίαν ἡ ¢ ἤεὶς δ, Aen ne NG iat onion Pie) Sa ers αὐτοῦ ἐγερθεὶς δώσει αὐτῷ ὅσων χρήζει. Κἀγὼ ὑμῖν λέγω, αἰτεῖτε, καὶ δοθήσεται 10 ὑμῖν - ζητεῖτε, καὶ εὑρήσετε κρούετε, καὶ ἀνοιχθήσεται ὑμῖν. πᾶς γὰρ ὁ αἰτῶν 11 λαμβάνει, καὶ ὃ ζητῶν εὑρίσκει, καὶ τῷ κρούοντι ἀνοιχθήσεται. τίνα δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν el > uf ρ > Le) ee : She Δ a / a air / ι Θ εν 3 , Ν λίθ 5 ὃ , 3 n 2 BD Ny 6 , Ἂς 9 Ν τὸν πατέρα αἰτήσει 6 υἱὸς ἄρτον, μὴ λίθον ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ ; ἢ καὶ ἰχθύν, μὴ ἀντὶ 1213 ἰγθύ + Sell 9) δώ ἘΦ ΟΕ ΩΝ πο Δ Ee Ν 15 δώ bis ies β 7 ole? ἰχθύος ὄφιν αὐτῷ ἐπιδώσει ; ἢ Kal αἰτήσῃ ὠόν, μὴ ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ σκορπίον ; | εἰ > a 5 a a οὖν ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες οἴδατε δόματα ἀγαθὰ διδόναι τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν, / a i \ ε cal ’ὔ cal τ “ a / πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὃ πατὴρ ὃ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ δώσει πνεῦμα ἅγιον τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν. 8 89. The Seventy return .— Jerusalem 3 Luke X. 17-24. , Ἄ la / ε x 4, 17 ὍὙπέστρεψαν δὲ of ἑβδομήκοντα μετὰ χαρᾶς λέγοντες - κύριε, καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια ε a a , , 5 \ na a 18 ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου. εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς - ἐθεώρουν τὸν σατανᾶν ε 3 Ν 3 a 3 a [4 io \ , cm Ν 5. ἐφ A Μ᾿ 19 ὡς ἀστραπὴν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεσόντα. ἰδοὺ δέδωκα ὑμῖν τὴν ἐξουσίαν τοῦ πατεῖν > , ΕΣ Ν ve ον 3.28 an Ἂν , cal 5 ἴω A 5» ἐπάνω ὄφεων καὶ σκορπίων, καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ ἐχθροῦ, καὶ οὐδὲν 20 c cal > Ν LOL ἤσει λὴ > , Ν / “ Ν VE ΄ c a ε ὑμᾶς οὐ μὴ ἀδικήσει. πλὴν ἐν τούτῳ μὴ χαίρετε ὅτι τὰ πνεύματα ὑμῖν ὕπο- μὲ / ἴω “" A τάσσεται, χαίρετε δὲ OTL TA ὀνόματα ὑμῶν ἐνγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. 21. “Ev αὐτῆ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἐν τῷ ἤματι τῷ ἁγίῳ καὶ εἶπεν - ἐἕομολ ν αὐτῆ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἠγαλλιά D πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ καὶ εἶπεν - ἐξομολο- a 4 n A a an Ψ cal yodpat σοι πάτερ, κύριε τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς, OTL ἀπέκρυψας ταῦτα ἀπὸ σο- Ν nan , ¢ 9 pov καὶ συνετῶν, καὶ ἀπεκάλυψας αὐτὰ νηπίοις - ναὶ ὃ πατήρ, ὅτι οὕτως ἐγένετο 3 ’,ὔ ” / Ν Ν Ν Ν Ως > , 22 εὐδοκία ἔμπροσθέν σου. καὶ στραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς εἶπεν: πάντα μοι / ε \ cal / ἂν > \ , 7, > ε e\ 3 ΝΥ ε παρεδόθη ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός μου, καὶ οὐδεὶς γινώσκει τίς ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς εἰ μὴ ὃ πα- ΄ \ , > ε \ 3 Wye εν Nees 5... ΄ ε εν 3 , THP, καὶ TIS ἐστιν ὁ πατὴρ εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν βούληται ὃ υἱὸς ἀποκαλύψαι. \ \ \ \ \ 3 = 28 Kai στραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς κατ᾽ ἰδίαν εἶπεν - μακάριοι of ὀφθαλμοὶ οἱ / \ ΄ , Ν tal μή a a 24 βλέποντες ἃ βλέπετε. λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν ὅτι πολλοὶ προφῆται καὶ βασιλεῖς ἠθέλη- io “Ὁ aA ¢ a λέ Ν 3 io NY 9 a ΛΌΧΟΙ , ‘ > »” σαν LOELY ἃ υμεις Bp? €7TTETE, καὶ οὐκ LOAV, και ἀκουσαι ἃ AKOVETE, και οὐκ YHKOVO av. § 90. A Man born blind is healed on the Sabbath. Our Lord’s subsequent Discourses. — Jerusalem. Joun IX. 1-41. X. 1-21. 12 Kai παράγων εἶδεν ἄνθρωπον τυφλὸν ἐκ γενετῆς. Kal ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ λέγοντες - ῥαββεί, τίς ἥμαρτεν, οὗτος ἢ οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα 8 τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ; ἀπεκρίθη Ἰησοῦς - οὔτε οὗτος ἥμαρτεν οὔτε οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, 4 ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα φανερωθῇ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ. ἡμᾶς δεῖ ἐργάζεσθαι τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Le. 11:11. ἄρτον... i καὶ (om καὶ SL 22 καὶ στραφεὶς... εἶπεν A C* Δ ἃ] syrr; 88 [West.mg.]) δ A C al; om Β Rev.mg. om δὲ Β Ὦ 1, Ξ 1 33 vg cop Treg. West. [Treg.mg.| West.txt. Rey. Le 10:21. ἐν 56 ND L Ξ 33 itpler cop; Joh. 9:4. ἡμᾶς sc S* Leop; με S* velb A om A BC A vg44 al Treg. West. Rev. BCD Ait vg syrr Treg. West. Rev. 104 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. JOHN XI. , ,ὔ ε a ν «ε ΄ > / 3, Ν -“ > Ν ΄ ΕἸ ,ὔ πέμψαντός ἡμᾶς ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν - ἔρχεται νὺξ ὅτε οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐργάζεσθαι. “ ~ γᾷ ΄ > a ΞΟ A ΄, A 56 ὅταν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ὦ, φῶς εἰμὶ TOD κόσμου. ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἔπτυσεν χαμαὶ καὶ ἴω Ν , la ἐποίησεν πηλὸν ἐκ τοῦ TTVTPATOS, καὶ ἐπέχρισεν αὐτοῦ τὸν πηλὸν ἐπὶ τοὺς 5 Ν ἮΝ Ss > “ WA / Ν cal 7 ὀφθαλμοὺς, ' καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ὕπαγε νίψαι εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν τοῦ ΣΞιλωάμ, ὃ na > \ ἑρμηνεύεται ἀπεσταλμένος. ἀπῆλθεν οὖν καὶ ἐνίψατο, καὶ ἦλθεν βλέπων. Οἱ > , \ ε θ a > 4 ἣν ΄ a ὩΣ > ” 8 ἱ οὖν γείτονες καὶ οἱ θεωροῦντες αὐτὸν TO πρότερον, OTL προσαίτης ἣν, ἔλε- a , \ ~ , - 9 γον: οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ καθήμενος καὶ προσαιτῶν; | ἄλλοι ἔλεγον ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν. 5, μι tal Ν lal 10 ἄλλοι ἔλεγον - οὐχί, ἀλλὰ ὅμοιος αὐτῷ ἐστὶν. ἐκεῖνος ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἐγώ εἶμι. | ἔλε- 1] > > A. r 3 aA 6 ,ὔ ε 5 6 δ ΔΕ ! 3 (6 > “ Η δι ἂν γον οὖν αὐτῷ: πῶς ἠνεῴῷχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί; | ἀπεκρίθη ἐκεῖνος - ὃ ἄν- 1: / 3 lal Ν 5» ig Ny 5 / / Ν 3 A. Opwros ὃ λεγόμενος ᾿Ιησοῦς πηλὸν ἐποίησεν καὶ ἐπέχρισέν μου τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς Ν > , [2 A ΕἸ Ν ὮΝ x \ Ν , > λθὰ > Ν ’ὔ καὶ εἶπέν μοι ὅτι ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν Σιλωὰμ καὶ νίψαι. ἀπελθὼν οὖν καὶ νιψάμενος > a A \ a 12 ἀνέβλεψα. εἶπαν αὐτῷ ποῦ ἐστὶν ἐκεῖνος ; λέγει" οὐκ οἶδα. 3, Ν Ν 1814 Αγουσιν αὐτὸν πρὸς τοὺς Φαρισαίους τόν ποτε τυφλόν. ἣν δὲ σάββατον ἐν 15 ἡ ἡμέ ap λὸ > , δ᾽Ἶ,Ἶ ἴον NS ee reg > a ds ὀφθαλ / aN ἢ ἡμέρᾳ Tov πηλὸν ἐποίησεν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς. πάλιν τ 3 , SEIN Ν ε Lal val eed ε Ν τ 3 lal Ν οὖν ἠρώτων αὐτὸν καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι πῶς ἀνέβλεψεν. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - πηλὸν 16 ἐπέθηκέν μου ἐπὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, καὶ ἐνιψάμην καὶ βλέπω. ἔλεγον οὖν ἐκ τῶν - a 4 Φαρισαίων τινές - οὐκ ἔστιν οὗτος παρὰ θεοῦ ὃ ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι TO σάββατον ov τηρεῖ. ἄλλοι ἔλεγον: πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος ἁμαρτωλὸς τοιαῦτα σημεῖα ποι- lal Ν “, > > 3 a / a ΄ a ’ὔ Ν / 4 17 εἶν ; καὶ σχίσμα ἣν ἐν αὐτοῖς. λέγουσιν οὖν τῷ τυφλῷ πάλιν" σὺ τί λέγεις Ν 3 a 4 3) Ἐν Ν 3 θ Ni Poe ε δὲ τ αὶ La ΄, > ’ 3 18 περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἤνοιξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς ; ὁ δὲ εἶπεν ὅτι προφήτης ἐστίν. οὐκ ee > ©? Qa \ ier > \ Ne sey ¢ ¢_: ἐπίστευσαν οὖν ot ᾿Ιουδαῖοι περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἣν τυφλὸς καὶ ἀνέβλεψεν, ἕως ὅτου > , Ν a > lal a 3 4 ! ne ae) , 3 Ἂς , 19 ἐφώνησαν τοὺς γονεῖς αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀναβλέψαντος, | καὶ ἠρώτησαν αὐτοὺς λέγοντες " 1 TA? 2 ε ex en Aes. ἃ ε “-“ Xr , “ λὸ > ‘6 a > , οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς ὑμῶν, ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη; πῶς οὖν βλέπει Ἐν a A > »Ὰ ¢ = 20 ἄρτι; ' ἀπεκρίθησαν οὖν οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ εἶπαν - οἴδαμεν ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ al ¢ ΄ὔ al ἴω , any 21 vids ἡμῶν Kal ὅτι τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη πῶς δὲ viv βλέπει οὐκ οἴδαμεν, ἢ τίς ἤνοι- 3 le) Ν > Ν « “ 3 ” cy aN > ’, ε , »” ἕεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἡμεῖς οὐκ oldapev> αὐτὸν ἐρωτήσατε, ἡλικίαν ἔχει, ἜΛΑ A ole a ya a > ε lal > an ω 3 fal Ν 22 αὐτὸς περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λαλήσει. ταῦτα εἶπον οἵ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ OTL ἐφοβοῦντο τοὺς 2 , δ Ἂ ΄ e? ὃ A 7 aL 3 NN ε ΄ Ἰουδαίους - ἤδη γὰρ συνετέθειντο οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἵνα ἐάν τις αὐτὸν ὁμολογήσῃ Χρι- a a a > “ , 28 στόν, ἀποσυνάγωγος γένηται. διὰ τοῦτο οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ εἶπαν ὅτι ἡλικίαν ἔχει, αὐτὸν ἐπερωτήσατε. > / aA Φ' ε / x Ss 9 24 Ἐφώνησαν οὖν τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ δευτέρου, ὃς ἣν τυφλός, καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ" δὸς to or 60 5 θεῷ - ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν ὅτι 6 ἄνθρωπος οὗτος ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν. ἀπεκρίθ ὀξαν τῷ θεῷ ἡμεῖς οἴδαμε ρ fee a ρίθη a , 3. Ὗ a9 9 \ ” , οὖν ἐκεῖνος - εἰ ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν οὐκ οἶδα - ἕν οἶδα, ὅτι τυφλὸς ὧν ἄρτι βλέπω. > > a rn - Ν ’, ὦ 26 27 εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ - τί ἐποίησέν σοι; πῶς ἠνοιξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς ; | ἀπεκρί- > eo. > εἰν ὧν Ν 3 3 , ΄, ΄ , 3 , Ἂν Ἂς θη αὐτοῖς - εἶπον ὑμῖν ἤδη καὶ οὐκ ἠκούσατε: τί πάλιν θέλετε ἀκούειν ; μὴ καὶ lal lal Ν Ἂς i ‘\ 28 ὑμεῖς θέλετε αὐτοῦ μαθηταὶ γενέσθαι ; | ἐλοιδόρησαν αὐτὸν Kal εἶπαν σὺ μαθη- Ν ae: ,ὔ ε im δὲ a ” / 3 Ν 0 ΄ ! ε a ἴὸ μή 29 τὴς εἶ ἐκείνου, ἡμεῖς δὲ τοῦ Μωῦσέως ἐσμὲν μαθηταὶ" ᾿ ἡμεῖς οἰδαμεν οτι “ tal na ’, e 30 Mwiice? λελάληκεν ὃ θεός, τοῦτον δὲ οὐκ οἴδαμεν πόθεν ἐστίν. ἀπεκρίθη ὃ ἂν- ᾿ Ἂν ν᾿ ¢ a ” θρωπος καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἐν τούτῳ yap τὸ θαυμαστόν ἐστιν, OTL ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἵ- a 4 31 dare πόθεν ἐστίν, καὶ ἤνοιξέν μου Tors ὀφθαλμούς. οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὃ Joh. 9:19. εἶπαν A νροοδὰ cop; add οὖν 90 οὖν SB; δὲ A Aalsyrr; om 1) 1.1 83 D Δ al [Treg.mg.]; pm καὶ δὲ Β 1,1 38 69 vg cop Treg. Rey. gre vyoed [Treg.txt.] West. Rev. 28 ἐλοιδόρησαν A A vg! ; nm of δὲ Se D 16 ἄλλοι AL A itPler ygeodd ; add δὲ NS ΒΒ L 1 88 2P¢ cop syrr Treg.; pm καὶ S* B D ygceodd eted cop [Treg.mg.] [West.] Rev. [Treg.mg.] West. Rev. 82 ἀκούει. UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 105 § 90.] JOHN IX. 4 Ss x / cal θεὸς οὐκ ἀκούει," ἀλλ’ ἐάν τις θεοσεβὴς ἢ Kal τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ zou, τούτου 3 Lat 3A > > , Lid 3, ae > Ἂν a ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος οὐκ ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἠνοιξέν τις ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλοῦ yeyervy- / 3 NS τῳ Ν a > 3 , ta) 2Q7 3 40 33 34 μένου" εἰ μὴ ἣν οὗτος παρα θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο ποιεῖν οὐδέν. ἀπεκρίθησαν \ > 5 “-“ > ε ’,ὔ ἣν > 60 i " Ν \ ὃ ὃ / ε an \ kal εἶπαν αὐτῷ: ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος, Kal σὺ ὀιδάσκεις ἡμᾶς ; καὶ Α' Ν " ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω. »” > PG, " \ \ \ > \ 85 ἪἬκουσεν Ἰησοῦς ὅτι ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω, καὶ εὑρὼν αὐτὸν εἶπεν - σὺ πιστεύ- 3 ‘\ en cal > θ / | a / > lal Ν > = Ν ΄ > , 36 εἰς εἰς τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ; | ἀπεκρίθη ἐκεῖνος καὶ εἶπεν " καὶ TLS ἐστιν, KU- 7 ΄ > 3 ! > 3 AL hes lal Se ‘3 5 / Ver 37 ple, LWA πιστεύσω ELS αὑτὸν; * εἴπεν GUTH ὁ Inoovs* καὶ ewpakas αὑτὸν, καὶ ὁ a Ν in) VE Faia’ > ε AS + 4 4 \ , 38 λαλῶν μετὰ σοῦ ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν. ὃ δὲ ἔφη πιστεύω, κύριε" καὶ προσεκύγησεν ΒΕ αὶ ἌΝ Εἰ .9; Lal 3 , DAN > Ν ΄ a ΜΝ A) 7 ε 89 αὐτῷ. καὶ εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς - εἰς κρίμα ἐγὼ εἰς τὸν κόσμον τοῦτον ἦλθον, ἵνα οἱ Ν Ν / 40 μὴ βλέποντες βλέπωσιν καὶ ot βλέποντες τυφλοὶ γένωνται. la) \ > a Ν Ν a / Φαρισαίων οἱ per’ αὐτοῦ ὄντες, καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ - μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν ; ” Lal ἤκουσαν ἐκ τῶν a aA > \ 5", ΄, A 41 εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς - εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν - νῦν δὲ λέγετε μὰ ΄ eae (wees | , ὅτι βλέπομεν - ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει. Χ 1 τὴν Ν FN ΧΕ Cu tas ε Ν 5 , ὃ Ν a Ov 5 Ν ὑλὺ a : μὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 6 μὴ εἰσερχόμενος διὰ τῆς θύρας εἰς THY αὐλὴν τῶν “ ‘ Ἂς δ 2 προβάτων ἀλλὰ ἀναβαίνων ἀλλαχόθεν, ἐκεῖνος κλέπτης ἐστὶν καὶ λῃστὴς" 16 3 δὲ εἰ μενος διὰ τῆς OV ἦν ἐ ὧν προβάτων. τούτῳ 6 θυρωρὸ € εἰσερχόμενος διὰ τῆς θύρας ποιμήν ἐστιν τῶν πρ ων. τούτῳ ρωρὸς > , x Ν “ “ » Ay .4 ὔ \ νῷ ΄ὔ “-“ ’ ἀνοίγει, καὶ τὰ πρόβατα τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούει, καὶ τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ κατ ὅταν τὰ ἴδια πάντα ἐκβάλῃ, ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν πορεύε- ῃ, ἔμπρ ρ Ε ae > 7 5 Tat, καὶ τὰ πρόβατα αὐτῷ ἀκολουθεῖ, ὅτι οἴδασιν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ ἀλλοτρίῳ μὰ Ng Sige 7. ++ 4 ονομα καὶ ἐξάγει αὐτά. lal ID “ δὲ οὐ μὴ ἀκολουθήσουσιν, ἀλλὰ φεύξονται ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι οὐκ οἴδασιν τῶν ἀλλο- ,ὔ Ἂν ͵7 , ἣν ,ὔ > > - (Joo “ > a Ν 6 τρίων τὴν φωνήν. Ταύτην τὴν παροιμίαν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἐκεῖνοι δὲ u > ἃ tad οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τίνα ἣν ἃ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς. > Blo, Mee} ~ A γι 7 Eizev οὖν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς- ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβά- ae : ᾿ 8 των. πάντες ὅσοι ἦλθον κλέπται εἰσὶν καὶ λῃσταί, GAN οὐκ ἤκουσαν αὐτῶν τὰ , Δ 3 aA / 9 πρόβατα. ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα - dv ἐμοῦ ἐάν τις εἰσέλθῃ, ποτε τὸ καὶ εἰσελεύσε- δ τ, ΄ \ XN ΘΙ ΚΖ, 10 ται καὶ "π΄ ποτα ee ὃ a οὐκ ἔρχεται εἰ μὴ iva κλέψῃ 11 καὶ θύσῃ καὶ τ ὍΣ 28 2. ἵνα ζωὴν ἔ ὙΠ καὶ περισσὸν 2s ἐγώ εἶμι ὃ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός. ὃ ποιμὴν ὃ καλὸς τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ τίθησιν ὑπὲρ τῶν ΄, ip ie \ \ DLN , a 5 12 προβάτων: ὃ μισθωτὸς καὶ οὐκ ὧν ποιμήν, οὗ οὐκ ἔστιν τὰ πρόβατα ἴδια, θεω- Ἂς ΄, 3 LEY gs Nese pee \ pet Tov λύκον ἐρχόμενον Kal ἀφίησιν τὰ πρόβατα καὶ φεύγει, καὶ ὁ λύκος ἁρπά- 3 Ἂς \ 19 a oY a , ΕῚ Ν 5 , 3 “ Ἂν a 13 ζει αὐτὰ Kal σκορπίζει - ὅτι μισθωτός ἐστιν, καὶ οὐ μέλει αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν Tpo- 14 βάτων. / , 15 ἐμά, καθὼς γινώσκει pe ὁ πατὴρ κἀγὼ γινώσκω τὸν sao ks ε \ ε we \ , ἧς Re Pay κ , ΄ N ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ποιμὴν ὃ καλός, Kal γινώσκω τὰ ἐμά, καὶ γινώσκουσί με τὰ £ πατέρα, Kal τὴν ψυχὴν 7 (bed RS a , \ n 16 μου τίθημι ὑπὲρ τῶν προβάτων. καὶ ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς lal ’ὔ lal -“ ral nw lel αὐλῆς ταύτης - κἀκεῖνα δεῖ pe ἀγαγεῖν, καὶ τῆς φωνῆς 17 νήσεται μία ποίμνη, εἷς ποιμήν. διὰ τοῦτο ὃ πατήρ με ἀγαπᾷ, ὅτι ἐγὼ τίθημι ' μήν. jp με ἀγαπᾷ, ὅτι ἐγὼ τίθημ 2 31 Comp. Prov. 28: 9. 3 ΄ \ μου QKOVOOVOLV, και Ye Joh. 9:35. ἀνθρώπου 8 B Τ Revmg.; αὐτοῖς DD LA al Treg. | ὅτι ἃ A DAveg; θεοῦ A L A al it ve cop syrr Treg. Rey.txt. 40 Φαρισαίων S* etc? 10 itPle’ ve cop; add ταῦτα τοι B Lal syrr Treg. West. Rey. Joh. 10: 7. εἶπεν οὖν S*; add πάλιν B West.; add αὐτοῖς Se? 1 69 2P°; add αὐτοῖς πάλϊν S* etc? A itler yo syrr; add πάλιν om Β΄ 1, 33 Treg. West. Rev. 8 ἦλθον S* Aalit vg Aug Rev. (Am.mg.) ; add πρὸ ἐμοὺ SC ABD L al cop Or Treg. West. Rev.txt. 16 γενήσεται &* A A ittler ye; γενήσονται δὰ Β D L 1 383 2P° cop Treg. West. Rev. 106 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. [Part VI. JOHN x. Ν ” ‘ > ἊΝ 3 ᾽ Ν 18 τὴν ψυχήν μου, ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν. οὐδεὶς αἴρει αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ ’, Εν 5 ΠΩ lal 2 Ψ 5, θ aA > , Ν 2€ , ” ,ὕ τίθημι αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ. ἐξουσίαν ἔχω θεῖναι αὐτήν, καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω πάλιν “Ὁ τ ’ὔ / Ἂν > ἊΝ 3} Ἂς ἴω ’, λαβεῖν αὐτήν - ταύτην τὴν ἐντολὴν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ πατρός μου. 19 20 > lal / “ 21 οὖν πολλοὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν : δαιμόνιον ἔχει καὶ μαίνεται: τί αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε; | ἄλλοι ἔλεγον Σχίσμα πάλιν ἐγένετο ἐν τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις διὰ τοὺς λόγους τούτους. 3, aA » λυ Ὁ > 5, 4 Ν , ΄ ἔλεγον " ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα οὐκ ἐστιν Satpovilopevov: μὴ δαιμόνιον δύναται τυ- φλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοΐξει ; § 91. Jesus in Jerusalem at the Festival of Dedication. Jordan. — Jerusalem. He retires beyond Bethany beyond Jordan. JOHN X. 22-42. 22 23 24 ᾿Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἐν TH στοᾷ Σολομῶνος. > ΄ ἜΣ ΄ ey | Ne Nee ! \ ΄ ε Eyévero δὲ τὰ ἐνκαίνια ἐν “Ἱεροσολύμοις: χειμὼν ἣν" ' καὶ περιεπάτει ὃ aN Ν > tal ἐκύκλωσαν οὖν αὐτὸν ot ᾿Ιουδαῖοι Ν PN oes 7 πότ τὶ Ν ε ΄ ΝΜ x > \ 35. ε x la ae, ἢ ΄ καὶ ἔλεγον αὐτῷ ἕως ε τὴν ψυχὴν ἡμῶν αἴρεις; εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, εἰπὸν ΓΖ ae ΄ > (0 c Ἴ ZN 3 ee Ν 3 Ψ' Ν Δ ὮΝ aA 25 ἡμῖν παρρησιᾳ. ἀπεκριθὴ ὁ ἰησους" εἰπὸν ὑμῖν, καὶ οὐ πιστεύετε" TA Epya ἃ Cn nw 5 4 ἴω / Lal r Ν ““ ‘\ Lal 26 ἐγὼ ποιῶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι TOD πατρός μου, ταῦτα μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ ἀλλὰ ὑμεῖς , 9 > Ἀ cal / lal lal Lal 27 ov πιστεύετε, OTL οὐκ ἐστὲ EK τῶν προβάτων τῶν ἐμῶν. τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἐμὰ τῆς a > 4 > Ν , 3 4 ed A ’ | 3 Ν [ὃ 28 φωνῆς μου ἀκούουσιν, κἀγὼ γινώσκω αὐτά, καὶ ἀκολουθοῦσίν μοι, ' κἀγὼ δίδωμι \ > a Ν 3." > We 5, / > \ 2A Ν 3 ε ’, . QUTOLS Conv GLWVLOY, KL’ OU PY) ἀπόλωνται εἰς TOV AtWVG, Και ουχ αρπάσει τις QUTA > nan 7 c Ν a TAN) ,ὔ ΄ὔ lal , 5 \ 5 A , 29 ἐκ τῆς χειρός prov. ὃ πατὴρ ὃ δέδωκέν μοι πάντων μεῖζόν ἐστιν, Kal οὐδεὶς δύνα- 80 ται ἁρπάζειν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ πατρός. 91 52 cal e > nw τς 3) Ν 3, ε cal > lal , νῷ cas 3 lal τοῖς ὃ “Inoods: πολλὰ ἔργα καλὰ ἐδειξα ὑμῖν ἐκ τοῦ πατρός - διὰ ποῖον αὐτῶν ἐγὼ καὶ ὃ πατὴρ ἕν ἐσμεν. ᾿Ἔβάστασαν πάλιν λίθους οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἵνα λιθάσωσιν αὐτόν. ἀπεκρίθη αὖ- 838. ἔργον ἐμὲ λιθάζετε ; | ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι - περὶ καλοῦ ἔργου οὐ λι- θάζομέν σε ἀλλὰ περὶ βλασφημίας, καὶ ὅτι σὺ ἄνθρωπος dv ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν 34 θεόν. 35 ἐγὼ εἶπα: θεοί ἐστε; > (0 3 Lal ε a ca 5 = δ A , y ᾿ » , cal F , ε Lal a 7 ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς 6 Ἰησοῦς - οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν " ὅτι or ay ΄, εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεούς, πρὸς ods 6 λόγος ἐγένετο a cal Ν 5 , “ c δ a c ‘ = / Ν 3 ,ὔ 86 τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ οὐ δύναται λυθῆναι ἡ γραφή ὃν ὃ πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀπέστειλεν 9 κ᾿ ΄ ε a ΄ “ r - “ π᾿ i eX θ a > 1 2 23% 37 εἷς τὸν κόσμον, ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι βλασφημεῖς, ὅτι εἶπον - vids θεοῦ εἰμι; | εἰ οὐ ἘΞ a , ba) \ Ν ‘\ 38 ποιῶ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρός pov, μὴ πιστεύετέ μοι" εἰ δὲ ποιῶ, κἂν ἐμοὶ μὴ πι- ΄“ σ΄ “ Ν v ov Ν ε ἣν στεύετε, τοῖς ἔργοις πιστεύετε, ἵνα γνῶτε καὶ γινώσκητε ὅτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ὃ πατὴρ > Ν 2 tal ων κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρί. 99 40 , , n> , > \ ΄ “ -“».ὴν. 9 , \ a ΄ πάλιν πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου εἰς τὸν τόπον ὅπου ἣν ᾿Ιωάννης τὸ πρῶτον βαπτίζων, "ELjrovv οὖν αὐτὸν πιάσαι, καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν. Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν καὶ πολλοὶ ἦλθον πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ ἔλεγον ὅτι ᾿Ιωάννης μὲν ση- 5.84. Ps. 82:6. Comp. Ex. 22: 7 sq. Ate > Lal 41 καὶ εμεινεν EKEL. Joh. 10:18. αἴρει SCA DLA alit vg Rev.|%S B* D L vg cop Rev.mg.; ὃς A. cop syrr West.mg.; ἦρεν S* B West.txt. Rev.mg. 20 οὖν δὲ" et? D1 2°; δὲ Ne? A BL al vg cop Treg. West. Rev. 25 ἀπεκρίθη S* D; add αὐτοῖς Sc A B al it ve Treg. West. Rev. 29 πατὴρ Se itPMci; add μου Sc A BD L al vg cop syrr Treg. West. B2 A syrr West.mg. Rev.txt. μεῖζόν A B it ve cop Rey.mg.; μείζων δὲ DL A al West. meg. Reyv.txt. 89 οὖν NAL Δ ἃ] it ve; om B al cop [Treg.] [West.] Rey. | αὐτὸν S* D vg; add πάλιν Se A LA1 33 West.txt.; pm πάλιν B al syrr Treg. [West. mng.] Rev. a ? 8591, 921 UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 107 JOHN XI. “~ 5 4 vO , {} δὲ σ 3 3 ’ ἊΝ Ὁ» 3 n > ΟΥ̓ 42 μεῖον ἐποίησεν οὐδέν, πάντα δὲ ὅσα εἶπεν ᾿Ιωάννης περὶ τούτου ἀληθῆ ἦν. καὶ \ 72 A πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτὸν ἐκεῖ. § 92. The Raising of Lazarus. — Bethany. Joun XI. 1-46, = , a a An 1 *Hr δέ τις ἀσθενῶν, Λάζαρος ἀπὸ Βηθανίας, ἐκ τῆς κώμης τῆς Μαρίας καὶ re a > a 2A > Ν ΄, er αι , ΠΝ ΄ , ee 2 Μάρθας τῆς ἀδελφῆς αὐτῆς. ἣν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν κύριον μύρῳ καὶ ἐκ- ἴω ΄ a ~ τλ el {Ὁ ε Ν μάξασα τοῦς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς, ἧς ὃ ἀδελφὸς Λάζαρος ἠσθένει. ἀπέστειλαν οὖν at ἀδελφαὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγουσαι" κύριε, ἴδε ὃν φιλεῖς ἀσθενεῖ. > ΄ Κ᾿ τἀν )9: a > 7 Cr) ΄, > 3 \ , 3 se κα ἀκούσας δὲ ὃ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν - αὕτη ἡ ἀσθένεια οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ, ἵνα δοξασθῇ 6 vids τοῦ θεοῦ δι’ αὐτῆς. ἠγάπα δὲ ὃ Ἰησοῦς τὴν Μάρθαν καὶ τὴν ἀδελφὴν αὐτῆς καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον. ὡς οὖν ἤκουσεν ὅτι ἀσθε- νεῖ, τότε μὲν ἔμεινεν ἐν ᾧ ἦν τόπῳ δύο ἡμέρας - ἔπειτα μετὰ τοῦτο λέγει τοῖς 6 “ »” 5 Ν > ὃ 7) aN λέ > ~ ε θ ᾽ὔ ε μαθηταῖς - ἄγωμεν εἰς τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν πάλιν. λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταί: ῥαβ- φΦ ὦ “1 δ᾽ ὧι κα Ww f lal > r Ἂς fo Bei, viv ἐζήτουν σε λιθάσαι οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, καὶ πάλιν ὑπάγεις ἐκεῖ; |! ἀπεκρίθη “In- en ce , Ἂν ἐξ 3 a ε 4 2/7 a 3 ine oe / > σοῦς - οὐχὶ δώδεκα Gpat εἰσιν τῆς ἡμέρας; ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν TH ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ 10 , Ψ \ n a ΄ , Ve Satine δ “2 a προσκόπτει, OTL TO φῶς TOD κόσμου τούτου βλέπει" | ἐὰν δέ τις περιπατῇ ἐν TH νυκτί, προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ. “ ἴω cal Lal , 11. Ταῦτα εἶπεν, καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο λέγει αὐτοῖς - Λάζαρος ὃ φίλος ἡμῶν κεκοίμη- 3 Ἂς. ΄΄ σ 36. 7 Sy 8 > > 9. ἡ ε θ ΄, , 12 ται" ἀλλὰ πορεύομαι ἵνα ἐξυπνίσω αὐτόν. εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταί: κύριε, 3 ’, Ἅ > , ΝΥΝ ΤῸ] a ‘\ lal , > A > fal 13 εἰ κεκοίμηται, σωθήσεται. εἰρήκει δὲ 6 ᾿Τησοῦς περὶ Tod θανάτου αὐτοῦ" ἐκεῖ- Xoo 4 ‘ a ΄, Ἦν , ΄, 3. > > a ε 14 νοι δὲ ἔδοξαν ὅτι περι τῆς κοιμήσεως του ὕπνου λέγει. TOTE OVV εἰπεν αὑτοις O 15 Ἶ a a¢ / ςς Λάξ > 6 i Ν , δι ε an 7 »ἤ “ ησοῦς παῤῥησίᾳ: Λάζαρος ἀπέθανεν, 'ἱ καὶ χαίρω Ov ὑμᾶς, ἵνα πιστεύσητε, ὅτι > Ν 5 lal ΟῚ ἣν 4 Ἂν > , i > a < / LAN 16 οὐκ ἤμην ἐκεῖ - ἀλλὰ ἄγωμεν πρὸς αὐτόν. εἶπεν οὖν Θωμᾶς ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος col Lal Ν fal 7 nm τοῖς συνμαθηταῖς - ἄγωμεν καὶ ἡμεῖς ἵνα ἀποθάνωμεν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 3 Ν 9, δι 9 a fe SN / ε / Υ 5 a , 17 Ἐλθὼν οὖν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εὗρεν αὐτὸν τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔχοντα ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ. na ε ‘\ 18 19 ἣν δὲ ἡ Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε. πολλοὶ “ > 7 δὲ ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἐληλύθεισαν πρὸς τὰς περὶ Μάρθαν καὶ Μαριάμ, ἵνα παρα- κ᾿ 5 or > ΡΥ ἢ 20 μυθήσωνται αὐτὰς περὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ. ἡἣ οὖν Μάρθα ὡς ἤκουσεν ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐρ- ε ΄ 39 “«“ ,ὔ δὲ 2 a »” 2 as τ. > ε / 6 21 χεται, ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ: Μαρία δὲ ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ ἐκαθέζετο. εἶπεν οὖν ἡ Μάρθα A > 4 , \ a 30 22 πρὸς ᾿Ιησοῦν- κύριε, εἰ ἧς ὧδε, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός μου. καὶ νῦν οἶδα © 4 Lg Ἃ es Ν , ΄ ε ’ ΄ πα τ A > 23 ὅτι ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσῃ τὸν θεόν, δώσει σοι 6 θεός. λέγει αὐτῇ ὃ “Iycods: ava- τι 7) es ao. ¢ ΄ a 24 στήσεται ὃ ἀδελφός cov. λέγει αὐτῷ ἡ Μάρθα οἶδα ὅτι ἀναστήσεται ἐν TH - 3 / > a ? , c , +) er a Aine SD , 9 ἘΠῚ 19 / 25 ἀναστάσει ἐν TH ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. εἶπεν αὐτῇ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς- ἐγώ εἶμι 7 ἀνάστασις ΝΕ ue Pin) s@ ΄ > > \ nN > θ , ζ , 1 \ a ε ζῶ Ν 26 καὶ ἣ ζωή: 6 πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ κἂν ἀποθάνῃ ζήσεται, ἱ καὶ πᾶς ὃ ζῶν καὶ , > ak > Nees 0 4 > \ 3A , a ! λέ be 27 πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς TOV αἰῶνα πιστεύεις τοῦτο; έγει αὐτῷ " ,ὕ , αἱ δὰ 4 7 Ν Lat Ν ε εν a a ¢ 3 Ν ΄ val, κύριε - ἐγὼ πεπίστευκα ὅτι σὺ εἶ ὃ Χριστὸς ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ ὁ εἰς τὸν κόσμον Ν A A an 38 ἐρχόμενος. καὶ τοῦτο εἰποῦσα ἀπῆλθεν καὶ ἐφώνησεν Μαριὰμ τὴν ἀδελφὴν ad- lal / > Lal c ὃ ὃ ,ὔ Dl a A lal ΕἸ , ε » 29 τῆς λάθρα εἰποῦσα : ὃ διδάσκαλος πάρεστιν καὶ φωνεῖ σε. ἐκείνη ὡς ἤκουσεν, Joh. 11:17. ἡμέρας A* D cop; add ἤδη Avg; add δὲ δὲ BC* L383 69 cop Treg.txt. SA2C3 LA veg Treg.mg. Rev.; pm ἤδη Β οὐ [mg.] West. Rev. | ἐγείρεται et ἔρχεται C* 69 Treg.txt. West. 19 τὰς περὶ α (ἠγέρθη Ὁ) ἃ ΟΞ Ὁ A vg; ἠγέρθη et ἤρχετο C2 A al; τὴν S B C* L 33 it vg cop syrr δὲ ΒΟΥ, 33 Treg. West. Rev. Treg. West. Rey. 29 ἐκείνη A C? Ὁ 108 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. JOHN ΧΙ. , \ , + Ps 30 ἐγείρεται ταχὺ Kal ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτόν οὔπω δὲ ἐληλύθει 6 ᾿Τησοῦς εἰς τὴν κώ- > a / μὲ ε ΄ 9. A Ὁ. 1 5 a 31 μην, GAN ἣν ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ ἣ Μάρθα. οἱ οὖν ᾿Τουδαῖοι ot " , Seen onl Sto MEY, \ ΄ Se 90. 7 κ x ¢ ὄντες μετ᾽ αὐτῆς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ καὶ παραμυθούμενοι αὐτήν, ἰδόντες τὴν Μαριὰμ ὅτι / > / Ν ἐξὴλθ 5 λ 50 3) iy 60 7 ε i? > Ν ταχέως ἀνέστη καὶ ἐξῆλθεν, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῇ, δόξαντες ὅτι ὑπάγει εἰς τὸ μνη- 39 “-“ Ψ“ Ν ΄ 5» lad ε μὺ M Ν c NAG 7 a ε "T an io a aN μεῖον ἵνα κλαύσῃ ἐκεῖ. ἡἣ οὖν Μαριὰμ ws ἦλθεν ὅπου ἣν ὃ Ἰησοῦς, ἰδοῦσα αὐτὸν A , , a , > - ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς πόδας λέγουσα αὐτῷ " κύριε, εἰ ἧς ὧδε, οὐκ ἄν μου ἀπέ- > a > > ΄ 33 θανεν 6 ἀδελφός. ᾿Ἰησοῦς οὖν ὡς εἶδεν αὐτὴν κλαίουσαν καὶ τοὺς συνελθόντας 834 9. A ili ὃ ΄ λ ΄ > , a , NSB ae ἕ ε / ! Ν αὐτῇ ᾿Ιουδαίους κλαίοντας, ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι καὶ ἐτάραξεν ἑαυτόν, ' καὶ > lal , > / / > ~ , » XN» > , 85 εἶπεν : ποῦ τεθείκατε αὐτόν; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ κύριε, ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε. ἐδάκρυσεν “ io 5 Lal “ 86 37 ὁ Ἰησοῦς. ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι- ἴδε πῶς ἐφίλει αὐτόν. τινὲς δὲ ἐξ αὖ- “ i 3 207 e ε mS ΄ Ν 5 Ν “ “ fad τῶν εἶπον" οὐκ ἐδύνατο οὗτος 6 ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ ποιῆσαι 38 Sa Ν fe ΝΣ a ΄ 4 al A Ss aN ΕἸ β ΄ὔ 9 ε ἮΝ ἵνα καὶ οὗτος μὴ ἀποθάνῃ; ᾿Ιησοῦς οὖν πάλιν ἐμβριμούμενος ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἔρχεται > Ν “-“ 3 δὲ AN. Ἂς λίθ > / ee | > a ! , ew cal 39 cis TO μνημεῖον. ἦν δὲ σπήλαιον, καὶ λίθος ἐπέκειτο ἐπ’ αὐτῷ. | λέγει ὃ Ἰησοῦς - Ψ tas a ἄρατε tov λίθον. λέγει αὐτῷ ἡ ἀδελφὴ τοῦ τετελευτηκότος Μάρθα" κύριε, + 5 a ΄ 2 / Te Tee a 3 ΠΥ μὴ ΖΝ 40 ἤδη ὄζει τεταρταῖος γάρ ἐστιν. λέγει αὐτῇ ὁ Ἰησοῦς οὐκ εἶπόν σοι ὅτι ἐὰν = "ἢ eae Sette τ 41 πιστεύσῃς ὄψῃ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ; ' ἦραν οὖν τὸν λίθον: ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἦρεν \ > \ +” \ > , > κ “ ” ΄ τῷ 42 τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἄνω καὶ εἶπεν πάτερ, εὐχαριστῶ σοι ὅτι ἠκουσάς μου. ἐγὼ ἂν ANY Ὁ ΄ 4 5 , > Ν ἃς Ν 5, Ν nr > 9 δὲ ἤδειν ὅτι πάντοτέ μου ἀκούεις - ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον τὸν περιεστῶτα εἶπον, ἵνα Ἂν lal ~ 43 πιστεύσωσιν ὅτι ov pe ἀπέστειλας. καὶ ταῦτα εἰπὼν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ ἐκραύγασεν " a la , Ν al 44 Λάζαρε, δεῦρο ἔξω. ἐξῆλθεν ὁ τεθνηκὼς δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας κει- "2 Nie Oe > a ὃ ’, δέδ λέ > a 5 1 a > hv plas, καὶ ἡ ὄψις αὐτοῦ σουδαρίῳ περιεδέδετο. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - λύσατε αὐτὸν καὶ ἄφετε αὐτὸν ὑπάγειν. an 3 Ν a 45 Πολλοὶ οὖν ἐκ τῶν “Iovdatwy, ot ἐλθόντες πρὸς τὴν Μαριὰμ καὶ θεασάμενοι ἃ 5 ’ὔ 5 4 > > / Ἂς Ww CV Ey > “ Ν \ , AG ἐποίησεν, ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν - τινὲς δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπῆλθον πρὸς τοὺς Φαρισαΐ- τ a ἃ > Aa ovs καὶ εἶπαν αὐτοῖς ἃ ἐποίησεν ᾿Ἰησοῦς. § 93. The Counsel of Caiaphas against Jesus. He retires from Jerusalem. — Jerusalem. Ephraim. JOHN XI. 47-54. if > e 3 Lal Ν ε -“ [4 Le! ’ -“ 47 Swvyyayov οὖν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι συνέδριον, καὶ ἔλεγον - τί ποιοῦ- μή ἣδν εν θ ANG a Oe ΖΝ 3 lal ΘΝ 2 , 48 μεν, ὅτι οὗτος ὃ ἄνθρωπος πολλὰ ποιεῖ σημεῖα; ἐὰν ἀφῶμεν αὐτὸν οὕτως, πάν- Ν ε “ “ “ τες πιστεύσουσιν εἷς αὐτόν, καὶ ἐλεύσονται οἱ Ρωμαῖοι καὶ ἀροῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν / Ν Ν ἔθ ἣν ὃ μ 2€ ἀρ τοὶ Κ os > \ x a - 49 τόπον καὶ τὸ ἔθνος. εἷς δέ τις ἐξ αὐτῶν Καϊάφας, ἀρχιερεὺς ὧν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ > lal lal - 50 ἐκείνου, εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε οὐδέν, | οὐδὲ λογίζεσθε ὅτι συμφέρει ε lal 7 e ΕΣ θ 5 θ / δ᾽ a λ an Ἂν Ν ὅλ \ ἔθ 5 ON ἡμῖν ἵνα εἷς ἄνθρωπος ἀποθάνῃ ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἐθνος ἀπόληται. a ἴω ΩΣ Δ n “ , 51 τοῦτο δὲ ad’ ἑαυτοῦ οὐκ εἶπεν, ἀλλὰ ἀρχιερεὺς ὧν TOD ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκείνου ἐπροφή- Φ 3, 3 a > ΄ ς x a ἔθ J Ν 3 ες x - 52 τευσεν ὅτι ἔμελλεν ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀποθνήσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθνους, ' Kal οὐχ ὕπερ τοῦ 3 4, 5 9,7 Ν ἂς , a a Ν / / > ἔθνους μόνον, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ τὰ διεσκορπισμένα συναγάγῃ εἰς Ὁ > yD ’ὔ io ial « ’, > , 2 > , 3 / 53 ἕν. ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνης οὖν τῆς ἡμέρας ἐβουλεύσαντο ἵνα ἀποκτείνωσιν αὑτόν. > a > 3 / ae / , > a > ,ὔ > Ν > - > -“ 54 Ἰησοῦς οὖν οὐκέτι παῤῥησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις, ἀλλὰ ἀπῆλθεν ἐκεῖ- Joh.11:30. ἣν Α Ὁ LAalsyrr; add ἔτι Treg.txt. West.txt. Rev.txt. 54 διέ- 8 BC 1 33 vg cop Treg.txt. et [mg.] West. τριβεν A D A al it vg syrr Treg.mg.; ἔμεινεν Rev. 45 aN A*LAit™! ve cop SB L Treg.txt. West. Rev. Treg.mg. West.mg. Rev.mg.; ὃ A? BC* D1 §§ 93-95.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 109 JOHN XI. ἢ θεν εἰς τὴν χώραν ἐγγὺς τῆς ἐρήμου, εἰς Edpaly λεγομένην πόλιν, κἀκεῖ διέτρι- βεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν. 8 94. Jesus beyond Jordan is followed by Multitudes. The Healing of the Infirm Woman on the Sabbath. — Valley of Jordan. Perea. Marra. XTX. 1, 2. Mark X. 1. 1. Kal ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ησους 1 Ka ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς ἔρχεται εἰς τὰ τοὺς λόγους τούτους, μετῆρεν ἀπὸ τῆς ὅρια τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ πέραν τοῦ ᾽Ἴορ- Γαλιλαίας καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅρια τῆς δάνου, καὶ συνπορεύονται πάλιν ὄχλοι 3 ὃ , , a > / Ν Ν > / Ν ε 4.4 ΄ 207 2 ᾿Ιουδαίας πέραν τοῦ “lopdavov. καὶ πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ὡς εἰώθει πάλιν ἐδί- ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί, καὶ δασκεν αὐτούς. > ’ὔ > \ 5 a ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ. Luxe XIII. 10-21. 9S A a lal - ᾿ Ν Ι011 Ἦν δὲ διδάσκων ἐν μιᾷ τῶν συναγωγῶν ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν. καὶ ἰδοὺ γυνὴ πνεῦμα ἔχουσα ἀσθενείας ἔτη δεκαοκτώ, καὶ ἣν συνκύπτουσα καὶ μὴ δυναμέν ff > 1) ey > A πὰ 12 ἀνακύψαι εἰς τὸ παντελές. ἰδὼν δὲ αὐτὴν ὁ Ἰησοῦς προσεφώνησεν καὶ εἶπεν 13 airy: γύναι, ἀπολέλυσαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀσθενείας σου, | καὶ ἐπέθηκεν αὐτη) τὰς χεῖρας " “ φ Ν 14 καὶ παραχρῆμα ἀνορθώθη, καὶ ἐδόξαζεν τὸν θεόν. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ἀρχισυνάγω- 3 lal Lg “ ΄ 24 ΄ ε Ἴ a er a ἊΝ, Lg QE γος, ἀγανακτῶν ὅτι TO σαββάτῳ ἐθεράπευσεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς, ἐλεγεν τῷ ὄχλῳ OTL EF « / uN 3 Ἐν ὃ a 32 ΄ θ > > al 53 3 , 6 ΄ θ Ν ἡμέραι εἰσὶν ἐν αἷς δεῖ ἐργάζεσθαι ἐν αὐταῖς οὖν ἐρχόμενοι θεραπεύεσθε καὶ : Μ 15 τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ σαββάτου. ἀπεκρίθη δὲ αὐτῷ ὃ κύριος Kal εἶπεν - ὑποκριταί, ἢ ἩΜΈΕΡΟ : ριται, 7 δ lot a , > Xr ’ Ν ἴω 3 a πῇ Ν +” Spee a ΄ ἕκαστος ὑμῶν τῷ σαββάτῳ οὐ λύει τὸν βοῦν αὐτοῦ ἢ τὸν ὄνον ἀπὸ τῆς φάτνης \ > \ ΄ ΄ \ ΄ 3 x > Teer ἊΨ, ε 16 καὶ ἀπαγαγὼν ποτίζει; ταύτην δὲ θυγατέρα ᾿Αβραὰμ οὖσαν, ἣν ἔδησεν ὁ σατα- a > \ ΄ Yee) NO” > aN a SEN a a , Fall eG , vas ἰδοὺ δέκα Kal ὀκτὼ ἔτη, οὐκ ἔδει λυθῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ τούτου TH ἡμέρᾳ 17 τοῦ σαββάτου; καὶ ταῦτα λέγοντος αὐτοῦ κατῃσχύνοντο πάντες οἱ ἀντικείμενοι Ν an a Lae) “-“ αὐτῷ, καὶ πᾶς 6 ὄχλος ἔχαιρεν ἐπὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς ἐνδόξοις τοῖς γινομένοις ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 4 a ca) a 18 "EAcyev οὖν " τίνι ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ τίνι ὁμοιώσω αὐτήν ; 1) ἢ μ' V5 ε Δ 3 Ν / , a Ν + + 3 a ε “A Ν 19 ὁμοία ἐστὶν κόκκῳ σινάπεως, ὃν λαβὼν ἄνθρωπος ἔβαλεν εἰς κῆπον ἑαυτοῦ, καὶ ὕξησεν καὶ ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατεσκήνωσεν ἐν if ᾽ ρ | A > A A 20 τοῖς κλάδοις αὐτοῦ. Kat πάλιν εἶπεν - τίνι ὁμοιύσω τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ; μ 3 c ,ὔ 3 Ν ζύ aA x a Vans) > iv , 4 , φῳ ke τῷ 21 ὁμοία ἐστὶν ζύμῃ, ἣν λαβοῦσα γυνὴ ἐκρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ ἐζυ- μώθη ὅλον. § 95. Our Lord goes teaching and journeying towards Jerusalem. He is warned against Herod. — Perea. Ἐπ DODO BREESE 22 Kat διεπορεύετο κατὰ πόλεις Kal κώμας διδάσκων καὶ πορείαν ποιούμενος εἷς Ἱεροσόλυμα. 23 Hizey δέ τις αὐτῷ κύριε, εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; ὁ δὲ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς " 24 ' ἀγωνίζεσθε εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τῆς στενῆς θύρας, ὅτι πολλοί, λέγω ὑμῖν, ζητήσουσιν Le. 13:19. ἀπὸ δὲ AD syrr (it vg ab); om BL Δ Or Treg. West. Rev. 110 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VL LUKE XIII. “ 8. ἈΝ A 25 εἰσελθεῖν καὶ οὐκ ἰσχύσουσιν. ἀφ᾽ ov ἂν ἐγερθῇ ὃ οἰκοδεσπότης Kal ἀποκλείσῃ ‘ , Ν + ἕξ, WE ε / Ν ΄ Ν 6 / , UA τὴν θύραν, καὶ ἄρξησθε ἔξω ἑστάναι καὶ κρούειν τὴν θύραν λέγοντες " κύριε 4 ὦ can Ἂ 09 6 Ν > oy et oan 3 78 ς« “« 40 > te Ψ, 4 6 26 ἄνοιξον ἡμῖν, καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ἐρεῖ ὑμῖν ovd« oida ὑμᾶς πόθεν ἐστέ. τότε ἄρξεσθε λέ ; 2 4 edad 4 ΝΕ ΗΝ τ ASS a Xr ἐλ LSet od 2518 ἕ yew " ἐφάγομεν ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐπίομεν, καὶ ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις ἡμῶν ἐδίδαξας. 27 28 Ν > a / (ee tte > πὰ ε la) , > [4 > ie 5 3 > a“ καὶ ἐρεῖ. λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ olda ὑμᾶς πόθεν ἐστέ: ἀπόστητε ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ , > 4 a 5 / > A 3, < Ἂν Ν ε Ἂς πάντες ἐργάται τῆς ἀδικίας. ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὃ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὃ βρυγμὸς 5 3 , o pd ° Ν NS) Ν \ > x Ν , Ν τῶν ὀδόντων, ὅταν ὄψεσθε ᾿Α βραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ καὶ ᾿Ιακὼβ καὶ πάντας τοὺς προ- 29 φήτας ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὑμᾶς δὲ ἐκβαλλομένους ἔξω. καὶ ἥξουσιν ἀπὸ 3 la Ν “ ‘ stn Ν Ψ Ν 3 ’ > a / ἀνατολῶν Kai δυσμῶν Kat βοῤῥᾶ καὶ νότου, καὶ ἀνακλιθήσονται ἐν TH βασιλείᾳ 80 τοῦ θεοῦ. ἔσ XaTOL. Ny 15 Ν Dian 3 a lal Ν 3. ὧν Ge a 7 και ἰδοὺ €LOLV εσχάτοι οἱ ἐσονται TPWTOL, Και εἰσιν πρωτοι Ol εσόνται ° a a 9 lol “ ἡ Ν 31 Ev αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ προσῆλθάν τινες Φαρισαῖοι λέγοντες αὐτῷ ἔξελθε καὶ πο- ͵ > a o c / , 9 a Ν > > Lal tA 32 ρεύου ἐντεῦθεν, ὅτι “Hpwdns θέλει σε ἀποκτεῖναι. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - πορευθέντες ” Asin? ΄ ΕΣ 5 ΄ ΄ Lor 9 an ΄ εἴπατε τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ - ἰδοὺ ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον \ an A a Ν + Ν bed 33 καὶ αὔριον, καὶ TH τρίτῃ τελειοῦμαι. πλὴν δεῖ με σήμερον καὶ αὔριον καὶ TH 2 / ΄ μη 3 > ΄ ΄ 3 / ” ε , ἐχομένῃ πορεύεσθαι, ὅτι οὐκ ἐνδέχεται προφήτην ἀπολέσθαι ἔξω ἹἹερουσαλήμ. ε , , Ν ‘\ 34 Ἱερουσαλὴμ Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἡ ἀποκτείνουσα τοὺς προφήτας καὶ λιθοβολοῦσα τοὺς ͵ὔ 1} Ἂν , ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν, ποσάκις ἠθέλησα ἐπισυνάξαι TA τέκνα σου ὃν τρό- ΝΜ XN ε Lal Ν ε Ν Ν ,ὔ A 5 3 Sf io Ν 9 7, 35 πον ὀρνιξ τὴν ἑαυτῆς νοσσιὰν ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγας, καὶ οὐκ ἠθελήσατε. ἰδοὺ ἀφίε- ε Lal e C3) e ““ a λέ e Lal 5, 3 x‘ io / 7 7 Ld » 4 3 ται ὑμῖν ὃ οἶκος ὑμῶν. έγω ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἴδητέ με ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε: EV= λογημένος ὃ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου." § 96. Our Lord dines with a Chief Pharisee on the Sabbath. Incidents. — Perea. Luxe XIV. 1-24. 1. Kai ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἐλθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς οἶκόν τινος TOV ἀρχόντων τῶν Φαρισαίων i2 lal ΕΣ ‘\ 3 bt Ὦ ὦ Ἂ 3 / a! Le σαββάτῳ φαγεῖν ἄρτον, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἦσαν παρατηρούμενοι αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνθρω- 3 a kal ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν πρὸς Ν Ν Ν , , WE a ᾽ὔ a x ΕΣ τοὺς νομικοὺς καὶ Φαρισαίους λέγων" εξεστιν TW σαββάτῳ θεραπεῦσαι Ἢ οὐ; 8 πός τις ἣν ὑδρωπικὸς ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ. 45 οἱ δὲ ἡσύχασαν. καὶ ἐπιλαβόμενος ἰάσατο αὐτὸν καὶ ἀπέλυσεν. καὶ ἀποκρι- Ν Ν 3 Ἂν 5 la Cae εν ΕΝ - 5 ,ὔ a Ν 3 > θεὶς πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἶπεν - τίνος ὑμῶν υἱὸς ἢ βοῦς cis φρέαρ πεσεῖται, καὶ οὐκ Ev- ’ 3 , Be > ε , a , \ 3 ” > 67 6 θέως ἀνασπάσει αὐτὸν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ σαββάτου; Kal οὐκ ἴσχυσαν ἀνταποκριθῆναι πρὸς ταῦτα. / lal Ν , 7 Ἔλεγεν δὲ πρὸς τοὺς κεκλημένους παραβολὴν, ἐπέχων πῶς τὰς πρωτοκλισίας , Li “ / > / Ν 8 ἐξελέγοντο, λέγων πρὸς αὐτούς - ὅταν κληθῇς ὑπό τινος εἰς γάμους, μὴ κατακλι- θῇς εἰς τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν, μήποτε ἐντιμότερός σου ἢ κεκλημένος UT αὐτοῦ, 8 35. Comp. Ps. 69 : 26 [25]; Jer. 12:7; 22:5. [> 35. Ps. 118: 26.) Le. 18:94. ἰσχύσουσιν. A L Aal itPl yg; pm ἀμὴν δὲ min mu Steph. | ἥξει ὅτε A D A ἰσχύσουσιν, Treg. West. Rev.mg. 27 ὑμᾶς δ A (Ὁ var) ΔῚ 33 69 al vg; om B L Treg. West. Rev. 29 βοῤῥᾶ ΝΑ Ds Δ ἃ] vg cop; pm ἀπὸ B L [Treg.] West. Rev. 85 λέγω N* L; add δὲ te ABD A al vg cop Treg. [West.] Rev.; al vg [Treg.]; om (add ἂν δὲ 1 69) NBL cop West. Rev. Le. 14:5. ἀποκριθεὶς S* ett? A A al vg; om S: B Τὴ 1, iteler cop Treg. West. Rev. | υἱὸς ABA al syrr Rev.mg.; ὄνος (ut 13: 15) δὲ 1,1 88 vg cop Rev.txt. ; πρόβατον D. a ΨΨῳ0ΝΝ §§ 96,97.) UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 111 LUKE XIV. ε Ν f A Ν , 4 Ν , 9 [ καὶ ἐλθὼν ὁ σὲ Kat αὐτὸν καλέσας ἐρεῖ σοι" dds τούτῳ τόπον, Kal τότε ἄρξῃ Ν > , Ν 3, / , > > σ lal Ν 9 ΄ 10 μετὰ αἰσχύνης τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν. ἀλλ᾽ ὅταν κληθῇς, πορευθεὶς ἀνά- >. Ν ΕΣ ’ὔ’ 7 7 ΝΜ ε ’ > Con) 4 πεσε cis TOV ἔσχατον τόπον, ἵνα ὅταν ἔλθῃ ὃ κεκληκώς σε ἐρεῖ σοι" φίλε, προσ- ’ ’, lal ανάβηθι ἀνώτερον: τότε ἔσται σοι δόξα ἐνώπιον πάντων TOV συνανακειμένων σοι. ov a Ree. lal ε Ν ΄ Nace “- ε Ν ε , 11 ὅτι πᾶς ὃ ὑψῶν ἑαυτὸν ταπεινωθήσεται, Kal ὃ ταπεινῶν ἑαυτὸν ὑψωθήσεται. 12. "EA δὲ καὶ τῷ κεκληκότι αὐτόν" ὅ ns ἃ ἢ δεῖπνον, μὴ φώ eyey δὲ καὶ τῷ κεκληκότι αὐτόν: ὅταν ποιῇς ἄριστον ἢ δεῖπνον, μὴ φώνει Ν ᾽ Ν \ > fe \ \ - Ν ΄ τοὺς φίλους σου μηδὲ τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου μηδὲ τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου μηδὲ γείτονας Ν / πλουσίους, μήποτε Kal αὐτοὶ ἀντικαλέσωσίν σε, καὶ γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι. 18 14 ἀλλ᾽ ὅταν ποιῇς δοχήν, κάλει πτωχούς, ἀναπήρους, χωλούς, τυφλούς, ' καὶ μακάριος ἔσῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἀνταποδοῦναί σοι ἀνταποδοθήσεται δέ σοι ἐν τῇ “ / ἀναστάσει τῶν δικαίων. 3 , / “ , a > 2 ἶσα ΄, “ ΄ 15 ᾿Ακούσας δέ τις τῶν συνανακειμένων ταῦτα εἶπεν αὐτῷ: μακάριος ὅστις φά- " > A , A A ε \ 5 ciate >” , > , 16 γεται ἄρτον ἐν TH βασιλείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ. 6 δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἀνθρωπός τις ἐποίει a \ A rm Zz 17 δεῖπνον μέγα, καὶ ἐκάλεσεν πολλούς, Ἷ καὶ ἀπέστειλεν τὸν δοῦλον αὐτοῦ τῇ ὥρᾳ ς cal , > a a , 3 6 Ψ no “ ΄ 5 \ oo € 18 τοῦ δείπνου εἰπεῖν τοῖς κεκλημένοις - ἔρχεσθε, ὅτι ἤδη ἕτοιμά εἰσιν. Kal ἤρξαντο ᾽ SEN a ΄ κ ε an > 3A > Q Cia ν ἡ ἀπὸ μιᾶς πάντες παραιτεῖσθαι. ὃ πρῶτος εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἀργὸν ἠγόρασα, καὶ ἔχω 19 3 / } 58 λθὼν io oar > ’ 5 > “ 3, έν Ν ω > ἀνάγκην ἐξελθὼν ἰδεῖν αὐτόν - ἐρωτῶ σε, ἔχε με παρῃτημένον. καὶ ἕτερος εἷ- πεν" ζεύγη βοῶν ἠγόρασα πέντε, καὶ πορεύομαι δοκιμάσαι αὐτά" ἐρωτῶ σε, 20 ἔχε με παρῃτημένον. καὶ ἕτερος εἶπεν - γυναῖκα ἔγημα, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο οὐ δύνα- > a \ ΄ ε A Spe, "Ξ , 39 a A 21 μαι ἐλθεῖν. καὶ παραγενόμενος ὃ δοῦλος ἀπήγγειλεν TH κυρίῳ αὐτοῦ ταῦτα. 4 > a) \ ε » ὃ , = “ ὃ , > a WE 0 / 3 Ν τότε ὀργισθεὶς ὃ οἰκοδεσπότης εἶπεν τῷ δούλῳ αὐτοῦ: ἔξελθε ταχέως εἰς τὰς ’ ΘΝ a 4 Ν Ν ‘\ Ἂν 3 {2 Ν Ν πλατείας καὶ ῥύμας τῆς πόλεως, καὶ τοὺς πτωχοὺς καὶ ἀναπήρους καὶ τυφλοὺς \ \ a iy a ν 5 ε A , ΄ ε ἀκ \ 22 καὶ χωλοὺς εἰσάγαγε ὧδε. καὶ εἶπεν ὁ δοῦλος - κύριε, γέγονεν ὡς ἐπέταξας, καὶ a l4 > ’ Ν L. 3) ε 4 Ν Ἂν a ” > Ν ε Ν Ν 23 ἔτι τόπος ἐστίν. καὶ εἶπεν ὃ κύριος πρὸς τὸν δοῦλον - ἔξελθε εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ 24 Ν Ν es 3 λθ Ay) aay θη ε Ἂν a λέ Ν ε a Ld φραγμοὺς καὶ ἀνάγκασον εἰσελθεῖν, ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὃ οἶκος " λέγω yap ὑμῖν ὅτι lal / na a οὐδεὶς TOV ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου. § 97. What is required of true Disciples. — Perea. Luke XIV. 25-30. 25 26 Suveropevovto δὲ αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί, καὶ στραφεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς - | εἴ ’ x 3 lal Ἂν / lal τις ἔρχεται πρός με καὶ OV μισεῖ TOV πατέρα αὐτοῦ Kal τὴν μητέρα καὶ τὴν γυ- cal , Ἂς ΝΥ Ν ‘\ a vaika καὶ τὰ τέκνα καὶ τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς Kal Tas ἀδελφάς, ἔτι δὲ Kal THY ἑαυτοῦ ψυ- ie 3 ὃ , > he θ , μὲ > , \ Ἀ ε a“ Ν 27 χήν, οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής. ὅστις οὐ βαστάζει τὸν σταυρὸν ἑαυτοῦ καὶ 3 ΄, a) , lad 28 ἔρχεται ὀπίσω μου, οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής. Tis yap ἐξ ὑμῶν θέλων πύρ- > a EN ““ tA 1% ‘ / ΙΝ 3 3 γον οἰκοδομῆσαι οὐχὶ πρῶτον καθίσας ψηφίζει τὴν δαπάνην, εἰ ἔχει εἰς ἀπαρ- / ἄ 7 / a) ld 3 a 6 aN ‘ Ν᾽, ΄ὔ 5 ’ / 29 τισμόν; ἵνα μήποτε θέντος αὐτοῦ θεμέλιον καὶ μὴ ἰσχύοντος ἐκτελέσαι πάντες θ a SH or be ae (Ce, ' λέ Ψ Go 5 ἄνθ ae 30 οἱ θεωροῦντες ἄρξωνται αὐτῷ ἐμπαίζειν, ' λέγοντες ὅτι οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος ἤρξατο a \ 31 οἰκοδομεῖν καὶ οὐκ ἴσχυσεν ἐκτελέσαι. Ἢ ris βασιλεὺς πορευόμενος ἑτέρῳ Ba- ~ La) > / > Ἂν , a ΄ > ἐξ 5 σιλεῖ συμβαλεῖν εἰς πόλεμον οὐχὶ καθίσας πρῶτον βουλεύεται εἰ δυνατός ἐστιν 32 3 δέ λ , ε ῆσαι a \ ” x (ὃ > , ΓΕ. 3 6 ᾿ εἰ ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι τῷ μετὰ εἴκοσι χιλιάδων ἐρχομένῳ ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν ; Ν fa μὴ 3 a 3ςε μή ΄’ 3 / > “ Ν \ S228. δὲ μήγε, ἔτι αὐτοῦ πόῤῥω ὄντος πρεσβείαν ἀποστείλας ἐρωτᾷ τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην. Le. 14:14. δὲ N*; γὰρ NS’ A BD L vg (ν619}) BL; add πάντα (ante ἕτοιμα D cop) cop syrr Treg. West. 17 εἰσιν SL; S* (velet) A D vg cop [Treg.] 26 δὲ ἐστιν A B D Treg. West. | sine πάντα S* ete δὲ A Det vg cop; re BL Treg. West. Rey. “ Ae ΨΌΝ ven 112 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. LUKE XY. ¢ 9 <2 a 2f £m ἃ 3 > 4 a ὅν Ὁ {3 na ¢ ΄ 3 , 33 οὕτως οὖν πᾶς ἐξ ὑμῶν OS οὐκ ἀποτάσσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ ὑπάρχουσιν οὐ δύ- ναται εἶναί μου μαθητής. ces Ε 84 8΄ Καλὸν οὖν τὸ ἅλα ἐὰν δὲ καὶ τὸ ἅλα μωρανθῇ, ἐν τίνι ἀρτυθήσεται ; | οὔτε > a y+ , > εἰς γῆν οὔτε εἰς κοπρίαν εὔθετόν ἐστιν - ἔξω βάλλουσιν αὐτό. ὃ ἔχων ὦτα 9 7 3 » ακουεὶν AKOVETY). § 98. Parable of the Lost Sheep, etc. Parable of the Prodigal Son. —- Perea. ΠΗ OWA 1 ὦ». oH δὲ ΠΟ ον ΄ ΄ ε VA Nee Ay , νὰ τῳ 1 σαν δὲ αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ. 2 καὶ διεγόγγυζον οἵ τε Φαρισαῖοι καὶ of γραμματεῖς λέγοντες ὅτι οὗτος ἁμαρτω- \ ΄ \ ΄ 3 a Aovs προσδέχεται καὶ συνεσθίει αὐτοῖς. > Ἂς Ἂς / cal 34 Hizey δὲ πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην λέγων - τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν 4 ε \ , \ > ΄ 3 aA ἃ ? ΄ ΚΝ pe 4 ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα καὶ ἀπολέσας ἐξ αὐτῶν ἕν οὐ καταλείπει τὰ ἐνενήκοντα ΕἸ ΄ > is: Lf, \ , 5. Aes 4 ῳ WA Ley 4 \ ΜΌΝ > 5 ἐννέα ἐν TH ἐρήμῳ καὶ πορεύεται ἐπὶ TO ἀπλωλός, ἕως εὕρῃ αὐτό; Kal εὑρὼν ἐπι- Ὅ ΘΈΑ. Ν 3, ε lal , ! Ν ἐλθὰ > Ν LS Xr -“ ΑΝ 6 τίθησιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὥμους ἑαυτοῦ χαίρων, ' καὶ ἐλθὼν εἰς τὸν οἶκον συνκαλεῖ τοὺς 1] ! ὑὸς Ν / a / Ψ Φ' ς ’ φίλους καὶ τοὺς γείτονας, λέγων αὐτοῖς " συνχάρητέ μοι, ὅτι εὗρον τὸ πρόβα- , NTS ΄ , ea i 4 Ν 3 a > A ϑ ele 7 Tov μου τὸ ἀπολωλός. λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι οὕτως χαρὰ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἔσται ἐπὶ ἑνὶ ες tal lal “Ἃ > ‘ > , > / NJ ia ν 3 ΄ 1 ἁμαρτωλῷ μετανοοῦντι ἢ ἐπὶ ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα δικαίοις οἵτινες οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν μετανοίας. , δ ΄ J Nga 8 Ἢ tis γυνὴ δραχμὰς ἔχουσα δέκα, ἐὰν ἀπολέσῃ δραχμὴν μίαν, οὐχὶ ἅπτει a , a = « “ “ κ᾿ ε 9 λύχνον καὶ σαροῖ τὴν οἰκίαν καὶ ζητεῖ ἐπιμελῶς ἕως ὅτου εὕρῃ; καὶ εὑροῦσα an , , , a a ἐν συνκαλεῖ τὰς φίλας καὶ τὰς γείτονας λέγουσα: συνχάρητέ μοι, ὅτι εὗρον τὴν a τ a / Near ae. na 3 / 10 δραχμὴν ἣν ἀπώλεσα. οὕτως, λέγω ὑμῖν, γίνεται χαρὰ ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων TOD θεοῦ ἐπὶ ἑνὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ μετανοοῦντι. > , »” / Ss , ε , Ν > c / E ek a! ~ 11 12 Εἶπεν δέ: ἀνθρωπός τις εἶχεν δύο υἱούς. καὶ εἶπεν ὃ νεώτερος αὐτῶν τῷ ΄ ΄ ΄ ys , ΄ a ly . Qa Pine. ‘ πατρί: πάτερ, δός μοι TO ἐπιβάλλον μέρος τῆς οὐσίας. καὶ διεῖλεν αὐτοῖς τὸν ΄ Ν ΩΣ 3 Ν « / Ἂς Ld ε ΟΣ εν > ὃ , 13 βίον. καὶ per’ od πολλὰς ἡμέρας συναγαγὼν ἅπαντα ὁ νεώτερος υἱὸς ἀπεδήμη- »-“" / Ν 3 / 3 “ “ > ΓΑ 14 σεν εἰς χώραν μακράν, καὶ ἐκεῖ διεσκόρπισεν τὴν οὐσίαν αὐτοῦ ζῶν ἀσώτως. δα- A \ \ N \ , wee κ᾿ πανήσαντος δὲ αὐτοῦ πάντα ἐγένετο λιμὸς ἰσχυρὰ κατὰ τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην, καὶ Seen ae ed ε a Ν 6 \ 3 λλ 0 aN las Di a rn , 15 αὐτὸς ἡρξατο ὑστερεῖσθαι. καὶ πορεύυθεις ἐκολληθη ἐνὶ τῶν πολίτων τὴς χωρας AY > cal , , Ν > ’ 16 ἐκείνης, καὶ ἔπεμψεν αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς ἀγροὺς αὐτοῦ βόσκειν χοίρους - καὶ ἐπεθύ- A a 4 Ὁ δ ε Lal Ν 9 Ἂν μει γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν κερατίων ὧν ἤσθιον οἱ χοῖροι, καὶ οὐδεὶς A ΄ A ΄ , 17 ἐδίδου αὐτῷ. εἰς ἑαυτὸν δὲ ἐλθὼν ἔφη - πόσοι μίσθιοι τοῦ πατρός μου περισσεύ- « ana & ’ὔ Ν “ Ν Ν 18 ουσιν ἄρτων - ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ὧδε ἀπόλλυμαι. ἀναστὰς πορεύσομαι πρὸς τὸν πα- tal cal Ν 3 ἮΝ Ν > , Ψ τέρα μου καὶ ἐρῶ αὐτῷ- πάτερ, ἥμαρτον εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου, a 4 ’ ε [2 n , 19 ' οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι vids σου: ποίησόν pe ὡς ἕνα TOV μισθίων σου. a μ᾿ Ν 3 Le) Ἂς > , 20 καὶ ἀναστὰς ἦλθεν πρὸς τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ. ἔτι δὲ αὐτοῦ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος S yess c Ν 3 a Wa) ’, θ δ ὃ Ν > 4 SPN Ν , εἶδεν αὐτὸν ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ Kal ἐσπλαγχνίσθη, καὶ δραμὼν ἐπέπεσεν ἐπὶ TOV τρά- 3 a“ Ν 3 , > δὲ 3 ~ ε ἘΠ Ξ , ν » 21 χῆλον αὐτου και κατεφίλησεν QUTOV. εἰπεν ὃε AUTW O VLOS* πάτερ, ἡμᾶρτον εἰς Le. 14:82. τὰ πρὸς 8° A D 1, West.mg.; 16 yeuloa τὴν κοιλίαν αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ A cop om τὰ &* West.txt.; eis Β West.mg. West.mg. Rev. (Am.txt.); χορτασθῆναι ἐκ Le. 15:12. καὶ sc S* D it vg syrr; 63 δὲ Β Ὁ 1, Treg.mg. West.txt. Rev. (Am. sc A B cop Treg. West. Rev. mg.) §§ 98, 99.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 118 LUKE Xv. ‘ 3 ‘ Ν ,’ὔ i A 22 τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου, οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι vids Gov. εἶπεν δὲ ὁ WN Ν Ν ΄ὔ a - πατὴρ πρὸς τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ ἐξενέγκατε στολὴν τὴν πρώτην καὶ ἐνδύσατε 23 πον AN ὃ , ὃ av > Ν lal > a NP ὃ ΄ > Ν , αὐτὸν, Kal δοτε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ Kai ὑποδήματα εἰς τοὺς πόδας, Ν , Ν 4 Ἂς “ cy 23 24 Ἷ καὶ φέρετε τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτὸν, θύσατε, καὶ φαγόντες εὐφρανθῶμεν, | ὅτι Ό ε ΄ \ > ς > οὗτος ὃ υἱός μου νεκρὸς ἢν καὶ ἀνέζησεν, ἣν ἀπολωλὼς Kal εὑρέθη. Kal ἤρ- 25 ἕαντο εὐφραίνεσθαι. ἣν δὲ 6 υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ὃ πρεσβύτερος ἐν ἀγρῷ" καὶ ὡς ἐ ρ Ly; ρεσβύτερος ἐν ἀγρῷ" καὶ ὡς ép- , " a 27, » \ κ \ 26 χόμενος ἤγγισεν TH οἰκίᾳ, ἤκουσεν συμφωνίας καὶ χορῶν, ' Kal προσκαλεσάμενος g a LN > / ’,ὔ 3, a ε Ν > SAE, ε 39 , 27 ἕνα τῶν παίδων ἐπυνθάνετο τί εἴη ταῦτα. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὅτι ὃ ἀδελφός σου 4 ἐν 3, μι ΄ Ν / © ἥκει, καὶ ἔθυσεν ὃ πατήρ σου τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτόν, ὅτι ὑγιαίνοντα αὐτὸν 393. Δ \ + a a i 28 ἀπέλαβεν. ὠργίσθη δὲ Kat οὐκ ἤθελεν εἰσελθεῖν - ὁ δὲ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ἐξελθὼν πα- 99 aN wee, ε δὲ 3 6 X i.) a Bee io \ a ” ὃ ΄ ρεκάλει αὐτόν. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν τῷ πατρί: ἰδοὺ τοσαῦτα ἔτη δουλεύω σοι Ν / a καὶ οὐδέποτε ἐντολήν σου παρῆλθον, Kal ἐμοὶ οὐδέποτε ἔδωκας ἔριφον ἵνα μετὰ a , 7 , a 30 τῶν φίλων pov εὐφρανθῶ- ὅτε δὲ ὃ vids σου οὗτος 6 καταφαγών σου τὸν βίον Ν᾿ a a 3 3 a ἣν ‘ , ε Ν > > a Ἢ 31 μετὰ πορνῶν ἦλθεν, ἔθυσας αὐτῷ τὸν σιτευτὸν μόσχον. 6 δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - τέ- XN Δ “ὦ a > Ν 3 Ν BEEN “5 ! 3 a Ν 32 κνον, σὺ πάντοτε μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ εἶ, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐμὰ σά ἐστιν" | εὐφρανθῆναι δὲ Ἂ a μ᾿ Φ εν 19 , @ ‘ -- Ἀ Ψ 3 Ν Ν καὶ χαρῆναι ἔδει, ὅτι ὃ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος νεκρὸς ἣν καὶ ἔζησεν, ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη. § 99. Parable of the Unjust Steward. — Perea. Lune XcVis 1-16. » : ΄ > , Ae , 1 Ἔλεγεν δὲ καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς - ἄνθρωπός τις ἣν πλούσιος Os εἶχεν οἰκονό- 2 μον, καὶ οὗτος διεβλήθη αὐτῷ ὡς διασκορπίζων τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ. Kal φωνή- μον, 199 : ρ PX . ) aN Φ » a ͵ὔ a 5 ,ὔ \ a > ὃ Ν ἣν ΄,ὕ a > σας αὐτὸν εἶπεν αὐτῷ - τί τοῦτο ἀκούω περὶ σοῦ; ἀπόδος τὸν λόγον τῆς οἰκονο- 8 μί - ov γὰρ δύνῃ ἔ ἰ t trev δὲ ἐν ἑαυτῷ ὁ οἰκονό > τί μίας σου" οὐ γὰρ δύνῃ ἔτι οἰκονομεῖν. εἶπεν ἑαυτῷ οἰκονόμος " τί , Lal A , 5 ’ Lal ποιήσω, OTL ὃ κύριός μου ἀφαιρεῖται τὴν οἰκονομίαν ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ; σκάπτειν οὐκ = , , 9 “ A aA 4 ἰσχύω, ἐπαιτεῖν αἰσχύνομαι. ἔγνων τί ποιήσω, ἵνα ὅταν μετασταθῶ τῆς οἰκονο- ,ὔ ’,ὔ \ ἴω \ U o 5 pias δέξωνταί pe εἰς τοὺς οἴκους ἑαυτῶν. Kal προσκαλεσάμενος Eva ἕκαστον A σε A ΄ ε δ ὦ A , , 9 ΄ A ͵΄ τῶν χρεοφειλετῶν τοῦ κυρίου ἑαυτοῦ ἔλεγεν τῷ πρώτῳ πόσον ὀφείλεις τῷ κυρίῳ E | ε δὲ > ἂ ε Ν , 2). 4 ε δὲ > > Aire δέέ \ , 6 pov; ' ὃ δὲ εἶπεν - ἑκατὸν βάτους ἐλαίου. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - δέξαι Tov τὰ γράμ- Ν , pee , > Ν Ψ 7 ματα καὶ καθίσας ταχέως γράψον πεντήκοντα. ἔπειτα ἑτέρῳ εἶπεν " σὺ δὲ πόσον 9 ,ὔ ε δὲ Αι. ε Ν , , , > ral 8 ed Ν , ὀφείλεις ; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν - ἑκατὸν κόρους σίτου. λέγει αὐτῷ - δέξαι σου τὰ γράμ- Ν / 3 ἊΝ / \ ΕἸ ’ ε , ΩΝ > / lal 5 ,ὔ 8 ματα καὶ γράψον ὀγδοήκοντα. καὶ ἐπήνεσεν ὃ κύριος τὸν οἰκονόμον τῆς ἀδικίας, cd Ν Lal -“ 4 Ν Ν ὅτι φρονίμως ἐποίησεν - OTL οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου φρονιμώτεροι ὑπὲρ: τοὺς Ν Ν an υἱοὺς τοῦ φωτὸς εἰς τὴν γενεὰν τὴν ἑαυτῶν εἰσίν. Ὁ 4 Ν δ΄ λέ ε “ ᾽’ ’, Ἂν Lal lal “A 10 - 9 Kat ἐγὼ ὑμῖν λέγω, ἑαυτοῖς ποιήσατε φίλους ἐκ τοῦ μαμωνᾷ τῆς ἀδικίας, ἵνα φ > / se ε a“ > Ν 5 / ΄ ε \ > > , 10 ὅταν ἐκλίπῃ δέξωνται ὑμᾶς εἰς τὰς αἰωνίους σκηνάς. 6 πιστὸς ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ Kal n ’ Ν - ’ 11 ἐν πολλῷ πιστός ἐστιν, καὶ ὃ ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ ἄδικος καὶ ἐν πολλῷ ἀδικός ἐστιν. εἶ > > a 3907 a Ν 3 > / Np, ‘\ ,ὕ ea , οὖν ἐν τῷ ἀδίκῳ μαμωνᾷ πιστοὶ οὐκ ἐγένεσθε, τὸ ἀληθινὸν τίς ὑμῖν πιστεύσει ; A ψ, 15 “a > ’ὔ Ν > 5 , 0 τ. id iD. ὃ ’ δε σα Ξ ! > 12 13 καὶ εἰ ἐν TH ἀλλοτρίῳ πιστοι οὐκ ἐγένεσθε, τὸ ὑμετερον TLS OWTEL ὑμῖν; | οὐ- Le. 15:21. υἱός σου AL it vg cop; add 82 ἀπολωλὼς δὰ D it vg cop; pm καὶ A B ποίησόν pe ὡς ἕνα τῶν μισθίων σου δὰ B 1) 1, syrr Treg. West. Rev. [West.] Rey.mg. 22 ἐξενέγκατε A; Le. 16:12. ὑμέτερον 8 A D vg eop syrr pm ταχὺ (-χέως D) SBD L it vg cop West.mg.; ἡμέτερον B 1, West.txt. Rev.mg. [Treg.] West. Rey. 8 114 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES | [Parr VI. LUKE XVI. \ , ΄ Bal δεὶς οἰκέτης δύναται δυσὶ κυρίοις δουλεύειν: ἢ γὰρ τὸν ἕνα μισήσει καὶ τὸν μ᾿ > ΄ τ ἢ θυ 3 , \ OP Teo , > ΄ ἕτερον ἀγαπήσει, ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει. οὐ δύνασθε θεῷ δουλεύειν καὶ μαμωνᾷ. § 100. The Pharisees reproved. Parable of the Rich Man and Lazarus. — 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 Perea. Luxe XVI. 14-81. » Ξ , A Hxovov δὲ ταῦτα πάντα οἱ Φαρισαῖοι φιλάργυροι ὑπάρχοντες, καὶ ἐξεμυκτή- ριζον αὐτόν. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ οἱ δικαιοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς ἐνώπιον τῶν 5 ΄ ε Ν Ν ’ὔ Ν ’, ε cal 7 x 9 9 , ε Ν ἀνθρώπων, ὁ δὲ θεὸς γινώσκει τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν - ὅτι τὸ ἐν ἀνθρώποις ὑψηλὸν ΄ pie. a a ε ih, x ε a , > / ΕΣ ΄ βδέλυγμα ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ. 6 νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται μέχρι Ἰωάννου: ἀπὸ τότε ε Ν ΓΑ A 6 a3 λῇ \ A > ON , 9 , , ασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ εὐαγγελίζεται καὶ πᾶς εἰς αὐτὴν βιάζεται. εὐκοπώτερον δέ Y “fh ἐστιν τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ THY γῆν παρελθεῖν ἢ TOD νόμου μίαν κεραίαν πεσεῖν. πᾶς ἣν γῆν παρ ἢ μου μίαν κερ ε , Ν cal a “ ὃ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ καὶ γαμῶν ἑτέραν μοιχεύει, καὶ ὃ ἀπολελυμένην ἀπὸ ἀνδρὸς γαμῶν μοιχεύει. » > Ανθρωπος δέ τις ἣν πλούσιος, Kal ἐνεδιδύσκετο πορφύραν καὶ βύσσον εὐφραι- ’ rn νόμενος καθ᾽ ἡμέραν λαμπρῶς. πτωχὸς δέ Tis ἦν ὀνόματι Λάζαρος ἐβέβλητο πρὸς τὸν πυλῶνα αὐτοῦ εἱλκωμένος |! καὶ ἐπιθυμῶν χορτασθῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν πιπτόν- 5 Ν A le? lal 2 > ‘\ Ἂν c , > / > / Ἂς των ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης τοῦ πλουσίου: ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ κύνες ἐρχόμενοι ἐπέλειχον τὰ “ 3 a ΒΥ, Uy: δὲ > 6 a Ν \ A 67 3) aN fe. a ἕλκη αὐτοῦ. ἐγένετο δὲ ἀποθανεῖν τὸν πτωχὸν Kal ἀπενεχθῆναι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἰς τὸν κόλπον ᾿Αβραάμ" ἀπέθανεν δὲ καὶ ὃ πλούσιος καὶ ἐτάφη. “ A a? καὶ ἐν τῷ ἅδῃ ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ, ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις, ὁρᾷ ᾿Αβραὰμ ἣν A 40 Ἂς / > Lal ON > lal A 3.2% , > > ἀπὸ μακρόθεν καὶ Λάζαρον ἐν τοῖς κόλποις αὐτοῦ. Kai αὐτὸς φωνήσας εἶπεν ,’ πάτερ ᾿Αβραάμ, ἐλέησόν με καὶ πέμψον Λάζαρον ἵνα βάψῃ τὸ ἄκρον τοῦ δακτύ- 9 a ὮΝ \ yo N NG , “ 55 a > A Νὴ ν λου αὐτοῦ ὕδατος καὶ καταψύξῃ τὴν γλῶσσάν μου, ὅτι ὀδυνῶμαι ἐν τῇ φλογὶ , 7 , \ Wot , ταύτῃ. εἶπεν δὲ ABpaap: τέκνον, μνήσθητι ὅτι ἀπέλαβες σὺ τὰ ἀγαθά σου ἐν ὡς - fal ‘ Ν 3 τῇ ζωῇ σου, καὶ Λάζαρος ὁμοίως τὰ κακά νῦν δὲ ὧδε παρακαλεῖται, σὺ δὲ ὀδυ- a a “Ὁ eae 3 a , / 2 / vaca. καὶ ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις μεταξὺ ἡμῶν καὶ ὑμῶν χάσμα μέγα ἐστήρικται, a a Ν Ῥ ΑΝ ει La) Ν ὅπως οἱ θέλοντες διαβῆναι ἔνθεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς μὴ δύνωνται, μηδὲ οἱ ἐκεῖθεν πρὸς Ἂ rn 5 ,ὕ “ , δ᾽» Ἂς 5» Ν s ἡμᾶς διαπερῶσιν. εἶπεν δέ: ἐρωτῶ οὖν σε, πάτερ, ἵνα πέμψῃς αὐτὸν εἰς TOV οἷ- “ 4 bid , > “ σ κον τοῦ πατρός pou: | ἔχω γὰρ πέντε ἀδελφούς - ὅπως διαμαρτύρηται αὐτοῖς, ἵνα ͵, a a ,ὔ / ef) , μὴ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔλθωσιν eis τὸν τόπον τοῦτον τῆς βασάνου. λέγει δὲ ᾿Αβραάμ." ,ὔ 3 a c Ἂν 5 3 , ἔχουσι Μωῦσέα καὶ τοὺς προφήτας: ἀκουσάτωσαν αὐτῶν. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν - οὐχί, nr a“ Ν 3 4 ’ πάτερ ᾿Αβραάμ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐάν τις ἀπὸ νεκρῶν πορευθῇ πρὸς αὐτούς, μετανοήσουσιν. a + a > 3 ΄ 2Qr 27 3 εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ - εἰ Mwicéws καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδὲ ἐάν τις ἐκ lal Lal , νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ πεισθήσονται. 8 101. Jesus inculeates Forbearance, Faith, Humility. — Perea. Luxe XVII. 1-10. 3 Ν Ν Ν Ν > cal 3 ’ , > lal Ν / ὃ Ἂ, ‘ Ns Εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστιν τοῦ TA σκάνδαλα μὴ € n -. ΓΞ Ν Ν θεῖν, οὐαὶ δὲ δι’ οὗ ἔρχεται" λυσιτελεῖ αὐτῷ εἰ λίθος μυλικὸς περίκειται περὶ τὸν Le. 16:26. οἱ ἐκεῖθεν SC AL; omoi S* B Le. 17:1. οὐαὶ δὲ A vg Treg.mg.; πλὴν D West. Rey. οὐαὶ δὰ B D Lcop Treg.txt. West. Rev. §§ 100-102.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 115 20 21 LUKE XVII. , ier \ woe 9 N 6 ὯΝ A ὃ χὰ A = τράχηλον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἔῤῥιπται εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἢ ἵνα σκανδαλίσῃ τῶν μικρῶν / ov ! fe ε ral 2X ε , Γ la 5» vA 3 A τούτων eva. | προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς. ἐὰν ἁμάρτῃ ὃ ἀδελφός σου, ἐπιτίμησον αὐτῷ, τ /, + > fel 3) οἷν ε / A ε ᾽ὔ ε / > Ν καὶ ἐὰν μετανοήσῃ, ἄφες αὐτῷ. καὶ ἐὰν ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας ἁμαρτήσῃ εἰς σὲ Ne , > , ΄, , ὃ lat > ΄ Sian ἐν καὶ ἑπτάκις ἐπιστρέψῃ πρός σε λέγων - μετανοῶ, ἀφήσεις αὐτῷ. \ 3 (ek) /, a / / «ε a / L 3 Ne ’ 6 Kai εἶπαν οἱ ἀπόστολοι τῷ κυρίῳ: πρόσθες ἡμῖν πίστιν. εἶπεν δὲ ὃ κύριος " ΓΑΕ , ε ΄ ΄ 3 4 Ἂ a ͵ , 3 oe εἰ εἴχετε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, ἐλέγετε ἂν TH συκαμίνῳ ταύτῃ" ἐκριζώ- Ν ’ > lal / Ν ε ΄ὔ a «ε A / Ν > «ες A θητι καὶ φυτεύθητι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ, καὶ ὑπήκουσεν ἂν ὑμῖν. Tis δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν a ” 3 lat vx / a 3 , > δ 9 A > ΄“ > δοῦλον ἔχων ἀροτριῶντα ἢ ποιμαίνοντα, ὃς εἰσελθόντι ἐκ τοῦ ἀγροῦ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ ὺθ ΄ λθὰ 3 / 5 ! ἀλλ᾽ ΘΝ 5 a > cates ε , / ὃ , \ εὐθέως παρελθὼν ἀνάπεσε; οὐχὶ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ - ἑτοίμασον τί δειπνήσω, καὶ περιζωσάμενος διακόνει μοι ἕως φάγω καὶ πίω, καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα φάγεσαι καὶ πίε- 10 I; py € t 5 δούλῳ ὅτι ἐποίησεν τὰ διαταχθέντα ; οὔ ὶ σαι σύ; μὴ ἔχει χάριν τῷ δούλῳ σεν τὰ χθέντα; οὕτως καὶ ε a“ μὴ a / Ν ὃ θέ ea re 4 ὃ vA > na ¢ ὑμεῖς, ὅταν ποιήσητε πάντα τὰ διαταχθέντα ὑμῖν, λέγετε ὅτι δοῦλοι ἀχρεῖοί a an ἐσμεν, ὃ ὠφείλομεν ποιῆσαι πεποιήκαμεν. § 102. Christ’s Coming will be Sudden. — Perea. Luxe XVII. 20-37. > ἣν “ a -“ Ἑπερωτηθεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων πότε ἔρχεται ἣ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, a > a A ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς καὶ εἶπεν - οὐκ ἔρχεται ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ μετὰ παρατηρήσεως, ! οὐδὲ ἐροῦσιν: ἰδοὺ ὧδε ἢ ἐκεῖ: ἰδοὺ γὰρ ἡ ΄, ἢ θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶ οὐδὲ ἐροῦσιν - ἰδοὺ ὧδε ἢ ἐκεῖ - ἰδοὺ γὰρ ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν , ἐστίν. 53. δὲ \ Ν 6 , 2 ΄ ε / 7 3 θ ’, ’ a Εἶπεν δὲ zpos τοὺς μαθητάς - ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι ὅτε ἐπιθυμήσετε μίαν τῶν ε a a Cafes aA > ΄ὔ 5» aA Ν 3 +” Ἄ} 9 lel en > Nb us) a ἡμερῶν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἰδεῖν, Kal οὐκ ὄψεσθε. καὶ ἐροῦσιν ὑμῖν - ἰδοὺ ἐκεῖ, ites 3 Ν ΄ - ἰδοὺ ὧδε: μὴ ἀπέλθητε μηδὲ διώξητε. ὥσπερ γὰρ ἣ ἀστραπὴ ἣ ἀστράπτουσα ΕἸ fo ε Ν \ > Ν > Ν GF} 5 AY / 4 4 ε εν A 3 ἐκ τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν εἰς τὴν ὑπ᾽ οὐρανὸν λάμπει, οὕτως ἔσται ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- 6 ,ὕ > A ε , 3 A lol δὲ ὃ fal WAL ἣν a Ν > ρώπου ἐν TH ἡμέρᾳ αὐτοῦ. πρῶτον δὲ δεῖ αὐτὸν πολλὰ παθεῖν καὶ ἀποδοκι- a > Ν Ν A , Ν lal a μασθῆναι ἀπὸ τὴς γενεᾶς ταύτης. Kal καθὼς ἐγένετο ἐν Tals ἡμέραις Νῶε, οὕτως δ Res r ε , cal cn “ > 72 » y ἔσται καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου - ἤσθιον, ἔπινον, ἐγάμουν, ἐγα- ΄, ΝΜ ἣν ε ΄ὔ a a μίζοντο, ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας εἰσῆλθεν Νῶε εἰς τὴν κιβωτόν, καὶ ἦλθεν ὃ κατακλυ- Ν vo) ὯΝ LA b ε ΄ Ν pes? > a ε , ’ σμὸς καὶ ἀπώλεσεν ἅπαντας." ὁμοίως καθὼς ἐγένετο ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Aor: ” ” Se oS ear pe > ΄ Φὸ ΧΟ ἡ οὐ Τὴ 58 5 es ἔπινον, Ἤ OY, πο Sony: φκοδόμουν- ἣ δὲ ἡμέρᾳ ἐξῆλθεν Λὼτ ἀπὸ Σοδόμων, ἔβρεξεν πῦρ καὶ θεῖον ax’ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἀπώλεσεν ἅπαντας." 31 Ν Ν πες € e¢ , ε εν a > , 3 ΄ > 2 ie κατὰ τὰ αὑτὰ ETTAL ἢ ἡμέρᾳ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται. ἐν ἐκείνῃ a ¢ / a μὴ IN a / Ν a a TH ἡμέρᾳ ὃς ἔσται ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος Kal τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ, μὴ κατα- , > ry? Ny αὐ ts > ne , \ βάτω ἄραι αὐτά, καὶ ὁ ἐν ἀγρῷ ὁμοίως μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω eis τὰ ὀπίσω. μνημο- , a Ν Δ ΄ ᾷ μὲ 3N ΄ Ν Ν 3 a , > νεύετε τῆς γυναικὸς Λώτ.“ ὃς ἐὰν ζητήσῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ περιποιήσασθαι, ἀπο- , > é. ν ἃ ΒΝ > 7 / [3 Cal λέσει αὐτήν, καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ἀπολέσῃ, ζωογονήσει αὐτήν. λέγω ὑμῖν, ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ Ε ΄ TN i a c - ἔσονται δύο ἐπὶ κλίνης μιᾶς, ὁ εἷς παραλημφθήσεται καὶ ὃ ἕτερος ἀφεθήσεται. » , > / > N Ν aes er / , ε Ν 4 , ἔσονται δύο ἀλήθουσαι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, ἡ pia παραλημφθήσεται, ἡ δὲ ἑτέρα ἀφεθή- σεται. καὶ ἀποκριθέντες λέγουσιν αὐτῷ " ποῦ, κύριε; ὃ δὲ εἶ ὑτοῖς - ὅ : ρ γουσιν αὑτῷ : ποῦ, κύριε; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ὅπου Ν A TO σῶμα, ἐκεῖ καὶ ot ἀετοὶ ἐπισυναχθήσονται. 8 4, Comp. Lev. 19: 17,..8. ἢ 97. Gen. 7: 4,7. © 99, Gen. 19: 15 sq. 4 82. Gen. 19: 26. Le. 17:24. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ αὐτοῦ NA Lvg ἐν τῷ (om D) ἀγρῷ - 6 (om D UV) εἷς Tapas cop syrr West.mg.; om B D [Treg.mg.] ληφθήσεται καὶ 5 ἕτερος ἀφεθήσεται D U vg West.txt. Rev.mg. 36 hune versum_ Rey.mg. om δὲ A B L cop; add δύο ἔσονται (om D vg) 116 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. § 103. Parables: The Importunate Widow. The Pharisee and Publican. — Perea. Luxe XVIII. 1-14. Ἔλεγεν δὲ παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὸ δεῖν πάντοτε προσεύχεσθαι αὐτοὺς Kal Siege) o i] ΄ ΄ 7 Sy Δ Ν θ ἊΝ Ν »Ἥ Ν μὴ ἐνκακεῖν, ' λέγων - κριτῆς τις ἣν ἐν τινι πόλει τὸν θεὸν μὴ φοβούμενος καὶ ἄνθρωπον μὴ ἐντρεπόμενος. χήρα δὲ ἣν ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ, καὶ ἤρχετο πρὸς αὖ- A / > / / 5 Ν cal > 4 Ἂς > 3) BFK ’ τὸν λέγουσα: ἐκδίκησόν με ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου pov. καὶ οὐκ ἤθελεν ἐπὶ χρό- me 09 DO " Ν Ν - ΠΣ 3 ε ἊΝ > Ν Ν \ > a SQN νον " μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα εἶπεν ἐν ἑαυτῷ " εἰ καὶ τὸν θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον / Ν , / 5 ἐντρέπομαι, ' dud ye TO παρέχειν μοι κόπον τὴν χήραν ταύτην, ἐκδικήσω αὐτήν, 6 ἵνα μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζη ἵπεν δὲ ὃ κύριος: ἀκούσατε τί ὃ κρι- ἵνα μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζῃ με. εἶπεν δὲ ὃ κύριος - ἀκούσατε τί ὃ KP Ἂν Lal 5 , / ε Ν Ν 3 ‘\ , ἊΝ > Yd nw 5 -“ 7 τὴς τῆς ἀδικίας λέγει: 6 δὲ θεὸς οὐ μὴ ποιήσῃ τὴν ἐκδίκησιν τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν cal na tal / Ν x tal lal 8 αὐτοῦ τῶν βοώντων αὐτῷ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός, καὶ μακροθυμεῖ ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς; λέγω ἘΠΡ σον μη ΄ Ν 2 Q7 3 A > 4 ἐς ε εν a 3 , 3 ὑμῖν ὅτι ποιήσει τὴν ἐκδίκησιν αὐτῶν ἐν τάχει. πλὴν ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐλ- 5 , ἴω Lal θὼν dpa εὑρήσει τὴν πίστιν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ; 3 Ν Ν / \ ΄ 3.5. Ὁ ων Bi oN "4 Ν 9 Hizey δὲ καὶ πρός τινας τοὺς πεποιθότας ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῖς ὅτι εἰσὶν δίκαιοι καὶ 10 ἐξουθενοῦντας τοὺς λοιποὺς τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην. ἄνθρωποι δύο ἀνέβησαν 5 ALE Ν ΄ ε Ἂν lal Nee σον ΄ ε al 11 εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν προσεύξασθαι, ὃ εἷς Φαρισαῖος καὶ 6 ἕτερος τελώνης. ὃ Φαρισαῖος lal / “-“ “ pn τς σταθεὶς ταῦτα προςηύχετο - ὃ θεός, εὐχαριστῶ σοι ὅτι οὐκ εἰμὶ ὥσπερ οἱ λοιποὶ a 5 , “ +” 7, oN ‘ ε e ε fe , ‘ 12 των ἀνθρώπων, ἄρπαγες, ἄδικοι, μοιχοί, ἢ και ὡς OUTOS ὁ τελώνης " νηστεύω δὶς ἴω ,ὔ 3 ΄ ΄, Ld lat ε Ν ΄ td ε ‘ 13 τοῦ σαββάτου, ἀποδεκατεύω πάντα ὅσα κτῶμαι. ὃ δὲ τελώνης μακρόθεν ἑστὼς N ἈΝ cal nan οὐκ ἤθελεν οὐδὲ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἐπᾶραι εἰς TOV οὐρανὸν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔτυπτεν TO στῆθος > a 4 ε / ε / / a ε ~ ld Cee / τ 14 αὐτοῦ λέγων - ὁ θεός, ἱλάσθητί μοι τῷ ἁμαρτωλῷ. λέγω ὑμῖν, κατέβη οὗτος 3 Ὁ al “- an Ν δεδικαιωμένος εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ ἢ γὰρ ἐκεῖνος - ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ὑψῶν ἑαυτὸν ταπει- / ε XN lal ε Ν c 6 / νωθήσεται, oO δὲ ταπείνων εαὐτὸν vw YOETAL. § 104. Precepts respecting Divorce. — Perea. MaTr. XIX. 3-12. Mark IX. 2125 lal “ r ἣν / lal 8 Καὶ προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 2 ἱΚαὶπροσελθόντες οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἐπη- 4 aN Ν λέ > , ak 5 WE 5 ὃ Ν “-“ πειράζοντες αὐτὸν καὶ λέγοντες " εἰ ρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γυναῖκα We > Lot Ν a“ > ial > AD / > / ε δὲ ἔξεστιν ἀπολῦσαι τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 3 ἀπολῦσαι, πειράζοντες αὐτόν. ὃ δὲ A > a] ἔν τ. κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν; ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τί ὑμῖν ἐνε- or “ > ᾿ς 4 τειλατο Mwiions; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν - ἐπέ- τρεψεν Μωῦσῆς βιβλίον ἀποστασίου a a ce bie fal ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς δ γράψαι και ἀπολῦσαι." ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς 5 -“ Ν Ἂν [2 εἶπεν: οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ὅτι 6 ποιήσας εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν tet ιν Ὁ Led » Ν OnX 3 ’ὔ emia ” ε oe \ 3 Ar , ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν ὑμῶν ἔγραψεν ὑμῖν τὴν ἐντολὴν ταύ- 1.4, Deut. 24:1. Te. 18:11. ταῦτα S*; pm πρὸς (καθ᾽ D) Mc. 10:2. of Φαρισαῖοι δὰ C; omoi AB ἑαυτὸν A D syrr Treg.mg. West.mg.; add LA Treg. West. Rev. πρὸς ἑαυτὸν (αὐτὸν L) δὲς B L vg Treg.txt. Mt. 19:38. οἱ Φαρισαῖοι δὰ D Rev.mg. ; om West.txt. Rev. 14 ἢ yap ἐκεῖνος AA οἱ BC Lop Treg. West. Revy.txt. Treg.mg. ; map’ (pm μάλλον D) ἐκεῖνον 8 B 4 ποιήσας δὰ C D Z it vg; κτίσας Β 88 L cop Treg.txt. West. Treg. West. Rev.mg. Se §§ 103-105.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S MATT. XIX. ee ἴ ν 9 “ 4 5 αὐὑτους ; καὶ €lTEV* ἐνεκα τοῦυ- του καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος Ν τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα ‘\ ΄ὔ “ καὶ κολληθήσεται τῇ γυναι- 4 3 a \ of ε ΄ κὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο b “ 6 εἰς σάρκα μίαν." ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο ἀλλὰ σὰρξ pia. ὃ οὖν ὁ θεὸς συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωρι- / 7 ζέτω. σῆς ἐνετείλατο δοῦναι βιβλίον ἀπο- λέγουσιν αὐτῷ: τί οὖν Μωὺ- 8 στασίου καὶ ἀπολῦσαι; λέγει αὐ- “- Ψ “ a XN Ν tos: ὅτι Μωῦσῆς πρὸς τὴν σκληρο- / ε cal > 4 {So} > “ καρδίαν ὑμῶν ἐπέτρεψεν ὑμῖν ἀπολῦ- ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν σαι τὰς γυναῖκας ὑμῶν. 9 δὲ οὐ γέγονεν οὕτως. Ψ aA xv > , Ν lol > an ὅτι Os ἂν ἀπολύσῃ. τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ AN > Ν , A / » μὴ ἐπὶ πορνείᾳ καὶ γαμήσῃ ἄλλην, μοιχᾶται. 10 Λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ - εἰ ov- 11 12 “ “ “ e / εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ov πάντες χωροῦσιν τὸν λόγον τοῦτον, GAN οἷς δέδοται. ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 117 MARK X. > Ν Ν 5 Lal 4 »” 6 την. ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἄρσεν \ iol > 4 > ‘\ a καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτοὺς: 7 ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλειψει \ / nan ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ / cal 8 kal τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ, Kal δύο / Ν , ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο ἀλλὰ / ἔσονται ot eis σάρκα Bay εν μίαν, > / 9 μία σάρξ. ὃ οὖν ὃ θεὸς συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω. ‘ Ν 10 καὶ εἰς τὴν Cats , ε Ν Ν , οἰκίαν πάλιν OL μαθηταὶ περὶ τούτον 5 ,ὔ > /, \ / > a 11 ἐπηρώτων αὑτὸν. Kal λέγει QUTOLS * ἃ Ἃ 3 ΄ Ν “ > a ὃς ἂν ἀπολύσῃ τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ A / δ΄ ἴω =) > > καὶ yapnon ἄλλην, μοιχᾶται ἐπ᾽ av= 12 ΄ Ν Ν ΒΑ > 4 Ν τήν. καὶ ἐὰν αὐτὴ ἀπολύσασα τὸν ἄνδρα αὐτῆς γαμήσῃ ἄλλον, μοιχᾶται. > Ἂς ε ΒΟΥ δ᾽ ἴοι / Ν fol / > / “ ec δὲ τως ἐστὶν ἣ αἰτία τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μετὰ τῆς γυναικός, ov συμφέρει γαμῆσαι. ὃ δὲ 5... εισιν Lal Ly, ἊΝ Ν a γὰρ εὐνοῦχοι οἵτινες ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς ἐγεννήθησαν οὕτως, καὶ εἰσὶν εὐνοῦχοι σ΄ 3 if eee N la) > , \ IN > a 7 3 ΄ OLTLVES εὐνουχίσθησαν UTO τῶν ἀνθρώπων, και ELOLV εὐυνουχοὶ OLTLVES EVVOUXLO AV ε Ἀ ἣν ἣν ,’ aA > a ε / a “: ἑαυτοὺς διὰ τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. ὁ δυνάμενος χωρεῖν χωρείτω. 8 105. Jesus receives and blesses Little Children. — Perea. IAG NOX. 13—15. Mark X. 13-16. Luxe XVIII. 15-17. ΄ ΄ \ ΄ > , κ A 18 Tore προσηνέχθησαν 18 Καὶ προσέφερον αὖ 15 Προσέφερον δὲ αὐτῷ 4: ἊΝ δί -΄ Ν fal δέ Ree ως \ Ν / μά > αὐτῷ παιδία, ἵνα τὰς τῷ παιδία ἵνα ἅψηται καὶ τὰ βρέφη ἵνα av- “- a > “ “ Ἀ a . ’, χεῖρας ἐπιθῇ αὐτοῖς αὐτῶν " οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τῶν ἅπτηται: ἰδόντες Ν , ε 3 / a / Ν ε Avis) ΄ καὶ προσεύξηται" ob ἐπετίμων τοῖς προσφέ- δὲ οἱ μαθηταὶ ἐπετίμων Ἢ \ , - > A δὲ μαθηταὶ ἐπετίμησαν 14 povow. ἰδὼν δὲ ὁ Ἴη- 16 αὐτοῖς. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς 14 3 a ε δὲ Ἴ -“ a > , \ ΄, 2X αὐτοῖς. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς σοὺς ἠγανάκτησεν καὶ προσεκαλέσατο αὐτὰ > cy ee αν ‘ > 3 a ” Ny ΄, " κ᾿ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἄφετε τὰ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἄφετε τὰ λέγων: ἄφετε τὰ παι- 8. 4 etc. Gen. 1: 27. > 5 ete. Gen. 2: 24. ¢ 7, Deut. 24: 1. Mc. 10:7. αὐτοῦ sc (ἕαυτ. D) δὲ D cop; om ABCLA vg Treg. West. | sine add 8 B [Treg.mg.| Rev.mg. ; add καὶ προσκολλη- θήσεται πρὸς τὴν γυναῖκα (τῇ γυναικὶ A ΟἽ, Δ) αὐτοῦ AC DL A it vg cop syrr Treg. txt. Rev.txt. Mt. 19:8. αὐτοῖς - ὅτι item Treg.; αὐτοῖς drt West. Rev. 9 μὴ ἐπὶ πορνείᾳ δὰ C Z vg syrr; παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας B D 33 cop West.mg. Rev.mg. | καὶ γαμήσῃ ἄλλην δὰ C D Zit vg syrr; om B cop West.mg. Rev. mg. | μοιχᾶται S C3 D Z ve syrr; ποιεῖ αὐτὴν μοιχευθῆναι Β C* cop West.mg. Rev. mg. | μοιχᾶται sine add δὲ C? D L Rev. mg. ; add καὶ 6 ἀπολελυμένην γαμήσας (γαμὼν C* 33 Treg.mg.) μοιχᾶται B Οὗ Z 33 vg syrr [Treg.txt.] West.mg. Revy.txt. Me. 10:18. τοῖς προσφέρουσιν A D vg syIr; αὐτοῖς δὲ BC LA cop Treg.mg. West. Rev. 118 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. MATT, XIX. MARK X. LUKE XVIII. , ‘\ παιδία Kal μὴ κωλύ- παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός δία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με 3 Ν > 6 a \ Ν rv , 5 4 \ ἣν , 5 4 eve αὐτὰ ἐλθεῖν πρὸς με, μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά" καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά" ΄ n , rn , ~ ἐμέ: τῶν yap τοιού- τῶν γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν τῶν γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν \ a a a των ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ. ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ. “ rn Ν , \ a 15 τῶν οὐρανῶν. καὶ ἐπι- 15 ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, Os ἂν 17 ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃς ἂν 6 Ν Ἂν, a > a ἣν ὃ LE, ἣν Ν Pe ‘ εὶς TAS χεῖρας αὐτοῖς μὴ δέξηται τὴν βασι- μὴ δέξηται τὴν βασι- > , > Lal ’,’ ἴων ay iA ’ lal meee ἐπορεύθη ἐκεῖθεν. λείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς παι- λείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς παι- 4 Ν / δίον, ob μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς δίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθη εἰς 5 ua Ν > / PN 3 ’ 16 αὑτὴν. και ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὰ αὐτὴν. Ψ. Ν Ἂς a ee) > i κατευλόγει, τιθεὶς τὰς χειρᾶς ἐπ αὐτα. § 106. The Rich Young Man. Parable of the Laborers in the Vineyard. — Perea. Marr. XIX. 16-30. XX. 1-16. Mark X. 17-81. . Luxe XVIII. 18-30. 16 Καὶ ἰδοὺ εἷς προσ- 17 Καὶ ἐκπορευομένου 18 Kat ἐπηρώτησέν τις ελθὼν αὐτῷ εἶπεν - δι- αὐτοῦ εἰς ὁδόν, προσ- αὐτὸν ἄρχων λέγων" , , 5 Ἂν ‘\ en Ν / > / ’ δάσκαλε, τί ἀγαθὸν δραμὼν εἷς καὶ γονυ- διδάσκαλε ἀγαθέ, τί ποιήσω ἵνα ἔχω ζωὴν πετήσας αὐτὸν ἐπηρώ- ποιήσας ζωὴν αἰώνιον 17 αἰώνιον; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν τα αὐτόν: διδάσκαλε 19 κληρονομήσω; εἶπεν SNS , 3 “- 3 6 / ΄ , σ΄ δὲ SLA δ ἘΠ nee , αὐτῷ: τί με ἐρωτᾷς ἀγαθέ, τί ποιήσω ἵνα € αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς - τί \ “ 5 ἴων e Ν ΓΑ / 3 / > περὶ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ; εἷς ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονο- με λέγεις ἀγαθόν ; οὐ- ἐστὶν ὃ ἀγαθός: εἰ δὲ 18 μήσω; ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς δεὶς ἀγαθὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς [2 > Ν δ ap > hed 4 / / θέλεις εἰς τὴν ζωὴν εἶπεν αὐτῷ" τί pe λέ- θεός. ΕἸ A a Ν 5 / > Ν εἰσελθεῖν, τήρησον τὰς yes ἀγαθόν; οὐδεὶς 18 ἐντολάς. ποίας; φη- ἀγαθὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς 6 θε- civ. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς / 3 ΄ 2 / νεανίσκος " πάντα ταῦ- τα ἐφυλαξάμην ἐκ νεό- τα ἐφύλαξα ἐκ νεύτη- τα ἐφύλαξα: τί ἔτι 21 τητός μου. ὃ δὲ Ἴησους τος. 8.18 etc. Ex. 20:12sq. Deut. ὅ : 16 sq.— Lev. 19 : 18. Μί. 19 : 16. διδάσκαλε SBD L; add ἀγα- Mc. 10:19. μὴ μοιχ. (om N*) μὴ φον. A θέ Ο A vg cop syrr Rev.mg. 17 tie... ve West.mg.; μὴ pov. μὴ μοιχ. δὰ BCA ὃ ἀγαθός S Β Ὁ L; τί με λέγεις ayabdy; cop Treg. mg. West.txt. Rev. | σου sc S* C οὐδεὶς ἀγαθός, εἰ μὴ εἷς, ὁ θεός Ο Δ Rev.mg. cop; omN® ABD Avg Treg. West. § 106.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 119 MATT. XIX. MARK X. LUKE XVIII. 21 ὑστερῶ; ἔφη αὐτῷ ὃ ἐμβλέψας αὐτῷ ἡγά- 22 ἀκού- Ἰησοῦς εἰ θέλεις τέ- πησεν αὐτὸν καὶ εἶπεν σας δὲ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν λειος εἶναι, ὕπαγε πώ- αὐτῷ: ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ: αὐτῷ : ἔτι ἕν σοι λεί- λησόν σου τὰ ὑπάρ- ὕπαγε, ὅσα ἔχεις πώ- Te’ πάντα ὅσα ἔχεις i δὸ ϊ i δὸ ft or i διάδ χοντα καὶ δὸς πτωχοῖς, λησον καὶ δὸς τοῖς πώλησον καὶ διάδος νος Ν ΕΣ a Log rad Nore! καὶ ἕξεις θησαυρὸν ἐν πτωχοῖς, καὶ ἕξεις θη- πτωχοῖς, καὶ ἕξεις θη- οὐρανῷ, καὶ δεῦρο ἀκο- σαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ, καὶ σαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανοῖς, καὶ 22 λούθει μοι. ἀκούσας δεῦρο ἀκολούθει μοι. δεῦρο ἀκολούθει μοι. an a , a δὲ 6 νεανίσκος ἀπῆλθεν 22 ὃ δὲ στυγνάσας ἐπὶ TH 28 ὃ δὲ ἀκούσας ταῦτα ΄ 3 Ν ΄ Sass , Ἢ) 3 ΄ A λυπούμενος: ἦν yap λόγῳ ἀπῆλθεν λυπού- περίλυπος ἐγενήθη - ἣν νΝ /, / a Ν 3 Ν λ ΄ 58 ἔχων κτήματα πολλά. μενος" ἣν γὰρ ἔχων γὰρ πλούσιος σφόδρα. lal na ἣν 5 23 Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν τος 28 κτήματα πολλά. καὶ 24 ἰδὼν δὲ αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰη- θ cal ΕἸ A > Ν 7) (3055 a 3 “ ὃ μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ - ἀμὴν περιβλεψάμενος ὃ Ἰη- σοῦς εἶπεν - πῶς δυσ- λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πλούσιος σοῦς λέγει τοῖς μαθη- κόλως οἱ τὰ χρήματα δυσκόλως εἰσελεύσεται ταῖς αὐτοῦ" πῶς δυσ- ἔχοντες εἰς τὴν βασι- > δ / “- ΄ ε Ν Ν s a a 3 eis τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν κόλως οἱ τὰ χρήματα λείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσπο- οὐρανῶν. ἔχοντες εἰς τὴν βασι- ρεύονται " λείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσελεύ- 24 σονται. | οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο ἐπὶ τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ. ὁ δὲ 3 Ν ΄ 3 \ / > a ΄ ca ΄ / 3 Τησοὺς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς - τέκνα, πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστιν εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ 24 πάλιν δὲ λέγω 25 θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν: εὐκο- 25 εὐκοπώτε- ὑμῖν ὅτι εὐκοπώτερόν πώτερόν ἐστιν κάμη- ρον γάρ ἐστιν κάμηλον ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυ- λον διὰ τῆς τρυμαλιᾶς διὰ τρήματος βελόνης πήματος ῥαφίδος εἰσελ- τῆς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν 7 εἰσελθεῖν ἢ πλούσιον “A ΠῚ , ΕῚ NX 4, 3 Ν > A ὔ “ θεῖν ἡ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν πλούσιον εἰς τὴν βα- εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ze lal 3 δ 4 A 4) a > a 3 lal βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρα- σιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσ- θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν. 25 νῶν. ἀκούσαντες δὲ οἱ 26 ελθεῖν. οἱ δὲ περισ- μαθηταὶ ἐξεπλήσσοντο σῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο λές 526 εἶπαν δὲ / 4 ΄, Ν ε 4 ces) , \ 7 σφόδρα λέγοντες " τίς γοντες πρὸς ἑαυτούς" οἱ ἀκούσαντες - καὶ τίς ἄρα δύναται σωθῆναι; καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆ- 27 δύναται σωθῆναι ; ὃ δὲ 26 ἐμβλέψας δὲ ὃ Ἰησοῦς 27 ναι; ἐμβλέψας αὐτοῖς εἶπεν " τὰ ἀδύνατα πα- = 3 a Ane S: 4.9 Υ͂ \ Ν 9 , Ν εἴπεν αὑτοῖς - παρὰ a= ὃ ἴησους λέγει: παρὰ ρὰ ἀνθρώποις δυνατὰ θρώποις τοῦτο ἀδύνα- ἀνθρώποις ἀδύνατον, παρὰ τῷ θεῷ ἐστίν. ἬΝ 5 \ N a > > \ a : τόν ἐστιν, παρὰ δὲ θεῷ αλλ᾽ οὐ παρὰ θεῷ: δυνατὰ πάντα. πάντα γὰρ δυνατὰ πα- Ν) Lal “~ pa τῷ θεῷ. ’, Ν “- 27 Τότε ἀποκριὶθες ὃ 28 ᾿ἬἪρξατο λέγεν ὃ 28 Εἶπεν δὲ Πέτρος" [4 5 A “~ Lal Πέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ: Ilérpos αὐτῷ" ἰδοὺ ἡ- ἰδοὺ ἡμεῖς ἀφέντες τὰ 3 Ν ε Ὁ /, lal ἰδοὺ ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν μεῖς ἀφήκαμεν πάν- ἴδια ἠκολουθήσαμέν Mt. 19:22. νεανίσκος δὰ 1, Ζ; add τὸν ρανῶν δὴ 33 it vg; τοῦ θεοῦ δὰ Β Ο D cop λόγον B C D vg cop West. Rey. ; add pre- terea τοῦτον B [ West.] σιον SL Z 38; add εἰσελθεῖν (in fine C) BC Ὁ it vg cop [Treg.] West.mg. | τῶν οὐ- 94 πλού- Me. 10:94. τοὺς πεποιθότας ἐπὶ χρήμασιν A C D vg syrr Treg.txt. et [mg.] Rev.txt. Treg.mg. West. Rev. ἐστιν δὰ B A Rev.mg.; add 120 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. MATT. XIX. MARK X. LUKE XVIII. πάντα καὶ ἠκολουθήσα- Ta καὶ ἠκολουθήσαμέν 29 σοι. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - / 74 ΝΜ 3, e3 A 3 > Ν / en > , μέν σοι" τί ἄρα ἔσται 29 σοι. ἔφη ὁ Ιησοῦς a- ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐδείς ε “ ε ef a > ‘ / CPE 3) > tf 5 ἃ > n ey 2 28 ἡμῖν; 6 δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἷ- μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν οἰκίαν a a “ ,ὔ Ἃ “ πεν αὐτοῖς " ἀμὴν λέγω ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν οἰκίαν ἢ γυναῖκα ἢ ἀδελφοὺς lal “ lal \ Ν A 9 Ν Ἃ a / ὑμῖν ὅτι ὑμεῖς οἱ ἀκο- ἢ ἀδελφοὺς ἢ ἀδελφὰς ἢ γονεῖς ἢ τέκνα εἵνε- λουθήσαντές μοι, ἐν τῇ ἢ έρα ἢ πατέρα ἢ κεν τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ ἥσαντές μοι, ἐ TH μἢ μητέρα ἢ πατέρα ἢ τῆς είας τοῦ ’ὔ “ / “Ὁ > Ν ῳ cal παλινγενεσίᾳ, ὅταν κα- τέκνα ἢ ἀγροὺς ἕνεκεν θεοῦ, θίσῃ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώ- ἐμοῦ και ἕνεκεν τοῦ oN θ / ὃ LE, > 4 που ἐπὶ θρόνου δόξης εὐαγγελίου, > a“ 7 Ἂς αὐτοῦ, καθίσεσθε καὶ 5 Ny ‘Shun 7d ΄ , Ν ’ αὐτοὶ ἐπὶ δώδεκα θρόνους κρίνοντες τὰς δώδε- 3 κα φυλὰς τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ. ae a ἮΝ ν τὶ 29 καὶ πᾶς ὅστις ἀφῆκεν 80 ἐὰν py λά- 80 ὃς οὐχὶ μὴ ἀπο- \ \ \ ’ ἀδελφοὺς ἢ ἀδελφὰς ἢ By ἑκατονταπλασίονα λάβῃ πολλαπλασίονα / δ / Bi a nr - A a πατέρα ἢ μητέρα ἢ τέ- νῦν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ, καὶ ΠῚ 3 Ν ΠῚ ΓΝ ἢ 9: ὧν N29 Ν cere 3 “ 55 a3 ΄,ὔ κνα ἢ ἀγροὺς ἢ οἰκίας οἰκίας καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομέ- - lal 5 aA > / 5 Ν Ν , ἣν 27 ἕνεκα τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀνό- ἀδελφὰς καὶ μητέρας νῳ ζωὴν αἰώνιον. ματος, πολλαπλασίονα καὶ τέκνα καὶ ἀγροὺς , “ λήμψεται καὶ ζωὴν ai- μετὰ διωγμῶν, καὶ ἐν , ΄ hed da ~ > / ὦνιον κληρονομήσει. τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ ΑΝ rn Lol 30 πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται πρῶ- 31 ζωὴν αἰώνιον. πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται πρῶ- τοι ἔσχατοι καὶ ἔσχα- τοι ἔσχατοι καὶ οἱ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι. τοι πρῶτοι. “a ε , ΄ 5 ε , a > “- 3 , 3 / μὲ XX.1 ὋὉὍὉμοία γάρ ἐστιν ἣ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅστις 762A 7 OF , > , > \ > cal 5 a , 2 ἐξῆλθεν ἅμα πρωὶ μισθώσασθαι ἐργάτας εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα αὐτοῦ. συμφονήσας an “ / Ν δὲ μετὰ τῶν ἐργατῶν ἐκ δηναρίου τὴν ἡμέραν ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸν ἀμπε- λῶ ὑτοῦ i ἐξελθὼν περὶ τρίτην ὥραν εἶδεν ἄλλους ἑστῶτας ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ ova αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἐξελθὼν περὶ τρίτην wp a. ς ἑ ς ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ > , ! XS) , 4 ‘ ε 4 Ae A 5 Ν 5 λῶ Δ ΚΕ ἮΝ φΦ ἀργούς, | καὶ ἐκείνοις εἶπεν - ὑπάγετε καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν ἢ a a A 1 \ δίκαιον δώσω ὑμῖν. | ot δὲ ἀπῆλθον. πάλιν ἐξελθῶν περὶ ἕκτην καὶ ἐνάτην ὥραν ἐποίησεν ὡσαύτως. περὶ δὲ τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ἐξελθὼν εὗρεν ἄλλους ἑστῶτας, καὶ λέ 3 Jae Ὁ ,ὔ 58 ε ΄ὔ ὅλ τὴν ε έραν a ol: ee ) 5» a. - έγει αὐτοῖς. τί ὧδε ἑστήκατε ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν ἀργοί; έγουσιν αὐτῷ - ὅτι 3 Α ε a > , , 3 ~ ¢ / ἈῈ ΣΕ a > \ 3 rn οὐδεὶς ἡμᾶς ἐμισθώσατο. λέγει αὐτοῖς - ὑπάγετε Kal ὑμεῖς εἰς τὴν ἀμπελῶνα. “ a lal / > A 4 8 ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης λέγει ὃ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος τῷ ἐπιτρόπῳ αὐτοῦ - κάλεσον ἂν Τὰν a , a , τοὺς ἐργάτας καὶ ἀπόδος τὸν μισθόν, ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τῶν ἐσχάτων ἕως TOV πρώ- uj Ν , 910 των. καὶ ἐλθόντες οἱ περὶ τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν ἔλαβον ἀνὰ δηνάριον. ἐλθόν- m \ oo» \ \ , res δὲ of πρῶτοι ἐνόμισαν ὅτι πλείονα λήμψονται: καὶ ἔλαβον τὸ ἀνὰ δηνάριον An ΄ ie 11 12 καὶ αὐτοί. λαβόντες δὲ ἐγόγγυζον κατὰ τοῦ οἰκοδεσπότου ' λέγοντες - οὗτοι \ a , a * οἱ ἔσχατοι μίαν ὥραν ἐποίησαν, Kal ἴσους αὐτοὺς ἡμῖν ἐποίησας τοῖς βαστάσασι ; \ , Aa se Re aN ΄ εν, 5 ΠΝ Rea: ον, ΠΝ τὰ > a 13 τὸ βάρος τῆς ἡμέρας καὶ τὸν καύσωνα. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς Evi αὐτῶν εἶπεν - ἑταῖρε, ,ὔ / 53 νὴ Ν \ , 14 οὐκ ἀδικῶ σε" οὐχὶ δηναρίου συνεφώνησάς por; ' ἄρον τὸ σὸν καὶ ὕπαγε. θέλω Ia or w Mt. 19:28. αὐτοὶ δὲ D L Z West.mg.; cop West.mg.; οἰκίας ἢ post ἀφῆκεν B C3 Ὁ ὑμεῖς B C it vg Treg.mg. West.txt. it vg syrr Treg.mg. West.txt. Rev. | πολλα- 29 μητέρα BD; add ἢ γυναῖκα δὴ Ccop πλασίονα BL Rev.mg. ; ἑκατονταπλασίονα δὰ syrr Rev.mg. | ἢ οἰκίας. (om S*) δὰ C* Lo C Dit vg cop syrr Rev.txt. §§ 106-108.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. MATT. XX. 121 Ν 4 a s a a 15 δὲ τούτῳ τῷ ἐσχάτῳ δοῦναι ws Kal σοί: ἢ οὐκ ἔξεστίν por ὃ θέλω ποιῆσαι ἐν a 3 a“ AY λα ἐν ΄ yy 3, 16 τοῖς ἐμοῖς ; ἢ 0 ὀφθαλμός σου πονηρός ἐστιν ὅτι ἐγὼ ἀγαθός εἰμι; οὕτως ἔσον- § 107. Jesus a third time foretells his Death and Resurrection. 17 18 19 20 21 e nr ται οἱ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι καὶ οἱ πρώτοι ἔσχατοι. Matt. XX. 17-19. Kai Ἰησοῦς εἰς Ἱεροσόλυ- > / ε ἀναβαίνων ὃ μα παρέλαβεν τοὺς δώ- δεκα κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, καὶ ἐν -. εκ 7s: > a τῇ ὁδῷ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - 3 Ν 3 ’ > ἰδοὺ ἀναβαίνομεν εἰς Ἵ 5A NP ye: ε εροσόλυμα, καὶ ὃ υἱ- Ν cas ΠΕ) , ὃς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παρα- ΄ a 3 δοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιε- ρεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦ- σιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν > Ν > v. Ν αὑτὸν εἰς θάνατον. καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν tal wy” > Ν > τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εἰς τὸ ἐμ- Lal Ν a παῖξαι καὶ μαστιγῶσαι Ἂ lal Ν a καὶ σταυρῶσαι, καὶ TH ἴω ε , > 6 ’, TPUT Hy ἡμερᾷ ἐγερνησε- ται. 92 33 34 77.] — Perea. Mark X. 82-34. Ἦσαν δὲ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἀναβαίνοντες εἰς Ἵερο- σόλυμα, καὶ ἦν προ- [See 88 74, Luke XVIII. 31-34. 91 Παραλαβὼν δὲ τοὺς , 3 \ > δώδεκα εἶπεν πρὸς at- ἄγων αὐτοὺς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο, οἱ δὲ ἀκολουθοῦντες ἐφοβοῦντο. καὶ παραλαβὼν πάλιν τοὺς δώδεκα ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς λέγειν τὰ , “ μέλλοντα αὐτῷ συμ- ’ὕ ! μὲ 9 ν 3 βαίνειν, | ὅτι ἰδοὺ ἀνα- ’ὔ > ε / βαίνομεν εἰς “Ιεροσό- λυμα, καὶ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ > / , ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσε- ται τοῖς ἀρχιερεύσιν καὶ τοῖς γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν av= “ XN τὸν θανάτῷ καὶ παρα- δώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθ ! \ 5 ’ ἔθνεσιν, ' καὶ ἐμπαί- an Ν ξουσιν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐμ- A \ πτύσουσιν αὐτῷ Kal Ν μαστιγώσουσιν αὐτὸν ἊΣ a ἮΝ καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται. 19 33 34 Tous: ἰδοὺ ἀναβαίνο- > «ε ΄ὔ μεν εἰς “Ἱερουσαλὴμ, Ν ΄ὔ / καὶ τελεσθήσεται πάν- τα τὰ γεγραμμένα διὰ a poli cel TOV προφητῶν TH υἱῷ σι , τοῦ ἀνθρώπου - | παρα- δοθήσεται γὰρ τοῖς 3, Ν > Zz ἔθνεσιν καὶ ἐμπαιχθή- \ ε / σεται καὶ ὑβρισθήσε- ται καὶ ἐμπτυσθήσεται, , ' καί μαστιγώσαντες Qn , ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν, Ν Oe Ξ a 4 καὶ TH ἡμέρᾳ TH τρίτῃ / Ν ἀναστήσεται. καὶ αὖ- ᾿ς σον ΄ a TOL οὐδὲν τουτωῶν συνη- ‘\ = ‘ en κανς καὶ ἣν TO ρημα aA ’ a] 7A Ν ’ὔ Ν , τοῦτο κεκρυμμένον ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, καὶ οὐκ ἐγίνωσκον τὰ λεγόμενα. § 108. James and John prefer their Ambitious Request. — Perea. Marr. XX. 20-28. , a Sz iA ce ΄ a Tore προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ἡ μήτηρ TOV en / Ν lal ena A υἱῶν Ζεβεδαίου μετὰ τῶν υἱῶν αὐτῆς, “ > 3 προσκυνοῦσα καὶ αἰτοῦσά τι παρ᾽ av- 4 > a / / / τοῦ. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῇ τίθέλεις; λέ- 3 “ νῦν, iS: θί φ γει αὐτῷ εἰπὲ ἵνα καθίσωσιν οὗτοι Lal ἴω QA e ot δύο υἱοί μου εἷς ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ εἷς ΜάαΑκκ Χ. 88--45. 35 Ἂς ΄΄ SA as Kat προσπορεύονται αὐτῷ Ιάκω- να Ἐς Ν βος καὶ ᾿Ιωάννης οἱ υἱοὶ Ζεβεδαίου, / fal λέγοντες αὐτῷ: διδάσκαλε, θέλομεν 7. A 3X sf, a , ec a iva ὃ ἐὰν αἰτήσωμέν σε ποιήσῃς ἡμῖν. > ca 36 ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τί θέλετέ με ποιή- aA = a \ con 37 ow ὑμῖν; ot δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ δὸς ἡμῖν Mt. 20: 17. δώδεκα δὰ DL Z cop; add μαθητὰς BC vg [West.] Rev. 122 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 xAos πολύς: καὶ ἰδοὺ Me. 10: 97. Marr. XX. 29-34. MATT. XX. a 4 ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ σου. > \ .e¢°? a > ᾽ ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς εἶπεν " οὐκ wy / 5 - ἊΣ ὦ lal οἴδατε τί αἰτεῖσθες δύνασθε πιεῖν Ν / a 5 ‘\ ! i. TO ποτήριον Ὁ ἐγὼ μέλλω πίνειν; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ" δυνάμεθα. L λέγει ai- lal ΕΥ̓ Ν 7 / , \ τοῖς - TO μὲν ποτήριόν μου πίεσθε, TO Ν / ΕἸ nw 5" 3 δὲ καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου και ἐξ εὐω- νύμων, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν τοῦτο δοῦναι, 3 Sia ς Le 7, CIN a ΄ ἀλλ᾽ οἷς ἡτοίμασται ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός μου. 3 , Ν c ,ὔ 5 ΄ὔ Ακούσαντες δὲ of δέκα ἡγανάκτη- ε Ν ὁ δὲ 3 a /, 3 ἈΝ φ Incots προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς εἷ- σαν περὶ τῶν δύο ἀδελφῶν. 3, μὲ εν cal τὶ “ πεν" οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἄρχοντες τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυριεύουσιν αὐτῶν καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι κατεξουσιάζουσιν αὐτῶν. οὐχ οὕτως ἔσται ἐν ὑμῖν - ἀλλ’ ὃς ἐὰν θέλῃ ἐν cee / / 3 ε las ΄ ὑμῖν μέγας γενέσθαι, ἔσται ὑμῶν διά- ! ν ἃ Ἃ θέλ 5 (28 avn) > κονος, Ἷ καὶ ὃς ἂν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι “ lod A Ld ε πρῶτος, ἔσται ὑμῶν δοῦλος - ὥσπερ ὃ “ 3 ea υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἦλθεν διακο- a Ν a νηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι καὶ δοῦναι a Ἂν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολ- λῶν. FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES 38 39 40 41 42 48 44 45 [Parr VI. MARK X. σ΄ δ» a Ων ἵνα εἷς σου ἐκ δεξιῶν καί εἷς σου ἐξ : Ἃ 2 ἀριστερῶν καθίσωμεν ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου. ε Ava. na > lal 6 δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς “ οὐκ id iJ Sees ΄ a ‘ οἴδατε τί αἰτεῖσθε. δύνασθε πιεῖν τὸ ΄, ἃ Θ᾽ ΟΝ / a \ 4 ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, ἢ TO βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι; | οἱ ε ἊΝ 3? 6 δὲ Ἴη- A > a x ay cous εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - TO ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ δυνάμεθα. ΄΄ ΄, Ν \ / Ay 3s πίνω πίεσθε, καὶ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθήσεσθε:" '! τὸ δὲ ΄ 3 on es > 4 καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων 3 ” SEEN a 3 δι» «ε ΄ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι, ἀλλ᾽ οἷς ἡτοί- μασται. Καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ δέκα ἤρξαντο 9 A ὙΠ ΄ Ale ΄ ἀγανὰκτεῖν περὶ ᾿Ιακώβου καὶ Ἰωάν- νου. καὶ προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὃ > a , 3 a " ¢ ε Ἰησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς - οἴδατε ὅτι ot δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυ- ριεύουσιν αὐτῶν καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι αὐτῶν κατεξουσιάζουσιν αὐτῶν. οὐχ οὕτως a ay δέ ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν: ἀλλ᾽ ὃς av θέλῃ / ,ὔ > ε a“ »” c lal μέγας γενέσθαι ἐν ὑμῖν, ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος, Ἷ καὶ ὃς ἂν θέλῃ ὑμῶν γε- ‘ νέσθαι πρῶτος, ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος. \ Ν ε εν aA 3 6 , 3 Ἂν καὶ γὰρ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἣλ- θεν διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι \ a κ᾿ \ > A , καὶ δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν. 8 109. The Healing of two Blind Men near Jericho. Καὶ ἐκπορευομένων 46 5 Lal 5 Ἂς ε Ν / auT@v amo ᾿Ϊερειχὼ ρειχώ. 3 ΄ ϑ A + ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ 6- δύο τυφλοὶ καθήμενοι \ Ν eg > ΄ Tapa τὴν ὁδόν, ακου- ε Καὶ ἔρχονται εἰς ‘Te- καὶ ἐκπορευο- / > a > Ν ε μένου αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ 171ε- γειχὼ καὶ τῶν μαθητῶν f αὐτοῦ Kal ὄχλου ἱκανοῦ ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου Βαρτι- Marx X. 46-52. Luxe XVIII. 35-48. XIX. 1. 86 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ ey- / BAIN 3 ε γίζειν αὐτὸν εἰς Ἵερει- χὼ τυφλός τις ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν ἐπαιτῶν. 86 ἀκούσας δὲ ὄχλου δια- / , πορευομένου ἐπυνθάνε- σου sc (ante καθίσωμεν A- C Me. 10: 44. ὑμῶν A Οϑ D syrr; ἐν ὑμῖν δὲ al vg al) δ΄7ὶΚ A CL al vg cop syrr al; om Β C*L A vg cop Treg.mg. West. Rev. | BD A 2re Treg. West. Rey. Mt. 20: 23. τοῦτο C D 33 cop West.mg. ; om δὲ B Z vg Treg. West.txt. γενέσθαι A C3 syrr Treg.mg.; εἶναι S B C* DLA vg cop Treg.txt. West. Rey. 31 Δαυείδ. §§ 108-110.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. MATT. XX. - 3 A σαντες ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς πα- ράγει, MARK Χ. μαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαΐ- της, ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν 97 128 LUKE XVIII. Δεῖν a Cy ey TO TL El?) TOUTO. απΉ γ- γειλαν δὲ αὐτῷ ὅτι 47 ὃδόν. καὶ ἀκούσας ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος > cal Ἰησοῦς ὃ Ναζάρηνός 38 παρέρχεται. καὶ ἐβό- » / > 3 / / > a ἔκραξαν λέγον- ἐστιν, ἤρξατο κράζειν σεν λέγων: ᾿Ιησοῦ τες" ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς, υἱὲ καὶ λέγειν - vie Δαυεὶδ υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν ὁ δὲ ὄχλος ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα δὲ μεῖζον ἔκραξαν λέγον- σιωπήσωσιν: οἱ Ἅ 3 Ἄ «ε τες - κύριε, ἐλέησον ἡ- 82 μᾶς, υἱὲ “Δαυείδ. καὶ BS 0.3 aA > , στὰς ὃ Ἰησοῦς ἐφώνη- 48 49 37 “ ἐλέ ’ ησοῦ, ἐλέησόν με. Ayes / > lol καὶ ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ πολ- Aoi ἵνα σιωπήσῃ" ὃ δὲ πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκρα- .« UA , lev: υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέη- σόν με. καὶ στὰς 6 3 a i 7 Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν: φωνήη- 39 40 με. καὶ οἱ προάγοντες ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ ἵνα σι- / > ἊΝ Ἂν γήσῃ αὐτὸς δὲ πολ- AO μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν - υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με. σταθεὶς δὲ ὃ Ἰησοῦς Ν ΄ Ν n σεν αὐτοὺς σατε αὐτόν. καὶ φω- ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ἀχθῆ- ΄ \ Sib P- νοῦσιν τὸν τυφλὸν λέ- ναι πρὸς αὐτόν. γοντες αὐτῷ- θάρσει, , an ε 50 ἔγειρε, φωνεῖ σε. ὃ δὲ ἀποβα- MES a , λὼν τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ ἀναπηδήσας > ΄ὔ ΟΣ a > [2 ἦλθεν πρός τὸν Ἰησοῦν. ἐγγί- AE oS Ν 3 A) \ See δὲ 3 a > καὶ εἶπεν" 51 καὶ ἀποκριθεις αὕτῳ σαντος ὃε αὕτου ἐπη- A 5. ΄ , ΄ , τί θέλετε ποιήσω ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν - τίσοι 41 ρώτησεν αὐτόν - | ri σου / 3 a 33 ὑμῖν; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ 4 ν 9 θῶ κύριε, ἵνα ἀνοιχθῶ- σιν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἡμῶν. δὲ ὃ τῶν 34 σπλαγχνισθεὶς 9 ἥψατο 3 / λῦσαν Ν 3 ὀμμάτων αὐτῶν, καὶ εὐ- θέως ἀνέβλεψαν, καὶ 3 , Cy νι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ. Ἰησοῦς § 110. The Visit to Zacchzus. 52 θέλεις ποιήσω; ὃ δὲ τυφλὸς εἶπεν αὐτῷ- ῥαββουνί, ἵνα ἀναβλέ- Wo. > - ψ ε πεν QUTM* ὕπαγε, ἢ : = ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς «i- , / / πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε. καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέβλε- Ace. , 3 ψεν, καὶ ἠκολούθει αὐὖ- τῷ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. c ι [ 42 48 ͵ Ἂ ε σοι θέλεις ποιήσω; ὃ δὲ > , ν € εἶπεν - κύριε, ἵνα ἀναβλέψω. lal > πὸ σὲ tie σους €L7TEV auTw ° ava- Seas kat ὁ Iy- βλεψον. ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε. καὶ πα- ραχρῆμα ἀνέβληψεν, NS , 5 n καὶ ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ δο- , Ν , x ξάζων tov θεόν. Kat πᾶς ὃ λαὸς ἰδὼν ἔδωκεν XIX. 1 αἶνον τῷ θεῷ. Καὶ εἰσελ- θών διήρχετο τὴν Ἱερειχώ. Parable of the Ten Minx. — Jericho. Luxe XIX. 2-28. ΄ Ν bec 2 Kat ἰδοὺ ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος, καὶ αὐτὸς ἢν ἀρχιτελώνης, καὶ ἣν ΄ ΝΟ 207 NEw a (Avge Ἂν 3 59 7 8... τ ay 3 πλούσιος" καὶ ἐζήτει ἰδεῖν τὸν ᾿Τησοῦν τίς ἐστιν, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου, 4 ὅτι τῇ ἡλικίᾳ μικρὸς ἦν. καὶ προδραμὼν εἰς τὸ ἔ θεν ἀνέβη ἐπὶ συκο- ὅτι τῇ ἡλικίᾳ μικρὸς HV. ροδραμὼν εἰς τὸ ἔμπροσθεν ἀνέβη 5 / 7 ton > / Ψ > / Ν λλε ὃ ΄ 0 Ne ἦλθ 7 ἐπὶ τὸ τό- μορέαν, ἵνα ἴδῇ αὐτόν, ὅτι. ἐκείνης ἡμελλεν διέρχεσθαι. καὶ ὡς ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὸν Mt. 20: 80. ἐλέησον SD; pm Κύριε (post Le. 19:9. ἣν 50 SL cop Treg.mg. West. ἡμᾶς C syrr) B C L Zvg cop syrr Treg. mg.; pm οὗτος A [Treg.mg.]; αὐτὸς B Treg. West. Rey. txt. West.txt. Rev. ; om καὶ ἣν Ὁ. 124 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. LUKE XIX. an > a πον, ἀναβλέψας 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν: Ζακχαῖε, σπεύσας κατάβηθι" ΄ Ν > a 9 nA a \ ΄ , Le t 6 σήμερον γὰρ ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ σου δεῖ pe μεῖναι. καὶ σπεύσας κατέβη, Kal ὑπεδέξατο «1 αὐτὸν χαίρων. καὶ ἰδόντες πάντες διεγόγγυζον, λέγοντες ὅτι παρὰ ἁμαρτωλῷ ΧΟ ΡΟ: : TOY βου vey Po. Chee > \ > an a \ Ν a > x Ν ΄ὔ 3 Ν 8 ἀνδρὶ εἰσῆλθεν καταλῦσαι. σταθεὶς δὲ Ζακχαῖος εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν κύριον - ἰδοὺ \ cal / 2: lal a τὰ ἡμίσειά μου TOV ὑπαρχόντων, κύριε, τοῖς πτωχοῖς δίδωμι, καὶ εἴ τινός TL ἐσυ- ΄ 5 ΄ “ > Ν Ν Che 4 δι a μὲ , 9 κοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν. εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ὃ Ἰησοῦς ὅτι σήμερον 10 σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο, καθότι καὶ αὐτὸς υἱὸς ᾿Αβραάμ.- ἦλθ ap ὃ npia τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο, ds υἱὸς ᾿Αβραάμ.- ἦλθεν γὰρ a , a \ lal ὯΝ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ζητῆσαι καὶ σῶσαι τὸ ἀπολωλός. 3 Ἢ an A Ν Ss 11. ᾿Ακουόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ταῦτα προσθεὶς εἶπεν παραβολὴν, διὰ τὸ ἐγγὺς εἶναι “Te- Ν x ees. | Ν a > ἣν bid fol / ε ’, a nn povoadip αὐτὸν Kat δοκεῖν αὐτοὺς ὅτι παραχρῆμα μέλλει ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 12 ἀναφαίνεσθαι. εἶ ὃν- ἃ ) ὑγενὴς ἐ ἤθη εἰς Xo iv, λ . εἶπεν οὖν - ἀνθρωπός τις εὐγενὴς ἐπορεύθη εἰς χώραν μακράν, λα- 18 βεῖν ἑαυτῷ βασιλείαν καὶ ὑποστρέψαι. καλέσας δὲ δέκα δούλους ἑαυτοῦ ἔδωκεν A , a Nf gy \ eon 14 αὐτοῖς δέκα μνᾶς, καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς - πραγματεύσασθε ἐν ᾧ ἔρχομαι. οἱ δὲ A > aS See Deh Ns ΄ 4 ay, 3 a / πολῖται αὐτοῦ ἐμίσουν αὐτόν, καὶ ἀπέστειλαν πρεσβείαν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ λέγοντες " 15 οὐ θέλομεν τοῦτον βασιλεῦσαι ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτὸν fol a ‘ Ἂν λαβόντα τὴν βασιλείαν, καὶ εἶπεν φωνηθῆναι αὐτῷ τοὺς δούλους τούτους οἷς δὲε- 16 δώκει τὸ ἀργύριον, ἵνα γνοῖ τίς τί διεπραγματεύσατο. παρεγένετο δὲ ὃ πρῶτος ΄ a a \ ( A "ἢ 17 λέγων: κύριε, ἡ μνᾶ σου δέκα προσηργάσατο μνᾶς. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" εὖγε, > X\ A Ψ > > / Ν 5 ’ ” > / μὴ > / / ἀγαθὲ δοῦλε, ὅτι ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ πιστὸς ἐγένου, ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω δέκα / \, 9 ε ᾽ὔ / ε a 4 > A , “ 18 πόλεων. καὶ ἦλθεν ὃ δεύτερος λέγων - ἣ μνᾶ σου, κύριε, ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς. - \o@ > 19 20 εἶπεν δὲ καὶ τούτῷ - Kal σὺ ἐπάνω γίνου πέντε πόλεων. καὶ ἕτερος ἦλθεν λέ- A ΄ ἰὃ Ν ε a ἃ > ἦ 3 a 2 ὃ δέχο > / 21 γων" κύριε, ἰδοὺ ἡ μνᾶ σου, ἣν εἶχον ἀποκειμένην ἐν σουδαρίῳ ἐφοβούμην ΄ 7 ” > \ 5 ” ἃ 3 5 Ν ΄, ἃ 3 5 yap σε, ὅτι ἄνθρωπος αὐστηρὸς εἶ, αἴρεις ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκας, Kal θερίζεις ὃ οὐκ ἔσπει- a ΝΥ ΄ , a a ” a 22 pas. λέγει αὐτῷ. ἐκ τοῦ στόματός σου κρινῶ σε, πονηρὲ δοῦλε. ἥδεις ὅτι > Ν 4 > , > ” a 3 ἔθ Ν a) ty ἃ 3 ” ! \ 23 ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπος αὐστηρός εἶμι, αἴρων ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκα, καὶ θερίζων ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρα ; ' καὶ , > ” , An (8) / aN / 3 Ν > Ν Ν / av FON διατί οὐκ ἔδωκάς μου TO ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν ; κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ “ “ ἴω cal \ na 24 ἔπραξα. καὶ τοῖς παρεστῶσιν εἶπεν ἄρατε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ τὴν μνᾶν καὶ δότε τῷ τὰς a > a u / “ / a o 25 26 δέκα μνᾶς ἔχοντι. καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ: κύριε, ἔχει δέκα μνᾶς. λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι 2 ὶ τῷ € u δοθήσεται, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ μὴ ἔχοντος καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται. πλὴν 7 παντὶ τῳ €XOVT NOETAL, μὴ &X χει ἀρθὴ : ἢ Ν 5 ’ 4 ΙΝ Ν , / ΜᾺ ph ὅπ 3 Ν 3 ψ΄' τοὺς ἐχθρούς μου τούτους τοὺς μὴ θελήσαντάς με βασιλεῦσαι ex’ αὐτοὺς ἀγά- ἐν Ay, ΄ γετε ὧδε καὶ κατασφάξατε αὐτοὺς ἔμπροσθέν μου. No ΣΕ ΕΟ a > , 4 6 3 , > oT 5X: 28 Kat εἰπὼν ταῦτα ἐπορεύετο ἔμπροσθεν, ἀναβαίνων εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα. § 111. Jesus arrives at Bethany Six Days before the Passover. [The Supper at Bethany. The Hostility of the Chief Priests. ]— Bethany. Joun XI. 55-57. XII. 1-11. rn \ « "τον ἃ 55 ἪΝ δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ πάσχα τῶν Ιουδαίων, καὶ ἀνέβησαν πολλοὶ εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα a a ’ > Ν > cal 56 ἐκ τῆς χώρας πρὸ τοῦ πάσχα, ἵνα dyvicwow ἑαυτούς. ἐζήτουν οὖν Tov Ἰησοῦν aA - / A CA μὴ 3 \ ΝΜ καὶ ἔλεγαν per’ ἀλλήλων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἑστηκότες " τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ > A ε , ὃ , δὲ ε 5 a“ \ (3 Φ A > λὰ ν Wee 57 εἰς THV EOPTHV ; δεδώκεισαν δὲ οἱ ἄρχίερεις καὶ OL Φαρισαιοι ἐντολᾶς ἐνὰ EaV TLS a a , μή / > ΄ γνῳ που ἐστιν μηνυση»; OTWS TLAOWOLV αὐτον. Le. 19:15. τίς τί διεπραγματεύσατο (πραγμ. D Lcop Treg. West. Rev. 22 κρινῶ A) A A vg syrr; τί διεπραγματεύσαντο ἃ Β EK; κρίνω B® vg West. §§ 110, 111.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. Matt. XXVI. 6-13. 6 Tod δὲ Ἰησοῦ γενο- ΄ὔ 3 7 5 μένου ἐν Βηθανίᾳ ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λε- 3 Mark XIV. 3-9. Καὶ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν 4 > “A 3 , Βηθανίᾳ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, 125 JOHN XII. Ὁ οὖν Ἰησοῦς πρὸ ἐξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ πάσχα ἦλθεν ὅπου ἦν Λάζαρος, ὃν εἰς Βηθανίαν, ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν Ἴη- σοῦς. ἐποίησαν οὖν αὐτῷ δεῖπνον ἐκεῖ, καὶ ἡ Μάρθα διηκόνει, ὃ δὲ Λάζαρος εἷς ἣν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων σὺν αὐτῷ - ἡ οὖν Μαρία λαβοῦσα λίτραν μύρου. νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτίμου ἤλειψεν τοὺς πόδας τοῦ Ιησοῦ καὶ ἐξέμαξεν ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ - ἡ δὲ οἰκία ἐπληρώθη ἐκ τὴς 4 ὀσμῆς τοῦ μύρου. λέγει δὲ ᾿Ιούδας ὃ Ἰσκαριώτης, εἷς ἐκ τῶν μα- μῆς τοῦ μύρ γ ριώτης, μ 5 7 προῦ, ' προσῆλθεν av- κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ ἢλ- a Ν 3, 3 / ἊΣ » 3 / τῷ γυνὴ ἔχουσα ἀλά- θεν γυνὴ ἔχουσα ἀλώ βαστρον μύρου πολυ- βαστρον μύρου νάρδου τίμου καὶ κατέχεεν ἐπὶ πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς ‘ an an 3 A , Ἁ AA / τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ συντρίψασα τὸν ἀλά- / ἀνακειμένου. βαστρον κατέχεεν ai- τοῦ τῆς κεφαλῆς. Φ' 8 ἰδόντες δὲ 4 ἧσαν ε ‘\ > / 4 3 Le] οἱ μαθηταὶ ἠγανάκτη- δέ τινες ἀγανακτοῦντες σαν λέγοντες " εἰς τί πρὸς ἑαυτούς εἰς τί ἡ Roe: Y 207 ay Ψ a , 9 ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη; ἐδύ- ἀπώλεια αὕτη TOV, μύ- vato γὰρ τοῦτο πραθῆ- ὅ ρου γέγονεν; ἠδύνατο cal \ a Ν “ x 4 vat πολλοῦ Kat δοθη- yap τοῦτο τὸ μύρον ναι πτωχοῖς. πραθῆναι ἐπάνω. δηνα- 7, ρίων τριακοσίων καὶ δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς: Ν a an καὶ ἐνεβριμοῦντο αὐτῇ. ‘ Ν A 5 10 γνοὺς δὲ 66 δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν" 2. 5 Lal > > a“ -) + 3 iA ’ > an ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ἄφετε αὐτὴν τί αὐτῇ i / ἪΝ “a τί κόπους παρέχετε τῇ. κόπους παρέχετε; κα- Ζ " γυναικί; ἔργον γὰρ κα- λὸν ἔργον ἠργάσατο Ν 3 , , Rov ἠργάσατο εἰς ἐμέ. 7 ἐν ἐμοί. πάντοτε γὰρ 11 πάντοτε γὰρ τοὺς πτω- τοὺς πτωχοὺς ἔχετε Ν ” θ᾽ ε > ε a VY ig χοὺς ἔχετε pe ἑαυ- μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν καὶ ὅταν lal Ἂν Ν 3 / TOV, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε θέλητε δύνασθε εὖ ποι- 12 ἔχετε. βαλοῦσα γὰρ ῆσαι, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάν- Ν a αὕτη TO μύρον τοῦτο 8 τοτε ἔχετε. ΕΝ ἴω , / A ἌΝ ἐν ἐπὶ τοῦ σώματός μου πρὸς τὸ ἐνταφι- / > , SS ΄ ΓΑ Το 3 ΄ 13 doa με ἐποίησεν. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 9 ἐνταφιασμόν. 9 ΕΣ a Ν 3 / a ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ- 3 μὲ a , , το ἐν ὅλῳ TO κόσμῳ, λαληθήσεται t l .« Mt. 96 : 7. πολυτίμου SAD L 33 Treg. mg.; βαρυτίμου B A Treg.txt. West. ἐκ SAD; om BL 33 Treg. Joh. 12:4. West. Rev. τήν" ἵνα Rev.mg. lol 3 ἴω ε Α͂ θητῶν αὐτοῦ, ὃ μέλλων > Ν YQ Q7 αὐτὸν παραδιδόναι : δι- ατί τοῦτο τὸ μύρον οὐκ 3 4 , ἐπράθη τριακοσίων δη- , Ν > / vapiwv καὶ ἐδόθη πτω- A = A xois; εἶπεν δὲ τοῦτο οὐχ ὅτι περὶ τῶν πτω- xv ἔμελεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλ᾽ “ ΄, 5. ν \ ὅτι κλέπτης ἣν καὶ TO , ΕῚ \ γλωσσόκομον εἶχεν καὶ τὰ βαλλόμενα ἐβάστα- ζεν. 3 εἶπεν οὖν ὃ Iy- aA " δ τὰ “ σοῦς - ἄφες αὐτὴν, wa. εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐν- A ΄ ταφιασμοὺῦ μου τηρὴ- on αὐτό: τοὺς πτω- χοὺς γὰρ πάντοτε ἔχετε ἌΓΕ a SON ἊΝ » μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε. δ» > / ο €OXEV €TOLYOEV * προ- / / Ν lal 5 ἣν έλαβεν μυρίσαι μου τὸ σῶμα εἰς τὸν ἀμὴν δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, 7 aN A \ > , ” που εἐαν κηρυχθῇ TO εὐαγγέλιον εἰϑ Ψ Ν / SAC We Ν ,ὔ 9 ὅλον TOV KOT MOV, καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὖ- Ἴ αὐτὴν ἵνα Rev.txt.; αὐὖ- 126 OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. [Part Vl. MATT. XXVI. MARK XIV. se We) ΄ σ΄ > ΄ ,ὔ 3 Ἵν, 9 καὶ O ἐποίησεν αὑτὴ εἰς μνημόσυνον τὴ λαληθήσεται εἰς μνημόσυνον αὖ- αὐτῆς. τῆς. JOHN Xil. = “-“ 3 a 9 “Eyvo οὖν ὃ ὄχλος πολὺς ἐκ τῶν “Iovdatwr ὅτι ἐκεῖ ἐστίν, καὶ ἦλθον οὐ διὰ τὸν al / Ν a n 10 Ἰησοῦν μόνον, GAN ἵνα καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον ἴδωσιν, ὃν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν. ἐβου- a Ν Ν 11 λεύσαντο δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς ἵνα καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον ἀποκτείνωσιν, ' ὅτι πολλοὶ δι᾿ αὖ- a n ? a τὸν ὑπῆγον τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων καὶ ἐπίστευον εἰς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν. PART VII. --ὄ.ο-.ὄ-ς-.-- OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANS- ACTIONS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. Time: Five days. § 112. Our Lord’s Public Entry into Jerusalem. — Bethany, Jerusalem. First Day of the Week. JoHn XII. 12-19. a 4, 7 4 9 12 | ἢ ἐπαύριον ὄχλος πολὺς ὃ ἐλθὼν εἰς THY ἑορτήν, ἀκούσαντες OTL ἔρχεται Ty- cal ee / σοῦς εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, ---- Marr. XXI. 1-11. \ 7 + 5 1. ΚΚαὶ ore ἡγγισαν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα καὶ ἦλθον 4 εἰς Βηθφαγὴ εἰς τὸ ὄρος ἴω lal 3 τῶν ἐλαιῶν, τότε ᾽Ἴη- a“ 3 / ’ὕ σοῦς ἀπέστειλεν δύο 2 μαθητὰς | λέγων αὐὖ- τοῖς: πορεύεσθε εἰς τὴν κώμην τὴν κατέ- ε cal Ν 352 Ν ναντι ὑμῶν, καὶ εὐθὺς ε / 35, / εὑρήσετε ὄνον δεδεμέ- νὴν καὶ πῶλον μετ᾽ αὐὖ- τῆς λύσαντες ἀγάγε- τέ μοι. A 7 3 καὶ ἐὰν TLS δ. τῶν, + 5 a -΄ ὑμῖν εἴπῃ τι, ἐρεῖτε ὅτι , lal ὃ κύριος αὐτῶν χρείαν 35, 352 ΝΣ SS ἔχει - εὐθὺς δὲ ἀποστε- Joh. 12:12. ὄχλος δὲ Α Ὁ ἃ]; pm ὁ BL [Treg.mg.] West. Rev.mg. Mor 11 :1. 1 εἰς Βηθανίαν D 10} vg Or West.mg.; εἰς (pm καὶ A) Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βη- θανίαν (pm εἰς δα C) S ABC LAcop syrr Marx XI. 1-11. Καὶ ὅτε ἐγγίζουσιν > « / \ eis IepovooAvpa καὶ 5 7 Ἁ ἊΝ εἰς Βηθανίαν πρὸς τὸ » “ 5 lal 3 ὅρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν, ἀπο- στέλλει δύο τῶν μαθη- a 3 a ! Ν f? τῶν αὐτοῦ ' Kat λέγει αὐτοῖς: ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην τὴν κατέ- e “ Ν 3532 Χ ναντι ὕμων, και εὐθὺς εἰσπορευόμενοι εἰς αὖ- τὴν εὑρήσετε πῶλον δεδεμένον ἐφ᾽ ὃν οὐδεὶς 9 ΄, ᾿ ΄ ἀνθρώπων οὔπω κεκά- 4 3 Ν θικεν: λύσατε αὐτὸν \ ’ὔ Ν Ws καὶ φέρετε. καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ" τί ποι- εἴτε τοῦτο; εἴπατε" ὃ , ἴω κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν Rey. West. Rey. Le. 19 : $1. 29 30 31 LuKE XIX. 29-44. Καὶ ἐγένετο ὡς ἢγ- γισεν εἰς Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βηθανίαν πρὸς τὸ ὄρος Ν , 3 ’ τὸ καλούμενον ἐλαιών, δύο μαθητῶν ! εἰπών - ὑπά- 3 / ἴω ἀπέστειλεν τῶν 3 Ν / γετε εἰς τὴν κατέναντι , me κώμην, ἐν ἢ εἰσπορευ- , , lal όμενοι εὑρήσετε πῶλον /, A δεδεμένον, ἐφ᾽ ὃν οὐ- ‘\ , 3 ’ὔ δεὶς πώποτε ἀνθρώπων > / Ν , ἐκάθισεν, kat λύσαντες αὐτὸν ἀγάγετε. ἊΝ 5.2 καὶ ἐάν ε Lal > 7 τις ὑμᾶς ἐρωτᾷ - διατί λύετε; οὕτως ἐρεῖτε" αὐτοῦ 7 ε , OTL O Kuplos Treg.txt. et mg. [eis Βηθφαγὴ] West.txt. 2 κεκάθικεν A Ὁ al; ἐκάθισεν δὰ B CL A Treg.mg. West. Rev. ἐρεῖτε" ὅτι Treg.; ἐρεῖτε ὅτι 128 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. MATT. XXI. MARK XI. LUKE Xix. 6 λεῖ αὐτούς. --- πορευ- ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν 32 χρείαν ἔχει. ἀπελθόν- θέντες δὲ οἱ μαθηταὶ ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε. Ν 5 an Ν i kal ἀπῆλθον καὶ εὗρον Ν a / Tes δὲ οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι me Ν S > εὗρον καθὼς εἶπεν αὖ- \ ΄, \ και TOLYOAVTES καθὼς π trae Jame “ἢ ‘ apt Sad a ροσεέεταξεν αὐτοις O τον πῶλον EOEMEVOV TOLS. 3 “ Ν ‘ , 3, Ἰησοῦς, πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἔξω ἐπὶ ~ 3 / x , “-“ τοῦ ἀμφόδου, καὶ λύου- 38 λυόντων δὲ αὐτῶν See ΄, fal Serie ΄ 3} Ν a x ε ΄ 5 σιν αὐτόν. καί τινες τῶν ἐκεῖ ἑστηκότων ἔλε- τὸν πῶλον εἶπαν οἱ κύ- lal lal 4 Ἂν lal γον αὐτοῖς" τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες τὸν πῶλον ; plot αὐτοῦ πρὸς αὐτούς " ε ΞΘ a > e? a ~ 6 οἱ δε εἶπαν αὐτοῖς καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Inoots: Kat 34 τί λύετε TOV πῶλον ; οἱ fal > ΄ Ν 9 7 ἀφῆκαν αὐτούς. καὶ δὲ εἶπαν - ὅτι ὃ κύριος + Ν ' ἤγαγον τὴν 4 Ν Ν lal ὄνον Kal τὸν πῶλον, Ἂς a id 3229 3 καὶ ἐπέθηκαν ἐπ’ av- Ν καὶ τῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, 3 , 53. 3 ἐπεκάθισεν ἐπάνω αυ- φέρουσιν τὸν πῶλον 35 x ἀν [9 A Ἢ πρὸς τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐπεβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ε ΄ oe OD) / ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐκά- / θισεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν. αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει. καὶ XN ᾿ς ἤγαγον αὐτὸν πρὸς τὸν 9 nw Ἂς > 4 2 Τησοῦν, καὶ ἐπιρίψαν- τες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια ἐπὶ τὸν πῶλον ἐπεβί- TOV. — ἊΝ > cal Bacay τὸν Ἰησοῦν. MATT. XXI. JOHN XII. ue) { % ἂν “ Ν / 7 “A Ν σας Ν πον 4 “A > ’ ‘J 4 τοῦτο δὲ γέγονεν wa. πληρωθῇ τὸ 14 εὑρὼν δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὀνάριον ἐκάθισεν ε Ν ὃ Ἂν A / / a 3) 9, 3 / θ Ke τὶ / oa ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος" ἐπ’ αὐτό, καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον leimate τῇ θυγατρὶ Σιών' Ιδ μὴ φοβοῦ, θύγατηρ Σιών" ἰδοὺ ὁ βασιλεύς σου ἔρχεταί ἰδοὺ ὁ βασιλεύς σου ἔρχε- »Ο Ν 3 Ἂν 0 , > Ν Le x σοι πραὺς καὶ ἐπιβεβηκὼς ται καθήμενος ἐπὶ πῶλον > Ν » Ν > Ν a aN, »” ἐπὶ ὄνον καὶ ἐπὶ πῶλον υἱὸν ὄνου. ---- ε ’ὔ ὑποζυγίου. -- ὃ δὲ πλεῖστος MARK XI. LUKE XIX. JOHN XII. , Ν ὄχλος ἔστρωσαν 8 καὶ πολλοὶ τὰ 86 πορευομένου δὲ rn cal at 7 ἑαυτῶν τὰ ἱμά- ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔ- αὐτοῦ ὑπεστρών- - “ Ν Ν ε ΄, Tia ἐν τῇ 600, στρωσαν εἰς τν νῦυον τὰ ἱμάτια » A aA enn Ν δ, ἄλλοι δὲ ἔκο- dddv, ἄλλοι δὲ αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. 18 1 ἔλαβον τὰ Baia rn 7 Ν πτον κλάδους ἀ- στιβάδας, κόψαν- 87 ἐγγίζοντος δὲ at- τῶν φοινίκων καὶ Ν lal ͵ > “-“ ΕἸ ~ TO τῶν δένδρων τες EK TWV aypwv. \ » > Ν ε , Kal ἔστρωσαν ἐν 9 καὶ OL προάγον- Ν τες καὶ οἱ ἄκο- λουθοῦντες ἔκρα- τῇ ὁδῷ. οἱ δὲ ὅ- c c ε , χλοι ol προάγον- ἐξῆλθον εἰς ὑ- πάντησιν αὐτῷ, nw 5», Ἂν ~ τοῦ ἤδη πρὸς TH καταβάσει τοῦ Ε a > a : ὄρους τῶν ἐλαιῶν ἤρξαντο ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν μα- τες αὐτὸδ καὶ ov: θητῶν χαίροντες αἰνεῖν τὸν θεὸν ot ἀκολουθοῦντες “φωνῇ μεγάλῃ περὶ πασῶν ὧν ἔκραζον λέγον- εἶδον δυνάμεων, τες " 88 ' λέγοντες " καὶ ἐκραύγαζον " ὠσαννὰ τῷ ὦσαννά, ev- ὠσαννά, εὐλο- υἱῷ Δαυείδ. εὐ- εὐλογημένος Aoynpévos ὃ γημένος ὃ διδοῦο. Zech. 9:9. Me. 11:4. τὸν SCA; om ABD 1, ἐρχόμενος βασιλεὺς (om. Bac. D) S* A Ὁ L cop Treg. West. Rev. it vg cop Treg. West.mg. (2). Rev.; 6 épx. 6 Le. 19:38. ὁ βασιλεὺς S* West.mg.; 56 Bac. B West.txt. §§ 112, 113.] 16 17 18 19 39 40 41 42 43 44 10 11 MATT. ΧΧΙ. λογημένος 6 ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυ- ρίου, ὠσαννὰ τ a «ε δ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις. MARK XI. e > / 6 ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι 10 κυρίου" εὐλο- γημένη ἡ ἐρχο- μένη βασιλεία UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. LUKE XIX. Ν βασιλεὺς ἐν ὀνόματι κυ- plov: ἐν οὐρα- na > / Ν νῷ εἰρήνη, καὶ ὃ ἕξ > e 4 ofa. ev ὑψίστοις. 129 JOHN XII. > / > ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυ- ’ ρίου, καὶ ὃ βα- σιλεὺς τοὺ Ἰσρα- a TOU πατρὸς ἡμῶν Δαυείδ, ὠσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις. JOHN ΧΙ. an ¢ \ \ 9 °° > a Ταῦτα οὐκ ἔγνωσαν αὐτοῦ ot μαθηταὶ τὸ πρῶτον, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε ἐδοξάσθη Ἰησοῦς, , 9 a > an , τότε ἐμνήσθησαν ὅτι ταῦτα ἢν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ γεγραμμένα καὶ a ἐν (δὸς. “Εἰ οὐλὴ carn De es SA NO TEN s ELT? 2 a ΤΣ ἐμαρτύρει οὖν ὁ ὄχλός ὃ ὧν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὅτι τὸν Λάζαρον ἐφώνησεν ἐκ τοῦ μνη- ἣν “Ὁ ἈΝ c , ) f 3 a c ” 7 διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ 6 ὄχλος, ὅτι “ , a ταῦτα ἐποίησαν αὐτῷ. Ἄν Ν “-“ μείου καὶ ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν. ᾽ a ΄ Ν a ε > na > ἤκουσαν τοῦτο αὐτὸν πεποιηκέναι TO σημεῖον. οἱ οὖν Φαρισαῖοι εἶπαν πρὸς -“ 7 an / » ε , 5 ὔ 3 aA al ἑαυτούς - θεωρεῖτε ὅτι οὐκ ὠφελεῖτε οὐδέν - ἴδε ὁ κόσμος ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν. LUKE XIX. a ~ > A 3 , Καί τινες τῶν Φαρισαίων ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου εἶπαν πρὸς αὐτόν διδάσκαλε, ἐπιτί- - “ Ν 3 fA ε “ [χὰ e μῆσον τοῖς μαθηταῖς cov. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν - λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐὰν οὗτοι σιω- / ε λίθ 4E K Ν ε + ἰδὰ Ν aN ἔκλ ‘ 5. ἘΦ πήσουσιν, οἱ λίθοι κράξουσιν. αἱ ὡς ἤγγισεν, ἰδὼν τὴν πόλιν ἔκλαυσεν ἐπ' 3 ΄ ! ᾽ὔ 4 >.” Ν Ν 7 > 4 ε / , Ν Ν > , αὐτήν, | λέγων ὅτι εἰ ἔγνως καὶ σὺ καίγε ἐν τ έρᾳ σου ταύτῃ τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην a \ 5" tah Prose n ω oc ΚΟΥ αἴ TA sty \ σου" νῦν δὲ ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφθαλμῶν σου. ὅτι ἥξουσιν ἡμέραι ἐπὶ σέ, Kal παρεμ- a να ὦ Ν ΄ ΄ Uy. Ὁ, βαλοῦσιν οἱ ἐχθροί σου χάρακά σοι καὶ περικυκλώσουσίν σε καὶ συνέξουσίν σε να A) ! \ ἐδ “ Α \ Ν / > 4 \ 3 > / /, πάντοθεν, ' καὶ ἐδαφιοῦσίν σε καὶ TA τέκνα σου ἐν σοί, Kai οὐκ ἀφήσουσιν λίθον 3 ‘\ /, > / 3 9 “Θ > 4 Ν Ν ἴον > nw ἐπὶ λίθον ἐν σοί, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν οὐκ ἔγνως τὸν καιρὸν τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς σου. ““ anal MATT. XXI. _ MARK XI. Καὶ εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς Ἵεροσός 11 Kai εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα εἰς λυμα ἐσείσθη πᾶσα ἡ πόλις λέγου- τὸ ἱερόν - καὶ περιβλεψάμενος πάντα, ΄ > a WAG δὲ » δι ΜΩ͂Ν »ἢ » ee. “ὅπ 9 σα: τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ; ᾿ οἵ δὲ ὄχλοι ὀψὲ ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας, ἐξῆλθεν εἰς ἔλεγον - οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ προφήτης ἼἸη- Βηθανίαν μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα. σοῦς ὃ ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲθ τῆς Γαλιλαίας. § 113. The Barren Fig-tree. The Cleansing of the Temple. [Comp. ὃ 21.]— Bethany, Jerusalem. Second Day of the Week. Marr. XXI. 12-19. 9 Marx XI. 12-19. 18 Πρωὶ δὲ ἐπαναγαγὼν εἰς τὴν πόλιν 12 Καὶ τῇ ἐπαύριον ἐξελθόντων ad- 19 ἐπείνάσεν. καὶ ἰδὼν συκῆν μίαν ἐπὶ 18 τῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας ἐπείνασεν. καὶ τῆς 0000 ἦλθεν ἐπ’ αὐτήν, καὶ οὐδὲν ἰδὼν συκῆν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἔχουσαν 8. 13. Comp. Ps. 118 : 26. Joh. 19:17. ὅτι Τὸ L cop Treg.mg.; ὅτε Rev. | cov pr RA vg syrr Rev. (Am.mg.) ; SAB al vg Treg.txt. West. Rev. om δ A BD L Treg. West. Rev.txt. | cov Le. 19: 49. καὶ σὺ post ἔγνως A D al it se (σοι D) AD A al cop syrr [Treg.] Rev. vg cop; post ταύτῃ δὰ B 1, Treg.mg. West. (Am.mg.) ; om 8 B L West. Rey.txt. 9 12 130 MATT. XXI. εὗρεν ἐν αὐτῇ εἰ μὴ φύλλα μόνον. καὶ ~ ἴων Ν λέγει αὐτῇ: οὐ μηκέτι ἐκ σοῦ καρπὸς 2 \ a γένηται εἰς TOV αἰῶνα. παραχρῆμα ἡ συκῆ. --- MATT. XXI. Καὶ εἰσῆλθεν “In- σοῦς εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ ἐξέβαλεν πάν- τας τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ε “ Ν Ν , ἱερῷ, καὶ τὰς τραπέζας τῶν κολλυβιστῶν κατέ- SS Ν / στρεψεν Kal τὰς καθέ- ὃρας τῶν πωλοῦντων τὰς περιστεράς, | καὶ καὶ ἐξηράνθη 15 16 17 14 σύκων. FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. MARK XI. φύλλα, ἦλθεν εἰ apa τι εὑρήσει ἐν Ss aes Ν ψ \ ae) 8. ON 298 id αὐτῇ, καὶ ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα: ὃ γὰρ καιρὸς οὐκ ἣν καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτῇ " μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς Ν ΄ὔ καρπὸν φάγοι. MARK ΧΙ. Καὶ ἔρχονται εἰς ‘Te- 4 / > ροσόλυμα. καί εἰσελ- θὰ > Ν ε \ ΕΣ ΓΘ ὼν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν ἡρξα- το ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς πω- - ἂν Ν τὰ λοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγο- Whe ε Ν 3 A καὶ ἤκουον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. Luke XIX. 45-48. Kai εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν ἤρξατο ἐκβάλ- λειν τοὺς πωλοῦντας, a a Ν ‘ _ ράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, καὶ τὰς τραπέζας τῶν κολλυβιστῶν καὶ τὰς καθέδρας τῶν πωλούν- Ν ΄, Ν των τὰς περιστερὰς κατέστρεψεν, ' καὶ οὐκ ἤφιεν, ἵ διενέγκῃ σκεῦος διὰ τοῦ ἃ ἤφιεν, ἵνα τις διενέγκῃ σκεῦος διὰ τοῦ ἱε- a ! ‘ 25 4D \ pov, ' Kat ἐδίδασκεν καὶ , a “ nw λέγει αὐτοῖς - γέγρα- ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς - οὐ ye 46 ἱ λέγων αὐτοῖς: γέ- ἜΤ πται ὃ οἶκός μου γραπται "“ ὅτι ὃ οἷ- γραπται καί ἐ- > > > οἶκος προσευ- κός μου οἶκος σται ὃ οἷκός μου χῆς κληθήσεται, προσευχῆς κλη- οἶκος προσευχῆς" ε ἣν Ν S/N. A θ , -“Ῥ ς fx δὲ oN, > , ὑμεῖς δὲ αὐτὸν ποιεῖ- ἤσεται πᾶσιν ὑμεῖς δὲ αὐτὸν ἐποιή- a < / τε σπήλαιον λῃ- τοῖς ἔθνεσιν; ὑ- σατε σπήλαιον ᾿ fal \ a a δὲ ’ λ rn 14 στῶν. Καὶ προσῆλθον μεις ε πεποιήκατε ῃστῶν. ~ Ν 9. ᾿ Ἅ ὑτῷ τυφλοὶ καὶ χωλοὶ αὐτὸν σπήλαιον 3 ae lal Ν > / ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, καὶ ἐθερά- eens ge BOK Ἢ 5 ee 156 πευσεν αὐτούς. ἰδόν- Ν ε 5 ~ ἊΝ τες δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ aes Ἂς οἱ γραμματεῖς τὰ θαυ- a ’, ΝΥ μάσια ἃ ἐποίησεν καὶ ‘\ a Ν / τοὺς παῖδας τοὺς κρά- “ε lal ‘\ ζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ Seas λέγοντας - ὠσαννὰ TO “ / > ’ὔ υἱῷ Δαυείδ, ἠχαχάκτη- 18 λῃστῶν. Ἂν 35, καὶ ἤκου- “-“ Ν σαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Lal Ν > , γραμματεῖς, Kat ἐζή- cal x τουν πῶς αὐτὸν ἀπο- ἐφοβοῦντο aA Ν ε γὰρ αὐτόν, πᾶς γὰρ ὃ λέσωσιν" ὄχλος ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ. = Ka ἣν ὃ ΄ὔ Ἂν Pee , διδάσκων τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέ- pay ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ" οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἵ γραμ- ματεῖς ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν ἀπολέσαι καὶ οἵ πρῶ: -“ -“ A 48 τοι τοῦ λαοῦ" Kal οὐχ Ν ’, εὕρισκον τὸ τί ποιήσω- ε A Ν ν ow: ὃ λαὸς γὰρ ἅπας Ν > > 2& / = > a 3 4 16 σαν, ' καὶ εἶπαν αὐὖ- ἐξεκρέμετο αὐτοῦ ἀκού- σον a ΩΣ > ΄ , a τῷ: ἀκούεις τί οὗτοι ov. a , > - , 5 / λέγουσιν ; ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς λέγει adrois* vat: οὐδέ- / ’ mote ἀνέγνωτε" ὅτι ἐκ στόματος νηπί- Ν ’ ᾽ὔ Φ Ἐξ ων καὶ θηλαζόντων κατηρτίσω αἶνον; 8 18 etc. 15. 56:7. Comp. Jer. 7:11. b16. Ps. 8:2. Mt. 21:12. τοῦ θεοῦ Ο D Δ ἃ] it vg syrr Mc. 11:18. ἐξεπλήσσοντο NS A; ἐξεπλήσ- West.mg.; om δὲ B L cop Treg.txt. et [mg.] aero AB C DL vg Treg. West. Rey. West.txt. Rev.mg. §$ Ι Ad Ἁ 17 καὶ καταλιπὼν αὐτοὺς 19 113-115.] MATT. XXI. ἐξῆλθεν ἔξω τῆς πόλε- ws εἰς Βηθανίαν, καὶ πόλεως. ηὐλίσθη ἐκεῖ. ’ 88 καλούμενον ἐλαιών. UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. MARK XI. Kai ὅταν ὀψὲ éyéve- 87 το, ἐξεπορεύετο ἔξω τῆς 31 LuKEe XXI. 37, 38. "Hy δὲ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐν a fe fel ΄ ‘ τῷ ἱερῷ διδάσκων, τὰς δὲ νύκτας ἐξερχόμενος > / > ot A ηὐλίζετο εἰς τὸ ὄρος τὸ Ν a ε A » καὶ πᾶς ὃ λαὸς wpOpi- \ GN 3 ae as ΄ 2 A εν προς αὐτον EV TW LENW GAKOVELVY GAUTOD. t t § 114. The Barren Fig Tree withers away. [Comp. ὃ 53. ]— Between Bethany and Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Matt. XXI. 20-22. 20 Kat ἰδόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ ἐθαύμασαν λέγοντες - πῶς παραχρῆμα ἐξηράνθη Mark XI. 20-25. 20 Kat παραπορευόμενοι πρωΐ εἶδον 21 τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν. καὶ ἀναμνησθεὶς ὃ Ἱ]έτρος λέγει αὐτῷ " a Ν 3 A > ε δ. νι ε a a , 3 21 ἡ συκῆ; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ Ἰησοῦς εἷ- ῥαββεί, ἴδε ἡ συκῆ ἣν κατηράσω ἐ- 3 ων 3 Ν 4 (ΠΤ ΕῚ 3N / Ν 9 θ Ν ε Ἶ Lal πεν αὐτοῖς. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν 22 Enpavtar. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ Ἰησοῦς 3, , \ Ἂς A 9 Ne 3. aes ” ΄ θ a ἔχητε πίστιν καὶ μὴ διακριθῆτε, οὐ ἔέγει αὐτοῖς: ἔχετε πίστιν θεοῦ. ’ὔ Ν a A Ψ) > \ > Ν λέ ΓΟ 4 aA va 4 a μόνον TO τῆς συκῆς ποιήσετε, ἀλλὰ 23 ἁμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν OTL OS ἂν ETH τῷ ΕἸ a » ΄ + " + ΄ a ee \ ΄ > κἂν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ εἴπητε: ἄρθητι ὄρει τούτῳ: ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς Ἂν ’ 3 Ν ΄ Ν ΄ Ν bs a > a καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ye- τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ ΄ , 3 “a's Ν ΄ bg ἃ νήσεται" καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ ὅτι ὃ λα- Ν , 7 a 3) _ 57, tal te Ν Sane Ν a 22 Kal πάντα ὁσα av αἰτήσετε 24 λεῖ γίνεται, ἔσται αὐτῷ. διὰ τοῦτο ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ πιστεύοντες λήμ- ψεσθε. / (In λέγω ὑμῖν, πάντα ὅσα προσεύχεσθε Ν ΠῚ A θ , . 3 ’, καὶ αἰτεῖσθε, πιστεύετε ὅτι ἐλάβετε, - Ν 25 Kal , > ’ + προσευχόμενοι, ἀφίετε εἴ TL yy eon Ng) εσται υμιν. και οτὰαν στήκετε uy , ἔχετε κατά τινος, ἵνα Kal ὃ πα- ἊΝ ε “ ε > lal cal lal aA a TP ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ἀφῇ ὑμῖν TA παραπτώματα ὑμῶν. § 115. Christ’s Authority questioned. Parable of the Two Sons.—Jeru- salem. Third Day of the Week. Marr. XXI. 23-32. Mark. ΧΙ. 27-83. 2] Kat ἔρχονται πάλιν 1 Luke XX. 1-8. Καὶ ἐγένετο é a ἐγένετο ἐν μιᾷ ε “ “ εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα. καὶ τῶν ἡμερῶν διδάσκον- 3 Aue ~ fal 3 fal Ν Ν 3 εν τῳ τερῳ περιπαάτουν- τος αὐτου TOV λαὸν εν 23 ΚΚαὶ ἐλθόντος αὐτοῦ τος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν, προσῆλ- ἔρχονται Ν we N ε > πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιε- ρεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς ae a ἂς > λ TH tepw και evayyé ι- ΄ ε ζομένου ἐπέστησαν οι θον αὐτῷ διδάσκοντι οἱ ei SG ov αὐτῷ διδάσ. ἱερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμμα- Μο. 11:19. ἐξεπορεύετο δὰ C De al vg τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν A CD al vg syrr cop West.mg. Rey.txt.; ἐξεπορεύοντο ABA Reyv.mg. are Treg. West.txt. Rev.mg. Le. 20:1. ἱερεῖς A Aal; ἀρχιερεῖς S BC 26 om NBLA; εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε, οὐδὲ ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὃ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ἀφήσει D Lit vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 152 24 ουσίαν ταύτην; MATT. XXI. 9 a“ ‘\ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρε- ¢ “ σβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ λέ- , γοντες ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξου- ’ a“ “ Ν σίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς ; καὶ ’ 25 Ν 2€ τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξ- ἀπο- > =~ > κριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἷ- πεν αὐτοῖς: ἐρωτήσω eon STDIN , ¢ ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ λόγον ἕνα, a ae. ᾿ / 3 ὃν ἐάν εἴπητέ μοι, κἀ- ‘ ε “ 5 “Ὁ > 4 yw υμιν epw εν ποιρ, ’ A a Ν 20 ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ" τὸ ΄ Ἂς {5 ’ βάπτισμα τὸ ᾿Ιωάννου 46 δ . 2€ 3 a πόθεν ἦν ; ἐξ οὐρανοῦ “Δ ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ; οἱ δὲ διελογίζοντο παρ᾽ éav- tal ta oN 3, τοῖς λέγοντες " ἐὰν εἰ- > 3 aA > πωμεν" ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐ- ρεῖ ἡμῖν - διατί οὖν οὐκ Le AN 26 ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ ; ἐὰν 27 ᾿Ιωάννην. Ν 3, 5 > rd δὲ εἴπωμεν - ἐξ ἀνθρώ- πων, φοβούμεθα τὸν 5, 4 Ν ε ὄχλον " πάντες γὰρ ὡς προφήτην ἔχουσιν τὸν καὶ ἀποκρι- , a 9 a > θέντες τῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰ- > mT παν: οὐκ οἴδαμεν. 35, 5 a Ν 3 / ἔφη αὐτοῖς καὶ αὐτὸς " 3 Ἂν > Ν , ε Las οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. 28 Τί δὲ ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; 29 30 81 82 ἂν! 28 29 90 31 32 33 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM MARK ΣΙ. Ν ε ’ καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ! XN Mw > tad > καὶ ἔλεγον αὐτῷ - ἐν ’, an ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα rn \ ’ Ν ποιεῖς; ἢ τίς σοι τὴν 3 , 4 3} ἐξουσίαν ταύτην ἔδω- κεν ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς; ΑΞ a > 3 ὃ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐ- τοῖς " ἐπερωτήσω ὑμᾶς με i \ 23 , eva λόγον, καὶ ἀποκρί- la lod “ θητέ HOt καὶ ἐρῶ ὑμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ 3 , 2€ > aS Ἰωάννου ἐξ οὐρανοῦ nv > > , > ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ; ἀπο- , ‘ κρίθητέ μοι. καὶ διελο- A Ν γίζοντο πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς λέγοντες - ἐὰν εἴπωμεν " 5 3 ΦᾺ ς.3 a ὃ ΄, ες ουρᾶάνου, ερει" ιᾶατι 5 , οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε “~ 5 ‘\ + αὐτῷ ; ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν " τῶ βοῦντο τὸν λαόν: ἅ- , ἐξ arti 27 ἢ παντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν 7 ᾿Ιωάννην ὄντως OTL προ- φήτης ἦν. θέντες τῷ Ἰησοῦ λέ- Ν καὶ ἀποκρι- γουσιν: οὐκ οἴδαμεν. ae, 9 fal λέ 3 καὶ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγει av- ϑ9ῸΝ > Ν , οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω en 5 , 2 ΄ υμιν εν ποιᾳ εςουσίᾳ τοῖς" ταῦτα ποιῶ. [Part VII. LUKE XX. tal \ »“" τεῖς σὺν τοῖς πρεσβυ- la ! Ν > / τέροις, | καὶ εἶπαν Ae γοντες πρὸς αὐτὸν " εἰ- Ἀ e ala , ὦ» mov ἡμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξου- ΄ a cal nv , σίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς, ἢ τίς > c , Ἂς ἐστιν ὃ δούς σοι τὴν > , , > ἐξουσίαν ταύτην ; ἀπο- \ 5 κριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν πρὸς 3ι , > 4 ες - αὐτούς - ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς 3 ἣν / ἮΝ my” , κἀγὼ λόγον, καὶ εἴπατέ μοι" ᾿ς , Ν τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ 3 ’, 3 3 ey Φ Τωάννου ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἣν av ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων; ot δὲ συνελογίσαντο πρὸς ἕ- ‘ / 7 ἽΝ αυτοὺς λέγοντες OTL ἐὰν 3, > 3 Le) εἴπωμεν: ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐπι- 2 An , > ερει" διατί ουκ Ψ, nw LN στεύσατε αὐτῷ; ἐὰν 5 , ἐξ ἀνθρώ- [ Ν ε Ν πων, ὃ λαὸς ἁπὰς κα- ee δὲ ELT WILEV * ταλιθάσει ἡμᾶς: πε- πεισμένος γάρ ἐστιν » ΄ , > Ἰωάννην προφητὴν εἰ- ναι. καὶ ἀπεκρίθησαν ‘ 2997 , Ν μὴ εἰδέναι πόθεν. καὶ Ce cal > > ta) ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὑτοῖς * SON Ἴθι δας ’ ες a > οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. + 6 > ΄ δ ἠ Χϑὴ « ΄ > ΩΝ ΄ σ , GVUPWTOS ELYEV TEKVA OVO* TPOTEAUWY TO πρώτῳ ELTEV TEKVOY, UTAYE σήμερον 5 , 3 “a 3 lal ἐργάζου ἐν τῷ ἀμπελῶνι. θεὶς ἀπῆλθεν. ὃ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν - οὐ θέλω, ὕστερον μεταμελη- BLN, 7, Ν 3 3 A ἐγὼ κύριε, καὶ οὐκ ἀπῆλθεν. ! -“ δὲ ae / > e , προσελθῶν δὲ TO ἑτέρῳ εἶπεν ὡσαύτως. ς δ ὃ δέ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν " ’ > lal , > , Ν , a Ἂν τις εκ τῶν δύο predict TO θέλημα του TATPOS ; GR de ὃ ypu λέγε αὐτοῖς ὃ Ἰησοῦς" ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι οἱ τελῶναι καὶ αἱ πόρναι προάγουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν βασίλειον τοῦ θεοῦ. ἦλθεν γὰρ Ἰωάννης πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης, καὶ οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ " οἱ δὲ τελῶναι καὶ at 5 ἐπί. αν αὐτῷ" ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰδόντ' ὺ λήθ ὕστερον τοῦ πι- πορναι επιστευσαν UTw υμεις € lOOVTES OU μετεμε. 7) YTE Vv ρ' ἴω > - στευσαι αὐτῳ. Me. 11 : 32. θρώπων, Treg. Rev.txt. Mt. 21:28. προσελθὼν S* LZ cop; pm καὶ Se BC D vg syrr Treg. West.mg. Rev. ἀνθρώπων ; West. Rev.mg. ; 80 ἑτέρῳ S* C* D A al it vg syrr; Sev- τέρῳ Se BC? L Z Treg. West. Rev. 32 ob} SC LAal; οὐδὲ B 1 83 it vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev.; om D. ον, ἘΣ = ~ 88 115, 116.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 133 § 116. Parable of the Wicked Husbandmen. — Jerusalem. Mart. XXI. 33-46. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 vav. » N AAXAnv παραβολὴν ἀκούσατε. ἄνθρωπος > 3 , cA ἣν οἰκοδεσπότης, ὅστις > , 3 an ἐφύτευσεν ἀμπελῶνα, ἣς Ν 3 tal Kal φραγμὸν αὐτῷ πε- 4 Sy 3 ριέθηκεν καὶ ὥρυξεν ἐν ΠΕΡ αὶ A Ν 3 Pe: αὐτῷ ληνὸν καὶ wKodd- μὴσεν πύργον, καὶ ἐξέ- δετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς, Nes , μὴ Ν καὶ ἀπεδήμησεν. ὅτε δὲ ἤγγισεν ὃ καιρὸς τῶν καρπῶν, ἀπέστειλεν \ / > a τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς γεωργοὺς λα- βεῖν τοὺς καρποὺς αὐὖ- τοῦ. καὶ λαβόντες οἱ Ν \ ΄ γεωργοὶ τοὺς δούλους > a a Ν "Ὁ αὐτοῦ ὃν μὲν ἔδειραν, a δὲ 3 if ἃ δὲ ὃν δὲ ἀπέκτειναν, ὃν δὲ ἐλιθοβόλησαν. πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δού- λους πλείονας τῶν πρώ- των, καὶ ἐποίησαν ai- τόϊς ὡσαύτως. σ ὕστερον he) , ἧς 9- δὲ ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὖ- τοὺς τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ, / , λέγων’ ἐντραπήσονται = Ν ot δὲ \ ἰὃ ΄ Ν γεώωργοι tOoOVTES TOV Ν εἰ τον VLOV μου. εν Φ 2 ε a υἱὸν εἶπον ἐν ἑαυτοῖς " eo / > ε / οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ κληρονό- μος" δεῦτε ἀποκτείνω- μεν αὐτὸν καὶ σχῶμεν τὴν κληρονομίαν αὖς- τοῦ. καὶ λαβόντες αὖ- τὸν ἐξέβαλον ἔξω τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος καὶ ἀπέκτει- ε ὅταν οὖν ἔλθῃ ὃ Third Day of the Week. Mark XII. 1-12. Kai ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν. ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐ- φύτευσεν, καὶ περιέθη- κεν φραγμόν καὶ ὦρυ- ξεν ὑπολήνιον καὶ ᾧκο- δόμησεν πύργον, καὶ γεωρ- γοῖς, καὶ ἀπεδήμησεν. ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν καὶ ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς τοὺς γεωργοὺς τῷ και- ρῷ δοῦλον, ἵνα παρὰ γεωργῶν λάβῃ ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν τοῦ λα- / rh δι 3, βόντες αὐτὸν ἔδειραν τῶν 3 a Ἁ ἀμπελῶνος - καὶ Ν > 4 , καὶ ἀπέστειλαν KEVOV. Ν A >’ / καὶ πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἄλλον δοῦ- > Lal > ov: κἀκεῖνον ἐκεφα- λίωσαν καὶ ἠτίμασαν. καὶ ἄλλον ἀπέστειλεν " wn , κἀκεῖνον ἀπέκτειναν, καὶ πολλοὺς ἄλλους, a Ν ! ν ods μὲν δέροντες, οὕς δέ ἀποκτέννοντες. ἔτι Ψ ” εν > ἕνα εἴχεν υἱὸν ἀγαπη- , > / 3 ‘\ TOV’ ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν ἔσχατον πρὸς αὐτοὺς , ΄ λέγων ὅτι ἐντραπήσον- Ἀ / ται TOV υἱόν μου. ἐκεῖ- Ν 6 Ν A vou δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸς ε Ν > “ e [) ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν ὅτι οὗτός ε ,ὔ ἐστιν ὃ κληρονόμος" δεῦτε ἀποκτείνωμεν av= / Ν ε lal 4 e TOV, καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ J, κληρονομία. A , καὶ λαβόν- , ’ τες ἀπέκτειναν αὐτόν, νὰ / ‘\ δι καὶ ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω a lo , 9 τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος. τί ποι- 9 10 11 12 19 14 1ὅ Luke XX. 9-19. 4 Hpéaro δὲ πρὸς τὸν λαὸν λέγειν τὴν παρα- Ν ΄ 4 βολὴν ταύτην. ἄνθρω- mos ἐφύτευσεν ἀμπε- λῶνα καὶ ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν ξ γεωργοῖς, καὶ ἀπεδή- μῆσεν χρόνους ἱκανούς. Ν a > , καὶ καιρῷ ἀπέστειλεν γεωργοὺς n 7 3 Ν “Ὁ δοῦλον, ἵνα ἀπὸ τοῦ πρὸς τοὺς καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος δώσουσιν αὐτῷ" οἱ δὲ Ν 55 , γεωργοὶ ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν δείραντες κενόν. καὶ προσέθετο ἕτερον πέμψαι δοῦλον - ot δὲ κἀκεῖνον δείραντες καὶ 3 / 2& ld ἀτιμάσαντες ἐξαπέ- στειλαν κενόν. καὶ προσέθετο τρίτον πέμ- ψαι" οἱ δὲ καὶ τοῦτον ’ 547 τραυματίσαντες ἐξέβα- λον. “» 3 lal , ος τοῦ aGumeA@VOs* τί 7m Nye , εἶπεν δὲ ὁ κύρι- ΄ ,ὔ Ν ποιήσω; πέμψω τὸν / υἱόν μου τὸν ἀγαπη- , ¥ τόν: ἴσως τοῦτον ἐν- τραπήσονται. ἰδόντες δὲ Leas «ε Ν ὃ € αὐτὸν οἱ γεωργοὶ δι- ἐλογίζοντο πρὸς ἀλλή- λους λέγοντες - οὗτός 5 ε ’ὔ; ἐστιν ὃ κληρονόμος" ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, ν a ἵνα ἡμῶν γένηται ἡ ’ As κληρονομία. καὶ ἐκβα- λόντες αὐτὸν ἔξω τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος ἀπέκτειναν. ’ὔ > 4 > a TL OVV ποιήσει AVTOLS 184 MATT. ΧΧΙ. , a 3. cal κύριος TOU ἀμπελῶνος, ’ “- τί ποιήσει τοῖς γεωρ- 41 γοῖς ἐκείνοις ; λέγου- σιν αὐτῷ. κακοὺς κα- “ > / 3 ΄, κῶς ἀπολέσει αὑτούς, \ Ν 3 r 5 καὶ τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἐκ- MARK XII. , c 4 αν Ὁ ήσει ὃ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπε- λῶνος ; ἐλεύσεται καὶ Ν ἀπολέσει τοὺς γεωρ- , \ , aN > yous, καὶ δώσει τὸν ἀμ- πελῶνα ἄλλοις. , ΝΜ : σ > ’ δώσεται ἄλλοις γεωργοῖς, οἵτινες ἀποδώ- a“ Ν Ν lal lal σουσιν αὐτῷ τοὺς καρποὺς ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς 42 αὐτῶν. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ > a 3 / 3 {4 Ἰησοῦς" οὐδέποτε ἀνέ- yore ἐν ταῖς γρα- φαῖς-" λίθον 9 ΄ ε ἀπεδοκίμασαν οι ἃ Ov οἰκοδομοῦντες, = 3 ΄ 3 οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας: παρὰ κυρίου ἐγέ- καὶ VETO αὕτη, 3, Ἂς ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡ- 48 μῶν; διὰ τοῦτο λέγω 45 46 αὐτῶν λέγει . ὁ πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὸν λίθον τοῦτον συνθλασθήσεται" ὑμῖν ὅτι ἀρθήσεται ἀφ᾽ 10 11 WANS Στ οὐδὲ THV γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέ- γνωτε" " λίθον ὃν 3 ’ ε ἀπεδοκίμασαν ot οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας" παρὰ κυρίου ἐγέ- καὶ VETO αὕτη ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡ- μων; ὑμῶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ δοθή- \ \ σεται ἔθνει ποιοῦντι τους καρπους αὐτῆς. 5 4 δὲ ἀκούσαντες δὲ e '3 ~ Q ε οἵ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φα- ral Ν Ἂς ρισαῖοι τὰς παραβολὰς “ \ αὐτοῦ ἔγνωσαν ὅτι περὶ καὶ ζη- τοῦντες αὐτὸν κρατῆ- \ σαι ἐφοβήθησαν τοὺς 12 καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν xAov: ἔγνωσαν γὰρ χ " TOV O- .“ Ν 3 Ν ‘ OTL πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν > \ παραβολὴν εἶπεν. καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν ἀπῆλ- ὄχλους, ἐπεὶ εἰς προ- θον. φήτην αὐτὸν εἶχον. 2 42 etc. *Ps. 118: 22. 16 17 18 19 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. LUKE XX. ε v4 “Ὁ 5 Ὁ ὃ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶ- νος; ἐλεύσεται καὶ ἀπολέσει τοὺς γεωρ- Ψ OVS τούτους, καὶ δώσει 3 τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις. 3 ΄΄ Ν > ἀκούσαντες δὲ εἶπαν " Ἂν μὴ γένοιτο. ὃ δὲ ἐμ- βλέψας αὐτοῖς εἶπεν " τί οὖν ἐστὶν τὸ γεγραμ- μένον τοῦτο" λίθον ἃ 3 , ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν ot οἰκοδομοῦν- τες, οὗτος ἐγενή- θη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας; A ee A πᾶς ὃ πεσὼν ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν λίθον συνθλασθήσεται: ἐφ᾽ a ὃ᾽ Ἃ / ΄ ὃν δ᾽ ἂν πέσῃ, λικμήσει αι νον, τ ν 9“. 5 αὐτόν." καὶ ἐζήτησαν οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἵ ἀρχιερεῖς ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας ἐν αὖ- an a 9 Ae: 4 τῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ, καὶ ἐφοβή- θησαν τὸν λαόν - ἔγνω- Ν σαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὖ- τοὺς εἶπεν τὴν παρα- Ἂν 4 βολὴν ταύτην. b 18. Comp. Is. 8:14 sq.; Zech. 12:3; Dan. 2:34 sq., 44 sq. Mt. 21:44. om D33it5 Or[Rev.mg.]; καὶ al vg cop syrr Aug Treg.txt. et [mg-] ἐφ᾽ ὃν δ᾽ ἂν πέσῃ λικμήσει αὐτόν. SBCZAS [West.] Rev.txt. §§ 116-118.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 135 § 117. Parable of the Marriage of the King’s Son. — Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Marr. ΧΧΙ͂Ι, 1.-14. ἈΝ A a a 12 Kai ἀποκριθεὶς 6 Ἰησοῦς πάλιν εἶπεν ἐν παραβολαῖς αὐτοῖς, λέγων - ' ὧμοι- 14 , 2 i, a > a , Aes , ΄ a « wy ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ βασιλεῖ, ὅστις ἐποίησεν γάμους τῷ υἱῷ > cal ἣν a αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἀπέστειλεν τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ καλέσαι τοὺς κεκλημένους εἰς TOUS / \ a γάμους, καὶ οὐκ ἤθελον ἐλθεῖν. πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δούλους λέγων - εἴ- Ἁ / an mare τοῖς κεκλημένοις " ἰδοὺ TO ἄριστόν μου ἡτοίμακα, οἱ ταῦροί μου Kal τὰ σι- Ν a τιστὰ τεθυμένα, Kal πάντα ἕτοιμα - δεῦτε cis τοὺς γάμους. οἱ δὲ ἀμελήσαντες 2A 6. a Ν 3 Ν + > , a Ν > Ν 2 / 3 a ε Ν Ν ἀπῆλθον, ὃς μὲν εἰς τὸν ἴδιον ἀγρόν, ὃς δὲ εἰς τὴν ἐμπορίαν αὐτοῦ - οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ ’ Ν ΄ > - Ὁ ΕΣ , ε Ν Ν > κρατήσαντες τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ ὕβρισαν Kal ἀπέκτειναν. ὃ δὲ βασιλεὺς ὠρ- / a a γίσθη, καὶ πέμψας τὰ στρατεύματα αὐτοῦ ἀπώλεσεν τοὺς φονεῖς ἐκείνους καὶ τὴν / a fal ΄ a . ΄’ὔ πόλιν αὐτῶν ἐνέπρησεν. τότε λέγει τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ: ὃ μὲν γάμος ἕτοιμός 3 ε yA ye > a μ᾿ ΄ js eEN x af “- ἐστιν, οἱ δέ κεκλημένοι οὐκ ἦσαν ἄξιοι. πορεύεσθε οὖν ἐπὶ τὰς διεξόδους τῶν enn NPS. ΕΣ ως , > \ / Nie 4 Ce Nera ὁδῶν, καὶ ὅσους ἐὰν εὕρητε καλέσατε εἰς TOUS γάμους. Kal ἐξελθόντες οἱ δοῦλοι ἐκεῖνοι εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς συνήγαγον πάντας ὅσους εὗρον, πονηρούς τε καὶ ἀγαθούς, καὶ ἐπλήσθη ὃ νυμφὼν ἀνακειμένων. εἰσελθὼν δὲ ὃ βασιλεὺς θεάσασθαι τοὺς 3 , 39. SNe > > ὃ ΄ > ὃ ΄ Ν ’ ἀνακειμένους εἶδεν ἐκεῖ avOpwrov οὐκ ἐνδεδυμένον ἔνδυμα γάμου. καὶ λέγει > Ay: ε a a 5 ηλθ 50 NES, evo 4, A ε δὲ > 40 / ε αὐτῷ - ἑταῖρε, πῶς εἰσῆλθες ὧδε μὴ ἔχων ἔνδυμα γάμου ; O δὲ ἐφιμώθη. τότε ὃ Ἁ 4 “a , / 3 a / \ Lal 5 ΄ 9 Ἂν βασιλεὺς εἶπεν τοῖς διακόνοις - δήσαντες αὐτοῦ πόδας καὶ χεῖρας ἐκβάλετε αὐτὸν > Ν , - 2¢ / 5 ἊΝ ε Ν NX, .¢€ ἊΝ lal 5 / εἰς TO σκότος TO ἐξώτερον: ἐκεῖ ἔσται 6 κλαυθμὸς Kal 6 βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. πολλοὶ γάρ εἰσιν κλητοί, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεκτοί. 8. 118. Insidious Question of the Pharisees: Tribute to Cesar. — Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Mart. XXII. 15-22. Mark XII. 13-17. Luke XX. 20-26. 15 Tore πορευθέντες οἱ 20 Kai παρατηρήσαν- Φαρισαῖοι συμβούλιον τες ἀπέστειλαν ἐνκαθέ- ἔλαβον ὅπως αὐτὸν ma- 18 Kat ἀποστέλλουσιν τους ὑποκρινομένους a wy γιδεύσωσιν ἐν λόγῳ. πρὸς αὐτὸν τινὰς τῶν ἑαυτοὺς δικαίους εἶναι, 16 καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν ai- Φαρισαίων καὶ τῶν ἵνα ἐπιλάβωνται αὐτοῦ a Ν Ν 9. A «ε lal 9 SON Xo 7 ὃ a τῷ τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτῶν Ηρωδιανῶν, ἵνα αὐτὸν ὄγου, ὥστε παραδοῦ- δ Σ cal ε “ 9 va ἐς ΝΥ 3 \ ”“~ 3 a Ν μετὰ τῶν ἫἩρωδιανῶν 14 ἀγρεύσωσιν λόγῳ. καὶ ναι αὐτὸν τῇ ἀρχῇ καὶ λέγοντας - διδάσκαλε, ἐλθόντες λέγουσιν αὐ- τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ τοῦ ἡγεμό- οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς εἶ τῷ: διδάσκαλε, οἴδα- 21 νος. καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν Ν Ν εν A a . 3 Ν mm \ IN is ΄, καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ θεοῦ μεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς εἶ καὶ αὐτὸν λέγοντες - διδά- ἐν ἀληθείᾳ διδάσκεις, ov μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδε- σκαλε, οἴδαμεν ὅτι ὁρ- καὶ οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ νός " οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις θῶς λέγεις καὶ διδά- οὐδενός, οὐ γὰρ βλέ- εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώ- σκεις καὶ οὐ λαμβά- ᾽ Wels εἰς πρόσωπον ἀν- πων, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας νεις πρόσωπον, ἀλλ Mt. 92:10. νυμφὼν δὲ B* L Treg.mg.; γάμος B™S C D A & al Treg.txt. Rey. 186 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VIL. MATT. XXII. MARK XII. "LUKE Ἀπ᾿ ΄ 3 κ A a 17 θρώπων- εἰπὸν οὖν ἧς- τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ θεοῦ διδά- ἐπ’ ἀληθείας τὴν ὁδὸν pv, τί σοὶ δοκεῖ; ἔξ- σκεις: ἔξεστιν κῆνσον 22 τοῦ θεοῦ διδάσκεις " ἔξ- a a s a Ἅ a ἐστιν δοῦναι κῆνσον Καίσαρι δοῦναι ἢ οὔ; ἐστιν ἡμᾶς Καίσαρι ΄ Ἃ " X a a Ἂ a ε , as x 4 18 Καίσαρι ἢ ov; γνοὺς 15 δῶμεν ἢ μὴ δῶμεν; ὃ φόρον δοῦναι ἢ οὔ; δὲ er na A δὲ ἰδὰ 7 A Ἂς ἐπὶ , / δὲ s,s A € 0 ᾿Ιησοῦς τὴν πονη- € LOWY GUTWY Τὴν VTO- 28 κατανοῆσας OE αὕτων a “5 a , > ρίαν αὐτῶν εἶπεν - Ti με κρισιν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τί τὴν πανουργίαν εἶπεν ΄ ε , “A , ΄ Ν 3 ΄ , / πειράζετε, ὑποκριταί; με πειράζετε; φέρετέ 24 πρὸς αὐτούς: δείξατέ 9 ὃ ΄ ’ὔ Ν ’, ὃ , 7 10 ὃ , , 19 ἐπιδείξατέ μοι TO νό- μοι δηνάριον ἵνα ἴδω. μοι δηνάριον. τίνος a ΄ ε ε δὲ * Ν Ζ 3 ΓΘ Ὁ ae μισμα τοῦ κηνσου. οἱ 16 οἱ O€ νεγκαν. και λέ: EXEL ELKOVG καὶ ἐπιγρα- ‘ s > lal 3 cal 7 ε > 7, ε Ny oe , δὲ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ γει αὐτοῖς - τίνος ἡ εἰ- φήν ; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν - Καί- , κ ΄ > \ 7 Ἂν Ων 9 ear κ“ ν 20 δηνάριον. και λέγει αὺ- κων αὐτὴ καὶ ἢ ETLypa- 25 σαρος. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν προς Cal c a“ , if ΄ ε δὲ > > a“ 9 , ’ 5 / τοῖς ὃ Ἰησοῦς - τίνος 7 oy; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ" αὐτούς - τοίνυν ἀπόδο- ω , > “ εἰκὼν αὕτη καί ἡ ἐπι- 17 Καίσαρος. 6 δὲ Ἰησοῦς τε τὰ Καίσαρος Kai- > = , 21 γραφή; λέγουσιν: Καί εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - τὰ Kai- σαρι καὶ τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ ͵ Ψ, 3 > / , a a L 2 τῶν σαρος. τότε λέγει ai- σαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσα- 26 τῷ θεῷ. καὶ οὐκ ἴσχυ- a evan > Ἢ \ κ a θ A a > , > τοῖς. ἀπόδοτε οὖν τὰ ρι καὶ τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ τῷ σαν ἐπιλαβέσθαι av- ἐν ν “ Ἂς ’ cal Καίσαρος Καίσαρι καὶ θεῷ. καὶ ἐξεθαύμαζον. τοῦ ῥήματος ἐναντίον x a ae a \ ais kare a aA A \ ΄ 22 τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ τῷ θεῷ. καὶ ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ. τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ θαυμά- ἀκούσαντες ἐθαύμασαν, σαντες ἐπὶ τῇ ἀποκρί- Ν 5 ld > Ν 3 io 3 πον τὶ 4 καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν ἀπῆλθαν. σει αὐτοῦ ἐσίγησαν. § 119. Insidious Question of the Sadducees: The Resurrection. —Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Mart. XXII. 23-33. Marx XII. 18-27. Luke XX. 27-40. 235 Ev ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέᾳ 18 Καὶ ἔρχονται Sad- 27 ΤΠροσελθόντες δέ τι- προσῆλθον αὐτῷ Sad- δουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, νες τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, δουκαῖοι λέγοντες μὴ οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνά- οἱ ἀντιλέγοντες ἄνά- εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, καὶ στασιν μὴ εἶναι, καὶ στασιν μή εἶναι, ἐπη- 24 ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν ' λέ- ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγον. 28 ρώτησαν αὐτὸν ' λέ- γοντες " διδάσκαλε, 19 τες" | διδάσκαλε, Μω- γοντες" διδάσκαλε, Μωῦσῆς εἶπεν ἐάν dons ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν," Mwions ἔγραψεν ἡ- τις ἀποθάνῃ μὴ ὅτε ἐάν τινος ἀ- piv, €@y | Tomes ἔχων τέκνα, ἐπι- δελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ ἀδελφὸς ἀποθά- γαμβρεύσει ὃ ἀ- καὶ καταλίπῃ γυ- vn ἔχων γυναῖ- δελφὸς αὐτοῦ vatka καὶ μὴ ἀ- κα, καὶ οὗτος ἄ- τὴν γυναῖκα αὖ- φῇ τέκνον, ἵνα TEKVOS ἣν tva τοῦ Kal ἀναστή- λάβῃ ὃ ἀδελφὸς λάβῃ 6 ἀδελφὸς 224 etc. Deut. 25:5. Mc. 12:15. ἰδὼν (εἰδ- Ὁ) S* D 69 2re; 27 ἀντιλέγοντες A Avg; λέγοντες NBC εἰδὼς SC A B C LA vg cop syrr Treg. West. DL 1 33 cop Treg. West. Rev. Rey. Mt. 22:23. λέγοντες S* B D Z Rev. Le. 20:26. αὐτοῦ pr A Ο D al vg al; (Am.mg.); pm of N* L al vg cop Rev. (Am. τοῦ δ ΒΤ, Treg.mg. West. Rev. txt.) § 119.] 26 26 27 28 29 30 31 MATT. XXII. wel σπέρμα ἀδελφῷ “~ TW Ἢ αὐτοῦ. ἡμῖν ε ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοί καὶ ὃ Φ ἦσαν δὲ παρ᾽ lol , 5 4 πρῶτος γήμας ἐτελεύ- THOEV, καὶ μὴ ἔχων / > “ \ σπέρμα ἀφῆκεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ τῷ ἀ- Pees , ὕστερον δὲ πάντων ἀπέ- θανεν ἣ γυνή. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει οὖν τίνος cal ε \ m” / TOV ἑπτὰ ἔσται γυνή ; πάντες γὰρ ἔσχον αὐὖ- / τήν. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ > n > . A Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" nan ’ πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες Ν Ν δὲ A τὰς γραφὰς pyde τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ θεοῦ. ἐν γὰρ τῇ ἀναστάσει οὔ- τε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γα- μίζονται, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἀγ- ἴω 5 ~ 3 γέλοι θεοῦ ἐν τῷ οὐρα- Lal ΓῚ 4 vo εἰσιν. Ν Ν “ περι δὲ τὴς ἀναστάσεως τῶν γε- κρῶν οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τὸ ε Ἃς ε Lal ε Ν nw θ ῥηθὲν ὑμῖν ὑπὸ τοῦ θε- οὔ λέγοντος - * 20 21 22 29 24 25 26 MARK XII. αὐτοῦ τὴν γυ- ναῖκα καὶ ἐξανα- αστήση σπέρμα ἀδελφῷ αὐ- ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ \ ε a καὶ ὁ πρῶτος τῷ t TOV. ἧσαν * ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα, καὶ ΄΄ a ἀποθνήσκων οὐκ ἀφῆ- κεν σπέρμα. καὶ ὃ δεύτερος ἔλαβεν αὐτήν, Ν καὶ ἀπέθανεν μὴ κατα- / Ν λιπὼν σπέρμα" καὶ ὃ Ν τρίτος ὡσαύτως - καὶ οἱ ε / > > A , ἑπτά οὐκ ἀφῆκαν σπέρ- μα. Ν ε / 3 / και Ἴ γυνή ἀπέθανεν. Ψ ἐσχάτον πάντων 9 “ > 4 7 ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, ὅταν al , > Lal ἀναστῶσιν, Tivos αὐτῶν Ν οἱ γὰρ ε Ν »” 5 XN επτα εσχον αὐτὴν Ws ἔσται γυνή; lol 5 > a“ ε ναῖκα. ἔφη αὐτοῖς ὃ 3 ““ 5 ‘ a Ἰησοῦς - οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε μὴ εἰδότες wy Ν Ν Ν τὰς γραφὰς μηδὲ τὴν A “ 4 δύναμιν τοῦ θεοῦ; ὅταν γὰρ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῶ- σιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται, αλλ’ εἰσὶν c δ > “ 3 ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐ- ρανοῖς. ΝΣ Ν tal περὶ δὲ TOV νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται, οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ oo \ βίβλῳ Moitoéws ἐπὶ a ΄, a a ἊΝ τοῦ βάτου" πῶς εἶπεν 8. 81 etc. Hx. 3: 6. UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 29 137 LUKE XX. αὐτοῦ τὴν γυ- vatka καὶ ἐξανα- 4 στήσῃ σπέρμα ἀδελφῷ ἑπτὰ οὖν ἀδελ- ae ῷ α υ = τοῦ. Ν Φ Ν ε na pot ἧσαν. καὶ ὃ πρῶ- τος λαβὼν γυναῖκα ἀ- ,͵ 80 πέθανεν ἄτεκνος - καὶ ὃ 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 ὃ , J oa “2 evtepos ! καὶ ὃ τρίτος Ui es ε ΄ὔ ἔλαβεν αὐτήν, ὡσαύτως δ \ e ε Ν 3 / δὲ καὶ OL ἑπτὰ οὐ κατέ- ! ’ὔ Ν λιπον τέκνα καὶ ἀπέ- θανον. 7 Nee VOTEPOV και Ἴ ε ἡ γυ- “ > τῇ ἀναστά- « δ ν / γυνὴ ἀπέθανεν. Ν > νὴ οὖν ἐν 4 ral σει τίνος αὐτῶν yive- , ε ται γυνή; οἱ γὰρ ἑπτὰ Yi Ν na ἔσχον αὐτὴν γυναῖκα. \ 3 > n (et) καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιη- ἴω ε Ν a σοῦς - οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ ai- nr , n @vos τούτου γαμοῦσιν ΡΟΝ ,ὕ | ε δὲ καὶ γαμίσκονται, | οἱ δὲ ἐς: θέ “ 5“ καταξιωθέντες τοῦ αἰῶ- Ἂ lal XN vos ἐκείνου τυχεῖν καὶ A 5 o, nw τῆς ἀναστάσεως τῆς nw y+ n ἐκ νεκρῶν οὔτε γαμοῦ- Ν "ς σιν οὔτε γαμίζονται - » Ν 5 a ΝΜ οὔτε γὰρ ἀποθανεῖν ἔτι ͵ὔ 5 4 δύνανται, ἰσάγγελοι Ν ΠῚ XN ε 4 > yap εἶσιν, καὶ υἱοί εἰ- na 4 4 ow θεοῦ τῆς ἀναστά- [5 »” σ σεως υἱοὶ ὄντες. ὅτι Ἂ 9 4 ε , δὲ ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί, Ν “ nw ΕῚ , καὶ Mwiions ἐμήνυσεν Ν -“ ἐπὶ τῆς βάτου," ὡς Ἅ ’ὔ Ἂν Ν λέγει κύριον τὸν θεὸν ᾿Αβραὰμ καὶ θεὸν Ἴσα- Me. 12: 23. Rey. Mt. 22:30. θεοῦ (pm τοῦ L A)NLAZX Treg. West. Rev. ὅταν ἄναστῶσιν A al it?! syrP vg; om δὲ BC DLA 2833 cop Treg. West. Rey.txt. Le. 20: 36. vg cop syrr Rey.mg.; om B D 1 Treg. West. οὔτε δὰ Δ al; οὐδὲ A BDL 138 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VIL. MATT. XXII. MARK XII. LUKE XX, 32 ἐγώ εἰμι αὐτῷ ὃ θεὸς λέγων" ὰκ καὶ θεὸν Ἰακώβ" ὃ θεὸς ᾿Αβραὰμ ἐγὼ 6 θεὸς ABpa- 88 θεὸς δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νε- καὶ ὃ θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ ap καὶ 6 θεὸς Ἴ- κρῶν ἀλλὰ ζώντων " καὶ ὃ θεὸς Ἰακώβ; σαὰκ καὶ ὃ θεὸς πάντες γὰρ αὐτῷ ζῶ- οὐκ ἔστιν θεὸς νεκρῶν 27 Ἰακώβ; οὐκ ἔστιν 39 σιν. ἀποκριθέντες δέ 88 ἀλλὰ ζώντων. καὶ ἀ- ὃ θεὸς νεκρῶν ἀλλὰ τινες τῶν γραμματέων κούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἐξ- ζώντων. πολὺ πλα- εἶπαν - διδάσκαλε, κα- ἐπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ δι- νᾶσθε. 40 λῶς εἶπας. οὐκέτι γὰρ δαχῇ αὐτοῦ. ἐτόλμων ἐπερωτᾶν αὐὖ- τὸν οὐδέν. § 120. A Lawyer questions Jesus. The Two Great Commandments. — Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. 34 35 36 Marr. XXII. 34-40. Oi δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες ὅτι ἐφίμωσεν τοὺς Yaddovkaiovs, συνή- χθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν νομικὸς πειράζων αὐτόν - διδάσκαλε, ποία ἐντολὴ μεγάλη ἐν - Marx XII. 28-34. 28 Kati προσελθὼν εἷς τῶν γραμματέ- 5 Ἂς 5 “ ’ ΕΣ ων, ἀκοῦσας αὐτῶν συνζητούντων, ἰδὼν Ld Let 9 /, 5 “~ > , ὅτι καλῶς ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς, ἐπηρώτη- δ σεν αὐτόν" ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώ- 29 τὴ πάντων; ἀπεκρίθη ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς ὅτι ; ἀπεκρίθη a , ε ΝΌΟΝ a > ’ 87 τῷ νόμῳ; ἰὃ δὲ ἔφη αὐτῷ -" ἀγα- πρώτη ἐστίν" ἄκουε Ἰσραήλ, ΄ ΄ \ , , ε \ ε na , πήσεις κυριον τον θεόν σου κυριος oO θεὸς μων κυριος > HON ~ κα δί ο ᾿ς ἐ 30 = > fy. Ν 3 A , €v oO n TY P ta σου και 4 εις ἐστιν. Και ἀγαπήσεις κυ» ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ ριον τὸν θεόν σου ἐξ ὅλης “- ΄, “ > Ν , a , x es “ 88 τῇ διανοίᾳ σου. αὕτη ἐστὶν πρώ- τῆς καρδίας σου καὶ ἐξ ὅλης 39 τὴ καὶ μεγάλη ἐντολή. δευτέρα ὁμοία τῆς ψυχῆς σου καὶ €€ ὅλης Ἂν ἴσο, ἢ 3 , x nN, a ὃ ip Ν > ὅλ αὐτῇ: " ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλη- τῆς διανοίας σου καὶ €€ ὅλης , ε , > , a > ΄ ὃ , σ΄ b 40 σίον gov ὡς σεαυτον. ἐν Tav- 8] τῆς ἰσχυος TOV. δευτέρα αὐτὴ" ra \ > “ Lg ε 4 3 z, Ν ΄, ταις ταῖς δυσὶν ἐντολαῖς ὅλος 6 νόμος ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου 4 ὶ οἱ ῆται DS σεαυτόν εἰζων τούτων ἀλλ κρέμαται καὶ οἱ προφῆται. ὡς . μεί ἢ 28 ἐντολὴ οὐκ ἔστιν. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὃ γραμματεύς" καλῶς, διδάσκαλε, ἐπ’ ἀληθείας εἶπες ὅτι εἷς ἐστὶν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν 88 ἄλλος πλὴν αὐτοῦ. καὶ τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος, καὶ τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν περισ- ra \ 6 “ Ν ε 3 84 σότερόν ἐστιν πάντων τῶν ὁλοκαυτωμάτων καὶ τῶν θυσιῶν. καὶ ὃ ᾿ἴησους, ΕΣ | 7 “A 3 4 > SEAN > eS = a) Ν “a , ἰδὼν αὐτὸν ὅτι νουνεχῶς ἀπεκρίθη, εἶπεν αὐτῷ - οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλείας ἴω a Ν 3 Ν 5 4 > / > Ἂς 3 a τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα αὐτὸν ἐπερωτῆσαι. ® 37 etc. Deut. 6: 4, 5. b 39 etc. Lev. 19:18. 28 ἰδὼν S* C DL 1 69 vg syrr; εἰδὼς Ne ABA al cop Treg.mg. West. Rey. Mt. 22:39. δευτέρα δὰ Β ; add δὲ DLA al it vg cop syrr Treg. Rey. αὐτῇ 133 69 al it vg cop syrr West.mg. Rev.mg.; αὕτη ΕἸ F al West.txt. Rev.txt. ; om B. Mt. 22:32. θεὸς νεκρῶν S D; pmb BL A133 cop Treg. [West.] Rev.; 6 θεὸς θεὸς ver. Σ al, Mec. 12:27. ὁ θεὸς S A C al West.mg. ; om 6B DLA Treg. West.txt. Rev. —- §§ 119-122] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 139 8 121. How is Christ the Son of David ? — Jerusalem. Marr. XXII. 41-46. 41 42 43 44 45 46 Συνηγμένων δὲ τῶν Φαρισαίων ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς | λέ- yov: τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ πε- ρὶ τοῦ Χριστοῦ; τίνος υἱός ἐστιν; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ - τοῦ Δαυείδ. λέ- γει αὐτοῖς: πῶς οὖν Δαυεὶδ ἐ 7 αυεὶδ ἐν πνεύματι κα- al 4 De. Δ ΄ λεῖ κύριον αὐτόν, λέ- 5 ,’ γων :* Ἱ εἶπεν κύ- nw 4 ριος τῷ κυρίῳ μου" κάθου ἐκ δε- “- \ ξιῶν pov ἕως av Lan Ν > 4 θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν a > = ποδῶν Gov. εἰ ow Δαυεὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν κύ- ριον, πῶς υἱὸς αὐτοῦ > ’ \ > a > , ἐστίν ; Kal οὐδεὶς ἐδύ- vato ἀποκριθῆναι αὐὖ- 80 36 37 Third Day of the Week. Mark XII. 35-37. Kai ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ ᾽Ἴη- σοῦς ἔλεγεν διδάσκων > “ε a nr , ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ: πῶς λέ- t Pe γουσιν ol γραμματεῖς 7 ε Ν ev ὁτι ὃ Χριστὸς υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν; αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ εἶπεν ἐν τῷ .« 4 Led ε / 2 πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ > ε 4 ~ elTEev ὁ κύριος τῷ κυρίῳ μου: κά- θ ἐκ δεξιῶ ου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 9 a an \ ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς > ’ ε ἐχθρούς σου ὕπο- 4 o cal TOOLOV TOV ποδῶν gov. αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν κύριον, καὶ / 3 ἴω > \ e πόθεν αὐτοῦ ἐστὶν vi- ΄' A Ν 5, 0s; καὶ 0 πολὺς ὄχλος »” > ne: / ἤκουεν αὐτοῦ ἡδέως. 41 42 48 44 LUKE XX. 41-44, Hizey δὲ πρὸς av- 4 ἴω / τούς. πῶς λέγουσιν τὸν Χριστὸν εἶναι Διαυ- Ν , εὶδ υἱόν ; αὐτὸς γὰρ Ἂν, / > , Δαυεὶδ λέγει ἐν βίβλῳ a a > ε ψαλμῶν - εὖπεν oO Ἃ a 7 κύριος TO κυρίῳ , > μου: κάθου ἐκ δε- ξιῶν μου ' ἕως ἂν Qn ἊΝ > , θὼ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου. Ν > Δαυεὶδ οὖν κύριον αὖ- Ν lal Ν Qn εν τὸν καλεῖ, καὶ πῶς υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἐστιν; a λό 0 ὑδὲ 2 aN ΄ ι ΕΙΣ ΤΥ Ὁ ’ a ε / > iol SN Sk Tw Aoyov, οὐδε ἐτόλμησεν TLS AT ἐκείνης τῆς ἡμέρας ἐπερωτῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐκέτι. § 122, Warnings against the Evil Example of the Scribes and Pharisees. — 38 39 ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς ' Kal πρω- 40 Marx XII. 88--40. Ν > lal tal 3 A μι Καὶ ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὑτοῦ ἔλεγεν: 45 βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων τῶν θελόντων ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν καὶ τοκαθεδρίας ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ πρωτοκλισίας ἐν τοῖς δείπνοις " “4 an a κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Luxe XX. 45-47, ε οἱ 47 8.44 οἷο. Ps. 110:1. 3 ᾿ς cal an Ακούοντος δὲ παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ εἷ- a “ / 5 Ἁ 46 πεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς - προσέχετε ἀπὸ a / a TOV γραμματέων τῶν θελόντων περι- aA > A \ / > πατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς καὶ φιλούντων ἀ- σπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς καὶ πρω- “ “-“ Ἀ τοκαθεδρίας ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ ’, > a 8 ΄ "Ὁ πρωτοκλισίας ἐν τοῖς δείπνοις, ! οἱ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν Mc. 12 : 86. ὑποπόδιον δὲ A L Δ alit vg syrr; ὑποκάτω B Ds cop West. Revy.mg. 140 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VIL. MARK XII. LUKE XX. Ν ΄, \ , \ / Ν ἊΨ καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμε- καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσεύχονται " a ν᾿ ΄ a ͵ νοι, οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρί- , κρίμα. μα. Marr. XXIII. 1-12. 12 Tore ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐλάλησεν τοῖς ὄχλοις καὶ τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ! λέγων - ἐπὶ τῆς Μωϊσέως καθέδρας ἐκάθισαν οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι. πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἐὰν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν ποιήσατε καὶ τηρεῖτε, κατὰ δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε" 4 λέγουσιν γὰρ καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσιν. δεσμεύουσιν δὲ φορτία βαρέα καὶ ἐπιτιθέασιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὥμους τῶν ἀνθρώπων, αὐτοὶ δὲ τῷ δακτύλῳ αὐτῶν οὐ θέλουσιν κινῆσαι ὅ αὐτά. πάντα δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν ποιοῦσιν πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις " 6 πλατύνουσιν γὰρ τὰ φυλακτήρια αὐτῶν καὶ μεγαλύνουσιν τὰ κράσπεδα, ' φιλοῦ- σιν δὲ τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν ἐν τοῖς δείπνοις καὶ τὰς πρωτοκαθεδρίας ἐν ταῖς συνα- 7 yoyats' καὶ τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς καὶ καλεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 8 ῥαββεί. ὑμεῖς δὲ μὴ κληθῆτε ῥαββεί: εἷς γάρ ἐστιν ὑμῶν ὃ διδάσκαλος, πάν- 9 τες δὲ ὑμεῖς ἀδελφοί ἐστε. καὶ πατέρα μὴ καλέσητε ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς - εἷς γάρ 10 ἐστιν ὑμῶν ὃ πατὴρ ὁ οὐράνιος. μηδὲ κληθῆτε καθηγηταί, ὅτι καθηγητὴς ὑμῶν 11 12 ἐστὶν εἷς ὃ Χριστός. ὃ δὲ μείζων ὑμῶν ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος. ὅστις δὲ ὑψώ- σει ἑαυτόν ταπεινωθήσεται, καὶ ὅστις ταπεινώσει ἑαυτόν ὑψωθήσεται. § 123. Woes against the Scribes and Pharisees. Lamentation over Jerusalem. [ Comp. § 51.]— Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Marr. XXIII. 13-39. \ a a “ th) , N 18 Oval δὲ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταί, ὅτι κλείετε τὴν βασιλείαν a “ “ 7 e nm τῶν οὐρανῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων - ὑμεῖς yap οὐκ εἰσέρχεσθε, οὐδὲ τοὺς εἰσ- 15 / > / > NO “ “pen (Fas ων ἃς Φ “ ε ,ὔ ἐρχομένους ἀφίετε εἰσελθεῖν. οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταί, Ν al 4 ΄ Se ὅτι περιάγετε τὴν θάλασσαν Kai τὴν ξηράν ποιῆσαι ἕνα προσήλυτον, καὶ ὅταν / ° , ie lod γένηται, ποιεῖτε αὐτὸν υἱὸν γεέννης διπλότερον ὑμῶν. SNe τὰ c Ν Ν ε 4 ὰ Ἃ 3 4 > an“ a > / > 16 Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, ὁδηγοὶ τυφλοὶ of λέγοντες - Os ἂν ὀμόσῃ ἐν τῷ ναῷ, οὐδέν ἐστιν a > A > / A“ a a lal 3 / Ν Ν / 4 Ν , 17 ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ὀμόσῃ ἐν τῷ χρυσῷ τοῦ ναοῦ, ὀφείλει. μωροὶ καὶ τυφλοί, τίς yap μεί- 5 7 ε Ν bal ε Ν ε ε / ἊΝ : a a a > , > Led 18 ζων ἐστίν, ὃ χρυσὸς ἢ ὃ ναὸς ὃ ἁγιάσας τὸν χρυσόν; καί" ὃς ἂν ὀμόσῃ ἐν τῷ i 95. 5 3 ἃ >on > ΄ > a , na? 7 > ~ 3 , θυσιαστηρίῳ οὐδέν ἐστιν - ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ὀμόσῃ ἐν τῷ δώρῳ τῷ ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ, ὀφείλει. , a a a \ / Ν 3 / Ν a ε 19 20 τυφλοί, τί γὰρ μεῖζον, τὸ δῶρον ἢ τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ ἀγιάζον τὸ δῶρον ; ἷ ὃ fal A “ > / > “ οὖν ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ ὀμνύει ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ" a a “ a a eed AY 21 22 καὶ ὃ ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ vad ὀμνύει ἐν αὐτῶ καὶ ἐν τῷ κατοικοῦντι αὐτόν - ἷ καὶ ὃ ὁμό ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ὀμνύει ἐν τῷ θρό ῦ θεοῦ καὶ ἐν τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπάνω ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ὀμνύει ἐν τῷ θρόνῳ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ ἐν τῴ ἡμένῳ αὐτοῦ. Mt. 23:4. Bapéa(pm μεγάλα 8) NLicop ὅτι κατεσθίετε τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν, καὶ προ- Rev.mg.; add καὶ δυσβάστακτα BDAalvg φάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι" διὰ τοῦτο λήψε- [Treg.] West.mg. Rev.txt. σθε περισσότερον κρίμα E A al vg*4 syrr Rev. 14 om NB DLZ1 83 it® vge4d Or; add mg.—post v. 12 E A al syrr (Steph. Treg. οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταί, West. =v. 13); post v. 13 vg*4, §§ 123, 124.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 141 MATT. XXIII. 23 Οὐ Nae Fp a \ Φ a ε Bight > ὃ a \ “δύ bat ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταί, ὅτι ἀποδεκατοῦτε τὸ ἡδύοσμον δ Ν ΄ a καὶ τὸ ἄνηθον καὶ τὸ κύμινον, Kal ἀφήκατε τὰ βαρύτερα τοῦ νόμου, τὴν κρίσιν \ eae \ \ ͵ A 7 a at. in Nog) ͵΄ ε \ 24 καὶ τὸ ἔλεος καὶ τὴν πίστιν - ταῦτα ἔδει ποιῆσαι κἀκεῖνα μὴ ἀφιέναι. ὁδηγοὶ ’ὔ’ e ὃ HAL δ Ἂ Ν XA 4 [4 > Ν ε cal 25 τυφλοί, οἱ dviAtLovres τὸν κώνωπα, THY δὲ κάμηλον καταπίνοντες. οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, n a ¢ nA γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταί, ὅτι καθαρίζετε τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ a cA a 4 cal 26 τῆς παροψίδος, ἔσωθεν δὲ γέμουσιν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς Kal ἀκρασίας. Φαρισαῖε τυφλέ, cal Ν cal a καθάρισον πρῶτον τὸ ἐντὸς τοῦ ποτηρίου, ἵνα γένηται καὶ TO ἐκτὸς αὐτοῦ καθαρόν. 2 Οὐ ἌΝ... εν a \ Φ a ε bp ale. ΄΄ ΄ rd tal ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταί, ὅτι παρομοιάζετε τάφοις κε- , ν μὲ Ν i ε “ + Ν ΄ 3 ΄ κονιαμένοις, οἵτινες ἔξωθεν μὲν φαίνονται ὡραῖοι, ἔσωθεν δὲ γέμουσιν ὀστέων νε- a Ὁ ΄ 3 A) 4 Ψ ΝΑ: a We θ Ν / 6 a > 0 , 28 κρῶν καὶ πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας. οὕτως Kal ὑμεῖς ἔξωθεν μὲν φαίνεσθε τοῖς ἀνθρώ- ΄ὔ / ποις δίκαιοι, ἔσωθεν δέ ἐστε μεστοὶ ὑποκρίσεως Kal ἀνομίας. a “ lal 7 nm 29 Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταί, ὅτι οἰκοδομεῖτε τοὺς τάφους γοῦν τας 80 τῶν προφητῶν καὶ κοσμεῖτε τὰ μνημεῖα τῶν δικαίων, | καὶ λέγετε: εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, οὐκ ἄν ἤμεθα κοινωνοὶ αὐτῶν ἐν τῷ αἵματι τῶν “ o lal A a 81 προφητῶν. ὥστε μαρτυρεῖτε ἑαυτοῖς ὅτι υἱοί ἐστε τῶν φονευσάντων τοὺς προ- , A) xe la) , \ , lat , εὐ 34 + ’ 82 33 φήτας. καὶ ὑμεῖς πληρώσατε τὸ μέτρον τῶν πατέρων ὑμῶν. ὄφεις, γεννή- cal lal lal “-“ / ματα ἐχιδνῶν, πῶς φύγητε ἀπὸ τῆς κρίσεως τῆς γεέννης ; X\ cal > Ν > ‘ 3 / / ε a , \ Ν Ν 84 Διὰ τοῦτο ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω πρός ὑμᾶς προφήτας καὶ σοφοὺς καὶ γραμμα- τεῖς - ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀποκτενεῖτε καὶ σταυρώσετε, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μαστιγώσετε ἐν ταῖς “-“ a ον / 7 “ ζω 85 συναγωγαῖς ὑμῶν καὶ διώξετε ἀπὸ πόλεως εἰς πόλιν: ὅπως ἔλθῃ ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς πᾶν - / 5 ΄ SEEN an fos 3 Ν a 7 »” fal , ov αἷμα δίκαιον ἐκχυννόμενον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος "ABed τοῦ δικαίου ἕως a / cal / ay lal a τοῦ αἵματος Ζαχαρίου υἱοῦ Βαραχίου, ὃν ἐφονεύσατε μεταξὺ τοῦ ναοῦ Kal τοῦ / a Ses / ea ila Lal ΄ Bae: Ν Ν , 86 θυσιαστηρίου." ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἥξει ταῦτα πάντα ἐπὶ τὴν γενεὰν ταύτην. c AN ε ,, Ν cal 37 Ἱερουσαλὴμ Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἡ ἀποκτείνουσα τοὺς -προφήτας Kat λιθοβολοῦσα \ ΄ὔ a τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν, ποσάκις ἠθέλησα ἐπισυναγαγεῖν τὰ τέκνα σου, / a ὃν τρόπον ὄρνις ἐπισυνάγει TA νοσσία αὐτῆς ὑπὸ Tas πτέρυγας, καί οὐκ ἠθελή- id oe ergy ἘΝ ite ε 4 cna 35 b ΝΕ Ν (ip fe > , 38 39 cate. ἰδοὺ ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ OLKOS ὑμῶν ἐρημος. έγω γὰρ ὑμιν, OV μὴ με a ΄, ΄ ἴδητε ἀπ᾽ ἄρτι ἕως ἂν εἴπητε: εὐλογημένος 6 ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου." § 124. The Widow’s Mite. — Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Mark ΧΙ]. 41-44. Luxe XXI. 1-4. 41 Kat καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ yalo- 1 ᾿Αναβλέψας dé εἶδεν τοὺς βάλλον- φυλακίου ἐθεώρει πῶς ὁ ὄχλος βάλ- τας εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον τὰ δῶρα ad- λει χαλκὸν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον: καὶ 2. τῶν πλουσίους. εἶδεν δέ τινα χήραν 42 πολλοὶ πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον πολλά, | καὶ πενιχρὰν βάλλουσαν ἐκεῖ δύο λεπτά, ἐλθοῦσα μία χήρα πτωχὴ ἔβαλεν 836. ὅση. 4: 8: 2 Ch. 34: 20-22. > 38. Comp. Ps. 69:26; Jer. 12:7; 22:5. © 39. Comp. Ps. 118: 26. Mt. 23:23. ταῦτα δὰ D vg; add δὲ BC 38 ἔρημος δὰ Ο Ὁ al it vg syrr West.mg. ; LA cop syrr Treg. West. Rey. om B L West.txt. Rey.mg. 26 ποτηρίου D1; add καὶ τῆς παροψίδος δὰ Le. 21:2. δύο λεπτά A D al Treg.mg.; B CLAS vg cop syrr Treg. [West.] Rey. λεπτὰ δὺο δὲ BL 33 vg cop Treg.txt. West. 142 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Part VII. 43 λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης. MARK XII. καὶ iA 4 Ν > cal προσκαλεσάμενος τούς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ > 3 »“ὉὍ 3 Ν / ε lad oe ε εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἣ χήρα αὕτη ἣ πτωχὴ πλεῖον πάντων βέβληκεν τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸ γα- 44 ζοφυλάκιον - πάντες γὰρ ἐκ τοῦ πε- ’ὔ 3 “a 3 λ 9 δὲ ρισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον, αὕτη δὲ ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς πάντα ὅσα 3 7 ‘A ta > Lal εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς. LUKE XXI. 3 καὶ εἶπεν - ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἡ χήρα ἣ πτωχὴ αὕτη πλείω πάντων 4 ἔβαλεν: ἅπαντες γὰρ οὗτοι ἐκ τοῦ ie > “ 3. > Ν περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον εἰς τὰ a 9 a δῶρα, αὕτη δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ὑστερήματος ἘΣ ΟΣ WA Ἂν , ἃ > μὴ αὐτῆς ἅπαντα τὸν βίον ὃν εἶχεν ἔβα- λεν. § 125. Certain Greeks desire to see Jesus. — Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. Joun XII. 20-36. 20 Ἦσαν δὲ “Ἑλληνές τινες ἐκ τῶν ἀναβαινόντων iva προσκυνήσωσιν ἐν TH ἑορτῇ " 92 33 35 36 οὗτοι οὖν προσῆλθον Φιλίππῳ τῷ ἀπὸ Βηθσαϊδὰ τῆς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ ἠρώτων av- , Apes A in ἐς τὸν λέγοντες " κύριε, θέλομεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἰδεῖν. ἔρχεται Φίλιππος καὶ λέγει τῷ 3 Ν / Ἂν a? an ᾿Ανδρέᾳ, ἔρχεται Ανδρέας καὶ Φίλιππος καὶ λέγουσιν τῷ Ἰησοῦ. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς 3 ΄ ΕἸ cal / > / θ ε A 7 ὃ θη ε ΦΆ a eS V4 ἀποκρίνεται αὐτοῖς λέγων - ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα ἵνα δοξασθῃ ὃ vids Tod ἀνθρώπου. > Ἂς > ὯΝ DK / ε / ὟΝ νΝ ε / “ ,’ Ν > \ “-“ 3 6 , ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμίν, ἐὰν μὴ ὃ κόκκος τοῦ σίτου πεσὼν εἰς τὴν γῆν ἀποθάνῃ, 3 Ν / / a 2X δὲ ais a / λὺ Ν᾿ / ε λῶ Ν ς αὐτὸς μόνος μένει" ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ, πολὺν καρπὸν φέρει. ὃ φιλῶν τὴν ψυχὴν Sears λλύ ἘΝ Nige A \ N Peas DB) iret P/N , 3 i x αὐτοῦ ἀπολλύει αὐτήν, καὶ ὃ μισῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ εἰς ζωὴν "7 NaS > / oN > “τι δι ΚΟνὮ. Ξ \ κολ θεί Ἀ ψ τς αἰώνιον φυλάξει αὐτήν. ἐὰν ἐμοί τις διακονῇ, ἐμοὶ ἀκολουθείτω, καὶ. ὅπου εἰμὶ ἘΠ ΠΥ ve ὃ , rr: SWC) 27 se aA , ὟΝ GC ἐγώ, ἐκεῖ καὶ 6 διάκονος ὃ ἐμὸς ἔσται - ἐάν τις ἐμοὶ διακονῇ, τιμήσει αὐτὸν ὃ πα- a Ἂς a Typ. νῦν ἣ ψυχή μου τετέρακται, καὶ τί εἴπω; πάτερ, σῶσόν με ἐκ τῆς ὥρας ταύ- 5 τὴ Ν Le] ἦλθ > ἃς 7 ’ ! ΄ ὃ l4 ‘ xs a. της. ἀλλὰ διὰ τοῦτο ἦλθον εἰς τὴν ὥραν ταύτην" | πάτερ, δόξασόν σου τὸ ὄνομα. Ἂς ἐς a \ ™ ἦλθεν οὖν φωνὴ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ - καὶ ἐδόξασα καὶ πάλιν δοξάσω. ὃ οὖν ὄχλος ὃ Ν rat ἑστὼς ἀκούσας ἔλεγεν βροντὴν γεγονέναι: ἄλλοι ἔλεγον ἄγγελος αὐτῷ λελά- a > ! ληκεν. ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν - οὐ δι’ ἐμὲ ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη γέγονεν ἀλλὰ δὲ’ a a a a a a ὑμᾶς. νῦν κρίσις ἐστὶν τοῦ κόσμου τούτου: νῦν ὃ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου rn an na , ἣν | A ἐκβληθήσεται ἔξω, ' κἀγὼ ἐὰν ὑψωθῶ ἐκ THs γῆς, πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς ἐμαυτόν. - ΝΜ ΄ 4, > 34 τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγεν σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ ἤμελλεν ἀποθνήσκειν. ἀπεκρίθη οὖν CP Mad a ue “- 3 , 3 a / 7 ε Ν ,, 5 Ν ΠΕ αὐτῷ ὃ ὄχλος - ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν ἐκ τοῦ νόμου ὅτι ὃ Χριστὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἱ rat a Ν lal / NUR, ὃ ae On Ν ex a > 4) / ὡ 4 > e dva,* καὶ πῶς λέγεις od ὅτι δεῖ ὑψωθῆναι τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ; τίς ἐστιν οὗ- ε εν a 3 , ! Ἂν Ss > ay e? A “i + Ν / Ν “ τος ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ; | εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἔτι μικρὸν χρόνον τὸ φῶς 5 ε a > 7 a ε Ἂν “ ΝΜ 7 A ’ὔ ec “ ἊΝ Ψ . ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστίν. περιπατεῖτε ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε, ἵνα μὴ σκοτία ὑμᾶς καταλάβῃ a A a . a ΕΣ ΄ καὶ ὃ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ οὐκ οἷδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει. ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε, πιστεύ- an a 3 Ν 3 Ν ete εἰς τὸ φῶς, ἵνα υἱοὶ φωτὸς γένησθε. Ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἀπελθὼν 3 ’ 3: 3 Lye ἐκρύβη ἀπ’ αὐτῶν. 8.84. Comp. 2 Sam. 7:18; Ps. 89:80, 37; 110: 4. Se (-AAey S*) A BDLA 33 Treg. West. Rey. Me. 12:48. βέβληκεν E Καὶ Χ al; ἔβαλεν Joh.12:27. ταύτης; Treg. Rev.mg. 29 axotcas S Dcop; pm καὶ AB Lal vg Treg. West. Rev. §§ 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 125-127.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 148 8 126. Reflections upon the Unbelief of the Jews. — Jerusalem. Third Day of the Week. JonHn ΧΙ]. 37—50: A Ν > A -“ ΄ 3 6 ΕΝ > ats 3 3 Τοσαῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ σημεῖα πεποιηκότος ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν οὐκ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐὖ- / ! Ψ ε , ε ah A , na > a , , > , τόν, ' ἵνα 6 λόγος “‘Hoaiov τοῦ προφήτου πληρωθῇ, ὃν εἶπεν "" κύριε, τίς ἐπί- “a > “A «ε a“ ‘ ε ’ ’ / > στευσεν TH ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν; Kai ὃ βραχίων κυρίου τίνι ἀπεκα- a by S of λύφθη; διὰ τοῦτο οὐκ ἠδύναντο πιστεύειν, ὅτι πάλιν εἶπεν “Hoatas:” , > lal Ν > \ \ 2 , 9 a τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς καὶ ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν Ν 4 ν Ν ᾿, a > tal Ν ’ τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς καὶ νοήσω- n 4 Ν “ \ a 3 ’ ἴω σιν τῇ καρδίᾳ καὶ στραφῶσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς. ταῦτα oh ἣν a Ν Ν a 7 εἶπεν Hoatas ὅτι εἶδεν τὴν dd€ay αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐλάλησεν περὶ αὐτοῦ. ὅμως μέν- Ἂν 3 ” > 4 3 4 > > / > Ν Ν Ν , τοι καὶ ἐκ TOV ἀρχόντων πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν, ἀλλὰ διὰ τοὺς Φαρισαί- ovs οὐχ ὡμολόγουν, ἵνα μὴ ἀποσυνάγωγοι γένωνται" ἠγάπησαν γὰρ τὴν δόξαν lol 3: 0 / αλλ + \ ὃ Ὡς a A) a τῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον ἥπερ THY δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ. ΕῚ A XN. # Ων > ε ΄ > SEAN > , > CD eS) Ν > Ἰησοῦς δὲ expakev καὶ εἶπεν - ὃ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ ov πιστεύει εἰς ἐμὲ ἀλλὰ εἰς Nc a A Ν , a 46 τὸν πέμψαντά pe, ' Kat ὃ θεωρῶν ἐμὲ θεωρεῖ τὸν πέμψαντά με. ἐγὼ φῶς εἰς Ν Ἂν 3 ν a ε ΄ 3 SiN 3. ta , Ν , Ν τὸν κόσμον ἐλήλυθα, ἵνα πᾶς ὃ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ μὴ μείνῃ. καὶ 37 4 > 4 “ c / Ν ἂν, 4 = Ν > / 3 / 3 Ν ἐάν τίς μου ἀκούσῃ τῶν ῥημάτων καὶ μὴ φυλάξῃ, ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω αὐτόν - οὐ γὰρ / ε lal Ν ἦλθον ἵνα κρίνω τὸν κόσμον, GAN ἵνα σώσω τὸν κόσμον. ὃ ἀθετῶν ἐμὲ καὶ μὴ ἃ Nye 9 ΄ὔ " \ ΄ Sash ε ΄ ἃ Sy 2, EY ΤῊΝ λαμβάνων τὰ ῥήματά μου ἔχει τὸν κρίνοντα avTov: ὃ λόγος ὃν ἐλάλησα, ἐκεῖνος a ἊΝ ΕΝ 3 5 ’ ε / bg TaN 2f 2 a > 2h. 1X > NG ε κρινεῖ αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλάλησα, ἀλλ᾽ ὃ / Ν ἣν Σά > λὴ) ὃ “ὃ , + Ν , Xr λ ΄ὔ ΔΝ ἴὸ πέμψας με πατὴρ αὐτός μοι ἐντολὴν δέδωκεν τί εἴπω καὶ τί λαλήσω. καὶ οἶδα ῳ Εἴ 5 Ν 3 -“ Ν 27 te 2 ἃ ἘΣ 2. UN lal Ἂν; 4 / ε ὅτι ἣ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν. ἃ οὖν ἐγὼ λαλῶ, καθὼς εἴρηκέν μοι ὃ πατήρ, οὕτως λαλῶ. § 127. Jesus, on taking leave of the Temple, foretells its Destruction and the Persecution of his Disciples. — Jerusalem, Mount of Olives. = Third Day of the Week. Matt. XXIV. 1-14. Mark XIII. 1-13. Luxe XXI. 5-19. > 1 Kai ἐξελθὼν ὃ Ἴ- 1 Kat ἐκπορευομέου ὅ Kat twov λεγόντων a 8. EN Ν ε A > a > ace la) / \ ae a ΄ σοῦς ἀπὸ τοὺ ἱεροῦ αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, λέ- περὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ὅτι λί- A , \ a πάν 3 a a \ o> ΄ ἐπορεύετο, καὶ προσῆλ- γει αὐτῷ εἷς τῶν μαθη- θοις καλοῖς καὶ ἀναθέ- θον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ τῶν αὐτοῦ διδάσκαλε, μασιν κεκόσμηται, εἷ- > ὃ a TR winks > ᾿ 5, \ 4, \ ἐπιδεῖξαι αὐτῷ τὰς ol- ἴδε ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ πεν" 2 κοδομὰς τοῦ ἱεροῦ. ὃ 2 ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί. καὶ Ke \ > > εἰ 5 aA > 3 Ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν av- 0 ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" τοῖς - οὐ βλέπετε ταῦ- βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς pe- 6 ταῦτα ἃ θεωρεῖ- / > Ἂς , / > / > 5 / ε / τα πάντα; ἀμὴν λέγω γάλας οἰκοδομάς ; οὐ τε, ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι aoe) 15:.55:1. > 40. Is. 6: 10. © 41. Is. 6:1 sq. D Me. 13:2. ἀφεθῇ A al vg; add ὧδε SB Le. 21:6. λίθῳ A ve syrr; add ὧδε δὲ B LAal Treg. West. Rey. a Lal cop West. Rev. ; add ἐν τοίχῳ ὧδε 1). 144 11 MATT. XXIV. ὑμῖν, ov μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται. MARK XIII. μὴ ἀφεθῇ λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ κατα- λυθῇ. FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Part VIL LUKE ΧΧΙ. ἐν ais οὐκ ἀφεθήσε- ται λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ, ἃ 3 ΄ ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται. Ν la Καθημένου δὲ αὐτοῦ 8 ΚΚαὶ καθημένου αὖ- 2 a» an 2 a > εν a > a , ἐπὶ τοῦ ὄρους τῶν ἐλαι- τοῦ εἰς τὸ ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν κατέ- a 3 al ε ac “ 93 / Cy > &v προσῆλθον αὐτῷ ot ναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν Kat , Ν 3 μαθηταὶ κατ᾽ ἰδίαν λέ- ἰδίαν ὃ Πέτρος καὶ ᾽1ά- RUN EA τῶν , Ne / Ν 5 he Ν SI yovres* εἰπὲ ἡμῖν, πό- κωβος καὶ ᾿Ιωάννης καὶ 7 ἐπηρώτησαν δὲ αὐτὸν na 3 2 > ε “" τε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί 4 ᾿Ανδρέας - εἶπον ἡμῖν, λέγοντες: διδάσκαλε, a a a % / a ” \ / > τὸ σήημειον ΤῊ σης πα- ποτε ταυτα εσται; και ποτε οὖν ταῦτα ἔσται; ΝΥ ΄ Ν a “ ἘΞ ρουσίας καὶ τῆς συντε- τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅ- cal a / “A a λείας τοῦ αἰῶνος ; Kal μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντε- ταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα γι- “ ἴων ἣν ε \ ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς 5 λεῖσθαι πάντα; ὃ δὲ 8 νεσθαι; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν" > a 3 a »” , εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - βλέπετε Τησοῦς ἤρξατο λέγειν βλέπετε μὴ πλανη- an > ων , ’ὔ na μή τις ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ. αὐτοῖς: βλέπετε μή θῆτε: πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐ- ε cal 4 os πολλοὶ yap ἐλεύσονται τις ὑμᾶς πλανῆήσῃ. λεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνό- A \ 4 Ν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λές. 6 πολλοὶ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ pati μου, λέγοντες " γοντες: ἐγώ εἶμι ὁ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, λέ- ἐγώ εἶμι, καὶ ὃ καιρὸς ΕΥ̓ Ψ , Χριστός, καὶ πολλοὺς γοντες ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι, ἤγγικεν" μὴ πορευθῆ- , , Ἂς \ 7 > 4 7 A a πλανήσουσιν. μελλή- καὶ πολλοὺς πλανή- 9 τε ὀπίσω αὐτῶν. ὅταν Ν 5 , ΄ μὲ x 35 ¢ Ἂν 5 4, / σετε δὲ ἀκούειν TOA 7 Govow. ὅταν δὲ ἀκού- δὲ ἀκούσητε πολέμους μους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέ- σητε πολέμους καὶ ἀ- καὶ ἀκαταστασίας, μὴ « ων Ν Ἂς / Ἂν lol na A Lal μων ὁρᾶτε, μὴ Opo- κοὰς πολέμων, μὴ θρο- πτοηθῆτε: δεῖ γὰρ ταῦ- εἶσθε: δεῖ γὰρ γενέ- εἶσθε: det γενέσθαι, τα γενέσθαι πρῶτον, Ν᾽ σθαι, GAN οὔπω ἐστὶν ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος. ἀλλ’ οὐκ εὐθέως τὸ / μὲ τὸ τέλος. ἐγερθήσεται 8 ἐγερθήσεται γὰρ ἔθνος 10 τέλος. τότε ἔλεγεν lal 4 γὰρ ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος καὶ ἐπὶ ἔθνος καὶ βασι- αὐτοῖς: ἐγερθήσεται 3 Ν βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλεί- λεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν, ἔ- ἔθνος ἐπ᾽ ἔθνος καὶ βα- Ν 3 Ν Ν Ν δ / 3,--ἢἃ x ’ αν, καὶ ἔσονται λιμοὶ σονται σεισμοὶ κατὰ σιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν, ’,ὔ δ \ Kal σεισμοὶ κατὰ τό- τόπους, ἔσονται λιμοί. 11 σεισμοί τε μεγάλοι καὶ ᾿Ξ Ξ , \ \ πους. πάντα δὲ ταῦτα 9 ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα. --- κατὰ τόπους λιμοὶ καὶ ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων. MARK XIII. 12 4 λοιμοὶ ἔσονται, φόβη- τρά τε καὶ σημεῖα ἀπ᾽ 3 A“ /, m” οὐρανοῦ μεγάλα ἐσται. Πρὸ δὲ τούτων πάντων ἐπιβαλοῦ- — Βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς " πα- ραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια καὶ εἰς Ν la ἈΝ DEN , συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσθε καὶ ἐπὶ ἡγεμό- Ν / ’ σ νων καὶ βασιλέων σταθήσεσθε ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς. ---- καὶ ὅταν 5, ε n Ν , ἈΝ ἄγωσιν ὑμᾶς παραδιδόντες, μὴ προ- μεριμνᾶτε τί λαλήσητε, ἀλλ᾽ ὃ ἐὰν ὃ θῃ ΟΝ a > > U a 7 “A ἣΝ οθῃ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ, τοῦτο λα- λεῖτε: οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦν- τες, ἀλλὰ τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον. 13 14 15 a fal “ \ ow ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν Kat δι- Ν ὠξουσιν, παραδιδόντες εἰς τὰς συνα- x \ yes) ork 2 \ γωγὰς καὶ φυλακάς, ἀπαγομένους ἐπὶ tal ¢ foe ee ld βασιλεῖς καὶ ἡγεμόνας ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀνό- ς΄ ὦ » ματός pov: ἀποβήσεται ὑμῖν εἰς μαρ- 4 , > > Ν δέ τύριον. θέτε οὖν εἰς τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν μὴ προμελετᾶν ἀπολογηθῆναι " 3 A οὗ ,ὔ ε a / ἃ / ἐγὼ yap δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα καὶ σοφίαν, a By ἡ οὐ δυνήσονται ἀντιστῆναι ἢ ἄντει- lal / | ee.) πεῖν ἅπαντες οἱ ἀντικείμενοι ὑμῖν. §§ 127, 128.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 145 MATT. XXIV. MARK XIII. LUKE XXI. , 9 τότε Tapadw- 12 καὶ πα- 16 παραδοθήσεσθε a fe Ν σουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς θλίψιν ραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελ- δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ γονέων καὶ Ni, 3 a (otal \ > / \ > la Ν lal καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν ὑμᾶς, φὸν εἰς θάνατον καὶ ἀδελφῶν καὶ συγγενῶν Se oe: , Ν / Nir (5) \ , Ἂν 7 καὶ ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι πατὴρ τέκνον, καὶ ἐπα- καὶ φίλων, καὶ θανατώ- Se N / a 26 A ΄ ΄ SN 3 τ ! ‘\ ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν ἐθνῶν ναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ 17 σουσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν, ! καὶ Ν Td ΄ Ν a \ ΄ 2 ΄ σεῖς 10 διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου. καὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσου- ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ / / > 7 ἌΓΩΝ, ΄ Ν Ἃ; + , τότε σκανδαλισθήσον- 18 σιν αὐτούς. καὶ ἔσεσθε πάντων διὰ τὸ ὄνομά Ν Ν 3 ΄ὔ , ¢ Ν ’, ται πολλοὶ καὶ ἀλλή- μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων μου. ᾿ς Ἂν 35, 4 λους παραδώσουσιν καὶ διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου᾽ ---- μισήσουσιν ἀλλήλους. 11 καὶ πολλοὶ ψευδοπροφῆται ἐγερθήσονται καὶ πλανήσουσιν 12 πολλούς. καὶ διὰ τὸ πληθυνθῆναι τὴν ἀνομίαν ψυγήσεται ε 3 / a a ἡ ἀγάπη τῶν πολλῶν. 18 ὃ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τές 18 ---ὖ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς 18 καὶ θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφα- λος, οὗτος σωθήσεται. τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσε- λῆς ὑμῶν οὐ μὴ ἀπό- Ν ’ n Ν 5 4 > - «ε “ 14 καὶ κηρυχθήσεται τοῦ- 10 ταῖι. ---- καὶ εἰς πάντα 19 ληται" ἐν τῇ ὑπομονῇ ‘\ > / A ‘\ 3 a A ¢ o / Ν TO τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς τὰ ἔθνη πρῶτον δεῖ κη- ὑμῶν κτήσασθε τὰς ψυ- βασιλείας ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέ- χὰς ὑμῶν. οἰκουμένῃ εἰς μαρτύρι- λίιον. --- ον πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, Ν ,΄ Te Ἁ / καὶ τότε ἥξει TO τέλος. § 128. The Signs of Christ’s coming to destroy Jerusalem, and put an end to the Jewish State and Dispensation. — Mount of Olives. Third Day of the Week. Matr. XXIV. 15-42. MarxK XIII. 14-37. LUKE XXI. 20-36. σ ce) Y 5) 15 Ὅταν οὖν ἴδητε ὸ 14 Ὅταν δὲ ἴδητε τὸ 20 ὍἭΌταν δὲ ἴδητε κυ- δέλ a > , δέλ “ 3 ΄ Χ , τὶ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώ- βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώ- κλουμένην ὑπὸ στρατο- ἈΠῸ Ὁ θὲ ὃ Ν Δ a ¢ 4 ig ΄ ε ΄ 4 σεως TO ῥηθὲν διὰ Aa- σεως" ἑστηκότα ὅπου πέδων Ἱερουσαλήμ, τό- \ a a a ~ F νιὴλ τοῦ προφήτου" οὐ δεῖ, 6 ἀναγινώσκων τε γνῶτε ὅτι ἤγγικεν ἣ ε \ / ’ / ~ “-“ ἑστὸς ἐν τόπῳ ἁγίῳ, ὃ νοείτω, τότε οἱ ἐν τῇ 21 ἐρήμωσις αὐτῆς. τότε 3 / - Ἶ ὃ / / ess 2) , ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω, ουδαίᾳ φευγέτωσαν οἱ ἐν τῇ ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ φευ- 16 τότε οἱ ἐν τῇ ᾿Ιουδαί εἰς τὰ ὃ 3 is TAO i n ίᾳ is τὰ Opn, γέτωσαν εἰς τὰ ὄρη, καὶ Ly 5: τα ΝΠ, ΨΚ ε NN A ΠῚ ΄ 3A > φευγέτωσαν ἐπὶ τὰ ὁ- 15 ὃ δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ οἱ ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῆς ἐκχω- a ae a OQ ἃ , Ν 4 ’ \ ©°> »" 17 py, ὃ ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος δώματος μὴ καταβάτω ρειτωσαν, καὶ οἱ ἐν ταῖς Ν / > Ν Ν > / > la ’ Ν > / μὴ καταβάτω ἄραι τὰ μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἄραί χώραις μὴ εἰσερχέσθω- ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ, τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ, 22 σαν εἰς αὐτήν, ὅτε ἡμέ- 18 καὶ ε ἐ ~ > a Ν 16 We > x > Ν Ν > ὃ 2 ΄ φ' , Lo ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ μὴ καὶ ὃ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν μὴ ραι ἐκδικήσεως αὗταί 3 ΄ 3 ,’ Ss > , > Ν 5 3 A ial ἐπιστρεψάτω ὀπίσω a- ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὁ- εἰσιν τοῦ πλησθῆναι ραι τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ. πίσω ἄραι τὸ ἱμάτιον πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα. 19 οὐαὶ δὲ ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ 17 αὐτοῦ. οὐαὶ δὲ ταῖς ἐν 28 οὐαὶ δὲ ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ 8. 15 ete. Dan. 9:27. Le. 21:19. κτήσασθε SDL; κτήσεσθε A B 33 vg syrr Treg. West. Rev. 10 146 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 MATT. XXIV. > , Ν a ἐχούσαις καὶ ταῖς θη- λαζούσαις ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις. προσεύ- \ ¢& Ἂν / χεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένη- ται ἢ φυγὴ ὑμῶν χει- μῶνος μηδὲ σαββάτῳ. δ Ν 14 Pa ἔσται γὰρ τότε θλίψις he 7 3 3 » μεγάλη, οἵα οὐκ ἐγέ- VETO ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς κόσμου Ψ A a“ 399 3 ὍΝ ἕως τοῦ νῦν οὐδ᾽ οὐ μὴ « ΄ γένηται. καὶ εἰ μὴ ἐκο- 18 19 MARK XIII. Ν > , AN γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις Kal ταῖς θηλαζούσαις ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις. / Ἂς σ΄ προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα / Qn μὴ γένηται χειμῶνος. ἔσονται γὰρ αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι θλίψις, οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη ἀπ’ a i ay ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἣν EKTL- ε ’ A σεν ὃ θεός, ἕως τοῦ a Ν νῦν καὶ οὐ μὴ γένηται. 24 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Part VIL LUKE XXI, 9 1A Ν a ἐχούσαις καὶ ταῖς θη- λαζούσαις ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις - ἔσται Ν > 4 an γὰρ ἀνάγκη μεγάλη \ nn nm ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς Kat ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ, καὶ πε- σοῦνται στόματι μα- χαίρης καὶ αἰχμαλωτι- ΄ 3 Ae of σθήσονται εἰς τὰ ἔθνη πάντα, καὶ ἹἹερουσα- λήμ ἔσται πατουμένη eS NS a ” = ὑπὸ ἐθνῶν, ἀχρι ov πλη- ρωθῶσιν καιροὶ ἐθνῶν. ἀλλὰ διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς οὺς ἐξελέξα- λοβώθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι 20 καὶ εἰ μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν ἐκεῖναι, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ πᾶσα σάρξ: διὰ δὲ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα caps: τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς κολο- βωθήσονται αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι. τότε 21 τὸ ἐκολόβωσεν τὰς ἡμέρας. ey καὶ TOTE 27 Οὐ νι 3, ΒΝ ΟΝ ταν cy / ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ ἰδοὺ ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, a Yo) Ν ΄ 9 , ἢ ὧδε, μὴ πιστεύσητε. ἐγερθήσονται ap ψευδόχριστοι καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται βρόφηται, καὶ δώσουσιν σημεῖα μεγάλα καὶ τέρα- 7 a τα, ὥστε πλανηθῆναι, εἰ δυνατόν, Kat Ν 5 4 > Ν ΄ ἘΠῚ ων τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς. ἰδοὺ προείρηκα ὑμῖν. aN 9 » ec a 3 \ 5 a ἐὰν οὖν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν: ἰδοὺ ἐν τῇ Dene > ia Ν bed NG) id x > ἐρήμῳ ἐστίν, μὴ ἐξέλθητε. ἰδοὺ ἐν 22 23 > 2. can ” 2), - ec , ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ" ἴδε ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, lal / ἴδε ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε. ἐγερθήσονται δὲ ψευδόχριστοι καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται lal \ / Kal ποιήσουσιν σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα Ν \ > “ 3 / \ πρὸς TO ἀποπλανᾶν, εἰ δυνατόν, TOUS ἐκλεκτούς. ὑμεῖς δὲ βλέπετε προεί- pyka ὑμῖν πάντα. τοῖς ταμείοις, μὴ πιστεύσητε. 7 Ν ee ΣΎΝ ἡ owt 4 ΘΙ ὅν 3 λῶ ὠσπερ γὰρ 7) αστραπη εςερχέται απὸ GVATOAWV Ν ’, μὲ lan 9 3, \ ἘΠ a, a ea A Ε] θ , και φαίνεται εως δυσμῶν, OUTWS εσται καὶ ἢ παρουσια του VLOV του ἀνσρωπου.- 28 ὅπου ἐὰν ἢ τὸ πτῶμα, ἐκεῖ συναχθήσονται οἱ ἀετοί. MATT. XXIV. MARK XIII. LUKE XXI. 29 Εὐθέως δὲ μετὰ τὴν 24 ᾿Αλλὰ ἐν ἐκείναις 25 Kai ἔσονται σημεῖα θλίψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐ- ταῖς ἡμέραις μετὰ τὴν ἐν ἡλίῳ καὶ σελήνῃ καὶ κείνων ὃ ἥλιος σκοτι- θλίψιν ἐκείνην ὃ ἥλιος ἄστροις, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς σθήσεται, καὶ ἣ σελή- σκοτισθήσεται, καὶ ἡ γῆς συνοχὴ ἐθνῶν ἐν Vy οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ ἀπορίᾳ ἤχους θαλάσ- αὐτῆς, καὶ οἱ ἀστέρες 25 φέγγος αὐτῆς, | καὶ of 26 σης καὶ σάλου, ' ἀπο- πεσοῦνται ἐκ τοῦ οὐ- ἀστέρες ἔσονται ἐκ τοῦ ψυχόντων ἀνθρώπων ρανοῦ, καὶ al δυνάμεις οὐρανοῦ πίπτοντες, καὶ ἀπὸ φόβου καὶ προσδο- τῶν οὐρανῶν σαλευθή- ai δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς κίας τῶν ἐπερχομένων 30 σονται." καὶ τότε φα- οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσον- τῇ οἰκουμένῃ" at γὰρ νήσεται τὸ σημεῖον τοῦ ται." δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν σαλευθήσονται." 2 29 etc. Comp. Is. 13:9, 10; Joel 8: 15, ete. Mt. 24:21. οὐκ ἐγένετο δὰ 1) ; οὐ γέγονεν 22 δὲ δ ΟἹ; γὰρ ABD L Treg, West. Rev. B LZ Treg. West. Rev. [ ποιήσουσιν D ; δώσουσιν N A BC L vg Me. 13:21. Χριστός δὲ Lvg; add# AC cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. | τοὺς ἐκλ, δὲ B D A cop Treg.txt. Rev.; add καὶ B Treg.mg. Dest; pm καὶ A C Lal vg cop [Treg.] § 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 tx 128.] MATT. XXIV. > a Ν ΄ οὐρανῷ, καὶ κόψονται -“ ε Ν nw πᾶσαι ai φυλαὶ τῆς “ Ν 3, A γῆς καὶ οψονται τὸν ev lal 3 7 > υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ép- χόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν νεφε- λῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ μετὰ / \ / δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης πολλῆς. καὶ ἀποστε- a Ν > / > λεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐὖ- cal Ἂν / τοῦ μετὰ σάλπιγγος μεγάλης, καὶ ἐπισυνά- ἕξουσιν τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων > la 3 τὰ ὦ 3 ἀνέμων ἀπ᾽ ἄκρων οὐρα- νῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν. ᾿Απὸ δὲ τῆς συκῆς / Ν μάθετε τὴν παραβο- Sr Lid »” ε ’ λήν. ὅταν ἤδη ὁ κλά- dos αὐτῆς γένηται ἅπα- λὸς τὰ φύλλα 3 , , “ ἐκφύῃ, γινώσκετε OTL \ και > Ν᾿ Ν 7: ν ἐγγὺς τὸ θέρος - οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ὅταν ἴδητε ταῦτα πάντα, γινώσκε- Lg > ’΄ > aN τε ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἐπὶ θύραις. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑ- ra 3 x , ε piv, οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάν- τα ταῦτα γένηται. ὃ οὐρανὸς καὶ 7) γῆ παρε- ’ e Ν / -- λεύσεται, οἱ δὲ λόγοι 3 Ν ’, μου ov μὴ παρέλθωσιν. a , Περὶ δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας 5» iA Nie δ᾽ > Ν ἐκείνης καὶ ὥρας οὐδεὶς οἷδεν, οὐδὲ οἱ ἄγγελοι lal 3 [οἷ 3 ἧς ε τῶν οὐρανῶν οὐδὲ 6 υἱ- 26 27 28 29 30 32 / > xe N ΄ὔ “ ὃΣ ε OS, εἰ, μὴ ὁ πατὴρ μόνος. ὡσπερ OE αἱ MARK XIII. A , Δ΄, καὶ τότε οψον- A ex Aa 3 , ται τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώ- που ἐρχόμενον ἐν νε- ’ ἣν / φέλαις μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης. καὶ τότε ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς 3 / Ν 5 / ἀγγέλους καὶ ἐπισυνά- ἣν > Ἂν > ἕξει τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων > > + na iA + am’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως a- κρου οὐρανοῦ. ᾿Απὸ δὲ τῆς συκῆς ’ Ν μάθετε τὴν παραβο- , 4 SSIES Ν λήν. ὅταν αὐτῆς ἤδη Ν ὃ κλάδος ἁπαλὸς γένη- ται καὶ ἐκφύῃ τὰ φύλ- ΄ Ὑ λα, γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγ- δ Ν /, > 7 a γὺς τὸ θέρος ἐστίν ov- TWS καὶ ὑμεῖς ὅταν an , ἴδητε ταῦτα γινόμενα, “ γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐ- DAY , 5 Ν στιν ἐπὶ θύραις. ἀμὴν a ἢ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὖ ρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ᾿ a μέχρις οὗ ταῦτα πάν- τα γένηται. ὃ οὐρα- Ν Ν ε Led 4 νὸς Kal ἡ γῆ παρελεύ- ε Ν ’ὔ σονται, οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται. Περὶ δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας ἐ- ἢ ἡ με κείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας ov- UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 147 LUKE XXI. A καὶ ’ὔ »” A εν τότε ὄψονται τὸν υἱὸν nw 3 , > , TOU ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμε- νον ἐν νεφέλῃ μετὰ δυ- ’ Ν ὃ γε͵ νάμεως καὶ δόξης πολ: λῆς. ᾽ὔ δ > ’ τούτων γίνεσθαι ἀνακύ- ἀρχομένων δὲ ψατε καὶ ἐπάρατε τὰς κεφαλὰς ὑμῶν, διότι > Li Ἐν 5 ’ ἐγγίζει ἡ ἀπολύτρωσις ὑμῶν. Καὶ εἶ αἱ εἶπεν παραβο- λὴν αὐτοῖς. ἵδετε τὴν συκῆν καὶ πάντα τὰ / μέ iz, δένδρα: ὅταν προβά- λωσιν ἤδη, βλέποντες > > ε cal , ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν γινώσκετε Ld 3} 5 Ν ‘ Ld OTL ἤδη eyyus τὸ θέρος > - 7 SS a ἐστίν. οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς, ὅταν ἴδητε ταῦτα γι- 9 νόμενα, γινώσκετε ὅτι 5 4 > ε ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἢ βασι- ΝῚ ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι od μὴ λεία τοῦ θεοῦ. ΄ «ε Ν 9 παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται. ε > Ν Ν ε “a ὃ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἣ γῆ παρελεύσονται, οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρε- λεύσονται. eo» Ν ΑΝ EBNSS 3 > a dels οἶδεν, οὐδὲ οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ ε ’ i σι 4 4 ε ἡμέραι τοῦ Νῶε, οὕτως ἔσται ἣ πα- SQN ε ε΄ > οὐδὲ ὁ vids, εἰ μὴ ὃ Nae , πατήρ. ΄ Pe κα es, ’ ( x > 3 a ε la a Ν a βουσια TOV VLOV TOV ἀνθρώπου. ως y2p Ὥσαν εν TALS Ὥμεραις ταις πρὸ TOV ΚαΤα- κλυσμοῦ τρώγοντες καὶ πίνοντες, γαμοῦντες καὶ γαμίζοντες, ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας Mt. 94 : 30. t. κόψονται S*; pm τότε (add D) δ B DL vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 81 μεγάλης SL A cop Rev.mg.; pm φωνῆς (καὶ φων. D vg) Β D vg Treg. West.mg. Rey. [West.] Rey. 86 οὐδὲ 6 vids N* οὐορ BD; om S®@ LA cop syrr Treg. Rev.mg. 88 ἡμέραις δὰ 858 ; add ἐκείναις B D[Treg.] 148 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Part VIL. MATT. XXIV. . A “ Ν , A 39 εἰσῆλθεν Νῶε cis τὴν κιβωτόν," ' καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν ἕως ἦλθεν ὃ κατακλυσμὸς Kal “Ὁ. 7 y ἊΝ a A 40 ἦρεν ἅπαντας, οὕτως ἔσται καὶ ἣ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. τότε ἔσον- , a“ tal eo ς Ν 41 ται δύο ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ, εἷς παραλαμβάνεται καὶ εἷς ἀφίεται - δύο ἀλήθουσαι ἐν τῷ ’ὔ / , A 4 3 ’, μύλῳ, μία παραλαμβάνεται καὶ μία ἀφίεται. MARK XIII. LUKE XXI. 33 βλέπετε, ἀγρυπνεῖτε οὐκ οἴδατε yop 34 ἸΤροσέχετε δὲ ἑαυτοῖς μήποτε Bapy- 84 πότε ὃ καιρός ἐστιν. ὡς ἄνθρωπος θῶσιν ὑμῶν αἱ καρδίαι ἐν κραιπάλῃ ἀπόδημος ἀφεὶς τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ καὶ καὶ μέθῃ καὶ μερίμναις βιωτικαῖς, καὶ δοὺς τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ἐπιστῇ ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς αἰφνίδιος ἣ ἡμέρα ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῷ θυρω- 86 ἐκείνη ' ὡς παγίς: ἐπεισελεύσεται 35 ρῷ ἐνετείλατο ἵνα γρηγορῇ. γρηγο- γὰρ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς καθημένους ἐπὶ MATT. XXIV. ρεῖτε οὖν" πρόσωπον πάσης τῆς 42 γρηγορεῖτε οὖν, ὅτι οὐκ οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ πότε ὃ 86 γῆς. ἀγρυπνεῖτε δὲ ἐν οἴδατε ποίᾳ ὥρᾳ ὃ κύ- κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρ- παντὶ καιρῷ δεόμενοι ριος ὑμῶν ἔρχεται. χεται, ἢ ὀψὲ ἢ μεσο- ἵνα κατισχύσητε ἐκφυ- νύκτιου ἢ ἀλεκτοροφω- γεῖν ταῦτα πάντα τὰ 36 vias ἢ πρωΐ: μὴ ἐλθὼν ἐξαίφνης εὕρῃ μέλλοντα γίνεσθαι, καὶ 37 ὑμᾶς καθεύδοντας. ὃ δὲ ὑμῖν λέγω, σταθῆναι ἔμπροσθεν πᾶσιν λέγω, γρηγορεῖτε. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. § 129. Transition to Christ’s Final Coming at the Day of Judgment. Ex- hortation to Watchfulness. [Comp. ὃ 52, Luke 12: 39.] Parables. The Ten Virgins; The Five Talents. — Mount of Olives. Third Day of the Week. Matr. XXIV. 438-51. XXV. 1-30. > a X , 4 > Κ ε > ΄ , ae , ” 45 Ἐκεῖνο δὲ γινώσκετε, ὅτι εἰ ἡδει ὃ οἰκοδεσπότης ποίᾳ φυλακῇ ὃ κλέπτης ἔρ- 5 / Ἃ Ν 3 Ἃ 35, a Ν ee 2 A x 44 χεται, ἐγρηγόρησεν ἂν καὶ οὐκ ἂν εἴασεν διορυχθῆναι τὴν οἰκίαν οὔτοι διὰ cal \ a , ω φ oe A ῳ ε εν a 9 τοῦτο καὶ ὑμεῖς γίνεσθε ἕτοιμοι, ὅτι 7 οὐ δοκεῖτε ὥρᾳ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἔρχε- ’, + 3 Ν ε \ a Ν / a / ε , ie 45 ται. Tis apa ἐστὶν ὁ πιστὸς δοῦλος Kal φρόνιμος, ὃν κατέστησεν ὃ κύριος ἐπὶ nw ἴω lal cal “ Ἅ) ε Lal 46 τὴς οἰκετείας αὐτοῦ τοῦ δοῦναι αὐτοῖς τὴν τροφὴν ἐν καιρῷ; μακάριος ὃ δοῦλος lal a ἔν a 3 Ν / La) ig 47 ἐκεῖνος ὃν ἐλθὼν ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὑρήσει οὕτως ποιοῦντα. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι a ἴω cal Ἂν m” ε Ν cal 48 ἐπὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν αὐτοῦ καταστήσει αὐτόν. ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃ ὃ κακὸς δοῦλος 9 tal ΄ > iene ia e , dee beatles , Ν a 49 ἐν TH καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ - χρονίζει μου ὃ κύριος, ' Kal ἄρξηται τύπτειν τοὺς συνδού ἴω -“ σ ε , Ὁ ’ὔ 50 λους αὐτοῦ, ἐσθίῃ δὲ καὶ πίνῃ μετὰ τῶν μεθυόντων" | ἥξει ὃ κύριος τοῦ δούλου 9 ’ > ε la e 3 a Ἂν 5 “ ε > , ! Ν ,ὔ 3 51 ἐκείνου ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἣ οὐ προσδοκᾷ καὶ ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώσκει, ' καὶ διχοτομήσει αὖ- , Ne oan a A a aw ε \ oa - TOV, Kal TO μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν θήσει" ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὃ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὃ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. ΄ ε A ,ὕ 9 XXV. 1 Τότε ὁμοιωθήσεται ἣ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν δέκα παρθένοις, αἵτινες λα- 5.38. ὅδπη. 7:1 Βα. Mt. 24:39. ἔσται καὶ N Lvg; om BD add καὶ προσεύχεσθε δὰ A Ο L A vg cop syrr cop Treg. West. Rev. [Treg.] Rev.txt. Mc.13:33. ἀγρυπνεῖτε B D Rev.mg.; Mt. 24:48. δοῦλος S* ; add ἐκεῖνος N° B C D Lit vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. § 129.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 149 SseOoOntnanmnrn w DD | lt coal coe μὰ wonre © li dl μαὶ μὰ ov aon enw 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 MATT. XXV. Botoa τὰς λαμπάδας αὐτῶν ἐξῆλθον εἰς ὑπάντησιν τοῦ νυμφίους. πέντε δὲ ἐξ 1 \ \ , ΄, ε N \ a \ , αὐτῶν ἧσαν μωραὶ Kal πέντε φρόνιμοι. at yap μωραὶ λαβοῦσαι τὰς λαμπάδας οὐκ ἔλαβον μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν ἔλαιον" αἱ δὲ φρόνιμοι ἔλαβον ἔλαιον ἐν τοῖς ἀγγείοις μετὰ τῶν λαμπάδων ἑαυτῶν. χρονίζοντος δὲ τοῦ νυμφίου ἐνύσταξαν πᾶσαι καὶ 3 / / Ν Ν Ν / Pia ted| ε ,ὔ 3 / > ἐκάθευδον. μέσης δὲ νυκτὸς κραυγὴ γέγονεν - ἰδοὺ ὁ νυμφίος, ἐξέρχεσθε εἰς ἀπάντησιν. τότε ἠγέρθησαν πᾶσαι αἱ παρθένοι ἐκεῖναι καὶ ἐκόσμησαν τὰς λαμ- Lh ε a ε Ν Ν a ΄ > , Cae 3 Lo eee} / πάδας ἑαυτῶν. ai δὲ pwpal ταῖς φρονίμοις εἶπαν - δότε ἡμῖν ἐκ τοῦ ἐλαίου eer: ν ε ΄ Ἐπ ἣν / 3 ͵ SN ε Le , ὑμῶν, ὅτι αἱ λαμπάδες ἡμῶν σβέννυνται. ἀπεκρίθησαν δὲ αἱ φρόνιμοι λέγου- na ὡς cal a ἴω σαι" μήποτε οὐκ ἀρκέσῃ ἡμῖν καὶ ὑμῖν - πορεύεσθε μᾶλλον πρὸς τοὺς πωλοῦντας τς 9 , ε a 3 / δὲ 3A 3 / 3 ε , ‘ καὶ ἀγοράσατε ἑαυταῖς. ἀπερχομένων δὲ αὐτῶν ἀγοράσαι ἦλθεν ὃ νυμφίος, καὶ eg eka 9 3 a > Ν Δ % Sa: ’ ε / [7 αἱ ἕτοιμοι εἰσῆλθον μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς γάμους, καὶ ἐκλείσθη ἣ θύρα. ὕστερον Now \ ε μὰ / 4 , , ” fas ε Ν δὲ ἔρχονται καὶ ai λοιπαὶ παρθένοι λέγουσαι" κύριε κύριε, ἄνοιξον ἡμῖν. ὃ δὲ 3 θ Ν ἊΝ, κὸν λέ Smee > 70 οὐχί a > “ > " ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν " ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς. γρηγορεῖτε οὖν, ὅτι οὐκ οἵ- δατε τὴν ἡμέραν οὐδὲ τὴν ὥραν. ᾿ \ Ὥσπερ γὰρ ἄνθρωπος ἀποδημῶν ἐκάλεσεν τοὺς ἰδίους δούλους καὶ παρέδωκεν γὰρ ανῦρ p 3 A ‘ ε ye > lal \ & Ν 3 ld / Ν , e be αὐτοῖς TA ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ μὲν ἔδωκεν πέντε τάλαντα, ᾧ δὲ δύο, ᾧ δὲ ἕν, Εἰς Ν Ν ἰδέ ὃ ’ N53) ὃ ΄ vO , ! θ Ν ε Ν , ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, καὶ ἀπεδήμησεν. εὐθέως πορευθεὶς ὃ τὰ πέντε , ΄ 9 ΄, > 2 A NY gs , ” , / ε ΄ τάλαντα λαβών ἠργάσατο ἐν αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐποίησεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα. ὡσαύ- A Ay na τως 6 τὰ δύο ἐκέρδησεν ἄλλα δύο. ὃ δὲ τὸ ἕν λαβὼν ἀπελθὼν ὥρυξεν γῆν καὶ lal A A / ἔκρυψεν TO ἀργύριον τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ. μετὰ δὲ πολὺν χρόνον ἔρχεται ὃ κύριος lal ΄ 3 ΄ Ν / ΄ ᾽ 2A Ν \ ε x / τῶν δούλων ἐκείνων καὶ συναίρει λόγον μετ᾽ αὐτῶν. καὶ προσελθὼν 6 τὰ πέντε ΄ τάλαντα λαβὼν προσήνεγκεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα λέγων - κύριε, πέντε τά- yy a λαντά μοι παρέδωκας, ἴδε ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα ἐκέρδησα. ἔφη αὐτῷ ὃ κύριος 3 a io) A > Ν Ν ΄ 3. Ν x) 7 os ᾿ς BLN a αὐτοῦ: εὖ, δοῦλε ἀγαθὲ καὶ πιστέ, ἐπὶ ὀλίγα ἧς πιστός, ἐπὶ πολλῶν σε κα- ͵ ΕΣ θὲ 5 Ν ἃς cal , Ν ’ Ν ε Ἁ , ταστήσω᾽" εἰσελθὲ εἰς THY χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου Gov. προσελθὼν Kal ὃ τὰ δύο τάλαντα εἶπεν" κύριε, δύο τάλαντά μοι παρέδωκας, ἴδε ἄλλα δύο τάλαντα ae lal 3 a“ ἐκέρδησα. ἔφη αὐτῷ ὃ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὖ, δοῦλε ἀγαθὲ καὶ πιστέ, ἐπὶ ὀλίψα ἧς » , » cal πιστός, ἐπὶ πολλῶν σε καταστήσω" εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου σου. δ > προσελθὼν δὲ καὶ ὃ τὸ ἕν τάλαντον εἰληφὼς εἶπεν - κύριε, ἔγνων σε ὅτι σκληρὸς / μὲ > u εἰ εἶ ἄνθρωπος, θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρας, καὶ συνάγων ὅθεν οὐ διεσκόρπισας" Ἂν Ν > , 3, Ν / / a lal » ‘\ ’ Τ καὶ φοβηθεὶς ἀπελθών ἔκρυψα τὸ τάλαντόν σου ἐν τῇ γῇ ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν. ry 6 \ δὲ (= ΄ > A ΑΝ 9. “ἡ Ν ὃ a AL S33 ree Lg ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εἶπεν αὐτῷ: πονηρὲ δοῦλε Kal ὀκνηρέ, ἤδεις ὅτι , oo 3 3) Ἂς / ὅθ 3 / ! 3) > a θερίζω ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρα, καὶ συνάγω ὅθεν οὐ διεσκόρπισα ; | ἔδει σε οὖν βαλεῖν Ἀ 3 ΄ , a 7 Ν > Ν EN 2 ΄ a Ν 2D Ν᾿ τὰ ἀργύριά μου τοῖς τραπεζείταις, καὶ ἐλθὼν ἐγὼ ἐκομισάμην ἂν τὸ ἐμὸν σὺν δι > a a τόκῳ. ἄρατε οὖν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ τὸ τάλαντον καὶ δότε τῷ ἔχοντι τὰ δέκα τάλαντα. A Ν ” Ν 4 Ἂς; ΄’ὔ A τῷ γὰρ ἔχοντι παντὶ δοθήσεται καὶ περισσευθήσεται" τοῦ δὲ μὴ ἔχοντος, καὶ ὃ ΕἼ > θή Δ» ἈΦ 3 a Ν Ν > lal ὃ lal > , > x / Ν ἔχει ἀρθήσεται am’ αὐτοῦ. καὶ τὸν ἀχρεῖον δοῦλον ἐκβάλετε εἰς τὸ σκότος τὸ > , > ἊΝ ε Ἂν \ € ‘ “ 3 ΄ ἐξώτερον " ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὃ κλαυθμὸς καὶ 6 βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. Mt. 25:9. οὐκ S A L Z 33 West.mg.; οὐ 17 ὡσαύτως S* C* L 33; add καὶ Ne B C3 μὴ BC D Treg. West.txt. Rev. D cop Treg.txt. et [mg.] West.mg. 150 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VIL § 130. Scenes of the Judgment Day. — Mount of Olives. Third Day of the Week. υ Marr. XXV. 31-46. το x a , ~ 81 ὋὍσταν δὲ ἔλθῃ ὃ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ Kal πάντες οἱ ἄγγελοι > 3 a ΄ (AH SEIN. θ / 60 > an ! x , ” 32 μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, τότε καθίσει ἐπὶ θρόνου δόξης αὐτοῦ - |! καὶ συναχθήσονται ἔμπροσθεν 3 an , Ν᾿ ὌΨΙ ἘΣ ’ Ν ) ᾽7ὔ VA αὐτοῦ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, καὶ ἀφορίσει αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων, ὥσπερ ὃ ποιμὴν ἀφορί- Ν , ΦΌΡΩΝ a 3S, \ / Ν / lal 88 ζει τὰ πρόβατα ἀπὸ τῶν ἐρίφων, ' Kal στήσει τὰ μὲν πρόβατα ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ, x Naas 38 3 , τὰ δὲ ἐρίφια ἐξ εὐωνύμων. / ae a lol nan a Lal 84 Τότε ἐρεῖ ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ - δεῦτε, of εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός om Ἂν cat Ν “ μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου. > , ‘\ XSAN. ΄ὔ lal PENA X53 / la / 3 \ 85 ἐπείνασα γὰρ Kal ἐδώκατέ μοι φαγεῖν, ἐδίψησα καὶ ἐποτίσατέ pe, ξένος ἤμην Kal , / ! Ν Ν aN / > 0 / \ > Δ 6 ‘4 > 86 συνηγάγετέ με, | γυμνὸς Kal περιεβάλετέ με, ἠσθένησα Kal ἐπεσκέψασθέ με, ἐν 87 λ -» καὶ HAG \ ΄ 3 θή SA ae δί λέ φυλακῇ ἤμην καὶ ἤλθατε πρὸς με. τότε ἀποκριθήσονται αὐτῷ οἱ δίκαιοι λέγον- ,ὕ ’ 3, cal δ Ν τες " κύριε, πότε σε εἴδομεν πεινῶντα καὶ ἐθρέψαμεν ; ἢ διψῶντα καὶ ἐποτίσαμεν ; ἵἿ 4 ὃ » ἴὸὃ / Ν ΄ Σ a SN Ν 1X 88 ' πότε δέ σε εἴδομεν E€vov καὶ συνηγάγομεν; ἢ γυμνὸν καὶ περιεβάλομεν; ἐδ / lal a fol 89 40 πότε δέ σε εἴδομεν ἀσθενοῦντα ἢ ἐν φυλακῇ καὶ ἤλθομεν πρός σε; Kal ἀπο- Ν ε Ν > “-“ 3 “ 5 Ν , =) 3) 4719 Se, 5 ΄ Lay , κριθεὶς ὃ βασιλεὺς ἐρεῖ αὐτοῖς - ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ἐποιήσατε ἑνὶ τούτων “ 3 a lal 3 VA 3 Ἀ 15 UY τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου τῶν ἐλαχίστων, ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. , 3 a Ν a 5 2 , , 3289) (ΒΕ a f 3 Ν A 41 Tore ἐρεῖ καὶ τοῖς ἐξ εὐωνύμων - πορεύεσθε ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ κατηραμένοι εἰς TO πῦρ 42 Ν 39." ALE ΄ a ὃ 5X Ν 75 > rv. > a > , x τὸ αἰώνιον τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον TO διαβόλῳ καὶ τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ. ἐπείνασα yap Ν > 3 , , “Ὁ 5 4 \ 3 > 4 , ! / 3, Ν 9 43 καὶ οὐκ ἐδώκατέ μοι φαγεῖν, ἐδίψησα καὶ οὐκ ἐποτίσατέ με, | ξένος μην καὶ οὐ Ψ » Ν Ν 3 ΄ , 3 Ν Cag Dv a Ἂς 3 συνηγάγετέ με, γυμνὸς καὶ οὐ περιεβάλετέ με, ἀσθενὴς καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ καὶ οὐκ 5 , ΄ 5 θ A Ν 3 Ἂν > , , / ‘5 44 ἐπεσκέψασθέ pe. τότε ἀποκριθήσονται καὶ αὐτοὶ A€yovTes* κύριε, πότε σε εἴδο- a ΕῚ a a / Xv Ν A 3 6 a oN 5» r a Al 3 ὃ μεν πεινῶντα ἢ διψῶντα ἢ ξένον ἢ γυμνὸν ἢ ἀσθενῆ ἢ ἐν φυλακῇ, καὶ οὐ διηκο-͵ , ’ ! / 3 Q , > lal ON / 3 3 ‘ ON 4 δι 5 3 5 3 45 νήσαμέν σοι; |! τότε ἀποκριθήσεται αὐτοῖς λέγων - ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐφ᾽ ὅσον οὐκ 3 , eX / a 3 / SQN 2 ἊΣ gS ΄ Ἦν. , 46 ἐποιήσατε ἑνὶ τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων, οὐδὲ ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. καὶ ἀπελεύσονται ie 3 ΄ 2." ε Ν 4 > Ν 3. οὗτοι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον, οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον. § 181. The Rulers conspire. Treachery of Judas. — Jerusalem. Third and Fourth Days of the Week. Marr. XXVI. 1-5, 14-16. 1 Kai ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους, εἶπεν τοῖς 2 μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ - οἴδα- τε ὅτι μετὰ δύο ἡμέ-: Mark XIV. 1, 2, 10, 11. Luxe XXII. 1-6. pas τὸ πάσχα yivera, 1 "Hy δὲ τὸ πάσχα καὶ 1 Ἤγγιζεν δὲ ἣ ἑορτὴ an a ye καὶ ὃ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώ- τὰ ἄζυμα μετὰ δύο ἧ- τῶν ἀζύμων ἡ λεγομέ- που παραδίδοται εἰς τὸ μέρας, ---- νὴ πάσχα, σταυρωθῆναι. ’ ’ e 3 ων Ἂν e , ὃ Tore συνήχθησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ of πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ εἰς τὴν αὐλὴν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως τοῦ λεγομέ- νου Καϊάφα, §§ 130-132.] 14 15 16 MATT. XXVI. Kal συν- εβουλεύσαντο iva τὸν 3 cal ’ iA Ἰησοῦν δόλῳ κρατή- σωσιν καὶ ἀποκτείνω- ” , \ ow. ἔλεγον δέ" μὴ 2 a ε “a 7 ῳ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, ἵνα μὴ ’ an θόρυβος γένηται ἐν τῷ λαῴ. : , Tore πορευθεὶς εἷς τῶν δώδεκα, 6 λεγόμε- > ΄ 5. , vos ‘lovdas ᾿Ισκαριώ- τῆς, πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιε- ~ 1 3 ΄ , , pets | εἶπεν - τί θέλετέ a \ 32. N ε μοι δοῦναι, καὶ ἐγὼ ὑ- μῖν παραδώσω αὐτόν ; ε Ν 3, 3 a οἱ δὲ ἔστησαν αὐτῷ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια. καὶ 3 Ν / > , 3 ἀπὸ τότε ἐζήτει εὐκαι- ’΄ ν Dee's Niel play ἵνα αὑτὸν παραδῷ. 10 11 MARK XIV. ΕΣ ε καὶ ἐζήτουν ot ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἵ γραμ- ματεῖς πῶς αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ κρατήσαντες ἀ- L ’ " ποκτείνωσιν " ἔλεγον ‘ Ν 3 “Ὁ ε fal Yop” Pew Ty SORT is / my” , μήποτε ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ. Καὶ Ἰούδας Ἰσκα- ριώθ, ὃ εἷς τῶν δώδεκα, Sum \ \ 3 ἀπῆλθεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀρ- χιερεῖς ἵνα αὐτὸν παρα- a 3 ἴω ε Ἄρα Φ, ys δοῖ αὐτοῖς. ot δὲ ἀκού- ‘\ σαντες ἐχάρησαν καὶ 3 , 3 a3 ἐπηγγείλαντο αὐτῷ ἀρ- a x γύριον δοῦναι καὶ é- ~ , ζήτει πῶς αὐτὸν edKal- ρως παραδοῖ. UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 6 151 LUKE XXII. Ἂ 5 ’ e καὶ ἐζήτουν ot cal Ν ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμ- a “ / pares TO πῶς ἀνέλω- ow αὐτόν - ἐφοβοῦντο Ν ‘A ,ὔ γὰρ τὸν λαόν. Εἰσῆλθεν δὲ σατα- a 5 5 47> Ν vas εἰς ᾿Ιούδαν τὸν κα- 5 , λούμενον ᾿Ισκαριώτην, + > aA > Lat ὄντα ἐκ Tod ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα, καὶ ἀπελ- Ἂς 4 an θὼν συνελάλησεν τοῖς “ \ ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ στρα- τηγοῖς τὸ πῶς αὐτοῖς Wate) τε Wis παραδῷ αὐτὸν. καὶ ἐ- \ χάρησαν, καὶ συνέθεν- > na 5 , nn TO αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦ- ναι" καὶ ἐξωμολόγη- Lal \ 3, ΕΝ 3 cal σεν, καὶ ἐζήτει εὐκαιρίαν τοῦ παραδοῦναι αὐτὸν ἄτερ ὄχλου αὐτοῖς. § 132. Preparation for the Passover. — Bethany. Jerusalem. Marr. XXVI,. 17-19. 17 18 Τῇ δὲ πρώτῃ τῶν ἀζύμων προσῆλθον οἱ αθηταὶ τῷ Ἰησοῦ λέ- μαθηταὶ τῷ Ἰησοῦ λέ ἴω ,7, ε γοντες " ποῦ θέλεις ἕ- τοιμάσωμέν σοι φα- γεῖν τὸ πάσχα; ὁ δὲ > ε ’, > Ν εἶπεν - ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν / Ἂν x lal πόλιν πρὸς τὸν δεῖνα Ν 4 > aA ε καὶ εἴπατε αὐτῷ" ὃ δι- / / ε δάσκαλος λέγει - ὃ και- ρός μου ἐγγύς ἐστιν, πρός σε ποιῶ τὸ πά- σχα μετὰ τῶν μαθη- τῶν μου. Fifth Day of the Week. Mark XIV. 12-16. 12 13 14 Ν “ , ε la Kat τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέ- lal , a pa τῶν ἀζύμων, ὅτε τὸ ’ὔ ε / πάσχα ἔθυον, λέγουσιν 3 n ε Ν 5 αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐὖ- TOU: ποῦ θέλεις ἀπελ- , θόντες ἑτοιμάσωμεν ἕνα , A φάγῃς τὸ πάσχα; καὶ ἀποστέλλει δύο τῶν cal > Lal \ , μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ καὶ λέ- γει > XN 4 εἰς τὴν πόλιν, αὐτοῖς: ὑπάγετε Ν > καὶ ἀ- , ε a δ παντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρω- ΄ ὕδατος βαστάζων - ἀκολουθή- τες | ἌΝ σατε αυτῳ, © Καὶ οποῦυ πος κεράμιον ΦᾺς > 4 ΝΜ an ἐὰν εἰσέλθῃ εἴπατε τῷ ΓῚ 4, 7 ε οἰκοδεσπότῃ ὅτι ὃ δι- δάσκαλος λέγει: ποῦ 7 10 11 Luxe XXII. 7-13. Ἦλθεν δὲ ἡ ἡμέρα “ 397 > e » τῶν ἀζύμων, ἐν ἡ ἔδει θύεσθαι τὸ πάσχα, καὶ 3 , 4 A ἀπέστειλεν Lletpov καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην εἰπών: πο- ρευθέντες ἑτοιμάσατε CL τ Ν , 9 4 ἡμῖν TO πάσχα, ἵνα φά- γωμεν. fol a / ε , TO* ποῦ θέλεις ἑτοιμά- 3 οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὖ- ε Ν ἰ ἡ 3 σωμεν; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὖ- ἴω Δ' ΄ τοῖς - ἰδοὺ εἰσελθόντων ε lal > ‘\ ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὴν πόλιν συν- αντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρωπος ’ σῷ κεράμιον ὕδατος βα- / στάζων - ἀκολουθήσα- “ Ν Tet τε αὐτῷ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν , εἰς ἣν εἰσπορεύεται, Ἀ lal A > καὶ ἐρεῖτε τῷ οἰκοδε- 152 FROM OUR LORD’S ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM. [Part VII. “15 19 MARK XIV. ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου TO, πά- σχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω; καὶ αὐτὸς ὑμῖν δείξει ἀνάγαιον μέγα ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον, κἀκεῖ ἑτοιμάσα- MATT. XXVI. καὶ ἐποίησαν ec AT Ae "ἢ ot μαθηταὶ ὡς συνέτα- “ ε > na €ev αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Ν / καὶ ἡτοίμασαν TO πά- σχα. 16 τε ἡμῖν. καὶ ἐξῆλθον ot μαθη- ‘ ταὶ καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὴν , Ν e Ν πόλιν καὶ εὗρον καθὼς ts α 3 a Nee id εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ 7TOL- μασαν τὸ πάσχα. 13 σατε. LUKE XXII. / a cls 4 ε σπότῃ τῆς οἰκίας - λέγει σοι 6 Or δασκαλος: ποῦ ἐστὶν τὸ κατάλυμα “ ““ ὅπου τὸ πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν 12 μου φαγω; κἀκεῖνος ὑμῖν δείξει ἀ- ’ νάγαιον μέγα ἐστρω- ’ a μένον" ἐκεῖ ἑτοιμά- ἀπελθόντες δὲ = Ν 3 "δὴν > εὗρον καθὼς εἰρήκει αὖ- τοῖς, καὶ ἡτοίμασαν τὸ πάσχα. a PART VIII. —_+———_ THE FOURTH PASSOVER; OUR LORD’S PASSION; AND THE ACCOMPANYING EVENTS UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. Time: Two days. § 133. The Passover Meal. Contention among the Twelve. — Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. Marr. XXVI. 20. Mark XIV. 17. Luke XXII. 14-18, 24-30. 20 Ovias δὲ γενομένης 17 Καὶ ὀψίας γενομένης 14 Kat ὅτε ἐγένετο ἡ ἀνέκειτο μετὰ τῶν δώ- ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώ- ὥρα, ἀνέπεσεν, καὶ οἱ δεκα μαθητῶν. δεκα. ἀπόστολοι σὺν αὐτῷ. 15 καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς " ἐπιθυμία ἐπεθύμησα τοῦτο τὸ πάσχα φαγεῖν μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν πρὸ τοῦ με παθεῖν" μίᾳ μη χα φαγεῖν μεθ᾿ ὑμῶν πρ με 7 Uj Ν ec a Lid Ae ps > Ν Us ee Ὁ» -“ ye: os , 16 ᾿ λέγω yap ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ φάγω αὐτὸ ἕως ὅτου πληρωθῇ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ ΝΥ A \ ΄ ΄ > , > mo 17 τοῦ θεοῦ. καὶ δεξάμενος ποτήριον εὐχαριστήσας εἶπεν - λάβετε τοῦτο Kal δια- if 3 ε , 4 Ν ΕΝ bi > x ΄ Ch ἴω a SUN a , 18 μερίσατε cis ἑαυτούς - λέγω yap ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐ μὴ πίω ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ γενή- a 3 / oo 7 ε ’ὔ a a ματος τῆς ἀμπέλου ἕως ὅτου ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ On. — > Σ a Ξ πα, ς 2425 Ἐγένετο δὲ καὶ φιλονεικία ἐν αὐτοῖς, τὸ τίς αὐτῶν δοκεῖ εἶναι μείζων. ὃ Ν “5 3 a ε A “ > ~ , > lol Ν ε 35 4 δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - οἱ βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν κυριεύουσιν αὐτῶν, Kal ot ἐξουσιάζοντες a , a - Ν a 26 αὐτῶν εὐεργέται καλοῦνται - ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως, GAN 6 μείζων ἐν ὑμῖν γινέσθω 27 c c , ΝΕ « , ε ε ὃ lanl 4 Ν 4 ε 3 / av ὡς 6 νεώτερος, καὶ ὃ ἡγούμενος ὡς ὃ διακονῶν. τίς yap μείζων, ὁ ἀνακείμενος ἢ ε “ SY ONE 3 , Se Ν > ’, ε lal aX Θ < “ ὃ διακονῶν; οὐχὶ ὃ ἀνακείμενος; ἐγὼ δὲ ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν εἰμὶ ὡς ὃ διακονῶν. a / ε / lal -“ “ 28 29 ὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε οἱ διαμεμενηκότες μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἐν τοῖς πειρασμοῖς μου. κἀγὼ δια- a / / 80 τίθεμαι ὑμῖν καθὼς διέθετό μοι ὃ πατήρ pov βασιλείαν, | iva ἔσθητε καὶ πίνητε Sy σε > ΝΥ ΄ \ , “κα , , ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης μου ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ μου, καὶ καθήσεσθε ἐπὶ θρόνων κρίνοντες ana? τὰς δώδεκα φυλὰς Tov ᾿Ισραήλ. Mt. 26:20. μαθητῶν δὲ A 1, 33 it vg cop; 29 ὑμῖν, καθὼς διέθετό μοι 6 πατήρ pov, Ba- om Β D Treg. [ West.] Rev.mg. σιλείαν Treg. West.mg. Rev.txt. 30 καθή- Le. 22:16. οὐκέτι ( Dvgsyrr; om SA_ σεσθε SA B* al ve cop West.mg.; καθῆσθε B C*vid L cop [Treg.] West. Rev. | B* T A Treg.mg. West.txt. 154 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIL § 134. Jesus washes the Feet of his Disciples. — Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. ΘΗΝ XIII. 1-20. n a Aa 3 n a > 1 Πρὸ δὲ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα εἰδὼς 6 “Ingots ὅτι ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ 7 ὥρα ἵνα pe- “ na Ν ταβῃ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, ἀγαπήσας τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν τῷ 2 Ko is τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς. καὶ δείπνου γινομέ Ὁ διαβόλου 7d κόσμῳ, εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς. ὶ δείπνου γινομένου, τοῦ διαβόλου ἤδη 3 βεβληκότος εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἵνα παραδοῖ αὐτὸν ᾿Ιούδας Σίμωνος ᾿Ισκαριώτης, ! εἰ- Ἂ Ψ ΄, BAN SASS Ν > X a ἌΦΕΣ S25N a 3¢° Ν δὼς ὅτι πάντα ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ πατὴρ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας, καὶ ὅτι ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν καὶ Ἂν ἊΝ 6 ἃς ε / ! > ,ὔ > a ὃ , ἣν (0 Ἂς e ᾿ς X 4 πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ὑπάγει, | ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου καὶ τίθησιν τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ λα- rf} > ο Lal 6 βὼν λέντιον διέζωσεν ἑαυτόν - εἶτα βάλλει ὕδωρ εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα, Kal ἤρξατο , Ν ΄ val ~ x ΄ a / ΑΕ ΄ νίπτειν τοὺς πόδας τῶν μαθητῶν καὶ ἐκμάσσειν τῷ λεντίῳ ᾧ ἣν διεζωσμένος. 5, fo) Ν / , / > A ΄ ΄ ΄ Ν ΄ ἔρχεται οὖν πρὸς Σίμωνα Πέτρον- λέγει αὐτῷ: κύριε, σύ μου νίπτεις τοὺς πό- δας ; |! ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ: ὃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ σὺ οὐκ οἶδας ἄρτι, γνώσῃ δὲ ; ἐκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ὕ ρτι, γνώσῃ i) » - / ‘ / ‘ / cal μετὰ ταῦτα. λέγει αὐτῷ Πέτρος: οὐ μὴ viilys. μου τοὺς πόδας εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. soon σὺ 3 ‘6 ail ca SERN eS Ν ΄ 3 3 ΄ Mee a ! ré EME on] ἀπεκρίθη Ἰησοῦς αὐτῷ: ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ. έγει αὐτῷ τ΄ YG ΄ Ν ἣν "ὃ ᾿ς 3 Ν Ν Ν “ x Ἂς Σίμων Ilevpos: κύριε, μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰς χεῖρας καὶ τὴν 10 κεφαλήν. λέγει αὐτῷ ᾿Ιησοῦς: ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν νίψασθαι, ἀλλ᾽ »” ἣν 7 Laan 3 a ye) > > . τυ κῆν / 3, Ν Ν 11 ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος - καὶ ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε, GAN οὐχὶ πάντες. ἤδει γὰρ τὸν / », “-“ > παραδιδόντα αὐτόν - διὰ τοῦτο εἶπεν OTL οὐχὶ πάντες καθαροί ἐστε. ῳ 3 3, x 7d 5 “ ἊΝ: ἣν / > “ ips 4 / 12 “Ore οὖν ἔνιψεν τοὺς πόδας αὐτῶν καὶ ἔλαβεν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀνέπεσεν πά- i 3 beats , ΄ ,ὔ (ame a a ! c tal fof ὁ ‘ ε ὃ δά 13 λιν, εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - γινώσκετε τί πεποίηκα ὑμῖν ; | ὑμεῖς φωνεῖτέ με" ὁ διδάσκα- Ne Ψ \ rn / SEN , > > SB ANC te) 2) τ Ν , 14 Nos καὶ 6 κύριος, Kal καλῶς λέγετε: εἰμὶ yap. εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πό- a / das ὁ κύριος Kal 6 διδάσκαλος, Kal ὑμεῖς ὀφείλετε ἀλλήλων νίπτειν τοὺς πόδας * ε / Ν / pee σ \ 5. N > , mele ὯΝ ε “ fol 15 ὑπόδειγμα γὰρ δέδωκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα καθὼς ἐγὼ ἐποίησα ὑμῖν καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιῆτε. SEN CES 4 en > 3, ὃ vr aa las / > a ὑδὲ SET, r 16 ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος 17 μείζων τοὺ πέμψαντος αὐτόν. εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε, μακάριοί ἐστε ἐὰν ποιῆτε αὐτά. lal τ lal 3 ree A ε Ν 18 οὐ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω: ἐγὼ οἶδα τίνας ἐξελεξάμην - ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα ἡ γραφὴ πλη- -- a a a ‘ ρωθῇ:" ὃ τρώγων pet’ ἐμοῦ TOV ἄρτον ἐπῆρκεν ἐπ᾽ ἐμὲ τὴν ι cal lad La) ν 4 μι 19 πτέρναν αὐτοῦ. ἀπάρτι λέγω ὑμῖν πρὸ τοῦ γενέσθαι, ἵνα πιστεύσητε ὅταν ν» με > , > 3 Ν > Ἂν ἣΝ / τ, ae. c λ 4 ow 4 Bi ἃς 20 γένηται ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι. ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃ λαμβάνων ἄν τινα πέμψω ἐμὲ c Ν > Ἂς ’ὔ Me Ν 4 /, λαμβάνει, ὁ δὲ ἐμὲ λαμβάνων λαμβάνει τὸν πέμψαντά pe. 8 135. Jesus points out the Traitor. Judas withdraws. — Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. Matr. XXVI. 21-25. Marx XIV. 18-21. Joun XIII. 21-35. 21 Καὶ ἐσθιόντων αὐ 18 Kal dvaxepevwvai= 21 Ταῦτα εἰπὼν Ἰησοῦς τῶν εἶπεν - ἀμὴν λέγω τῶν καὶ ἐσθιόντων ὃ Ἴ- ἐταράχθη τῷ πνεύματι 8. 45. Ps. 41:10. Joh. 13: 10. νίψασθαι S Rev.mg.; pm εἰ 18 μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ δὰ A D vg cop syrr Treg.mg. μὴ (ἢ A C3) robs πόδας A B C* et? L vg Rev.mg.; μου BC L Treg.txt. West. Rev.txt. Treg. [West.] Rev.txt.; τὴν κεφαλὴν vivae | ἐπῆρκεν δὴ A; ἐπῆρεν BC DL Treg. West. σθαι εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας 1). Rev. §§ 184, 135.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 155 ἘΠΕ DOSOUE 915 95: JOHN XIII. MATT. XXVI. ean 7 Ὁ. > ὑμῖν ὅτι εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν παραδώσει με. MARK XIV- noovs εἶπεν- ἀ- 21 Τλὴν ἰδοὺ ἡ χεὶρ ‘ / Ὁ n μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν o Φ > ε “ ὅτι εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν παραδώσει με, ὃ τοῦ παραδιδόν- τος με μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ \ a , ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέ- ἂν ΄ὔ καὶ ἐμαρτύρησεν καὶ εἶπεν - ἀμὴν 3 Ν Δ ε - ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν -“ e a nr OTL εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐσθίων μετ’ ἐ- 23 ζης. ---- καὶ αὐτοὶ 22 παραδώσει με. & 22 καὶ λυπού- 19 μοῦ. ἤρξαντο ἤρξαντο συνζη- βδλεπον εἰς ἀλλή- μενοι σφόδραἤρ- λυπεῖσθαι καὶ “ τεῖν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺὶς λους οἱ μαθηταί, / > ἕαντο λέγειν αὐ- , ean) a λέγειν αὐτῷ εἷς Ν / ΝΜ »” > τὸ Tis ἄρα εἴη ἐξ ΄ Ν ἀπορούμενοι περὶ roe ? Ny - ΄ ors ε aA , , > τῷ εἷς ἕκαστος - κατὰ εἷς: μήτι αὐτῶν ὃ τοῦτο 28 τίνος λέγει. ἣν ’, ἌΡ ΓΑ > Ste ΄, ΄ 3 ΄ἷ i μητι eyo εἰμι, eyo r μέλλων Tpao- GVAKELILEVOS εἰς 4 “ ol κύριε; σειν. ---- ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν > n° n , αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ KOA- 24 a alt a a 3 , ε aq me τς , Φ ’ > , 17 ΄ πῳ Tov ἴησου, ὃν ἡγάπα ὁ ἴησους" νεύει οὖν τουτῳ «“ἰμὼν {Ἱέτρος \ ἈΝ YN δὸς PION , > \ δὶ / > Ν πο 3 ap + 25 καὶ λεγεὶ αὐτῷ - εἶπὲ τίς ἐστιν περὶ οὗ λέγει. ἐπιπεσὼν οὖν ἐκεῖνος οὔ- Skew \ ne a? a / Sean , Ἐν 5 ! > , 26 τως ἐπὶ τὸ στῆθος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ λέγει αὐτῷ" κύριε, τίς ἐστιν ; | ἀποκρίνε- ται ὃ Ἰησοῦς ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν ᾧ ἐγὼ βάψω τὸ ψωμίον καὶ δώσω αὐτῷ. ---- y t pf μ ὯΝ MATT. XXVI. MARK XIV. LUKE XXIl. ε > “ 28 ὃ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς 20 ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ἊΝ e a , ε εἶπεν: δ ἐμβάψας per’ εἷς τῶν δώδεκα, ὁ ἐμ- > A τ a > A , > > a ἐμοῦ τὴν χεῖρα ἐν τῷ βαπτόμενος μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ‘ a? x ΄ “ τρυβλίῳ, οὗτός μεπα- 21 εἰς τὸ τρυβλίον. ὅτι , ε Ν εν € Ἂς ΕΝ eS , 7 ε εν Ν A 3 24 ραδώσει. O μὲν υἱὸς O μὲν VLOS του ἀνθρώ- 22 οὁτι ὁ υἱὸς μεν TOV ἂν- a Ν ,ὔ ΄. τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει που ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέ- θρώπου κατὰ τὸ ὡρι- ,ὔ \ h “a 7 , καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ γραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ" σμένον πορεύεται, πλὴν > a ΓΝ. δὲ Ἄν Ὁ SHIN δὲ a > 6 ΄, Seen a 3 θ , 5 , αὐτοῦ. οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀν- οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ οὐαὶ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκεί- 7, » e > ’΄ 3 e ε εν @ θρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ dv οὗ 6 ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ υἱὸς νῳ δι’ οὗ παραδίδο- an na > 4 , υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου πα- τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδί- TOL.— Ν 3 na padidorar: καλὸν ἣν δοται- καλὸν αὐτῷ εἰ > a > > > : 46 ε 3 > vvnb cy Wa) αὐτῷ εἰ οὐκ ἐγεννήθη ὃ οὐκ ἐγεννήθη ὃ avOpw- - 5" fal > fal 25 ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος. ἀ- πος ἐκεῖνος. JOHN XIII. 3 ποκριθεὶς δὲ ᾿Ιούδας 6 > ΄ 3 παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν εἶπεν: μήτι ἐγώ 26 — βάψας οὖν τὸ ψωμίον λαμβάνει καὶ γε > aN > > εἶμι, ῥαββεί; λέγει αὐτῷ σὺ εἶπας. δίδωσιν ᾿Ιούδᾳ Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτου. 27 καὶ a τὸ f ) ἰσῆλθ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον, τότε εἰσῆλθεν > a ε cal , Φ a“ a “ εἰς ἐκεῖνον ὃ σατανᾶς. λέγει οὖν αὐτῷ Ιησοῦς - ὃ ποιεῖς ποίησον τάχιον. Ν 3 XN uy “ > fal 28 29 τοῦτο δὲ οὐδεὶς ἔγνω τῶν ἀνακειμένων πρὸς Ti εἶπεν αὐτῷ" τινὲς γὰρ ἐδόκουν, ἐπεὶ τὸ γλωσσόκομον εἶχεν ᾿Τούδας, ὅτι λέ ὑτῷ Ἰησοῦς" ayo ὧ f €l TO γ μον εἶχεν Ἰούδας, ὅτι λέγει αὐτῷ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἀγόρασον ὧν χρείαν Ν 5 Ν ε , \ a a. εἴ a A 30 ἔχομεν εἰς THY ἑορτήν, ἢ τοῖς πτωχοῖς ἵνα TL δῷ. λαβὼν οὖν TO ψωμίον ἐκεῖνος ἐξῆλθεν εὐθύς - ἣν δὲ νύξ. “ > A a A a 81 “Ore οὖν ἐξῆλθεν, λέγει ᾿Τησοῦς - viv ἐδοξάσθη ὃ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ ὃ θεὸς Joh. 13:25. ἐπιπεσὼν S* A Οϑ D; ἀναπε- West. Rev.; δὲ A. 26 ἀποκρίνεται S* A σὼν S BC* L Treg. West. Rev. | οὖν 8 Ὁ Οϑ D veg cop; add ody SB C* L [Treg.mg.] L 33 vg [Treg.mg.]; om B C Treg.txt. West. Rev. 156 92 89 34 35 ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ. JOHN XIII. THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VII. a Ν εἰ ὃ θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ, καὶ ὃ θεὸς δοξάσει αὐτὸν ἐν ὑτῷ, καὶ εὐθὺς δοξά ὑτόν. τεκνία, ἔτι μικρὸν μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἰμί: ζητήσετέ αὐτῷ, καὶ εὐθὺς δοξάσει αὐτόν. » ἔτι μικρὸν μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἰμί: ζητήσετέ με, \ Ν > ae. / 7 Ψ S45 ΡΟ ΄ ε a > ΄ > a xi και καθὼς ειπον τοις Ἰουδαίοις οτι ὁπου eyo uTayo UPELS OU δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν, και Εν , ” ὑμῖν λέγω ἄρτι. ΕΑ LIAN ey N je - 3 a DUN AN γάπησα πῃυμας ινα και υμεις AYAT ATE a WAOUS. ἐντολὴν καινὴν δίδωμι ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους, καθὼς 7 5 \ (BB) 2\ 3 , 7 3 3 ΄ ὅτι ἐμοὶ μαθηταί ἐστε, ἐὰν ἀγάπην ἔχητε ἐν ἀλλήλοις. [ὃ 196.1 The Lord’s Supper. — Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. , , ἐν τούτῳ γνώσονται πάντες Ματτ. X XVI. 26-29. Mark XIV. 22-25. Luke XXII. 19, 20. 1 Cor. ΧΙ. 23-25. \ , 25 ἨἬσθιόντων δὲ 22 ΚΚαὶ ἐσθιόντων αὐτῶν λαβὼν ὃ αὐτῶν λαβὼν ap- 9. nw ἂν > 7 Inoots ἄρτον τον εὐλογήσας \ > ἮΝ ΕΙΣ 3, Ν Zo καὶ εὐλογήσας €- ἔκλασεν καὶ ἔδω- Ν \ > a ee) κλασεν Kat δοὺς κεν αὐτοῖς καὶ εἷ- - - > / τοῖς μαθηταῖς εἷ- πεν: λάβετε. πεν " λάβετε φά- τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ a lal / yete* τοῦτό ἐ- σῶμά μου. Ν ἴων ’ στιν τὸ σῶμά μου. “ ἊΝ 27 καὶ λαβῶν 28 καὶ 4 ον 5 λ Ν ’ὔ ποτήριον καὶ εὐ- αβὼν ποτήριον 3 ΄ 5 χαριστήσας ἔδω- εὐχαριστήσας €- Lal “ Ἂν κεν αὐτοῖς λέ δωκεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ / 2é 3 ἐξ 3 fal γων" πίετε ἐξ ἔπιον ἐξ αὐτοῦ a Sa αὑτοῦ πάντες: 24 πάντες. καὶ εἷ- 28 τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν πεν αὐτοῖς - τοῦ- : a , NOH RON BP TO αἷμά μου τῆς τό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά , Ν Ν Lal ὃ Q , διαθήκης TO περὶ μου τῆς διαθη- a > la Ν > / πολλῶν ἐκχυννὸ- κης τὸ ἐκχυννό- 5 ΕΣ «εἩ ‘\ λ μενον eis ἄφεσιν μενον ὑπὲρ πολ- ἁμαρτιῶν. λῶν. MATT. XXVI. -“ ’ὔ 3 29 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐ μὴ πίω Gar “ / n 5 ἄρτι ἐκ τούτου τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμ- a 7 πέλου ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ὅταν Cy 4 9 ε fal ‘\ 9 aA αὐτὸ πίνω μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν καινὸν ἐν TH “ , βασιλείᾳ τοῦ πατρός μου. Joh. 18 : 892. εἰ 6 θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ Se A C2 ve cop; om N* Β C* Ὁ L [Treg.] West. Rev. Le. 22: 19,20. om τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διδόμενον ἐὸν ἐκχυννόμενον D [West]. Rev.mg. 19 20 25 Mt. 26 : 27. Καὶ + αρτον λαβὼν εὐχαρι- ᾽ὔ ΕἸΣ στήσας ἔκλασεν δ.» > “a καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων - τοῦτό ἐ- στιν τὸ σῶμά Ν ε ‘\ ε μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑ- nm , μῶν διδόμενον " τοῦτο ποιεῖτε εἰς Ἀ > Ν 3 , τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνά- μνησιν. Ν XA Kal TO , ε ’ ποτήριον ὡσαύ- τως μετὰ τὸ δει- πνῆσαι, λέγων" τοῦτο τὸ ποτήρι- τ Ν ον ἡ καινὴ δια- , 5 “ σ΄ θήκη ἐν τῷ αἵ- pati μου, τὸ ὑ- πὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυν- νόμενον. 29 24 25 -Ἔλαβεν dp- tov ἷ καὶ εὐχα- ριστήσας ἔκλα- σεν καὶ εἶπεν" τοῦτό μου ἐστὶν τὸ σῶμα τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν : τοῦτο ποι- εἴτε εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν. ὧὥσαύ- τως καὶ τὸ πο- τήριον μετὰ τὸ Ae- τοῦτο TO δειπνῆσαι, γων" ’ «ε Ν ποτήριον ἡ καινὴ , > Ν 3 διαθήκη ἐστὶν ἐν 5° ig ee, ΜΕΝ, TO ἐμῷ αἵματι ων Lal τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, ε / oN Ld ὁσάκις ἐὰν πί- Ἂν νητε, εἰς τὴν ἐ- μὴν ἀνάμνησιν. MARK XIV. 3 Ν λέ Cun Lg ΓΎΡΑ, > αμην eyo υμιν OTL οὐκετι OV μὴ πίω ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ap- 4 ῳ A ε / > / id πέλου ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ὅταν A rn , αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ. AC D Rev.mg. ποτήριον δὰ BL Z 33; pm τὸ 28 διαθήκης SB LZ 33; pm καινῆς A C D vg cop syrr Treg. Rey.mg. §§ 136, 137.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 15T [8 137.] Jesus foretells the Fall of Peter, and the Dispersion of the 36 37 31 32 33 31 32 33 34 35 Twelve. — Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. Joun XIII. 56-38. ra > x ’ ,ὔ / A ε ΄ > , > an δ ΄ 4. ὧς Λέγει αὐτῷ Σίμων Πέτρος - κύριε, ποῦ ὑπάγεις ; ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Τησοῦς - ὅπου ἐγὼ ἘΞ A ΄ Ὁ , ἐν τυ σὰ ὑπάγω οὐ δύνασαί μοι νῦν ἀκολουθῆσαι, ἀκολουθήσεις δὲ ὕστερον. λέγει αὐτῷ Πέ - κύριε, διατί οὐ δύ ( ἀκολουθῆ ἄρτι; τὴν ψυχήν μου ὑπὲρ σοῦ ETPOS* κύριε, διατί οὐ δύναμαί σοι ἃ υθῆσαι ἄρτι; τὴν ψυχήν ph ἐρ σοῦ θήσω. Matr. XXVI. 31-35. Mark XIV. 27-31. Tore λέγει αὐτοῖς 6 Ἰησοῦς " πάντες 27 Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς ὅτι πάν- Γὰ al / > > BS SE ὃ λ 0 , 6 Ψ / ὑμεῖς σκανδαλισθήσεσθε ev ἐμοὶ ev τες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε, ὅτι γέγρα- τῇ νυκτὶ ταύτῃ. γέγραπται γάρ" " ara. ** πατάξω TOV ποιμένα, Kal δι- πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα, ασκορπισθήσονται τὰ πρό- καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορ- aA ’, Ν \ Ν / 9 \ Ν Ν βατα τῆς ποίμνης. μετὰ δὲ τὸ 28 πισθήσονται. ἀλλὰ μετὰ τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με προάξω ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν ἐγερθῆναί με προάξω ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ 6 Πέτρος 29 Ταλιλαίαν. ὃ δὲ Πέτρος ἔφη αὐτῷ: > 9. A > ΄ ΄, > \ ΄ ΄ εἶπεν αὐτῷ εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθή- εἰ καὶ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται, 3 Yat oe ea 39. 3 ? 3 > fi σονται ἐν σοί, ἐγὼ οὐδέποτε σκανδα- ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐγώ. λισθήσομαι. Luke XXII. 31-88. / ’ 5 Ν “ > / ean a Τὰ ε Ν a Σίμων Σίμων, ἰδοὺ Oo oaTavas ἐξῃτήσατο τυμας TOV OLVLATAL ὡς TOV OLTOV* ΒΡ Ἂς δὲ 25 6 Ν a Ny S Nt / € , \ ΄ > / eyo ἘΠ ΕἸ €y) ὯΝ περι σου, tva μη εκ L777) 7) πιστις σου. και συ ποτε ἐπιστρέψας ye \ 39 ὃ λ ΄ ε δὲ > i ive shay , ‘ a ΄ > στηρισον TOVS AOE gous σου. O O€ εἰπεν auTw “ KUPLE, μετὰ σου ETOL{LOS εἰμι καὶ εἰς φυλακὴν MATT. XXVI. MARK XIV. GN θά ΞΣ JOHN XIII. ” > ~ € 8, Ν / Sa 3 epy αὐτῷ ὃ Iy- 80 καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ 84 πορεύεσθαι. ὃ δὲ 88 ἀποκρίνεται Ἴη- ON re > Ν λέ ε "il NI > ἣν i , A Ν ἦν σοῦς: ἀμὴν λές. ὁ Ἰησοῦς: ἀμὴν εἶπεν - λέγω σοι, cous: τὴν ψυχήν 7 τ val yo σοι ὅτι ἐν λέγω σοι ὅτι σὺ Πέτρε, οὐ φωνή- σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ , lal Ν , Ἂ ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ σήμερον ταύτῃ σει σήμερον ἀ- θήσεις ; ἀμὴν ἀ- ‘ 3 / a“ \ Ν BD / 4 Ἂν Ν 4 3 πρὶν ἀλέκτορα τῇ νυκτὶ πρὶν ἢ λέκτωρ ἕως τρὶς μὴν λέγω σοι, οὐ a x > Ν > ᾽ὔ 3 ᾽ὔ Ἂς 3 Ν 3 / φωνῆσαι τρὶς a- δὶς ἀλέκτορα φω- ἀπαρνήσῃ μὴ εἰ- μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φω- / / a , ¢ 2 παρνήσῃ με. λέ- νῆσαι τρίξ με δέναι με. νήσῃ ἕως οὗ ἀρ- 3 a ε ΤΠ la 31 > / A «ε δὲ ΄ ’ὔ γει αὐτῷ ὃ Πέ- ἀπαρνήσῃ. ὃ δὲ νήσῃ με τρίς. Tpos* κἂν δέῃ με ἐκπερισσῶς ἐλάλει: ἐά ρ nb ρισσῶς ἐάν \ a , lal σὺν σοὶ ἀποθανεῖν, ov με δέῃ συναποθανεῖν σοι, μή σε ἀπαρνήσομαι. οὐ μή σε ἀπαρνήσωμαι. ΄ ὁμοίως καὶ πάντες οἱ ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ πάντες ἊΝ > 3 μαθηταὶ εἶπον. ἔλεγον. 8. 81 οἴο. Zech. 13:7. Joh. 19:96. ἐγὼ δὴ 1) 33 vg cop; om A BC L syrr Treg. West. 158 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. 35 36 37 38 LUKE XXII. Kai εἶπεν αὑτοῖς - ὅτε ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς ἄτερ βαλλαντίου καὶ πήρας Kal ὕπο- δημάτων, μή τινος ὑστερήσατε; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν - οὐθενός. | ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἀλλὰ νῦν ὃ ἔχων βαλλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν, καὶ ὃ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν. λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν ὅτι τοῦτο τὸ γεγραμμέ- νον δεῖ τελεσθῆναι ἐν ἐμοί, τό" καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη: καὶ γὰρ τὸ περὶ ἐμοῦ τέλος ἔχει. | of δὲ εἶπαν - κύριε, ἰδοὺ μάχαιραι ὧδε δύο. ὁ δὲ i) > o ε ΄ > €LTEV AUTOLS* LKAVOV ἐστιν. § 138. Jesus comforts his Disciples. The Holy Spirit promised. — Jerusalem. 1 2 3 Sa σι - Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. Joun XIV. 1-31. Ν f A) CU ΚΩΝ ε δέ Ἕ 5 Ν ’ N tae The’ tal Μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία - πιστεύετε cis τὸν θεόν, καὶ εἰς ἐμὲ πιστεύετε. ! > A > 7 a / Ν Νὴ S93) 3 be , > Ἃ eas 7 ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ TOD πατρός μου μοναὶ πολλαί εἰσιν - εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν - ὅτι πο- / “ lal lal ρεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν - ' καὶ ἐὰν πορευθῶ καὶ ἑτοιμάσω τόπον ὑμῖν, πάλιν , a A lal ἔρχομαι καὶ παραλήμψομαι ὑμᾶς πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, ἵνα ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ καὶ ὑμεῖς Are. καὶ ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω οἴδατε τὴν δδόν. ᾽ CBee) A ΄ 3 » a ¢ , Ἂς a 3, Ν Λέγει αὐτῷ Θωμᾶς κύριε, οὐκ οἴδαμεν ποῦ ὑπάγεις, καὶ πῶς οἴδαμεν τὴν c , , > an? ~ v2 ε \ ἊΝ ΄ Ν / ὁδόν ; | λέγει αὐτῷ ᾿Τησοῦς - ἐγώ εἰμι ἣ ὁδὸς καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια καὶ ἣ ζωή ovdels Ep- ἣν fal χεται πρὸς τὸν πατέρα ci μὴ OV ἐμοῦ. εἰ ἐγνώκατε ἐμέ, Kal τὸν πατέρα μου , Ay 19 ie , EON we / 3 Ld γνώσεσθε τ Καὶ QTApPTL γινώσκετε QUTOV και EWPAKATE AUTOV. ~ ’ lal a Ἂν id \ Lal 89 Λέγει αὐτῷ Φίλιππος" κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν πατέρα, καὶ ἀρκεῖ ἡμῖν. | λέγει 10 11 12 19 14 15 17 18 19 5 “΄“ε Ἴ a Ρ ST / θ᾽ ε rn 5» ’ὔ K Ν οὐκ 3, 7 / Or A αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς - τοσούτῳ χρόνῳ μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἰμί, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωκάς με, Φίλιππε; N , a , a A \ ὃ ἑωρακὼς ἐμὲ ἑώρακεν τὸν πατέρα: πῶς σύ λέγεις - δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν πατέρα; 1 > , ov ΕἸ Ee a Ν Aye Ν 3 > (es peg ers Vir EN οὐ πιστεύεις ὅ τι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρὶ καὶ ὃ πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν; τὰ βήματα ἃ ἐγὼ ΄, ean 48 Liga a 3 an ε Ν \ Tes > \ , a Wee) λέγω ὑμῖν ax’ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐ λαλῶ- 6 δὲ πατὴρ ὁ ἐν ἐμοὶ μένων ποιεῖ TA ἔργα > La ! , / a > Ν > , ~ Ν AD € Ν > > ’ τ > δὲ Ψ ὃ Ν αὐτοῦ. | πιστεύετέ μοι ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρὶ καὶ ὃ πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί" εἰ δὲ μή, διὰ Ν 3 3. Ν ΄ 3 Ν 3 ἣν t εὐ ε , > 5 / ef ἃ τὰ ἔργα αὐτὰ πιστεύετε. ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμέ, τὰ ἔργα ἃ ~ “ ve ΄ὔ , ov ἐν ‘ Ν ’ ἐγὼ ποιῶ κἀκεῖνος ποιήσει, καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει - ὅτι ἐγὼ πρὸς τὸν πατέρα ΄ Cetk iy 12 4 a , LA πορεύομαι, ἵ καὶ ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν TO ὀνόματί μου, τοῦτο ποιήσω, ἵνα δοξασθῇ ε Ν 5 a ean 5 9 OP la 2 re ΘΙ ὁ rd A Sey / ὃ πατὴρ ἐν TO VIG. ἐάν TL αἰτήσητέ με ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μοῦ, ἐγὼ ποιήσω. 3 Ν 3 ΤΕΣ ὦ Ν > BS Ν say ΄ Θ᾽ τ ἌΣ ES , Ν 186. “Hay ἀγαπᾶτέ με, τὰς ἐντολὰς τὰς ἐμὰς τηρήσετε. κἀγὼ ἐρωτήσω τὸν πα- / Ν 4 ΄, ὃ , ea 7 θ᾽ ε la > > Ν 5. ! Ν τέρα καὶ ἄλλον παράκλητον δώσει ὑμῖν, ἵνα pe ὑμῶν ἢ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ' TO n na “ Ὁ “ BAX πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας, ὃ ὃ κόσμος οὐ δύναται λαβεῖν, ὅτι οὐ θεωρεῖ αὐτὸ οὐδὲ γι- tat Li, 38. a / Ν €. Δ᾽ 3, 3 νώσκει αὐτό ὑμεῖς γινώσκετε αὐτό, ὅτι παρ᾽ ὑμῖν μένει καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσται. ' οὐκ 3 ΄ δον tN 3 ΄ 3, x Το σὰ 53 Ν Ἀν ΠΕ / SOE ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφανούς, ἔρχομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς. ἔτι μικρὸν καὶ ὃ κόσμος με οὐκέτι ΓΘ. 15. 58. le, Le. 99:86. καὶ 6 μὴ ἔχων, πωλησάτω τὸ γνώσεσθε δὰ D* ; ἐγνώκειτε ἄν A C® Ὁ"; ἂν ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω, μάχαιραν Rev. ἤδειτε Β C* L 33 Treg. West. Rev. | καὶ se meg. SA C3 D vg cop syrr ; om Β C* L 33 Treg. Joh. 14:4. τὴν ὅδόν δὰ Ὁ) Οὗ L33 cop; καὶ txt. et [mg.] West. Rev. 11 πιστεύετε τὴν ὅδὸν οἴδατε A C? D ve syrr [Treg-mg.] sec 8D L 33 vg; add por A B cop [Treg.] Rev.me. % ἐγνώκατε δὰ D* cop; ἐγνώ- West.mg. Rev. 14 pe δὰ Β' 33 κειτέα BC D? L Treg. West. Rev. | ἐμέ S vg syrr [Treg.mg.]; om AD L cop Treg. D; με BCL Treg. West. Rev.; om ἃ. txt. | West.] Rev. mg. §§ 138, 139.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 159 JOHN XIV. 20 6 Ca ts δὲ θ a) big ἐγὼ ζῶ ΔΕ ΤΟ ts ζή ΤΟΞΙ ee δὰ eae εωρεῖ" ὑμεῖς δὲ θεωρεῖτέ με, ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ καὶ ὑμεῖς ζήσετε. | ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ fa ε = Φ 5 Ν > Lal / We a > > Ν > \ > < a εν 21 γνώσεσθε ὑμεῖς ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρί μου καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν. 6 ἔχων Ν lol lal “ na τὰς ἐντολάς μου Kal τηρῶν αὐτάς, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν ὃ ἀγαπῶν με’ ὃ δὲ ἀγαπῶν pe ἀγαπηθήσεται ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός μου, κἀγὼ ἀγαπήσω αὐτὸν καὶ ἐμφανίσω αὐτῷ 22 ἐ " Λέγει αὐτῷ Ἰούδας, οὐχ ὃ ᾿Ισκαριώτης - κύριε, καὶ τί γέ OTL ἡμῖ ἐμαυτόν. έγε o as, οὐχ ὃ ᾿Ισκαριώτης " κύριε, Kal τί γέγονεν ὅτι ἡμῖν 28 μέλλεις ἐ nl bv Kal οὐχὶ TO KO ; ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ἰησοῦ L εἶπεν μέλλεις ἐμφανίζειν σεαυτὸν καὶ οὐχὶ τῷ κόσμῳ; ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπει cee.) 27 9 A \ , ΄ ie , > , 39 αὐτῷ - ἐάν τις ἀγαπᾷ με, τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσει, καὶ O πατήρ μου ἀγαπήσει αὐ- 24 le Ν ἣν ier τῆν ἐλ » 0 Ν Ν Ε] > fal ΄ὔ θ ! « Nes) TOV, Kal πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐλευσόμεθα Kal μονὴν παρ᾽ αὐτῷ ποιησόμεθα. | ὃ μὴ aya- a Ν 4 3 lal νε , ἃ 3 4 3 + CAN 3 Ν πῶν με τοὺς λόγους μου οὐ τηρεῖ: καὶ O λόγος ὃν ἀκούετε οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸς ἀλλὰ A ΄ ΄ ν τοῦ πέμψαντός με πατρός. nn a A , lal 2526 Tatra λελάληκα ὑμῖν παρ᾽ ὑμῖν pevwv: '6 δὲ παράκλητος, TO πνεῦμα TO “ a , ε Ν > ἂν δὲ νῷ ’,ὔ > a ε a ὃ ὃ ff , \ ε ἅγιον ὃ πέμψει ὃ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα καὶ ὑπο- ’ὔ ε n / ray 3 ε La) i} 3 Ἢ 5 ’ ε a 53 ’ \ > ἣν δῷ 27 μνήσει ὑμᾶς πάντα ἃ εἶπον ὑμῖν. | εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν, εἰρήνην τὴν ἐμὴν δίδωμι δ. ταν 3 Ν ε Ps Lo SON δῶ Ce ‘A , ε “ Ξ ὑμῖν οὐ καθὼς ὃ κόσμος δίδωσιν ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν. μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ δά δὲ ὃ δὰ / ! > , 4 SN > cae ες ΄, ΑΝ, \ 28 καρδία μηδὲ δειλιάτω. ᾿ ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν - ὑπάγω Kal ἔρχομαι πρὸς cal a Ψ ¢ ὑμᾶς. εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν OTL πορεύομαι πρὸς TOV πατέρα, OTL ὃ πατὴρ , \ n v cal Ν 29 μείζων μου ἐστίν. καὶ νῦν εἴρηκα ὑμῖν πρὶν γενέσθαι, ἵνα ὅταν γένηται. πιστεύ- q 3 / AAG Ν Xr , θ᾽ ε fal ¥ »” Ν ε a Ἑ » Ἂν 30 σητε. ' οὐκέτι πολλὰ λαλήσω μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν - ἔρχεται γὰρ ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων, καὶ 3 3 Νὴ 3 μὲ ὑδέ ἀλλ᾽ Ὁ a ¢ ee μὴ 3 “ Ν , ΑΝ 81 ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν, | GAN ἵνα γνῷ ὃ κόσμος ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν πατέρα, καὶ κα- θὼς ἐνετείλατό μοι ὃ πατήρ, οὕτως ποιῶ. ἐγείρεσθε, ἄγωμεν ἐντεῦθεν. § 139. Christ the true Vine. His Disciples hated by the World. —Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week, JOHN XY. 1-27. ve Ἅ ἊΝ / an a“ 12 “Eye εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή, Kat ὃ πατήρ μου ὃ γεωργός ἐστιν. πᾶν κλῆμα 3 > Ν ‘\ , / 4 > / \ “ Ν Ν ΄ ᾽,ὕ x Ἔτι ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπόν, αἴρει αὐτό, καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον, καθαίρει αὐτὸ “ \ , , y A , , 3 ἵνα καρπὸν πλείονα φέρῃ. ἤδη ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε διὰ τὸν λόγον ὃν λελάληκα CN ! , 3 3 , SE FN 3 ec . θὲ Ν AN 3 ὃ aan \ , 4 ὑμῖν - | μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν. καθὼς τὸ κλῆμα οὐ δύναται καρπὸν φέ- Ci ie Nar “ΟΝ Ν , > a 59 / WA SQN € a aN Ne: 5» δὴ , pew ad’ ἑαυτοῦ ἐὰν μὴ μένῃ ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ, οὕτως οὐδὲ ὑμεῖς ἐὰν μὴ ἐν ἐμοὶ μέ- δ ! > ’ 9 ε A λ ε “ δὴ ON / c , > > \ 5 Ν > > led vyte. | ἐγώ εἶμι ἡ ἄμπελος, ὑμεῖς τὰ κλήματα. ὃ μένων ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ, - , Ν Ν ΄ “ Ν > a > ὃ ΄, a 9», Ν / 6 οὗτος φέρει καρπὸν πολύν, OTL χωρὶς ἐμοῦ od Sivacbe ποιεῖν οὐδέν. ἐὰν μή τις , 2 3 tenet [4 + ε Ν a Ν x μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα Kal ἐξηράνθη, καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ ol Ν a ΄ \ fA 7 εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται. ἐὰν μείνητε ἐν ἐμοὶ Kal τὰ ῥήματά pov ἐν ΓΟ ἧς: A ON / > , Ν ,ὔ 8 ὑμῖν μείνῃ, ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε αἰτήσασθε, καὶ γενήσεται ὑμῖν. ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὃ Ψ' WA \ At / \ / > \ / \ > , 9 πατήρ μου, va καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε Kal γενήσεσθε ἐμοὶ μαθηταί. καθὼς ἠγά- » ε [ 3 Ν 3 ΄ ε a an a a 10 πησέν με ὁ πατήρ, κἀγὼ ἡγάπησα ὑμᾶς - μείνατε ἐν TH ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ. | ἐὰν τὰς > fe 4 lal a a ἐντολάς μου τηρήσητε, μενεῖτε ἐν TH ἀγάπῃ pov, καθὼς κἀγὼ τοῦ πατρός μου τὰς 3 Ν , \ , 3 A a a n 11 ἐντολὰς τετήρηκα καὶ μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν TH ἀγάπῃ. ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν ἵνα ἡ Ν ε 5 XN > c “a > ἣν rf χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ ἐν ὑμῖν ἢ καὶ ἣ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πληρωθῇ. Joh. 14:22. καὶ prS; om A BD 1, 33 8 γενήσεσθε δὴ A al West.mg.; γένησθε B vg cop Treg. West. Rev. 28 éxdpnte 1) 1, Treg. West.txt. Rev.mg. 10 κἀγὼ ἄν, West. Rev. δ Der vg cop; ἐγὼ A B L al syrr Treg. Joh. 15:6. αὐτὸ δὲ Ὁ L 33 Treg.mg.; West. Rev. αὐτὰ A B al cop Treg.txt. West. Rev. 160 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIIL JOHN XY. V4 Ν a 12 Αὕτη ἐστὶν ἣ ἐντολὴ ἡ ἐμή, ἵνα ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους καθὼς ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς. / ’ὔ δ 7 Ἂν A “ “ 18 μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει ἵνα τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ θῇ ὑπὲρ τῶν φίλων αὐτοῦ. ε a ΄ > »ΞΝ nd (Wee vs] / ca Φ eS , ιν ΩΝ 14 15 pets τὸν μου ἐστέ, eay ein ἃ ἐγὼ ἐντέλλομαι ὑμῖν. οὐκέτι λέγω ὑμᾶς ε “A Lal lal < r4 δούλους, ὅτι ὃ δοῦλος οὐκ οἷδε TL ποιεῖ αὐτοῦ ὃ κύριος - ὑμᾶς δὲ εἴρηκα φίλους 7 , ἂν Ν ἴω / > 4 (yearn) 3 ¢ tal Zz 16 ὅτι πάντα ἃ ἤκουσα παρὰ τοῦ πατρός μου ἐγνώρισα ὑμῖν. οὐχ ὑμεῖς με ἐξελέ- 0 ἀλλ᾽ ΗΕ ΩΝ ἐξελ Cold eral Ν ἔθ S.A 7 ε an ε , Ν \ ξασθε, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔθηκα ὑμᾶς ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑπάγητε καὶ καρπὸν , A) ie \ δ, ces ΄ ν 7 Ἃ pe? Ν ἣν a , φέρητε Kal ὁ καρπὸς ὑμῶν μένῃ, ἵνα O TL ἂν αἰτήσητε τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί Tae Seen a > 4 [ἊΣ ἡ οἱ ν 3 an ΄ , 17 18 pov δῷ ὑμῖν. ταῦτα ἐντέλλομαι ὑμῖν, iva ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους. Ei 6 κόσμος A A , 9 κ A 19 ὑμᾶς μισεῖ, γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐμὲ πρῶτον μεμίσηκεν. | εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε, ὃ κό- \ ’ 7 na σμος ἂν τὸ ἴδιον ἐφίλει ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ ἐστέ, GAN’ ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην “ ἴω / Lal an ὑμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, διὰ τοῦτο μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὃ κόσμος. a , i > a A 20 Mrnpovevere τοῦ λόγου ob ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν - οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων TOD κυ- fe > a + eee ἐδί - ee at Sete ὃ , 3 Ἂς ΄ 9 ρίου αὑτοῦ. εἰ ἐμὲ ἐδίωξαν, καὶ ὑμὰς διώξουσιν - εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν, Ν Ν ε ΄ Z ἀλλὰ a ΄ὔ , 2 ees. x ‘ 21 καὶ τὸν ὑμέτερον τηρήσουσιν. ἀλλὰ ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς διὰ τὸ y / Ψ > ANY Ν , > 22 ὄνομά μου, ὅτι οὐκ οἴδασιν τὸν πέμψαντά pe. εἰ μὴ ἦλθον Kal ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς, ε , 3 ¥ a ΄ - ᾿ ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν- νῦν δὲ πρόφασιν οὐκ ἔχουσιν περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν. ΕΝ ΙΝ, a \ \ ΄ a 3 Δ ess Ψ 3 3 aa 23 24 ὁ ἐμε μισων καὶ τὸν πατέρα μου μισεῖ. εἰ TA ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ ἠδ \ ἀλλ 3 ’, ε ΄ 3 + a δὲ Ἀν ΄ Ν οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν" νῦν δὲ καὶ ἐωράκασιν καὶ μεμι- ’ὔ’ Naa BL, Ν Ἐς , 35 μος 4 ae P. αν - / 25 σήκασιν καὶ ἐμὲ καὶ τὸν πατέρα pov. GAN ἵνα πληρωθῇ ὃ λόγος ὃ ἐν TO νόμῳ an ΄ a? > ΄ , , 1g 7 ε “κλ 26 αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος" ὅτι ἐμίσησάν με δωρεάν. ὅταν ἔλθῃ ὃ παράκλη- ἃ 35 ‘ / ς« α Ἂς an , Ἂς A lel > / a Ἂς a TOS OV ἐγὼ πέμψω ὑμῖν παρὰ τοῦ πατρός, TO πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας ὃ παρὰ TOD “ lal “-“ cal σ 27 πατρὸς ἐκπορεύεται, ἐκεῖνος μαρτυρήσει περι ἐμοῦ καὶ ὑμεῖς δὲ μαρτυρεῖτε, ὅτι am’ ἀρχῆς μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἐστέ. § 140. Persecution foretold. Further Promise of the Holy Spirit. Prayer in the Name of Christ. — Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. JOIN ΚΝ 1539: 12 Ταῦτα λελάληκὰ ὑμῖν ἵνα μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε. ἀποσυναγώγους ποιήσουσιν ὑμᾶς ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς δόξῃ λατρείαν προσφέρειν τῷ 8 4 θεῷ. καὶ ταῦτα ποιήσουσιν ὅτι οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὸν πατέρα οὐδὲ ἐμέ. ἀλλὰ ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν ἵνα ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἣ ὥρα μνημονεύητε αὐτῶν, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν. 5 ταῦτα δὲ ὑμῖν ἐξ ἀρχῆς οὐκ εἶπον, ὅτι pel? ὑμῶν ἤμην. | νῦν δὲ ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν 6 πέμψαντά με, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐρωτᾷ με" ποῦ ὑπάγεις ; 1 ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ταῦτα “λε- λάληκα ὑμῖν, ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν. 7 7AAN ἐγώ τὴν ἀλήθειαν λέγω ὑμῖν, συμφέρει ὑμῖν ἵνα ἐγὼ ἀπέλθω. ἐὰν γὰρ μὴ ἀπέλθω, ὃ παράκλητος οὐκ ἐλεύσεται πρὸς ὑμᾶς - ἐὰν δὲ πορευθῶ, πέμψω αὖ- 8 τὸν πρὸς ὑμᾶς. καὶ ἐλθών ἐκεῖνος ἐλέγξει τὸν κόσμον περὶ ἁμαρτίας καὶ περὶ ΔΊΩΝ, ΠΕΡ: 9 Joh. 15:18. ἵνα S&* D*; add τις SCA B 26 ὅταν SB; add δὲ AD L al vg syrr D? L al vg Treg. West. Rev. 18 πρῶς [Treg.] Rev. τον δὲ I) cop; add ὑμῶν Se A BL al vg Joh. 16:4. épaND cop; add αὐτῶν AB syrr Treg. West. Rey. 33 syrr Treg. West. Rey. §§ 139, 140.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 161 JOHN XVI. ὃ , \ τ ΄ she , Ζ “ > ΄ ΠΡΟ ΝΕ 7 9 «καιοσυνῆς και περι Κρισεως. περι ἀμαρτιᾶς μεν, OTL οὐ TLOTEVOVOLV εἰς εμει Ν ὃ ΄ δέ. Ὁ Ν Ν &. ε ,΄ Ν EL τι θ ΕΔ ! QA 10 11 περι ὀικαιοσυνὴς O€, OTL πρὸς TOV πάατερα ὑπάγω καὶ OVKETL ὕεωρειτε με" ' περὶ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Ν , cd c , an / , / 7 Ν + CUE rN. , δὲ κρίσεως, OTL ὃ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται. ἔτι πολλὰ ἔχω ὑμῖν λέ- yew, GAN οὐ δύνασθε βαστάζειν ἄρτι - | ὅταν δὲ ἔλθῃ ἐκεῖνος, τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀλη- θείας, ὁδηγήσει ὑμᾶς ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ πάσῃ" οὐ γὰρ λαλήσει ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ὅ elas, ὁδηγήσει ὑμᾶς ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ πάσῃ" οὐ γὰρ λαλήσε τοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ὅσα > ΄ , \ ys , 3 A chia se aN cr ? > ἀκούει λαλήσει, καὶ τὰ ἐρχύμενα ἀναγγελεῖ ὑμῖν. ἐκεῖνος ἐμὲ δοξάσει, ὅτι ἐκ 7S) a 2. AS a '€ La) Υ ὁ a 5, ε Ν > τε! Ν τοῦ ἐμοῦ λήμψεται καὶ ἀναγγελεῖ ὑμῖν. πάντα ὅσα ἔχει ὃ πατὴρ ἐμά ἐστιν διὰ a > A a a A \ τοῦτο εἶπον, OTL ἐκ τοῦ ἐμοῦ λαμβάνει Kat ἀναγγελεῖ ὑμῖν. μικρὸν Kal οὐκέτι “ θεωρεῖτέ με, καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν Kal ὄψεσθέ με. Ὁ = 3 tal “- 3 a \ 3 , ren ἈΕῚ a ἃ ΄ Εἶπον οὖν ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ πρὸς ἀλλήλους - τί ἐστιν τοῦτο ὃ λέγει (Wao! ‘ x 3 Ἄν. ΑΛ Ν ON Ν Ν » 6 / Sash ἡμῖν" μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ pe, καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με; καὶ ὅτι € ΄ Ν Ν ΄ὔ 12 5 ca) Fi ed ἃ λέ Ν ΄ 3 ᾿, ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν πατέρα ; ' ἔλεγον οὖν - τοῦτο τί ἐστιν ὃ λέγει τὸ μικρόν ; οὐκ οἵ- ὃ ,ὔ A ! ΕΣ 3 An Ψ nO Ν See NX > A Ν > > a Q apev τί λαλεῖ. | ἔγνω ᾿Ιησοῦς ort ἤθελον αὐτὸν ἐρωτᾷν, Kat εἶπεν avTOLS* περὶ ΄, a > 9 ΄ 7 > \ \ 3 ἡ ΟΝ \ ΄ τούτου ζητεῖτε pet’ ἀλλήλων ὅτι εἶπον - μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με, καὶ πάλιν Ν Vm” / > Ν 3 Ν / Ὁ a Lid 4 \ fe e “ μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με; ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι κλαύσετε καὶ θρηνήσετε ὑμεῖς, ε Ν δ τ ε - fe 3 oe , COE ας > Ν ΄ ὃ δὲ κόσμος χαρήσεται" ὑμεῖς λυπηθήσεσθε, GAN ἡ λύπη ὑμῶν εἰς χαρὰν γενή- ! ε ἋΣ Ὁ ,ὔ , » “ 53 ee 2 A “ ὯΝ te σεται. ἷ ἡ γυνὴ ὅταν τίκτῃ λύπην ἔχει, OTL ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα αὐτῆς - ὅταν δὲ γεννήσῃ ‘ , ee, , a , \ \ ‘ “ > , » τὸ παιδίον, οὐκέτι μνημονεύει τῆς θλίψεως διὰ THY χαρὰν ὅτι ἐγεννήθη ἄνθρωπος 3 τ ΄ 1 Cee Ge a 5 a x ΄ 5: ΄ δὲ ὅ eon \ eis τὸν κόσμον. | καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν νῦν μὲν λύπην ἔχετε" πάλιν δὲ ὄψομαι ὑμᾶς, καὶ 4 Ce ε ῷ Ν Ν Ν ein > Ν 4 OE Lee es ! A. χαρήσεται ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία, καὶ τὴν χαρὰν ὑμῶν οὐδεὶς αἴρει ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν. | Kal ἐν > , an ¢ f 3° ON > 3 ΄ DOE E) ee > Ν ΝΕ ΓΕΒ 5 SUL, ἐκείνῃ TH ἡμέρᾳ ἐμὲ οὐκ ἐρωτήσετε οὐδέν. ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, av τι αἰτήσητε ‘A , , ε A 5 lal > / , ! A 5» 3 > ’ 3 Ν > “ τὸν πατέρα, δώσει ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί pov. | ἕως ἀρτι οὐκ ἡτήσατε οὐδὲν ἐν τῷ 2. 2 ΄ cy 3 τς \ ΄ “ ε ΧΕ ον ats coy , ὀνόματί pov: αἰτεῖτε, καὶ λήμψεσθε, ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν ἢ πεπληρωμένη. a 5 ΄, ΄ Ce ita 3 LA ov Lae ἃ 3 lg Tatra ἐν παροιμίαις λελάληκα ὑμῖν - ἔρχεται ὥρα ὅτε οὐκέτι ev παροιμίαις A , \ a a > % λαλήσω ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ παῤῥησίᾳ περὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἀπαγγελῶ ὑμῖν. | ev ἐκείνῃ TH tal / ‘\ “ ἡμέρᾳ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου αἰτήσεσθε, καὶ οὐ λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐρωτήσω τὸν πα- , ἊΝ τα “ τ δα ἊΝ ‘\ ε A ne a 7 6 a 5 Ν , Ν τέρα περὶ ὑμῶν - αὐτὸς γὰρ ὃ πατὴρ φιλεῖ ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ πεφιλήκατε καὶ πε- ; AU oe E Ξ ‘ πιστεύκατε OTL ἐγὼ Tapa. τοῦ θεοῦ ἐξῆλθον. ἐξῆλθον ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς Kai ἐλήλυθα ΕἸ Ν Δ / > , Ν ’ Ν ᾽’ὔ AY A ,ὔ ! vA εἰς τὸν κόσμον TaALY ἀφίημι TOV κόσμον καὶ πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα. | Λέ- ε Ν 3 a EAN) la > a¢ / fal Ν ’ 3 ig yovow ot μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ- ide viv ἐν παῤῥησίᾳ λαλεῖς, καὶ παροιμίαν οὐδεμίαν a wD = 7 > τ “ λέγεις. | νῦν οἴδαμεν ὅτι οἶδας πάντα καὶ οὐ χρείαν ἔχεις ἵνα τίς σε ἐρωτᾷ" ἐν ΄ ΄ ψΨ ΦΧ θ “ὅπ θ he , Cle tee) aA ” ὃ ΄ τούτῳ πιστεύομεν ὅτι ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἐξῆλθες. | ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἄρτι πιστεύ- > ae! ψ ν᾿) / 7 a ω > ΝΕ ΟΝ > " ere; ἰδοὺ ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ ἐλήλυθεν ἵνα σκορπισθῆτε ἕκαστος εἰς τὰ ἴδια κἀμὲ / > a Ν 3 cl AN Lg bug ε ἣν 253) foi) ,ὔ lal , μόνον ἀφῆτε." καὶ οὐκ εἰμὶ μόνος, OTL ὃ πατὴρ μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἐστίν. | ταῦτα λελάληκα en 4 > é ol > Ay ν + τ » - / Ori 3, Β ἀλλὰ θ lal 4 ΝΣ ὑμῖν ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητε. ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ θλίψιν ἔχετε: ἀλλὰ θαρσεῖτε, ἐγὼ / νενίκηκα TOV κόσμον. Joh. 16: 18. ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ πάσῃ (om πάσῃ 18 τοῦτο τί ἐστιν A Δ ἃ] Treg.mg.; τί S*) δὲ D L 33 West.mg. ; εἰς τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐστιν τοῦτο NS B D* L vg cop Treg.txt. West. πᾶσαν A B Treg. West.txt.; πᾶσαν ante τὴν Rev. 27 θεοῦ S* etc A C3 al it vg Γ A al vg Rev. | ἀκούει SL 33; ἀκούσει B Treg.mg.; πατρὸς St? B Οὐ D L cop Treg. D Treg. West.mg. Rev. ; ἀκούσῃ A al. txt. West. Rev. 11 162 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. ao fF WwW bb 25 26 § 141. Christ’s last Prayer with his Disciples. — Jerusalem. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. Joun XVII. 1-26. a ,ὔ 3 lal Ν , ‘ Tatra ἐλάλησεν ᾿Ιησοῦς, kai ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν Los / ε 7 » ,ὔ Ν εἶπεν - πάτερ, ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα: δόξασόν σου τὸν υἱόν, ἵνα ὃ υἱὸς δοξάσῃ σε, ! θὰ 6 9 iad 2€ », Ἂ / ν “ a δέδ > r ,ὔ ἐς Cal καθὼς ἔδωκας αὐτῷ ἐξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός, Wa πᾶν ὃ δέδωκας αὐτῷ δώσῃ αὐτοῖς Ν , 9 / ε / , 7 ζωὴν αἰώνιον. | αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἣ αἰώνιος ζωή, ἵνα γινώσκουσιν σὲ τὸν μόνον εν ‘\ Ἂν ay / > ζω ἀληθινὸν θεὸν καὶ ὃν ἀπέστειλας Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν. ἐγώ σε ἐδόξασα ἐπὶ τῆς an ‘ »” Ν [4 a ὃ ὃ , 7 / ! Ἂν A Lé , , γῆς» TO ἔργον τελειώσας ὃ δέδωκάς μοι ἵνα ποιήσω" ' καὶ viv δόξασόν με σύ, ν Ν nr ~ / re > Ν cal Ν ΄ > πάτερ, παρὰ σεαυτῷ TH δόξῃ ἣ εἶχον πρὸ TOD τὸν κόσμον εἶναι παρὰ σοί. eh , ΄ ἌΣ val 3 θ , a ἐδ ΄ 3 a , Ν φανέρωσά σου τὸ ὄνομα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ods ἐδωκάς μοι ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου. σοὶ > Ν SS \ 3 \ εν / a ἦσαν Kal ἐμοὶ αὐτοὺς ἔδωκας, Kal τὸν λόγον σου τετηρήκαν - | viv ἔγνωκαν ὅτι / iA ὃ γὼ ΄ Ν a“ 5 ΄, ! - Nee. aA , / > πάντα ὅσα δέδωκάς μοι παρὰ σοῦ εἰσίν - | OTL τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἔδωκάς μοι δέδωκα αὖ- cal Ν ‘\ ! Ἂν u na 7 ἴω “ τοῖς, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔλαβον, καὶ ἔγνωσαν ἀληθῶς ὅτι παρὰ σοῦ ἐξῆλθον, καὶ ἐπίστευ- 7 4 ᾽ὔ Qn a cal a σαν ὅτι σύ pe ἀπέστειλας. | ἐγὼ περὶ αὐτῶν ἐρωτῶ - οὐ περὶ τοῦ κόσμου ἐρωτῶ, AAG Nr ae) δέδ eth bg fd 8D Β ἢ Ν Nig [5 ἐν ΄ Pe: ‘ Ν x ἀλλὰ περὶ ὧν δέδωκάς μοι, ὅτι Gol εἰσιν - | καὶ τὰ ἐμὰ πάντα σά ἐστιν καὶ TA σὰ > ΄ Ν ὃ δόέ 3 > a ! Ν 9.- τ aN τ a ΄ Ν > et ol ἐμά, Kal δεδόξασμαι ἐν αὐτοῖς. ᾿ καὶ οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν TO ΄ , Oye το » 7 , U4 , ἮΝ 4 κόσμῳ εἰσίν, κἀγὼ πρός σε ἔρχομαι. πάτερ ἅγιε, τήρησον αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί rey δέδ ͵,ὔ “ > a θὰ ε a ! LA m” > 2A Sex pe? gov ᾧ δέδωκάς μοι, ἵνα ὦσιν ἕν καθὼς ἡμεῖς. | OTE ἤμην μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, ἐγὼ ἐτή- 3 \ > Arse, ΄ὔ ey , ἧς Ni gS ΄ Ν 3 Ν 3 3. δὰ 0) ρουν αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου ᾧ δέδωκάς μοι, καὶ ἐφύλαξα, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν > ov > Ν ε ἘΝ “A > λ / 7 F ε Ν r 6 7 a ! cal δὲ / ἀπώλετο εἰ μὴ ὃ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας, va ἢ γραφὴ πληρωθῇ. νῦν δὲ πρός σε an ΄“ “ / 7 , Ἂς Ὡς ἂν ἔρχομαι, καὶ ταῦτα λαλῶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ἵνα ἔχωσιν τὴν χαρὰν τὴν ἐμὴν πεπληρω- a cal ἐν / μένην ἐν ἑαυτοῖς. | ἐγὼ δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον σου, καὶ 6 κόσμος ἐμίσησεν αὖ- © A , Ν Ν A / 3 τούς, ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου καθὼς ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου. Τ οὐκ > no m” > Ἂν > Le) ‘4 ἀλλ᾽ 7 la > Ν > “a na ἐρωτῶ ἵνα ἄρῃς αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, GAN iva τηρήσῃς αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ. Ψ. ‘\ > + Tae δγ.} Lal / c Ψ, Ἂς 17 ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ εἰσίν καθὼς ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου. ἁγίασον αὐτοὺς ed \ ΄ , ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ σου" ὁ λόγος ὁ σὸς ἀλήθειά ἐστιν. ' καθὼς ἐμὲ ἀπέστειλας εἰς τὸν ‘ Ν / Se Ν > cal δι / κόσμον, κἀγὼ ἀπέστειλα αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸν κόσμον - ' καὶ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἁγιάζω ἐμαυ- , “ 5 Ν 2 A’ fe / > A. a ‘4 TOV, ἵνα ὦσιν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἡγιασμένοι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ. “ Ν A Lad / Ν , Οὐ περὶ τούτων δὲ ἐρωτῶ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τῶν πιστευόντων διὰ τοῦ λό- 3. - 3 A he ΄, ὰ πὰ θὰ Ν Ν > 5 Ν 3. ἐδ ’ὔ you αὐτῶν εἰς ἐμέ, ' ἵνα πάντες ἕν ὦσιν, καθὼς σὺ πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν Gol, “ Ψ. , 7 , 4 > Ἂν ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν ἡμῖν Gow, ἵνα ὃ κόσμος πιστεύῃ ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας. | κἀγὼ ἃ tol ΄ 3 ay ἣν c A ῳ 5 Ν > τὴν δόξαν ἣν δέδωκάς por δέδωκα αὐτοῖς, ἵνα ὦσιν ἕν καθὼς ἡμεῖς ἕν - | ἐγὼ ἐν ν᾽ A Ne SNe hal oo > r , 58 eee, Ae. , ε ΄ “ αὐτοῖς καὶ σὺ ἐν ἐμοί, ἵνα ὦσιν τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν, ἵνα γινώσκῃ ὃ κόσμος OTL ‘ Ν XS , σύ pe ἀπέστειλας Kal ἠγάπησας αὐτοὺς καθὼς ἐμὲ ἠγάπησας. 7 Ν a Ln tee ne Ilarnp, ὃ δέδωκάς μοι, θέλω ἵνα ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ κἀκεῖνοι ὦσιν μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἕνα la’ Ν ὃ 2 Ν » Υ, a ὃ 48 ΄ Lig 3 , / Ν An θεωρῶσιν τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἐμήν, ἣν δέδωκάς μοι OTL ἠγάπησάς pe πρὸ καταβολῆς Q 5, Ν e κόσμου. “πατὴρ δίκαιε, Kal ὃ κόσμος σε οὐκ ἔγνω, ἐγὼ δέ σε ἔγνων, καὶ οὗτοι Ν , na ᾿ς »” 4 Ν ἔγνωσαν ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας - ' καὶ ἐγνώρισα αὐτοῖς τὸ ὄνομά σου καὶ γνω- a “a 3 a plow, ἵνα ἣ ἀγάπη ἣν ἠγάπησάς με ἐν αὐτοῖς ἢ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς. 8. 12. Comp. Ps. 41:10 [9] ; 109 : 8. Joh. 17 : 19. ἁγιάζω SA; pm ἐγὼ ΒΟ D φαὺ δ᾽ Β D cop; οὖς A C L it vg syrr Lal vg Treg. [West.] Rev. Treg.mg. Rey.mg. 88 141, 142.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. Marr. XX VI. 30, 30 36 37 38 39 163 § 142. The Agony in Gethsemane. — Mount of Olives. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. Marx XIV. 26, 36—46. Kat ὑμνήσαν- 26 tes ἐξῆλθον εἰς τὸ ὄρος τῶν ἐ- λαιῶν. ---- Τότε ἔρχεται μετ᾽ αὐὖ- τῶν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς χωρίον λεγόμε- νον Τεθσημανεί, καὶ λέγει τοῖς μα- θηταῖς - καθίσα- > a a TE αὐτου EWS OU 32 Luke XXII. JoHN XVIII. 1. 32-42, 39-46. Kai ὑμνήσαν- 88 Καὶ ἐξελθὼν 1 Ταῦτα εἰπὼν τες ἐξῆλθον εἰς ἐπορεύθη κατὰ Ἰησοῦς ἐξῆλθεν τὸ ὄρος τῶν é τὸ os εἰς τὸ σὺν τοῖς μαθη- — Καὶ ἔρχονται εἰς χω- λαιῶν. ’ & ie es plov οὗ τὸ ὅνομα » Γεθσημανεί, καὶ , A λέγει Tots μαθη- ταῖς αὐτοῦ" κα- θίσατε ὧδε ἕως 3 Ν > a vs ἀπελθὼν ἐκεῖ προσεύξωμαι. προσεύξωμαι. καὶ παραλαβὼν τὸν Πέ- τρον καὶ τοὺς δύο υἱοὺς Ζεβεδαίου ἤρ- ξατο λυπεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημονεῖν. τότε / > a Ὁ / > ε λέγει αὐτοῖς " περίλυπός ἐστιν 7 ψυ- ’, χή μου ’ὔ μείνατε A , ἕως θανάτου" & A ὧδε Kal γρη- γορεῖτε μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ. καὶ 40 99 94 4 / σῷ θανάτου: μείνατε ὧδε 35 καὶ γρηγορεῖτε. ” As an ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν" ἠκολούθησαν δὲ αὐτῷ καὶ οἱ μα- L yevope- ΟΝ > Ν an vos δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ θηταί. ΄ > τόπου εἶπεν av- a a ,ὔ ταῖς αὐτοῦ πέραν 4 χειμάῤῥου a / 9 τοῦ κέδρου, ὅπου τοῦ ἦν κῆπος, εἰς ὃν εἰσῆλθεν αὐτὸς Ν ε Ἀ καὶ ot μαθηταὶ τοῖς * προσεύχε- αὐτοῦ. σθε μὴ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς πειρασμόν. MARK XIV. Ν καὶ παραλαμβάνει τὸν ἸΤέτρον . τ a3 ΄ , 5» a καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην per’ αὐτοῦ, Ν ᾿, “ καὶ ἤρξατο ἐκθαμβεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημο- lal ! Ν id > A , , νεῖν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - περίλυπός ἐστιν ἣ ψυχή μου ἕως LUKE XXII. ‘ SN καὶ αὐτὸς καὶ 41 Ν Ν 39, προσελθὼν μικρὸν ἔπε- ἊΝ σεν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐ- τοῦ προσευχόμενος καὶ λέγων: £ > πάτερ, εἰ Ovva- , > 4 τὸν ἐστιν, παρελθάτω ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο: πλὴν οὐχ ὡς la ἐγὼ θέλω ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ov. 9. (ἫΝ ΘΙῈΝ Φ > Loe) 4 ἀρ 44 αὐυτῳ ἄγγελος απ ουρᾶάνου ενίσχυων αυτον. 36 Ν ΝΝ ” προελθὼν μικρὸν ἔπι- Ν a fol Ν πτεν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ προσηύχετο ἵνα εἰ δυνα- / > LA pe 9, τόν ἐστιν παρέλθῃ aa » tol of Df Nov αὐτοῦ ἡ wpa, Kal ἐλεγεν" > cal ε / 4 ἀββᾶ ὃ πατήρ, πάντα δυνατά σοι" παρένεγκε τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τί ἐγὼ θέλω ἀλλὰ τί σύ. 9 , 9. 3 φῆναι ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ λίθου βολήν, καὶ θεὶς τὰ γόνατα προσ- 42 ηὔχετο | λέγων " πάτερ, εἰ βούλει παρενέγκα! cal Ν ΄ > τοῦτο TO ποτήριον ἀπ᾽ 3 a Ν x Ν᾿ Ve ἐμοῦ: πλὴν μὴ TO θέ- λημά μου ἀλλὰ τὸ 48 σὸν γινέσθω. ὦφθη δὲ Ν καὶ γενόμενος ἐν ἀ- ah 2 / , aD at? ε io Ν ΕἸ ae ‘ yor ta EKTEVEOTEPOV προσηνυχετο. και ἐγένετο Ot Pos QuTOVU WOeEt Joh.18:1. τοῦ κέδρου S* D cop West.mg. ; τοῦ κεδρών A vg Treg.mg.; τῶν κέδρων S B ΟἿ, (Κέδρων) Treg.txt. West.txt. Rev. Mt. 26: 36. μαθηταῖς B L; add αὐτοῦ δὴ AC ἢ vg cop syrr Treg.mg. Rev. 89 προσελθὼν δὰ A C 1) L West.mg.; mpo- ελθὼν B al it vg cop West.txt. Rev. | πάτερ L A; add pou δ A BC Ὁ it vg cop syrr [Treg.] West. Rev. Le. 22:42. παρενέγκαι S LL; παρενέγκειν A al; παρένεγκε B Ds" T vg Treg. West. Rey. 43, 44 ἄφθη δὲ... ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν S* et? D 1, yg syrr; om S* AB T [West.] Rev. mg. 164 40 41 42 43 44 45 40 2 “Hider δὲ > a > a Ν “ “ 3 a 8 Ἰησοῦς ἐκεῖ μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ. MATT. XXVI. καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς καὶ εὑρίσκει > Ν tA αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, A / nw / καὶ λέγει τῷ Πέτρῳ οὕτως οὐκ , 4 Qn μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆ- σαι μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ; γρη- Cal 74 γόρειτε καὶ προσεῦχε- ἰσχύσατε σθε, ἵνα μὴ εἰσέλθη- τε εἰς πειρασμόν. τὸ A / μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, 97 38 MARK XIV. Xo” Kal ἔρχε- Ν ς , > Ν ται καὶ εὑρίσκει αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, καὶ λέ- ye. τῷ Πέτρῳ Σίμων, καθεύδεις ; οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι; γρηγορεῖτε καὶ προσ- ’ 7 ee / εύχεσθε, iva μὴ ἔλθητε / eis πειρασμόν. TO μὲν a ΄ ε Ν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἣ δὲ ‘ 5 4 σὰρξ ἀσθενής. 45 46 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIL LUKE XXil. / 7 θρόμβοι αἵματος κατα- βαίνοντος ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν. καὶ ἀναστὰς ἀπὸ τῆς ἣν 3 Ν Ν προσευχῆς, ἐλθὼν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς εὗρεν κοιμωμένους αὐτοὺς ἀ- Ἂν aes ΄ ! war πὸ τῆς λύπης, | καὶ εἷ- πεν αὐτοῖς " τί καθεύ- δετε; ἀναστάντες προσ- ν ‘ > ΄ ἵνα μὴ εἰσέλ- / Onre εἰς πειρασμόν. εύχεσθε, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής. πάλιν ἐκ δευτέρου ἀπελθὼν προσηύ- faro λέγων: πάτερ μου, εἰ οὐ δύνα- ται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸ πίω, γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου. ' καὶ ἐλ- θὼν πάλιν εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας " ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ βε- βαρημένοι. 39 Ἂν ΄ 3 , Ν ἀπελθὼν προσηύξατο ἐκ τρίτου, τὸν Ν ἣν Ν καὶ ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς πάλιν Sen , 2 N , αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπὼν πάλιν. τότε ἔρχεται Ν Ν ἂν Ν , > A πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - , ‘\ ἊΝ AX +3 , καθεύδετε TO λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε. 3 \ » εἰ £2 A 3m εν ΟῚ ἰδοὺ ἤγγικεν ἣ ὥρα καὶ ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- θρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ἅμαρ- ἴω > , 3, 5 yee, 3 τωλῶν. ἐγείρεσθε, ἄγωμεν - ἰδοὺ ἢγ- γικεν ὃ παραδιδούς με. 8 143. 99 40 41 42 MARK XIV. καὶ πάλιν ἀπελθὼν προσ- ηὐξάτο τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών. καὶ ὕ- ποστρέψας εὗρεν αὐτοὺς πάλιν καθεύ- ὃ 3 Ν 2 A ε» Q ovTas* ἦσαν yap αὐτῶν ot ὀφθαλμοὶ >” καταβαρυνόμενοι, καὶ οὐκ ἤδεισαν τί ἀποκριθῶσιν αὐτῷ. καὶ ἔρχεται τὸ , Ν , 3 “ ΄ Ν τρίτον καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε: ἀπέχει ἦλ- δ αὐ 3 Ν a < ex “A θεν ἡ ὥρα, ἰδοὺ παραδίδοται 6 vids TOD ἀνθρώπου εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν ἅμαρτω- λῶν. | ἐγείρεσθε, ἄγωμεν " ἰδοὺ ὃ παρα- διδούς με ἤγγισεν. Jesus betrayed, and made Prisoner. — Mount of Olives. Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. JOHN OVI 2=12: καὶ Ἰούδας ὃ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν τὸν τόπον, ὅτι πολλάκις συνήχθη ὃ οὖν Ἰούδας λαβὼν τὴν σπεῖραν καὶ ἐκ cal > / b ae J a“ 4 ε ᾿, > La] ‘ “A Ν τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων ὑπηρέτας ἔρχεται ἐκεῖ μετὰ φανῶν καὶ λαμ- πάδων καὶ ὅπλων. Le. 22: 44. καταβαίνοντος S vg cop; κα- ταβαίνοντες D Lal Treg. West. Rev. Mc. 14:40. ὑποστρέψας A C A vg syrr; πάλιν (om Ὁ Treg.txt. et |mg.] ) ἐλθὼν δὴ BL cop Treg. West. Rev. | πάλιν AC; om NB D Treg. West. Rey. Joh.18:3. ἐκ τῶν sc S* ett? Τὴ L; om Sse A C al vg; om ἐκ B Treg. [ West.] Rev. §§ 142, 143.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. Marr. XXVI. 47-56. 47 Kat ἔτι αὐτοῦ da- λοῦντος, ἰδοὺ “Lovdas εἷς τῶν δώδεκα ἦλθεν, Ἂς ᾽ > a + Kal μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὄχλος πολὺς μετὰ μαχαιρῶν Ν , Ces lol > καὶ ξύλων ἀπὸ TOV ap- 48 Mark XIV. 43-52. Kat εὐθὺς ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος παραγίνεται 5» ͵ ε 3 ,ὔ Ἰούδας 6 Ἰσκαριώτης εἷς τῶν δώδεκα, καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὄχλος μετὰ μα- r A / Ν χαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων παρὰ 165 Luxe XXII. 47-53. 41 Ἔτι δὲ αὐτοῦ λα- λοῦντος, ἰδοὺ ὄχλος, Ne ΄ > , καὶ ὃ λεγόμενος ᾿Ιού- δας εἷς τῶν δώδεκα προήρχετο αὐτούς. ---- a Ss / Ἂς lal χιερέων καὶ πρεσβυτέ- τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμ- ων ΔΛ Νὴ ρων τοῦ λαοῦ. ματέων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων. JOHN XVIII. > a > ἰδὰ / is! ἊΝ «ον aN 3. Ν , 3 a id 4 Ἰησοῦς οὖν εἰδὼς πάντα τὰ ἐρχόμενα ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ἐξῆλθεν καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - τίνα PS , eat A \ A m= 8 a 5 ζητεῖτε; ' ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον. λέγει αὐτοῖς Ἰησοῦς - Sth 3 ε ΄ δὲ \ Ἴ “ὃ c ὃ ὃ Ν SN 9 2A ts > i 6 ἐγώ εἰμι. εἱστήκει δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιούδας ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν per’ αὐτῶν. | ὡς οὖν εἶπεν 3 A 5» , > 3 HAG > ᾿ς 5 ὔ Ν »” , 1 , co 3 A 7 αὐτοῖς - ἐγώ εἰμι, ἀπῆλθαν cis τὰ ὀπίσω Kal ἔπεσαν χαμαί. ' πάλιν οὖν αὐτοὺς , lal > 3 cal ‘\ » 8 ἐπηρώτησεν" τίνα ζητεῖτε; οἱ δὲ εἶπον - ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν Nalwpatov. | ἀπεκρίθη Ἴη- a CJ (τῆς τς “ > , > 3 Φ aN a 4 ΄, ε / le 9 σοῦς εἶπον ὑμῖν ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι εἰ οὖν ἐμὲ ζητεῖτε, ἄφετε τούτους ὑπάγειν. | iva ae , a pS μὲ aA AN ΄ὕ > > , 1¢ Ἂν ας > , πληρωθῇ ὃ λόγος ὃν εἶπεν, ὅτι οὺς δέδωκάς μοι, οὐκ ἀπώλεσα ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐδένα. MATT. XXVI. MARK XIv. ‘ Ν 48 ὃ δὲ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν ἔδω- 44 δεδώκει δὲ ὃ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν σύνση- > “ a XN / ; 3, εν 3 lal , ἃ av , Kev αὐτοῖς σημεῖον λέγων - ov ἐὰν φι- μὸν αὐτοῖς λέγων: ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, / ᾿ς λήσω, αὐτός ἐ- αὐτός ἐστιν: κρατήσατε αὐτὸν καὶ / 4 a στιν" κρατήσατε ΛΈΣ ΧΤΥ. ἀπάγετε ἀσφαλῶς. 49 αὐτόν. καὶ εὐ- 45 καὶ ἐλθὼν εὐθὺς θέως προσελθὼν προσελθὼν αὐτῷ LUKE XXII. an? a / ε /, Ν la τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ εἶπεν " λέγει: ῥαββεί, 47 — καὶ ἤγγισεν ° , Ν ΄ “- a χαῖρε ῥαββεί, καὶ κατεφίλησεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ φιλῆ- , / καὶ κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν" σαι αὐτόν. , > 50 αὐτόν. 6 δὲ 'Iy- 48 Ἴη- gous εἶπεν αὐ- σὴς Oey ae JOHN XVIII. κ᾿ ΦΠ αν ἂν 249 my ε > TO’ ἑταῖρε, ἐφ τῷ Ἰούδα, φι- 12 Ἢ οὖν σπεῖρα a 7 » , = / Ν εν Nar ic , Ὁ πάρει; τότε λήματι τὸν υἱὸν καὶ ὃ χιλίαρχος , > « Ν a προσελθόντες €- 46 οἱ δὲ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται / Ν > ’ ‘\ a πέβαλον τὰς ἐπέβαλαν τὰς παραδίδως ; τῶν Ἰουδαίων “- Ν \ lal a χεῖρας ἐπὶ τὸν χεῖρας αὐτῷ καὶ συνέλαβον τὸν Ἶ a Ν 3 3 ΄, 3 3 a Sey, noovv καὶ ἐ- ἐκράτησαν αὐὖ- Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἔδη- κράτησαν αὐτόν. τόν. σαν αὐτόν, ---- 51 καὶ ἰδοὺ εἷς τῶν 47 εἷς δέ τις 49 ἰδόν- 10 Σίμων οὖν Πέ- \ ΕἸ a nw ns μετὰ Ἰησοῦ ἐκ- τῶν παρεστηκό- τες δὲ οἱ περὶ at- τρος ἔχων μάχαι- 4 lal Ν Ν 2 τείνας τὴν χεῖρα των σπασάμενος τὸν τὸ ἐσόμενον ραν εἵλκυσεν αὖ- Ss ἀπέσπασεν τὴν τὴν μάχαιραν εἶπαν κύριε, εἰ τὴν καὶ ἔπαισεν / “ A ’ὔ “ μάχαιραν αὐτοῦ, ἔπαισεν τὸν δοῦ- πατάξομεν ἐν μα- τὸν τοῦ ἀρχιερέ- \ ΄ Ν a ἃ / / AGS / “ ‘ καὶ πατάξας τὸν λον τοῦ ἀρχιερέ- ὅ0 χαίρῃ ; καὶ ἐπά- ws δοῦλον καὶ δοῦλον τοῦ ἀρ- ὡς καὶ ἀφεῖλεν tagev εἷς τις ἐξ ἀπέκοψεν αὐτοῦ Νο.14:48. 6 (om D Or) Ἰσκαριώτης S* A 1 69 Or; pm τῶν δὰ BC Ὁ 1, Treg. (Sap. Ὁ) A Dal it vg syrr Or; om NB West. ΟἿ, Δ al cop [Treg.] West. | πρεσβυτέρων Mt. 26:50. πάρει. West. Rev. 166 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. MATT. XXVI. MARK XIV. LUKE XXII. JOHN XVIII. e > n cal Ἄν “ lal χιερέως ἀφεῖλεν αὐτοῦ τὸ @Td- αὐτῶν τοῦ ἀρχιε- τὸ ὠτάριον τὸ > a Ν ,ὔ “ > αὐτοῦ TO ὠτίον. ριον. ρέως τὸν δοῦλον δεξιόν - ἣν δὲ ὅ- “4 ΄, a a 52 τότε λέγει αὐτῷ καὶ ἀφεῖλεν τὸ νομα τῷ δούλῳ « .- e >? A 3 / Ἂς ΄ Φ “A ὃ Ἰησοῦς ἀπόστρεψον τὴν μάχαιράν οὖς αὐτοῦ τὸ δε- 11 Μάλχος. εἶπεν 3 \ ΄ 393 κα , Ν ΄ 3 Ν ον ἀν a τοὶ σου εἰς τὸν τόπον αὐτῆς" πάντες γὰρ 51 ξιόν. ἀποκριθεὶς οὖν ὃ Ἰησοῦς τῳ οἱ λαβόντ Ἵ ἐ a x ὃ Ἶ ἧς εἶ Πέ : iN ες μάχαιραν ἐν μαχαίρῃ € 6 Ἰησοῦς εἷ- étpw* βάλε 58 39 Ν Lal a vv ὃ “ “ > δύ rj 2A Ὁ Ν ὕὔ > ἀπολοῦνται." ἢ δοκεῖς ὅτι οὐ δύνα- πεν ἐᾶτε ἕως τὴν μάχαιραν εἰς / Ν ,ὔ μαι παρακαλέσαι τὸν πατέρα μου, καὶ τούτου. καὶ ἅ- τὴν θήκην. τὸ ΄ »” , , nS παραστήσει μοι ἄρτι πλείω δώδεκα ψάμενος TOV ὠτί- ποτήριον ὃ δέδω- 64 λ , 3 rv 3 ” Ks λ ig > / 4 ε »Ἅ εγιώνων ἀγγέλων ; πῶς οὖν πληρω- ου ἰάσατο αὑτόν. κέν μοι ὃ πατήρ, a ε ’ὔ LA WA tal θῶσιν αἱ γραφαί, ὅτι οὕτως δεῖ γε- ov μὴ πίω αὐτό; νέσθαι; MARK XIV. LUKE XXII. > > 7 ~ ΩΝ a 85 ἐν ἐκείνῃ TH 48 καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὃ 52 εἶπεν δὲ Ἰησοῦς πρὸς σ Ὡς ε 3 a > a > lat wpa εἶπεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τοὺς παραγενομένους “ + a ε 3. 9. ε Sun Ν 9¢é/\: \ ΠΝ ΩΝ > tal τοῖς Ὄχλοις ὡς ἐπὶ ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθα- πρὸς αὐτὸν ἀρχιερεῖς 2 te Ν “ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ τε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ καὶ στρατηγοὺς τοῦ ων Ν ¢ a μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων ξύλων συλλαβεῖν με- ἱεροῦ καὶ πρεσβυτέ- a 3 > pes AF 5» Ἂς 6 DEN Ν Pea με: καθ᾽ 49 καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἤμην πρὸς ρους: ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν > ae “~ > nw Lal “ ’ ἡμέραν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἐκα- ὑμᾶς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ διδά- ἐξεληλύθατε μετὰ μα- ΄ , a θεζόμην διδάσκων, καὶ σκων, καὶ οὐκ ἐκρατή- χαιρῶὼν καὶ ξύλων" > > , , / y+ οὐκ ἐκρατήσατέ με. σατέ pe: 53 καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ὄντος μου Lal Ν Ψ , 39 3᾽ 7 ἩΔΎ 1: lal 5 ae a 56 τοῦτο δὲ ὅλον γέγο- ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 7 na ε rn ε 3 > id Ν lal vev ἵνα πληρωθῶσιν at πληρωθῶσιν ai ypa- οὐκ ἐξετείνατε τὰς χεῖ- a lal > ΄ 3 9 γραφαὶ τῶν προφητῶν. 50 dat. καὶ ἀφέντες at- pas ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ. ἀλλ᾽ αὖ- Ν Wen c 9 τότε οἱ μαθηταὶ πάν- τὸν ἔφυγον πάντες. τη ἐστὶν ὑμῶν ἡ ὥρα - Ν ΄, a /, τες ἀφέντες αὐτὸν ἔφυ- 51 Kai εἷς τις vea- καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ σκό- γον. νίσκος συνηκολούθει τους. > “ , αὐτῷ περιβεβλημένος : A Ἃς A > σινδόνα ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ, καὶ κρατοῦσιν αὐτόν - ε Ἂν Ἂς Ν ὃ / ἊΝ ” 52 ὃ δὲ καταλιπὼν τὴν σινδόνα γυμνὸς ἔφυγεν. § 144. Jesus before Caiaphas. Peter thrice denies Him. — Jerusalem. Night introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. Matt. XXVI. 57, Mark XIV. 53, 54, 7 yee XXII 54-62. Joun XVIII. 13-18, 58, 69-75. 66-72. 25-27. 67 Οἱ δὲ κρατή- 53 Καὶ ἀπήγα- 54 Συλλαβόντες 18 ---καὶ ἤγαγον σαντες τὸν ‘Iy- γον τὸν Ἰησον δὲ αὐτὸν ἤγαγον πρὸς Ἄνναν πρῶ- ® 52. Comp. Gen. 9 : θ. Mt. 26:55. συλλαβεῖν we; Treg. West. θατε SBDLT Treg. West. | ξύλων ; Treg. Rey. West. Rev. Mc. 14:48. συλλαβεῖν we; Treg. West. Me. 14:51. εἷς tis νεανίσκος A A; vea~ Rev. vioxos τις (δέ τις D vg) S ΒΟ Ὁ Lyg cop Le. 22:52. πρὸς SA; er ABDLT Treg. West. Rey. syrr Treg. West. | ἐξεληλύθατε A A; ἐξήλ- §§ 143, 144.] UNTIL MATT. XXVI. σοῦν ἀπήγαγον Καϊάφαν Ν 5 la id τὸν ἀρχιερέα, ὅ- που οἱ γραμμα- Tels καὶ οἵ πρε- ’ὔ σβύτεροι to ἤχθησαν. πρὸς συν- 68 ὃ δὲ 69 70 71 Πέτρος ἠκολού- θει αὐτῷ μακρό- θεν ἕως τῆς αὐ- λῆς τοῦ ἀρχιε- ρέως, Lal , Ἂς ~ , ΕἸΣ 16 αὐλὴν τοῦ ἀρχιρέως, | ὃ δὲ Πέτρος εἱστήκει πρὸς τῇ θύρᾳ ἔξω. THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. MARK XIV. πρὸς τὸν ἀρχιε- ρέα, καὶ συνέρ- χονται πάντες οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς. Ne και ὁ LUKE XXII. , καὶ εἰσήγαγον εἰς τὸν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως * — 167 JOHN XVIII. τον" ἣν γὰρ πεν- θερὸς τοῦ Καϊάφα, ὃς ἦν ἀρχιερεὺς τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκεί- 14 νου" ἣν δὲ Καϊάφας 6 συμβου- λεύσας τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις ὅτι συμφέ- Ὁ“ ΝΜ 3 aA ε 4 ρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπέρ Πέτρος ἀπὸ μα- 54 —6 δὲ Πέτρος κρόθεν ἠκολού- θησεν αὐτῷ ἕως 3, 5 ΝᾺ 3 ‘ ἔσω εἰς τὴν αὐλὴν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως, ἠκολούθει. μα- κρόθεν. 1ὅ Ἤκο- λούθει δὲ τῷ Ἴη- τοῦ λαοῦ. σοῦ Ξίμων Te τρος καὶ ἄλλος ΄ «ες Ν μαθητής: ὃ δὲ “ > XN a 3 μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιε- ΄“΄ a an? a Ν pet καὶ συνεισῆλθεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς τὴν ἐξῆλθεν 5 A , ν 5 a a ν᾿ οὖν ὃ μαθητὴς ὃ ἄλλος ὃ γνωστὸς τοῦ ἀρχιερέως καὶ εἶπεν τῇ θυρωρῷ, καὶ καὶ εἰσελ- ἂν 4 > ΄ θὼν ἔσω ἐκάθη- TO μετὰ τῶν ὑ- a 3 0 Ν πηρετῶν ἰδεῖν τὸ τέλος. ---- ; Ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐκάθητο ἔξω ἐν ~ ὑλῃ - Ν τῇ αὐλῇ" καὶ προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ε 4 ,, 7 μία παιδίσκη λέ- γουσα: καὶ σὺ > ὯΝ > ἦσθα μετὰ “In- σοῦ τοῦ TaXt- λαίου. 6 δὲ Hp- νήσατο ἔμπρο- σθεν πάντων λέ- 3 30 yov: οὐκ οἶδα / , τί λέγεις. ἐξελ- Ye Ν Ὄον θόντα δὲ αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν πυλῶνα, 66 67 68 καὶ ἣν συνκαθή- μενος μετὰ τῶν ὑπηρετῶν καὶ θερ- μαινόμενος πρὸς τὸ pos. — Ay, a , , 3 “ Kat ὄντος τοῦ Πέτρου κάτω ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ ἔρχεται μία τῶν παιδισκῶν τοῦ 3 ΄ ! a ἄρχιερέως, * καὶ ἰδοῦσα τὸν Πέ- δ6 τρον θερμαινόμε- νον ἐμβλέψασα > lal 4 A αὐτῷ λέγει: Kat Ν Ν A σὺ μετὰ Tov Na- as A Capnvovjaba τοῦ 3 cal ε Ν 3 Τησοῦ. ὃ δὲ ἠρ- νήσατο + + > οὔτε οἶδα οὔτε ἐ- πίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις. καὶ ἐξῆλθεν 58 WE ? X ΄ ἔξω εἰς τὸ προαύ- ‘\ λιον, καὶ ἀλέκτωρ λέγων Oo faye Me. 14: 53. συνέρχονται δὰ Ὁ L A; add αὐτῷ A B Treg.txt. et [mg.] West.mg. Rev. ; πρὸς αὐτὸν C. Le. 22: 57. B Der L T cop Treg. West. Rev. 3 , Ἂν LUKE XXII. εἰσήγαγεν τὸν ΄ ε 55 περιαψάντων δὲ 18 Πέτρον. «--- εἷσ- ἴω la , πῦρ ἐν μέσῳ τῆς τήκεισαν δὲ Ob αὐλῆς καὶ συνκα- δοῦλοι καὶ οἱ ὕ- ’, > δ ΄ 3 θ θισάντων ἐκάθη- πηρέται ἀνθρακι- ΄ το ὃ Πέτρος μέ- av πεποιηκότες, 3 Ὁ 7 “ > ‘ σος αὐτῶν. OTL ψῦχος NV, καὶ ἐθερμαίνοντο " ἦν δὲ καὶ 6 Πέ- τρος μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ε ἣν Ν ἑστὼς καὶ θερ- ἰδοῦσα μαινόμενος. ---- Ν Ν , > a δὲ αὐτὸν παιδί- 17 λέγει οὖν τῷ Πέ- , oKn τις καθήμε- τρῳ ἡἣ παιδίσκη \ \ a ε ΄ Q νον πρὸς TO Pas ἡ θυρωρός: py \ ἊΣ cal καὶ ἀτενίσασα καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν συν τ) - Ν a > fal αὐτῷ εἶπεν" καὶ μαθητῶν εἶ τοῦ i \ ae > , ΄ οὗτος σὺν αὐτῷ ἀνθρώπου τού- > « δὲ > ΄ ΄ > ‘al ἣν. ὃ δὲ ἠρνήσα- του; λέγει ἐκεῖ- aN 4 > > (a To αὐτὸν λέγων" νος " οὐκ εἰμί. --- 3 ἫΝ Seah οὐκ οἶδα αὐτόν, γύναι. Ν Ν ΦΦ καὶ μετὰ 25 Hy δὲ Ξίμων ἣν . > ‘4 ε ‘ βραχὺ ἕτερος i- ἹΠέτρος ἑστὼς Ν wm X »” \ , dav αὐτὸν ἔφη " καὶ θερμαινόμε- Me. 14: 08. ἐπίσταμαι - σὺ τί λέγεις ; West.mg. Rev.mg. | καὶ ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν ACD Aal vg syrr; om δὰ Β Lop West, αὐτὸν pr AD* A vg; om δὲ Rev.mg. 168 72 73 74 75 § 145. Jesus before Caiaphas and the Sanhedrin. 19 MATT. XXVI. A εἶδεν αὐτὸν ἀλ- Ν ,ὔ “ λη καὶ λέγει τοῖς a a 5 ἐκεῖ" οὗτος ἦν 3 A n μετὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Nawpaiov. καὶ 4 3 » πάλιν ἠρνήσατο o “ μετὰ ὅρκου ὅτι > 5 Ν + οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄν- θρωπον. μετὰ Ν ἊΝ μικρὸν δὲ προσ- ελθόντες οἱ ἕ- στῶτες εἶπον τῷ a > a Πέτρῳ: ἀληθῶς \ Ν 5 EN καὶ ov ἐξ αὐτῶν > \ Ν ε εἶ. καὶ γὰρ ἡ λαλιά σου δῆλόν σε ποιεῖ. τότε ¥ é ἤρξατο καταθε- 4 Ν > ματίζειν καὶ 6- 7 μνύειν ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρω- sk 3 Ψ, mov: καὶ εὐθέως ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνη- σεν. καὶ ἐμνή- σθη 6 Πέτρος τοῦ , > a ῥήματος ᾿Ἰησοῦ εἰρηκότος ὅτι Ν 3 ’ πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι τρὶς ἀ- / παρνήσῃ με’ καὶ ἐξελθὼν ἔξω ἔ- κλαυσεν πικρῶς. 69 70 71 72 MARK XIV. > ’ A Ue ἐφώνησεν. καὶ ἢ \ 5 an παιδὶσκη ἰδοῦσα oN A ΄ αὐτὸν ἤρξατοπά- λιν λέγειν τοῖς παρεστῶσιν ὅτι Ὄ 3 ΕὙΣ ἘΝ οὗτος ἐξ αὐτῶν 3 , ε Ν , ἐστίν. ὃ δὲ πά- λιν ἠρνεῖτο. καὶ A ἊΝ , μετὰ μικρὸν πά- λιν οἵ παρεστῶ- 3) - τες ἔλεγον τῷ / > Ἂν Πέτρῳ: ἀληθὼς 3 ΣΕ ΞΟ > Ν ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ - καὶ γὰρ TadtAatos ὃ δὲ ἠρξα- το ἀναθεματίζειν εἶ. Ἂν 9 ’ 4 καὶ ὀμνύναι ὅτι 3 3 Ν * οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἀν- θρωπον τοῦτον ἃ / \ ὃν λέγετε. καὶ > Ν 5 / εὐθὺς ἐκ δευτέρου ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνη- σεν. καὶ ἀνεμνή- , oy ὃ Πέτρος τὸ ῥῆμα ὡς εἶπεν Lal ε 3 n αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς Lid Ν 3 / ὅτι πρὶν ἀλέκτο- “ Ἂν ρα φωνῆσαι δὶς , τρίς με ἀπαρνή- Ν > ιβα on. καὶ ἐπ λὼν ἔκλαιεν. 59 60 61 62 LUKE XXII. Ν A > > aA καὶ ov ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ. 6 δὲ Πέτρος ἐφη" 9 9... ὃ OUK εἰμι. ἄνθρωπε, ον ἣν καὶ διαστά- σης ὡσεὶ ὥρας μιᾶς ἄλλος τις διϊσχυρίζετο λέ- > > 5 γων: ἐπ ἀλη- θείας καὶ οὗτος μετ᾽ καὶ γὰρ Γαλιλαῖ- αὐτοῦ ἣν, , - i Os ἐστιν. εἶπεν δὲ ὁ Πέτρος - ἄν- 3 > θρωπε, οὐκ οἶδα ὃ λέγεις. καὶ παραχρῆμα ἔτι λαλοῦντος αὐτοῦ 20 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VII. JOHN XVIII. 9 > vos. εἰπὸν οὐν 3 a“ A ‘ Ἀ QuTw* μὴ καὶ sae σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθη- a > a Φ τῶν αὐτοῦ εἶ; , an ἠρνήσατο ἐκεῖ- Ν “ἂν vos καὶ εἶπεν" 3 3) OUK εἰμι. λέγει δὶ 5" a , cis ἐκ τῶν dov- λων τοῦ apxte- ,ὔ ρέως, συγγενὴς “Ὁ φ' 3 7 ὧν οὗ ἀπέκοψεν Ilérpos τὸ ὠτί- ον" οὐκ ἐγώ σε τὸ 5 “- ΄, εἶδον ἐν τῷ κή- ᾽ > A πῳ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ; , Ss > , πάλιν οὖν ἠρνή- / 4 σατο Llerpos, καὶ εὐθέως ἀλέκτωρ 5» , ἐφώνησεν. > ᾿ > / XN ἐφώνησεν ἀλέκτωρ, καὶ Ν ε , STE στραφεὶς ὃ κύριος ἐνε- “ U AN βλεψεν τῷ Πέτρῳ καὶ {-} / ε , ὑπεμνήσθη ὃ ἹἸΠέτρος a 4 cal / τοῦ λόγου τοῦ κυρίου, ε 3 > ad \ WS ELTEV AUTW OTL πριν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι σή- μερον ἀπαρνήσῃ με τρίς. καὶ ἐξελθὼν ἔξω 3}, lal ἔκλαυσεν πικρῶς. He declares himself to be the Christ; is condemned and mocked. — Jerusalem. 20 διδαχῆς αὐτοῦ. Morning of the Sixth Day of the Week. Joun XVIII. 19-24. ε > > Ν > , Ν 3 a \ “ n > A Ν Ν a O οὖν ἀρχιερεὺς ἡρώτησεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν περὶ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ καὶ περὶ τῆς 12 4 2 a? a Φ ΒΝ 35ε ' ΄ a ΄ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἐγὼ παῤῥησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κόσμῳ" aN /, 297 é > lal \ {2 ““ ε tol μι , e 3 ὃ “-“ eyw TAVTOTE ἐδίδαξα εν συναγωγῇ και εν TO LEepw, οπου TAVTES οἱ Tou αιοὶ OuvvVe 21 ἔρχονται, καὶ ἐν κρυπτῷ ἐλάλησα οὐδέν. ἵ τί με ἐρωτᾷς ; ἐρώτησον τοὺς akKnKOO- PX ’ ρ " Ἴ . BE EPHOTAS ; EPwWTH UI Mt. 26:71. οὗτος SBD; pmrxat ACL Δ al it vg cop Treg.txt. et [mg.] Rev. Le. 22: 61. λόγου AD A; fhuaros SBL T Treg.mg. West. Rey. §§ 144, 145.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 169 JOHN XVIII. 22 τας τί ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς - ἴδε οὗτοι οἴδασιν ἃ εἶπον ἐγώ. | ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ εἰπόν- τος εἷς παρεστηκὼς τῶν ὑπηρετῶν ἔδωκεν ῥάπισμα τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ εἰπών - οὕτως ἀπο- 28 κρίνῃ τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ; | ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ ᾿Ιησοῦς - εἰ κακῶς ἐλάλησα, μαρτύρησον περὶ 24 τοῦ κακοῦ εἰ δὲ καλῶς, τί με δέρεις ; | ἀπέστειλεν οὖν αὐτὸν ὁ [Αννας δεδεμένον πρὸς Καϊάφαν τὸν ἀρχιερέα. Luxe XXII. 63-71. 66 Kat ὡς ἐγένετο ἡμέρα, συνήχθη τὸ πρεσβυτέριον τοῦ λαοῦ ἀρχιερεῖς τε καὶ “Ὁ ἂρ ΄σ γραμματεῖς, καὶ ἀπήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ συνέδριον αὐτῶν, Marr. XXVI. 59-68. Marx XIV. 55-65. 69 Οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς Kal τὸ συνέδριον 55 Οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ ὅλον τὸ συνέ- ὅλον ἐζήτουν ψευδομαρτυρίαν κατὰ Spiov ἐζήτουν κατὰ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ μαρ- τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ὅπως αὐτὸν θανατώσου- τυρίαν εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν, καὶ 60 σιν, ' καὶ οὐχ εὗρον πολλῶν προσελ- ὅθ οὐχ εὕρισκον - πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐψευδο- θόντων ψευδομαρτύρων. ὕστερον δὲ μαρτύρουν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἴσαι at 61 προσελθόντες δύο ' εἶπον - οὗτος ἔφη: 57 μαρτυρίαι οὐκ ἦσαν. καί τινες ἀνα- δύναμαι καταλῦσαι τὸν ναὸν τοῦ θεοῦ στάντες ἐψευδομαρτύρουν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν αὐτὸν οἰκοδο- 58 λέγοντες | ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ μῆσαι. λέγοντος ὅτι ἐγὼ καταλύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον τὸν χειροποίητον καὶ διὰ τριῶν 69 ἡμερῶν ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω. καὶ οὐδὲ οὕτως ἴση ἣν ἡ μαρτυρία αὐτῶν. Nie Ce 5 x 5" Nes, . εὖ τὰ \ 9 ΄ 62 και ἄναστας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἶπεν 60 καὶ ἀνάστας O ἀρχιερεὺς εἰς μεσὸν 3 “ FERNS > , ’ὔ e , 5 , Ν > an , > αὐτῷ: οὐδὲν ἀποκρίνῃ τί οὗτοί σου ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν λέγων: οὐκ t « a > a ΄ 3QX / e@ , 63 καταμαρτυροῦσιν ; ὃ δὲ Ingots éow- ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδὲν τί οὗτοί σου KaTapap- Ν 3 θ ‘\ c “ ε δὲ 5 ’ Ἂν > > πα. Kal ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ 61 τυρουσιν; 0 OE ἐσιώπα καὶ οὐκ ἅπε- 3 \ τ 3. Ἃ ’, 2907 , ἀρχιερεὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" κρίνατο οὐδέν. πάλιν , Lal - ἐξορκίζω σε κατὰ τοῦ ὃ ἀρχιερεὺς ἐπηρώτα LUKE XXII. na a “ “ SEN Ν / > 4 3 \ oh θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος, ἵνα αὐτὸν καὶ λέγει αὖ- λέγοντες - εἰ σὺ εἶ ὃ eon ” > \ me A \ en) , ΙῸΝ Ca ἡμῖν εἴπῃς εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ T° σὺ e& Oo Xpi- Χριστός, εἰπὸν ἡμῖν. weer ᾿ A = > ἌΝ Χριστὸς ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ θε- στὸς ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ evAO- 67 εἶπεν δὲ αὐτοῖς: ἐὰν an / > Coals Hae ξ Lal . a ε “ 3 64 οὔ. λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ Ἴη- 62 γητοῦ; ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ὑμῖν εἴπω, οὐ μὴ πι- a Ν τ Ν a Deh > Ν , 2 Ags σοῦς σὺ εἶπας - πλὴν εἶπεν: ἐγώ εἰμι, καὶ 68 στεύσητε" ἐὰν δὲ ἐρω- / ha eat S > > ” 4 ‘ eX a ΞΖ 3 Ν 3 a λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπ’ ἄρτι ὄψεσθε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ τήσω, οὐ μὴ ἀποκριθῆ- ” ν ‘ A a a a ὄψεσθε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκ δεξιῶν 69 τε. ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν δὲ > 6 , θ ΄ 6 , a ὃ ΄ μ᾿ ε εν a > ἀνθρώπου καθήμενον καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμε- ἔσται ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- 3 even a , ἀν 5 , \ ΄ ΄ > ἐκ δεξιῶν τῆς δυνάμε- ὡς καὶ ἐρχόμενον μετὰ θρώπου καθήμενος ἐκ / \ lal an “A rn a ws Kal ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρα- δεξιῶν τῆς δυνάμεως “-“ lal A cal ε Ν A a τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρα- 63 νοῦ. ὁ δὲ ἀρχιερεὺς 70 Tod θεοῦ. εἶπαν δὲ oa a ΄ e 3 \ »ε 7 \ a , \ > > ε 65 νοῦ. τότε ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς διαῤῥήξας τοὺς χιτῶ- πάντες" σὺ οὖν εἶ ὃ sae Are 4, > > aA 4 4 ex A“ cal ε ‘ διέῤῥηξεν τὰ ἱμάτια av- νας αὐτοῦ λέγει: τί υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ; ὁ δὲ Mt. 26:62. ἀποκρίνῃ; τι Treg.West. Rev. τῷ οὐδὲν ἀποκρίνῃ (ν. 62) ... ἀρχιερεὺς 63 ἀποκριθεὶς A C D syrr; om N° BL (ν. 68) δὲ", Z 33 vg cop Treg. West. Rey. ; om εἶπεν αὐ- Mc. 14:60. οὐδέν ; τί Treg. West. Rev. 170 66 67 68 MATT. XXVI. τοῦ λέγων: ἐβλασφή- μησεν" τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων; ἴδε lal 3 ’ Ν νῦν ἠκούσατε τὴν βλα- 4 “2.13 A σφημίαν. τί ὑμῖν do- δε ε Ν > / kel; ot δὲ ἀποκριθέν- = oy Tes eimov: ἔνοχος θα- , 5 '. νάτου ἐστίν. , > / > Tore ἐνέπτυσαν εἰς ’, cal TO πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ καὶ > i > , ε ἐκολάφισαν αὐτόν, οἱ δὲ 9. ! , € ἐράπισαν | λέγον- ,ὔ, τες" προφήτευσον ἧ- cr A ’ >. piv, Χριστέ, τίς ἐστιν ε / ὃ παίσας σε; 64 § 146. The Sanhedrin lead Matt. XXVII. 1, 1 mg. Am.txt.) ; λέγετε tx 2, 11-14. Mark XV. 1-5. THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE MARK XIV. 3 , A ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρ- τύρων; ἠκούσατε τῆς 4 ͵ὔ cal βλασφημίας τί ὑμῖν 4 ε Ν ’ὔ φαίνεται; οἱ δὲ πάν- / TES κατέκριναν αὐτὸν 5» > ΄ ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου. Ν Ν / Kat ἡρξαντό τινες ἐμπτύειν αὐτῷ καὶ πε- ρικαλύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ / XN , πρόσωπον καὶ KoAadi- ΡΟΣ Ἂς / few αὐτὸν καὶ λέγειν 7 A , αὐτῷ: προφήτευσον, καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται pa- ᾿ EEN a πίσμασιν αὐτὸν €ha- βον. Jesus away to Pilate. him. — Jerusalem. Sixth Day of the Week. Kat EVENTS [Parr VOL 71 63 64 65 LUKE XXII. Ν > Ν 3! ε πρὸς αὑτοὺς ἔφη" v= a ΄ ως ae A pets λέγετε, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι. ἔτι ἔχομεν μαρτυρίας χρείαν ; αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἧ- c Ἂν 3 , οἱ δὲ εἶπαν " τί ᾽ὔ -“ ’ κούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στό- ματος αὐτοῦ. ---- Καὶ οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ συνέχοντες ᾿αὐτὸν ἐνέ- παιζον αὐτῷ δέροντες, ' καὶ περικαλύψαντες αὐτὸν ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν προφήτευ- σον, τίς ἐστιν ὃ παίσας λέγοντες " σε; καὶ ἕτερα πολλὰ βλασφημοῦντες ἔλε- be γον εἰς αὐτόν. Pilate seeks to release uke SOC: 155: ἀναστὰν 28 JOHN XVIII. 28-38. Tpwias δὲ ye 1 yA , νομένης συμβού- λιον ἔλαβον πάν- τες οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς Ἂς ε , καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτε- ροι τοῦ λαοῦ κα- lal > wn τὰ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ὥστε θανατῶσαι > / A , αὐτόν. καὶ δή- σαντες αὐτὸν ἀπ- ἤγαγον καὶ παρέ- δωκαν ΠΕειλάτῳ ae , τῷ ἡγεμόνι. — Καὶ εὐθὺς πρωὶ 1 συμβούλιον ἕτοι- μάσαντες οἱ ἀρ- χιερεῖς μετὰ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων \ o& Ν καὶ ὅλον τὸ συν- 4d , ἔδριον, δήσαντες τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν ἀπ- ἤνεγκαν καὶ παρ- έδωκαν Πειλάτῳ. ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος αὐτῶν ἤγαγον αὖ- Ν -- Ayovow οὖν Ν > a Oa τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ Καϊάφα εἰς Ν τὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Πει- λᾶτον. τὸ πραιτώριον" Ss ΗΝ Af Ν ἣν δὲ πρωΐ: καὶ > \ 3 > fol αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλ- , Lal Gov eis TO πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶ- σιν ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ πάσχα. ἐξῆλθεν is > a Ν Ἂν \ οὖν ὃ Πειλᾶτος ἔξω πρὸς αὐτοὺς καὶ φησίν - τίνα κατηγορίαν φέρετε τοῦ ἀν- 6 , , 5 Ό \ > PW7TOUV TOUTOD ; αἀπεκρισῆσαν και εἰ- 1 ἐσ, > Ae e Ν a παν αὐυτῳ ει μὴ ἣν οὐτος Κακον ποίων, , ’, 81 οὐκ ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν. 5 > Ae εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς ὁ Πει- a a ΄ 33 τας ΄ λᾶτος - λάβετε αὐτὸν ὑμεῖς καὶ κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑμῶν κρί- νατε. Le. 99: 10. λέγετε, τ. Am.mg.). Me. 15:1. ὅτι Treg. Rey.(Ang. ὅτι West. Rev.( Ang. ἑτοιμάσαντες SC L West.mg. ; ~ aR - τ 8 , CN > ” > εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ οἱ ᾿Ιουδαίοι - ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔξεστιν ἀπο- ποιήσαντες A Β Δ ἃ] vg cop Treg. West.txt. Rey. ; ἐποίησαν D syrr | τῶν se SD cop; om BL Δ al Treg. West.; τῶν γραμμ. καὶ πρεσβ. C. §§ 145, 146.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 171 MATT. XXVII. LUKE XXIII. JOHN XVIII. 2 ἤρξαντο δὲ κατηγο- 32 κτεῖναι οὐδένα. ἵνα ὃ λόγος a A a Kot) A ae ρεῖν αὐτοῦ λέγοντες " τοῦ- τοῦ Ἰησοῦ πληρωθῇ, ὃν εἷ- ΄ ’ὔ La 4 , Tov εὕραμεν διαστρέφοντα πεν σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ Ὁ ε nw Ἂς , 3, > ’ὔ’ τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν καὶ κωλύον- ἤμελλεν ἀποθνήσκειν. 11 Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς τα φύρους Καίσαρι διδόναι, 83 Εἰσῆλθεν οὖν 3 ΄ » ‘ / ε ‘\ > Ν , ἐστάθη εμπρο- και λέγοντα εαῦυτον Χρι- εις τὸ πραντωρι- σθεν τοῦ ἡγεμό- στὸν βασιλέα εἷ- ον πάλιν ὃ Πει- vos* καὶ ἐπηρώ- eee σὺν 8 ναι. ὃ δὲ Πει- λᾶτος καὶ ἐφώ- τησεν αὐτὸν ὃ 2 καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν λᾶτος ἠρώτησεν νησεν τὸν Ἰη- «ε Ν (2 Cy ks «ε cal ΦιΌΝ ΄ Ἀ lal Ν Φ ἡγεμὼν λέγων αὐτὸν ὁ ΠΕειλᾶ- αὐτὸν λέγων σὺ σοῦν καὶ εἶπεν σὺ εἶ ὃ βασι- Tos* σὺ εἶ ὁ βα- εἰ ὃ βασιλεὺς αὐτῷ. σὺ εἶ ὃ βα- ‘\ lol > Ν lal > (ot) , \ “- > λεὺς τῶν ‘lov- σιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ἰου- τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ;— σιλεὺς τῶν Tov- , , eats 3 7, δαίων ; ;— datwv ;— 34 δαίων ; ἀπεκρί- θη ᾿Ιησοῦς - ad’ » Ἃ A) Ν a 35 ἑαυτοῦ σὺ τοῦτο λέγεις, ἢ ἄλλοι σοι εἶπον περὶ ἐμοῦ; ' ἀπεκρίθη 6 Τ]ειλᾶτος " 4 > ea als > NX ἔθ Ν Ν ‘\ 4 > a“ LAN , > 7 μήτι ἐγὼ ᾿Ιουδαῖός εἰμι; τὸ ἔθνος τὸ σὸν καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς παρέδωκάν σε ἐμοί: 4, > 7 ! > Ὅ 3 a ε Ν ΄΄ ΕΥ̓ στον > 5 2 a ΄ 86 τί ἐποίησας; ' ἀπεκρίθη Ἰησοῦς - ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμὴ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ΄ aS a ΄ ΄ -_ «ε ΄’ ens , Cee ,ὕ Ἃ a9, ‘ τούτου. εἰ ἐκ TOU κύσμου τούτου ἢν ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμή, OL ὑπηρέται ἂν οἱ ἐμοὶ 3 ΄ 7. Ν ὃ θῶ “a Ἢ ὃ 4 a δὲ Ἑ , CH SIN > ἠγωνίζοντο, iva μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις - viv δὲ ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμὴ οὐκ 37 μὰ > vO ! 9 > > ae TL λᾷ > a Ν > , > 4) ἔστιν ἐντεῦθεν. | εἶπεν οὖν αὐτῷ ὁ Πειλᾶτος - οὐκοῦν βασιλεὺς εἶ ov; ἀπεκρίθη ὃ Ἰησοῦς: σὺ MATT. XXVII. MARK XV. LUKE XXIII. λέγεις, ὅτι βα- 11 —6 δὲ Ἰησοῦς 2 -- ὃ δὲ ἀποκρι- 8 —6 δὲ ἀποκρι- σιλεύς εἰμι. ἐγὼ ἔφη - σὺ λέγεις. θεὶς αὐτῷ λέγει" θεὶς αὐτῷ edn: εἰς τοῦτο γεγέν- σὺ λέγεις. σὺ λέγεις. νημαῖι καὶ εἰς τοῦ- ἦτο ἐλήλυθα εἰς TOV κό ἵ 7 ἢ ἀληθείᾳ - πᾶς ὃ ὧν ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἀκού ὄσμον, ἵνα μαρτυρήσω τῇ ἀληθείᾳ: πᾶς ὃ ὧν ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἀκούει μου “ »“ , nn Lal “ 88 τῆς φωνῆς. | λέγει αὐτῷ 6 Πειλᾶτος - τί ἐστιν ἀλήθεια; καὶ τοῦτο εἰπὼν πά- A Ν Ν 3 a Aw ἐξῆλθεν πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Ιουδαίους, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ αἰτίαν. fe MATT. XXVII. MARK XV. 12 καὶ ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ 3 Kal j ὑτοῦ οἱ a ἢ : nyop ὃ καὶ κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ 9 , \ A , A TOV ἀρχιερέων Kal τῶν πρεσβυτέφων 4 πολλά. ὃ δὲ Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἐπηρώ- 18 οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίνατο. τότε λέγει αὐτῷ τα αὐτόν: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν ; ἴδε ὃ Πειλᾶτος: οὐκ ἀκούεις πόσα gov 5 πόσα σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν. ὃ δὲ A A 3 > 4 > - 3 , 3QXr 3 4 σ 14 καταμαρτυροῦσιν; καὶ οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη Τησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη, ὥστε αὐτῷ πρὸς οὐδὲ ἕν ῥῆμα, ὥστε θαυμά- θαυμάζειν τὸν Πειλᾶ B ; μ μάζειν τὸν Πειλᾶτον. ‘ ε ’ὔ if lew τὸν ἡγεμόνα λίαν. Ὲ LUKE XXIII. ε A > “- 4 6 δὲ Πειλᾶτος εἶπεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ τοὺς ὄχλους - οὐδὲν εὑρίσκω ΝΜ > a 3 , , ε A St VA , Ὁ > ͵ὔ Ν Ζ 5 αἴτιον ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τούτῳ. οἱ δὲ ἐπίσχυον λέγοντες ὅτι ἀνασείει τὸν λαόν, mils A a διδάσκων καθ᾽ ὅλης τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας Kal ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ THs Γαλιλαίας ἕως ὧδε. Joh. 18:31. κρίνατε S*; add αὐτόν Ne A 37 λέγεις, ὅτι Rev.(mg. Am.txt.) ; λέγεις BC D=pp L vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. | ὅτι Treg. West. Rev.(txt. Am.mg.). οὖν sc δὲ 1, A al vg; δὲ A D¥PP; om BC Mc. 15:4. αὐτόν S*; add λέγων BS AB cop Treg. West. Rey. CD Avg cop Treg. [West.] Rey. 172 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VILL. § 147. Jesus before Herod. — Jerusalem. Sixth Day of the Week. 1ὺῪκε ΧΧΙΠΠΠ. 606-22. 6 7 Πειλᾶτος δὲ ἀκούσας ἐπηρώτησεν εἰ 6 ἄνθρωπος Ταλιλαῖός ἐστιν, ' καὶ ἐπι- ἈΠ ἴεν > an is ΄ ary ἊΣ > ΄, 3: 7 > Kes ie aS " γνοὺς ὅτι ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρώδου ἐστίν, ἀνέπεμψεν αὐτὸν πρὸς Ἡρώδην, ὄντα καὶ αὐτὸν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις ἐν ταύταις ταῖς ἡμέραις. 8 Ὁ δὲ Ἡρώδης ἰδὼν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν ἐχάρη λίαν - ἢν γὰρ ἐξ ἱκανῶν χρόνων θέλων ΕἸ tal yee ἮΝ Ν > , ‘ ‘ 3 a Ν 3, la an > a ε ’ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν διὰ τὸ ἀκούειν πολλὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἠλπιζέν τι σημεῖον ἰδεῖν bm 9 αὐτοῦ γινόμενον. | ἐπηρώτα δὲ αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς - αὐτὸς δὲ οὐδὲν ἀπεκρί- 10 νατο αὐτῷ. εἱστήκεισαν δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς εὐτόνως κατηγοροῦν- 11 τες αὐτοῦ. ἐξουθενήσας δὲ αὐτὸν καὶ ὃ Ἡρώδης σὺν τοῖς στρατεύμασιν αὐτοῦ 12 καὶ ἐμπαίξας, περιβαλὼν ἐσθῆτα λαμπρὰν ἀνέπεμψεν αὐτὸν τῷ Πειλάτῳ. ἐγέ- ’ Ὁ A Ὁ“ nw ~ > vovro δὲ φίλοι ὅ τε Ἡρώδης καὶ ὁ Πειλᾶτος ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ pet ἀλλήλων " προὐπῆρχον γὰρ ἐν ἔχθρᾳ ὄντες πρὸς αὐτούς. 8 148. Pilate further seeks to release Jesus. ΤΠ Jews demand Barabbas.— Jerusalem. Sixth Day of the Week. Luxe XXIII. 13-25. Ν a Ν Ν + Ν Ν ‘ 13 Πειλᾶτος δὲ συνκαλεσάμενος τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Kal τοὺς ἄρχοντας καὶ τὸν λαὸν > a / 14 ! εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς- προσηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὡς ἀποστρέφοντα \ / t ἰδοὺ ἐνὼ ἐνώ Cheever 969 i ὑθὲν εὖ > 5) ἀνθρώτπ. , τὸν λαόν, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ἀνακρίνας οὐθὲν εὗρον ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τούτῳ a = A ε , ΄ κ᾿ Ν 15 αἴτιον ὧν κατηγορεῖτε κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ. ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ Ἡρώδης - ἀνέπεμψεν γὰρ αὐτὸν Ν ε lat Ν io Ν poe ae θ 7 > ‘ a / > lal ὃ ΄, 16 πρὸς ἡμᾶς, καὶ ἰδοὺ οὐδὲν ἄξιον θανάτου ἐστὶν πεπραγμένον αὐτῷ. παιδεύσας > 3 ἣν 5 , οὖν αὐτὸν ἀπολύσω. Marr. XXVII. 15-26. Marx XV. 6-15. Joun XVIII. 39, 40. 15 Kara δὲ ἑορτὴν «i- 6 , ε ε Ν > , ὦώθει ὃ ἡγεμὼν ἀπολύ- ,ὔ Κατὰ δὲ ἑορτὴν ἀπέ. 39 λυεν αὐτοῖς ἕνα δέσμι- ΕΣ , Ἔστιν δὲ συνήθεια (fet ae “ > , ὑμῖν ἵνα eva ἀπολύσω “ an» 4 ἃ A - ce a > a Ψ' Ν ew ἕνα τῷ ὄχλῳ δέσμι- 7 ον ὃν παρῃτοῦντο. ἢν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ πάσχα" --- ε / 16 ov ὃν ἤθελον. εἶχον δὲ δὲ 6 λεγόμενος Βαραβ- τότε δέσμιον ἐπίσημον, βᾶς μετὰ τῶν στασιαστῶν δεδεμένος, οἵτινες ἐν ~ a , , No ν᾿ ε λεγόμενον Βαραββᾶν. 8 TH στάσει φόνον πεποιήκεισαν. καὶ ἀναβὰς ὃ > Ἐπ a ΄ a ε 17 συνηγμένων οὖν αὐτῶν 9 ὄχλος ἤρξατο αἰτεῖσθαι καθὼς ἐποίει αὐτοῖς. ὃ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Πειλᾶ- 4 / 5 τος" τίνα θέλετε ἀπο- λύσω ὑμῖν, Βαραββᾶν ἣν a Ν 4 ἢ Ἰησοῦν τὸν λεγόμε- Le. 23:11. αὐτόν A D A vg Treg.txt. καὶ pr S& LT West.mg.; om A B De A ve Treg. West.txt. Rev. 15 ἀνέπεμψεν yap αὐτὸν πρὸς ἡμᾶς δὰ BL T cop Treg. mg.; ἀνέπεμψα γὰρ ὑμᾶς πρὸς δὲ Πειλᾶτος ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς λέγων: θέλετε ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν τὸν βα- σιλέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων ; 89 --- βούλεσθε οὖν ἀπο- λύσω ὑμῖν τὸν βασι- λέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων ; 17 hunc versum om ἃ ΒΤ, Τ᾽; add ἀνάγ- Knv δὲ εἶχεν ἀπολύειν αὐτοῖς κατὰ ἑορτὴν ἕνα (post v. 19 D |['Treg.mg.]) δὲ D A vg | Treg. mg.] Rey.mg. §§ 147, 148] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 18 19 20 21 22 Bav. 23 24 MATT. νον Χριστόν; noe yap ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παρέδωκαν XXVII. 173 MARK XY. 10 ἐγίνωσκεν γὰρ ὅτι διὰ αὐτόν. καθημένου δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος ἀπέ- φθόνον παραδεδώκει- cal Ν στειλεν πρὸς αὐτὸν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ λέγουσα - μηδὲν σοὶ σαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιε- Ν a 4 > ’ Ν Ν 3 , nm καὶ τῷ δικαίῳ ἐκείνῳ: πολλὰ yap ἔπαθον σήμερον ρεῖς. » 3 3 kat ὄναρ δι’ αὖ- / c 5 τόν. οἱ δὲ ἀρχιε- MARK XV. LUKE XXIII. JOHN XVIII. peis καὶ of πρε- 11 of δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς 18 —dvéxpayov δὲ 40 ἐκραύγασαν οὖν , + σβύτεροι ἔτπει- εἶ ΕΣ σαν τοὺς ὄχλους ἵνα αἰτήσωνται τὸν Βαραββᾶν, Ν ἃς. 3 n~ τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν 3 Ἂ ἀπολέσωσιν. ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον ἵνα μᾶλ- λον τὸν Βαραβ- nw 3 , εἰ βᾶν ἀπολύσῃ αὐὖ- τοῖς. λέ > yovTes* αἶρε τοῦ- πανπληθεὶ τον, ἀπόλυσον δὲ ὑμῖν τὸν Βαραβ- 19 βᾶν- ὅστις ἣν \ ΄ x διὰ στασιν τινα πάλιν λέγοντες " μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν. ἣν δὲ 6 Βαραβ- βᾶς λῃστής. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ Ἐς. Ν > > a ὃ ἡγεμὼν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ° , ᾽ὔ 3 ‘ na twa θέλετε ἀπὸ τῶν , 9 , Orel ε δύο ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν ; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν - τὸν Βαραβ- λέγει αὐτοῖς ὃ Πειλᾶτος - τί οὖν ποι- 4 > cal ἂς ’ ἥσω ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν λεγό- λέ- γουσιν πάντες" σταυ- , μενον Χριστὸν; ρωθήτω. ὃ δὲ ἔφη - τί γὰρ κακὸν ἐποίησεν ; ot δὲ περισσῶς ἔκρα- Cov λέγοντες - σταυρω- θήτω. 12 13 14 , > a / ‘ 4 γενομένην ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ φόνον MARK XV. ὁ δὲ Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς ἐλε- γεν αὐτοῖς - τί οὖν θέ- λετε ποιήσω ὃν λέγετε τὸν βασιλέα τῶν ᾽Ἰου- δαίων; οἱ δὲ πάλιν ἔκραξαν: σταύρωσον 3-7 QuTov. 6 δὲ Πειλᾶτος > 3 - , \ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς - τί yap 5» 4 4 e Ἂν ἐποίησεν κακόν ; οἵ δὲ περισσῶς ἔκραξαν " , , σταύρωσον αὐτόν. MATT. XXVII. 20 21 22 23 Ν 5 ~ “- βληθεὶς ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ. πάλιν δὲ 6 Πειλᾶτος προσεφώνησεν, θέλων ἀπολῦσαι τὸν Ἰησοῦν. οἱ δὲ ἐπεφώνουν λέγον- τες" σταύρου σταύρου 9 7. ε Ν , > αὐτόν. ὃ δὲ τρίτον el- πεν πρὸς αὐτούς - τί Ν vee e 3QN » OUTOS ; οὐδὲν QLTLOV θα- Ν ,ὔ κακὸν ἐποίησεν νάτου εὗἷρον ἐν αὐτῷ" παιδεύσας οὖν αὐτὸν ἀπολύσω. οἱ δὲ ἐπέ- κειντὸ φωναῖς μεγά- λαις αἰτούμενοι αὐτὸν σταυρωθῆναι, καὶ κατί- ε 2 OXvOV αἱ φωναι αὐτῶν. ἰδὼν δὲ ὁ Πειλᾶτος ὅτι οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον θόρυβος γίνεται, λαβὼν ὕδωρ ἀπενίψατο τὰς χεῖρας ἀπεναντι τοῦ ὄχλου λέγων - ἀθῷός εἶμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος τούτου ὑμεῖς ὄψεσθε. 26 καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς πᾶς ὃ 26 τὰ τέκνα ἡμῶν. Ν 53 Ν i) λαὸς εἶπεν. τὸ αἷμα 3 ἈΝ ,,Φ 4 a ἊΝ 15... αὑτοῦ Eh ἡμᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τότε 3 / > “A Ν ἀπέλυσεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Βαραββᾶν. ---- 15 MARK XY. ὁ δὲ ἸΠειλᾶτος βουλό- μενος ποιῆσαι τὸ ἱκανὸν “ἫΝ 3 / 3 τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀπέλυσεν αὖ- τοῖς τὸν Βαραββᾶν, ---- 24 25 LUKE XXIII, ‘\ an / καὶ Τειλᾶτος ἐπέκρινεν , x ” > γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα ai- an / Tov: ἀπέλυσεν δὲ TOV ὃ ‘ δ Ἂν , ta στάσιν καὶ φόνον βεβλημένον εἰς φυλα- , ἃ > “A A be ar a“ ἐδ - , 3 “ἡ κὴν, OV ἥτουντο, τὸν de Ἰησοῦν παρέδωκεν τῷ θελήματι αὐτῶν. πΞΞΞ ἘϑΞΞθοοο οὐδ σον δ υ τν τ τ Mc. 15:12. θέλετε A D it vg syrr; om SBCA33 cop [Treg.] West. Rev. Mt. 27:24, τούτου B D Revy.mg.; pm (add A A cop) τοῦ δικαίου SALA veg cop [Treg.] West.mg. Reyv.txt. 1 74 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Part VIII. § 149. Pilate delivers up Jesus to Death. He is scourged and mocked. — Marr. XXVII. 26-30. 26 27 — τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας παρέδωκεν ἵνα σταυρω- θῃ. A / ται τοῦ ἡγεμόνος παρα- Τότε οἱ στρατιῶ- 3 cal λαβόντες τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον συν- Jerusalem. Sixth Day of the Week. Mark XV. 18--19. A 15 --- καὶ παρέδωκεν τὸν 16 ἵνα σταυρωθῇ. 3 a Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας Οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται ἀπήγαγον STEN’ ” a s\n αὐτὸν ἔσω τῆς αὐλῆς, { ὃ ἐστιν πραιτώριον, καὶ a μὲ XN συνκαλοῦσιν ὅλην τὴν 1 Joun XIX. 1-8. Tore οὖν ἔλαβεν 6 Πειλᾶτος τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν. ΄ ree 3 IN 7 lal ἤγαγον ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ὅλην σπεῖραν" 28 τὴν σπεῖραν. καὶ ἐκ- 17 καὶ ἐνδιδύ. 2 καὶ ΄, Ν cal δύσαντες αὐτὸν χλα- σκουσιν αὑτὸν πορφύ- οἱ στρατιῶται πλέξαν- : : μύδα κοκκίνην περιέ- ραν καὶ περιτιθέασιν τες στέφανον ἐξ ἀκαν- ~ Ν ,ὔ nw nn a 29 θηκαν αὐτῷ, |! καὶ πλέ- αὐτῷ πλέξαντες ἀκάν- θῶν ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῦ τῇ / ΄“ ἕαντες στέφανον ἐξ ἀ- θινον στέφανον " κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἱμάτιον κανθῶν ἐπέθηκαν ἐπὶ πορφυροῦν περιέβαλον ζω An 5 Lal Ν ΄ >. N “~ > ’ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ κάλαμον ἐπὶ τῇ αὑτόν, -“ an , δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γονυ- 4 ΕΣ ἊΝ, δ ΓΝ πετήσαντες ἔμπροσθεν 18 και yp- 9 καὶ ἤρχοντο > a ΟΡ 3 od 3 a 3 id 3 Ἂν τ, ἐς, αὐτοῦ ἐνέπαιξαν αὐτῷ gavto ἀσπάζεσθαι αὐ- πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ ἔλεγον " λέγοντες - χαῖρε ὁ βα- Tov: χαῖρε βασιλεῦ χαῖρε ὃ βασιλεὺς τῶν σιλεὺς τῶν Ιουδαίων, 19 τῶν Ἰουδαίων καὶ ἔ- Ἰουδαίων - καὶ ἐδίδο- 80 καὶ ἐμπτύσαντες εἰς TUTTOV αὐτοῦ τὴν κε- σαν αὐτῷ ῥαπίσματα. Ν \ αὐτὸν ἔλαβον τὸν κά- φαλὴν καλάμῳ καὶ ἐν- λαμον καὶ ἔτυπτον εἰς έπτυον αὐτῷ, καὶ τι- \ ‘ 3 tia , ᾿ "ἃ » hss τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτου. θέντες τα γόνατα προσεκυνουν αὐτῳ. 8 150. Pilate still again seeks to release Jesus. — Jerusalem. Sixth Day of the Week. Joun XIX. 4-16. A ΡΞ ta 1 a Ν »# σ 4 Ἐξ ξῆλθεν πάλιν ὃ Πειλᾶτος ἔξω καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - ἴδε ἄγω ὑμῖν αὐτὸν ἔξω, ἵνα a“ 7 5 γνῶτε ὅτι αἰτίαν οὖν εὑρίσκω. ρ ἐξῆλθεν οὖν ὃ ᾿Τησοῦς ἔξω, φορῶν τὸν ἀκάνθινον lal / > “ > δ .€n oy. ‘4 6 στέφανον καὶ τὸ πορφυροῦν ἱμάτιον. καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - ἰδοὺ ὁ ἄνθρωπος. | ὅτε Φ a , , οὖν ἴδον αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς Kal οἱ ὑπηρέται, ἐκραύγασαν - σταύρωσον σταύρωσον. Mt. 27:28. ἐκδύσαντες S* ete? A L A cop ~ > > ς μίαν edp. ἐν αὐτῷ NS; ἐν αὐτῷ οὐδ. ait. εὗρ. syir; ἐνδύσαντες δλθδα Β Τὴ West.mg. Rev. mg. Joh. 19:4. ἐξῆλθεν δὴ D*™PP cop West. mg.; add ody A; pm Kal ABL Treg. West. txt. Rev. | αἰτίαν οὐχ εὑρίσκω N*; air. οὐδε- D PP A; air. ἐν αὐτῷ οὐδ. εὗρ. L; οὐδ. ἐν αὐτῷ ait. εὗρ. A; οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ B 1 33 cop Treg. West. 6 ἐκραύγασαν δὰ ; add λέγοντες A B Dsurp vg Treg. West. Rev. § 149-151.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 175 JOHN XIX. ε a λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ΠΠειλᾶτος - λάβετε αὐτὸν ὑμεῖς καὶ σταυρώσατε: ἐγὼ yap οὐχ > ων ’ 3 Lal ~ / 7 εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ αἰτίαν. ἀπεκρίθησαν οἱ “lovdaiou ἡμεῖς νόμον ἔχομεν, καὶ Ν ‘ , 3 , > a μή εν aA e€ Ν > ΄ κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὀφείλει ἀποθανεῖν, ὅτι υἱὸν θεοῦ ἑαυτὸν ἐποίησεν. VY Φ , a a A 89 “Ore οὖν ἤκουσεν 6 ἸΤειλᾶτος τοῦτον τὸν λόγον, μᾶλλον ἐφοβήθη, ' καὶ εἰσ- Lol > ΝΥ ’ fi Ν , “a? n~ “0 > 4 ε Ν > “a ἤλθεν cis TO πραιτώριον πάλιν καὶ λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ πόθεν εἶ σύ; ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς 10 ἀπόκρισιν οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ. λέγει αὐτῷ ὃ Πειλᾶτος " ἐμοὶ οὐ λαλεῖς ; οὐκ οἶδας Ὁ 5 ΄, 5 3 A / NA / 3 “- ’ 3 ’, 3 11 ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχω ἀπολῦσαί σε καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω σταυρῶσαί σε; ἀπεκρίθη ᾿᾽1η- ΚΝ ὁ > ” 2 , Dit a ἮΝ , > Na ὃ ὃ ἴς + 6 x σοῦς - οὐκ ἔχεις ἐξουσίαν Kar’ ἐμοῦ οὐδεμίαν εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 12 διὰ τοῦτο 6 παραδούς με σοὶ μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει. ἐκ τούτου ὃ Πειλᾶτος ἐζή- 3 ἴω ΔΙΑ ε ν 3 a 3 , , 2X a > ΄ τει ἀπολῦσαι αὐτόν: οἱ δὲ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἐκραύγαζον λέγοντες: ἐὰν τοῦτον ἀπολύ- ry > ΄ a , a ε , ε \ a 9 , a ays, οὐκ εἶ φίλος τοῦ Καίσαρος - πᾶς ὁ βασιλέα ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν ἀντιλέγει τῷ Καίσαρι. > nw ‘ > a 13. Ὁ οὖν Πειλᾶτος ἀκούσας τῶν λόγων τούτων ἤγαγεν ἔξω τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἐκά- ε ” “ θισεν ἐπὶ βήματος εἰς τόπον λεγόμενον Λιθόστρωτον, βραϊστὲ δὲ Tabada. Ans / 14 ' ἣν δὲ παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχα, ὥρα ἣν ὡς ἕκτη. καὶ λέγει τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις - ἴδε 6 Ν ε lal ! > , ) > a 3 > 7 έν λέ 15 βασιλεὺς ὑμῶν. | ἐκραύγασαν οὖν ἐκεῖνοι - ἄρον ἄρον, σταύρωσον αὐτόν. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὃ ΠΕειλᾶτος - τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω; ἀπεκρίθησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς " 3 μὲ Ἂ 3 Ν / ‘ > / Le > “ σ 16 οὐκ ἔχομεν βασιλέα εἰ μὴ Καίσαρα. τότε οὖν παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς ἵνα σταυρωθῇ. --- § 151. Judas repents and hangs himself. — Jerusalem. Sixth Day of the Week. Mart. XXVII. 3-10. 8 Τότε ἰδὼν ᾿Ιούδας ὃ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν ὅτι κατεκρίθη, μεταμεληθεὶς ἔστρεψεν 4 τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ πρεσβυτέροις | λέγων - ἥμαρτον παρα- - a 3 δοὺς αἷμα ἀθῷον. οἱ δὲ εἶπον: τί τ ΕΞ τ: ἐπ πὴ ΣΝ ἃ AGiswl. 18. 19; 5 πρὸς ἡμᾶς; σὺ OWN. Kal ρίψας τὰ ap- ᾿ , > Ἂν Ν 5 ji \ e Ν > > , , > γύρια εἰς τὸν ναὸν ἀνεχώρησεν Kat 18 Οὗτος μὲν οὖν ἐκτήσατο χωρίον ἐκ / “ na a 6 ἀπελθὼν ἀπήγξατο. - ot δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας, καὶ πρηνὴς γενό- 5 , ἊΝ 5 ύ α > av: οὐκ Ye 2h. ΄ ,ὔ 4 36 50 αβόντες τὰ ἀργύρια elm ὑκ ἔξε- μενος ἐλάκησεν μέσος, καὶ ἐξεχύθη a cE aS 3 \ “- ΄, Ν ΄ 3 a a Ν στιν βαλεῖν αὐτὰ εἰς τὸν κορβανᾶν, 19 πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ: ὃ καὶ 9 4 a a cal 7 ἐπεὶ τιμὴ αἵματός ἐστιν. συμβούλιον γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦ- Ν ΄ 3 , 538 aA Ν ¢ Ls σ΄ a x δὲ λαβόντες ἠγόρασαν ἐξ αὐτῶν τὸν σιν Ἱερουσαλήμ, ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ a 4 Ν a a “ lad ἀγρὸν τοῦ κεραμέως εἰς ταφὴν Tots χωρίον ἐκεῖνο τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ αὐτῶν , ε ΩΝ a > al 8 ξένοις. διὸ ἐκλήθη ὃ ἀγρὸς ἐκεῖνος Αχελδαμάχ, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν χωρίον al- . a , / 9 ἀγρὸς αἵματος ἕως τῆς σήμερον. τότε ματος. ἐπληρώθη τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἱερεμίου τοῦ John 19: 7. ἀπεκρίθησαν S; add αὐτῷ Mt. 27:4. ἀθῷον 8S A B* Ο A syrr West. A B Dp L vg Treg. West. Rev. mg.; δίκαιον B~s L it vg cop Treg.mg. 10 λέγει δὲ A cop; add οὖν Se B DseppL West.txt. Rev.mg. Avg Treg. West. Rey. 11 ἀπεκρίθη Acts 1:19. 6 S* Dst; om Ne A B Cvg A A vg cop; add αὐτῷ δὲ B Dp 33 L Treg. cop syrr Tree. West. Rev. | ἰδίᾳ A B? C; om West. Rev.'| ἔχεις δὲ A DPp L; εἶχες BA NS B* Ὁ Treg. West. Rev. Treg. West. Rev. 176 MATT. XXVII. THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Part VII. , , ae Ἂν oo” \ , 3 ΄ δ προφήτου λέγοντος "" καὶ ἔλαβον τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια, τὴν τι- ν n , ἃ 2 ΄ > Ν εκ > ΄ ! \ 10 μὴν τοῦ τετιμημένου OV ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, ' Kat 3, 3 Ν 3 \ 3 ‘ a / Ν ΄, ΄, ἔδωκαν QGuTa@ €lS TOV aypov TOV κεράμεως, καθὰ συνέταξέν μοι κύριος. 8 152. Jesus is led away to be crucified. — Jerusalem. Marr. XXVII. 31-34. 31 32 28 29 30 31 32 33 Mt. 27: 10. Me. 15 : 20. Καὶ ore ἐνέπαιξαν αὐτῷ, ἐκδύσαντες αὐ- Ν Ν 79d ay. τὸν τὴν χλαμύδα ἐνέ- δυσαν αὐτὸν τὰ ἱμά- τια αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀπήγα- γον αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ σταυ- ρῶσαι. 3 / E€epxopevor Ν - ΕΣ δὲ εὗρον ἄνθρωπον Κυ- al 5 ᾽ὔ , ρηναῖον, ὀνόματι Σί- μωνα: τοῦτον ἦγγά- σ , Ν ρευσαν ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ. aA a a“ A a a 9 , Ν 24 , > ΄ πλῆθος τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ γυναικῶν, αἱ ἐκόπτοντο καὶ ἐθρήνουν αὐτόν. 20 21 Sixth Day of the Week. Mark XV. 20-23. o Kal ore ἐνέπαιξαν ΕΞ ΟἹ 5Ὁ σὰ DEAN, αὐτῷ, ἐξέδυσαν αὐτὸν Ἂν ,ὔ Ν 5» , τὴν πορφύραν καὶ ἐνέ- cya. Ν 3) δυσαν αὐτὸν τὰ ἴδια ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἐξάγουσιν αὖ- ‘\ τὸν ἵνα σταυρώσουσιν. Ν καὶ ἀγγαρεύουσιν πα- ράγοντά τινα Σίμωνα Κυρηναῖον, ἐρχόμενον ἀπ᾽ ἀγροῦ, τὸν πατέρα 3 ᾿Αλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥού- ov, ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυ- ρὸν αὐτοῦ. Joun XIX. 16, 17. 16 --- Παρέλαβον οὖν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, : 17 καὶ βαστάζων ἑαυτῷ τὸν σταυρὸν ---- Luxe XXIII. 26-33. 26 Καὶ ὡς ἀπήγαγον αὐτόν, ἐπιλαβόμενοι Sipova τινα Κυρηναῖ- ov ἐρχύμενον ἀπ᾽ ἀγροῦ ἐπέθηκαν αὐτῷ τὸν σταυρὸν φέρειν ὄπι- 27 σθεν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ. ἦκο- λούθει δὲ αὐτῷ πολὺ στραφεὶς δὲ Ξ 5 ε , πρὸς αὐτὰς ὃ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν - θυγατέρες Ἱερουσαλήμ, μὴ κλαίετε ἐπ’ ἐμέ: πλὴν “2 APTN ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὰς κλαίετε καὶ ἐπὶ Ξ Ἀ σιν" μακάριαι al στεῖραι, ἔθρεψαν." lal “ , ε “~ Kal τοις βουνοῖς: καλύψατε μας" ΄ » ἑ τότε ἀρζονται cal 5 λέγειν τοῖς ορεσιν" c ὯΝ / ε lal ! μι io io, [3 la 2 - > a TO TEKVA μων, OTL LOOU ερχονται ἭὭμεραι εν ALS ερου- Ν ε , a > Θ΄. \ Ν a > και αι κοιλίαι αι ουκ eyevvynoay, και μᾶστοι οι OUK πέσατε ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς, ! Ld 9. ae “ ’ cal OTL εἰ ἐν TO ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ ταῦτα a > a cal , , d ! ” δὲ Ἀν» ὃ , δ᾿ εἶ & uP ποιοῦσιν, ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ TL γένηται; ἤγοντο O€ καὶ ETEPOL OVO κακουργοι σὺν αὑτῷ ἀναιρεθῆναι. MATT. XXVII. Kal 22 ἐλθόντες εἰς τό- πον λεγόμενον MARK XV. φέρουσιν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Τολγο- καὶ 33 29. Zech. 1] : 12 56. ; comp. Jer. 32:6 sq. ἃ 31. See Ez. 20:47; comp. 21:3 sq. ¢ 30. Hos. 10:8. ἔδωκαν Ὁ Ο Dal; ἔδωκα S (ἔδωκεν A* 4) syrr West.mg. Rev.mg. τὰ ἴδια ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ NM; τὰ ἱμάτ. τὰ ἴδια A Treg.; τὰ ἱμάτ. D8"; τὰ ἱμά- tia αὐτοῦ B C A West. Rev. | σταυρώσουσιν Rev. (-σουσιν AC Ὦ 1, Δ 88; «σωσιν δὰ B West.) LUKE XXIII. “΄ Ξ \ ὅτε ἀπῆλθον ἐπὶ τὸν τόπον τὸν κα- JOHN XIX. καὶ 17 — ἐξηλθεν εἰς τὸν λεγόμενον Κρανίου τόπον, b 29. Comp. Is. 54:1. SD; add αὐτόν A B C L vg Treg. West. Joh. 19:17. ἑαυτῷ SL; αὐτῷ B33 Treg. West. (air.) ; ἑαυτοῦ D8¥PP; σταυρὸν ἑαυτοῦ (αὑτοῦ alii) A cop syrr. 88 152, 153.] UNTIL THE END OF 38 35 35 36 Me. 15 : 28. MATT. XXVII. Γολγοθᾶ, oO & στιν κρανίου τό- πος λεγόμενος, ' ἔδωκαν αὐτῷ πεῖν οἶνον μετὰ χολῆς μεμιγμένον" οὐκ ἠθέλησεν πεῖν. Matt. X XVII. 35-38. Tore σταυ- ροῦνται σὺν av- ~ Ἅ , τῷ δύο λῃσταί, e 5. “ Ν εἷς ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ ἐξ μων. -- 7 3 ΄ εις εὐωνυ- σταυρώ- σαντες δὲ αὐτὸν διεμερίσαντο τὰ ε ,ὔ A ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ---- MARK XV. 64 7, μὲ 3 ἃ τόπον, ὁ ἐ- μεθερμη- ΄ νευόομενον Κρᾶα- στιν ΄ ΄ VLOU τοτπος. καὶ γευσάμενος THE JEWISH SABBATH. 23 177 LUKE XXIII. JOHN XIX. λούμενον Kpa- ὃ λέγεται ‘E- viov, — βραϊστὶ Τολγο- 6a, MARK XV. Ν ΕἸ EAN] 3 “ 3 καὶ ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ ἐσμυρ- t ay vig pevov οἶνον - ὃς δὲ οὐκ ἔλαβεν. § 153. The Crucifixion. — Jerusalem. MarK XV. 24-28. 25 27 24 Sixth Day of the Week. LUKE XXIII. 33, *Hy δὲ dpa τρίτη kal ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν. -ττ-- Καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ σταυροῦσιν δύο λῃστάς, ἕνα ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ ἕνα ἐξ εὐωνύμων αὐ- Tov. — Ἁ καὶ σταυ- a > / Ν ροῦσιν αὐτόν, καὶ δια μερίζονται τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ, --- 89 34 34, 38. — ἐκεῖ ἐσταύρω- \ σαν αὐτὸν καὶ τοὺς κακούργους, ἃ Ν 3 a ὃν μὲν ἐκ δεξιῶν, e ΝΥ ὃν δὲ ἐξ ἀριστε- > 6 δὲ ἼἸη- Lal 5 4 σοῦς ἔλεγεν" πά- ρῶν. ,, 5 a TEP, ἄφες αὐτοῖς " > ‘\ EAN] ov yap οἴδασιν τί ποιοῦσιν. δια- / μεριζόμενοι δὲ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐ- a T0U JOHN XIX. 18-24. 18 23 σ΄ i IN > ὅπου αὐτὸν ἐ- ͵ὔ x σταύρωσαν, καὶ 3 3 “ ΕἾ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἀλ- Si λους δύο ἐντεῦ- A > “a θεν καὶ ἐντεῦθεν, έσον δὲ τὸν Ἴη- μ 1 cow. — x Οἱ οὖν στρα- lal σ τιῶται, ὅτε ἐ- 4 σταύρωσαν τὸν 3 a +” Τησοῦν, ἔλαβον Ν ε 4 3 τὰ ἱμάτια αὐὖ- a Ν / τοῦ, καὶ ἐποίησαν μέρη, τέσσαρα ced, W , % ὦν a = a ε \ »” 2 A € αστῳ στρατιωτῃ μέρος, και TOV χιίτωνα. nV € oO χιτὼν ἄραφος, εκ των " ε 9° 24 ἄνωθεν ὑφαντὸς δι’ ὅλου. εἶπαν οὖν πρὸς GAAHAOUS* μὴ σχίσωμεν αὐτόν, , a — βαλόντες κλῆ- ! Ν ΄ὔ pov, | καὶ καθή- μενοι ἐτήρουν αὖ- τὸν ἐκεῖ. - βάλλοντες κλῆ- ED. tyes 4 pov ἐπ΄ αὐτὰ TLS τί ἄρῃ. he λον κλήρους. ἀλλὰ Ν > A , περι AUTOV, τινος λάχωμεν 7 σ ε εσται. ινᾶ ἢ γρα- φὴ πληρωθῇ "" διεμερίσαντο Ἁ ε , , cal Ν Ἂς Ν / τὰ ἱμάτιά μου ἑαυτοῖς καὶ ἐπὶ TOV ἱματισμόν μου ἔβαλον κλῆρον. 224. Ps. 22:19. a “ A Οἱ μὲν οὖν στρατιῶται ταῦτα ἐποίησαν. hune versum om δὲ A Β C* et? D; add καὶ ἐπληρώθη ἣ γραφὴ ἡ λέγουσα" καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη KE K LA vg cop syrr [Treg.] Rey.mg. 12 Le. 23:34. ὃ δὲ Ἰησοῦς... ποιοῦσιν N* et? AC Ds? LA yg syrr; om S* B D* [West.] Rey.mg. 178 37 21 22 § 154. The Jews mock at Jesus on the Cross. John. — Jerusalem. 39 40 41 42 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Part VIIL MATT. XXVII. MARK XV. LUKE XXIII. JOHN XIX. Kal ἐπέ- 26 καὶ ἣν ἣ 38 ἦν 19 ---ἔγραψεν δὲ καὶ θηκαν ἐπάνω τῆς ἐπιγραφὴ τῆς ai- δὲ καὶ ἐπιγραφὴ τίτλον 6 Πειλᾶ- κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ τίας αὐτοῦ ἐπι- ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ" τος καὶ ἔθηκεν τὴν αἰτίαν av- γεγραμμένη " ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ: τοῦ γεγραμμέ- ἣν δὲ γεγραμμέ- νην" οὗτός ἐ- στιν Ἰησοῦς ὃ βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαί- ων. σιλεὺς Ἰουδαίων. ὁ βα- σιλεὺς τῶν τος. ὃ βα- τῶν ὃ 3 Ἰουδαίων οὗ- γον" ᾿Ιησοῦς 6 Ναζωραῖος βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαί- 20 wv. τοῦτον οὖν τὸν τίτλον πολ- NTS) 4 lal > 4 Ld > Ἂς > ε ’ A ὦ μὲ > ἧς Aoi ἀνέγνωσαν τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἣν 6 τόπος τῆς πόλεως ὅπου ἐσταυρώ- θη ὃ Ἰησοῦς - καὶ ἣν γεγραμμένον Ἕ βραϊστί, Ῥωμαϊστί, Ἑλληνιστί. ἔλεγον > nw “ > > οὖν τῷ Πειλάτῳ ot ἀρχιερεῖς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων + μὴ γράφε: ὃ βασιλεὺς τῶν “lov- δαίων, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἐκεῖνος εἶπεν - βασιλεύς εἰμι τῶν Ιουδαίων. ἀπεκρίθη ὃ Πει- λᾶτος - ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα. Ματτ. XXVII. 39-44. Oi δὲ παραπορευόμενοι ἐβλασφή- μουν αὐτόν, κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς ϑ δὰ Ν ré Ξ ε . λύ αὐτῶν ' καὶ λέγοντες: ὃ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις οἶκο- δομῶν, σῶσον σεαυτόν, εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ κατάβηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυ- ροῦ. MATT. XXVII. c , ε > ὁμοίως οἱ ἄρχιε- ρεῖς ἐμπαίζοντες μετὰ τῶν γραμματέων καὶ , μὲ πρεσβυτέρων ἔλεγον" ἄλλους ἔσωσεν, ἑαυτὸν 3 , “ ov δύναται σῶσαι - βα- σιλεὺς Ἰσραήλ ἐστιν, καταβάτω νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ -“ Ν σταυροῦ καὶ πιστεύσω- Le. 23: 38. etc? A C3 D A vg syrr. Mt. 27: 40. 31 32 αὐτῷ δα B C* L cop; add γράμμασιν Ἑλληνικοῖς καὶ (om S* ete? D) Ῥωμαϊκοῖς καὶ (om S* et®> D) ‘EBpaikots S* καὶ κατάβηθι δὰ AD; om καὶ Sixth Day of the Week. 29 MARK XV. τοῦ σταυροῦ. He commends his Mother to Mark XV. 29-32. K Ν ε , 3 Lt αἱ ol παραπορευόμενοι ἐβλασφή- Pee: cal Ν Ἂς 3 μουν αὐτὸν κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὖ- lal A / aa ε rd τῶν Kat λέγοντες: ova ὃ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ οἰκοδομῶν τρισὶν ἡμέ- 30 ραις, σῶσον σεαυτὸν καταβὰς ἀπὸ LuKE XXIII. 35-37, 39-43. . , ε Ν ὁμοίως καὶ ᾿8ὅ καὶ εἱστήκει ὃ λαὸς θε- οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς ἐμπαίζον- τες πρὸς ἀλλήλους με- τὰ τῶν γραμματέων ἔ- ἄλλους ε Ν » , σεν, EAUTOV OV δύναται λεγον" ἔσω- lal ε Ν ε σῶσαι: ὃ Χριστὸς ὃ βασιλεὺς Ἰσραήλ, κα- a lal > Ν [ο ταβάτω νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ 96 BLAvgcop Treg. West. SAL; add καὶ B 33 [West.]; add δὲ καὶ De A Treg. [δὲ]. ve 4 ἐξεμυκτήριζον Ν ε » 4 δὲ οἱ ἄρχοντες λέγον- ὡρῶν * tes: ἄλλους ἔσωσεν, ’ Φ σωσάτω ἑαυτόν, εἰ οὗ- / 5 ε A -“ τός ἐστιν ὃ Χριστὸς τοῦ A ae > / ιν ὧν θεοῦ ὃ ἐκλεκτός. eve - > “ \ 8 παιξαν δὲ αὐτῷ καὶ οἱ στρατιῶται προσερχό- 41 ὁμοίως 42 σῶσαι; Rev.mg. Le. 23:35. δὲ δὶ Ὁ; δα καὶ ABCLA cop Treg. West. Rev. §§ 154, 155.) UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. MATT. XXVII. 43 μεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν: πέ- τὸν ΞΗΡῸΝ ποιθεν επι / 2 / θεόν, ῥυσάσθω vov εἰ θέλει ad- , a > κ᾿ “ τόν." εἶπεν γὰρ ὅτι Ν ? τὸ ὃ 5 Ἂς Ἂν ε Ν ε αὐτὸ καὶ οἵ λῃσταὶ οἱ 44 θεοῦ εἰμὶ υἱός. Ν συνσταυρωθέντες σὺν ΕἼΘΕ 3 , ae: αὐτῷ ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν. 4 40 μᾶς. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ 41 ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ; τ τ ρ μ ᾽ 42 σ ἐτερος MARK XV. a Ψ“ + σταυροῦ, ἵνα ἴδωμεν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν. Ν ε καὶ οἱ συνεσταυρωμένοι σὺν 3 Lal 3 LAN) > , αὐτῷ ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν. 119 LUKE XXIII. μενοι, ὄξος προσφέ- 37 ροντες αὐτῷ | καὶ λέ γοντες " εἰ σὺ εἶ ὃ βα- σιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, σῶσον σεαυτόν. --- 89 His δὲ τῶν κρεμα- σθέντων κακούργων ἐ- βλασφήμει αὐτόν - οὐ- χὶ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός; ΄“ x A σῶσον σεαυτὸν καὶ ἡ- ἐπιτιμῶν αὐτῷ ἔφη οὐδὲ φοβῇ σὺ τὸν θεόν, ὅτι ' καὶ ἡμεῖς μὲν δικαίως, ἄξια γὰρ ὧν ἐπράξαμεν ἀπολαμ- (ἘΝ A ra a βάνομεν - οὗτος δὲ οὐδὲν ἄτοπον ἔπραξεν. καὶ ἔλεγεν: Ἰησοῦ, μνήσθητί pov 4 35 > ~ , Ν > 3 a 3 , ΄ ΄ ’ 43 ὅταν ἔλθης ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ σου. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἀμήν σοι λέγω, σήμερον μετ' 3 am > a 7 ἐμοῦ ἔσῃ ἐν TH παραδείσῳ. 25 26 ΘΗΝ Delon 5 μητρὸς αὐτοῦ, Μαριὰμ ἡ τοῦ Κλωπᾶ, καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνή. ΕΠ , δὲ x - o a ἘΠ] ne , > a ε LO Ady a LOTYHKELOGV O€ παρα τῳ σταῦυρῳ του τῖΏησου ἢ ΜΉΤΗΡ αὐτου Και ἢ AOE 1) Τῆς > a > Ἰησοῦς οὖν ἰδὼν τὴν μητέρα καὶ τὸν μαθητὴν παρεστῶτα ὃν ἠγάπα, λέγει τῇ μητρί: γύναι, 27 ἴδε ὃ υἱός σου. ' εἶτα λέγει τῷ μαθητῇ ἴδε ἣ μήτηρ σου. ὥρας ἔλαβεν αὐτὴν ὃ μαθητὴς εἰς τὰ ἴδια. § 155. Darkness prevails. Marr. XXVII. 45-50. 45 ‘Amo δὲ ἕκτης ὥρας σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πᾶ- σαν τὴν γῆν ἕως ὥρας ΡΟΝ ας Ν Ν Ν 46 ἐνάτης. περὶ δὲ τὴν 5. We . 3 , ἐνάτην ὥραν ἀνεβόη- ε > A tal σεν ὃ Ιησοῦς φωνῇ μεγάλῃ λέγων: ἡλεὶ ἡλεὶ λεμὰ σα- , Lalu Τα, BaxOavei; τοῦτ᾽ & oti: θεέ pov θεέ μου, ἱνατί με éy- 47 κατέλιπες; ἢ τινὲς a lal / δὲ τῶν ἐκεῖ ἑστηκότων Sixth Day of the Week. Mark XV. 33-37. 88 Καὶ γενομένης ὥρας ἕκτης σκότος ἐγένετο ἐφ᾽ ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἕως 84 ὥρας ἐνάτης. καὶ TH ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ ἐβόησεν ὃ Ἰησοῦς φωνῇ μεγάλῃ ἐλωὶὺ ἐλωὶ λεμὰ σαβαχθανεί, ὅ ἐ- μεθερμηνευόμε- νον" 6 θεός pov ὃ στιν , > / θεος pov, eis τί > aN , b ἐγκατέλιπές pe; , Lol 35 Kal TIVES TOV παρεστώ- 8 43. Comp. Ps. 22:7, 8. b 46 etc. Le. 23: 42. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ cov SACA Le. 98 : 45. al West.mg.; εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν cov B L vg Treg.mg. West.txt. Rev.mg. τῆς ἐλεύσεώς cov 1). ἊΝ eres Jha ’, a καὶ ἀπ΄ ἐκείνης τῆς Christ expires on the Cross. — Jerusalem. LuKE XXIII. 4446. 44 Καὶ ἦν ἤδη ὡσεὶ ὥρα ἕκτη καὶ σκότος > / > > μέ A ἐγένετο ἐφ᾽ ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης, 45 ' τοῦ ἡλίου ἐκλιπόν- τος _— JoHN XIX. 28-30. 28 Mera τοῦτο εἰδὼς 6 > “a μὲ Ν δ Τησοῦς ὅτι ἤδη πάντα Ps. 22:2 [1]. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ἡλίου ἐκλιπόντος (ἐκλεί- movtos B West.txt. Rey.) 8 B Οὐ L cop; kal ([καὶ] West.mg.) ἐσκοτίσθη (ἐσκ. δὲ D) ὃ ἥλιος A Οϑ D A vg Treg. West.mg. ΄ 180 MATT. XXVII. 3 , 5 σ ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον ὅτι ε a ᾿ Ἠλείαν φωνεῖ οὗτος. 48 καὶ εὐθέως δραμὼν εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν καὶ λαβὼν σπόγγον πλήσας τε O- Ν Ν γ᾽ ξους καὶ περιθεὶς καλά- ld ’, 49 μῳ ἐπότιζεν αὐτόν. οἱ c 50 δὲ λοιποὶ ἔλεγον - a- des ἴδωμεν εἰ ἔρχεται λείας σώσων αὐτόν. ὋὉ δὲ Ἰησοῦς 37 / πάλιν 96 MARK XV. ἔλε- γον ἴδε Ἡλείαν φωνεῖ. , TOV ἀκούσαντες Ν /, Ν ’ δραμὼν δέ τις καὶ γεμί- σας σπόγγον ὄξους πε- Ἅ 4 > ΄ ριθείς καλάμῳ ἐπότιζεν Ἄν ΄ » αὐτόν, λέγων: ἄφετε ἴδωμεν εἰἔρχεται Ἡλεί ας καθελεῖν αὐτόν. 29 διψῶ. THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Part VII. JOHN XIX, fe ν τετέλεσται, iva. τελειω- a ε fa , ' θῇ ἡ γραφή," λέγει σκεῦος ἔκειτο 35, , , ὄξους μεστόν: σπόγ- 5S Ν ΕΣ γον οὖν μεστὸν ὄξους ,ὔ ὑσσώπῳ περιθέντες προσήνεγκαν αὐτοῦ τῷ / στόματι. κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ ἀ- φῆκεν τὸ πνεῦ- μα. MARK XV. LUKE XXIII. ὁ δὲ Ἴη- 46 καὶ φωνή- 80 ὅτε οὖν σοῦς ἀφεὶς φω- σας φωνῇ μεγά- ἔλαβεν τὸ ὄξος, νὴν μεγάλην ἐξ- An ὃ Ἰησοῦς εἷ- εἶπεν: τετέλε- ἔπνευσεν. πεν " πάτερ, εἰς σται, καὶ κλέ χεῖράς σου, νας τὴν κεφα- παρατίθεμαι τὸ πνεῦμά λὴν παρέδωκεν μου." τοῦτο δὲ εἰπὼν ἐξέπνευσεν. τὸ πνεῦμα. § 156. The Vail of the Temple rent, and Graves opened. Judgment of the The Women at the Cross. — Jerusalem. Centurion. Marr. XXVII. 51-56. 51 Ν Καὶ ἰδοὺ τὸ καταπέ- τασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχί- » 9 », σθη ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω 3 ΄ ἊΝ ἘΝ 5 4 εἰς δύο, καὶ ἡ γῆ ἐσεί- Ν ε 4 > σθη, καὶ ai πέτραι ἐ- Sixth Day of the Week. Mark XV. 38-41. 38 Kat σμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη \ ΄, το καταπετα- > , > Ν > o εις δύο απο ἄνωθεν εως , Κατω. 45 Luxe XXIII. 45, 47-49. > / Ν Ν — ἐσχίσθη δὲ τὸ κατα- πέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ μέ- σον. ΄ θ ! AVE nA. 8 ΄ θ κ᾿ λλὸ , , OKXLTUNTAV, © και TA μνήμεια aVEW X' σὰν KAL πο aA TWUATA τῶν / δ: ὙΔ 3 ΄ θ ᾿ Ν ΧΦ λθό > “Ὁ ’ κεκοιμήμενων αγιὼν Ὥγερ σαν και εςε OVTES εκ τῶν μνΉμει- Ν Ν + > a Wisi! > Ν e 7 / Se WV μετὰ τὴν ἐγερσιν αὐτου εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν πόλιν καὶ ἐνε- φανίσθησαν πολλοῖς. ε Ne / \ ὃ δὲ ἑκατοντάρχης καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ τηροῦν- Ν > ἴω > /, tes TOV ᾿Ιησοῦν ἰδόντες τὸν σεισμὸν Kal τὰ γινόμενα ἐφοβήθησαν σφόδρα, λέγοντες - ἀ- 99 2 28. Comp. Ps. 69: c ἰδὼν δὲ ὃ κεντυ- ΄ ε Ν ae plov ὃ παρεστηκὼς ἐξ ΄ a ¢ 7 ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ OTL Ov- 56 / > τως ες επνευσεν, €L7TEV " -“ e ε ἀληθῶς οὗτος 6 ἀνθρω- εν 3. Lal πος υἱὸς ἣν θεοῦ. 22. 47 48 ἰδὼν δὲ 6 ἑκα- τοντάρχης τὸ γενόμε- 297 Ν Ν νον ἐδόξασεν τὸν θεὸν λέγων: ὄντως ὃ ἀν- θρωπος οὗτος δίκαιος ἫΝ Ν , ε ἣν. καὶ πάντες οἱ συν- [> 46. Comp. Ps. 81 :5.]. Me. 15 : 36. cop [Treg.] West. Rev. Mt. 27 : 49. [West.] Rev.mg. καὶ SAC DAvg; omBL αὐτόν A D A it vg cop syrr; add ἄλλος δὲ λαβὼν λόγχην ἔνυξεν αὐτοῦ Thy πλευράν, καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ὕδωρ καὶ αἷμα δ BCL Joh.19:30. ὄξος N*; add 6 (om B [Treg.] [West.]) Ἰησοῦς δ A B Depp L cop syrr Mc. 15:39. Treg. West. Rev. οὕτως SBL cop; add κράξας AC Avg syrr [Treg.] Rey.mg. ; οὕτως αὐτὸν κράξαντα καὶ 1). §§ 155-157.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 55 56 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Marr. XXVII. 57-61. Marx XV. 42-47. Luke XXIII. 50-56. 57 58 5. 31. Comp. Deut. 21: 22, 23. 181 MATT. XXVII. MARK XV. LUKE XXIII. ληθῶς θεοῦ vids ἦν οὗ- παραγενόμενοι ὄχλοι tos. Ἦσαν δὲ ἐκεῖ 40 Ἦσαν ἐπὶ τὴν θεωρίαν ταύ- a \ SN ‘ \ a οἷ κ θ , κ᾿ γυναῖκες πολλαὶ ἀπὸ δὲ καὶ γυναῖκες ἀπὸ την, θεωρήσαντες τὰ A “ δ 4 ‘ μακρόθεν θεωροῦσαι, μακρόθεν θεωροῦσαι, γενόμενα, τύπτοντες τὰ a , ay? ε αἵτινες ἠκολούθησαν ἐν αἷς καὶ Μαρία 7 49 στήθη ὑπέστρεφον. εἷ- τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἀπὸ τῆς Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ Μαρία στήκεισαν δὲ πάντες οἱ τ a 3 , a Las Ν SPY SN Γαλιλαίας διακονοῦσαι ἡ Ιακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ ἀπὸ μα- ὃ a a A \ a αὐτῷ: ἐν ais nv Ma- καὶ ᾿Ιωσῆτος μήτηρ κρόθεν, καὶ γυναῖκες αἱ JA 5S cal “Ὁ pia ἡ Μαγδαληνή, καὶ 41 καὶ Σαλώμη, at ὅτε ἢν συνακολουθοῦσαι αὐτῷ Μαρία ἡ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβου καὶ Ἰωσὴφ μήτηρ, καὶ ἡ μήτηρ τῶν υἱῶν Ζε- ἐν τῇ Ταλιλαίᾳ ἦκο- λούθουν αὐτῷ καὶ διη- / > ὌΝ ΝΜ κόνουν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀλ- ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας, ὁ- ρῶσαι ταῦτα. βεδαίου. λαι πολλαὶ at συναναβᾶσαι αὐτῷ εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα. .͵« The Burial. — Jerusalem. § 157. The taking down from the Cross. Sixth Day of the Week. JoHn XIX. 31-42. Oi > =} ὃ a > Ν Ν > , a ‘\ 7 >. \ a “~ Ν [4 ἱ οὖν ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἣν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα 3 a , yeh Ν aN ew , > ’, a ,ὔ 3 ΄ Ν ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ," ἣν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν a a a an > > A Πειλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν. ἦλθον οὖν οἱ στρατιῶ- Ν A an aA ται, καὶ τοῦ μὲν πρώτου κατέαξαν TA σκέλη Kal τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ συνσταυρωθέντος 5 “ Be N δὲ Ν AL lal ΕἸ / ε 430 no ooh. 6 / > / € αὐτῷ. ἐπὶ δὲ τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν ἐλθόντες ws εἶδον ἡδη αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα, οὐ κατέαξαν 3 aA Ν , ! 3 ΕῚ e a lal / > lal Ν Ν + € Ν αὐτοῦ τὰ σκέλη, | GAN εἷς τῶν στρατιωτῶν λόγχῃ αὐτοῦ τὴν πλευρὰν ἔνυξεν, καὶ ϑξια 34% e Ney: ἈΠΕ τα Ν ΄ NS Ν 3 a ἐξῆλθεν εὐθὺς αἷμα καὶ ὕδωρ. καὶ 6 ἑωρακὼς μεμαρτύρηκεν, καὶ ἀληθινὴ αὐτοῦ 3 Ν ε [4 9 “a t Υ 3 A“ , 7 Xi 16 ~ , > / ἐστὶν ἣ μαρτυρία, κἀκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει, ἵνα Kal ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε. ἐγέ- Ν A ων a vero yap ταῦτα ἵνα ἣ γραφὴ πληρωθῇ" ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὖ- A \ 4 [ὦ ἊΝ). Ν / c μὴ 3 a > / TOU. καὶ πάλιν ἑτέρα γραφὴ λέγει“ ὄψονται εἰς Ov ἐξεκέντησαν. JOHN XIx. Ὀψίας δὲ γε- ἦλθεν 42 Καὶ ἤδη ὀψίας Ν γενομένης, ἐπεὶ 54 Καὶ ἡμέρα ἦν 88 Μετὰ δὲ ταῦ- ΄ a \ νομενῆς παρασκεῦης, και τα ἠρώτησεν τὸν ἄνθρωπος πλού- ἣν παρασκευή, σάββατον ἐπέ- Πειλᾶτον ἤἼω- > σιος ἀπὸ ᾽᾿Αριμα- ὅ ἐστιν προσάβ- 50 φωσκεν. --- Καὶ ond ὃ ἀπὸ ᾽Δρι- / θαίας, τοὔνομα 43 βατον, |! ἐλθὼν ἰδοὺ ἀνὴρ ὀνόμα- μαθαίας, ὧν μα- Ἰωσήφ, ὃς καὶ Ἰωσὴφ ὃ ἀπὸ τι Ἰωσὴφ βου- Ν ε / λευτὴς ὑπάρχων, θητὴς τοῦ ᾿Ἰ1η- 3 Ν 3 θ 7 > , > a , αὑτὸς ἐμαθητεύ- Αριμαθαίας, εὐ- σοῦ κεκρυμμένος »“ > a θη τῷ “Incov: σχήμων βουλευ- καὶ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς δὲ διὰ τὸν φόβον t XP YP ey ‘ ‘ n οὗτος προσελθὼν τής, ὃς καὶ ai- 51 καὶ δίκαιος, ' οὗ- τῶν Ιουδαίων, Lal 4 ? / Ν > a τῷ Πειλάτῳ ῃτή- τὸς ἣν προσδε- χόμενος τὴν βα- σιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, b 36. Ex. > 4 σ a TOS οὐκ ἦν συν- ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸ σῶμα Ν lal lal cal σατο TO σῶμα κατατεθέμενος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ" 3 ζω “ fal cal τοῦ Ἰησοῦ. τῇ βουλῇ καὶ τῇ 12: 46; Ps. 34: 90. © 37. Zech. 12: 10. Le. 23:50. καὶ 56 δὲ ΟἽ, 88; om ABD A vg cop Treg. West. Rey. 182 44 59 60 61 MARK XV. τολμήσας εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν ΠΠειλᾶτον καὶ ἡτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ. ὁ δὲ Πειλᾶτος ἐθαύμαζεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν, καὶ προσκαλεσάμενος τὸν κεντυρίωνα ἐπηρώτησεν αὐὖ- te Ea ee τόν εἰ πάλαι ἀπέ- \ Ay τότε 45 Oavev. καὶ γνοὺς -“ , 3s \ ἴω ’ὔ ὁ Πειλᾶτος ἐκέ- ἀπὸ τοῦ κεντυρί- λευσεν ἀποδοθῆ- wvos ἐδωρήσατο καὶ λαβὼν ΝΥ a ε 3 τὸ σῶμα ὃ “lo lel “a? ναι. τὸ πτῶμα τῷ Ἶω- ΄ὔ σηφ. ράσας σινδόνα, 46 καὶ ἀγο- σὴφ ἐνετύλιξεν αὐτὸν αὐτὸ σινδόνι κα- καθελὼν 6 a ! Ν ἔθ 3 ἫΝ “ apa, ' καὶ ἔθη- ἐνείλησεν τῇ σιν- FON 2 “ ud \ , κεν αὐτὸ ἐν τῷ δόνι καὶ κατέθη- awe Hee See! ΄ καινῷ αὐτοῦ μνη- κεν αὐτὸν ἐν μνή- 4 Ἂ 59 , ὰἃὰ 4 μείῳ ὃ ἐλατόμη- ματι ὃ ἣν λελα- ,ὔ σεν ἐν τῇ πέτρᾳ, τομημένον ἐκ πέ- καὶ προσκυλίσας τρας, καὶ προσ- λίθον σας Ν 4 ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν λίθον μέγαν τῇ εκύλισεν θύρᾳ τοῦ μνη- μείου ἀπῆλθεν. a ΄ του μνημειου. 52 53 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. LUKE XXIII. πράξει αὐτῶν, ἀπὸ ᾿Αριμαθαίας πόλε- ὡς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, ὃς προσεδέχετο τὴν , A A a -ς βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, οὗτος προσελθὼν ζω Π ιλᾶ > , Ν “ἅμ na lf τῷ Πειλᾶτῳ ἡτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ty- σοῦ, JOHN XIX. καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν 6 ΠΠειλᾶτος. ἦλθον 39 οὖν καὶ ἦραν αὐτόν. ἦλθεν δὲ καὶ Νικόδημος ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν νυκτὸς τὸ πρῶτον, φέρων μῖγμα σμύρνης καὶ ἀ- LUKE XXIII. λόης ὡς λίτρας ἔλαβον > x an a ουν TO σωμᾶ του καὶ καθελὼν 40 ἑκατόν. ἐνετύλιξεν αὐτὸ ’ Ν 3 ~ Ἂν σινδόνι, καὶ ἔθη- Ιησοῦ καὶ ἔδη- EEN > ΄ ΞΟ 3 fe κεν αὐτὸν ἐν μνή- σαν αὐτὸ ὀθονί- ατι λαξευτῷ, οὗ ols μετὰ τῶν ἀ- μ a > > > ‘ , Ἂν οὐκ ἦν οὐδεὶς ρωμάτων, καθὼς 3Q7 ΄, 3, > Ν “-“ οὐδέπω κείμε- ἔθος ἐστὶν τοῖς > 4 > vos. — Ἰουδαίοις ἐντα- 41 φιάζειν. ἣν δὲ nan / a ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου ΄ a a ,ὔ - ΄, e ἐσταυρώθη κῆπος, καὶ ἐν τῳ κήπῳ μνήημειον KQLVOY, ἐν ῳ 3 , 3 Ν s.. 2 > a > ἊΣ Ν Ν “ 42 οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἐτέθη: €KEL OVUV διὰ Τὴν παρασκευὴν των ἘΠ ὃ , μὲ 5 Ν > Ν al ἔθ Ν Ἢ a OVOQLWYV, OTL eyyus Ὧν TO μνήμειον, EUNKAV TOV nO OUV. MATT. XXVII. ἣν δὲ ἐκεῖ Μαριὰμ 47 Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ ἡ ἀλ- λη Μαρία, καθήμεναι > , aA / ἀπέναντι TOV τάφου. MARK ΧΥ. Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ Μαρία ἡ ᾿Ιωσῆτος ἐθεώρουν ποῦ τέθειται. LUKE XXIII. ἡ δ 55 Κατακολουθήσασαι δὲ γυναῖκες, αἵτινες ἧ- σαν συνεληλυθυῖαι ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας αὐτῷ, > 4 Ν an ἐθεάσαντο TO μνημεῖον Ν ε 5 Ν lal > Le) ! « , δὲ ε ! 5 , 56 Kal ὡς ἐτέθη τὸ σῶμα airov,! ὑποστρέψασαι δὲ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώ- Ν ’ Ν Ν ἣν ΄ «ε ’ Ν Ἂς 3 δ ’ ματα και μυρα ' και TO μὲν σάββατον ῃησυχασαν κατα TYV EVTO NV. Mc. 15:44. πάλαι S A ΟἽ, syrr Treg. mg. West.mg. ; ἤδη Β D vg cop Treg.txt. West. Rev. ip Joh. 19:38. ἦλθον et ἦραν S*; ἦλθεν et εν S& B Ds Pp al ve cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. | αὐτόν S*; τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ DPP A al vg cop syrr; τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ N° B L Treg. West.txt. Rev.mg. 89 μῖγμα Se A West.mg. ; ἕλιγμα S* B West.txt. Rev.mg. B Le. 28:55. γυναῖκες SAC Avg; pm ai L 33 cop syrr Treg.txt. West.txt. Rev. ; pm δύο D Treg.mg. West. mg. 56 μύρα. Kal τὸ pév... ἐντολήν, conjungen- tes Kal τὸ κ. τ. A. et 24:1. West. Rev. §§ 157, 158.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 183 § 158. The Watch at the Sepulchre. — Jerusalem. Seventh Day of the Week, or Sabbath. Marr. XXVII. 62-66. 62 Ty δὲ ἐπαύριον, ἥτις ἐστὶν μετὰ τὴν παρασκευήν, συνήχθησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ 63 οἱ Φαρισαῖοι πρὸς Πειλᾶτον |! λέγοντες - κύριε, ἐμνήσθημεν ὅτι ἐκεῖνος ὁ πλάνος 64 εἶπεν ἔτι ζῶν: μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἐγείρομαι. κέλευσον οὖν ἀσφαλισθῆναι τὸν τάφον ἕως τῆς τρίτης ἡμέρας, μήποτε ἐλθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ κλέψωσιν αὐτὸν καὶ εἴπωσιν τῷ λαῷ ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη πλάνη χείρων τῆς 65 πρώτης. ἔφη αὐτοῖς 6 Πειλᾶτος - ἔχετε κουστωδίαν - ὑπάγετε ἀσφαλίσασθε ὡς 66 οἴδατε. οἱ δὲ πορευθέντες ἠσφαλίσαντο τὸν τάφον, σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίθον μετὰ τῆς κουστωδίας. PART IX. ----ς----- OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION, HIS SUBSEQUENT APPEARANCES, AND HIS 1 i) § 160. Visit of the Women to the Sepulchre. Mart. XXVIII. 1. 1 ASCENSION. Time: Forty days. § 159. The Morning of the Resurrection. — Jerusalem. . First Day of the Week. Marx XVI. 1. Ka διαγενομένου τοῦ σαββάτου Μαρία ἣ Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου καὶ Σαλώμη ἠγόρασαν ἀρώματα, ἵνα ἐλθοῦσαι ἀλείψωσιν αὐτόν. Matt. XXVIII. 2-4. A .9 Ν Ν - , l4 »” ‘ ‘4 Ν 5 3 cal Ἂς καὶ ἰδοὺ σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας - ἄγγελος γὰρ κυρίου καταβὰς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ Ν 3 , \ ΄ NOS ΚΕ. > ΄ 3 A <2 Nene 207 3 προσελθὼν ἀπεκύλισεν τὸν λίθον καὶ ἐκάθητο ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ. jv δὲ ἡ εἰδέα αὖ- ve 9 4 A Ne. > A Ν ε ,ὔ > Ν Ν “ / 9 a τοῦ ὡς ἀστραπή, Kal τὸ ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ λευκὸν ὡς χιών. ἀπὸ δὲ TOD φόβου αὐτοῦ ἐσείσθησαν οἱ τηροῦντες καὶ ἐγενήθησαν ws νεκροί. Mary Magdalene returns. — Jerusalem. First Day of the Week. LuKkE XXIV. 1-3. Τῇ δὲ μιᾷ Τῶν 1 σαββάτων ὄρ- Marx XVI. 2-4. "Owe δὲ caB- 2 Barwv, τῇ ἐπι- ὅοην XX. 1, 2. Τῇ δὲ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων Ma- Καὶ λίαν πρωὶ 1 i Re ΕΡΑ TH μιᾷ τῶν σαβ- φωσκούσῃ εἰς βάτων ἔρχονται θρου βαθέως ἐπὶ pia. ἡ Μαγ- μίαν σαββάτων, ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα, τὸ μνῆμα ἦλθον δαληνὴ ἔρχεται ἦλθεν Μαριὰμ ἡ ἀνατείλαντος τοῦ φέρουσαι ἃ ἡτοί- πρωὶ σκοτίας ἔτι Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ 8 ἡλίου. καὶ ἔλες μασαν ἀρώματα. οὔσης εἰς τὸ μνη- ἡ ἄλλη Μαρία θεωρῆσαι τὸν τά- ov. γον πρὸς ἑαυτάς" id > , τίς ἀποκυλίσει ἡμῖν τὸν λίθον ἐκ τῆς θύρας τοῦ μεῖον, §§ 159-162.] MARK XVI. 4 μνημείου ; καὶ ἀναβλέψα- σαι θεωροῦσιν ὅτι ἀνακε- κύλισται 6 λίθος - ἣν γὰρ / / μέγας σφόδρα. \ al na ’ὔ 3 an TO σῶμα τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ. OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION, ETC. 185 LUKE XXIV. JOHN Xx. & 2 εὗρον δὲ τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυ- καὶ βλέ- > Ν a , A , 3 λισμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου, meu τὸν λίθον Hp- 5 fal Ν > Ὁ 72 > a 8 εἰσελθοῦσαι δὲ οὐχ εὗρον μένον ἐκ τοῦ μνη- / / > 2 μείου. τρέχει OVV καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς Σίμωνα Πέτρον καὶ πρὸς τὸν ἄλλον μαθητὴν ὃν ἐφίλει ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς, καὶ λέγει αὐ- “ > Ν ΄ - A 7 \ ΕἸ 4 na ewe τοις " Ὡρᾶν τον κυρίον €K του μνημειου, και OUK οἴδαμεν που ἔθηκαν αυτον. § 161. Vision of Angels in the Sepulchre. — Jerusalem. Marx XVI. 5-7. a a τ ὦ 5 Kat εἰσελθοῦσαι εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον ε- 4 First Day of the Week. URE ΟΝ 4.8. ὃ , 6 , 3 A ὃ 2 OV νεανίσκον καθήμενον EV τοις O€ECL- Marr. XXVIII. 5-7. ὅ ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ayye- λος εἶπεν ταῖς γυναι- giv: μὴ φοβεῖσθε ὑ- a 9S Ν 4 > μεῖς - οἶδα γὰρ ὅτι Ἴη- σοῦν τὸν ἐσταυρωμέ- 6 νον ζητεῖτε. οὐκ ἔστιν a > / , ὧδε: ἠγέρθη γάρ, Ka- θὼς εἶπεν - δεῦτε ἴδετε τὸν τόπον ὅπου ἔκειτο. 7 καὶ ταχὺ πορευθεῖσαι 7 εἴπατε τοῖς μαθηταῖς > a > / θ 3 Ν αὐτοῦ ὅτι ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ ἰδοὺ προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Ταλιλαίαν, ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν \ a! ὄψεσθε. ἰδοὺ εἶπον ὑ- μῖν. οἷς περιβεβλημένον στολὴν λευκήν, καὶ ἐξ- εθαμβήθησαν. ὃ δὲ λέ. yeu αὐταῖς - μὴ ἐκθαμ- βεῖσθε: τεῖτε τὸν Ναζαρηνὸν Ἰησοῦν ζη- τὸν ἐσταυρωμένον - ἡἦ- / 3 7 Αι γέρθη, οὐκ ἔστιν ὧδε: " ΕἸ ἐς ¢ 7 ide 6 τόπος ὅπου ἐθη- 4 καν αὐτόν. ἀλλὰ ὑπάγε- τε εἴπατε τοῖς μαθηταῖς > cal Ν a / αὑτοῦ καὶ τῷ [Πέτρῳ ΄ n OTL προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν: ἐκεῖ Ν ᾿, αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε, καθὼς > a εἶπεν ὑμῖν. ΄ / > Lo 8 μέρᾳ ἀναστῆναι. WES , 5» Cay BL) ian > Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἀπορεῖσθαι av- Ν τὰς περὶ τούτου, καὶ 3 a ΤῈΣ ’ὔ cA , ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο ἐπέστη- σαν αὐταῖς ἐν ἐσθῆτι ’ ἐμφό- Bov δὲ γενομένων αὖ- ἀστραπτούσῃ * τῶν καὶ κλινουσῶν τὸ πρόσωπα εἰς τὴν γῆν, εἶπαν πρὸς αὐτάς: τί ζητεῖτε τὸν ζῶντα μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν ; οὐκ ἔστιν ἀλλὰ ἠγέρθη. μνήσθητε ὡς ἐλάλη- ὧδε, ean + a > an σεν ὑμῖν ἔτι ὧν ἐν TH Γαλιλαίᾳ, | λέγων, τὸν εν A 39 ’ φ υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὅτι »" ἴω > δεῖ παραδοθῆναι εἰς χεῖρας μαρτωλῶν καὶ σταυρω- 5 ΤᾺ ε αν θρώπων a= A \ a , ε θῆναι και TY) TPLTY Y- \ και 3 ’ “ ε ᾿ 3 ~ ἐμνήσθησαν τῶν ῥημάτων αὐτοῦ, § 162. The Women return to the City. Jesus meets them. — Jerusalem. First Day of the Week. Marr. XXVIII. 8-10. 8 Kai ἀπελθοῦσαι ταχὺ ἀπὸ τοῦ 8 μνημείου μετὰ φόβου καὶ χαρᾶς με- Le. 24:3. Rev.mg. om D [West.] Rev.mg. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ NA BCLA vg cop; om D Treg.me. [τοῦ κυρίου]. | West.] 6 οὐκ ἔστιν ὧδε, ἀλλὰ ἠγέρθη ; Mt. 28 : 6. mg. Rey.txt. Marx XVI. 8. Kai ἐξελθοῦσαι ἔφυγον ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου: εἶχεν γὰρ αὐτὰς τρόμος ἔκειτο δὰ B 838 cop Rey.mg. ; add 6 κύριος AC DL A it vg [Treg.] West. \ 186 FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION [Part IX. MATT. XXVIII. MARK XVI. ,ὔ 3) -. 9 “- a ΑΝ \ > \ 3Qn > γάλης ἔδραμον ἀπαγγεῖλαι τοῖς pa- καὶ ἔκστασις, καὶ οὐδενὶ οὐδὲν εἶπον " θηταῖς αὐτοῦ. ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ. ἐᾷ δι Ν a ε ὔ 9 καὶ ἰδοὺ Τησοῦς ὑπήντη- > A NZ 4 , ε δὲ λθ a > , > a Ν "ὃ, Ν σεν αὐταῖς λέγων - χαίρετε. αἱ δὲ προσελθοῦσαι ἐκράτησαν αὐτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ 10 προσεκύνησαν αὐτῷ. τότε λέγει αὐταῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς - μὴ φοβεῖσθε: ὑπάγετε ἀπαγ- γείλατε τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου ἵνα ἀπέλθωσιν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ ἐκεῖ με ὄψονται. Luxe XXIV. 9-11. Ν e 72 3 Ν A / 5 "ς ’ὔ A a og A 9 καὶ ὑποστρέψασαι ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα ταῦτα τοῖς ἕνδεκα καὶ “- tas a τ X 10 πᾶσιν τοῖς λοιποῖς. ἦσαν δὲ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ Μαρία καὶ Ἰωάννα καὶ Μαρία 7 > , Cunard \ \ ᾿ a ” ᾿ \ 9 ΄ a \ 11 Ἰακώβου, καὶ ai λοιπαὶ σὺν αὐταῖς ἔλεγον πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ταῦτα. καὶ , Lal \ lal ἊΝ A“ r ἐφάνησαν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ λῆρος τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα, Kal ἠπίστουν αὐταῖς. § 163. Peter and John run to the Sepulchre. — Jerusalem. First Day of the Week. JOHN MONG 5). Ὁ: Ἔξῆλθεν οὖν ὁ Πέτρος καὶ ὃ ἄλλος μαθητής, καὶ ἤρχοντο εἰς TO μνημεῖον. ἔτρεχον δὲ οἱ δύο ὁμοῦ: καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς προέδραμεν τάχιον τοῦ Πέτρου καὶ ἦλθεν πρῶτος εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, ' καὶ παρακύψας βλέπει κείμενα τὰ ὀθόνια, 5 / > ηλθ 3, 3 πὰ / Θ᾿ ἴω > a Ἂν > n ov μέντοι εἰσῆλθεν. ἔρχεται οὖν Ξίμων Ilérpos ἀκολουθῶν αὐτῷ, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν μ ἢ PX μ p ἢ, καὶ εἰσῆ saa fk WwW > Ν a Ἂν θ aA AN 50 / / ! XN Ν ὃ / a Φ | Cel εἰς TO μνημεῖον, Kal θεωρεῖ τὰ ὀθόνια κείμενα, ' Kai TO σουδάριον, ὃ ἣν ἐπὶ τῆς a 3 ἴον 3 X lo 5 72 ΄ 5 Ν Ν > la 3 κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, οὐ μετὰ τῶν ὀθονίων κείμενον ἀλλὰ χωρὶς ἐντετυλιγμένον εἰς ω 7 / Ss Θὲ es Ν ε +” Ν ε 5» Ν a 5 Ν ἕνα τόπον. τότε οὖν εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ὃ ἄλλος μαθητὴς ὁ ἐλθὼν πρῶτος εἰς τὸ ο ; a 7 Ν 78 Ν > i“ @ ! 3 ὃ / ον 70 ἣν ,΄ μὲ ὃ -“ 9 ΜμῚ ἬἭμειον, και €LOEV καὶ ETLOTEVO EV OUVOETTW γὰρ NHoEoav TV γρα Ψ, OTL O€L FYI 2 -™ 3 a i ees Ss , Ν 3 Ν ε , 10 αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι. ἀπῆλθον οὖν πάλιν πρὸς αὐτοὺς οἱ μαθηταί. 8 164. Our Lord is seen by Mary Magdalene at the Sepulchre. — Jerusalem. First Day of the Week. JOHN XOX ΠΠ| 19 a / 7 ΄ ε Φν τὲ ΄ 11 Μαριὰμ δὲ εἱστήκει πρὸς τῷ μνημείῳ ἔξω κλαίουσα. ὡς οὖν ἔκλαιεν, παρέκυ- a an ΄, 3 , a 7, 7 ἧς 12 Wev εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, ' καὶ θεωρεῖ δύο ἀγγέλους ἐν λευκοῖς καθεζομένους, ἕνα πρὸς Ἁ lal a oo Ul ‘\ “ a? a 13 τῇ κεφαλῇ καὶ ἕνα πρὸς τοῖς ποσίν, ὅπου ἔκειτο TO σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ. λέγουσιν an an “-“ ΄ > Ν , ’ὔ ‘\ αὐτῇ ἐκεῖνοι - γύναι, τί κλαίεις ; λέγει αὐτοῖς OTL ἦραν TOV κύριόν μου, καὶ οὐκ "Ὁ ΔΝ > Α A > “a 14 olda ποῦ ἔθηκαν αὐτόν. ταῦτα εἰποῦ- Mark XVI. 9-11. i. ΄ n ” “ 9 [ΓΔναστὰς δὲ πρωὶ πρώτῃ σαββάτου τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα, καὶ οὐκ ἤδει ὅτι > , > Ν 3 , Ν “Ὁ σα ἐστράφη εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, καὶ θεωρεῖ Le. 24:9. ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου δὰ AB ἃ] vg_ in singulis hi fluctuant) [Treg.] [ West.] Rev. [West.] Rey.txt.; om D it® Rev.mg. txt. 12 om D itt Rev.mg. ; 6 δε Πέτρος ἀναστὰς Joh. 20:6. οὖν A D ete vg syrr [Treg. ἔδραμεν ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον, καὶ παρακύψας βλέπει mg.]; add καὶ Ne (om vy. 6, δὰ) BL 33 cop τὰ ὀθόνια μόνα, Kal ἀπῆλθεν πρὸς ἑαυτὸν (ave Treg.txt. West. Rev. τον) θαυμάζων τὸ γεγονός. SA B L it vg (sed [Mc. 16:9-20. om NB L (in L clausula. §§ 163-166.] UNTIL HIS ASCENSION. 187 MARK XVI. JOHN XX, cal ,ὔ > lal /, 3 ἐφάνη πρῶτον Μαρίᾳ τῇ Μαγδαληνῇ, 15 Ἰησοῦς ἐστίν. λέγει αὐτῇ Ἰησοῦς" ᾽, τ > ΄ ε x ΄ ΄ , , ΄ - ey 2 παρ᾽ ἧς ἐκβεβλήκει ἑπτὰ δαιμόνια. γύναι, τί κλαίεις ; τίνα ζητεῖς ; ἐκείνη δοκοῦσα ὅτι ὃ κηπουρός ἐστιν, λέγει ἈΝ ας .,) , > Ἁ 5 4 3 tp 3 ΄ A SF; > / 5 Ν x aes. αὐτῷ κύριε, εἰ σὺ ἐβάστασας αὐτόν, εἰπέ μοι ποῦ ἔθηκας αὐτόν, κἀγὼ αὐτὸν a? a , a , ne = 16 ἀρῶ. | λέγει αὐτῇ Ἰησοῦς - Μαριάμ. στραφεῖσα ἐκείνη λέγει αὐτῷ Ἕ βραϊστί: 17 ῥαββουνί, ὃ λέγεται διδάσκαλε. λέγει αὐτῇ Ἰησοῦς - μή μου ἅπτου: οὔπω γὰρ 9 ΄ N \ ΄, ΄ \ \ \ 3 , \ 3 N > ἀναβέβηκα πρὸς τὸν πατέρα" πορεύου δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφούς μου Kal εἰπὲ ad- τοῖς - ἀναβαίνω πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου πε Ve καὶ πατέρα ὑμῶν καὶ θεόν μου καὶ 10 [ἐκείνη πορευθεῖσα ἀπήγγειλεν τοῖς 18 θεὸν ὑμῶν. ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδα- > 3 nw / na Ν Ν 5 7 nan a a μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ γενομένοις πενθοῦσιν καὶ ληνὴ ἀγγέλλουσα τοῖς μαθηταῖς ὅτι “- \ ἴω > 11 κλαίουσιν. κἀκεῖνοι ἀκούσαντες OTL ἑώρακα τὸν κύριον, καὶ ταῦτα εἶπεν > ζῇ καὶ ἐθεάθη ὑπ’ αὐτῆς ἠπίστησαν. αὐτῇ ἢ καὶ ἐθεάθη ἧς 7) ησαν. ὑτῃ. 8 165. Report of the Watch. — Jerusalem. First Day of the Week. Marr. XX VIIET. 11-15. “ fal be , 1:1 = TIopevopévwy δὲ αὐτῶν, ἰδοὺ τινὲς τῆς κουστωδίας ἐλθόντες εἰς τὴν πόλιν 12 ἀνήγγειλαν τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν ἅπαντα τὰ γενόμενα. καὶ συναχθέντες μετὰ τῶν , , , ΄ > , ε ae a , πρεσβυτέρων συμβούλιόν τε λαβόντες ἀργύρια ἱκανὰ ἔδωκαν τοῖς στρατιώταις, NE " + 4 ¢ A) Ni 3 A ἊΣ ἐλθό 3, λ SEN CsA 13 ' λέγοντες " εἴπατε ὅτι οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ νυκτὸς ἐλθόντες ἔκλεψαν αὐτὸν ἡμῶν , τὶ A A \ A , ΡΥ a 14 κοιμωμένων. καὶ ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος, ἡμεῖς πείσομεν καὶ ὑμᾶς 5 / 4 ε ἊΣ /, 5 , 3 ’ ε 3 ye \ 15 ἀμερίμνους ποιήσομεν. οἱ δὲ λαβόντες ἀργύρια ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐδιδάχθησαν Kat ΄ a > a ἐφημίσθη 6 λόγος οὗτος παρὰ ᾿Ιουδαίοις μέχρι τῆς σήμερον. § 166. Our Lord is seen of Peter. Then by Two Disciples on the way to Emmaus. — Jerusalem. Emmaus. First Day of the Week. 1 Cor. XV. 5. Luxe XXIV. 13-35. ὅ --- ὠφθη Kynda, — 15. Kai ἰδοὺ δύο ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἦσαν πορευόμενοι εἰς κώμην Mark XVI. 12, 18. ἀπέχουσαν σταδίους ἑξήκοντα ἀπὸ 12 [Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα δυσὶν ἐξ αὐτῶν περι- 14 Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἢ ὄνομα Eppaors, ' καὶ πατοῦσιν ἐφανερώθη ἐν ἑτέρᾳ μορφῇ, αὐτοὶ ὡμίλουν πρὸς ἀλλήλους περὶ πορευομένοις εἰς ἀγρόν. πάντων τῶν συμβεβηκότων τούτων. 15 καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὁμιλεῖν αὐτοὺς καὶ 16 συνζητεῖν, καὶ αὐτὸς Ἰησοῦς ἐγγίσας συνεπορεύετο αὐτοῖς - οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐ- τῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν. brevier invenitur) codices apud Eusebium et Mt. 28:14. πείσομεν δὰ B33 West.; add Hieronymum Tisch. West.txt. Rev.mg.; add αὐτὸν AC DL Δ ἃ] it vg cop syrr [Treg.] AC D al itr! vg cop syrr Tren Aug al Treg. Rev. 15 ἐφημίσθη δὰ A 33 Or West. West.mg. Rey.txt.] mg.; διεφημίσθη A BC Ὁ Lal Treg. West. [Mc. 16: 10-12. Vide p. 186.] txt. Rey. 188 FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION [Part IX. LUKE XXIV. ’, ‘A = Ay Ν 17 Eizrev δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς - τίνες οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι, ods ἀντιβάλλετε πρὸς ἀλλήλους lal Ρ Ν 3 101 6 , 5 θ Ν δὲ Φ ee, Xr , 18 περιπατοῦντες ; Kal ἐστάθησαν σκυθρωποί. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἷς, ᾧ ὄνομα Κλεό- Ἂν ’ n ε Tas, εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν: σὺ μόνος παροικεῖς Ἱερουσαλὴμ καὶ οὐκ ἔγνως τὰ γενό- “- lal / uA \ f. lal cal 19 μενα ἐν αὐτῇ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις ; ' καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ποῖα; οἱ δὲ εἶπαν ὑτῷ - τὰ περὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Ναζαρηνοῦ, ὃς ἐγένετο ἀνὴρ προφήτης δυνατὸς ἐν ἔ αὐτῷ - τὰ περὶ Ἴη ρηνοῦ, ὃς ἐγ np προφήτης δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ , n Lal Ν \ ἴω “ “ 20 καὶ λόγῳ ἐναντίον τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ, ' ὅπως τε παρέδωκαν αὐτὸν οἱ n “ / Ἂν cal 21 ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ἡμῶν εἰς κρίμα θανάτου Kai ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν. ἡμεῖς Ψ,, lal 3 δὲ ἠλπίζομεν ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ μέλλων λυτροῦσθαι τὸν ᾿Ισραήλ- ἀλλά γε καὶ Ν a ΄ Ψ. , ε ,ὕ Ε > 49 Ὄ a ey 3 N Ay 22 σὺν πᾶσιν τούτοις τρίτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ἄγει ἀφ᾽ οὗ ταῦτα ἐγένετο. ἀλλὰ καὶ “- nr ld / “ γυναῖκές τινες ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξέστησαν ἡμᾶς, γενόμεναι ὀρθριναὶ ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον, ! ‘ \ ε a \ “ 3 lal HAO λέ Ν > 4 > aN ἐπὶ 23 ' καὶ μὴ εὐρουσαι τὸ σῶμα avTov ἢλθον λέγουσαι καὶ ὀπτασίαν ἄγγέλων Ewpa- ,ὔ ΠΥ / SN “ Ν > lal / cal \ ΓΕ, > ἣν Ἂς a 24 κέναι, ot λέγουσιν αὐτὸν ζῆν. καὶ ἀπῆλθόν tives τῶν σὺν ἡμῖν ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον, ἐπὶ “ N \ ose na > BN κ > > \ aN > 25 καὶ εὗρον οὕτως καθὼς καὶ ai γυναῖκες εἶπον, αὐτὸν δὲ οὐκ εἶδον. καὶ αὐτὸς εἷ- > ΄ \ A a A a e πεν πρὸς αὐτούς - ὦ ἀνόητοι καὶ βραδεῖς TH καρδίᾳ Tod πιστεύειν ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἴω cal lol δ fal 26 ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται. οὐχὶ ταῦτα ἔδει παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν Kal εἰσελθεῖν εἰς Ν I & 3 la) A 4 3 Ν ", Lg ws) Ν ΄ “ lal 27 τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ ; καὶ ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ Moicéws καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν διερμήνευσεν αὐτοῖς ἐν πάσαις ταῖς γραφαῖς τὰ περὶ ἑαυτοῦ. Κ Ape > Ν cA ὌΝ Es ’, \ > XN , ae 28 αἱ ἡγγισαν ELS τὴν κωώμὴν OV ἐπορεύοντο, καὶ αὑτὸς προσεποιήσατο πορρω- δ , “ > og 29 τέρω πορεύεσθαι" ' καὶ παρεβιάσαντο αὐτὸν λέγοντες" μεῖνον μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, ὅτι οἷ ε 3 ἊΝ Ν / Ν no Ἐν ἃ , x BSN 0 “a - Ν > πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστὶν Kal κέκλικεν ἤδη ἣ ἡμέρα. καὶ εἰσῆλθεν Tod μεῖναι σὺν av- a N GEST Ye: 3 πὴ n 2X 3 9 “ὦ Ν Ν + > ΄ 80 τοῖς. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ κατακλιθῆναι αὐτὸν μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, λαβὼν τὸν ἄρτον εὐλό- a “ " 81 γησεν καὶ κλάσας ἐπεδίδου αὐτοῖς - αὐτῶν δὲ διηνοίχθησαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί, καὶ ΕἸ 7, 3 ᾽ὔ Ν ΦΈΞΝ ΕἸ) 5 ΄ pel} tpi Ν > \ 39 , 82 ἐπέγνωσαν αὐτόν καὶ αὐτὸς ἄφαντος ἐγένετο az’ αὐτῶν. καὶ εἶπαν πρὸς ἀλλή- λ Ἡ gi WAN he Ou ε “ ’ὔ > > Reet ε ἐλάλ cn 5 δδῶ ε ὃ ous: οὐχὶ ἣ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἣν ἐν ἡμῖν, ὡς ἐλάλει ἡμῖν ἐν τῇ δδῷ, ὡς δὲ- “ Ν / ἤνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς γραφάς; Καὶ a ΄ San ao ὑπέστρειψα: 5» Ἵ ο αλή αἱ e 70 33 αἱ ἀναστάντες αὐτῇ TH ὥρᾳ ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἱερουσαλήμ, καὶ εὗρον ἠθροι- Η A 9 ” 34 σμένους τοὺς ἕνδεκα καὶ τοὺς σὺν avrois,' λέγοντας ὅτι ὄντως ἠγέρθη ὃ κύριος Ν 35 καὶ ὥφθη Σίμωνι. καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐξη- MARK XVI. γοῦντο τὰ ἐν TH ὁδῷ καὶ ὡς ἐγνώσθη > lal 3 / 39 , “ > a“ > Lal ,ὔ a om 13 [κἀκεῖνοι ἀπελθόντες ἀπήγγειλαν τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου. λοιποῖς - οὐδὲ ἐκείνοις ἐπίστευσαν. | § 167. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas being absent. —~ Jerusalem. Evening following the First Day of the Week. Marx XVI. 14-18. 1 Cor. XV. 5. JoHn XX. 19-23. 1{ [Ὕστερον δὲ dvaxe- ὅ — ἔπειτα τοῖς δώδεκα. 19 Οὔσης οὖν ὀψίας τῇ μένοις αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἕν- ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ τῇ μιᾷ Le. 24:24. καθὼς καὶ δ A L Δ al cop; [Mc. 16:14. Vide p.186.] δὲ A D cop om καὶ Β D it vg Treg. West. Rey. Treg.txt. [West.] Rev.; om C L Δ vg 1 Cor. 15:5. ἔπειτα δὲ A 17 Treg.mg. [Treg.mg.] | ἐγηγερμένον Ο D L it vg cop West.mg.; εἶτα B De al cop Treg.txt. Treg.txt. Rev.; add ἐκ νεκρῶν A Οὗ A West.txt. Rev. ; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα D* al. ['Treg.mg.] [ West.]. §§ 166, 167.] MARK XVI. δεκα ἐφανερώθη, καὶ ὠνείδισεν τὴν ἀπιστίαν 36 αὐτῶν καὶ σκληροκαρ- δίαν, ὅτι τοῖς θεασαμέ- yous αὐτὸν ἐγηγερμένον Ταῦτα δὲ αὐτῶν λα- λοῦντων αὐτὸς ἔστη ἐν / Φι- FE A Ν μέσῳ αὐτῶν. ταὶ διὰ UNTIL HIS ASCENSION. 189 Luxe XXIV. 36-49. JOHN XX. σαββάτων, Kal τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων μι > e ὅπου ἦσαν οἱ μαθη- τὸν φόβον τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, ἦλθεν ὃ 3 A ee 3 Ν , Τησοῦς καὶ ἔστη εἰς TO μέσον, -“ / 3 a καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - εἰρήνη ὑμῖν. ΟΝ 2 ουκ ἐπίστευσαν.] LUKE XXIV. , A la) Ν > 37 38 Πτοηθέντες δὲ καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενόμενοι ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν. καὶ elev a \ Ν ’, > oe αὐτοῖς - τί τεταραγμένοι ἐστέ, καὶ διατί διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσιν ἐν τῇ Kap- i“ ea - Ν 89 δίᾳ ὑμῶν ; ἴδετε τὰς χεῖράς μου καὶ τοὺς πόδας μου, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι αὐτός" TORN ant ‘\ A > ἈΝ 53," Ν Lal 20 καὶ TOUVTO εἰπὼν ἔδειξεν τὰς χειρας ἐχάρησαν / / ey μὴ a ψηλαφήσατέ pe καὶ ἴδετε, ὅτι πνεῦμα x > “Ὁ σάρκας καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει καθὼς ἐμὲ καὶ τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῖς. iy ν 38 7 ΝΣ ΄ 41 θεωρεῖτε ἔχοντα. ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούν- οὖν ot μαθηταὶ ἰδόντες τὸν κύριον. των αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς καὶ θαυμα- An > / > a > 4, 42 ζόντων, εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἔχετέ τι βρώσιμον ἐνθάδε ; | οἱ δὲ ἐπέδωκαν αὐτῷ ἰχθύος 3 a ΄ Ν Ν ΘΛ 2A 4 43 ὀπτοῦ μέρος - Kat λαβὼν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ἔφαγεν. a) Stns EY BN Ν 44 Ἐἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς - οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι μου, ods ἐλάλησα πρὸς ὑμᾶς ETL ὧν σὺν a 7 Lal a “ / - / Ἂν ὑμῖν, ὅτι δεῖ πληρωθῆναι πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωύσέως καὶ προ- εφήταις καὶ ψαλμοῖς περὶ ἐμοῦ. 45 46 big σ΄ » al \ Ν We) a 3 “ A , ὅτι οὕτως γέγραπται παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν καὶ ἀναστῆναι ἐκ νεκρῶν τῇ τρίτῃ re ΄, ΑἹ εἴας Ν a a / Ν ’, Ν 53 > A Tore διήνοιξεν αὐτῶν τὸν νοῦν Tod συνιέναι τὰς ypadas,' καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 47 ἡμέρᾳ, ' καὶ κηρυχθῆναι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνό ὑτοῦ ἵνοιαν εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμέρᾳ, ηρυχθῆναι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ μετάν εἰς μαρ 48 εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ Ἱερουσαλήμ. ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες τούτων. MARK XVI. LUKE XXIV. JOHN XX. Ν εν ἊΝ, 3 a , 15 [καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - πο- 49 κἀγὼ ἐξαποστέλλωτὴν 21 εἴπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς πά- Z > Ἂς ΔΛ ρευθέντες εἰς τὸν κό- , σμον ἅπαντα κηρύξατε ‘\ > / / ~ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον πάσῃ TH ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ πατρός 249 Leo! ες -" μου eb ὑμᾶς ὑμεῖς cal / δὲ καθίσατε ἐν TH πό- Aw: εἰρήνη ὑμῖν" κα- ἃς. > ΄ ’ ε θὼς ἀπέσταλκέν με ὃ πατήρ, κἀγὼ πέμπω v= λει ἕως οὗ ἐνδύσησθε μᾶς. ἐξ ὕψους δύναμιν. 16 κτίσει. 6 πιστεύσας καὶ βαπτισθεὶς σωθή- σεται, ὃ δὲ ἀπιστήσας ͵ὔ a \ a , ΕἸ , A > Cote I A 4 17 κατακριθήσεται. σημεῖα δὲ τοῖς πιστεύσασιν ἀκολουθήσει ταῦτα: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί 18 ὃ 4 3 x a ΄ / 1 Ay IS: a ᾿ς ” > A μου δαιμόνια ἐκβαλοῦσιν, γλώσσαις λαλήσουσιν, |! καὶ ἐν τοῖς χερσὶν ὄφεις ἀροῦ- Le. 24:36. ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν. D it®; add καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς " εἰρήνη ὑμῖν, (cf. Joh. 20: 19) S A BL Δ al cop syrr Treg. [West.] Rev. 40 Totum versum om D it® Rey. mg.; Kal τοῦτο εἰπὼν ἔδειξεν (ἐπέδειξεν A al) αὐτοῖς Tas χεῖρας Kal τοὺς πόδας (cf. Joh. 20: 20) 8 A Β L veg cop syrr [Treg.] [West.] Rey. txt. 42 μέρος SA BDL; add καὶ ἀπὸ μελισ- σίου κηρίου E Δ al it vg syrr [Treg.] West.mg. Rey.mg. 47 cis ἄφεσιν δὰ B cop Rey. mg.; καὶ ἄφεσιν ACD 1, Aal it vg Treg. West.mg. Rev.mg. 47, 48 ἔθνη, ἀρξά- μενοι ἀπὸ Ἱερουσαλήμ. ὑμεῖς Treg. West.txt. Rev.txt.; ἔθνη - apt. ἃ. Ἱερουσαλὴμ ὑμεῖς West.mg. Rey.mg. 49 κἀγὼ δὰ D L 33 vg cop; καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ A BC D al Treg. West. Rev. [Mc. 16: 15-18. Vide p. 186.] Mec. 16:17. καιναῖς A D al it vg syrr; 190 FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION [Part IX. MARK XVI. A , , , 3 Ν 3 Ν ὧν ἊΝ ere) ΄ a > σιν, Kav θανάσιμόν τι πίωσιν, οὐ μὴ αὐτοὺς βλάψῃ - ἐπὶ ἀρρώστους χείρας ἐπι- θήσουσιν, καὶ καλῶς ἕξουσιν. JOHN XX. ites 2223 Kai τοῦτο εἰπὼν ἐνεφύσησεν καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς - λάβετε πνεῦμα ἅγιον. ἄν an ’ Lal a τινων ἀφῆτε τὰς ἁμαρτίας, ἀφέωνται αὑτοῖς - av τινων κρατῆτε, κεκράτηνται. 8 168. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas being present. — Jerusalem. Evening following the First Day of the Week next after the Resurrection. JOHN XX. 24-29, A rn > g 24 QOwpas δὲ cis ἐκ τῶν δώδεκα, ὃ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος, οὐκ ἦν per’ αὐτῶν ὅτε HA- 25 θεν ᾿Ιησοῦς. | ἔλεγον οὖν αὐτῷ οἱ ἄλλοι μαθηταί: ἑωράκαμεν τὸν κύριον. ὃ δὲ > > lal Ν Ἄν 4 > a Ν > a Ἂ ΄ an ca \ 7 εἶπεν αὐτοῖς - ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων καὶ βάλω Ν 4 > Ἂν ,ὔ lal σ Ν , Ἂν; “ » ἣν: μου τὸν δάκτυλον εἰς τὸν τόπον τῶν ἥλων καὶ βάλω μου τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὴν πλευ- ρὰν αὐτοῦ, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω. > fal Ν a 26 ΚΚαὶ μεθ᾽ ἡμέρας ὀκτὼ πάλιν ἦσαν ἔσω ot μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ Θωμᾶς μετ᾽ αὖ- ra > nw “-“ an τῶν. ἔρχεται ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων, Kal ἔστη εἰς TO μέσον Kal εἷ- , a s -“ a Ν ἣν. e 27 πεν" εἰρήνη ὑμῖν. εἶτα λέγει TH Owpa- φέρε Tov δάκτυλόν σου ὧδε καὶ ἴδε τὰς a rd Ν ’ ‘ “- , ἣν 2 ΕἸ Ν ’ Ν Ἂς , χεῖράς pov, καὶ φέρε τὴν χεῖρά σου καὶ βάλε εἰς THY πλευράν μου, καὶ μὴ γίνου 28 ἄπιστος ἀλλὰ πιστός. ἀπεκρίθη Θωμᾶς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὃ κύριός μου καὶ 6 29 θ ἣν λ , 5 ae A ἴω Δ Ψ rang / , Ν , c Ν εὖς μου. έγει αὐτῷ ὃ Ἰησοῦς - ὅτι ἑώρακάς με, πεπίστευκας - μακάριοι OL μὴ ἰδόντες καὶ πιστεύσαντες. § 169. The Apostles go away into Galilee. Jesus shows himself to Seven of them at the Sea of Tiberias. — Galilee. Martr. XXVIII. 16. JOHN XXI. 1-24. 16 Οἱ δὲ ἕνδεκα μαθηταὶ ἐπορεύθησαν 1 Mera ταῦτα ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτὸν > ‘ ’ 7 3 “ ἴω cal a an eis τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, --- πάλιν Ἰησοῦς τοῖς μαθηταῖς ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης τῆς Τιβεριάδος - ἐφανέρω- 2 σεν δὲ οὕτως. ἦσαν ὁμοῦ Σίμων Πέτρος καὶ Θωμᾶς ὃ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος καὶ Ναθαναὴλ 6 ἀπὸ Kava τῆς Γαλιλαίας καὶ οἱ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου καὶ ἄλλοι ἐκ τῶν 3 μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ δύο. ᾿ λέγει αὐτοῖς Σίμων Πέτρος - ὑπάγω ἁλιεύειν. λέγουσιν ΒΕ ae ak ὅμεθ Ne a Ν ἐς ἐέξηλθ Ne Chae > ὁ πλοῖ ie αὐτῷ ἐρχόμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς σὺν σοί. ἐξῆλθον καὶ ἐνέβησαν εἰς TO πλοῖον, καὶ ἐν > , lal a , > ΄ :} Ν AN / μὴ > na a aX Ν 4 ἐκείνῃ τῇ νυκτὶ ἐπίασαν οὐδέν. πρωΐας δὲ ἤδη γινομένης ἔστη ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐπὶ τὸν > ΄ > ΄ 4 ε , 3 > la , a > a> 5 αἰγιαλόν - ov μέντοι ἥδεισαν οἱ μαθηταὶ ore Ἴησους ἐστίν. λέγει οὖν αὐτοῖς Ty- Led 6 ὃ , / “ my > (6 > ae Ἂ ! Dv ’ 3 a“ . 6 σοῦς - παιδία, μή TL προσφάγιον ἔχετε; ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ - οὔ. έγει αὐτοῖς aN > Ν ὃ €,% / a ΄, \ δί Ν Cee μὲ ry xd ‘ βάλετε cis τὰ δεξιὰ μέρη τοῦ πλοίου τὸ δίκτυον, Kal εὑρήσετε. ἔβαλον οὖν, καὶ ΤΡ, IN: ie , ” rN “a ΄ lal > , 4 ἫΝ < Ν 7 οὐκέτι αὐτὸ ἑλκύσαι ἴσχυον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλήθους τῶν ἰχθύων. λέγει οὖν ὃ μαθητὴς om Οὗ, A cop [Treg.mg.] West.mg. Rev. txt. West. Rev. 29 πεπίστευκα: " Treg. meg. Rev.txt.; πεπίστευκας ; West. Rey.mg. Joh. 20:25. τόπον A it’ vg syrr Treg. Joh. 21:6. λέγει S* οὐδοῦ vg cop; 6 δὲ mg.; τύπον Ne (N* var.) BDL 33 cop Treg. εἶπεν N* ABCD LAal Treg. West. Rev. §§ 167-169. ] UNTIL HIS ASCENSION. 191 JOHN XXI. > A Α ’ , Φ ἐκεῖνος ὃν ἠγάπα ὃ Ἰησοῦς τῷ Ἱέτρῳ 6 κύριός ἐστιν. Σίμων οὖν Πέτρος, 3 , Ld ε ’, ἐς 3 Ν 3 , , > Ν / NS ἀκούσας ὅτι ὃ κύριός ἐστιν, τὸν ἐπενδύτην διεζώσατο, ἢν yap γυμνός, καὶ ἔβαλεν Ν a , πὰ 8 ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι μαθηταὶ τῷ πλοιαρίῳ ἦλθον, οὐ γὰρ lal a lal / ἦσαν μακρὰν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἀλλὰ ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων, σύροντες τὸ δίκτυον lal > , ε μὰ 3 , > ‘ a , > ΝΣ ΄ Ἁ 9 τῶν ἰχθύων. ὡς οὖν ἀπέβησαν εἰς τὴν γῆν, βλέπουσιν ἀνθρακιὰν κειμένην καὶ > 4 3 , NS: / > a“ e > a Cie af? ὑὸς νας al 3 10 ὀψάριον ἐπικείμενον καὶ ἄρτον. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς - ἐνέγκατε ἀπὸ τῶν ὀψα- - A“ 7 ‘ 11 ρίων ὧν ἐπιάσατε viv. ἀνέβη Σίμων Πέτρος καὶ εἵλκυσεν τὸ δίκτυον εἰς τὴν “ 5, γῆν μεστὸν ἰχθύων μεγάλων ἑκατὸν πεντήκοντα τριῶν - καί τοσούτων ὄντων Ξ > A A , \ 12 οὐκ ἐσχίσθη τὸ δίκτυον. 'Aéyet αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς - δεῦτε ἀριστήσατε. οὐδεὶς δὲ 5 , lal “ fc ἮΝ » , ΝᾺ / 53 5 7 Ψ c , / > 3, 18 ἐτόλμα τῶν μαθητῶν ἐξετάσαι αὐτόν - σὺ τίς εἶ ; εἰδότες ὅτι ὃ κύριός ἐστιν. ἐρ- > cal Ν ’, Ν + Ν EN] M3 “ \ Ν > 4 ε / χεται Inoois καὶ λαμβάνει τὸν ἄρτον καὶ δίδωσιν αὐτοῖς, Kal TO ὀψάριον ὁμοίως. a + , 3 , 3 “- a a > Ν > na 14 τοῦτο ἤδη τρίτον ἐφανερώθη ᾿Ιησοῦς τοῖς μαθηταῖς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν. Af a Sie δ ΄ “ ΄ δ ἘΠ a / 3 / > 15 “Ore οὖν ἠρίστησαν, λέγει τῷ Σίμωνι Πέτρῳ 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς - Σίμων ᾿Ιωάννου, aya- a r , , ἷ Χ , See \ ΄ \ τὸ 7 ΧΩ N , πᾷς με πλέον τούτων; λέγει αὐτῷ ναὶ κύριε, σὺ οἶδας ὅτι φιλῶ σε. λέγει 16 αὐτῷ: βύσκε τὰ ἀρνία μου. λέγει αὐτῷ πάλιν dev ε Σίμων ᾿Ιωάννου, ἀγα- ὑτῷ τὰ ἀρνία μου. λέγει αὐτῷ πάλιν δεύτερον ίμων ᾿Ιωάννου, ἀγ “ Ne L αὐτῶ- t κύρι Ν ἰὸ μή λῶ λέ 9A = ΐμαινε πᾷς με; λέγει αὐτῷ ναὶ κύριε, σὺ οἶδας ὅτι φιλῶ σε. λέγει αὐτῷ - ποίμαιν , a “ , 17 τὰ προβάτιά pov. | λέγει αὐτῷ τὸ τρίτον - Σίμων Ἰωάννου, φιλεῖς pe; ἐλυπήθη ε Π , Ψ > ἀν ome , Ν x ~ \ ΧΩ sire ΄ \ , ὃ Ierpos ὅτι εἶπεν αὐτῷ τὸ τρίτον" φιλεῖς με; καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ - κύριε, TV πάντα μὰ Ν Ἁ δώ la 3 cee Ν / ΄ ΤΠ ΞΕΕΝ 18 οἶδας, σὺ γινώσκεις ὅτι φιλῶ σε. λέγει αὐτῷ - βόσκε τὰ προβάτιά μου. | ἀμὴν Ἢ / Lg > A / Lid + ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, ὅτε ἧς νεώτερος, ἐζώννυες σεαυτὸν Kal περιεπάτεις ὅπου ἤθελες " μὲ ΄ a a 3 μή ὅταν δὲ γηράσῃς, ἐκτενεῖς τὰς χεῖράς σου, καὶ ἄλλος σε ζώσει καὶ οἴσει ὅπου / lal 19 οὐ θέλεις. | τοῦτο δὲ εἶπεν, σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ δοξάσει τὸν θεόν. καὶ τοῦτο eS LA bP al > , εἰπὼν λέγει αὐτῷ - ἀκολούθει μοι. Ἰησοῦς ἀκολου- > \ ip 5 20 ‘Emotpadeis ὃ Ilétpos βλέπει τὸν μαθητὴν ὃν ἠγάπα ὃ A ay ἊΝ fal n A > θοῦντα, ὃς Kal ἀνέπεσεν ἐν τῷ δείπνῳ ἐπὶ τὸ στῆθος αὐτοῦ καὶ εἶπεν - κύριε, τίς ε οὐ ἃ A > > A a 21 ἐστιν ὃ παραδιδούς σε; ' τοῦτον οὖν ἰδὼν 6 ἹΤέτρος λέγει τῷ “Inood: κύριε, οὗ- ’ / ane > lal Ν 22 ros δὲ τί; | λέγει αὐτῷ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς 3 , cal ο 28 σέ; σύ μοι ἀκολούθει. ἐξῆλθεν οὖν οὗτος ὃ λόγος εἰς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς ὅτι ὁ μα- θητὴς ἐκεῖνος οὐκ ἀποθνήσκει καὶ οὐκ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνή- > > aN STEIN / , ῳ 3 σκει, ἀλλ᾽ - ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι. Οὗ Ἄς os ε θ a ε κ \ , \ , a Ων ΤᾺ 24 bros ἐστιν ὃ μαθητὴς ὃ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων καὶ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδα- i a μεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς αὐτοῦ ἡ μαρτυρία ἐστίν. § 170. Jesus meets the Apostles and above five hundred Brethren on ἃ Mountain in Galilee. Marr. XXVIII. 16-20. ‘A 35, eo 16 — , , Exeta ὥφθη ἐπάνω πεντακοσίοις > A Q7 a a 17 ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν προσεκύ- ἀδελφοῖς ἐφάπαξ, ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες + Joh. 21:11. ἀνέβη A D A al vg; add οὖν SBC L 33 cop Treg.txt. et [mg.] West. Rev. 16 προβάτιά B C Treg.mg.; πρό- Bard S ADA al Treg.txt. West.ng. Rey. 17 λέγει sc δὲ A D 33 Treg.mg.; εἶπεν B C Δ ἃ] cop Treg.txt. West. Rev. | λέγει αὐτῷ tr δὲ D vg cop; add ὁ Ἰησοῦς A A Rev. ; add Ἰησοῦς B C syrr [Treg.| West. 23 καὶ οὐκ εἶπεν A Ὁ al vg Treg.me. ; οὐκ εἶπεν δὲ SBC 33 Or Treg.txt. West. Rev. | ἔρχομαι N* 1 Qre 12, add tf(om D) πρὸς σέ δὲ A B Ο Ὁ A al itP! vg cop syrr Treg. West. Rev. 192 FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION [Part IX. MATT. XXVIII. 1 COR. XV. / 18 νησαν, οἱ δὲ ἐδίστασαν. Kal προσελ- μένουσιν ἕως ἄρτι, τινὲς δὲ ἐκοιμή- Ν δὰ be, a sh W ae 3 ln) fe θὼν ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς λέ- θησαν. 3 7 a > ΄, > 3 γων - ἐδόθη μοι πᾶσα ἐξουσία ἐν οὐ- 19 ρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς. πορευθέντες μαθητεύσα Ἵ ὰ ἔθ f ὺ pave γῆς. ρ ς μαθητεύσατε πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, βαπτίζοντες av- \ \ 4 “~ \ lal Lal 20 τοὺς εἰς TO ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ TOD υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος, | διδάσκον- 3 ἂν “ / 7 5 aX / ε a” ΝΥ io Ν ree > ε lal ee τες αὐτοὺς τηρεῖν πάντα ὅσα ἐνετειλάμην ὑμῖν. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἰμὶ / 7 ~”A an “ πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας ἕως τῆς συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος. § 171. Our Lord is seen of James; then of all the Apostles. — Jerusalem. I Cons KV. 7. ΕἾ » 3 ,ὔ » “ na ἔπειτα ὥφθη ᾿Ιακώβῳ, ἔπειτα τοῖς ἀποστόλοις πᾶσιν. J Acts I. 3-8. τ Ν Ψ ε Ν lot ‘\ Ἂν a SEEN > a , 3 —ois καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρί- οις, Ov ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς καὶ λέγων τὰ περὶ τῆς βασι- 4 λείας τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ συναλιζόμενος παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων μὴ ΄ 6 ἀλλὰ , Ν 2 if ἴω \ aA > ΄ / ! ν 5 χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ περιμένειν τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ πατρὸς ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου - | ὅτι Ἷ / Ἂν 3 / vO ε a δὲ > 4 7 ε Nd > ὠάννης μὲν ἐβάπτισεν ὕδατι, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐν πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε ἁγίῳ ov μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας. Οἱ Ν > rE , 3 , ΘΙ ΒΑ, 4 , 3 > “Ὁ / ’ 6 υ μεν ουν συνε OVTES ρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες * KUpleé, εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τουτῳ «1 :) θ ΄ Ν δ , a? / ! i) Ν > ΄ 3 CN > Ν ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ ; | εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς - οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστὶν lal ᾿ς \ Ν ay ε a 8 γνῶναι χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς ovs ὃ πατὴρ ἔθετο ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ, | ἀλλὰ λήμψεσθε ,ὔ aA ὡς i δύναμιν ἐπελθόντος TOD ἁγίου πνεύματος ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες ἔν ε by A ,ὔ a> Arg “Ὁ lol te lepovoaAnp καὶ ἐν πάσῃ TH ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ Kat Sapapia καὶ ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς. § 172. The Ascension. — [Mount of Olives. ] Luke XXIV. 50-53. 50 ἨἨξήγαγεν δέ αὐτοὺς ἕως πρὸς Βηθανίαν, καὶ ἐπάρας τὰς χεῖρας αὖ- Marx XVI. 19, 20. Acts I. 9-12. a 3 / 3 ΄ τοῦ εὐλόγησεν αὐτούς. 19 [Ὃ μὲν οὖν κύριος Ἴη- 51 καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ εὖ. 9 Kal ταῦτα εἰπὼν βλε- a Ἂς Ν lel n 3 ἣν 5 Ἂς / 3 Lal > , covs μετὰ TO λαλῆσαι λογεῖν αὐτὸν αὐτοὺς πόντων αὐτῶν ἐπήρθη, lal , lal /, αὐτοῖς ἀνελήμφθη εἰς διέστη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν. καὶ νεφέλη ὑπέλαβεν Ν 3 Ν \ eA 28 3) a 2 4. τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐκά- αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλ- 3 CA A A Sen Ne > θισεν ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ 10 μων αὕτων. Kal ὡς a- “ 3 θεοῦ. τενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν πορευομένου av- cal Ν 3 ‘\ 4 , , > tas > Tov, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο παρειστήκεισαν αὐτοῖς ἐν 11 ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς, ' ot καὶ εἶπαν - ἄνδρες Ταλιλαῖ- Mt. 28:19. πορευθέντες NA al; add ον ([Mc. 16:19, 20. Videp.186.] 19 Ἰησοῦς B A133 vg syrr [Treg.] West. Rev.; νῦν D. C*L A 1383 2P¢ vg cop syrr; om A C8 al 1 Cor. 15:7. ἔπειτα S* A117 Treg.mg. [Treg.mg.] [West.] West.mg.; εἶτα 8° B D al Treg.txt. West. Le. 24:51. dm αὐτῶν S* D ἴδ; add καὶ txt. Rev. ἀνεφέρετο εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν SC ABC 1, Δ αἱ §§ 171-173.] UNTIL HIS RESURRECTION. 193 ACTS I. , Ν /, Se eo) cal ε, Ὁ Ν οι, τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν ; οὗτος ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς ὃ ἀναλημφθεὶς ad’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν οὕτως ἐλεύσεται ὃν τρόπον ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον ; LUKE XXIV. εἰς TOV οὐρανόν. , 52 καὶ av- 12 Τότε ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς ‘Tepovoadipp Ν ε ra 5 « Ν Ν > Ν μὲ ἴω [4 5 “ τοὶ ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἱερουσαλὴμ, μετὰ ἀπὸ ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου ἐλαιῶνος, a με Ἂς ε ἣν 53 χαρᾶς μεγάλης, ' καὶ ἦσαν διαπαντὸς ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἱερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου A a a , ” ear ἐν TO ἱερῷ αἰνοῦντες τὸν θεόν. ἔχον ὁδόν. MARK XVI. 20 [ἐκεῖνοι δὲ ἐξελθόντες ἐκήρυξαν πανταχοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου συνεργοῦντος καὶ τὸν λό- γον βεβαιοῦντος διᾶ τῶν ἐπακολουθούντων σημείων. | § 173. Conclusion of John’s Gospel. [See John 21 : 25, in critical note. | JoHN XX. 30, 31. “-“ (2h ’ lal 80 Πολλὰ μὲν οὖν καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα ἐποίησεν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐνώπιον τῶν μαθητῶν, a 3 4 , > a v4 ΄ ᾿ ἴω Ν / 9 , 31 ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται ἵνα πιστεύ- “ 2 bye) ε Ace Ded cen a 6 a \¢ ΄ \ ” ητε ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὃ Χριστὸς ὃ vids τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ ἵνα πιστεύοντες ζωὴν ἔχητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ. vg syrr al Treg. [West.] Rev. 52 αὐτοὶ Joh. 21:25. om N*; add Ἔστιν δὲ καὶ D it®; add προσκυνήσαντες αὐτὸν (om vg) SN ἄλλα πολλὰ & (ὅσα A D al) ἐποίησεν 6 In- AB Cal vg al Treg. [West.] Rev. gous, ἅτινα ἐὰν γράφηται καθ᾽ ἕν, οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸν 53 αἰνοῦντες Dit? cop Treg.mg. West.mg.; οἶμαι τὸν κόσμον χωρήσειν (χωρῆσαι A C2 D εὐλογοῦντες δ Β C* L Treg.mg. West.txt. al it vg) τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία δα A BCD Rey. ; aiv. καὶ εὐλ. A C? Δ ἃ] vg syrr; [aiv. rell Treg. West. Rev. καὶ] Treg.txt. [Mc. 16:20. Vide p. 186.] 13 ων tially ny i) [γι γν i { i ξ : eek) Ai Ἰώ. ἫΝ Vee G spin } “ὦ r 4 ! Ln ᾿ 1] a ; yi a af ; ’ hia Ss * ey ἮΝ ἥ a ᾿ Ἁ ᾿ : J A i P ; Fs 5 1 ) Σ ; ι ᾿ i ‘ ἐν" i a t , Mat. a, ᾿ Ὶ ἢ . \ ‘ Ξ ‘ y [ ᾿ . \ iA ‘i δ 5 " : | εν ( wir " ᾿ i ’ ὶ ‘ r . . ‘ , } : ' NOTES ON THE HARMONY OF THE FOUR GOSPELS. INTRODUCTION. Tue following Notes relate chiefly to questions which arise as to the mode and order of harmonizing the narratives of the four Evangelists, and touch only incidentally upon other topics. They do not claim, in any sense, to be a Commentary on the Gospels. In the Gospels we have four different narratives of the life and teachings of our Lord, by as many different and independent historians. The narrative of John, except during the week of the Saviour’s passion, contains very little that is found in either of the other writers. That of Luke, although in its first part and at the close it has much in common with Matthew and Mark, comprises nevertheless in the middle portions a large amount of matter peculiar to Luke alone. Matthew and Mark have in general more resemblance to each other ; though Matthew, being more full, presents much that is not found in Mark or Luke, while Mark, though briefer, has some things not contained in any of the rest. The Evangelists were led, under the guidance of the Spirit, to write each with a specific object in view, and for different communities or classes of readers. Hence while the narratives all necessarily exhibit a certain degree of likeness, they also bear each for itself the stamp of independence. The four writers vary likewise in their chronological order and character. On the one hand, it appears that Mark and John, who have little matter in common, follow with few exceptions the regular and true sequence of the events and transactions recorded by them; as is further noted below, at the close of this Introduction. On the other hand, Matthew and Luke manifestly have sometimes not so much had regard to the regular order of time as they have been guided by the principle of association ; so that, in them, transac- tions having certain relations to each other are not seldom grouped together, though they may have happened at different times and in various places. Yet along with these many diversities, the Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke have nevertheless a striking affinity with each other in their general features of time and place. When, however, they are compared with John’s Gospel, there is seen to be a diversity no less striking between them and the latter, not only in respect to the chronology, but likewise as to the part of the « 196 INTRODUCTION. country where our Lord’s discourses and mighty works mainly occurred. Matthew, Mark, and Luke speak only of one Passover, that at which Jesus suffered ; and from this it would follow that our Lord’s ministry continued at most only about six months. John expressly enumerates three Passovers, and probably four, during Christ’s ministry ; which therefore must have had a duration of at least two and a half years, and more probably of three and a half. Again, Matthew, Mark, and Luke place the scene of Jesus’ public min- istrations chiefly in Galilee; whence he goes up to Jerusalem only just before his death. John, on the other hand, narrates mainly such miracles and dis- courses of our Lord as occurred at Jerusalem, on various former occasions as well as at his last visit. The difficulty arising from the first of these differences is at once set aside by the remark, that although the three Evangelists do expressly mention only one Passover, yet they do not anywhere, nor in any way, affirm, or even imply, that there were no more ; while the testimony of John is express and definite. And further, the incident, narrated by all the three writers, of the disciples plucking ripe ears of grain as they went through the fields necessarily pre- supposes the recent occurrence of a Passover during our Lord’s ministry, different from the one at which he suffered. See Matt. 12:1; Mark 2: 23; Luke 6:1. See also the Notes on δὲ 25, 37. [It is difficult to defend the received reading in Luke, and what it means is virtually unknown; but clearly the incident occurred in early summer, or spring, and this involves the ac- ceptance of a Passover not mentioned by these three writers. | This difference being thus satisfactorily explained, the existence of the sec- ond difference is of course accounted for. If John is right in enumerating several Passovers, he is right in narrating what took place at Jerusalem on those occasions. But, more than this, we find in the other Evangelists several things in which they too seem to allude to earlier visits and labors of Jesus in the Holy City. So the language in which our Lord laments over Jerusalem, as having rejected his efforts, Matt. 23: 37; Luke 13: 34. So too the mention of Scribes and Pharisees from Jerusalem, who seek to catch him in his words, Matt. 4: 25; 15:1; and, further, his intimate relations with the family of Lazarus, Luke 10: 38, 39; comp. John 11: 1, 2. For these reasons, I do not hesitate to follow, with most commentators, the chronology of John’s Gospel, and assign to our Lord’s ministry four Passovers, or a duration of three and a half years. The second of these Passovers, which is less certain than the rest, and depends on the interpretation of John 5: 1, will be considered in its place; see Note on ὃ 36. [On the various the- ories of the length of our Lord’s ministry, see the added note at the beginning of Part III.] In view of the same circumstances, it follows also that the Gospel of John is and was intended to be supplementary to the others; and, generally speak- ing, narrates only such facts and events as had not been recorded by the other Evangelists. This, too, is everywhere manifest on the pages of the Harmony, since up to the last week of our Lord’s life the language of John is in only a single instance parallel with that of the other Gospels; namely, in the ac- INTRODUCTION. 101 count of the feeding of the five thousand and the accompanying incidents. See §$ 64, 65. The Gospels, and especially the first three, can in no sense be regarded as methodical annals. It is therefore difficult, and perhaps impossible, so to har- monize them, in respect to time, as in all cases to arrive at results which shall be entirely certain and satisfactory. There is often no definite note of time; and then we can proceed only upon conjecture, founded on a careful compar- ison of all the circumstances. In such cases, the decision must depend very much upon the judgment and taste of the harmonist ; and what to one person may appear probable and appropriate may seem less so to another. It is the aim of the present work, not so much to ascertain and fix the true and precise chronological order (although this object is not neglected) as to place side by side the different narratives of the same events, in an order which may be regarded as at least a probable one. In so doing I may hope to exhibit the legitimate uses of a Harmony, and accomplish a threefold pur- pose, viz. to make the Evangelists their own best interpreters ; to show how wonderfully they are supplemental to each other in minute as well as impor- tant particulars ; and in this way to bring out fully and clearly the funda- mental characteristic of their testimony, UNITY IN DIVERSITY. [See note below. | In the arrangement of the Harmony, made solely according to the probable sequence of the events and without assigning any preference to the order of either Evangelist, this unexpected result has been brought out, namely, that the order of both Mark and John remains everywhere undisturbed, with the excep- tion of four short passages in Mark and of three in John; in all which cases the reasons for a change of order are obvious. See Mark 2: 15-22, in 8 58; Mark 6: 17-20, in ὃ 24; Mark 14: 27-31, in § 186; Mark 14: 66-72, in 8144. Also John 12: 2-8, in ὃ 131; John 18 : 25-27, in § 144; John 20: 30, 31, in ὃ 173. Besides these there are merely a few slight transpositions of single verses for the sake of closer parallelism ; e. g. in §§ 112, 142, 153, ete. [The deviations from the chronological order in Mark may be reduced to two. Mark 6: 17-20, may bé a repetition ; Mark 14: 27-31 is by many referred to a second prediction of Peter’s denial, while 66-72 points to what was going on during the trial of Jesus. But if, as seems very probable, John (12: 2-8) narrates the Anointing at Bethany in regular order, Mark 14 : 3-9 must con- stitute another deviation. In John the deviations indicated above scarcely de- serve the name, if the first passage is in chronological position. If there was an informal trial before Annas, John 18 : 25-27 follows verse 24, and John 20: 30, 31 is merely a comment of the Evangelist. | So little indeed was such a result anticipated that it was not even noticed until several months after the work was first published. ON THE RELATION OF THE GOSPELS TO EACH OTHER. By the Editor. [I. The independence of the Gospels is rightly assumed in the above Intro- duction. Since it was first published few topics have been more fully dis- cussed than that of the origin of the Gospels. No solution of the problem 198 INTRODUCTION. seems more satisfactory than that which maintains entire independence on the part of the four Evangelists, no one of them using the work of any other, and no two deriving any considerable amount of common matter from a written source. In the case of the fourth Gospel we may admit that the Apostle John was aware of the contents of the three other narratives, but find no traces of any use of them. It is supplementary in fact, but not in form, and not neces- sarily in purpose. ‘The three other Gospels, which tell of the Galilean minis- try and proceed on « common outline (synopsis), are called synoptical Gos- pels, or more briefly Synopties, their authors being termed the Synoptists. The similarity in outline and the correspondence in matter have suggested many and various theories of the origin of the Synoptics, which cannot be even enu- merated here, still less discussed. ‘The theory we hold to be most probable not only agrees with that assumed by Dr. Robinson, but bears directly upon the legitimate purpose of a Harmony. The existence of so much common matter in the Synoptics we regard as due to the form which the story of our Lord’s life took in the earliest preaching of the gospel. Such preaching nec- essarily preceded all our Gospels. It naturally took settled, yet not unvaried, form. The age was one when the memory was cultivated, the Jews being re- markably retentive of verbal forms. The first disciples would especially treas- ure up with reverence the words of our Lord. Hence the greatest correspon- dence is in the sayings recorded in the Gospels. Whatever of divine inspira- tion was needed to give truthfulness and authority our Lord had promised. It by no means follows that the oral teaching, above referred to, included all that could be known, or that has been accurately preserved ; the preface to Luke’s Gospel implies the contrary. There is no reason for seeking in this common matter a more correct and authoritative history than that presented in the four canonical Gospels. We append some reasons for the acceptance of the theory of independence : — (1.) The books themselves give every evidence of independence. The variations are not verbally exact in any passages of considerable length, while the divergences cannot be satisfactorily accounted for on the theory that any one borrowed matter from another, or that any two derived the common mat- ter from one written document. Careful and repeated comparisons of the sections treating of the same occurrences justify the above statement. (2.) If one borrowed from another we might expect evidence of priority in the case of the Gospel thus used. But there is no conclusive proof on this point. The Fathers place Matthew first, but internal evidence most point- edly opposes the view that Mark borrowed from Matthew. ‘The reference in Acts 1:1 to Luke’s Gospel as a “former treatise” has led some scholars to assign the earliest place to the latter. (3.) The theories which deny independence are so various, and indeed so contradictory to each other, as to warrant the gravest suspicion in regard to the correctness of the method on which they proceed. No kind of evidence is so untrustworthy as that employed by the advocates of these theories, and the same phenomena lead different critics to diametrically opposed results. For a compact statement of the theories, see Schaff, History of the Christian Church, new ed., i. 607-612. ἢ INTRODUCTION. 199 II. The common matter in the Synoptics has been estimated in many ways, some of them yielding no valuable results. A count of words gives no idea of the correspondences and divergences, or of the proportion of narrative and discourse. A comparison by sections fails to indicate the extent of variation in language. Moreover, all but the more recent comparisons are incorrect, owing to the inaccuracy of the so-called Received Text. The general results are as follows :— (1.) The three synoptic Gospels have less than one half of their matter in common, estimated by sections; Mark, however, having but two sections that are peculiar. (2.) In these parallel sections verbal divergences are so numerous that more than one half of the words used in the three Gospels are peculiar to one or the other Evangelist, and the proportion of coincidences in all three is small. Schaff estimates the coincidences: Matthew, one word in seven ; Mark, two in nine; Luke, one in eight; adding that one half of Mark is found in Matthew, one fourth of Luke in Matthew, one third of Mark in Luke. Yet the exact correspondence is far less than this. (3.) The proportion of passages verbally coincident in two or more Gos- pels is estimated by Norton ( Genuineness of the Gospels) at one sixth in Mat- thew and Mark, one tenth in Luke. (Probably the text of the earlier uncials would yield a still smaller proportion.) He notices that the agreement is greater in discourses reported, especially those of our Lord, and the diver- gences more marked in the narrative portions. These results confirm the independence of the synoptic Gospels. See Schaff, as above; Archbishop Thomson (in Smith’s Bible Dictionary and Speaker's Commentary) ; Stroud, Harmony ; and Rushkrooke, Synopticon. III. The independence of the Gospels is an argument in support of their historical truthfulness. ‘The tendency to harmonize has introduced many minor corruptions into the Greek text; happily we now have sufficient author- ities to remove them. This edition of the Harmony presents many more divergences than the earlier ones; but thus many new shades of thought are suggested. Above all, the peculiarities of the several Evangelists are pre- served. The most minute matters of style can be of literary importance ; and in the record of our Lord’s life we cannot be satisfied with anything short of the highest attainable accuracy. (The Revised Version has this as its crowning merit, that it presents to the English reader better than any other known version the coincidences and divergences of the Gospel narratives.) Bishop Ellicott correctly says (Life of Christ, p. 31), “There is no one thing which the long roll of harmonies and histories, extending from the days of Tatian to our own, teach us more distinctly than this, that no true picture of the earthly life of our Redeemer can ever be realized, unless by God’s grace we learn both to feel and to appreciate the striking individuality of the four Gospels in their portraiture of the life of Christ, and are prepared to estimate duly their peculiar and fore-ordered characteristics.” | 200 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part 1. PART 1. EVENTS CONNECTED WITH THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. §§ 1-18. § 1. The short Preface of Mark and the longer one of John do not be- long here, but in Part II. They both include a reference to the preaching of John the Baptist, but none at all to the infancy of Jesus. § 2. The vision of Zacharias is assumed by some as having occurred on the great day of Atonement, the tenth of the seventh month. But on that day the high-priest himself officiated, entering into the holy of holies; Lev. 16: 3, 29, 82-34. Zacharias was an ordinary priest of the class of Abijah, one of the twenty-four classes instituted by David for the serviee of the temple, which relieved each other in succession every Sabbath; see 1 Chr. 24: 3-19; 2 Chr. 8:14. Josephus, Ant., vii. 14, § 7. Their service included the daily burning of incense on the altar of incense in the first or outer sanctuary, and this was what Zacharias was now doing; Lukel: 9; Ex. 30: 6-8; 1 Chr. 23: 13. — It follows that no inference whatever can hence be drawn as to the year, or season of the year, when the vision took place. Nor is it said how long a time elapsed between the vision and Elizabeth’s conception; the expression μετὰ δὲ ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας in v. 24 being quite indefinite. Yet, in all probabil- ity, no very long interval had intervened. [The course of Abijah was the eighth class. Since each class served for a week in the temple, an effort has been made to fix the time of year by counting back from the destruction of Jerusalem. This occurred on the ninth day of the month Ab, and the first class (that of Jehoiarib) was then in waiting. But each course served twice in the year; hence a definite calculation is impossible. | § 3. The sixth month here refers back, not to the vision, but to the concep- tion of Elizabeth; see v. 36. § 4. The conjecture of Reland is probably correct, namely, that Ἰούδα in ν. 39 is a softened form for ᾿Ιούτα, Heb. MO or ΓΙΪΩΝ, i. 6. Jutah or Juttah, a city of the priests in the mountains of Judah, south of Hebron; Josh. 15: 55; 21:16. [There is no positive evidence in support of the view of Reland, not even a manuscript variation. It is now generally rejected. The traditional site of the home of Zacharias is a village about four miles west of Jerusalem, now called ’Ain Karim (Thomson, Zhe Land and the Book). Lightfoot, Ewald, and others suppose that the place was Hebron, a priestly city, “in the hill country of Judah” (Josh. 21:11). ‘The question is still an open one, though not of great importance. | § 6. Mary remained with Elizabeth about three months, or nearly until the full time of the latter, and then returned to Nazareth; Luke 1: 56. It was after this and after the birth of John, when Mary was now in her fourth or fifth month, and her pregnancy had become perceptible, that Joseph was minded to put her away. § 7. The precise year of our Lord’s birth is uncertain. Several data exist, 451-711 THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. 201 however, by which an approximation may be made, sufficiently accurate to show that our present Christian era is not entirely correct. The present Christian era, which was fixed by the abbot Dionysius Ex- iguus in the sixth century, assumes the year of Christ’s birth as coincident with a. τ. 754. It will appear from what follows that this our common era begins in any case more than four years too late; that is, from four to five years, at the least, and more probably from six to seven years, after the actual birth of Christ. This era was first used in historical works by the Venerable Bede, early in the eighth century, and was not long after introduced in pub- lic transactions by the Frank kings Pepin and Charlemagne. [The Dionysian era is reckoned from the Incarnation, which was identified with the miraculous conception, and not from the Nativity. It fixed the date of the latter as December 25, a. Ὁ. 1a. vu. 754. This is four years and nine or ten months after the death of Herod (see below). Much confusion results from the employment of two eras, especially since we must reckon both backward and forward from the Dionysian era. More- over, the numbers are ordinal, not cardinal, and rarely represent the full measure of the year which is mentioned. In changing from the Roman era to the Dionysian, the following rule is convenient: The swm of the dates a. u. and B, Cc. must always =754; the difference of the dates A. U. and A. Ὁ. =753. For example :— AL. 748 749 750 751 752 753 784 755 756 757....780.. 783 mone 4 Οὃϑ8ὃ..2 71 (wD) 1 2 8. 4 .... 27.-. BO If our Lord was born near the close of B. c. ὅ and died a. p. 30 (the usual dates), then the length of his life was only thirty-three years and a few months, since each date represents a fractional part of a year. | 1. According to Matt. 2: 1-6, Jesus was born during the lifetime of Herod the Great, and not long before his death. Herod died in the year of Rome (A. τ.) 750, just before the Passover ; see Jos., Ant., xvii. 8, 8.1 ; ib. xvii. 9,88. This has been verified by calculating the eclipse of the moon, which happened just before his death ; Jos., Ant., xvii. 6, $4; Wurm in Bengel’s Ar- chiv, I. p. 26; Ideler, Handb. der Chronol., 11. p. 391 sq. If now we make an allowance of time for the purification, the visit of the Magi, the flight into Egypt, and the remaining there till Herod was dead (for all which not less than six months can well be required), it follows that the birth of Christ can- not in any case be fixed later than the autumn of a. uv. 749. [On the time of year, see below. ]— The casual mention of this eclipse by Josephus, the only one noticed in all his writings, is of the very highest importance in respect. to chronology and history; since by determining the death of Herod it fixes also the time after which our Lord’s birth could not have taken place, and thus so far corrects the error made by later chronologists in respect to the commence- ment of the Christian era. It appears also from astronomical calculation that during that year (A. τ΄. 750) there was no other eclipse of the moon visible at Jerusalem ; and during the next year none at all. Ideler, 1. ο. 2. Another note of time occurs in Luke 3:1, 2, where John the Baptist is said to have entered upon his ministry in the fifteenth year of Tiberius; and 202 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part I. again in Luke 3: 23, where Jesus is said to have been “about thirty years of age” at his baptism. [Here the A. V. is misleading. The R. V. prop- erly renders: “ And Jesus himself, when he began to teach, was about thirty years of age.”| Now if both John and Jesus, as is quite probable, entered upon their ministry at the age of thirty, in accordance with the Levitical cus- tom (Num. 4: ὃ, 35, 39, 43, 47), by reckoning back thirty years we may as- certain the year of John’s birth, and of course also that of Jesus. Augustus died August 29, a. u. 767, and was succeeded by Tiberius, who had already been associated with him in the government for at least two years, and proba- bly three. If now we reckon from the death of Augustus, the fifteenth year of Tiberius commenced August 29, a. τ΄. 781; and going back thirty years, we find that John must have been born not earlier than August, A. τ. 751, and our Lord, of course, not earlier than A. τ. 752; a result disagreeing with that obtained from Matthew by three years. If, on the other hand, we reckon from the time when Tiberius was admitted as co-regent of the empire, which is shown to have been certainly as early as A. τ. 765, and probably in A. Uv. 764, then the fifteenth year of Tiberius began in a. τ. 778; and it follows that John may have been born in A. τ. 748, and our Lord in a. vu. 749. In this way the results obtained from Matthew and Luke are more nearly coin-— cident. [But the phrase ‘“‘ about thirty years of age” permits an earlier date on either theory.| The early Fathers, Irenzeus, Tertullian, Clement of Alex- andria, as also Eusebius and Epiphanius, accord in placing the birth of Christ near the end of A. u. 751 or at the beginning of A. vu. 752. Their different computations appear to rest on Luke 38:1, 2. See Ideler, 1. c., IL p. 385 sq. [ The fifteenth year of the joint reign covers a. τ΄. 779, and if John began at thirty years of age the date of the baptism may be in January, A. τ. 780. But the data here are not sufficient of themselves to determine the time. | 3. A third note of time is derived from John 2, 20, “ Forty and six years was this temple in building.” Josephus says, in one place, that Herod began to build the temple in the eighteenth year of his reign, while in another he specifies the fifteenth year; Ant., xv.11,§1; B.J,i. 21,§1. He also assigns the length of Herod’s reign at thirty-seven or thirty-four years, according as he reckons from his appointment by the Romans, or from the death of Antigonus ; Ant., xvii. 8,§ 1; Δ. J, i. 88, ὃ 8. Herod was first declared king of Judea in A. U. 714; Jos., Ant., xiv. 14, §§ 4,5; B. J. i. 14,§4; comp. Ant., xiv. 16, § 4; Ideler, Handb. der Chronol., 11. p. 390. Hence the eighteenth year of his reign, when Herod began to rebuild the temple, would coincide with A. τὶ. 732; and our Lord’s first Passover, in the forty-seventh year following, would fall in a. vu. 779. Tf now our Lord at that time was thirty and a half years of age, as is probable, this would carry back the year of his birth to the autumn of A. τ. 748. [This note of time enables us only to say that our Lord could not have been born later than the beginning of A. τ. 750, though it renders an earlier date probable. | 4. Further, according to a tradition preserved by the Latin Fathers of the first five centuries, our Lord’s death took place during the consulate of the two Gemini, C. Rubellius and C. Fufius; that is, in a. u. 782. So Tertullian, rT.) THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. 203 Lactantius, Augustine, etc. See Tertull., Adv. Jud., § 8; Augustine, De Civ. Dei, XVIII. 54. If now the duration of his ministry was three and a half years, then, as before, the year of his birth would be carried back to the au- tumn of A. vu. 748. Comp. Ideler, 1. c, 11. p. 413 sq. [The date of our Lord’s death is more probably a. τ. 783. In that year the loth of Nisan (assuming that our Lord died on that day) fell on a Friday. Tertullian’s statement is incorrect in other points. Those who make the ministry but two years in length (see beginning of Part 114.) and accept the 14th of Nisan (see Introductory Note, Part VIII.) as the day of the crucifixion, give the preference to a. τ. 782. With either theory there js no difficulty in accept- ing A. τ. 749 as the year of the Nativity. ] 5. Some modern writers, taking as the basis of their computation the cen- sus in Luke 2: 1, have fixed upon the latter part of the year a. τ. 747, as the time when our Lord was born. ‘Tertullian says: ‘* Census constat actos sub Augusto in Juda per Sentium Saturninum,” 6. Marcion, 4.19. We know that Sentius was proconsul of Syria from a. vu. 744 till a. τ΄. 748. With this accords the tradition in some of the Fathers, that the child Jesus remained at least two years in Egypt; and this, it is said, is strengthened by the διετής of Matt. 2:16. According to this view, Christ was about two and a half years old at Herod’s death. So Sanclemente, De vulgaris re emenda- tione, lib. 1V., Rom. 1793, fol. Comp. Ideler, ]. c., II. p. 394 sq. [** Tertullian stands quite alone in this statement, and is at variance not only with St. Luke, but with many of the early writers, and is not here to be credited.” (Andrews, Life of Our Lord, p. 3). Luke 2: 2 seems to point to a date near the death of Herod. It is correctly rendered (R. V.): “ This was the first enrolment made when Quirinius was governor of Syria.” This statement implies a sec- ond enrolment under the same person, and to the latter Luke refers, in Acts 5: 37. The date of the second was Α. ἢ. 6 or 7, about ten years after the ‘death of Herod. (For other renderings of this passage in Luke, see the com- mentaries.) ‘The full name of the governor is P. Sulpicius Quirinius (not Quirinus, as many English writers still hold). ‘ Cyrenius” (A. V.) is merely a transfer of the Greek form into English with the Latin termination. He was in Africa in A. τ΄. 747, afterwards, as seems quite certain, in the East. It is probable, but by no means clearly established, that he was governor of Syria, for the first time, from a. τ. 750 to 753, succeeding Quintilius Varus, who certainly held the office from A. vu. 748 to 750, The two more probable explanations are: (1) that he was charged with the carrying out of this en- rolment, and therefore loosely spoken of as “ governor.” ‘The Evangelists apply the same term to Pilate, whose office was not identical. (2.) That Quirinius became governor in A. τ΄. 750 and completed the enrolment which had been begun some time before, and over which he may have had some superintendence from the first; that Luke connects it with him for these reasons, and in order to make the distinction from the second one. The question is not yet solved, but we may assume Luke’s accuracy, until there is better evidence against it. It will be noticed that (1) points to a later date than a. τ. 747, and that (2) renders probable a date near to the death of 204 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH Part I.] Herod. See Andrews, pp. 2-6; Schaff, History, I. pp. 121-125, new ed., Wieseler, Chronol. Synopse; A. W. Zumpt, Dass Geburtsjahr Christi ; also, for the literature, Schiirer, V. Testam. Zeitgeschichte. | 6. More definitely still is the same year, A. U. 747, fixed upon as the date of Christ’s birth, by those who regard the star tn the east as having been the conjunction of the planets Jupiter and Saturn. ‘This idea was first proposed by the celebrated Kepler. The appearance and reappearance of that star were coincident with the birth of aJesus ; and it is known, by the most exact astronomical calculation, that in this very year, A. τ. 747, these two planets were twice in conjunction, in the sign of the fish. The first time was on the 20th of May, when they were visible in the east before sunrise; the second time, on the 27th of October, when they were visible at midnight in the south. They were so near each other, that to the unaided eye they would appear as a single star. See Ideler, Handb. der Chronol., 11. p. 399 sq., 406 sq. — This so- lution of the difficult question before us is certainly recommended by sim- plicity, definiteness, and a scientific basis; and it is also supported by the con- siderations presented above in No. 5. It is further favored, perhaps, by the ready explanation which it affords of the difficulties connected with the ac- count of that star in the narrative of the Evangclist. [The calculations of Kepler have been verified and extended in recent years, but can scarcely be said to yield certain chronological data. The time of departure and the length of the journey of the magi are altogether uncertain. Moreover, in February and March, A. vu. 748, Mars was added to the planetary cluster, and this may have led them to go to Judea. The command to slay all chil- dren in Bethlehem “from two years old and under ” (Matt. 2: 16) might indi- cate an interval of some time between the appearance of the star and the arrival of the magi. McClellan (ew Test.), who accepts December 25, A. τ. 749, as the date of the Nativity, finds in the conjunction of the planets a pre- monition coinciding with the conception of John the Baptist (Oct., 748). Kepler tells of a new and transitory star, which appeared near the planets in Oct., 1604, and a similar phenomenon may have occurred in A. vu. 748 or 749. See Smith’s Bible Dictionary, article “Star of the Wise Men,” by Pritchard, also Andrews, Life of Our Lord, pp. 9-138. From all these data it would appear, that while our Lord’s birth cannot have taken place later than a. vu. 749, it probably occurred one or two years earlier. [ Most recent writers incline to a date between the middle of a. uv. 749 and February, A. τ. 750. | In respect to the time of the year when Jesus was born, there is still less certainty. John the Baptist would seem to have entered upon his ministry in the spring ; perhaps when the multitudes were collected in Jerusalem at the Passover. The crowds which followed him imply that it was not winter. The baptism of Jesus in the Jordan, probably six months later, would then have occurred in autumn. It could not well have been in the winter; nor does a winter seem to have intervened. If now we may assume, as is most probable, that John entered on his office when he had completed his thirtieth 88. 7-10.] THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. 205 year, then the time of his birth was also the spring; and that of our Lord, six months later, was the autumn. Archbishop Newcome, referring to Lard- ‘ner, has the following remark: “ Jesus was born, says Lardner, between the middle of August and the middle of November, A. τ. 748 or 749. We will take the mean time, October 1. See Lardner’s Works, Vol. I. pp. 370, 372, Lond. 1835. — There is, on this point, no valid tradition. According to the earliest accounts, the sixth of January, or Epiphany, was celebrated by the oriental church, in the third and fourth centuries, as the festival of the birth and baptism of Jesus; Cassian, Collat., X.c.2. In the occidental church, after the middle of the fourth century, the twenty-fifth of December (Christ- mas) began to be kept as the festival of Christ’s nativity ; this day having been fixed upon, partly at least, as being the then current winter solstice. Thus, as late as the time of Leo the Great (ob. 461), there were many in Rome, “quibus hee dies solemnitatis nostra’ non tam de nativitate Christi, quam de novi, ut dicunt, solis ortu, honorabilis videatur.” Leon. Magn., Serm., XXI.c. 6; Gieseler, Kirchengesch., I. p. 575. The observance of this latter festival (Christmas) spread into the East; while that of the Epiphany, as the baptis- mal day, was adopted in the West. [Here we are without any other data than the probable time required for the events narrated as occurring between the birth of Christ and the death of Herod, in the early spring of a. vu. 750. Dr. Robinson (under 1) intimates that not less than six months were required. Forty days intervened before the presentation in the temple; but this is the only definite mark of time. The fact that the shepherds were pasturing their flocks in the field (Luke 2:8) has been used against the traditional date. But as they were near Beth- lehem, and not in some remote pasturing ground, the argument is not conclu- sive. Andrews deems it most probable that it was near the end of the year. October or November would meet all the conditions. ] See, generally, Lardner’s Works, Vol. I., Book II. 3, p. 356 sq., Lond. 1835; Gieseler, Kirchengesch., I. p. 62, p. 575, 3te Ausg. For the literature, see Hase, Leben Jesu, §§ 34, 35, 2te Aufl. [The most convenient schedule of dates is as follows : — Birth of John the Baptist, between April and June,. a. vu. 749 = Β. 6. 5. Birth of Jesus, between October and December, . A. vu. 749 ΞξΞ Β. ο. 5. Baptism of Jesus, January (?), : : : 2 YAS Ὁ: ΨΘΟΈΞΞ ae ete Crucifixion, April 7, 5 : : Δ ὰ χ99-Ξ-ν D. οὐ ἢ § 10. The visit of the Magi at Bethlehem naturally follows the presentation in the temple; since, after the jealousy of Herod had been once roused, this public presentation could not well have taken place. On the star seen by the Magi, see Note on § 7, No. 6. Joseph and Mary return from Jerusalem to Bethlehem, distant five English miles, where they had now been detained for nearly two months. Luke indeed does not allude to this return (2: 389) ; but neither does he mention the flight into Egypt. [ Moreover, after such gifts from the Magi Mary would scarcely have pre- sented the offering of poverty (comp. Lev. 12:8). It seems more likely that the child would first receive the homage of believing Israelites, then the repre- 206 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part I. sentatives of the Gentile world. The traditional date of the adoration of the Magi (Jan. 6), places that event only thirteen days after the Nativity and thus twenty-seven days before the presentation. This interval is too long. | § 13. The genealogy in Luke is inverted, for the sake of more convenient comparison. I. In the genealogy given by: Matthew, considered by itself, some difficul- ties present themselves. 1. There is some diversity among commentators in making out the three divisions, each of fourteen generations, v. 17. It is, however, obvious, that the first division begins with Abraham and ends with David. But does the second begin with David, or with Solomon? Assuredly with the former ; be- cause, just as the first begins ἀπὸ ’ABpadpu, so the second also is said to begin ἀπὸ Δαυίδ. The first extends ἕως Δαυΐδ, and includes him; the second extends ἕως τῆς μετοικεσίας, t. 6. to an epoch and not to a person; and therefore the persons who are mentioned as coeval with this epoch (ἐπὶ τῆς μετοικεσίας, V. 11), are not reckoned before it. After the epoch the enumeration begins again with Jechoniah, and ends with Jesus. In this way the three divisions are made out thus [the spelling of the R. V. is substituted in all cases of variation] :— 1. Abraham. 1. David. 1. Jechoniah. 2. Isaac. 2. Solomon. 2. [Shealtiel. ] 3. Jacob. 3. [Rehoboam. } 3. [Zerubbabel. ] 4. Judah. 4. [ Abijah. ] 4. Abiud. d. [ Perez. ] ὃ. Αϑ8. 5. Eliakim. 6. [ Hezron. | 6. [ Jehoshaphat. } 6. Azor. 7. [ Ram. | 7. Joram. 7. Sadoe. 8. [ Amminadab. ] 8. Uzziah (Ozias). 8. Achim. 9. [ Nahshon. ] 9. Jotham. 9. Eliud. 10. Salmon. 10. Ahaz. 10. Eleazar. 11. Boaz. 11. Hezekiah. 11. Matthan. 12. Obed. 12. Manasseh. 12. Jacob. 13. Jesse. 13. Amon. 135. Joseph. 14. David. 14. Josiah. 14. Jesus. 2. Another difficulty arises from the fact, that between Joram and Ozias, in v. 8, three names of Jewish kings are omitted, viz. Ahaziah, Joash, and Ama- ziah; see 2 K. 8:25 and 2 Chr. 22:1; 2-K. 11:2, 21, and 2 Chr ὩΣ τ Ὁ K. 12:21; 14:1 and 2 Chr. 24:27. Further, between Josiah and Jechoniah in v. 11, the name of Jehoiakim is also omitted; 2 K. 23:54; 2 Chr. 36:4; comp. 1 Chr. 8:15, 16. If these four names are to be reckoned, then the sec- ond division, instead of fourteen generations, will contain eighteen, in contradic- tion to v. 17. To avoid this difficulty, Newcome and some others have regarded v. 17 as a mere gloss, “a marginal note taken into the text.” This indeed is in itself possible ; yet all the external testimony of manuscripts and versions is in favor of the genuineness of that verse. [Such critical conjectures, in the presence of so many authorities, are now regarded as unwarrantable.| It is better, therefore, to regard these names as having been customarily omitted in the current genealogical tables, from which Matthew copied. Such omis- § 13.] THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. 207 sions of particular generations did sometimes actually occur, “ propterea quod male essent et impiz,” according to R. Sal. Jarchi; see Jarchi on Gen. c. 11, c. 16; Surenhus., Βίθλ. Καταλλ., p.97; Lightfoot, Hor. Heb. in Matt.1: 8. A striking example of an omission of this kind, apparently without any such rea- son, is found in Ezra 7: 1-5 compared with 1 Chr.6: 38-15. This latter pas- sage contains the lineal descent of the high-priests from Aaron to the captivity ; while Ezra, in the place cited, in tracing back his own genealogy through the very same line of descent, omits at least six generations. A similar omission is necessarily implied in the genealogy of David, as given Ruth 4: 20-22; 1 Chr. 2: 10-12; Matt. 1: 5,6. [Fotr generations, only are reckoned during a period of four hundred and fifty years. | We may therefore rest in the necessary conclusion, that as our Lord’s regu- lar descent from David was always asserted, and was never denied, even by the Jews; so Matthew, in tracing this admitted descent, appealed to genea- logical tables, which were public and acknowledged in the family and tribe from which Christ sprang. He could not indeed do otherwise. How much stress was laid by the Jews upon lineage in general, and how much care and attention were bestowed upon such tables, is well known. See Lightfoot, Hor. Heb. in Matt. 1: 1. In the N. T. comp. also Phil. 3:4, 5. 11. Other questions of some difficulty present themselves, when we com- pare together the two genealogies. 1. Both tables at first view purport to give the lineage of our Lord through Joseph. But Joseph cannot have been the son by natural descent of both Jacob and Heli (Eli), Matt. 1:16; Luke 3:25. Only one of the tables, therefore, can give his true lineage by generation. This is done apparently in that of Matthew; because, beginning at Abraham, it proceeds by natural descent, as we know from history, until after the exile; and then continues on in the same mode of expression until Joseph. Here the phrase is changed ; and it is no longer Joseph who “ begat” Jesus, but Joseph “the husband of Mary, of whom was born Jesus who is called the Christ.” See Augustine, De Consensu Evangel., 11. 5. 2. To whom, then, doés the genealogy in Luke chiefly relate? If in any way to Joseph, as the language purports, then it must be because he in some way bore the legal relation of son to Heli, either by adoption or by marriage. If the former simply, it is difficult to comprehend, why, along with his true personal lineage as traced by Matthew up through the royal line of Jewish kings to David, there should be given also another subordinate genealogy, not personally his own, and running back through a different and inferior line to the same great ancestor. If, on the other hand, as is most probable, this rela- tion to Heli came by marriage with his daughter, so that Joseph was truly his son-in-law (comp. Ruth 1: 8, 11, 12); then it follows, that the genealogy in Luke is in fact that of Mary the mother of Jesus. This being so, we can per- ceive a sufficient reason why this genealogy should be thus given, namely, in order to show definitely that Jesus was in the most full and perfect sense a de- scendant of David; not only by law in the royal line of kings through his reputed father, but also in fact by direct personal descent through his mother. 208 THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. [Part I. [The correct order in Luke 3: 23 is: dy vids ὡς ἐνομίζετο Ἰωσήφ, which the R. V. renders “being the son (as was supposed) of Joseph.” In itself, “ as was supposed ” would be a curious introduction to a genealogy of Joseph. More- over, the article is inserted in Greek before every name in the genealogy and not before that of Joseph. The simplest explanation of the passage is that of Andrews: “ Jesus, generally, but erroneously, supposed to be the son of Jo- seph, was the son of Heli,” etc. The name of Mary is omitted, since the de- tails respecting the miraculous conception had been so fully given by Luke, and it was not usual to insert female names. ‘There is an incidental confirma- tion of this view in the Talmud, where Mary is called the daughter of Heli. ] That Mary, like Joseph, was a descendant of David, is not indeed else- where expressly said in the New Testament. Yet a very strong presumption to that effect is to be drawn from the address of the angel in Luke 1: 32; as also from the language of Luke 2: 5, where Joseph, as one of the posterity of David, is said to have gone up to Bethlehem, ἀπογράψασθαι σὺν Μαριὰμ κτλ. to enrol himself with Mary his espoused wife. The ground and circumstances of Mary’s enrolment must obviously have been the same as in the case of Jo- seph himself. Whether all this arose from her having been an only child and heiress, as some suppose, so that she was espoused to Joseph in accordance with Num. 36: 8, 9, it is not necessary here to inquire. See Michaelis, Mosa- isches Recht, Engl. Commentaries on the Laws of Moses, Part II. § 78. It is indeed objected, that it was not customary among the Jews to trace back descent through the female line, that is, on the mother’s side. There are, however, exampies to show that this was sometimes done; and in the case of Jesus, as we have seen, there was a sufficient reason for it. Thus in 1 Chr. 2: 22, Jair is enumerated among the posterity of Judah by regular de- scent. But the grandfather of Jair had married the daughter of Machir, one of the heads of Manasseh, 1 Chr. 2: 21; 7:14; and therefore, in Num. 32: 40, 41, Jair is called the son (descendant) of Manasseh. In like manner, in Ezra 2: 61 and Neh. 7: 63, a certain family is spoken of as “the children of Barzillai ;” because their ancestor “took a wife of the daughters of Barzillai the Gileadite, and was called after their name.” [The unbroken tradition has been that Mary herself was of the house of David. But from the third century to the Reformation both genealogies were regarded as those of Joseph. Since the Reformation there has been a remarkable division of opinion. The best statement of the view that Luke gives the ancestry of Joseph will be found in an article by Bishop Hervey in Smith’s Bible Dictionary, and the details of the argument in a volume on the subject by the same author. Andrews well sums up in favor of the view of Dr. Robinson. Godet (Luke) defends the same position, while Meyer gives the exegetical grounds for the other side. Weiss, the German editor of Meyer, objects to the view of the latter as exegetically unsound, and regards the genealogy as that of Mary. See Meyer, Luke, in loco, Am. ed. ] 3. A question is raised as to the identity, in the two genealogies, of the Sala- thiel and Zorobabel [R. V., in both passages: “ Shealtiel,” in the marg. “Gr. Salathiel,” and “ Zerubbabel” |] named as father and son, Matt. 1:12; Luke §§ 18, 14.] OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. 209 3: 27. The Zorobabel of Matthew is no doubt the chief, who led back the first band of captives from Babylon, and rebuilt the temple, Ezra chaps. 2-6. He is also called the son of Salathiel in Ezra 3: 2; Neh. 12:1; Hagg.1: 1; 2: 2,23. Were then the Salathiel and Zorobabel of Luke the same persons ? Those who assume this, must rest solely on the identity of the names; for there is no other possible evidence to prove, either that they were cotempo- rary, or that they were not different persons. On the other hand, there are one or two considerations, of some force, which go to show that they were probably not the same persons. First, if Salathiel and Zorobabel are indeed the same in both genealogies, then Salathiel, who according to Matthew was the son of Jechoniah by natu- ral descent, must have been called the son of Neri in Luke either from adop- tion or marriage. In that case, his connection with David through Nathan, as given by Luke, was not his own personal genealogy. It is difficult, there- fore, to see why Luke, after tracing back the descent of Jesus to Salathiel, should abandon the true personal lineage in the royal line of kings, and turn aside again to a merely collateral and humbler line. If the mother of Jesus was in fact descended from the Zorobabel and Salathiel of Matthew, she, like them, was descended also from David through the royal line. Why rob her of this dignity, and ascribe to her only a descent through an inferior lineage? See Spanheim, Dubia Hvangel., I. p. 108 sq. [This objection would hold good, even if the genealogy were that of Joseph. ] Again, the mere identity of names under these circumstances, affords no proof; for nothing is more common in Scripture, even among cotemporaries. Various artificial theories of inheritances and levirate marriages have at dif- ferent times been proposed, in order to explain and harmonize the two geneal- ogies; but in the view here taken these become unnecessary. In respect to all of them, it may suffice here to quote the words of Lightfoot: “ Nec opus est, nec ratio ulla, nec fundamentum omnino ullum, quo fingamus conjugia nescio que, et fratriationes nescio quas, ut tollatur scrupulus hoc in loco, ubi quidem non est scrupulus omnino ullus.” Hor. Heb. in Luc. 3: 23. PART i. ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. 8§ 14-20. § 14. [It seems likely that John the Baptist began his ministry about the age of thirty years, and that the baptism of Jesus took place shortly after the latter reached the same age (Luke 3: 23). Now the baptism of Jesus must have occurred several months before the first Passover of his ministry, and the ministry of John must have begun at least six months earlier than the baptism of Jesus. The most probable date for the first Passover is April, A. vu. 780, (Andrews fixes it on the 9th of April of that year.) The baptism 14 \ 210 OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. [Parr IL may have occurred in the January preceding, though there is no evidence in support of the traditional day (January 6). Reckoning back six months, we would have the summer of A. τ. 779 (A. D. 26) as the time when John began to preach. Dr. Robinson assigns ‘about one year” to the events of Part II., assuming that John’s ministry began about the time of the Passover in A. v. 779. ‘This would compel us to date the Nativity somewhat earlier. See Note on ὃ 7. The view here given assigns about nine months to Part IT.] § 15. For the time of our Lord’s baptism, see the Note on § 7. [See Note on § 14. Andrews (pp. 83-35) shows that “the climatic peculiarities of the country offer no valid objections” to fixing upon January as the time of year. | — We may here, once for all, make a remark upon the difference of the words as quoted in Matt. 8: 17 and the parallel passages. A like difference is seen in the four copies of the title on the cross, Matt. 27:37; Mark 15: 26; Luke 25: 38; John 19: 19. And still more, in the solemn words of our Lord at the institution of the cup, Matt. 26: 28; Mark 14: 24; Luke 22: 20; 1 Cor. 11: 25. Similar varieties of expression in the different reports of the same language are found in [many passages]. _ Where the Evangelists profess to record the expressions used by our Lord and others, they usually give them according to the sense, and not according to the letter. As Le Clere ex- presses it: ‘* Apostoli magis sententiam, quam locutiones, exprimere volunt ; ” Harm., p. 518. [It has already been indicated (see Introductory Note on the Relation of the Gospels to each other, p. 199) that the Evangelists agree more closely in citations than in the narrative portions. Moreover, we can only dis- cover the sense through the /etter, and attention to the latter is essential in the interpretation of all documentary evidence. ] § 16. That the temptation of Jesus took place immediately after his bap- tism, appears from the εὐθύς of Mark 1: 12; and also from a comparison of John 1: 29, 35, 44. — According to Mark and Luke, Jesus was subjected to temptation during the forty days. Matthew and Luke specify three instances of temptation, but in a different order. Of these, that founded on our Lord’s hunger must have occurred at the end of the forty days; while that which included the promise of all temporal power was obviously the final one. The order of Matthew is therefore the most natural of the two. [Matthew uses terms which indicate direct succession in connection with the second and third temptations, and in v. 11, at the close of his account. Luke is not so definite. | § 18. In ν. 21 the Baptist declares that he was not Elias; meaning that he was not Elias risen from the dead, whom the Jews expected. In Matt. 17: 12, Jesus says that “ Elias is come already ;” meaning that John had come “in the spirit and power of Elias;” Luke 1: 17. [The R. V. properly gives the Hebrew name “ Elijah” in all cases. ] In v. 33, John the Baptist says he knew not Jesus ; though in Matt. ἃ: 14 (§ 15) he appears to have known who he was. That is to say: John must have been acquainted with the events of his own childhood and that of Jesus ; he had now come preaching and baptizing as his forerunner, vy. 31; but he knew not Jesus personally before he came to be baptized; at which time God had promised him a sign, by which he might kuow certainly that Jesus was the Messiah. / §§ 15-21 sq.] NOTES.— OUR LORD’S PASSOVERS. 211 § 20. The third day refers back probably to John 1:44. The journey in returning to Galilee did not require more than two days; the distance being, in any position of Bethania or Bethabara, not over about fifty miles. Cana, now πα el-Jelil, was situated about seven miles north of Nazareth, and about three miles N. by E. of Sepphoris; see Bibl. Res. in Palest., III. p. 204. PART LE. OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UN- TIL THE SECOND. 88 21-35. [Tae Leneru or our Lorp’s Ministry. This is the most convenient place to state the various theories. We may dismiss, as altogether contrary to the four narratives, the view which limits the ministry to a little more than one year, accepting only two Passovers. It is called the Bipaschal theory (see Introductory Note of Dr. Robinson). 1. The view upheld in this Harmony is the Quadripaschal theory, which accepts John 5:1 as referring to a Passover. The ministry is thus regarded as extending over three years, or three years and a few months, if we reckon from the baptism of Jesus. The second Passover is that referred to in John 5. All are now agreed that the Passover which occurred after the feeding of the five thousand (narrated by all four Evangelists) began the last year of our Lord’s life. Dr. Robinson. in his Note on ὃ 36, ably defends the view that John 5:1 refers to a Passover. His position has been rendered more prob- able by the reading of the Sinaitic manuscript (ἡ ἑορτή), accepted by Tischen- dorf. 2. The Tripaschal theory is held by many scholars (Wieseler, Stier, Tis- chendorf, Lange, Ellicott, Farrar, among others). They usually follow the view of Kepler, who suggested that John 5: 1 referred to the feast of Pu- rim. So far as the early part of the ministry is concerned, the advocates of this theory accept in the main the order of events upheld in this Harmony. But the interval between the feast of Purim and the Passover was only about three weeks. If John 5:1 refers to the former feast, then during these few weeks we must place all the events included in Part IV. Indeed, the Sab- bath controversy points to the time of early harvest (Matt. 12:1; Mark 2: 23; Luke 6: 1), which was necessarily some little time after Purim; hence the interval is still further reduced. Moreover, according to this theory, the time during which the twelve Apostles were trained for their public preach- ing is limited to a few days. ‘They were chosen after this Sabbath contro- versy, as nearly all harmonists agree. Nor does this view give time for the growth of the popularity of Jesus as a teacher in Galilee. This popularity reached its height at the time of the feeding of the five thousand, which on this theory was but a few months after the first preaching in Galilee. The 212 OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER. [Parr III, grammatical questions are discussed in the Note on § 36, and other objections stated. 3. Another form of the Quadripaschal theory has been proposed and de- fended by Rev. 8. J. Andrews (Life of our Lord). Accepting John 5: 1 as referring to a Passover, he places the entire Galilean ministry, as recorded by the Synoptists, after this (the second) Passover. The imprisonment of John the Baptist, which Dr. Robinson makes the occasion of the journey to Galilee through Samaria (John 4), is held by Mr. Andrews to have taken place shortly before the second Passover, the journey mentioned in Matt. 4: 12; Mark 1:14; Luke 4:14 (ὃ 24) being after that Passover. The interval - between the journey through Samaria (in December, see the Note on § 25) and the second Passover was passed in retirement. This arrangement emphasizes the distinction between the Judwan and Gali- Jzan ministry and accounts for the absence of all reference to John’s imprison- ment in John 4: 1-ὃὸ, It also accounts for the silence of John 5 respecting the disciples. All other views place the events of that chapter immediately before or after the Sabbath controversies in Galilee (§§$ 37, 38), when our Lord had multitudes following him. Under these circumstances, it is doubt- ful whether he could have visited Jerusalem unattended, especially as no hint of any such visit is given by the Synoptists. In many respects this view seems to distribute the events in better proportion than either of the others, but it has not been formally adopted by many commentators. The order of sections, according to Mr. Andrews, would be: — Part III. 88 21-23, 24 (John 4: 1-3 only), 25,27. Retirement in Galilee, December to April, A. p. 27-28. Part IV. §$ 36 (2d Passover), 24 (except John 4: 1-3), 26, 28-35, 37, etc., April, a. D. 28. This arrangement affects only four months of the ministry, namely, from the journey through Samaria (in December) to the succeeding Passover in April. It accepts the order in John as continuous up to the end of chap. 5, and places immediately after this the return to Galilee in consequence of the imprisonment of John the Baptist. | § 21. This, our Lord’s first Passover, is mentioned only by John; though the language of the other Evangelists implies that he had been again in Ju- dea; Matt. 4:12; Mark 1:14. John connects with this first Passover the cleansing of the temple and the casting out of the traders; while the other Evangelists describe a like trans- action at his last Passover, Matt. 21: 12 sq.; Mark 11: 15 sq.; Luke 19: 4 sq. The question is raised whether these were different transactions; and whether there is not here a neglect of the order of time, either by John or in the other Gospels. As the language and the note of time in all the Evangelists, in re- spect to both the instances, is entirely definite and specific, the answer may be said to depend upon a further question, namely, Whether our Lord would be likely to repeat a highly symbolic and important public act, after an interval of two or three years? That he was accustomed to repeat the substance of his discourses, or at least the more striking parts of them, at different times §§ 21-29.] NOTES. 213 and before different persons, is sufficiently obvious. Now if this is true in re- spect to the discourses of Christ, why might he not just as well have repeated, after a long interval and before different persons, a public symbolical act, so significant in itself, and so expressive of his veneration for the temple and of his character and authority as the Messiah? ‘The Jews, it seems, did not question his right to perform such an act, provided he was a true prophet. They only demanded some sign of his authority; John 2:18. This Jesus gave, and had already given, in his mighty works wrought at the same Pass- over, v. 23; works which drew from Nicodemus, a Pharisee and member of the Sanhedrin, the admission that he was “a teacher come from God;” John 3:2. [The “definite and specific” statements of the Evangelists seem to set- tle the question. The question of probability need only be considered in the absence of definite statements. | On the “ three days” in John 2: 20, see Note on § 49. §§ 23, 24. The order is here determined by comparing John 8 : 24 with Matt. 4:12; Mark 1: 14. Jesus goes out with his disciples from Jerusalem into the country of Judea; where he remains until after John is cast into prison. See the next Note. [John 4: 1-3, indicates that the occasion of this withdrawal into Galilee was the jealousy of the Pharisees. The news of the imprisonment of John may therefore have come at a later period. | ὃ 25. A specification of time is given in John 4: 39, which is tolerably defi- nite: “Say ve not, There are yet four months, and the harvest cometh?” According to Lev. 23: 5-7, 11, 14, 15, and Jos., Ant., iii. 10, § 6, the first-fruits of the barley-harvest were presented on the second day of the paschal festi- val; while the wheat-harvest was two or three weeks later; see Bibl. Res. in Palest., 11. p. 99 sq. Hence this journey of our Lord must have been made in the latter part of November or in December, about eight months after the preceding Passover. It follows that the public ministry of John the Baptist had continued for at least a year and six months before his imprisonment. [If we place the imprisonment later, the ministry of John must be estimated as covering nearly two years. | § 28. The visit to Nazareth is inserted here on the testimony of Luke 4: 16 sq., which is supported by Matt. 4:13. The visit mentioned in Matt. 13: 54 sq.; Mark 6:1 sq., was later, and took place after the raising of Jairus’ daughter. § 29. That the call of the four Apostles belongs here, in accordance with Mark’s order, is obvious; since they were present with Jesus at the healing of the demoniac and of Peter’s wife’s mother, §§ 30, 31. — The three accounts all evidently refer to the same transaction. Luke relates more particularly the former part, including the putting off upon the lake in Simon’s boat and also the miraculous draught; and passes lightly over the latter part. Mat- thew and Mark, on the other hand, narrate the former part only generally but the latter part with more detail. In the one part Luke introduces cir- cumstances which the others omit; in the other part Matthew and Mark men- tion facts which Luke has not noted. ‘The remark of Spanheim is here just: “ Que narrantur a Luca, illa non negantur a Mattheo, sed pratermittuntur 214 FROM THE SECOND PASSOVER TO THE THIRD. [Part IV. tantum. Nihil vero frequentius, quam quedam pretermitti ab his, suppleri ab aliis; ne vel seriptores sacri ex compacto scripsisse viderentur, vel lectores uni ex illis reliquis spretis hererent.” Dubia Hvang., Tom. 111. Dub. 72, vii. [ The order here given is accepted by nearly all harmonists. The only differ- ence is respecting the general view of the ministry, as fully stated at the be- ginning of this Part. | PARE MV: GUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE THIRD. δὲ 36-66. § 36. On the phrase ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, John 5: 1, turns mainly the ques- tion as to the duration of our Lord’s public ministry. John notes distinctly three Passovers, John 2:18; 6:4; 12:1. Tf now this ἑορτή be another Passover, then our Lord’s public labors continued during three and a half years; if not, then the time of his ministry must, in all probability, be reck- oned one year less. [On the Tripaschal and Quadripaschal theories, see Note introductory to Part III. ] The only reasonable ground of doubt in this case is the absence of the arti- cle before ἑορτή. Did the text read ἣ ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, then, as most ad- mit, it would with sufficient definiteness denote the Passover; compare Matt. 26:5; Luke 2 : 42; John 4: 45; 11:56, al. [The discovery of δ, which reads 7, has induced 'Tischendorf (see Greek text) to insert the article; but he adopts in his Harmony the Tripaschal theory. The manuscript authorities in favor of this reading are of great weight; but A, B, and D, with the mass of later authorities, are against the article. The Revised Version properly gives it a place in the margin. If it is accepted, the reference to the Pass- over seems certain. Even if rejected, the passage may refer to this great fes- ἔν]. The arguments of Dr. Robinson which follow serve to show that even in the absence of the article the passage refers to a Passover, namely, the second in our Lord’s public ministry. ] 1. The word ἑορτή without the article is put definitely for the Passover, in the phrase κατὰ ἑορτήν, Matt. 27: 15; Mark 15: 6; Luke 23:17. Compare John 18 : 39. 2. In Hebrew a noun before a genitive is made definite by prefixing the article, not to the noun itself, but to the genitive; see Gesen., Heb. Gr., § 109, 1; Nordheim., Heb. Gr., II. p. 14, y. This idiom is transferred by the LXX into Greek: 6. g., Deut. 16:13, ἑορτήν τῶν σκηνῶν ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ, Heb. MDOT ΓΤ, i. e., che festival of Tabernacles; 2 K. 18:15, ἐν θησαυροῖς oi- κου τοῦ βασιλέως, Heb. 797 ΓΞ MTISD. So too in the New Testa- ment: Matt. 12 : 24, ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων, i. 6., the prince of demons; Luke 2: 11, ἐν πόλει Δαυίδ (the proper name being itself definite), § 36.] NOTES.— THE FESTIVAL IN JOHN V. 215 t. e., not a city of David, but the city, as in English David’s city, Heb. τὸν DIT; Acts 8: 5, cis πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας, i. 6.» the city (metropolis) of Sama- ria; see v.14. Hence, in the passage before us, according to the analogous English idiom, we may render the phrase ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων by the Jews’ fes- tival; which marks it definitely as the Passover. [On the grammatical point see Winer’s Grammar, Thayer’s ed., p. 125. There can be no doubt that in Hellenistic Greek many nouns without the article have a definite refer- ence, being treated as proper names. | 3. It is not probable that John means here to imply that the festival was indefinite or uncertain. Such is not his usual manner. The Jewish festivals were to him the measures of time; and in every other instance they are defi- nitely specified. So the Passover, John 2: 23; 12:1; even when Jesus does not visit it, 6: 4; and also when it is expressed only by 7 ἑορτή, 4: 45; 11: 56; 12: 12, 20 al. So, too, the festival of Tabernacles, ἢ ἑορτὴ τῶν "I. ἡ σκη- νοπηγία, 7: 2; and of the Dedication, τὰ ἐγκαίνια, 10: 22. This is all natural in him; for an indefinite festival could afford no note of time. 4. The plucking of the ears of grain by the disciples (ὃ 387 and note), shows that a Passover had just been kept; which tallies accurately with this visit of our Lord to Jerusalem. [There might have been a few weeks intervening between the Passover and this act of the disciples, as indeed is implied in An- drews’ theory. ‘The harvest was not over until some time after the Passover. However, the reference to the grain shows the time of year, and the harvest could not have been that of the last year of our Lord’s ministry, nor that fol- lowing the first Passover. ] ὃ. This ἑορτή could not have been the festival either of Pentecost or of Tabernacles next following our Lord’s first Passover. He returned from Judza to Galilee not until eight months after that Passover, when both these festivals were already past; see the Note on ὃ 25. --- That it might by possi- bility have been the Pentecost after a second Passover not mentioned, and be- fore that in John 6: 4, cannot perhaps be fully disproved ; but such a view has in itself no probability, and is apparently entertained by no one. At any rate it also would give the same duration of three and a half years to our Lord’s ministry. 6. Nor can we well understand here the festival of Purim, which occurred on the fourteenth and fifteenth of the month Adar or March, one month be- fore the Passover; see Esth. 9: 21, 22, 26-28. Against this the following considerations present themselves: (a.) The Jews did not go up to Jerusalem to celebrate the festival of Purim. ‘The observance of it among that people throughout the world consisted solely in reading the Book of Esther in their synagogues on those days, and making them “ days of feasting and joy and of sending portions [dishes] one to another and gifts to the poor;” Esth. 9 : 22; Jos., Ant., xi. 6,§ 13; Reland, Antigg. Heb., 1V.9. But the “multitude,” John 5:13, seems to imply a concourse of strangers at one of the great festivals. — (6.) It is very improbable, that Jesus would have gone up to Jerusalem at the Purim, to which the Jews did not go up, rather than at the Passover, which occurred only a month later. His being once present at the festival of Dedi- 216 FROM THE SECOND PASSOVER TO THE THIRD. [Parr IV. cation (John 10 : 22) is not a parallel case ; since he appears not to have gone up for that purpose, but this festival occurred while he remained in or near Jerusalem after the festival of Tabernacles, John 7: 2 sq. — (c.) The infirm man was healed on the Sabbath, John 5: 9; which Sabbath belonged to the festival, as the whole context shows, John 5: 1, 2, 10-13. But the Purim was never celebrated on a Sabbath ; and, when it happened to fall on that day, was regularly deferred; see Reland, l.c. [See also (Introductory Note to Part Il.) the objection to Purim, from the brief interval into which this view compresses the early Galilean ministry. | 7. The main objection urged against taking this ἑορτή as a Passover, is the circumstance, that in such case, as our Lord did not go up to the Passover spoken of in John 6: 4, but only at the subsequent festival of Tabernacles in John 7: 2 sq., he would thus have absented himself from Jerusalem for a year and six months; a neglect, it is alleged, inconsistent with his character and with a due observance of the Jewish law. But a sufficient reason is assigned for this omission, namely, ‘“‘ because the Jews sought to kill him,” John 7:1; comp. 5: 18. It obviously had been our Lord’s custom to visit the Holy City every year at the Passover; and because, for the reason assigned, he once let this occasion pass by, he therefore went up six months afterwards at the festival of Tabernacles. All this presents a view perfectly natural; and cov- ers the whole ground. Nor have we any right to assume, as many do, that our Lord regularly went up to Jerusalem on other occasions, besides those specified in the New Testament. [8. We only add that the parable of the barren fig-tree (Luke 13 : 6-9) has been used in support of the three years’ ministry. In itself it is not con- clusive, though urged by able commentators ; yet it adds another probability to the many named above. | In this instance, the most ancient view is that which interprets ἑορτή of a Passover. So Irenzus in the third century : “* Et posthac iterum secunda vice adscendit [Jesus] in diem Pasche in Hierusalem, quando paralyticum, qui juxta natatoriam jacebat xxxviii annos curavat;” Adv. Her., 2: 39. The same view was adopted by Eusebius, Theodoret, and others ; and in later times has been followed by Luther, Scaliger, Grotius, Lightfoot, Le Clerc, Lampe, Heng- stenberg, etc. [Jerome, however, distinctly states the Tripaschal view.] Cyril and Chrysostom held to a Pentecost, as also the Harmony ascribed to Tatian ; and so, in modern times, Erasmus, Calvin, Beza, Bengel, etc. The festival of Purim was first suggested by Kepler (Zcloge Chronica, pp. 72, 129 sq. Francof. 1615) ; and at the present day this is the only view, aside from the Passover, that finds advocates. ‘Those who hold it, as Hug, Neander, Olshau- sen, Tholuck, Meyer (Liicke and De Wette leave the question undecided), regard John 6: 4 as having reference to the second Passover during our Lord’s ministry ; which thus becomes limited to two and a half years. [For a full discussion for and against Purim, see Lange’s Commentary, John. Dr. Lange defends Purim, and Dr. Schaff gives the other side. See also Andrews and McClellan, for the reference to the Passover; and against it the authors cited in the Introductory Note to Part III.] §§ 36-41.] NOTES.— THE SERMON ON THE MOUNT. 217 § δ. The circumstances here narrated show that a Passover had just been celebrated ; see the Note on ὃ 25. The σάββατον δευτερόπρωτον was probably the first Sabbath after the second day of the Passover or of unleavened bread ; that is, the first of the seven Sabbaths reckoned between that day and Pente- cost. Our Lord would seem to have hastened away from Jerusalem ; for which a reason is found in John 5:16, 18. [Both the reading and the inter- pretation are doubtful ; see the critical notes for the authorities against devrepo- πρώτῳ, which would be regarded as decisive in ordinary cases. Here the word is so difficult that its very difficulty becomes a strong argument in favor of its genuineness. Besides, many Fathers refer to it directly. It scems, however, to have arisen from a marginal note made to distinguish this from the Sabbaths mentioned in Luke 4: 81 and 6:6. ‘The interpretations are many, and that given above by no means a necessary one. Yet as far as the entire occurrence is concerned the date is fixed as immediately before or during the harvest, which would be after the Passover, in all probability. This remains the strongest positive proof of the three years’ ministry. | § 40. The appointment of the Twelve follows here, according to Mark and Luke. Matthew gives their names in 10: 2-4, as having been already ap- pointed. Lebbzeus, called also Thaddzus by Matthew and Mark, is the same as Jude the brother of James in Luke. [Tischendorf reads Λεββαῖος in Mat- thew; Westcott and Hort, Θαδδαῖος ; the received text combines the two, but without sufficient authority.]| The epithet ὁ ζηλωτής, Zealot, is the Greek translation of 6 [Kavavatos] derived from Heb. §2j?, Aram. 732; see the Lexi- cons. [The R. V. renders “ Cananean,” giving “‘ Or, Zealot” in the mar- gin.| Nathanael, who is mentioned with the Apostles in John 21: 2, was probably the same as Bartholomew, who elsewhere also is coupled with Philip ; see John 1: 45 sq. § 41. The Sermon on the Mount follows here, in accordance with the order of Luke. The correctness of this order, so far as it respects Matthew, de- pends on the question: Whether the discourse as reported by the two Evan- gelists is one and the same, and was delivered on the same occasion? This question is answered at the present day by interpreters, with great unanimity, in the affirmative; and mainly for the following reasons : — 1. The choice of the Twelve by our Lord, as his ministers and witnesses, furnished an appropriate occasion for this public declaration respecting the spiritual nature of his kingdom, and the life and character required of those who would become his true followers. Luke expressly assigns this as the oc- casion ; and although Matthew is silent here and elsewhere as to the selection of the Apostles, yet some passages of the discourse, as reported by him, seem to presuppose their previous appointment as teachers; see Matt. 5: 13, 14; Ge ©. 2. The beginning and the end of both discourses, and the general course of thought in both, exhibit an entire accordance one with the other. 8. The historical circumstances which follow both discourses are the same, namely, the entrance into Capernaum and the healing of the centurion’s ser- vant. 218 FROM THE SECOND PASSOVER TO THE THIRD. [Part IV. The main objection which has been felt and urged against the identity of the two discourses, is the fact that Matthew’s report contains much that is not found in Luke; while, on the other hand, Luke adds a few things not found in Matthew, as vv. 24—26, 38-40, 45; and, further, his expressions are often modified and different, as in vv. 20, 29, 35, 36, 49, 44,46. But this objec- tion vanishes, if we look at the different objects which the two Evangelists had in view. Matthew was writing chiefly for Hebrew Christians; and it was therefore important for him to bring out, in full, the manner in which our Lord enforced the spiritual nature of his dispensation and doctrine, in opposi- tion to the mere letter of the Jewish law and the teaching and practice of the Seribes and Pharisees. This he does particularly, and with many examples, in Matt. 5: 18-88; 6: 1-34. Luke, on the contrary, was writing mainly for Gentile Christians ; and hence he omits the long passages of Matthew above referred to, and dwells only upon those topics which are of practical impor- tance to all. In other respects the discourses, as given by the two writers, do not differ more than is elsewhere often the case in different reports of the same discourse. Compare Matt. 24: 1-42 with Mark 13 : 1-37 and Luke 21: 5-56; also Matt. 28: 5-8 with Mark 16: 6-8 and Luke 24: 5-8. See, also, the Note on § 15. Augustine, in order to avoid the like difficulty, supposed that our Lord first held the longer discourse in Matthew before his disciples on the top of the mountain; and afterwards descended and delivered the same in the briefer form of Luke to the multitudes below; De consensu Evangelistarum, 11. 48. But this is unnecessary ; and the order of circumstances would seem rather to have been the following: Our Lord retires to the mountain and chooses the Twelve; and with them descends to the multitudes on the level place or plain, where he heals mauy. (§ 40.) As they press upon him, he again ascends to a more elevated spot, where he can overlook the crowds and be heard by them; and here, seating himself with the Twelve around him, he addresses himself to his disciples in particular and to the multitudes in gen- eral. See Matt. 5:1, 2; Luke 6: 20; also Matt. 7:28; Luke 7:1. The mountain where these events took place was doubtless some part of the high ground on the west of the Lake of Tiberias, not far from Caper- naum. The Romish church has the tradition that the singular hill called Tell Hattin, or Ktrdan Hattin, was the spot; and that hill is hence known to travellers as the Mount of Beatitudes. But this eminence is at least seven or eight miles distant from any probable site of Capernaum; which seems incon- sistent with Matt. 8:5; Luke 7:1. And further, this tradition is current only among foreign Latin monks, and cannot be traced back, even among them, beyond the twelfth century; while the Greek church, which has been native upon the soil from the earliest centuries, knows nothing of it; and has indeed no tradition whatever connected with the Sermon on the Mount. See Bibl. Researches in Palestine, 111. p. 240. [The references to locality and other minute circumstances forbid the view that these discourses are merely summaries of our Lord’s teachings during the early part of the Galilean ministry. Recent travellers favor the traditional §§ 41-49.] NOTES. 219 site of the Mount of Beatitudes. The “level place” is supposed to be a small plateau on the side of the mountain. There is no reason for insisting that the place was very near Capernaum, and the Horns of Hattin would be a convenient locality for the assembling of multitudes from various regions ; compare the detailed statements of Mark and Luke, especially the former. See Stanley, Sinai and Palestine, pp. 860, 361. ] § 42. In Matthew the centurion seems to come in person to Jesus; in Luke he sends the elders of the Jews. This diversity is satisfactorily ex- plained by the old law maxim: Qui facit per alium, facit per se. Matthew narrates briefly; Luke gives the circumstances more fully. In like manner, in John 4: 1, Jesus is said to baptize, when he did it by his disciples. In John 19:1, and elsewhere, Pilate is said to have scourged Jesus; certainly not with his own hands. In Mark 10: 35, James and John come to Jesus with a certain request ; in Matt. 20 : 20, it is their mother'who prefers the re- quest. In 2 Sam. 24:1, God moves David to number Israel; in 1 Chr. 21: 1, it is Satan who provokes him. § 44. Matthew places this narrative after the sending out of the Twelve, Matt. 11:1, 2. This appears to be too late; for during their absence John was beheaded ; see Mark 6: 30; Matt. 14:13. The order of Luke is there- fore retained. Our Lord was probably at or near Capernaum; comp. ὃ 45. § 48. The order of Mark is here resumed, who places these transactions next after the appointment of the Twelve, omitting the Sermon on the Mount and other intervening matters. The narrative of Luke is obviously parallel, although given by him in a different place. See Introd. Note to Part VL. p. 226. [The position of the events recorded in Luke 11 : 14-13, 9, is very dif- ficult to determine. The entire passage forms a part of that great division of Luke’s Gospel which is otherwise peculiar to that Evangelist (chaps. 9 : 51- 18:14). Most harmonists give chap. 11 : 14—36 the position here assigned ; but a number of them place chaps. 11 : 37-13: 9, after the departure from Galilee; comp. ὃ 81. It is difficult to account for the remarkable correspond- ence between the accounts of Matthew and Luke in 88 48, 49, unless they re- fer to the same miracle -and discourses. But it seems equally difficult to dis- connect § 51 from what precedes in Luke. ] § 49. The specification in Matt. 12 : 40, that Jesus should be “three days and three nights” in the sepulchre, seems at first view not to harmonize with the account of his burial and resurrection. From these latter it appears that he was laid in the tomb before sunset on the sixth day of the week or Friday, and rose again quite early on the first day of the week, or Sunday, having lain in the grave not far from thirty-six hours. See §§ 159, 160, and Notes. This accords with the usual formula which our Lord employed in speaking of his resurrection, namely, that “‘ he should rise on the third day ;᾽ Matt. 16: 21; 20:19; Luke 9: 22; 18: 33, etc. Equivalent to this is also the expression, “after three days I will rise again,” Matt. 27 : 63; Mark 8: 31; John 2: 19, ete. [In Mark 9: 31; 10: 34, which are strictly parallel with those cited from Matthew and Luke, the correct reading is “after three days.”] This latter idiom is found also in John 20 : 26, where eight days is put for a week. 220 FROM THE SECOND PASSOVER TO THE THIRD. [Part IV. [ Compare, also, Mark 9 : 2, ‘after six days,” with Luke 9 : 28, “about eight days.” | In the present instance, Matt. 12 : 40, the apparent difficulty arises from the form of the expression “three days and three nights,” which our Lord uses here, and here alone, because he is quoting from Jonah 2: 1 [1:17]. The \phrase in itself is doubtless equivalent to the Greek νυχθήμερον, a day and night of twenty-four hours. But the Hebrew form τι δὴ aia) mesouy ny, three days and three nights, was likewise used generally and indefinitely for three days simply; as is obvious from 1 Sam. 30: 12 (compared with v. 13), and from the circumstances there narrated. Such, also, is manifestly the case here. § 51. The order here connects back with Luke 11 : 36, in § 49. Jesus re- ceives the invitation of the Pharisee ἐν δὲ τῷ λαλῆσαι, while He was speaking. See Introd. Note to Part VI. p. 226. [ There can be no doubt that 88 51-53 belong together, and the phrase above cited seems to connect them with Luke 11:86. It is not correct to explain “ while he was engaged in teaching,” ὁ. e, in general. After renewed investigation we accept the order of Dr. Robin- son. Vv. 45-52 resemble parts of the discourse pronounced against the Pharisees in the temple a few days before our Lord’s death. Hence some identify them; but Luke definitely fixes the place here, and all three Synop- tists indicate that the Scribes and Pharisees were denounced at the time indi- cated by Matthew. ] § 52. Luke chap. 12, is directly connected with the preceding by the phrase ἐν οἷς, meanwhile. § 53. The order is here fixed by ν. 1. § 54. The order here depends on Matt. 18 : 1; the intervening events in §§ 51-53 being supplied by Luke. The place may be Capernaum; but this is not certain. § 56. Mark here fixes the order of time, “the same day at evening.” The incident of the Scribe and of another disciple, which Matthew gives definitely here, is related by Luke in a wholly different connection without any note of time. It is transferred hither, because it is of such a nature that it cannot well be supposed to have been so exactly repeated at two different times. The conversation takes place as our Lord was on his way from the house (Matt. 13 : 90) to the boat. § 57. [A reference to the text and critical notes will show the great varia- tions in the name of the inhabitants of the region visited. The Authorized Version is undoubtedly incorrect in all three Gospels. It seems probable that the people bore all three names: Gadarenes, Gerasenes, and Gergesenes. The last seems to be the correct reading in Luke (R. V., “ Gerasenes,”’ how- ‘ever). Gadara was the capital city of Pera, and would give the name to the inhabitants of the entire district ; “ Gergesenes”” may be derived from the old term “ Girgashites,” while Gerasa was the name of a city, quite remote from the lake. The opinion is, however, now prevalent that there was a city near the lake, named Gergesa or Gerasa, All the terms are appropriate, and the apparent discrepancy is only a mark of independence and truthfulness. ] ὃς 51-66.] NOTES. 221 Mark and Luke speak of only one demoniac; Matthew of two. Here the maxim of Le Clere holds true: Qui plura narrat, pauciora complectitur ; qui pauciora memorat, plura non negat. Something peculiar in the circumstances or character of one of the persons rendered him more prominent, and led the two former Evangelists to speak of him particularly. But their language does not exclude another. See Bibliotheca Sacra, 1845, p. 169. §§ 58, 59. The call of Levi or Matthew is placed by the three Evangelists immediately after the healing of the paralytic in Capernaum ; see §§ 34, 35. Very naturally, too, they all three connect with his call an account of the feast which he afterwards made for Jesus ; in order to bring together and present at once all that was personal to Matthew. But from Matt. 9:18 it appears that, while our Lord was reclining and discoursing at that feast, Jairus comes to beseech him to visit his daughter lying at the point of death; and Jesus goes with him. Now this transaction, according to Mark and Luke, did not happen until just after the return from the eastern shore of the lake. Hence the narrative of the feast is also to be transferred to this place; and that, too, the more certainly, because the Twelve appear to have also been present at it; see Matt. 9:10; Mark 2:15. [The feast and call of Matthew are placed together by all three Synoptists; and yet, if we can make any deduction whatever in regard to the order of events in the Gospels, we must separate them. This is suggestive in reference to other questions of harmony. The only considerable deviation from the chronological order in Mark is contained in ὃ 58, chap. 2 : 15-22.] § 62. In Matt. 10:10 the Twelve are instructed not to provide a staff (ῥάβδον) ; in Mark 6: 8 they are told not to take anything save a staff’ only. Here Matthew refers to providing (κτᾶσθαι) beforehand for the journey ; Mark, to what they may actually take along with them. [In Luke the singu- lar, “ staff,” is the correct reading; this was altered to “staves” to avoid the apparent conflict with Mark’s account. Mark is more exact; Luke’s state- ment is to be interpreted by that of Matthew. ] 88 63, 64. While the Twelve are absent preaching in the name of Christ, Herod causes John the Baptist to be beheaded in the castle of Macherus at the southern extremity of Perzea, near the Dead Sea; Jos., Ant., xviii. 5, § 2. In consequence of the preaching of the Apostles, Herod hears the fame of Jesus ; is conscience-smitten ; and declares him to be John, risen from the dead. The disciples of John come and tell Jesus; and the Twelve also return with the same intelligence ; upon which Jesus retires to the northeastern coast of the lake, not far from the northern Bethsaida or Julias; see Bibl. Res. in Palest., 111. p. 308. All these events seem to have taken place near together. Matthew and Mark narrate the death of the Baptist in explanation of Herod’s declaration. The account of his imprisonment is transferred to § 24. According to John 6 : 4, the Passover was at hand, namely, the third during our Lord’s ministry. John, therefore, had lain in prison not far from a year and six months ; and was beheaded about three years after entering upon his ministry. See Note on § 25. §§ 65, 66. From the region of the northern Bethsaida or Julias, the disci- 222 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER, ETC. [Parr V. ples embark for Bethsaida of Galilee, Mark 6: 45; or for Capernaum, accord- ing to John 6:17. [It is evident from Luke 9 : 9 that the miracle had taken place near Bethsaida Julias (northern Bethsaida). It is doubtful whether there was a western Bethsaida, although Dr. Robinson strongly advocates that view. The passage in Mark 6: 45 can be explained as meaning that the disciples were to go by boat northward and then to cross the lake. This agrees better with the fact that “the wind was contrary.” The only specific mention of Bethsaida of Galilee is in John (12: 21), and this may be ex- plained by the fact that the city was partly in Galilee, being on both sides of Jordan where it enters the lake; compare Andrews, pp. 211-217.] They land on the plain of Gennesaret, Matt. 14: 34; Mark 6: 53. The next day the multitudes follow in boats to Capernaum seeking for Jesus, and find him there ; John ὁ : 24, 25, 59. It follows as a necessary conclusion that Caper- nhaum was on or near the plain of Gennesaret; most probably at its north- eastern extremity. For the topography of this region, see Lvbl. Fes. in Pal- est., III. p. 288 sq.; comp. p. 282 sq. In John 7: 1 a reason is assigned why Jesus did not go up at this time to the Passover mentioned in John 6: 4. This was the third Passover during his ministry. PARD: V; FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER UNTIL HIS FINAL DEPARTURE FROM GALILEE AT THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 88. 67-82. § 67 sq. The order of events, as far as to § 79 inclusive, is in accordance with both Matthew and Mark; with whom Luke also coincides, so far as he touches upon the same transactions. § 68. Jesus retires from Galilee, first to the region of Tyre and Sidon, then to the Decapolis, and afterwards to the district of Casarea Philippi. All these were districts not under the jurisdiction of Herod; whose domain in- cluded Galilee and Perea. Not improbably Jesus may have withdrawn from Galilee at this particular time because the attention of Herod had been thus turned to him after the death of John the Baptist ; and perhaps, too, on ac- count of Herod’s temporary presence in that province, by which his own per- sonal danger would naturally be increased. See the Note on §§ 63, 64. [The tide of popularity had turned after the discourse at Capernaum (ὃ 66), and the hostility of the Pharisees became pronounced. | § 69. The Decapolis was on the S. and 5. E. of the Lake of Tiberias. It included Scythopolis (Bethshean), Gadara, Hippo, Pella, Gerasa; the names of the other cities being less certain. Our Lord, in returning from Tyre and Sidon, probably passed through Galilee. [The correct text in Mark 7: 31 indicates that he did not pass through Galilee, but made a circuit “ through Sidon,” passing northward, then eastward, reaching the eastern shore of the §§ 67-80.] NOTES. 223 lake after traversing the northern part of the Decapolis at the foot of the Lebanon range.] ‘The feeding of the four thousand obviously took place in the Decapolis ; since Jesus immediately afterwards passes over the lake to Magdala on its western shore. [The correct reading in Matt. 15: 39 is “ Magadan.” | 8 72. The healing of the blind man at the northern Bethsaida is related only by Mark. It took place on the way from the eastern shore of the lake toward Cesarea Philippi. [§ 73. ‘This is the turning-point in the training of the Twelve, a crisis in our Lord’s ministry. Notice that Matthew only tells of the saying: “ Thou art Peter,” etc. The emphasis seems to rest on what is common to the three nar- ratives. | ὃ 74. The pera τρεῖς ἡμέρας of Mark 8: 31 is equivalent to τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ in Matt. 16: 21; Luke 9: 22. See the Note on § 49. [The former phrase is invariably used by Mark, according to the correct text. ] § 75. On Matt. 17: 12, see the Note on § 18. § 80. The sending out of the Seventy obviously took place at or near Caper- naum; see vy. 13, 15. It comes therefore here in its order, before our Lord leaves Galilee to go up to the festival of Tabernacles. The words pera ταῦτα, in v. 1, refer to the general series of events narrated in the preceding chapter ; not to vy. 51 sq. in particular. The incident of the Scribe, which there follows (v. 57 sq.) was in fact much earlier ; see in ὃ 56 and Note. [The difficulties connected with harmonizing Luke’s narrative are discussed very fully in the Introd, Note to Part VI. Most recent harmonists, even those who agree in the main with Dr. Robinson, differ from him in regard to the time when the Seventy were sent out. Those who do not accept a return to Galilee, after the Feast of Tabernacles, usually place Luke 9: 51-56 before the sending out of the Seventy (see note on § 81), and regard the visit to Jeru- salem (John 9: 10 sq.) as an incident in the great journey from Galilee to death, which is spoken of in such solemn terms by Luke (9:51). There is much to commend this view. The sending of the Seventy, on this theory, took place during the journey from Galilee, to which our Lord did not return until after his resurrection. The journey was not direct, but led through part of Samaria (comp. $§ 81, 82), probably through part of Pera (comp. Matt. 19: 1,2; Mark 10:1, which may be placed, with equal propriety, in connection with the return of the Seventy), and certainly through part of Judwa (see next paragraph). The Seventy probably went in advance along this route, and returned after a short interval; whether before or after the Feast of Tabernacles is very uncertain. During part of this journey, our Lord left his followers, and made a brief visit to Jerusalem alone during the Feast of Tabernacles (§§ 83, etc.) This theory would compel us to place Luke 9: 51-56 before 10: 1-16, but does not of necessity involve any other change in Dr. Robinson’s arrangement at this point. Andrews accepts a return to Gali- lee after the Feast of Tabernacles, placing John 7: 2-10, 21 (all of which he refers to that visit to Jerusalem) before the final departure from Galilee (Luke 9: 51) and the sending out of the Seventy. There are various other 224 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER, ETC. [Parr V. arrangements, but the main question at this point is whether the Seventy were sent out before or after the Feast of Tabernacles. A more difficult question is that respecting the number of events which are to be connected with that Feast ; see Notes on 88 δύ, 87.] According to Luke 10:1, the Seventy were to go to every city and»place, whither our Lord himself would come. To what part of the country, then, were they sent? Not throughout Galilee; for Jesus apparently never re- turned to that province; and besides both himself and the Twelve had already preached in all the towns and villages. Not in Samaria ; for he merely passes through that district without making any delay. Possibly into some parts of Judxa, whither our Lord himself afterwards came ; but more probably along the great valley of the Jordan and throughout the populous region of Perza, which our Lord traversed and where he taught, after the festival of Dedica- tion, and as he for the last time went up to Jerusalem; see John 10: 40; Matt. 19:1; Mark 10:1; Luke 13: 22.— In accordance with this view the return of the Seventy took place in Jerusalem or Juda, not long before the festival of Dedication (§ 89); immediately after which festival Jesus with- drew into Perea to follow up their labors, John 10 : 40 sq. See Introd. Note to Part VI., p. 226. [See also the preceding paragraph. | Our Lord’s instructions to the Seventy have a striking resemblance to those given to the Twelve; see in § 62. § 81. Our Lord evades the hypocritical urgency of his relatives ; and after- wards goes up to the festival more privately ; that is, with less of public noto- riety and without being followed as usual by crowds. The journey mentioned in Luke 9 : 51 was obviously his last journey from Galilee to Jerusalem ; and v. 53 shows that he was passing on rapidly and without delay. In both those circumstances, Luke accords with John; and the two accounts are therefore properly arranged together. See more in Introd. Note to Part ΥἹ., p. 225. [John 7 : 9 favors the view that the final departure from Galilee had not yet taken place ; hence Dr. Robinson’s arrangement. | § 82. The healing of the ten lepers evidently connects itself with the same journey through Samaria, and is narrated by Luke out of its proper order. Compare the incident of the Scribe and another, Luke 9: 57 sq., and see the Note on § 56. [The date of this incident is very doubtful. The position it occupies in the Gospel connects it with the final journey to Jerusalem immedi- ately before the Passover or with some excursion from Ephraim after the rais- ing of Lazarus. But the mention of “the midst οἵ. Samaria and Galilee,” seems opposed to this view, and in favor of placing it here. Greswell, Stroud, Thomson, Tischendorf, and Andrews, accept the order of Luke, though differ- ing among themselves as to the exact relation of that part of Luke to the nar- rative of John. If Luke’s order is followed, it becomes necessary to refer y. 11 to a journey from Ephraim to Jerusalem, during which occurred all the events which follow in Luke’s narrative up to the point where Matthew and Mark again become parallel. So Meyer and many others. See Introd. Note to Part VI., and the various theories of the order of events added there. ] § 81-InTRop. § 83 sq.] NOTES.— ORDER OF JOHN AND LUKE. 225 PART Vii. THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY SIX DAYS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. §§ 83-111. IntRopucTorY Nore. In this interval of time, from the festival of Tabernacles to our Lord’s last arrival at Bethany, we encounter one of the most difficult portions of the whole Gospel harmony. According to John’s narrative, Jesus, after leaving Galilee to go up to the festival of Tabernacles in October (John 7: 10), did not return again to Gali- lee; but spent the time intervening before the festival of Dedication in De- cember, probably in Jerusalem, or, when in danger from the Jews, in the neighboring villages of Judea ; John 8:59; Luke 10: 38 sq. Had Jesus act- ually returned to Galilee during this interval, it can hardly be supposed that John, who had hitherto so carefully noted our Lord’s return thither atter each visit to Jerusalem, would have failed to give some hint of it in this case also, either after chap. 8: 59, or after chap. 10: 21. But neither John, nor the other Evangelists, afford any such hint. [See, however, Note on ὃ 80. ]— Immedi- ately after the festival of Dedication, Jesus withdrew from the machinations of the Jews beyond Jordan; whence he was recalled to Bethany by the de- cease of Lazarus; John 10: 40; 11: 7. He then once more retired to Ephraim; and is found again at Bethany six days before the Passover; John Pers: 12 > 1. Matthew and Mark contain no allusion at all to the festival of Tabernacles ; nor do we find any express mention of it in Luke. Yet Luke 9: 51 is most naturally referred to our Lord’s journey at that time; and it implies, also, that this was his final departure from Galilee; see Note on ὃ 81. Luke and John are, therefore, here- parallel. The circumstances of danger, which had induced Jesus during the summer to retire from Galilee in various directions ‘(see Note on ὃ 68), as well as the approach of the time when “he should be received up,” are reasons of sufficient weight to account for his having trans- ferred, at this time, the scene of his ministry and labors from Galilee and the north to Jerusalem and Judea, including excursions to the country on and be- yond the Jordan. In regard to the transactions during the whole interval of time comprised in this Part, the Gospels of Matthew and Mark are silent; except where they relate that our Lord, after his departure from Galilee, approached Jerusalem for the last time through Perea and by way of Jericho, where he was followed by multitudes; Matt. 19: 1,2; 20:29; Mark 10:1, 46. [Matt. 19:1, 2 and Mark 10:1 may, however, be referred to the journey mentioned in Luke 9: 51.] With the transactions recorded by these two Evangelists dur- ing this last approach, Luke also has some things parallel; Luke 18 : 15-48. 15 226 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Parr VI. The arrival at Bethany is common to the three; and in this they all accord with John; Matt. 21:1; Mark 11:1; Luke 19: 29; John 12:1, 12 86. There exists consequently no difficulty in harmonizing Matthew and Mark and so much of Luke as is parallel to them (18: 15 sq.) with John. But in Luke, from chap. 9: 51, where Jesus leaves Galilee, to chap. 18 : 14, where the record again becomes parallel with Matthew and Mark, there is a large body of matter peculiar for the most part to Luke, and relating prima facie to the time subsequent to our Lord’s departure from Galilee. How is this portion of Luke’s Gospel to be arranged and distributed, in order to harmonize with the narrative of John? Harmonists have hitherto generally assumed a return of our Lord to Gali- lee after the festival of Tabernacles; and this avowedly in order to provide a place for this portion of Luke’s Gospel. But the manner in which it has ‘been arranged, after all, is exceedingly various. Some, as Le Clere, insert nearly the whole during this supposed journey; Harm. Evangel., p. 264 sq. Others, as Lightfoot, assign to this journey only what precedes Luke 13 : 23, and refer the remainder to our Lord’s sojourn beyond Jordan, John 10 : 40; see Chron. Temp. N. T., Opp., 11. p. 87,39. In like manner Schleiermacher, Neander, Olshausen, and others, assume a return to Galilee before the festival of Dedication, but differ greatly in their distribution of this part of Luke. If now we examine morc closely the portion of Luke in question (9 : 51- 18 : 14), we perceive that, although an order of time is discoverable in cer- tain parts, yet as a whole it is wanting in exact chronological arrangement. It would seem almost as if, in this portion peculiar to Luke, that Evangelist, after recording many of the earlier transactions of Jesus in Galilee, in accord- ance with Matthew and Mark, had here, upon our Lord’s final departure from that province, brought together this new and various matter of his own, relating partly to our Lord’s previous ministry in Galilee, partly to this jour- ney, and still more to his subsequent proceedings, until the narrative (in chap. 18 : 15) again becomes parallel to the accounts of Matthew and Mark. Such, for example, is the incident of the Scribe and of another in Luke 9 : 52 sq. — an occurrence of such a nature that we cannot well suppose it to have happened twice, and which Matthew narrates at Capernaum, on the occasion of our Lord’s first excursion across the lake; see ὃ 56. The sending forth also of the Seventy evidently took place at or near Capernaum, chap. 10: 1 sq. see ὃ 80 and Note. ‘The transactions narrated in chap. 10: 17-11 : 13, have marks of chronological connection; and the scene of them is obviously Jeru- salem or its vicinity ; see §§ 86-89 and Notes. The healing of a demoniac and the consequent blasphemy of the Scribes and Pharisees in Luke 11 : 14, 15, 17 sq. is parallel with the same events in Matthew and Mark, which these two Evangelists describe as having occurred in Galilee; see § 48 and Note. With this passage, again, Luke 11: 87-54 is immediately connected by the words ἐν δὲ τῷ λαλῆσαι, see ὃ 51 and Note. The transition to the next chapter (chap. 12) is made by the phrase ἐν οἷς, marking proximity of time; ὃ 52 and Note. And, further, the words παρῆσαν δέ τινες, Luke 13: 1, show that the conversation there given (vv. 1-9) immediately followed. The remainder InTROD. § 83 sq.] NOTES. — ORDER OF JOHN AND LUKE. 227 of this portion of Luke, chap. 13: 10-18: 14 (with the exception of chap. 17: 11-19, which obviously connects itself with the journey in chap. 9: 51), contains absolutely no definite notation of time or place, nor anything, in- deed, to show that the events happened in the order recorded, or that they did not take place at different times and in different parts of the country. The only passage to which this remark does not perhaps fully apply, is chap. 13: 22-35. [On this passage, see below. ] For these reasons, like Newcome, I have distributed Luke 9: 51-10: 16, and 11: 14-13 : 9 (as also 17: 11-19) in Parts IV. and V., as already speci- fied, among the transactions of our Lord’s ministry in Galilee, between his second Passover and his journey to the festival of Tabernacles. The remain- der of this whole portion of Luke, namely, chaps. 10: 17-11: 18, and 13: 10- 17 : 10, as also 17: 20-18: 14, remains to be disposed of in the present Part. With many leading modern commentators, I prefer here to follow the nar- rative of John, and infer that our Lord did not again return to Galilee after the festival of Tabernacles. On this principle, therefore, the present Har- mony is constructed. Hence, Luke 10: 17-11: 13, is inserted between the festival of Tabernacles and that of Dedication; see the particulars in the Notes on §§ 86-89. [With this arrangement, except as regards the mission of the Seventy, there is general agreement among recent commentators and harmonists, although there is diversity as to how many of the events narrated by John are to be placed at the earlier festival. ] More difficult is it to assign the proper place for Luke 13: 10-17: 10; the transactions recorded in which all cluster around or follow chap. 13 : 22, where Jesus is represented as traveling leisurely through the cities and villages to- wards Jerusalem. Now this journey cannot have been the same with that in Luke 9: 51 and John 7:10; because there Jesus went up privately, while here he is accompanied by multitudes, Luke 14: 25. Nor can it have been a later journey from Galilee ; for that in Luke 9: 51 was the final one. Nor indeed were the Jews accustomed to go up from the country to Jerusalem at the festival of Dedication; see Note on ὃ 91. Lightfoot, Hor. Heb., in Joh. 10:22. Besides, Luke 13: 22 stands in connection with the warning re- ceived by our Lord against Herod, vv. 31-33; which, under the attendant circumstances, cannot well be regarded as having been given in Galilee much less in Jerusalem, as Lightfoot supposes; Chron. Temp. N. T., Opp., II. p. 89. But Herod was lord also of Perewa; and in that province he had imprisoned and put to death John the Baptist; Joseph., Ant., xviii. 5,§2. It would therefore be natural, that our Lord, who had been less known in that region, and who now appeared there, followed by multitudes, should receive warning of the danger he was thus incurring. Hence, I have ventured to as- sign this part of Luke (13: 10-17: 10) to that period of our Lord’s life and ministry which was passed in Perea after the festival of Dedication. Our Lord first withdrew soon after that festival from the plots of the Jews into Pera, the province beyond Jordan: [“ He went away again beyond Jor- dan into the place where John was at the first baptizing ; and there he abode. And many came unto him; and... believed.” ] John 10: 40-42. How long 228 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Parr VI. Jesus remained in that region before he was recalled by the death of Lazarus, can be only matter of conjecture. In that interval Lightfoot places all this part of Luke after chap. 15 : 22; see Opp., 11. p. 89. In this Iam unable to accord with that profound scholar; because the language of John does not necessarily imply that our Lord at this time made any journey or cireuit in Perea itself. At least it could not then and there be said of him in any sense, that [‘ he went on his way through cities and villages, teaching and journeying on unto Jerusalem,” |] Luke 13: 22; for he had just departed from Jerusalem, and was recalled to Bethany by a special message from the sisters of Lazarus, John 11:3, 7. All this would seem to imply rather, that Jesus remained during this excursion, at least mainly, in the district “ where John had baptized”; so that Martha and Mary knew at once where to send for him. It follows also as a natural inference, that this first sojourn beyond Jordan could not well have been a long one, nor probably have occupied more than a few weeks out of the four months intervening between the festival of Dedi- cation and the Passover. After the raising of Lazarus, Jesus again retired from the machinations of the Jews to [“ the country near to the wilderness, into a city called Ephraim ; and there he tarried with the disciples ;””] John 11: 54. The Evangelist John records nothing more of his movements, until he again appears in Bethany six days before the Passover; John 12: 1. But the expression used by John as to his sojourn at Ephraim (κἀκεῖ διέτριβεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν, there he passed the time), does not preclude the idea of excursions from that place, nor of a cir- cuitous route on his return to Bethany and Jerusalem at the Passover. Now Matthew, Mark, and Luke affirm expressly, that on this return Jesus went up to Bethany from Jericho ; and the two former narrate, as expressly, that in thus reaching Jericho he had come [‘“ into the borders of Judza and beyond Jor- dan,” ] where great multitudes followed him, and he healed them and taught them, as he was wont; Matt. 19: 1,2; Mark 10:1. With all this the lan- guage of Luke 13: 22 accords perfectly ; as does also the mention of the mul- titudes in Luke 14: 25. With this too accords Luke 13: 31-385, including the warning against Herod and our Lord’s reply ; as also the touching lamentation over Jerusalem, where Jesus was so soon to perish. With this accords, further, the fact, that the narrative of Luke subsequent to the portion in question, namely, Luke 18: 15 sq., is parallel with that of Matthew and Mark during this same journey ; see $$ 105-109. After a long consideration, therefore, I do not hesitate to refer Luke 13: 22, with the transactions and discourses of which it forms the nucleus, mainly to a journey of our Lord through the populous region of Perza, on his return to Bethany after sojourning in Ephraim. ‘There may also have been excur- sions from that city to the neighboring villages of Juda, or even to the Jor- dan valley. This city Ephraim I hold to be probably identical with Ephron and Ophrah of the Old Testament ; and therefore apparently represented by the modern Taiyibeh, situated nearly twenty Roman miles N. N. E. of Jeru- salem, and five or six Roman miles N. E. of Bethel, on the borders of the desert which stretches along on the west of the Dead Sea and the valley of Introp. § 83 sq.] NOTES.— ORDER OF JOHN AND LUKE. 229 Jordan ; see the Note on § 93. It occupies a lofty site ; and from it one over- looks the adjacent desert, the Jordan with its great valley, and the mountains of Perza beyond, with the Saracenic castle er-Rubiid, near 'Ajlin, in the north- ern part of Pera, hearing about N. E. Even at the present day the hardy and industrious mountaineers of this place have much intercourse with the valley, and till the rich fields and reap the harvests of Jericho; see bibl. Res. in Palest., 11. p. 121, p. 276. It was therefore quite natural and easy for our Lord, from this point, to cross the valley and the Jordan and then turn his course towards Jericho and Jerusalem, while at the same time he exercised his ministry among the cities and villages along the valley and in the eastern region. ‘Thither, indeed, he not improbably had sent before him the Sev- enty disciples (see Note on § 80); and some parts of the same district he him- self had already visited. I have therefore inserted the whole of Luke 13: 10-17: 10, perhaps for the first time, after the mention of our Lord’s sojourn at Ephraim ; as belong- ing naturally to that period and to this return-journey through Perea. And then it only remained to let Luke 17: 20-18: 14 follow directly after- wards; because there is no mark nor authority for placing it anywhere else ; and because, too, it immediately precedes, and thus connects with, that portion of Luke which is subsequently parallel to Matthew and Mark. Not that I would by any means assert that all the events and the discourses of our Lord here given are recorded by Luke in their exact chronological order; for this portion of his Gospel presents very much the appearance of a collection of discourses and transactions in themselves disconnected. Yet, as there are no marks nor evidence, internal or external, by which to arrange them differ- ently, it seems hardly advisable, on mere conjecture, to abandon the order in which they have been left to us by Luke himself. If it be objected, that this arrangement crowds too many incidents and dis- courses into this journey through Perea, the reply is not difficult. Matthew and Mark confine their previous narratives chiefly to Galilee ; and give com- paratively little of what took place later in Perea. Luke, besides recounting the like events in Galilee, has a large amount of matter peculiar to himself, without any definite notation of time and place ; and it is therefore not unnat- ural to suppose, that an important portion of it may relate to this last journey. Again, there is room for allowing to this journey in Pera an interval of time amply sufficient for all these transactions, and indeed for many more. If we as- sume, that our Lord’s first sojourn beyond Jordan, his return to Bethany, and the subsequent departure to Ephraim, occupied even two months (which is a large allowance) there still remained nearly two months before the Passover, in which to make excursions from Ephraim, and also traverse leisurely the dis- tance through Perza to Bethany, requiring in itself, at the utmost not more than five days of travel. If now we compare the transactions thus spread out over these two months (or not improbably over a longer interval), with those recorded during the following six days next before the Passover (see Part’ VII.), we shall hardly be very strongly impressed with the idea that too much: in proportion is thus allotted to this journey. 230 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Parr VI. [The main points of difference between the view above given and that of many, perhaps most, recent harmonists are as follows : — 1. The sending out of the Seventy is placed after the final departure from Galilee ; see Note on § 80. 2. The healing of the ten lepers is regarded as standing in its proper chron- ological position in Luke’s narrative ; see Note on § 82. 8. The healing of the blind man and the subsequent discourse (John 9 : 1-10: 21) are connected with the Feast of Tabernacles, not placed immedi- ately before the Feast of Dedication ; see Note on § 90. 4. The passage in Luke (11: 14-13: 9) which Dr. Robinson assigns to Part IV., is retained in the position given by Luke; see Note on § 48. But the most judicious are in doubt as to this point. Some assign parts of Matthew’s parallel account to the later period. The place, on this theory, is supposed to have been near Jerusalem (Bethany) or in Perea. 5. Luke 13: 10-17: 10 forms a continuous narrative (so Meyer), and the discourses were uttered in Perwa. But Dr. Robinson connects this portion of Luke immediately with 17: 20 (17: 11-19 being placed earlier), and regards the whole as occurring after the raising of Lazarus and the retirement to: Ephraim. His position is ably defended above, and seems to be still tenable, notwithstanding the fact that most harmonists differ from him. The view now generally held is that Luke 13: 10-17: 10 must be placed before the raising of Lazarus, and that from 17: 20 (or 17: 11) onward belongs to a journey from Ephraim to Jericho and Bethany. See Andrews, Life of our Lord, pp. 845-862, This separation of the narratives of Luke into two dis- tinct parts is usually defended in this way: First, in Luke 13: 22 a journey is spoken of, which is identified by Andrews with that to the Feast of Dedica- tion (John 10: 22), but usually placed in connection with the retirement be- yond Jordan (John 10: 40) before the raising of Lazarus. The only adyan- tage here is, in joining the events in Luke which seem to have occured in Pe- rea with John’s notice of a retirement to that region. Second: Luke 17: 11 speaks of a journey which is regarded as distinct from the previous one ; hence what follows is placed in connection with the last journey to Jerusalem, since John speaks of the retirement to Ephraim shortly before the last Passover (John 11: 54, ὅδ). Dr. Robinson, however, places Luke 17: 11-19 at an earlier point in the history (see § 82), and thus obviates the necessity for this separation, Archbishop Thomson (Smith’s Bible Dictionary, and Speaker’s Commen- tary, N. T., Vol. I.), places Luke 10: 17-19: 28 before the Feast of Dedi- cation, thus making John’s narrative uninterrupted from chap. 10: 22 up to the arrival at Bethany. This seems to conflict with the accounts given by the Synoptists of the journey to Jericho and Jerusalem (88 107-110). The main question, though connected with many incidental variations, is re- specting the position of the raising of Lazarus. It seems to form a fitting cli- max to our Lord’s miracles; hence the tendency to place it as late as possible in the history. Plumptre (in Ellicott’s Commentary) assigns it a position after Matt. 20:16; Mark 10:31; Luke 18:30 (§ 106). But it must in any §§ 83-89.] NOTES. 231 ease have preceded the healing of the blind men at Jericho (§ 109); hence cannot have been the last miracle. Dr. Robinson’s view accepts only one other miracle after the raising of Lazarus, namely, the healing of the infirm woman on the Sabbath (ὃ 94, Luke 13: 10-17). The reply of our Lord to the menace of Herod (Luke 13: 31-83) conveys the impression of a speedy approach of death, or at least of a speedy cessation of public activity (see In- ternational Rev. Commentary, in loco). This gives an additional reason for placing the entire passage from Luke 13: 10 onward at the later period. The various Lives of Christ and recent Commentaries give full discussions of the entire question. We have presented, as briefly as possible, the leading points of the various theories. Dr. Robinson’s arrangement and his defense of it are left unaltered. ] § 85. Jesus had now been absent from Jerusalem a year and six months, since his second Passover. [§ 84. This entire section, including John 7: 53, can scarcely be regarded as genuine in view of the weight of evidence, external and internal, against it. For the authorities omitting it, and also for the many various readings in those containing it, see critical Notes. It is, however, likely to be a true story, though not written by John. Compare the Revised Version, which virtually rejects it from the text, but gives it a place in the margin. The omission of the passage would connect John 8: 12 more closely with 7:53. As 7: 37 speaks of the “last day, the great day of the feast” (a Sabbath), we may then assign 8: 12-59 to the same day. ] §§ 86, 87. Our Lord had left the temple, and apparently the city; John 8: 59. The healing of the blind man occurred later; see the Note on § 90. [As John 7: 37 refers to a Sabbath and the blind man was healed on the Sabbath (John 9:14), there must have been an interval of a week at least, during which some of the events recorded by Luke (88 86-88) may have oc- curred. But most harmonists join John 9: 1-10: 21 with John 8: 59, without accepting any recorded events as intervening. The question is not an important one; but some light is shed upon it by the results of textual criticism.] While thus absent from the city, and yet in its vicinity, Jesus visits Bethany and is received by Martha and Mary. That visit is placed by Luke in immediate connection with the incident of the lawyer and the parable of the Good Samaritan; which therefore are inserted here. The scene of that parable also implies that it was spoken in the vicinity of Jerusalem and Bethany. [Andrews places the incident in the house of Martha and Mary, during the journey to Jerusalem at the Feast of Dedication. In other re- spects the harmonists agree quite closely. | § 88. Jesus repeats on this occasion the same model-form of prayer taught in the Sermon on the Mount, ὃ 41. Luke’s order is here retained; as there is no evidence by which to assign any other. [The briefer form of the cor- rect text is an additional argument for the repetition. ] § 89. Luke relates the return of the Seventy in immediate connection with their appointment (Luke 10: 1-16), evidently by anticipation. Their ap- pointment appears to have been one of our Lord’s last acts in Galilee; and 232 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Parr VIL they went forth, probably into Perza and elsewhere, while he proceeded to Jerusalem; see the Note on § 80. Their return to him, at or near Jerusa- lem, is therefore here placed as late as may be, before the festival of Dedica- tion. [It seems better to place this return at an earlier period; see addi- tional Note on ὃ 80, and comp. Andrews (Life of our Lord, pp. 339-345) on the purpose of sending out the Seventy. ] § 90. With the healing of the blind man the discourse in John 10 : 1 sq. stands in immediate connection; see chap. 9: 40. And in the words of our Lord (John 10: 26 sq.) spoken at the festival of Dedication, there is a direct allusion to the figurative representation of the shepherd and his sheep in the same discourse. This implies that the same audience was then present, at least in part; and consequently, that the discourse in question had been de- livered not long before. For these reasons the healing of the blind man would seem also to have taken place near the beginning of the festival of Dedication, or at least not long before. [The allusion to the discourse in John 10: 1-18 is not decisive against its having been spoken shortly after the Feast of ‘Tabernacles, the interval being, at most, two months. But the manuscripts B L and 383 read τότε (so some versions)*in John 10: 22 (R. V. marg.: “At that time”). In any case this shows the very early view of the connection. If the reading is accepted, then we must join John 9: 1-- 10: 21 with the Feast of the Dedication. This variation, apparently unno- ticed by Dr. Robinson, confirms his view. ] § 91. The festival of Dedication, τὰ ἐγκαίνια, was instituted by Judas Mac- cabzeus to commemorate the purification of the temple and the renewal of the temple-worship, after the three years’ profanation by Antiochus Epiphanes. It was held during eight days, commencing on the 25th day of the month Kislev, which began with the new moon of December. See 1 Mace. 4: 52— 59; 2 Macc. 10: 5-8. Josephus calls it φῶτα, ¢. e., festival of lights or lan- terns, and speaks of it as a season of rejoicing; Ant., xil. 7, §§ 6,7. It was celebrated by the Jews, not at Jerusalem alone, like the great festivals of the law, but at home, throughout the whole country, by the festive illumination of their dwellings; see Lightfoot, Hor. Fleb., in Joh. 10 : 22.— According to John’s narrative, Jesus was now at Jerusalem, not because the Jews were ac- customed to go up thither at this festival, but because he had remained in the vicinity since the festival of Tabernacles; see the Introd. Note to Part VL., p. 227. The place [* where John was at the first baptizing ””] (10 : 40) was “ Beth- any beyond Jordan.” [There are several variations in the ancient authori- ties; see critical Note on John 1: 28. The R. V. marg. gives the Hebrew form of two: Bethabarah and Betharabah, the latter being found in the Co- dex Sinaiticus as a correction by a later hand (seventh century). The state- ment of Origen shows that the variations are older than our oldest manu- scripts.] Nothing more is known as to its situation. On our Lord’s sojourn here, and also the probable length of it, see the Introd. Note to Part VI., pp. 227, 229. § 93. As the Sanhedrin had now determined, in accordance with the coun- 88. 90-93. ] NOTES.—CITY OF EPHRAIM. 233 sel of Caiaphas, that Jesus should be put to death, he therefore withdraws from Jerusalem to a city called Ephraim “ near to the wilderness”; John 11: 54, This place has never hitherto been identified with any modern site. The following comparisons and combinations may perhaps throw some light upon it. This city Ephraim (Ἐφραΐμ, ᾿Ἔφρέμ) is doubtless the same with the Ephraim or Ephron of 2 Chr. 13 : 19, Heb. }225Y in Keri, Way in Chethib, Sept. Ἐφρών, which place Abijah king of Judah, after his great battle with Jercboam, took from the latter fine with Bethel and Jeshanah. It was therefore a strong place, and lay not ΠΣ remote from Bethel. So too Jose- phus relates, that Vespasian marched from Czsarea to the hill-country, sub- dued the toparchies of Gophna and Acraba with the small cities (πολίχνια) Bethel and Ephraim (Edpai), and then proceeded to Jerusalem; Jos., B. ὧι, iv. 9,§ 9. The same is also doubtless the Hphron (Edpoév) of Eusebius and Jerome; which the former places at evght and the latter (correcting Euse- bius) at nearly twenty Roman miles, north of Jerusalem; see Onomast., art. “ Ephron.” Bethel, according to Eusebius and Jerome, was twelve Roman miles from Jerusalem towards the north; and its remains exist there at the present day ; Onomast., art. “ Bethel”; Bibl. Res. in Palest., 11., p. 127. Ephraim or Ephron, then, being in the twentieth mile from Jerusalem, was seven miles beyond Bethel. But Ephraim, according to John 11: 54, was “near to the wilder- ness” or desert; and the only desert in that region is on the east of Bethel, namely, the desert of Judea lying on the west of the Dead Sea and the val- ley of the Jordan, and extending northwards at least as far as to the parallel of Shiloh, if not farther. Ephraim was also a place of strength, like Bethel. All these combinations point definitely and distinctly to the lofty site of the modern et-Taiyibeh, situated two hours northeast of Bethel and six hours and twenty minutes north-northeast of Jerusalem (reckoning three Roman miles to the hour), adjacent to and overlooking the broad tract of desert country ly- ing between it and the valley of the Jordan, — a position so remarkable and commanding, that we cannot suppose it to have been left unoccupied in an- cient times; see bibl. Res. in Palest., 11. pp. 121-124. This, then, was the Ephraim or Ephron of both the Old and New Testaments. There is another similar name in the Old Testament, namely, Ophrah in Benjamin, Heb. ΓΞ, Sept. ᾿Ἑφραθά, Josh. 18: 23; 1 Sam. 13:17. This was apparently the Aphra ('Adpa) of Eusebius and Jerome, situated five Ro- man miles east of Bethel; Onomast., art. “ Aphra.’ The question suggests it- self, whether, perhaps, Ophrah and Ephron (71)¥, 7PY) were anything more than different forms of the same name belonging to one and the same place? This would seem not improbable; since both forms have the same general signification, fawn, fawn-like, from the noun BY, a fawn; the one being simply the feminine form of the noun, and the other taking the very common termination ἡ. Precisely the same difference is found in the proper name Salmon, e. g. i mop and patty, Ruth 4: 20,21. Further, the great laxness and variety of manner with which Hebrew names are written in 234 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Part VIL Greek, leave ample room for supposing such an identity. Thus another Ophrah (7772Y) in Manasseh is written in the Sept. ᾿Εφραθά, Judg. 6: 11; 8: 27,32; 9:5; and by Josephus "E¢pav, Ant., v. 6,§ 5. Lastly, the position assigned to Ophrah by Jerome, namely, five Roman miles east of Bethel, is, from the nature of the country, applicable only to the same Taiyibeh above described. § 94. Matthew and Mark, having omitted all mention of our Lord’s pres- ence and teaching in Jerusalem at the festival of Tabernacles and that of Ded- ication, as likewise of the raising of Lazarus and other events, now resume their narrative by relating, that after Jesus had left Galilee he approached Jerusalem, as the Passover drew nigh, by passing through the country beyond Jordan. [The correct reading in Mark 10: 1, properly rendered in the R. V., “into the borders of Judwa and beyond Jordan,” leaves it even more doubtful whether the reference is to the last journey to Jerusalem. It seems far more likely that these verses sum up the final movement from Galilee to- ward Jerusalem, and are strictly parallel with Luke 9: 51 sq. See on p. 223.] Both Evangelists speak of the great multitudes that followed Jesus. Luke 13: 10-21 is inserted here, because it precedes, and is connected with, the notice of our Lord’s journeying towards Jerusalem in Luke 18 : 22; see § 95 and Note. § 95. For the reasons why Luke 138: 22 is arranged in this ccnnection, see the Introd. Note to Part VI. pp. 227, 228. For the appropriateness of this arrangement, so far as it respects vv. 31-35, see the same Note on p. 227. The lamentation over Jerusalem in vy. 34 arises naturally from the men- tion of that city in v. 33. In Matt. 23: 387 sq. the same lamentation is re- peated in connection with our Lord’s denunciation of the Scribes and Phari- sees in Jerusalem. Luke’s phrase οὐ μὴ ἴδητε μέ κτλ. is explained by the οὐ μή pe ἴδητε ἀπάρτι κτλ. of Matthew, implying that he was now about to with- draw from the world, and that Jerusalem, which then rejected him, would not again behold him and enjoy the privilege of his presence, until compelled by his glorious manifestation to acknowledge him as the true Messiah. §§ 96-103. On these sections see the Introd. Note to Part VI. p. 229. § 104. This section properly comes in here before § 105, where Luke is again parallel with Matthew and Mark. § 107. This transaction properly occurred in Perea; as Jesus had not yet arrived at Jericho. The word ἀναβαίνω is used of any journey to Jerusalem or Judea; see Luke 2:4; John 7: 8; 12: 20; Acts 18: 22. § 108. In Matthew it is the mother of James and John who makes the re- quest; in Luke it is the two disciples themselves ; see the Note on § 42. § 109. Mark and Luke here speak of one blind man ; Matthew of two. The case is similar to that of the demoniacs of Gadara; see the Note on § 57. [ Notice the many corrections in the text, especially of Mark, who gives the most exact account. | More difficult is it to harmonize the accounts as to the place where the mir- acle was wrought. Matthew and Mark narrate it as having occurred when Jesus was departing from Jericho (ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ Ἱϊερειχώ) ; while §§ 94-111.] NOTES. —THE BLIND MEN AT JERICHO. 235 Luke seems to describe it as happening during his approach to the city (ἐν τῶ ἐγγίζειν αὐτὸν εἰς Ἱερειχώ). Several ways of solving this difficulty have been proposed. 1. The language of Mark is: καὶ ἔρχονται eis Ἱερειχώ, “they come to Jer- icho.” This, it is said, may be understood as implying, that Jesus remained some days at least in Jericho, where he would naturally visit points of interest in the vicinity ; as, for example, the fountain of Elisha, a mile or more distant. The miracle therefore may have been wrought, not when he was finally leav- ing Jericho for Jerusalem; but when he was occasionally going out of, and re- turning to, Jericho, So Newcome, Harm., Note on § 108. [The most prob- able solution is that Luke 18:35 refers to the first approach to Jericho, with which Luke, in a general way, connects the miracle, that Matthew and Mark tell more exactly that it occurred “as they were going out,” on some excur- sion during the stay in that city, while Luke 19: 1 refers to the final passage through Jericho. This does least violence to the grammatical sense; for ἐν τῳ ἐγγίζειν is less specific than the statements of Matthew and Mark. | 2. The verb ἐγγίζειν, it is said, may signify not only to draw near, but also to be near, i. q. ἐγγὺς εἶναι. Hence, the language of Luke may include also the idea expressed by Matthew and Mark, 7. e. while he was still near the city. So Grotius, Comm. in Matt. 20: 30. [This explanation is very generally re- jected, and the extended lexical remarks of Dr. Robinson upon it are omitted. Luke does, quite often, carry on a narrative along one line, and then go back to take up another part of the history ; but among New Testament writers he is most exact in his use of verbs referring to travelling, and the tense used in 19:1, διήρχετο (“ was passing through”), compels us to connect the story of Zacchzeus with that verse. Now the view of Grotius does not meet the diffi- culty, unless Luke 19 : 1 is placed in order of time before 18: 35. Many harmonists overlook the force of the imperfect in 19:1, intimating that Zacchzxus lived out of the city, or that Luke anticipates. | 3. Less probable than either of the above is the solution of Lightfoot and others, who assume that Jesus healed one blind man before entering the city, and another on departing from it. See Lightfoot, Chron. Tempor. in N. T., Opp., 11. p. 42. [4. Still another view is that two different sites are referred to, the ancient one and that occupied in the time of Christ (so Farrar and others). This is possible, but does not seem probable. See Schaff’s Bible Dictionary, p. 430. ] [§ 110. This section in all its details points to the final departure from Jer- icho to Jerusalem. The journey referred to in ver. 28 took place, as is now generally held, on Friday, the 8th of Nisan, one week before the crucifixion. The Supper took place (see Notes on § 111) on Saturday evening, the 9th of Nisan, and the public entry to Jerusalem on Sunday, the tenth. The latter date was accepted by Dr. Robinson in his earlier editions, and is restored in this. This affects the entire schedule of days given in Part VII., Introductory Note. | § 111. The phrase ἐκ τῆς χώρας, John 11: ὅδ, does not refer to the region of Ephraim ; for then it must have read ἐκ ταύτης χώρας. Besides, those coming 236 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Parr VL from that vicinity would hardly have made such inquiries. The phrase there- fore signifies from the country generally, as distinguished from Jerusalem ; compare in Luke 21: 21. “Six days before the Passover” is equivalent to “the sixth day ” before that festival ; see the Note on § 49. [In his earlier editions Dr. Robinson says: “ As our Lord ate the paschal supper on the evening following Thursday (which evening was reckoned in the Jewish manner to Friday), the sixth day before it was Saturday or the Jewish Sabbath. On that day, then, Jesus came to Bethany; probably after a Sabbath day’s journey.” In his last edition he substitutes for this reckon- ing: “the sixth day before it was the first day of the week, reckoning back as usual from Friday itself as one day.” He concludes that the Jewish Sab- bath was spent at Jericho. This latter result can be obtained only by counting Friday as one day and also the assumed day of arrival as the sixth; thus giving about four days in- stead of six. This is objectionable as a mode of reckoning, and does not suit the details of the history so well as the view that places the entry into Jeru- salem on Sunday (10th Nisan) and the arrival at Bethany correspondingly earlier. Reckoning as the first day the 14th of Nisan, which was Thursday, if our Lord ate the Passover at the regular time (see Introductory Note to Part VIII.), the arrival at Bethany would fall on Friday or Saturday, accord- ing to the mode of reckoning. Between these two days there is little to choose. The objection to Saturday (the Jewish Sabbath) arises from the implica- tion that our Lord travelled on that day from Jericho to Bethany. The pub- lic entry into Jerusalem could not have taken place on Saturday, hence an objection to Friday. The best solution seems to be as follows: our Lord journeyed from Jericho to Bethany on Friday, reaching there in the evening, probably about the beginning of the Jewish Sabbath. Most of the company from Jericho go on to Jerusalem, but he remains at Bethany during the Sab- bath. In the evening the supper was made, and the anointing by Mary took place. Andrews suggests: “ During the afternoon the Jews of Jerusalem, who had heard through the pilgrims of his arrival, go out to see him and Lazarus, and some of them believe on him. This, coming to the ears of the chief priests, leads to a consultation how Lazarus may be put to death with Jesus.” The Greek text of the Harmony has been rearranged in accordance with this view. Dr. Robinson places the anointing at Bethany, on the Wednesday before the crucifixion (§ 131). His reasons are given at this point, and those for accepting the position assigned by John are added. | According to Matthew and Mark this supper would most naturally seem to have taken place on the following evening; that is, the evening which ush- ered in, and was reckoned to, the fifth day of the week. John’s order would apparently assign it to the evening after the day on which Jesus came to Bethany. As in the accounts of this supper itself neither of the Evangelists has speci- § 111.] NOTES.— ORDER OF EVENTS. 237 fied any note of time, we are left to infer from other circumstances, whether it more probably took place on the evening after the arrival of Jesus at Bethany, as John seems to imply; or in the evening following the fourth day of the week, in accordance with Matthew and Mark, after our Lord had taken his final leave of the temple. The following are some of these circumstances. 1. The formal determination of the chief priests to put Jesus to death was made apparently on the fourth day of the week, Matt. 26: 1-5; Mark 16: l,ete. It was not until afterwards that Judas came to them with his proposal of treachery, which they received with joy, Matt. 26:14; Mark 14: 10, 11, etc. 2. Matthew and Mark narrate the supper as the occasion which led to the treachery of Judas. Stung by his Master’s rebuke, he is represented as going away to the chief priests and offering to betray him. This act would then seem to have been done under the impulse of sudden resentment; and this view of the matter receives also some support from his subsequent remorse and suicide. All this accords well with the order of Matthew and Mark. But if the supper took place on the evening after Jesus came to Bethany, then Judas must have cherished this purpose of treachery in his heart for sev- eral days without executing it; and that, too, while our Lord was daily teach- ing in the temple, and there was abundant opportunity to betray him. Such a supposition, under the circumstances, is against probability. 3. The language of Matthew, τότε πορευθείς, v. 14, seems necessarily to connect the visit of Judas to the chief priests immediately with the supper, which therefore must have taken place on the preceding evening. On the other hand, it would be very natural for John to anticipate the time of the supper and narrate it where he does, in order there to bring together and complete all that he had to say further of Bethany ; which, indeed, he men- tions no more. [In favor of the earlier date it may be urged : — 1. That John is more chronological in his order than Matthew, and, in- deed, than Mark (see Introduction, p. 197); he connects νυ. 9 with “ there- fore,” and what he narrates in vv. 9-11 must be placed before the public en- try into Jerusalem. On the other hand, the accounts of Matthew and Mark do not (as Dr. Robinson suggests) necessarily connect the proposal of Judas immediately with the supper. No Evangelist is less exact in this respect than Matthew (see 3 above), and both seem to introduce the account of the supper parenthetically. 2. The supper was a formal entertainment, and therefore more likely to have occurred during the triumphal progress to Jerusalem than during the week of conflict. Especially unlikely is the position after the long conflict in the temple, and the discourse on the Mount of Olives. The day after (Wednesday) is too late, since both Matthew and Mark imply a longer inter- val between the proposal of Judas and the betrayal. (The same objection holds against Dr. Robinson’s schedule of days in the last edition.) 3. There is no reason why John should have anticipated, but the two Syn- optists might readily postpone mentioning the event until they had occasion to account for the betrayal of our Lord. 238 FIVE DAYS PRECEDING THE FOURTH PASSOVER. [Part VIL. 4. The argument that Judas acted under the impulse of sudden resentment is invalid. John, more than any of the Evangelists, tells us of the incidents where individual disciples are prominent, giving their names. He alone does so in this case. His accuracy as to persons is a voucher for his accuracy in notes of time, especially when the length of time is an important element in estimating the character of Judas and the nature of his crime. The mention of the greed of Judas tells decidedly against the view that his treachery was a hasty, passionate act. | There is no sufficient reason for supposing, with Lightfoot and others, that the supper in John is a different one from that in Matthew and Mark. The identity of circumstances is too great, and the alleged differences too-few, to leave a doubt on this point. Matthew and Mark narrate it as in the house of Simon the leper; John does not say where it took place, but he speaks of Lazarus as one of those who reclined at the table, implying that the supper was not in his own house. It was not, and is not now, customary in the East for females to eat with the males; and therefore Lazarus, in his own house, would have been the master and giver of the entertainment. In the two former Evangelists, the woman anoints the head of Jesus; in the latter his feet; yet neither excludes the other. The anointing of the feet had once before happened to Jesus, as a token of extraordinary respect and devoted- ness, Luke 7: 38, 46; the anointing of the head was customary, Ps. 23: 5; Ecce. 9: 8; Judith 16: 8.— Matthew and Mark do not here name Mary; nor have they anywhere else mentioned her or Martha or Lazarus. Nor do they in this connection name Judas; whom we know as the fault-finder only from John. PART. Vil. OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. §§ 112-1382. INTRODUCTORY Notre.— ScHEDULE OF Days. [In the Notes on Part VII. the dates assigned by Dr. Robinson in his ear- lier editions have been substituted for those of the last. See Note on § 111. This general statement will obviate the necessity of marking such substitu- tions with brackets. The same remark holds good in relation to the headings of the sections in the Greek text. Other modifications by the editor are bracketed. | The Jewish day of twenty-four hours was reckoned from sunset to sunset, as is still the case in Oriental countries. The paschal lamb was killed on the fourteenth day of Nisan, towards sunset; and was eaten the same evening, after the fifteenth day of Nisan had begun; Ex. 12: 6, 8, and Introd. Note $§ 111, 112.] NOTES.— SCHEDULE OF DAYS. 239 to Part VII. Our Lord was crucified on the day before the Jewish Sabbath, that is, on Friday, Mark 15: 42; and as he had eaten the Passover on the preceding evening, it follows that the fourteenth of Nisan fell that year on Thursday, reckoned from the preceding sunset. Hence, the sixth day before the Passover, when Jesus came to Bethany, was the Jewish Sabbath or Sat- urday (see the Note on § 111); and the transactions of the following week, comprised in Parts VII. and VIII., may be distributed according to the fol- lowing Schedule; which agrees in the main with the Schema of Lightfoot; see his Hor. Heb., in Joh. 12: 2. ScHEDULE OF Days. Az Ae 9. 7. Sat. reckoned from preced. sunset. The Jewish Sabbath. Jesus arrives at Bethany, John 12:1. [Or probably, having ar- rived there on Friday evening, remains there, and in the evening is anointed in the house of Simon. | 10. 1. Sunp. from sunset. Jesus makes his public entry into Jerusalem, § 112; and returns at night to Bethany, Mark 11: 11. 11. 2. Monn. _—from sunset. Jesus goes to Jerusalem ; on his way the inci- dent of the barren fig-tree. He cleanses the temple, § 113; and again returns to Bethany, Mark 11: 19. 12. 8. Tursp. from sunset. Jesus returns to the city ; on the way the dis- ciples see the fig-tree withered, Mark 11: 20. Our Lord . discourses in the temple, §§ 115-126; takes leave of it. 13. 4. WepN. — from sunset. [During the eve of this day (our Tuesday evening) our Lord], on the Mount of Olives, on his way to Bethany, foretells his coming to destroy the city, and pro- ceeds to speak also of his final coming to judgment, 88 127- 130. [Either on the eve of this day (our Tuesday evening) or on Wednesday the rulers conspire against Christ, and Judas makes known to them his plan of treachery. ]—Je- sus remained this day at Bethany. 14. 5. Tuursp. from sunset. Jesus sends two disciples to the city to make ready the Passover. He himself repairs thither in the afternoon, in order to eat the paschal supper at evening. 15. 6. Frip. JSrom sunset. At evening, in the very beginning of the fif- teenth of Nisan, Jesus partakes of the paschal supper; in- stitutes the Lord’s supper; is betrayed and apprehended ; §§ 133-143. He is brought first before [Annas and ] Caia- phas, and then in the morning before Pilate; is condemned, crucified, and before sunset laid in the sepulchre; §§ 144- 158. 10. 7. Sar. The Jewish Sabbath. Our Lord rests in the sepulchre. 17. 1. Sunp. Jesus rises from the dead at early dawn; see § 159 and Note. § 112. The time is specified in John 12:12. The other Evangelists do 240 FIVE DAYS PRECEDING THE FOURTH PASSOVER. [Parr VIL. not notice the fact that Jesus had remained at Bethany the preceding night. [Matt. 21: 14-16, which Dr. Robinson places in this section, has been trans- ferred to § 113. On this day our Lord seems to have simply entered and looked about the temple. ] § 113. Mark 11: 11, 12 specifies the time very exactly. On the cleansing of the temple, see the Note on § 21. Luke 21: 37, 38 is inserted here, because in Lake’s order it is only retro- spective ; being placed after our Lord’s discourses on the Mount of Olives, when he had already taken leave of the temple, to which he returned no more. . 88. 114-130. These sections include the numerous discourses and transac- tions of the third day of this week. § 114. The account of the withering away of the fig-tree might in itself well be connected with the preceding section. But according to Mark 11: 20 this occurrence took place on the subsequent day. § 123. [In the text of Matthew, v. 14 is to be omitted (see critical Notes). Hence Mark 12 : 40 and Luke 20: 47 have been transferred to ὃ 122. | § 125. This incident of the Greeks is inserted here, on the third day of the week, because of John 12 : 86, which implies that Jesus afterwards appeared no more in public as a teacher. He immediately takes leave of the temple. § 126. The Evangelist John here gives his own reflections upon the unbe- lief of the Jews. From v. 44 we are not to understand that Jesus, after hay- ing left the temple, returned and uttered this additional discourse. It is rather the vivid manner of the Evangelist himself; who thus introduces Jesus as speaking, in order to recapitulate the sum and substance of his teaching, which the Jews had rejected. §§ 127-130. The topics of these sections are more fully discussed in an ar- ticle by the author of this work, in the ibliotheca Sacra, 1843, No. III. pp. 531 sq. [The very difficult questions respecting the interpretation of this dis- course on the Mount of Olives are more properly discussed in commentaries. | § 127. Our Lord takes leave of the temple, to which he returns no more; at the same time foretelling its impending destruction. On his way to Beth- any, he seats himself for a time upon the Mount of Olives, over against the temple, where the city was spread out before him as on a map; and here four of his disciples put to him the question, ‘‘ When shall these things be?” Ac- cording to Matthew they add: ‘And what the sign of thy coming, and of the end of the world?” They were still in darkness, and believed, like the other Jews, that the Messiah was yet to go forth as an exalted temporal prince, to subvert the then present order of things, to overthrow their enemies and sub- due all nations, and thus restore preéminency and glory to the Jewish people, and reign in peace and splendor over the world; see Luke 24:21; Acts 1: 6. This was the expected coming and the end of the world, or present state of things, referred to Matt. 24: 3; as also in Luke 17 : 20 sq.; 19: 11. See Biblioth. Sacra, 1. ¢. pp. 531-535. Jesus does not directly answer the question of the four Apostles; but speaks of deceivers and calamities and persecutions that should arise. His language here is strictly introductory to the next section. §§ 114-130.] NOTES.—DESTRUCTION OF JERUSALEM. 241 § 128. That the “abomination of desolation,” Matt. 24 : 15, ete., refers to the Roman armies by which Jerusalem was besieged and destroyed, is shown conclusively by Luke 21: 20. The subsequent desolation and calamity spoken of in Matt. 24: 29-31 and the parallel passages may be most appropriately referred to the overthrow and complete extirpation of the Jewish people fiity years later under Adrian; when they were sold as slaves and utterly driven out from the land of their fathers. See Miinter’s Jtidischer Krieg, Leipz. 1821; translated by W. W. Turner in the Bibliotheca Sacra, 1843, p. 393 sq. Comp. ἐδὲά., p. 550 sq. This was the final war and catastrophe of the Jewish nation under the cele- brated and mysterious Bar Cochba, “ Son of a Star.” It was a catastrophe far more terrible than the destruction of Jerusalem; though the latter, in con- sequence of the vivid description of it by Josephus, has come to be usually considered as the last act in this great tragedy. Such, however, it was not. [ The use of the word εὐθέως in Matt. 24 : 29 favors the reference accepted by Dr. Robinson ; but most Commentators find in the paragraph that follows (so in parallel passages) a reference to the second coming of Christ, which be- comes the exclusive reference toward the close of the discourse. | The figurative language of these verses is similar to that of many passages in the Old Testament, which refer to civil commotions and historical events of far less importance than the destruction of Jerusalem and the overthrow of the Jewish state; comp. Is. 13: 9 sq.; 19: 1, 5 sq. ; 84: 2, 4 sq.; Ezek. 32: 2,7; Ps. 18: 7-14; 68:7 sq.; 77: 15 sq.,ete. Comp. Rev. 6: 12 sq. and see also iblioth. Sac., 1843, p. 545 sq. Further, Luke 21 : 28 shows decisively that these verses cannot have reference to the general judgment of the great and final day ; the language of Luke directly expresses temporal deliverance, and that only ; comp. also John 11: 52; Matt. 23: 37; Luke 13: 34. That some near catastrophe is meant, appears also from the limitation to “this generation,” Matt. 24: 34, and the parallel passages. The phrase οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὔτη ἕως κτλ. ἴῃ Matt. 24: 84, οἴο., is equivalent to the phrase : εἰσίν τινες TOV ὧδε ἑστηκότων οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου ἕως κτλ. in Mark 9: 1.— For the popular use of the word γενεά, generation, see also Gen. 15: 10, comp. 13. [This argument is the strongest one in favor of the exclusive reference to the destruction of Jerusalem. ] Matt. 24: 36-42 connects itself directly with what precedes, see v. 36; and refers likewise to the overthrow of the Jewish people and dispensation; comp. Luke 17: 20-37. But with v. 42 of Matthew, all direct reference to the Jew- ish catastrophe terminates. This appears from the nature of the language ; and also further from the fact that thus far both Mark and Luke give parallel reports ; while at this very point their reports cease, and all that follows be- longs to Matthew alone. This goes to show that the discourse of our Lord up to this point is to be regarded as a whole, which is here completed ; having reference to his coming for the overthrow of Judaism. At this point a new topic is introduced. §§ 129, 180. Our Lord here makes a transition, and proceeds to speak of his final coming at the day of judgment. This appears from the fact, that the 16 242 FIVE DAYS PRECEDING THE FOURTH PASSOVER. [Part VIL. matter of these sections is added by Matthew after Mark and Luke have ended their parallel reports relative to the Jewish catastrophe; and Matthew here commences, with v. 43, the discourse which Luke has given on another occasion, Luke 12 : 39 sq., see in ὃ 52. This discourse in Luke has reference obviously to our Lord’s final coming ; and that it has here the same reference is apparent from the appropriateness of the subsequent warnings, and their in- timate connection with Matt. 25 : 21-46; which latter all interpreters of note agree in referring to the general judgment. Up to this point, further, all is destruction to evil-doers, the overthrow of persecuting Judaism; but hence- forth all refers to the trial and final separation of the righteous and the wicked. See Biblioth. Sac., 1. ¢., p. 553 sq. § 131. On the fourth [perhaps on the evening of the third] day of the week the chief priests and others, after deliberation, came to the formal con- clusion to seize Jesus and put him to death; Matt. 26:3, 4, ete. As the means by which this purpose was aided and accomplished, the first three Evangelists narrate the treacherous intent of Judas; which again two of them introduce by describing the circumstances under which it arose during the sup- per at Bethany. [See Notes on § 111, where will be found Dr. Robinson’s reasons for placing the supper at this point, and those of the editor for accept- ing the position assigned to it by John. It seems impossible to find a place for it on Wednesday evening, if the discourses in the temple and on the Mount of Olives were uttered that day. But the other events recorded in this section probably occurred on Tuesday evening (comp. “after two days,” Matt. 26: 2), possibly in part while our Lord delivered the discourse on the Mount of Olives. Dr. Robinson places them on the evening when that discourse was delivered, but by accepting a day later fails to give room for an interval of “two days,” even by the shortest mode of reckoning, since the time of day was probably after sunset. As intimated in the Schedule of Days, Wedues- day was spent in retirement at Bethany. | § 132. “ The first day of unleavened bread ” is here the fourteenth of Nisan ; on which day, at or before noon, the Jews were accustomed to cease from labor and put away all leaven out of their houses; Ex. 12: 15-17; Light- foot, Opp., I. p. 728 sq., Hor. Heb. in Mare. 14:12. On that day towards sun- set the paschal lamb was killed; and was eaten the same evening, after the fifteenth of Nisan had begun ; at which time, strictly, the festival of unleavened bread commenced and continued seven days. In popular usage, however, the fourteenth day, being thus a day of preparation, was spoken of as belonging to the festival; and therefore is here called the “ first” day. That such a usage was common, appears also from Josephus ; who, having in one place ex- pressly fixed the commencement of the festival of unleavened bread on the fif- teenth of Nisan ( πέμπτῃ δὲ καὶ δεκάτῃ διαδέχεται τὴν τοῦ Πάσχα ἣ τῶν ἀζύμων ἑορτή, Ant., iii. 10, § 5), speaks nevertheless in another passage of the four- teenth as the day of that festival: καὶ τῆς τῶν ἀζύμων ἐνστάσης ἡμέρας τεσσα- ρεσκαιδεκάτῃ Ξανθικοῦ μηνός (κατὰ δὲ ἡμᾶς Νισάν), B. J, v. 3, §1; comp. Ant., xi. 4,§ 8. In this way, further, the same historian could say literally, that the festival was celebrated for eight days: ἑορτὴν ἄγομεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμέρας ὀκτώ, τὴν τῶν ἀζύμων λεγομένην, Jos., Ant., ii. 15, § 1. 8 131-InrRop. § 133 sq-] NOTES.— THE PASCHAL LAMB. 248 On this fifth day of the week, as the circumstances show, our Lord, after sending Peter and John to the city to prepare the Passover, himself followed them thither with the other disciples, probably towards evening. On the Passover in general, see the Introd. Note to Part VIII. PART Wit. THE FOURTH PASSOVER; OUR LORD’S PASSION; AND THE ACCOMPANYING EVENTS UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 88 133-158. Intropuctory Note.— THE Passover. [Tus Note has been slightly abridged, but not otherwise modified. ] As the events of our Lord’s Passion were intimately connected with the celebration of the Passover, those circumstances relating to that festival, which may serve to illustrate the sacred history, are here brought together. A more complete article upon this whole subject (of which the following Note is an abstract) was published by the author of these Notes in the Bibliotheca Sacra for August, 1845, pp. 405-436, to which the reader is referred. [See close of this Note. | I. Time of killing the Paschal Lamb. The paschal lamb (or kid, Ex. 12: δ) was to be selected on the tenth day of the first month, Ex. 12: 3. On the fourteenth day of the same month (called Abib in the Pentateuch, and later Nisan, Deut. 16:1; Esth. ὃ : 7) the lamb thus selected was to be killed, at a point of time designated by the expression DXDT PR, between the two evenings, fim 21: Ὁ Lev. 23:5; Num. 9: 3,5; : or, as is elsewhere said, WW NAD AVY at evening ἘΠ the going down of the sun, Deut. 16 : 6. The same phrase, =a 2, is put for the time of the daily evening sac- Tifice, Ex. 29 : 39, 41; Naw 28:4. The time thus marked was regarded by the Samaritans and Karaites as being the interval between sunset and deep twilight: see Reland, De Samar.,§ 22, in Diss. Misc., T. II., Trigland, De Kareis, chap. 4. So, also, Aben Ezra, dd Hx. 12:6. But the Pharisees and Rabbinists, according to the Mishnah (/esach., 5:3), held the first even- ing to commence with the declining sun, Gr. δείλῃ πρωΐα, and the second even- ing with the setting sun, Gr. δείλη ὀψία. Hence, according to them, the pas- chal lamb was to be killed in the interval between the ninth and eleventh hour, equivalent to our three and five o’clock Pp. Mm. That this was in fact the practice among the Jews in the time of our Lord, appears from the testimony of Josephus: Πάσχα καλεῖται, καθ᾽ ἣν θύουσι μὲν ἀπὸ ἐννάτης ὥρας μέχρι évde- κάτης, Jos., B. J., vi. 9, 8. 3. The daily evening sacrifice also was offered at the ninth hour, or three o’clock Ρ. M., Jos., Ant., xiv. 4,§ 3; Pesach., 6:13 comp. Acts 3:1, et Wetstein in loc. 244 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIIL. The true time, then, of killing the Passover in our Lord’s day, was between the ninth and eleventh hour, or towards sunset, near the close of the four- teenth day of Nisan. II. Time of eating the Passover. This was to be done the same evening. “ And they shall eat the flesh in that night, roast with fire, and unleavened bread, and with bitter herbs shall they eat it,” Ex. 12:8. The Hebrews in Egypt ate the first Passover, and struck the blood of the victims on their door-posts, on the evening before the last great plague; at midnight the Lord smote all the first-born; and in the morning the people broke up from Ram- eses on their march towards the Red Sea, namely, “on the fifteenth day of the first month, on the morrow after the Passover,” Num. 33 : 3, Hence the paschal lamb was to be slain in the afternoon of the fourteenth day of the month, and was eaten the same evening; that is, on the evening which was reckoned to and began the fifteenth day. Ill. Festival of unleavened Bread. From Ex. 12:17, 18, comp. Deut. 16:3, 4; and from Lev. 23: 6, comp. Num. 28:17; it appears that the festival of unleavened bread began strictly with the Passover-meal, at or after sunset following the fourteenth day of Nisan, and continued until sunset at the end of the twenty-first day. Comp. Jos., Ant., iil. 10, § 5. We have already seen that it was customary for the Jews, on the four- teenth day of Nisan, to cease from labor at or before mid-day ; to put away all leaven out of their houses before noon; and to slay the paschal lamb to- wards the close of the day ; see above, and Note on ὃ 132. Hence, in popular usage, the fourteenth day came very naturally to be reckoned as the begin- ning or first day of the festival, Matt. 26:17; Mark 14: 12; and Josephus also could say that the festival was celebrated for eight days; see Note on § 132. It is hardly necessary to remark that, in consequence of the close mutual relation between the Passover and the festival of unleavened bread, these terms are often used interchangeably, especially in Greek, for the whole festi- val, including both the paschal supper and the seven days of unleavened bread; see Luke 22:1; John 6:4; Acts 12: ὃ, 4; Jos., Ant, ii. 1, § 3, eomp. 9. J.,.V./3505 1: IV. Other Paschal Sacrifices. 1. In Num. 28 : 18-25, it is prescribed that on the first and last days of the festival, the fifteenth and twenty-first of Nisan, there should be a holy convocation, in which ‘*no manner of servile work” should be done. And on each of the seven days, besides the ordinary daily sacrifices of the sanctuary, there was to be “a burnt offering unto the Lord; two young bullocks, and one ram, and seven lambs of the first year ;” also a meat offering, and “one goat for a sin offering.” The first and last days of the festival, therefore, were each a day of convocation and of rest, and _ hence were strictly Sabbaths, distinct from the weekly Sabbath, except when one of them happened to fall upon this latter. 2. On the morrow after this first day of rest or Sabbath, that is, on the six- teenth day of Nisan, the first fruits of the harvest were offered, together with a lamb as a burnt offering; Lev. 23: 10-12. This rite is expressly assigned Introp. § 133 sq.] NOTES.— THE PASCHAL SUPPER. 245 by Josephus, in like manner, to the second day of the festival, the sixteenth of Nisan; Ant., iii. 10, ὃ 5. The grain offered was barley, this being the ear- liest ripe, and its harvest occurring a week or two earlier than that of wheat; Jos., 1. c.; Bibl. Res. in Palest., 11. p. 99. Until this offering was made, no husbandman could begin his harvest; nor might any one eat of the new grain; Lev. 23:14. It was therefore a rite of great importance ; and in the time of our Lord and later was performed with many ceremonies. See Libli- oth. Sacra, 1. c., p. 408. 5. There was also another sacrifice connected with the Passover, known among the later Hebrews as the Ahagigah (13.37) or festival ; of which there are traces likewise in the Old Testament. It was a festive thank-offer- ing (orn Duy Mat, Engl. Vers. “peace offering”), made by private individuals or families, in connection with the Passover, but distinct from the appointed public offerings of the temple. Such voluntary sacrifices or free-will offerings were provided for and regulated by the Mosaic law. The fat only was burned on the altar (Lev. ὃ : 3,9, 14); the priest had for his portion the breast and right shoulder (Lev. 7 : 29-34; 10: 14); and the remainder was eaten by the bringer with his family and friends in a festive manner, on the same or the next day; Lev. 7 : 16-18; 22 : 29, 30; Deut. 12: 17, 18, 27; 27:7. These private sacrifices were often connected with the public festi- vals, both in honor of the same, and as a matter of convenience; Num. 10: 10; Dent. 14: 26; 16:11, 14; comp. 1 Sam. 1: 3-5, 24, 25; 2: 12-16, 19. They might be eaten in any clean place within the city (Lev. 10: 14; Deut. 16: 11, 14); but those only might partake of them, as likewise of the Passover, who were themselves ceremonially clean; Num. 18: 11,13; John 11:55; comp. Num. 9: 10-13; 2 Chr. 30:18; Jos., B. J, vi. 9, § 3. Such voluntary private sacrifices in connection with the Passover seem to be implied in the Old Testament, in Deut. 16:2; 2 Chr. 80 : 22, 24; 35: 7-9; see more in Lrblioth. Saera, 1. c., p. 409 sq. Hence being a sacrifice, thus connected with a festival, these private free-will offerings were themselves called, at least by the later Hebrews, by the name Khagigah (7PIN) a festival. The earlier Rabbins connect the Khagigah directly with Deut. 16: 2, as above; Pesach., fol. 70, 2; Lightfoot, Hor. Heb. in Joh. 18: 28. There was, however, some difference of opinion among them, as to the particular day of the paschal festival, on which Khagigah ought to be offered, whether on the fourteenth or fifteenth of Nisan; but the weight of authority was greatly in favor of the fifteenth day ; Lightfoot, 1. 6.ἁ Yet the later accounts of the mode of celebrating the paschal supper seem to imply, that a Khagigah was ordina- rily connected with that meal. Indeed, mention is made of a “ Khagigah of the fourteenth day,” so called in distinction from the more important and for- mal ceremonial Khagigah of the Passover festival ; which latter was not regu- larly offered until the fifteenth day, when the paschal supper had already been eaten. The former was then a mere voluntary oblation of thanksgiving, made for the purpose of enlarging and diversifying the passover-meal. See Light- foot, Ministerium Templi, xiii.§ 4; ib., c. 14; Reland, Antigg. Sac., iv. § 2, 2. V. The Paschal Supper. For a full account of this meal, both in its origi- 246 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Part VIIL nal institution and as it was probably celebrated in the time of our Lord, see Biblioth. Sacra, 1. c. p. 144 sq. That the Jews in the course of ages had neg- lected some of the original precepts, and also introduced various additional ceremonies, is evident from the manner in which our Lord celebrated the sup- per, as narrated by the Evangelists. What all these additions were, we have no specific historical account from contemporary writers ; yet the precepts pre- served in the Mishnah and Talmud of Jerusalem (compiled in the third cen- tury from earlier traditions), probably refer to the most important of them, and serve to throw light upon some of the circumstances connected with the insti- tution of the Lord’s supper. See Biblioth. Sacra, 1. c. p. 411 sq. According to these authorities, four cups of red wine, usually mingled with one fourth part of water, were drunk during the meal, and served to mark its progress. The first was merely preliminary, in connection with a blessing in- voked upon the day and upon the wine; and this corresponds to the cup men- tioned in Luke 22: 17. Then followed ablutions, and the bringing in of bitter herbs, the unleavened bread, the roasted lamb, and also the Khagigah of the fourteenth day, and a broth or sauce (ΓΟ ΓΤ) made with spices. After this followed the instructions to the son, etc., respecting the Passover : and the first part of the Hadllel, or song of praise, Pss. 118, 114, was repeated. The second cup was now drunk. Next came the blessing upon each kind of food, and the guests partook of the meal reclining; the paschal lamb being eaten last. Thanks were then returned, and the third cup drunk, called ma DID, the cup of blessing ; comp. τό ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, 1 Cor. 10:16. The re mainder of the Hallel, Pss. 115-118, was now repeated and the fourth cup drunk ; which was ordinarily the end of the celebration. Sometimes a fifth cup might be added, after repeating the great Hallel, Pss. 120-137. The institution of the Eucharist probably took place at the close of the proper meal, immediately before the third cup, or cup of blessing, which would seem to have made part of it; comp. 1 Cor. 10: 16. VI. Did our Lord, the night in which he was betrayed, eat the Passover with his Disciples 3 Had we only the testimony of the first three Evangelists, not a doubt upon this question could ever arise. Their language (see ὃ 132) is full, explicit and decisive, to the effect, that our Lord’s last meal with his disciples was the regular and ordinary paschal supper of the Jews, introducing the fes- tival of unleavened bread, on the evening after the fourteenth day of Nisan. Mark says expressly, 14 : 12: ὅτε τὸ πάσχα ἔθυον, when THEY killed the Pass- over ; which, whether the subject of ἔθυον be the Jews or be indefinite, implies at least the regular and ordinary time of killing the paschal lamb. Luke’s language is, if possible, still stronger, 22:7: “Then came the day of un- leavened bread, ἔν 7) ἔδει θύεσθαι τὸ πάσχα, when the Passover Must be killed,” i. e., according to law and custom. This marks, of course, the fourteenth day of Nisan ; and on that same evening our Lord and his disciples sat down to that same passover-meal, which had thus by his own appointment been prepared for them, and of which Jesus speaks expressly as the Passover, vy. 15. Phi- lologically considered, there cannot be a shadow of doubt, but that Matthew, Mark, and Luke, intended to express, and do express, in the plainest terms, InTROD. § 133 sq-] NOTES.—THE PASCHAL SUPPER. 247 their testimony to the fact that Jesus regularly partook of the ordinary and legal passover-meal on the evening after the fourteenth of Nisan, at the same time with all the Jews. [‘ John himself clearly points to the fifteenth of Nisan, as the day of the crucifixion, when he reports that the customary re- lease of a prisoner ‘at the Passover’ (év τῷ πάσχα) was granted by Pilate on the day of crucifixion ; 18 : 39, 40.” Schaff, History Christian Church, 1. p. 134, new ed. | When, however, we turn to the Gospel of John, we seek in vain in this Evangelist for any trace of the paschal supper, as such, in connection with our Lord at that time. John narrates indeed (chap. 18) our Lord’s last meal with his disciples; which the attendant and subsequent circumstances show to have been the same with that which the other Evangelists describe as the Passover. Upon just that point, indeed, John is silent; but from this silence the inference can never be rightfully drawn that this last meal was not the Passover; any more than John’s similar silence in respect to the Lord’s supper warrants the conclusion that no such rite was ever instituted. John, as all admit, wrote his Gospel as a supplement to the others; and hence, in speaking of this last meal, he narrates only such circumstances as had not been fully set forth by the other Evangelists. He does not describe this meal as being the Passover, nor make any mention of the Eucharist, because this had been done in both cases, in the most explicit manner, by Matthew, Mark, and Luke. In this way the difference of the two reports of the same occasion is satisfactorily accounted for. But there are a few expressions in John’s Gospel, in connection with this meal, and especially with our Lord’s Passion, which taken together might, at first view, and if we had only John, seem to imply that on Friday, the day of our Lord’s crucifixion, the regular and legal Passover had not yet been eaten, but was still to be eaten on the evening after that day. The following are the passages. (a) John 13: 1, τοῦ δὲ τῆς ἑορτῆς πρὸ πάσχα. This form of expression, it is said, shows that our Lord’s last meal with his disciples took place before the Passover, and could not therefore itself have been the paschal supper. (4) John 18: 28, “ And they themselves [the Jews] went not into the judg- ment-hall, lest they should be defiled, ἀλλ’ ἵνα φάγωσι τὸ πάσχα, but that they might eat the Passover.” [The slight change of text accepted by recent editors (omitting ἵνα) does not affect the argument. The Τὰ, V. properly renders the sentence: “ And they themselves entered not into the palace (Greek Preto- rium), that they might not be defiled, but might eat the Passover.”] From this last phrase, it appears, as is averred, that the Jews were expecting to par- take of the paschal supper the ensuing evening ; and of course had not eaten it already. (0) John 19 : 14, ἦν δὲ παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχα. This “ preparation of the passover,” being the day on which Christ suffered, necessarily implies, it is al- leged, the day before the passover-meal ; which of course was to be eaten that evening. (2) John 19 : 81, ἦν yap μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου rod σαββάτου. The next 248 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIIL day after the crucifixion being the Jewish Sabbath, and that Sabbath being “a great day,” we must infer, it is argued, that it was thus called “ great ” because it coincided with the first day of the festival or fifteenth of Nisan, and was thus doubly consecrated. These four are the passages mainly urged. Some other considerations are brought forward as auxiliary. (6) In John 13 : 27-80, when Jesus said to Judas, “That thou doest, do quickly,” some of the disciples supposed this to mean, “ Buy that we have need of for the feast.” Now as this was said apparently near the close of the meal, it follows, as some urge, that the passover-meal was yet to come. (f) To the same effect, it is said, is the circumstance, that on the day of the crucifixion the Sanhedrin was convened, sat in judgment upon Jesus, and de- livered him over to death, — a public judicial act, which according to the Tal- mudists was unlawful upon the Sabbath and upon all great festival days. See Lightfoot, Hor. Heb., in Matt. 27:1; Jahn, Bibl. Archeol., IL., ii. p- 509; De Wette, Archeol., § 218. It is apparent that the whole inquiry relates-simply to the time of the Pass- over. According to all the four Evangelists, our Lord was crucified on Fri- day, the day before the Jewish Sabbath; and his last meal with his disciples took place on the preceding evening, the same night in which he was betrayed. The simple question, therefore, at issue is: Did this Friday fall upon the fif- teenth day of Nisan, or upon the fourteenth? Or, in other words, did our Lord on the evening before his crucifixion eat the Passover, as is testified by the first three Evangelists; or was the Passover still to be eaten on the even- ing after that day, as John might seem to imply ? This question has been more or less a subject of discussion in the church ever since the earliest centuries ; chiefly with a view to harmonize the diflicul- ties. It is only in recent years that the apparent difference between John and the other Evangelists has been urged to the extreme of attempting to make it irreconcilable. VII. Examination of Passages in John’s Gospel, etc. Admitting, as we must, and as we have already seen (p. 246), that the testimony of Matthew, Mark, and Luke, is too definite and explicit to be in any way set aside or modified, let us examine more closely the passages in John; and thus see whether they naturally require to be so understood or interpreted as to pre- sent any appearance of discrepancy. John obviously wrote his Gospel as supplementary to the other three. He had them then before him, and was acquainted with their contents. He was aware that the other three Evangelists had testified to the fact that Jesus par- took of the Passover with his disciples. Did John believe that their testi- mony on this point was wrong; and did he mean to correct it? If so, we should naturally expect to find some notice of the correction along with the mention of the meal itseli, which John describes as well as they. Indeed, that would have been the appropriate and only fitting place for such a correc- tion, But John has nothing of the kind; and we are therefore authorized to maintain, that it was not John’s purpose thus and there to correct or contra- InTROD. § 133 sq.] NOTES. —PASSAGES IN JOHN. 249 dict the testimony of the other Evangelists; and if not there, then much less by mere implication in other places and connections. (A) John 18 : 1, πρὸ de τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα, see p. 247, a. Here something may depend on the import of the word ἑορτή, of which the proper and only signification (like Heb. 37) is festival, not feast; that is, it implies every- where a yearly day or days of festive commemoration ; never a single meal or entertainment. Soin Num. 28:16, 17, where the paschal supper, prepared on the fourteenth of Nisan and eaten at evening, is distinguished from the festival, Heb. 374, Sept. ἑορτή, which began on the fifteenth and continued for seven days. See further Luke 2:41; 22:1; also the Lexicons and Con- cordances of the New Testament and Septuagint. Some interpreters take the phrase πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς as qualifying the action expressed in y. 4, thus making of these four verses one sentence, as in the edi- tions of Griesbach and Knapp. But the sentence thus formed is exceedingly involved and intricate, wholly unlike John’s usual manner, and that without any necessity. The second εἰδώς (v. 3) is in no sense a resumption of the first ; and strict grammatical construction certainly requires v. 1 to be made inde-' pendent. [The early divisions of the Gospels, called Eusebian Canons, make a new section begin at v. 2. Modern editors place a period at the end of v. 1, but Westcott and Hort give the other punctuation in the margin.] The force of πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς being thus limited to y. 1, it may there qualify either εἰδώς κτλ. or the words εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς. ΤΆ we take it as qualifying εἰδώς, then the sense is: “ Jesus, knowing before the festival of the Passover, that his hour was come,” ete., comp. John 12 : 28 ; Matt. 17 : 9, 22 sq.; 20: 17-19, al. In this way the passage has no bearing whatever upon the present question as to the Passover. If, on the other hand, πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς be regarded as qualifying εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς, it is equivalent to τὸ προεόρτιον, the time immediately before the festival, and refers to the commencement (at evening) of the fifteenth day of Nisan, as the first or opening day of the festival of unleavened bread, dis- tinct from the mere supper ; see Num. 28 : 16, 17, cited above. The phrase πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς is in that case equivalent to the Engl. festival-eve, and here marks the evening immediately before the ἑορτή or festival proper, on which eve, during the supper, our Lord manifested his love for his disciples ‘* unto the end,” by the touching symbolical act of washing their feet. Liicke says: “As John wrote for Greeks and other readers unacquainted with the Jewish mode of reckoning time, and is here directly speaking only of the preparation of the meal and what preceded it, — while the preparation of the passover- meal did actually take place on the fourteenth of Nisan, the true προεόρτιον, ---- he therefore could very properly use the expression πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα without intending to say that the meal itself was eaten on the fourteenth day. At any rate, the word zpo is here too indefinite and relative to draw from it the inference, that the meal described was eaten on the evening which followed the thirteenth and began the fourteenth of Nisan.” Comm. on Joh. 13 : 1. In any case, therefore, this passage does not require us to admit the infer- ence which some have drawn from it. 250 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. (B) John 18 : 28, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα φάγωσι τὸ πάσχα, see p. 247, b. This passage is perhaps the strongest of all. To bring out from it, however, the inference that on the day of the crucifixion the paschal supper had not yet been eaten, the expression φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα must be taken in the limited sense, to eat the paschal supper ; and this, it is affirmed, is the true and only usage of the phrase elsewhere in the New Testament. This last assertion is correct ; for, besides the present instance, the expression φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα occurs only five times in the New Testament, namely, Matt. 26: 17; Mark 14: 12, 14; Luke 22:11, 15; and but once in the Greek version of the Old Testament, namely, 2 Chr. 30:18; in all which passages the context limits it necessarily to the paschal supper. But it by no means hence follows, where the phrase is used generally and without the mention of any restrictive circumstances, that there also it must be taken in a like limited sense. The word πάσχα, at least, is not always so taken. In the New Testament the word is found in no less than three main significations: (a) Zhe paschal lamb; Mark 14:12; Luke 22:7; metaph.1 Cor. 5:7. (Ὁ) The paschal meal ; Matt. 26: 18, 19; Luke 22: ὃ, 18; Heb. 11 : 28; and so five times in the phrase φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα as above cited. (6) The paschal festival, compris- ing the seven days of unleavened bread ; Luke 22 : 1, ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν ἀζύμων 7 Ae youen πάσχα; 2:41, comp. 43; Matt. 26:2; John 2:13; 6:4; 11: δῦ, al. — As now there is nothing in the circumstances nor in the context of John 18 : 28, to limit the meaning of τὸ πάσχα in itself either to the paschal lamb or paschal meal, we certainly are not bound by any intrinsic necessity so to un- derstand it here in the phrase φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα. Tf, on the other hand, we adopt for it in this place the wider sense of paschal festival, two modes of in- terpretation are admissible. 1. The first mode takes τὸ πάσχα in its literal and widest sense of passover festival ; but modifies the force of φαγεῖν. In this way the phrase φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα may be understood as put, in a loose popular usage, instead of the com- mon ποιεῖν τὸ πάσχα, to keep or celebrate the passover. Precisely this form of expression occurs in the Hebrew in respect to this very festival ; 2 Chr. 30 : 22, Dat nyaw TWiT Ns NON, and they did eat the festival seven days: So the Seventy at least thee eee it, as is manifest from their version, καὶ συνετέλεσαν τὴν ἑορτὴν τῶν ἀζύμων ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας, and they fulfilled (kept) the festi- val of unleavened bread seven days. 2. The second mode retains φαγεῖν in its literal acceptation; takes πάσχα still in its widest signification; but assigns to the latter, by metonymy, the sense of paschal sacrifices, that is, the voluntary peace offerings and thank offerings made in the temple during the paschal festival, and more especially on the fifteenth day of Nisan, called in later times Khagigah; see p. 245 above. That the word πάσχα, in the general sense of festival, is susceptible of such a metonymy, is apparent from Hebrew analogies. Thus, e. g-, 30, the common word for festival; as Ps. 118 : 27, moynaya ὙΌΣ, bind ae sacrifice ( festive-offering) with cords, etc. Ex. 23:18; Mal. 2:38. The same metonymy is assumed by some modern interpreters in the passages just cited above, 2 Chr. 30, 22, Ty5m, pr. festival, by meton., festive-offerings ; where InTROD. § 133 sq-] NOTES.— PASSAGES IN JOHN. 251 the next clause specifies the kind of sacrifices, namely, peace offerings ; see the Lexicons of Simonis, Gesenius, ete. So too in the Talmud, where it is asked : MOD 2, what is the Passover ? and the reply is: MD5 saw, the peace offer- ings of the Passover, that is, the Khagigah. Rosh Hashshana, v. 1; see Re- land, Antt. Sac., iv. 3, 11. It is manifest, that both the above methods of interpretation are founded on fair analogies ; and that either of them relieves us from the necessity of refer- ring the phrase in question to the paschal supper, and thus removes the alleged difficulty. The chief priests and other members of the Sanhedrin, on the morning of the first day of the festival, were unwilling to defile themselves by entering beneath the roof of the Gentile procurator; since in that way they would have been debarred from partaking of the sacrificial offerings and ban- quets, which were customary on that day in the temple and elsewhere; and in which they, from their station, were entitled and expected to participate. This view receives some further confirmation from the circumstance that the defilement which the Jews would thus have contracted by entering the dwell- ing of a heathen, could only have belonged to that class of impurities from which a person might be cleansed the same day by ablution; the BY SHAD, ablutions of a day, so called by the Talmudists. See Lev. 15:5 sq.; 17: 15; 22:6,7; Num. 19:7 sq.; Maimonides, Pesach, vi. 1; Lightfoot, Hor. Heb.,in Joh. 18 : 28; Winer, Realw., 11. p. 518, 3te Ausg. If now τὸ πάσχα in John 18 : 28 was truly the paschal supper, and was not to take place un- til the evening after the day of the crucifixion, then this defilement of a day could: have been no bar to their partaking of it; for at evening they were clean. Their scruple, therefore, in order to be well founded, could have had reference only to the Khagigah or paschal sacrifices offered during the same day before evening. See Bynwaus, De Morte J. ΟἿ, iii. 1, p. 13. [It is important to bear in mind that John wrote later than the other Evan- gelists, after the destruction of Jerusalem, and that he distinguishes “ the Jews” in a peculiar way. “Jewish institutions had, in his eyes, been emptied of their significance and value.” (Andrews.) There are other indications, even in his use of gedgraphical terms, of this position toward the Jews. Hence we may expect him to be less exact in his references to the Passover rites, and have a right to interpret his language accordingly. | (C) John 19 : 14, ἣν δὲ παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχα, see p. 247, 6. Does this παρα- oxevy refer, as usual, to the Jewish Sabbath, which actually occurred the next day ? or does it here refer to the first day of the festival of the Passover per se, and as distinct from the Sabbath? It is only on the latter supposition, that the passage can be made in any way to conflict with the testimony of the other Evangelists. The Greek word παρασκευή is elsewhere found five times in the New Testa- ment, namely, Matt. 27: 62; Mark 15:42; Luke 23:54; John 19 : 31, 42. Mark defines it to be the προσάββατον, fore-sabbath, the day or hours immediately preceding the weekly Sabbath and devoted to preparation for that sacred day. No trace of any such observance is found in the Old Testament. Yet the strictness of the law respecting the Sabbath, which forbade the kin- 252 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. dling of fire and, of course, the preparation of food on that day (Ex. 35: 2, 3, comp. 16 : 22-27), would very naturally lead to the introduction of such a custom. After the exile, the προσάββατον is once mentioned in the Apocry- pha, Judith 8:6. In later times, 7 παρασκευή would seem to have become the usual Greek term for this observance; as in the New Testament and in Josephus; Ant., xvi. 6, § 2. In the still later Hebrew, it bore the specific ap- pellation of SADANY, eve, as being the Naw 2, eve of the Sabbath. Primarily and strictly this παρασκευή or eve would seem to haye com- menced not earlier than the ninth hour of the preceding day; as is perhaps implied in the decree of Augustus in favor of the Jews, preserved by Jose- phus, Ant., xvi. 6, § 2: ἐγγύας τε μὴ ὁμολογεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐν σάββασιν ἢ τῇ πρὸ ταύτης παρασκεὺυῃῇ ἀπὸ ὥρας ἐννάτης. But in process of time, the same Hebrew word came in popular usage to be the distinctive name for the whole day be- fore the Jewish Sabbath, that is, for the sixth day of the week or Friday. Nor was the use of the Hebrew word for the Greek term παρασκευή confined to the Jews; for the like Syriac form is found for παρασκευή in the Syriac version of the New Testament; and in like manner, the corresponding Arabic word is given in the Camoos as an ancient name for Friday. We are there- fore entitled to infer that ἡ παρασκευή; that is, the παρασκευή of the weekly Sabbath, became at an early date, among Jews, Syrians, and Arabs, a current appellation for the sixth day of the week. Compare also the very peculiar phraseology of Matt. 27 : 62; as also the German Sonnabend for Saturday. The reasons which operated to introduce a προσάββατον, or preparation for the Sabbath, did not exist in the case of the other festivals, on which the preparation of food was not forbidden; Ex. 12:16. Nevertheless, what had become customary in respect to the Sabbath would naturally be imitated in other cases ; and accordingly, after the exile, we find mention of the zpovouyy- via, eve of the new-moon, Judith 8 : 6. In the Talmudists, a passover-eve, MDH II, is likewise spoken of. But what this could well have been, so long as the Passover (paschal supper) was regularly celebrated at Jerusalem, it is difficult to perceive. The eve (27Y) before the passover-festival could have included, at most, only the evening and the few hours before sunset at the close of the fourteenth of Nisan; like the primary usage in respect to the προσάββατον, as we have just seen. But according to all usage of language, both in the Old and New Testament, those hours and that evening were part and parcel of the passover-festival itself, and not its preparation; unless, in- deed, the paschal meal and its accompaniments be called the preparation of the subsequent festival of seven days; which again is contrary to all usage. It would seem most probable, therefore, that this mode of expression did not arise until after the destruction of the temple and the consequent cessation of the regular and legal paschal meal; when, of course, the seven days of un- leavened bread became the main festival. But even admitting that a passover-eve (D577 Ay) did exist in the time of our Lord; still, the expression could in no legitimate way be so far ex- tended as to include more than a few hours before sunset. It could not have commenced apparently before the ninth hour, when they began to kill the Ivrrop. § 133 sq-] | NOTES. — PASSAGES IN JOHN. 258 paschal lamb; see p. 243. On the other hand, the Hebrew term SM2NY, for which the Greek παρασκευή stands in the New Testament, was employed, as we have seen, as a specific name in popular usage for the whole sixth day of the week or Friday, not only by the Jews, but also by the Syrians and Arabs. Hence, when John here says: ἣν δὲ παρασκευή τοὴ πάσχα, ὥρα δὲ ooel ἕκτη, there is a twofold difficulty in referring his language to ἃ prepara- tion or eve of the regular Passover ; Jirst, because apparently no such eve or preparation did or could well then exist; and secondly, because, it being then the sixth hour or mid-day, the eve or time of preparation (supposing it to ex- ist) had not yet come, and the language was therefore inapplicable. But if John be understood as speaking of the weekly παρασκευή or προσάββατον, which was a common name for the whole of Friday, then the mention of the sixth hour was natural and appropriate. We come then to the conclusion that if John (like Mark in chap. 15 : 42) had here defined the phrase in question, he would probably have written on this wise: ἦν δὲ παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχα, ὅ ἐστι προσάββατον τοῦ πάσχα, that is, the paschal Friday, the day of preparation or fore-sabbath which occurred during the pas- chal festival. And further, in the only other two instances where John uses the word παρασκευή, he applies it to this very same day of our Lord’s crucifix- ion, and in this very same sense of the weekly παρασκευή, preceding the weekly Sabbath; John 19: 31, 42. (D) John 19 : 31, ἢν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, see p. 247, d. Flere, as is alleged, it is the coincidence of the first festival day with the Sab- bath that made the latter a “great” day. This would certainly be the effect of such a coincidence; but the Sabbath of the Passover would also be still a “ oreat”’ day, even when it fell upon the second day of the festival. The last day of the festival of Tabernacles, as a day of convocation, is called “ that great day ;” though in itself not more sacred than the first day ; John 7 : 37, comp. Lev. 23 : 33-36. So S72 ND, the calling of assemblies, Is. 1 : 13, is rendered ἡμέρα μεγάλη by the Seventy, mphyiie that in their estimation any day of solemn convocation was a great day. The Sabbath, then, upon which the sixteenth of Nisan or second day of the festival fell, might be called “great” for various reasons. First, as the Sabbath of the great national fes- tival, when all Israel was gathered before the Lord. Secondly, as the day when the first fruits were presented with solemn rites in the temple; a cere- mony paramount in its obligations even to the Sabbath; see above, page 244. Thirdly, because on that day they began to reckon the fifty days until the fes- tival of Pentecost, Lev. 23 : 15 sq. — In all these circumstances there is cer- tainly enough to warrant the epithet “great” as applied to the Sabbath on which the sixteenth of Nisan might fall, as compared with other Sabbaths. There exists, therefore, no necessity, and, indeed, no reason, for supposing that John by this language meant to describe the Sabbath in question as coin- cident. with the first paschal day or fifteenth of Nisan. (E) John 13 : 27-30; seep. 248, 6. Here the words: “ Buy what we have need of, εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν, for the festival,’ have been misunderstood, by tak- ing ἑορτή for the paschal supper, a signification which is quite foreign to its 254 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII see p. 249 above. The disciples thought Judas was to buy the things neces- sary. for the festival on the fifteenth and following days. If now our Lord’s words were spoken on the evening preceding and introducing the fifteenth of Nisan, they were appropriate ; for some haste was necessary, since it was al- ready quite late to make purchases for the next day. But if they were uttered on the evening preceding and introducing the fourteenth of Nisan, they were not thus appropriate; for then a whole day was yet to intervene before the festival. This passage therefore confirms, rather than contradicts, the testimony of the other Evangelists. (Ff) There remains the objection, that a public judicial act, like that by which Jesus was condemned and executed, was unlawful upon the Sabbath and on all great festival days; see above, p. 248, f This consideration has, at first view, some weight, and has been often and strenuously urged ; yet it is counterbalanced by several circumstances which very greatly weaken its force. The execution itself took place under Roman authority ; and therefore does not here come into account. And as to the proceedings of the Sanhedrin, even admitting that the prohibitory precepts already existed (which is very doubtful), yet there are in the Mishna and Gemara other precepts of equal antiquity and authority, which actually direct and regulate the meeting and action of that body on the Sabbath and on festival days; see Mishn. Sanhedr. x. 4; Gemar. Sanhedr., x.; Tholuck, Comm. in Joh., p. 304 sq. 6te Aufl. But besides all this, the chief priests and Pharisees and scribes who composed the Sanhedrin, are everywhere denounced by our Lord as hypocrites, Matt. 23 : 1 sq. Such men, in their rage against Jesus, would hardly have been restrained even by their own precepts. They professed likewise, and perhaps some of them believed, that they were doing God service; and regarded the condem- nation of Jesus as a work of religious duty, paramount to the obligations of any festival. Nor are other examples of such a procedure by any means wanting. We learn from John 10 : 22, 31 that on the festival of Dedication, as Jesus was teaching in the temple, “ the Jews took up stones to stone him.” On the day after the crucifixion, which, as all agree, was a Sabbath and a “creat day,” the Sanhedrin applied to Pilate for a watch; and themselves caused the sepulchre to be sealed, and the watch to be set; Matt. 27 : 62 sq. A stronger instance still is recorded in John 7 : 382, 37, 44, 45; where it ap- pears that on the last great day of the festival of Tabernacles, the Sanhedrin were in session and waiting for Jesus to be brought before them as a prisoner. Nor was it merely a casual or packed meeting, but one regularly convened ; for Nicodemus was with them, v. 50. And, finally, according to Matt. 26 : 3-5, the Sanhedrin, when afterwards consulting to take Jesus and put him to death, decided not to do it on the festival. Why? because it would be un- lawful? Not at all; but simply [“ lest a tumult arise among the people”). But when, through the treachery of Judas, this danger was avoided, the occa- sion was too opportune not to be gladly seized upon even on a great festival day. All these considerations seem to me to sweep away the whole force of this objection, INTROD. § 133 sq.] NOTES.— HISTORICAL TESTIMONY. 255 Such then is a general review of the passages and arguments, on the strength of which the alleged discrepancy between John and the other Evan- gelists in respect to this Passover has usually been maintained. Nothing has here been assumed, and nothing brought forward, except as founded on just inference and safe analogy. After repeated and calm consideration, there rests upon my own mind a clear conviction that there is nothing in the lan- guage of John, or in the attendant circumstances, which upon fair interpreta- tion requires or permits us to believe that the beloved disciple either intended to correct, or has in fact corrected or contradicted, the explicit and unques- tionable testimony of Matthew, Mark, and Luke. VIL. Larly Historical Testimony. Some circumstances in the early his- tory of the Christian church seem to favor the idea that, among the primitive teachers, those who were most familiar with the writings and views of the Apostle John held to the belief that our Lord did celebrate the regular Pass- over with his disciples on the evening before his crucifixion. The question which we have been discussing seems to have first arisen in connection with the great Passover controversy, in the latter part of the second century. The churches of Asia Minor, gathered chiefly from Jewish converts, continued the keeping of the Passover on the evening after the fourteenth of Nisan, simul- taneously with the Jews; and made this the central point of their celebration of our Lord’s passion and resurrection, on whatever day of the week it might occur. But the Western churches, formed mostly from Gentile converts, dis- carded the Passover; and celebrated annually the resurrection of our Lord on a Sunday, and observed the preceding Friday as a day of penitence and fast- ing. The advocates of the course pursued by the Western churches took the ground that “the last meal of Jesus with his disciples was not the Passover ; since according to John’s Gospel Christ partook of it on the thirteenth of Ni- san; while on the following day, which was the appointed time for the Jew- ish Passover, he offered up himself as the true sacrifice for mankind, of which the Passover was the type;” see in Chron. Pasch., I. p. 13, ed. Dindorf. On the other side Polycarp testified that he had once celebrated the regular Jewish Passover with the Apostle John; and Polycrates, bishop of Ephesus, in an epistle to Victor, Bishop of Rome, appealed to the testimony of the Apostles John and Philip, and that of other bishops and teachers, “that all kept the day of the Passover on the fourteenth according to the Gospel ;” Euseb., Hist. Ece., v. 24. It is hence evident that the teachers and churches of Asia Minor, among whom John had lived and taught, celebrated the Pass- over on the evening after the fourteenth of Nisan, in agreement, as they held, with the example of John himself, and κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, “according to the Gospel ;” a phrase which can have reference only to that single celebration of the Passover, which, according to Matthew, Mark, and Luke, our Lord held with his disciples the evening on which he was betrayed. We are there- fore entitled to draw from the language of Polycrates this inference, namely, that he and those before him in Asia Minor, who had been familiar with John and other Apostles, had no belief that John’s Gospel contained anything re- 256 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. specting the Passever at variance with the testimony of the other Evange- lists. See the subject more fully treated in Bibliotheca Sacra, 1. c., p. 428 sq. Conclusion. It has been the object of this Note to show that upon all grounds, both of philology and history, the conclusion is valid and irrefraga- ble that the testimony of John in respect to the Passover need not be, and is not to be, understood as conflicting with that of Matthew, Mark, and Luke. For a review of other proposed methods of conciliation, and for the litera- ture of the subject, the student is referred to the author’s article above-men- tioned, in the Aibliotheca Sacra for August, 1845, pp. 405-436. [An excel- lent statement of the arguments on both sides, but concluding in favor of Dr. Robinson’s position, will be found in Andrews, Life of our Lord, pp. 423- 460. The recent commentaries, especially Lange, Matthew and John, contain full exegetical discussions. There is as yet no sign of unanimity. Wiese- ler, Lichtenstein, Hengstenberg, Ebrard, Norton, Keil, Andrews, Schaff, Milligan (Popular Commentary), Plumptre (illicott’s Commentary), McClel- lan, and many others accept the view defended in the above Note. The ear- lier date (18th of Nisan) is maintained, among others, by Bleek, DeWette, Meyer, Ewald, Stier, Greswell, Ellicott (Life of Christ), Godet (Commen- tary, Luke and John), Farrar (Life of Christ), and Westcott (Speaker's Com- mentary, John). Schiirer has (in a monograph on the subject) recently op- posed the interpretation of φάγωσιν τὸ πάσχα, which refers it to the paschal festival. ] § 153. For the cup mentioned by Luke in v. 17, see the preceding Intro- ductory Note, p. 246. The contention among the disciples had apparently occurred quite recently, perhaps even in the guest-chamber while taking their places at the table. That they were prone to yield to such a spirit is evident from the instances recorded in § 79 and also § 108. Our Lord on this solemn occasion reproves them ; especially by the touching act of washing their feet; see ὃ 134. —'The aorist ἐγένετο (Luke 22 : 24) is to be rendered as the pluperfect; see Note on § 145. [The order accepted by Dr. Robinson can be maintained without tak- ing this aorist as a pluperfect. The Greek would use the aorist to indicate some single past act, and the pluperfect only when it was designed to express the priority to some other past act. ] § 134, The washing of the disciples’ feet by their Lord and Master was an impressive lesson, that they should live in harmony and love and humility one witb another. The occasion of this act was their previous contention, as related by Luke in ὃ 133. Compare Luke 24: 26 sq. with John 198 : 16 sq. John’s narrative is supplementary to that of Luke; and therefore he does not speak of the contention itself, because the latter had already described it. On the phrase πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα, v. 1, see above in Introd. Note, p. 217. [The correct text in v. 2 is δείπνου γινομένου, which the R. V. properly renders: “during supper.” This sustains Dr. Robinson’s view of the time; but the other reading (γενομένου) would not bear this sense.] The time of the action was probably after they had taken their places at table, and before they had partaken of the proper meal; perhaps between the first and second cups of wine; see p. 246 above. §§ 133-137.] NOTES.— THE PASCHAL SUPPER. 201 § 135. The sequence of the transactions during the supper appears to have been the following: The taking of their places at table; the contention; the first cup of wine; the washing of the disciples’ feet, and reproof (88 1383, 134); the pointing out of the traitor (§ 135) ; [institution of the Lord’s Sup- per (§ 136); the foretelling of Peter’s denial (§ 137), etc.]. Luke’s order differs from that of Matthew and Mark in placing by anticipation the institu- tion of the Eucharist before the pointing out of the traitor, ete. He was ap- parently led to this by the mention of the first cup of wine, vv. 17,18. After- wards he returns and narrates the previous circumstances. [The δὲ 136, 137 are transposed for the reasons given under § 136. ] In the present section Jesus first declares that one of the twelve shall be- tray Him; they in amazement inquire, “ Lord, is it 1? is it 1?” and Peter makes a sign to John, leaning on Jesus’ bosom, that he should ask who it was. John does so; and Jesus gives him privately a sign by which he may know the traitor, namely, the sop. The amazement and inquiry still continuing, Jesus gives the sop to Judas; who then, conscience-smitten, but desiring to conceal his confusion, asks, as the others had done, “ Lord, is it I?” Jesus answers him, and he immediately goes out, before the institution-of the Ku- charist; comp. John 13 : 26 sq. [The presence of Judas at the Lord’s Sup- per is extremely improbable, but has been strenuously maintained by many commentators, and connected with questions respecting the Eucharist. The ablest defender of the presence of Judas is Godet, who, however, accepts in the main the correctness of Luke’s order.] For John 13 : 28, 29, see Introd. Note, p. 253. [§ 136. The institution of the Lord’s Supper is placed before the prophecy of Peter’s denial, etc., for the following reasons: (1) Matthew and Mark give this order; (2) this arrangement reduces the variations of order in Luke’s narrative; (3) the account of John omits all direct reference to the Lord’s Supper, and it may be placed after v. 35 quite as naturally as after v. 38; (4) Matthew and Mark place the warning to Peter after the mention of the going out to the Mount of Olives, and this points to a position after the Lord’s Supper. See § 137.] The institution of the Lord’s Supper took place, obviously, at the close of the Passover-meal, and in connection with the “cup of blessing,” or third cup, which terminated the meal proper; comp. 1 Cor. 10 : 16, and see p. 246, above. With this view accords the pera τὸ δειπνῆσαι of Luke 22 : 20 and 1 Cor. 11 : 25. Matthew and Mark speak of Jesus as breaking the bread ἐσθι- όντων αὐτῶν, which implies nothing more than “during the meal,” while they were yet eating; and does not require the institution of the bread to be sepa- rated from that of the cup. These two writers also make the institution the last act before going out to the Mount of Olives; Matt. 26:30; Mark 14: 26. Luke by a prolepsis places the institution before all the transactions connected with it. § 137. John lets the warnings to Peter immediately follow the pointing out of the traitor [see § 136]; Matthew and Mark narrate the warning to Peter, as if given on the way to the Mount of Olives; Matt. 26: 30,36; Mark 14: 17 258 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Part VIII. 26, 82. But Luke, like John, places it before they went out; 22: 34, 35. [This assumes that the warnings were uttered but once. The earlier position is necessary in that case, though it is more naturally placed after the Lord’s Supper. But since Matthew and Mark connect the warning with another important prophecy, not mentioned by the other two Evangelists and with difficulty fitted into their narratives, it seems probable that the warning was spoken first in the room in Jerusalem (Luke and John) and repeated on the way to Gethsemane (Matthew and Mark); comp. ὃ 142. This accords with Peter’s character, and accounts for the somewhat increased emphasis in the warnings as given by Matthew and Mark.— It may be added that the incident about the swords cannot readily be placed before the institution of the Lord’s Supper. | Mark says, “ Before the cock crow twice,” v. 80; the other Evangelists have simply “ Before the cock crow”; see Note on § 144. § 142. Matthew relates that our Lord went away thrice and prayed. Mark speaks of his going away twice only, but mentions his coming again the third time, v. 41; and therefore accords with Matthew. According to Luke, Jesus goes away and prays, and an angel strengthens him; after which he prays the “more earnestly,” v.44. The three Evangelists, therefore, agree in their narratives. § 145. Jesus advances to meet the crowd, and declares himself to be the person whom they sought. At the same time Judas, in order to fulfill his bargain, comes up and salutes Him with a kiss. [§§ 144-146. The Examination of our Lord by the Jewish Rulers. The Notes of Dr. Robinson accept but one examination of our Lord by the Jewish rulers. ‘This view is open to serious objection: (a) It is opposed by the cor- rect rendering of John 18 : 24: “ Annas therefore sent him bound unto Caia- phas, the high priest.” The verb here cannot be taken as equivalent to the pluperfect (see ὃ 145). (0) It fails to account for the order in John’s Gospel, which is that of an eye-witness, both of the early part of the trial and of Peter’s denial. (6) It confuses two distinct statements in Matthew and Mark: those which tell of a night examination (Matt. 26 : 57-68; Mark 14: 58-65) and also of a morning assembly of the Sanhedrin (Matt. 27:1; Mark 15:7), at the same time failing to account for the position these Evangelists assign to Peter’s denials. (d) It dislocates without necessity the course of Luke’s narrative. If the several accounts are taken in their natural sense, they suggest (1) an informal examination before Annas, narrated by John (18 : 19-28); (2) a more formal examination before Caiaphas and many of the Sanhedrin, narrated by Matthew and Mark (the denials of Peter occurring during the period from the close of the former to the end of the latter); then in the morning (3) a formal condemnation narrated somewhat fully by Luke, but hinted at by Matthew and Mark. Such a repetitition is not in itself im- probable, and the legal condemnation could not take place before morning. The main difficulty is with the examination before Annas. If that is accepted, it must be admitted that John calls him “high-priest.” Though this is not done elsewhere by that Evangelist, it seems more probable that he should § 142, 143, 144.] NOTES. —PETER’S DENIALS, ETC. 259 thus term Annas (who was recognized as high priest by the Jews) than that he should use the Greek aorist as a pluperfect. Writing later, he would nat- urally tell of what was not noticed by the other Evangelist, especially as he was himself present in “the court of the high priest.” This view implies that Annas and Caiaphas, for convenience, occupied the same house. See Godet, Commentaries on Luke and John. The arrangement of Greek text in the Harmony has, however, not been altered, and Dr. Robinson’s statement of his view is retained in full. The difference of opinion is so great, and the difficulties so serious, that it seems best to present fully both sides. ] § 144. The presence of the chief priests and scribes and elders, that is, the Sanhedrin, at the house of Caiaphas, as noted by Matthew and Mark, seems mentioned here by anticipation. According to Luke 22: 66, they did not come together until after daybreak; see § 145. [See Note above. The for- mal morning meeting, at all events, was held. ] An oriental house is usually built around a quadrangular interior court ; into which there is a passage (sometimes arched) through the front part of the house, closed next the street by a heavy folding gate, with a smaller wicket for single persons, kept by a porter. In the text, the interior court, often paved or flagged, and open to the sky, is the αὐλή, where the attendants made a fire; and the passage beneath the front of the house from the street to this court is the προαύλιον or πυλών in Matt. 26:71; Mark 14:68. The place where Jesus stood before the high priest may have been an open room or place of audience on the ground-floor, in the rear or on one side of the court; such rooms, open in front, being customary. It was close upon the court; for Jesus heard all that was going on around the fire, and turned and looked upon Peter; Luke 22: 61. Peter’s first denial took place at the fire in the middle of the court, on his being questioned by the female porter. — Peter then, according to Matthew and Mark, retreats into the passage leading to the street (πυλών, προαύλιον), where he is again questioned, and makes his second denial. Luke and John do not specify the place. The Evangelists differ in their statements here as to the person who now questioned him. Mark says the same maid (ἡ παιδίσκη) saw him again (πάλιν), and began to question him, v. 69; Matthew has ἄλλη, another maid, v. 71; Luke writes érepos, another person, or another man, ἄνθρωπος, ν. 98; while John uses the indefinite form εἶπον, they said. As, according to Matthew (v. 71) and Mark (v. 69), there were several persons present, Peter may have been interrogated by several.—The third denial took place about an hour after, probably near the fire, or at least within the court, where our Lord and Peter could see each other, Luke 22:61. Here Matthew and Mark speak of several interrogators; Luke has ἄλλος τις, and John specifies the servant of the high priest. [The most satisfactory explana- tion accepts three episodes of denial, different particulars being given by the different Evangelists. The last occasion was probably at the close of the night examination before Caiaphas. ] The three denials are here placed together for convenience, although during Se mee 260 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIL the intervals between them the examination of Jesus was going on before the high priest; the progress of which is given in § 145, Mark relates that the cock crowed twice, vv. 68, 72; the others speak only of his crowing once. [The text in Mark 14 : 68 is in doubt; but y. 72 plainly states that it was the second time.] This accords also with their respective accounts of our Lord’s prophecy; see § 137. The cock often crows irregu- larly about midnight or not long after; and again always and regularly about the third hour or day-break. When, therefore, “the cock-crowing ” is spoken of alone, this last is always meant. Hence the name ἀἄλεκτοροφωνία, cock- crowing, for the third watch of the night, which ended at the third hour after midnight; Mark 13:35. Mark therefore here relates more definitely; the others more generally. § 145. This examination by Caiaphas, John 18 : 19-23, took place, accord- ing to John, soon after Peter’s first denial; see ὃ 144. Not improbably the high priest again withdrew, after having sent off messengers to convoke the Sanhedrin, which met at early dawn, Luke 22 : 66.— Luke 22 : 65-65 is transposed, in accordance with Matthew and Mark. [But see Note above. | It has been supposed by some that this examination was held before Annas, John 18:13. But Peter’s denials all took place in the house of Caiaphas, Matt. 26:57; John 18: 24 sq., comp. v. 28; and Caiaphas alone was high priest. Hence the aorist ἀπέστειλεν, in John 18 : 24, is to be rendered by the pluperfect : ‘‘ Annas had sent him,” ete. Such a use of the aorist is not un- frequent, where an earlier circumstance is inserted afterwards, Matt. 14: 3, 4; 26: 48, comp. Mark 14:44; Luke 22 : 24; or also in relative clauses, Luke 19:15; 24:1; John 11:30; Acts 1:2. See Winer, Gramm., § 41: 5; Buttmann, ὃ 137, n. 1; Kiihner, Ausf Gramm., ὃ 444. [Many of the cases above cited are not examples of the use referred to. The Greek aorist in a dependent clause has its usual force; but the relation to the previous clause makes it necessary to express the tense by the English pluperfect. Such a usage is not a proof that the Greeks used the aorist in a leading clause instead of the pluperfect. The apparent cases are only such as express a sin- gle past fact without any relation to some other fact, previously mentioned, that may have followed it. Here, where οὖν is the connective, the aorist cannot be properly rendered by the English pluperfect, since οὖν denotes sequence. | § 146. On John 18 : 28 see Introd. Note, p. 250. [According to the view given in the Note on §§ 144-146, Luke 22 : 66-72 should be placed parallel with Matt. 27: 1; Mark 15:1; while 23:1 is, in any case, parallel with Matt. 27 : 2, and the latter half of Mark 15: 1.] § 149. The χλαμὺς κοκκίνη of Matt. 27 : 28, and the ἱμάτιον πορφυροῦν of John 19 : 2, are put for the paludamentum or military cloak worn by officers ; see Adam’s Lom. Antt., p. 371; Smith’s Dict. of Anitt., art. Paludamentum. The terms κόκκινος, coccus-dyed, crimson, and πορφυροῦς, purple, seem to be nearly synonymous ; just as in English purple-red and crimson are often in- terchanged. So Horace, Sat., II. vi. 102, “rubro cocco tincta vestis,” which in v. 106 is “ vestis purpurea.” § 150. On the phrase παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχα, v. 14, see the Introd. Note, p. § 145-152.] NOTES. 261 251. — In the same verse the expression ὥρα δὲ ὡσεὶ ἕκτη does not accord with the dpa τρίτη of Mark 15: 25; see in ὃ 155. But the ὥρα τρίτη of Mark, as the hour of the crucifixion, is sustained by the whole course of the transac- tions and circumstances ; as also by the fact stated by Matthew, Mark, and Luke, that the darkness commenced at the s¢xth hour, after Jesus had already for some time hung upon the cross; see ὃ 155 init. The reading ἕκτῃ in John is therefore probably an early error of transcription for τρίτη. [The num- eral signs were similar, but such an error is unlikely. No recent editor accepts the reading. The internal evidence is decidedly against it, since the scribes would be likely to correct the numeral to conform with the accounts of the Syn- optists. It has been suggested that Mark indicates the time when the scourg- ing took place, that being regarded as part of the crucifixion, while John, by “ about the sixth hour,” means “ towards noon-day.” The Synoptists are specific in their statement respecting the darkness.] The suggestion of some com- mentators, that John here computes the hours from midnight, seems to be with- out any historical foundation. [The usage of the Evangelist himself also seems against this view. ] The time, also, which would thus result, namely, sunrise, would be much too early for the course of events. § 151. Judas repented, it would seem, as soon as he saw that Jesus was de- livered over to be crucified. Till then he had hoped, perhaps, to enjoy the reward of his treachery, without involving himself in the guilt of his Master’s blood. According to Matthew (v. 5), Judas “strangled,” ὦ. e., hanged himself, ἀπήγξατο. Luke says in Acts 1 : 18, * falling headlong (πρηνὴς γενόμενος), he burst asunder.” ‘These two accounts are not inconsistent with each other; the rope breaking, the fall might easily be such as to cause the bursting of the abdomen. In Acts 1:18 ἐκτήσατο is to be rendered: he gave occasion to purchase, was the occasion of purchasing. For such a usage, see Heb. 2:10; Matt. 27-603 John 3 : 22, comp. 4:2; Rom. 14:15; 1 Cor.7:16; 1 Tim. 4: 16; Rev. 22 : 20, comp. 16, etc. The quotation in Matt. 27:9, 10 is found, not in Jeremiah, but in Zech. 11:12sq. The reading ἹἹερεμίου is therefore most probably an early error of a transcriber, misled by a reminiscence of Jer. 18: 1 sq. The Syriac version, the earliest of all, as also several other versions and manuscripts, have simply διὰ τοῦ προφήτου, which is apparently the true reading. Other later author- ities read Ζαχαρίου. [Origen suggested the later reading, and a number of the Fathers discuss the difficulty. This shows that ‘Iepeufov was the received reading in the second century. The simplest explanation is that the name “ Jeremiah” is applied to the whole book of the prophets, since the Jews placed that prophet first. Many other theories have been suggested, most of them quite fanciful. ] § 152. Jesus bore his cross at first; but he being probably faint from ex- haustion, Simon was compelled to bear it after him. [Simon may have car- ried only the hinder part of the cross. ] The ὄξος μετὰ χολῆς μεμιγμένον of Matt. 27 : 34, is the same with the ἐσμυρ- 262 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. μισμένον οἶνον of Mark 15 : 23, namely, cheap acid wine mingled with myrrh. Such a drink was given to persons about to be executed, in order to stupefy them. Babylon. Sanhedr., fol. 43, 1: “prodeunti ad supplicium capitis potam dederunt, granum thuris in poculo vini, ut turbaretur intellectus ejus;” in allusion to Prov. 81:6. See Lightfoot, Hor. Heb.,in Matt. 1. ο. § 153. Various slight transpositions in the verses are made in this Section, in order to present their parallelism to the eye. — On the four different forms of the title on the cross, see Note on § 15. [It is probable, though not de- monstrable, that three of the Evangelists give respectively the form used in one of the three languages, while Mark gives “the King of the Jews,” which was common to all the three forms. ] § 154. According to Matthew and Mark, both the malefactors reviled Je- sus ; while, according to Luke, one was penitent. In the former Evangelists there is here an enallage of number; the plural being put for the singular. This is often done, where the predicate relates strictly to one subject while yet the writer expresses the idea generally. [This method of explaining the different statements is open to serious objection. ‘The Gospels are historical books ; the writers, however they were inspired, were not omniscient, or inde- pendent of literary method. It seems far more likely that two of them were not aware of the fact mentioned by Luke than that they should use the plural for the singular. This holds good against most of the examples cited by Dr. , Proce Ἴ So Matt. 20 : 8, comp. enn 12:4; Matt. 2: 20; 9:85 Mam : 17, comp. Matt. 15:15; Mark 5:31, comp. Luke 8: 45; Matt. 24:1, comp. Mark 13:1; John 19: 29, comp. Matt. 27 : 48, etc. See Winer, Gramm., ὃ 27 : 2.— For the ὀξος in Luke 23 : 86, see Note on ὃ 155. 8 155. In Matt. 27 : 46 ἡλί is the Heb. SOR, used also in the Targum Ps. 22:2; and in Mark 15: 34 ἐλωΐ is the Aram. STOR both signifying my God. [Notice also the variations in the spelling of the other words of the He- brew citation, as given in the critical notes. ] The ὄξος in Matt. 22 : 48 and the parallel verses is here the posea or com- mon drink of the Roman soldiers, namely, cheap acid wine mingled with wa- ter. In Matthew and Mark the sponge is said to be put upon a reed; in John, upon hyssop. Here, probably, a stalk or stem of hyssop is to be under- stood ; the cross not being of any great height. The particular plant desig- nated by the ΣΤ and ὕσσωπος of the Honea has not yet been fully ascer- tained by botanists. [But see Bible Dictionaries.] It probably included not only the hyssop of the shops, but also other aromatic plants, as mint, wild marjoram, etc. [The arrangement of the “Seven Words from the Cross” given by Dr. Robinson is that generally accepted. He seems to give the last place to the exclamation : “ Father,” etc., which is the more probable order. | § 156. Matt. 27 : 55, 56, etc., refers to a later point of time than John 19 : 25 sq. Mary and the other women had now retired to a distance from the scene of suffering. [As Salome is mentioned by Matthew and Mark, not by John, it seems ΠΩ that she is “" the sister of his mother” (John 19 : 26). Mary had withdrawn before the time included in this section. ] § 153-InTROD. § 159 sq-] NOTES. 263 § 157. On the phrase μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, John 19 : 31, see Introd. Note, p. 253. Luke 23 : 54, καὶ σάββατον ἐπέφωσκε, lit. and the Sabbath was dawning, ἡ. e., drew on; the word ἐπέφωσκε, which properly belongs to the natural day, be- ing here figuratively and poetically applied to the civil day, which among the Jews began at sunset. ‘This interpretation is here the necessary one; see the ὀψίας γενομένης of Matthew and Mark, and the ἡμέρα ἣν παρασκευή of Luke himself. It was according to law and custom among the Jews that the bodies of per- sons publicly executed should be taken down and buried before sunset; see Deut. 21 : 22, 23. So Josephus, B. J., iv. 5, ὃ 2: Τοσαύτην Ιουδαίων περὶ τὰς ταφὰς πρόνοιαν ποιουμένων, ὥστε καὶ τοὺς ἐκ καταδίκης ἀνεσταυρουμένους πρὸ δύν- τος ἡλίου καθελεῖν τε καὶ θάπτειν, “so great care did the Jews take respecting sepulture, that even the bodies of those condemned to be crucified they took down and buried before sunset.” [The R. V. properly connects the latter part of Luke 23 : 56 with the next chapter, as the use of μέν and δέ requires. This leaves it uncertain, so far as Luke's statement is concerned, when the spices were “ prepared;” see Note on § 159.] PAGE TX. OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION, HIS SUBSEQUENT APPEARANCES, AND HIS ASCENSION. §§ 159-173. IntTRopuctToRY NOTE. A FULL discussion upon this part of the Gospel History, embracing a re- view of the main difficulties in the way of harmonizing the accounts of the four Evangelists, was published by the author of these Notes, in the Biblio- theca Sacra for February, 1845, p. 162 sq. To this the student is referred for a more complete examination of the subject. [For compact summaries of a number of the various theories for harmonizing the accounts, see Andrews, Life of Our Lord, pp. 587-594. ] It is no doubt true that more of these apparent difficulties are found in this short portion of the Gospels than in almost all the rest. This has its cause in the circumstance that each writer here follows an eclectic method, and re- cords only what appertained to his own particular purpose or experience. Thus many of the minor and connecting facts have not been preserved; and the data are therefore wanting to make out a full and complete harmony of all the accounts, without an occasional resort to something of hypothesis. Had we all the facts, we may well rest assured that this part of the sacred history would at once prove to be as exact, as consistent, and as complete, as any and 264 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Parr IX. every other portion of the Word of God, [The divergences in the narratives of the resurrection seem fatal to all theories respecting the origin of the Gos- pels which imply interdependence. | The general results of the investigations upon which we are now entering may be presented in the following summary view of the events and cireum- stances connected with our Lord’s resurrection and ascension, in the order of their occurrence. The resurrection took place at or before early dawn on the first day of the week; when there was an earthquake, and an angel descended and rolled away the stone from the sepulchre and sat upon it, so that the keepers be- came as dead men from terror. At early dawn, the same morning, the women who had attended on Jesus, namely, Mary Magdalene, Mary the mother of James, Joanna, Salome, and others, went out with spices to the sepulchre in order further to embalm the Lord’s body. They inquire among themselves who should remove for them the stone which closed the sepulchre. On their arrival they find the stone already taken away. The Lord had risen. The women, knowing nothing of all that had taken place, were amazed; they en- ter the tomb and find not the body of the Lord, and are greatly perplexed. At this time Mary Magdalene, impressed with the idea that the body had been stolen away, leaves the sepulchre and the other women and runs to the city to tell Peter and John. The other women remain still in the tomb; and immediately two angels appear, who announce unto them that Jesus is risen from the dead, and give them a charge in his name for the Apostles. They go out quickly from the sepulchre and proceed in haste to the city to make this known to the disci- ples. On the way Jesus meets them, permits them to embrace his feet, and renews the same charge to the Apostles. ‘The women relate these things to the disciples; but their words seem to them as idle tales, and they believe them not. Meantime Peter and John had run to the sepulchre, and entering in had found it empty. But the orderly arrangement of the grave-clothes and of the napkin convinced John that the body had not been removed either by vio- lence or by friends; and the germ of a belief sprung up in his mind that the Lord had risen. The two returned to the city. Mary Magdalene, who had again followed them to the sepulchre, remained standing and weeping before it; and looking in she saw two angels sitting. Turning around she sees Je- sus, who gives to her also a solemn charge for his disciples. [The main point of difficulty is respecting the order of appearances to the women, assuming that there were two; or in identifying them on the theory that there was but one (as Andrews and others hold). The latter view takes the account of Matthew as a general statement, but the details in that narra- tive are quite exact. Dr. Robinson places the appearance to Mary Magda- lene second, regarding Mark’s statement (Mark 16: 9) as relative (see Note on § 104). The view accepted by the editor is substantially that of Lange, and has been thus stated in the Jnternational Revision Commentary, Mark, p. 234: “Three women, Mary Magdalene, Mary the mother of James, and Sa- Introp. § 159 sq.] NOTES.—ORDER OF EVENTS. 265 lome, two of whom had watched by the sepulchre Friday evening (Matt. 27 : 61; Mark 15 : 47), start for the sepulchre early on Sunday morning (Mark 16:1, comp. Matt. 28 : 1), followed by others bearing spices (Luke 24 : 1). These three, finding the stone rolled away, are variously affected: Mary Magdalene starting back to meet the male disciples who are also coming (John 20: 2); the other two remaining, approach nearer, and see one angel sitting upon the stone (Mark 16: 2-7). ‘They go back to meet the other women coming with the spices. While all are absent, Peter and John come and find the tomb empty (John 20 : 38-10). Mary Magdalene returns, sees two angels in the grave (John 20:12), and turning round sees Jesus, and takes the tidings to the disciples (John 20: 14-18). The other two, sur- prised by the message of the angel, meet the other women bringing spices ; all visit the tomb, and see the two angels standing (Luke 24 : 4-7), one of whom was sitting on the right side as they entered (Mark 16:5). As they go back they meet the Lord (Matt. 28: 9).” This accepts the statements of all the Evangelists as strictly accurate, and does no violence to the laws of interpretation. ‘The account of Luke seems to recognize two parties of women (see on § 160), and the various visits thus assumed explain most satis- factorily the various statements respecting the angelic appearances. Since this is but one among many theories, the arrangement of the text in the Harmony has not been altered, nor has any material abridgment been made in the Notes of Dr. Robinson. Supplementary remarks have, however, been inserted, in accordance with the view given above. ] The further sequence of events, consisting chiefly of our Lord’s appear- ances, presents comparatively few difficulties. The various manifestations which the Saviour made of himself to his disciples and others, as recorded by the Evangelists and Paul, may accordingly be arranged and enumerated as follows :— 1. To the women returning from the sepulchre. Reported only by Mat- thew. See § 162. 2. To Mary Magdalene, at the sepulchre. By John and Mark. ὃ 164. [The order of these two appearances is transposed by many. | 3. To Peter, perhaps early in the afternoon. By Luke and Paul. § 166. 4, To the two disciples going to Emmaus, towards evening. By Luke and Mark. § 166. ὅ. To the Apostles (except Thomas) assembled at evening. By Mark, Luke, John, and Paul. § 167. N. B. These five appearances all took place at or near Jerusa- lem, upon the first day of the week, the same day on which the Lord arose. 6. To the Apostles, Thomas being present, eight Εν afterwards at Jeru- salem. Only by John. § 168. 7. To seven of the Apostles on the shore of the Lake of Tiberias. Only by John. § 169. 8. To the eleven Apostles and to five hundred other brethren, on a moun- tain in Galilee. By Matthew and Paul. § 170. 266 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Part IX, 9. To James, probably at Jerusalem. Only by Paul. § 171. 10. To the eleven at Jerusalem, immediately before the ascension. By Luke in Acts, and by Paul. § 171. Then follows the ascension. § 172. [Some refer 1 Cor. 15:6 and 7 (last clause) to two appearances distinct from (8) and (10); but there is no evidence to sustain this view. | § 159. The women had rested on the seventh day, according to Luke 23: 56; and the Sabbath being past (διαγενόμενον) Mark relates (v. 1) that they bought spices to anoint the body. This purchase would seem to have been made in the evening after the Sabbath; since Mark proceeds in v. 2 to nar- rate what they did early the next morning. In that case Luke (/. 6.) speaks of the spices by way of anticipation. — Or, if with some, we follow Luke and regard the spices as having been purchased before the Sabbath ; then the 7ye- ρασαν of Mark 16:1 is to be rendered in the pluperfect, as in the English version; see Note on § 145. This, however, is less in accordance with the διαγενομένου τοῦ σαββάτου of Mark. [The R. V. properly renders Mark 16: 1: “bought.” The aorist here cannot be taken as a pluperfect. On the other hand, Luke’s statement is not directly connected with the resting on the Sab- bath; see R. V., and Note on ὃ 157. Hence the purchase was more probably made on Saturday evening. | The angel had descended and the earthquake had taken place before the arrival of the women. Our Lord, therefore, had arisen from the tomb at or before early dawn. See the next Note. — Verses 2-4 of Matthew are here transposed into their natural order. As they stand in Matthew, the aorists ἐγένετο and ἀπεκύλισε must be rendered as the pluperfect: “had been” and “had rolled away”; see Note on ὃ 145. [Here again the aorists have their usual force. But it does not follow that the events recorded in these verses succeeded the arrival of the women. Matthew frequently introduces occur- rences out of their proper order by καὶ ido’, and γάρ serves to throw the events further into the past. ] The body of our Lord was laid in the sepulchre before sunset on Friday ; and he rose early on the morning of Sunday. He therefore rose on the third day ; having lain in the tomb during one whole day and a part of two others ; in all not far from thirty-six hours. On the expressions: the third day and after three days, see Note on § 49. § 160. The point of time when the women visited the sepulchre is very definitely marked by all the Evangelists, namely, Matthew, τῇ ἐπιφωσκούσῃ, 80.,) ἡμέρᾳ; Mark, λίαν πρωΐ; Luke, ὄρθρου βαθέως ; John, πρωὶ σκοτίας ἔτι οὔσης. These expressions all go to fix the time at what we call early dawn, or early twilight ; after the break of day, but while the light is yet struggling with darkness. But Mark, in ν. 2, has added the phrase ἀνατείλαντος τοῦ ἡλίου, which, ac- cording to every law of the aorist, must be rendered: the sun being risen ; or, as the English version has it, at the rising of the sun. [The R. V. is still more exact: ‘‘when the sun was risen.” ] ‘These words seem, at first, to be directly at variance with the language of the other three Evangelists, and with 88. 159, 160.] NOTES. — SUN-RISING, ETC. 267 the λίαν πρωΐ of Mark himself. Yet, as Mark by the expression λίαν πρωΐ has definitely fixed the time in accordance with all the other Evangelists, we cannot suppose that by the subsequent phrase ἀνατείλαντος τοῦ ἡλίου he meant to con- tradict himself and them. He must therefore have employed this latter ex- pression in a broader and less definite sense, not inconsistent with λίαν πρωΐ. As the sun is the source of light and day, and his earliest rays produce the contrast between night and dawn, so the term swn-rising might easily come in popular usage, by a metonymy of cause for effect, to be put for all that ear- lier interval when his rays still struggling with darkness do yet usher in the day. Accordingly, we find such a popular usage existing among the Hebrews and in the Old Testament. Thus, in Judges 9:33, Zebul, after directing Abimelech to lie in wait with his people in the field during the night, goes on to say: “ And it shall be, in the morning, as soon as the sun is up (Heb. ww m2), thou shalt rise early and set upon the city;” Sept., καὶ ἔσται τοπρωὶ ἅμα τῷ ἀνατεῖλαι τὸν ἥλιον kTA. Here we have the very same use of the aorist, and the very same juxtaposition of πρωΐ and ἅμα τῷ ἀνατεῖλαι τὸν ἥλιον, and yet we cannot for a moment suppose that Abimelech was to wait till the sun actually appeared above the horizon, before he made his onset. So the Psalmist, Ps. 104 : 22, speaking of the young lions that by night roar after their prey, proceeds thus: “The sun ariseth, they gather themselves together, and lay them down in their dens;” Sept., ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος κτλ., still in the aorist. But beasts of prey do not wait for the actual appearance of the sun above the horizon ere they shrink away to their lairs; the break of day, the dawning light, is the signal for their retreat. See also Sept., 2 K. 3: 22; 2 Sam. 23:4. In all these passages the language is entirely parallel to that of Mark 16: 2; and they fully illustrate and confirm the principle, that the sun-rising is here used by Mark in a popular sense, as equivalent to the rising of the day, or early dawn. There was probably something in respect to Mary Magdalene which gave her a peculiar prominence in these transactions. This may be inferred from the fact that John mentions Mary Magdalene, and her alone; while the other Evangelists likewise name her first, as if holding the most conspicuous place. [ Matthew and Mark tell of the two Marys watching at the tomb; while Luke speaks of a larger number of women (Luke 23: 55). In his further account he refers to the same party, while Matthew names the two Marys, Mark add- ing Salome to the number. The transcribers, supposing that Luke meant these persons, added to Luke 24:1, the phrase: “and certain others with them.” It was the larger body of women that brought the spices. The other Evangelists do not affirm this of the two Marys and Salome. In y. 10 Luke seems to distinguish two parties of women. All these divergences point to a succession of visits, which might well be expected in the excited condition expressly affirmed of the women. | Mary Magdalene, amazed at ποὺ finding the body of Jesus, and supposing it to have been stolen, leaves the other women, probably in the sepulchre, and returns to the city to tell Peter and John. To them she uses the phrase 268 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Part IX. οἴδαμεν, V. 2, meaning herself and the other women; but afterwards, when she speaks to the angels, it is οἶδα, v. 13. § 161. Luke speaks of two angels; Matthew and Mark of only one; see the Note on ὃ 57. — Mark says he was sitting; Luke speaks of them appar- ently as standing, ἐπέστησαν, v. 4. But ἐφίστημι, in its appropriate and ac- knowledged usage, is to appear suddenly, to be suddenly present, without refer- ence to its etymology; comp. Luke 2:9; Acts 12:7. So Passow, plételich — erscheinen. [Of this usage there can be no question, but this does not account for the other differences. ] In Matthew, the angel addresses the women apparently while still sitting on the stone outside of the sepulchre; in Mark and Luke, on the contrary, the conversation takes place in the sepulchre. But although Matthew does not speak of the women as entering the tomb, yet in v. 8 he describes them as coming out of it (ἐξελθοῦσαι) ; so that, of course, his account too implies, that the interview took place within the tomb, as narrated by Mark and Luke. [The correct reading in Matt. 28 : 8, according to the best authorities, is ἀπελθοῦσαι (so critical editors and R. V.) ; the common reading is conformed to Mark. This change of text destroys the force of Dr. Robinson’s sugges- tion, and favors the view that Matthew refers to a different occasion. ] In recording the charge sent by the angels to the Apostles, Matthew and Mark dwell more upon Galilee; and Luke more upon the Lord’s previous announcement of his resurrection. [The two former, according to another view, give the charge to Mary, the mother of James, and Salome; the latter, that to the main body of the women. ] § 162. It is evident that Mary Magdalene was not with the other women, when Jesus thus met them on their return. Her language to Peter and John forbids the supposition that she had already seen the Lord; see John 20: 2. See, too, Bibliotheca Sacra, February, 1845, p. 171. [All must agree that Mary Magdalene was separated from the other women; but it does not follow that the appearance to them occurred first. According to the view stated in the additional Introductory Note, the latter part of this section (Matt. 28:9, 10; Luke 24 : 9-11) should be placed after § 164; the earlier part remaining in its present position. The fact that Luke does not refer to the appearance to the women, al- though he tells of their return to the city, may be accounted for by supposing that his information was derived from one of the two disciples who went to Emmaus (§ 166). Evidently they had left Jerusalem before the report of any appearance reached them. Probably the women returned by different ways and met the other disciples at different times. ] § 163. Mary Magdalene had gone to Peter and John only; who would seem to have lodged by themselves in a different part of the city. The other women went, apparently, to the rest of the disciples. When, therefore, it is here said of John, on his entering the sepulchre (v. 8), that “he saw and be- lieved,” this is not at variance with v. 9, nor yet with Luke 24: 11. What was it that John thus believed? Not the mere report of Mary Magdalene, that the body had been taken away ; for so much he must have known and §§ 161-164.] NOTES.— APPEARANCES OF OUR LORD. 269 believed, when he stooped down and looked into the sepulchre. His belief must have been of something more and greater. The grave-clothes lying orderly in their place, and the napkin folded together by itself, made it evi- dent that the tomb had not been rifled nor the body stolen by violent hands; for these garments and the spices would have been of more value to thieves than merely a naked corpse; at least, thieves would not have taken the pains thus to fold the garments together. The same circumstances showed also that the body had not been removed by friends; for they would not thus have left the grave-clothes behind. All these considerations excited in the mind of John the germ of a belief that Jesus was risen from the dead. He believed (ἐπίστευσε) because he saw; “for (yap) as yet they knew not the Scripture,” γ. 9. He now began to recall and understand our Lord’s repeated declara- tion, that he was to rise again on the third day; a declaration on which the Jews had already acted in setting a watch. See Matt. 16 : 21; 17: 23; Luke 9: 22; 24:6, 7, etc.; Matt. 27 : 63 sq. In this way the apparent want of connection (sometimes urged) between verses 8 and 9, disappears ; and the word ἐπίστευσε is left in the signification of a religious belief usual to it in John’s Gospel. See John 3: 15, 16 sq.; 10: 26; 19: 35 al. sep. [Tischendorf omits Luke 24:12 from his text; but the evidence in favor of the genuineness of the verse is very strong, and outweighs the suspicion of an insertion from the account of John. If the verse is omitted, the visit of Peter and John can be more readily placed before the return to the city of the large party of women (Luke 24: 9-11, and Matt. 28 : 9, 10) ; a position which we hold to be, on other grounds, more probable than that assigned to it by Dr. Robinson. | § 164. Mary Magdalene now manifestly sees the angels for the first time ; and this circumstance also goes to show that she had previously left the other women at the sepulchre before the angels appeared to them. A main difficulty occurs here in fixing the order of time, between our Lord’s appearance to Mary Magdalene and that to the other women in § 162. This arises from the use of the word πρῶτον in Mark 16: 9. which seems to imply that this appearance to Mary Magdalene was the first of all: ἐφάνη πρῶτον Μαρίᾳ τῇ Μαγδαληνῇ. Yet the whole course of events and circum- stances shows conclusively that Jesus had previously appeared to the other women. Weare therefore compelled, and that in accordance with good and ordinary usage, to regard πρῶτον as put here not absolutely, but relatively. That is to say, Mark narrates three and only three appearances of our Lord; of these three that to Mary Magdalene takes place first, πρῶτον, and that to the assembled disciples the same evening occurs last, ὕστερον, γ. 14. Now in any series or succession of events, where πρῶτον and ὕστερον are employed, what- ever may be the number of intervening terms, πρῶτον marks the first of the series, and ὕστερον the last of the same series, and no other. So here in Mark, ὕστερον is put with the third appearance narrated; but had Mark men- tioned four, then ὕστερον could not have stood with the third, but must have been used with the fourth or last; and so in every case. Hence as ὕστερον is here put relatively, and therefore does not exclude the subsequent appear- 270 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Part IX. ances of our Lord to Thomas and in Galilee, so too πρῶτον here stands rela- tively, and does not exclude the previous appearance to the other women. A similar example occurs in 1 Cor. 15 : 5-8, where Paul says of our Lord after his resurrection: ὅτι ὥφθη Κηφᾷ, εἶτα τοῖς δώδεκα, ἔπειτα... ἔπειτα, . ἔσχατον δὲ πάντων . . - ὦφθη κἀμοί. Now had Paul here written, as he might well have done: ὥφθη πρῶτον Κηφᾷ, εἶτα κτλ., assuredly no one would have ever understood him as intending to affirm, that the appearance to Peter was the first of all absolutely, and earlier than those to Mary Magda- lene and the other women. — In like manner, when John (21 : 14) declares that Jesus showed himself the third time (τρίτον) to his disciples at the lake of Galilee after his resurrection, this is said relatively to the two preceding appearances to the assembled Apostles ($$ 167, 168), and does in no way ex- clude the four still earlier appearances, namely, to Peter, to the two at Em- maus, to Mary Magdalene, and to the other women. One of these, that to Mary Magdalene, John himself relates in full. In this way the whole difficulty in the case before us vanishes; and the com- plex and cumbrous machinery of earlier commentators becomes superfluous. [The arguments of Dr. Robinson are not conclusive. Especially irrelevant is the reference to John 21: 14, where the appearance is defined as “ to the disciples,” in distinction from that to Mary Magdalene. Moreover, the pas- sage in Mark is of doubtful genuineness. Even if written by the Evangelist, it does not seem to have originally formed part of the Gospel. When in such a supplementary passage πρῶτον is used, it is very difficult to believe that it is used relatively. If the passage is, as many hold, not genuine, yet of very early origin, it is still more difficult to accept such a sense of πρῶτον. If it re- garded as neither genuine nor even authentic, then Dr. Robinson’s argument is unnecessary ; for the statement is of no authority except as indicating an ancient tradition. We prefer to regard the passage as, at all events, authentic, 7. e., true in its statements, and then to take πρῶτον in its natural sense. ‘This would necessitate our placing Matt. 28 : 9, 10, and those passages necessarily joined with it, immediately after this section; see Note on § 162 and the In- troductory Note, p. 264. Andrews identifies the appearance mentioned in Matt. 28 : 9,10, with that to Mary Magdalene, taking the statement in Mat- thew as a general one. ‘This would place that passage parallel with this sec- tion. Certainly Matthew only mentions the two Marys, and might refer to the appearance given in detail by John. ] § 166. This appearance of our Lord to Peter is mentioned only by Paul and by Luke, v. 84. It had not taken place when the two disciples left Jeru- salem for Emmaus; or at least they had not heard of it. It had occurred when they returned; and that long enough before to have been fully reported to all the disciples and believed by them. It may, perhaps, have happened about the time the two disciples set off, or shortly afterwards. § 167. Paul speaks of the Apostles by their usual appellation, as the twelve, 1 Cor. 15:5; Matthew, Mark, and Luke here speak of them as the eleven ; Matt. 28:16; Mark 16:14; Luke 24:33. Yet on this particular occasion only ¢ex were actually present; see John 20 : 24. §§ 164-170.] NOTES.— APPEARANCES OF OUR LORD. 271 When the disciples beheld their risen Lord, they thought they saw a spirit. Jesus reassures them, and presents to them indubitable evidence that the same body of flesh and bones which had been crucified and laid in the sepulchre was now risen and alive before them. On the general subject of the nature of our Lord’s resurrection-body, see a full discussion by the author of these Notes in the Bibliotheca Sacra for May, 1845, p. 292 sq. Then follows our Lord’s charge and commission to the eleven Apostles, de- livered to them here in private by themselves, and distinct from the public aud more general commission recorded in Matt. 28:19, 20. [But see be- low.] As a symbol of this commission to them in particular, and of the power which they should shortly receive through the Spirit imparted from on high, “he breathed on them, and saith unto them, ‘ Receive ye the Holy Ghost ;’” John 20:22. There was in this emblem a recognition and reit- eration of the gracious promise of the Spirit before made, which was to be abundantly fulfilled on the day of Pentecost. See John 14:26; 16:7 sq.; Acts 2: 1 sq. [ Mark 16 : 14-18 may, with equal propriety, be placed in § 170, or even later, in § 172, just before the Ascension. The most probable view is that it contains a summary of the various discourses. The discourse in Luke 24: 44-49 occasions some difficulty. V. 49 indicates that they were not to leave the city, and ν. 50 points directly back to v. 49. On the other hand v. 44 is most naturally connected with the appearance in Jerusalem on the evening of the Resurrection day. But since Luke, in Acts 1 : 3, makes a specific state- ment about the interval of “forty days,” we cannot understand him as imply- ing here that the ascension took place immediately after that first appearance to the eleven. Some assume that vv. 44—49 are a summary of all the instruc- tion given during the interval; others divide the discourse at the close of v. 48. Others again, because vv. 46-48 resemble Acts 1:8, place the entire discourse at the later point. | § 169. This appearance of our Lord to the seven disciples at the Lake of Galilee is shown to have preceded that upon the mountain, by John 21 : 14. It was his third appearance to the Apostles; see §$ 167, 168. They were now waiting the appointed time to meet Jesus upon a certain mountair ; Matt. 28 : 16. δ 170. The set time had now come; and the eleven disciples went away into the mountain, “ where Jesus had appointed them.” It would seem proba- ble that this time and place had been appointed by our Lord for a solemn and more public interview, not only with the eleven whom he had already met more than once, but with all his disciples in Galilee; and that therefore it was on this same occasion, when, according to Paul, “he appeared to above five hundred brethren at once.” That the interview in Matthew was not con- fined to the eleven alone seems evident from the fact that ‘some doubted ;” for this could hardly be supposed true of any of the eleven, after what had already happened to them in Jerusalem and Galilee, and after having been appointed to meet their risen Lord at this very time and place. Nor can we see any good reason why Jesus should summon the eleven, merely on their 272 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Part IX. own account, to meet him on a distant mountain in Galilee, when he had al- ready twice met them, and might just as well again meet them, in Jerusalem. The appearance to the five hundred must at any rate be referred to Galilee; for even after our Lord’s ascension, the number of the names in Jerusalem were together only about a hundred and twenty; Acts 1:15. And further, Paul, in enumerating the appearances of Jesus, in 1 Cor. 15 : 5-8, specifies only those to Apostles, with this single exception ; which therefore seems of itself to imply that the eleven also were here included. I therefore, with many leading commentators, do not hesitate to regard the interviews thus de- scribed by Matthew and Paul, as identical. It was a great and solemn occa- sion. Our Lord had directed that the eleven and all his disciples in Galilee should thus be convened upon the mountain. It was the closing scene of his ministry in Galilee. Here his life had been spent. Here most of his mighty works had been done and his discourses held. Here his followers were as yet most numerous. He therefore here takes leave on earth of those among whom he had lived and labored longest; and repeats to all his disciples in public the solemn charge, which he had already given in private to the Apos- tles: [Go ye therefore and make disciples of all the nations;]—and lo, I am with you alway, even unto the end of the world.” It was doubtless the Lord’s last interview with his disciples in that region; his last great act in Galilee. § 171. Luke relates, in Acts 1 : 3, that Jesus showed himself alive to the Apostles [‘‘ after his passion, by many proofs, appearing unto them by the space of forty days, and speaking the things concerning the kingdom of God.” ] This would seem to imply interviews and communications as to which we have little more than this very general notice. One of these may have been the appearance to James, mentioned by Paul only (1 Cor. 15 : 7), and subse- quent to that to the five hundred brethren. It may be referred with most probability to Jerusalem, after the return of the Apostles from Galilee. Afterwards, our Lord again, according to Paul, was seen of “ all the Apos- 165. This was apparently an appointed meeting; the same which Luke speaks of in Jerusalem, immediately before the ascension. It was, of course, the Lord’s last interview with his Apostles. [§ 172. The correct reading in Luke 24 : 50, is ἕως 7p 6s Βηθανίαν, which the R. V. paraphrases: “ until they were over against Bethany.” The evidence for πρός is SBC Ὁ Z, 1, 33, which is deemed decisive by recent critical edi- tors. The transcribers substituted εἰς, which is more usual. Thus textual criti- cism has relieved us of an apparent contradiction between Luke’s statemeut here and in Acts 1:12. The place of the Ascension was on the Mount of Olives (Acts 1:12), over against Bethany (Luke 24:50). Dr. Robinson, in his Notes, argues at some length to prove that Luke “uses the terms Beth- any and Mount of Olives interchangeably, and almost as synonymous.” The received reading seemed to demand this ; but the correct text renders unnec- essary all such attempts at reconciliation. The traditional site of the ascen- sion is, however, too far from Bethany to meet the requirements of Luke’s statement. 88. 171-173.] NOTES.—THE ASCENSION. 273 Needless difficulties have been raised respecting the Gospel accounts of our Lord’s stay on earth after the Resurection. It has even been ssserted that Luke in his Gospel places the Ascension immediately after the Resurrection. But this writer, more frequently than any of the other Evangelists, sums up events, and then proceeds to give further details. His words in Acts assume the correctness of the “former treatise.” The closing section of Mark is ob- viously a summary, and cannot be proven to imply that there was no consid- erable interval between the Resurrection and the Ascension. Matthew does not mention the latter ; and John’s account implies a period of some length. ] [8 173. John 20 : 80, 81 may properly be placed here, although their posi- tion in the Gospel does not constitute a deviation from the chronological order. ‘Tischendorf rejects 21 : 25, and hence it is, with great reluctance, omitted from the Greek text of the Harmony. Other recent critical editors retain it (see critical notes). In fact, it is disputed whether in S it was added by the first corrector (so Tischendorf) or written by the original scribe. Over against this possible omission and a hint or two in some scholia, we may ad- duce the testimony of all extant manuscripts and versions, together with no- tices in many Fathers, among them Origen, the most critical writer of early Christian times. ] 18 TWO IMPORTANT BOOKS. ——_—_+-—_—_ Smith’s Bible Dictionary. Comprising its Antiquities, Biography, Geography, and Nat- ural History. By WitiiaAm Situ. Edited by Professors Horatio BaLtcH HackeETT and Ezra Assot, LL.D. In four volumes, 8vo, 3667 pages, with 596 illustrations. Cloth, beveled edges, strongly bound, $20.00; full sheep, $25.00 ; half morocco, $30.00 ; half calf, extra, $30.00; half russia, $35.00 ; full morocco, gilt, $40.00 ; tree calf, $45.00. There are several American editions of Smith's Dictionary of the Bible, but this edition comprises not only the contents of the original English edition, unabridged, but very considerable and important additions by the editors, Professors Hackett and Abbot, and twenty-six other eminent American scholars. This edition has 500 more pages than the English and 100 more illustrations ; more than a thousand errors of reference in the English edition are corrected in this ; and an Index of Scripture Passages Illustrated is added. No similar work in our own or in any other language is for a moment to be compared with it.— Quarterly Review (London). General History of the Christian Religion and Church. Translated from the German of J. A. W. Neander by Rev. JoserH Torrey, Professor in the University of Vermont. With an Index volume. The set, with Index, 6 vols., $20.00. Index volume separate, $3.00. “Neander’s Church History” is one of the most profound, carefully considered, deeply philosophized, candid, truly liberal, and independent historical works that have ever been written. In all these respects it stands head and shoulders above almost any other church history in ex- istence. . . . Professor Torrey has executed admirably his. part of the task ; and I can say of his translation (what I can say about no other that I have ever seen), I now use the translation constantly in preference to the original. — Professor CALVIN E. STOWE, Andover, Mass. The present index includes not only the gencral contents of the vol- umes, but an analytical list of the citations from Christian and pagan authors found in the notes, as well as the citations from Scripture scat- tered through the work. . . . It is a noble work, and ought to receive the patronage it merits. — Christian Advocate (New York). ᾿ VALUABLE RELIGIOUS BOOKS Selected from the Publications of HOUGHTON, MIFFLIN AND COMPANY. The Andover Review. A new Religious and Theological Review, under the editorial control of EcBertT C. Smytu, WILLIAM J. TUCKER, J. W. CHURCHILL, GEORGE Harris, EpwarpD Y. HIncks, Profes- sors in Andover Theological Seminary, Andover, Mass., and with the codperation and active support of all their col- leagues in the Faculty, — Professors Joun P. GULLIVER, Joun P. Taytor, Geo. F. Moore, and Frank E. Woop- RUFF. The first number of the REVIEW appeared in Janu- ary, 1884. Published monthly. Terms, $3.00a year; single copies, 30 cents. THE ANDOVER REVIEW, theologically, advocates the prin- ciples and represents the method and spirit of progressive Orthodoxy. James Freeman Clarke. TEN Great Reticions. An Essay in Comparative Theology. With an Index. 8vo, $3.00; half calf, $5.00. Ten Great Reticions. Part II. A Comparison of all Re- ligions. 8vo, $3.00 ; half calf, $5.00. ComMon-SENSE IN ReEticion. A Series of Essays. 12mo, $2.00. Joseph Cook. BioLtocy. With Preludes on Current Events. Illustrated. TRANSCENDENTALISM. With Preludes on Current Events, Ortuopoxy. With Preludes on Current Events. ConsciENCE. With Preludes on Current Events. HEREDITY. With Preludes on Current Events. MarrIAGE. With Preludes on Current Events. OccipENT. With Preludes on Current Events. (A new vol- ume.) OrrtENT. With Preludes on Current Events. (A new volume.) (lx Press). Each volume 12mo, $1.50. Rev. M. Creighton. History OF THE PAPACY DURING THE PERIOD OF THE REFOR- MATION. Vol. I. The Great Schism — The Council of Con- stance, 1378-1418. Vol. II. The Council of Basel— The Papal Restoration, 1418-1464. 2 vols. 8vo, $10.00. Professor J. L. Diman. THE THEISTIC ARGUMENT AS AFFECTED BY RECENT THEORIES. Edited by Professor GEoRGE P. FISHER. Crown 8vo, $2.00. ORATIONS AND ESSAYS, WITH SELECTED PARISH SERMONS. A Memorial Volume, with a portrait. Cr. 8vo, gilt top, $2.50. Washington Gladden. THE Lorp’s PrRAyER. Seven Essays on the Meaning and Spirit of this universal Prayer. 16mo, gilt top, $1.00. Thomas Hughes. THe MANLINEsSS OF CHRIST. 16mo, gilt top, $1.00; paper covers, 25 cents. Samuel Johnson. ORIENTAL RELIGIONS, AND THEIR RELATION TO UNIVERSAL RELIGION. Inp1A. 8vo, 802 pages, $5.00; half calf, $8.00. Cuina. 8vo, 1000 pages, $5.00; half calf, $8.00. Persia. 8vo, 827 pages, $5.00; half calf, $8.00. Lectures, Essays, AND SERMONS. With a portrait and Mem- oir by Rev. SAMUEL LONGFELLOW. Crown 8vo, gilt top, $1.75. Henry Cy Lea. SACERDOTAL CELIBACY IN THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH. Second Edition, considerably enlarged. 8vo, $4.50. Rey.) Miozley. REMINISCENCES, chiefly of Oriel College and the Oxford Move- ment. 2 vols. 16mo, $3.00; half calf, $6.00. Elisha Mulford, LL. D. THE REPUBLIC OF GoD. 8vo, $2.00. We do not remember that this country has lately produced a speculative work of more originality and force. . . . The book is a noble one. — Zhe Critic (New York). Rev. T. T. Munger. On THE THRESHOLD. Familiar Lectures to Young People on Purpose, Friends, and Companions, Manners, Thrift, Self-Reliance and Courage, Health, Reading and Intellec- tual Life, Amusements, and Faith. 16mo, gilt top, $1.00. Tue FREEDOM oF Fairu. Sermons, prefaced by an Essay on the New Theology. 16mo, gilt top, $1.50. George Putnam, D. D. SERMONS BY GEORGE PutTNam, D. D., late Pastor of the First Religious Society in Roxbury, Massachusetts. With fine stecl portrait. 16mo, gilt top, $1.75. Edward Robinson, D. D., LL. D. HARMONY OF THE Four GospELs, in Greek. New Edition. 8vo, met, $2.00. THE 5ΑΜΕ, in English, 12mo, 75 cents. BIBLICAL RESEARCHES IN PALESTINE. 3 vols. 8vo, with maps, $10.00. Price of the maps alone, $1.00. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE Hoty Lanp. A Supplement to “ Biblical Researches in Palestine.” 8vo, $3.50. HEBREW AND ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE OLD TESTAMENT, including the Biblical Chaldee. From the Latin of WIL- LIAM GESENIUS, by EpwarRD Rosinson. ‘Twenty-second Edition. ὅνο, half russia, $6.00. Encuisn-HEesrew Lexicon : Being a complete Verbal Index to Genesius’ Hebrew Lexicon as translated by ROBINSON. By JosePpH Lewis Potter, A. M. 8vo, $2.00. Rev. Thomas Scott. Tue BisLe, WITH ExpLANATORY ΝΌΤΕΒ, PRACTICAL OBSER- VATIONS, AND Copious MARGINAL REFERENCES. By Rev. Tuomas Scott. 6 vols. royal 8vo, sheep, $15.00. ** For sale by all Booksellers. Sent by mail, post-paid, on receipt of price by the Publishers, HOUGHTON, MIFFLIN AND COMPANY, 4 PARK STREET, Boston; 11 East SEVENTEENTH STREET, NEW YORK. ina | 201246 7223 © 4 bas ΟΣ DATE DUE | Nit : ἐς, ES de tine yale a i ; Townes ἃ